Uae A3l Ccom

A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
REFERENCE: UAE A380 CCOM ISSUE DATE: 10-Apr-17

Intentionally left blank
PRELIMINARY PAGES
OVERALL TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
PLP Preliminary Pages

PLP-TP Title Page
PLP-SOH Summary of Highlights
PLP-TL Transmittal Letter
PLP-LESS List of Effective Sections
PLP-LECCB List of Effective Cabin Crew Bulletins
PLP-LAMDU List of Airline Modified Documentary Units
PLP-LETDU List of Effective Temporary Document Units
PLP-AAT Aircraft Allocation Table
PLP-LOM List of Modifications
00 Introduction
00-TOC Table of Contents
00-10 General Introduction
00-40 List of Abbreviations
00-50 Units conversion table
00-70 A380 CCOM on Ops Library Browser (OLB) FAP
001 Approbation - Airworthiness Related Procedures

01 Aircraft General
01-10 Aircraft Presentation
01-20 Aircraft Dimensions
01-30 Performance
01-40 Unpressurized Compartments
01-50 Flight Controls
01-60 Landing Gears
01-70 Cargo Compartments
01-80 Cabin Doors
02 Cockpit
02-10 Introduction
02-20 Onboard Information Terminal
UAE A380 PLP-TOC P 1/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380
02-30 Cockpit Seats

02-40 Cockpit Windows
02-50 Escape Rope
02-60 Secured Cockpit Door
02-70 Flight Crew Rest Compartment
02-90 Avionics Bay
02-100 Cockpit Oxygen
02-110 Cockpit Panels Related to Cabin Systems
02-120 Cockpit Emergency Equipment
03 Cabin Layout
03-10 Deck Configuration
03-20 First Class
03-30 Business Class
03-40 Economy Class
03-50 Crew Stations
03-60 Stairs
03-70 Trolley Lift(s)
03-80 Stowages
03-90 Galleys
03-100 Lavatories
03-110 Shower Rooms
03-120 Crew Rest Compartment
03-130 Other Cabin Areas/Additional Cabin Equipment
04 Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS)

04-10 CIDS Introduction
04-20 CIDS Components
04-30 Cabin Settings on the FAP
04-40 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP)

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380
05 Cabin Communication Systems

05-10 Communication Principles
05-20 PA System
05-30 Cabin Interphone
05-40 Service Interphone
05-50 Passenger Call System
06 Cabin Systems
06-10 Audio/Cabin Music
06-20 Pre-Recorded Announcements
06-30 Lights
06-40 Doors/Slides
06-50 Air Conditioning/Temperature Control
06-60 Water/Waste
06-70 Smoke Detection
06-80 Seat Settings
06-90 System Info
06-100 Cabin Status
06-110 Cabin Ready Signaling
06-120 Galley Cooling/Supplemental Cooling System
06-130 IFE Power
06-140 Floor Temperature Setting
06-150 Humidification/Cabin Heating/Dry Air Generation
06-160 Window Shades
06-180 Shower Control
06-200 Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL)
06-210 Cabin Connectivity System - Cabin Communication
06-220 Cabin Video Monitoring System (CVMS)
07 Cabin Oxygen System

07-10 Description

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380
07-20 Location
07-30 Operational Sequence
07-40 Containers
07-50 Oxygen Masks
07-60 Oxygen mask manual shut-off
07-70 Inadvertent oxygen mask deployement
08 In-Flight Entertainment (IFE)

08-10 In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) System Description
08-20 IFE Control Centers
08-30 Cabin Crew Functions
08-40 Passenger Functions
09 Doors and Slides

09-10 Passenger Doors
09-20 Slides and Sliderafts
09-30 Aircraft Configuration in Crash Situations
10 Evacuation (EVAC) and Alert (ECAS) Systems

10-10 Emergency Evacuation (EVAC) Signaling System
11 Emergency and Medical Equipment

11-10 Emergency Equipment
11-20 Protective Breathing Equipment
11-40 Medical Equipment
11-50 Portable Oxygen
12 Preflight Checks
12-10 Introduction

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380
12-20 Cabin Emergency Equipment

12-30 Galley Equipment
12-40 Cabin Systems
12-50 Cabin Equipment
13 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)

13-10 Introduction
13-20 Abbreviations
13-25 General Guidance
13-30 Phases Of Flight
13-40 Direct View Seats
13-50 Preflight Briefing
13-60 Passenger Door Operation
13-70 Cabin Crew Duties
13-80 Operational Recommendations for the Use of Stairs
13-90 Door Arming Procedure
13-100 Door Disarming Procedure
13-110 Cabin Ready Notification
13-120 Access To Cockpit
13-130 Cockpit Sliding Window Operation
13-140 Passenger Safety Briefing
13-150 Crew Rest Compartments Normal Operation
13-160 Refueling /Defueling with Passengers Onboard
13-170 Onboard Mobile Telephony System (OMTS)
13-180 Dangerous Goods
14 Abnormal / Emergency Procedures

14-10 Introduction
14-20 Smoke and Fire Procedures
14-30 Emergency Communications
14-40 Emergency Cabin Evacuation
14-50 Emergency Cockpit Evacuation

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380
14-60 Depressurization
14-70 Crew Rest Compartment Procedures
14-80 Turbulence Management and Procedures
14-90 Additional Abnormal / Emergency Procedures
14-100 Safety Operational Awareness
15 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP)

15-03 Recovery of Cabin Layout Equipment
15-04 Recovery of CIDS Functions
15-06 Recovery of Cabin Systems
15-08 Recovery of IFE Functions
16 Announcements
16-10 Boarding
16-20 Door Closure to Takeoff
16-30 In-Flight to "Top of Descent"
16-40 Approach
16-50 After Landing
16-60 Special Announcements
17 Security Sensitive Information

17-02 Cockpit
17-03 Cabin Layout
18 CCB Cabin Crew Bulletin

18-10 Introduction
18-CCB2 Main Deck Slide Arming Difficullties
18-CCB7 Operational Limitations of the Steam Ovens Installed in the UD Galleys.

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380
18-CCB11 TROLLEY OPERATION IN UPPER DECK AFT GALLEY STAIRS AREA

AND FORWARD OR AFT STAIRS AREAS
18-CCB12 Erroneous indication on the FAP DOORS/SLIDES Pages

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
SUMMARY OF HIGHLIGHTS
A380
Section Title Ref Reason

03-90-20 Galley Location H1 New information
03-90-40 General H2 New information
03-90-40 Description H3 New information
03-90-40 How to Operate the Door H4 New information
03-90-40 How to Operate the Microwave Oven H5 New information
03-90-40 How to Interrupt the Microwave Oven H6 New information
Operation
03-90-40 How to Enable/Disable the Buzzer Sound H7 New information
03-90-40 How to Enter and Save a Preset H8 New information
06-160-40 Description of Electromechanical Window H9 Deleted DU solution (00021057.0001001)
Shades
06-160-40 How to Operate the Window Blinds via H10 Deleted DU solution (00021059.0001001)
the Local Controls
06-160-50 How to Use the Mechanical Override to H11 Deleted DU solution (00021109.0001001)
Operate the Window Shades
06-210-10 General Information about the Cabin H12 New information
Connectivity System
06-210-20 Position of the Cabin Connectivity H13 Deleted DU solution (00024523.0001001)
Application on the FAP H14 Deleted DU solution (00024523.0002001)
06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application - H15 New information
SERVICE OVERVIEW Page H16 Deleted DU solution (00022117.0001001)
H17 Deleted DU solution (00022117.0002001)
06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application LOG IN H18 Deleted DU group (LG01942)
06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application - SYSTEM H19 Deleted DU invariant (00020471)
MONITORING Page
06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application - MOBILE H20 Deleted DU invariant (00024506)
TEL. CONNECTION Page
06-210-30 How to Turn ON/OFF the PAX Signs H21 Deleted DU invariant (00024517)
06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application LOG IN H22 Deleted DU solution (00020467.0003001)
06-210-30 NSS-CC Application LOGIN Page H23 Deleted DU solution (00020468.0001001)
06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application LOG IN H24 Deleted DU solution (00020468.0002001)
Page
06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application LOG IN - H25 Deleted DU solution (00020469.0002001)
SELECT USER GROUP Control Pad
06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application LOG IN - H26 Deleted DU solution (00020470.0002001)
Keyboard Page
06-210-30 NSS-CC Application SYSTEM H27 Deleted DU solution (00020471.0001001)
MONITORING Page
UAE A380 PLP-SOH P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application SYSTEM H28 Deleted DU solution (00020471.0002001)
MONITORING Page H29 Deleted DU solution (00020471.0004001)
06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application - MOBILE H30 Deleted DU solution (00024506.0001001)
TEL. CONNECTION Page
06-210-30 How to Turn ON/OFF the PAX Signs H31 Deleted DU solution (00024517.0001001)
06-210-30 NSS-CC Application WIRELESS (WLAN) H32 Deleted DU solution (00020472.0001001)
Page
06-210-30 How to Turn ON/OFF the INTERNET H33 New information
CONNECTIVITY Service
06-210-30 How to Turn ON the Wireless LAN H34 Text improvement for consistency
Function for the Entire Cabin reasons. No technical change.
06-210-30 How to Turn OFF the Wireless LAN H35 Minor text improvements for consistency
Function for the Entire Cabin reasons. No technical change.
06-210-30 How to Activate/Deactivate the QUIET H36 Minor text correction. No technical
MODE change.
H37 Deleted DU solution (00024516.0001001)
06-210-30 How to Turn ON/OFF the Mobile H38 Minor text corrections, no technical
Telephony Service change.
06-210-30 How to Enable/Disable the Mobile H39 Deleted DU solution (00024515.0001001)
Telephone Connection
06-210-40 How to Reset a Faulty Cabin Connectivity H40 New information
Service
06-210-40 How to Reset a Faulty Cabin Connectivity H41 Deleted DU solution (00020573.0001001)
Function H42 Deleted DU solution (00020573.0003001)
06-210-40 How to Reset an Individual Cabin H43 Deleted DU invariant (00022180)
Wireless LAN Unit (CWLU)
06-210-40 How to Reset More Than One Faulty H44 Deleted DU invariant (00020574)
Cabin Wireless LAN Unit (CWLU)
06-210-40 How to Reset an Individual Base H45 Deleted DU invariant (00024518)
Transceiver Station (BTS)
06-210-40 How to Reset More than One Base H46 Deleted DU invariant (00024520)
Transceiver Unit (BTS)
06-210-40 How to Reset an Individual Cabin H47 Deleted DU solution (00022180.0001001)
Wireless LAN Unit (CWLU) H48 Deleted DU solution (00022180.0002001)
06-210-40 How to Reset More Than One Faulty H49 Deleted DU solution (00020574.0001001)
Cabin Wireless LAN Unit (CWLU) H50 Deleted DU solution (00020574.0002001)
06-210-40 How to Reset an Individual Base H51 Deleted DU solution (00024518.0001001)
Transceiver Station (BTS)
06-210-40 How to Reset More than One Base H52 Deleted DU solution (00024520.0001001)
Transceiver Unit (BTS)

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

06-210-40 How to Reset all Cabin Connectivity H53 New information
Services
06-210-40 How To Make a Cabin Connectivity H54 First sentence removed. No technical
System Reset change.
07-20 Location H55 New information
09-10-50 FULLY OPEN Indicator is not ON H56 New information
Although the Door is in the Fully Open
Position
09-10-50 ECAM alert DOOR xxxx POS FAULT H57 New information
triggered in the cockpit
11-10-20 Emergency Equipment in the Cockpit H58 New information
11-10-20 Zone 1 H59 New information
11-10-20 Zone 2 H60 Update of the illustration, for
standardization purposes.
11-10-20 Zone 5 H61 Update of the illustration, for
standardization purposes.
11-10-30 Life Vest Storage in Business Class Seat H65 New information
11-40-20 Location of Medical Outlets H66 New information
12-20-10 Main Deck Emergency Equipment Cabin H67 New information
Overview
12-20-10 Upper Deck Emergency Equipment Cabin H68 New information
Overview
12-20-10 Crew Rest Areas Emergency Equipment H69 New information
Cabin Overview
12-20-30 Crew Rest Areas Emergency Equipment H70 New information
Preflight Checklists
12-30-70 REFRIGERATING UNIT/Wine Chiller H71 New information
Preflight Check
18-10 Introduction H72 The distribution part has been updated to
indicate that it is operator responsibility to
distribute the CCBs..

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
TRANSMITTAL LETTER
A380
Issue Date: 10-Apr-17
This is the CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL at issue date 10-Apr-17 for the A380 which replaces the
last issue dated 05-Jan-17
No transmittal letter comment
UAE A380 PLP-TL P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
TRANSMITTAL LETTER
A380
UAE A380 PLP-TL P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LIST OF EFFECTIVE SECTIONS
A380
Localization Section Title Rev. Date

00-10 General Introduction 08-Apr-15
00-40 List of Abbreviations 08-Apr-15
00-50 Units conversion table 03-Apr-08
00-70 A380 CCOM on Ops Library Browser (OLB) FAP 03-Oct-12
001 Approbation - Airworthiness Related Procedures 08-Apr-15
01-10 Aircraft Presentation 03-Apr-08
01-20 Aircraft Dimensions 05-Apr-11
01-30 Performance 03-Apr-08
01-40 Unpressurized Compartments 03-Apr-08
01-50 Flight Controls 05-Jul-13
01-60 Landing Gears 03-Apr-08
01-70 Cargo Compartments 01-Jul-08
01-80 Cabin Doors 05-Apr-11
02-10-10 General 03-Apr-08
02-10-20 Cockpit Component Overview 10-Apr-17
02-20-10 General 03-Apr-08
02-20-20 Location 03-Apr-08
02-30-10 General 03-Apr-08
02-30-20 Location and Description 10-Apr-17
02-40-10 General 03-Apr-08
02-40-30 Description and Operation 03-Apr-08
02-50 Escape Rope 03-Apr-08
02-60-10 General 10-Apr-17
02-60-30 Description and Operation 06-Oct-11
02-60-40 Controls and Indicators 10-Apr-17
02-70-10 General 05-Jan-17
02-70-20 Location 05-Jan-17
02-70-30 Description and Operation 05-Jan-17
02-70-40 Controls and Indicators 05-Jan-17
02-90 Avionics Bay 03-Apr-08
02-100-10 General 03-Apr-08
02-100-20 Fixed Oxygen System Description 03-Apr-08
02-100-30 Oxygen-Controls and Indicators 03-Apr-08
02-100-40 Cockpit Masks 08-Oct-14
02-100-50 Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) 03-Apr-08
02-110-10 General 10-Apr-17
UAE A380 PLP-LESS P 1/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

02-110-20 Location 10-Apr-17
02-110-30-21 Air Conditioning 04-Apr-12
02-110-30-23 Communications 05-Jul-13
02-110-30-24 Electrical Power 10-Apr-17
02-110-30-33 Lights 10-Apr-17
02-110-30-35 Oxygen 01-Jul-08
02-110-30-44 Cabin Systems 10-Apr-17
02-110-30-52 Doors 03-Apr-08
02-120 Cockpit Emergency Equipment 03-Apr-08
03-10-10 General 04-Oct-08
03-20-10 Location 16-Jul-10
03-20-30 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP) 10-Apr-17
03-40-20 Description and Operation 06-Oct-11
03-50-30 Description 10-Apr-17
03-60-10 General 05-Jul-11
03-60-40 Operation 10-Apr-17
03-70-10 General 10-Apr-17
03-70-50 Controls and Indicators 16-Jul-10
03-70-60 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP) 05-Jul-13
03-80-10 General 01-Jul-08
03-80-30-10 Overhead Bins 05-Jul-13
03-90-10 Galley Description 06-Oct-16
03-90-30-10 General 04-Jan-12
03-90-30-20 Trolley 04-Jan-12
03-90-30-30 Container/Standard Unit 04-Jan-12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

03-90-30-40 Latches 04-Jan-12
03-90-30-50 Water Tap 03-Apr-08
03-90-30-60 Water Shutoff Valve 08-Oct-14
03-90-30-70 Waste Water Draining 06-Oct-09
03-90-40 Galley Inserts 10-Apr-17
03-90-50-10 Coffee and Espresso Maker 02-Aug-11
03-90-50-20 Oven and Warmer 16-Jul-10
03-90-50-60 Remote Water Boiler 02-Oct-10
03-90-50-100 Recovery of the Sink Function 03-Apr-08
03-90-50-110 Deactivation of Galley Functions 08-Oct-14
03-100-10 General 04-Oct-08
03-100-20 Location 10-Apr-17
03-100-30 Description 05-Jul-13
03-100-40 Operation 08-Oct-14
03-100-50-10 Recovery of Washroom Functions 13-Jul-16
03-100-50-20 Deactivation of Lavatory Functions 08-Oct-14
03-100-50-40 Emergency Operation of the Lavatory Doors 04-Oct-08
03-110-10 General 10-Apr-17
03-110-20 Location 10-Apr-17
03-120-10 General 10-Apr-17
03-120-20 Location 05-Jan-17
03-120-30 Description/Operation 10-Apr-17
03-130-30-10 General 02-Aug-11
03-130-30-20 Location 02-Apr-14
03-130-30-30 Description and Operation 05-Jul-13
03-130-30-40 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP) 02-Aug-11
03-130-50-10 General 01-Jul-08
03-130-50-20 Description and Operation 01-Jul-08
04-10 CIDS Introduction 10-Apr-17
04-20-10 Control Panels 10-Apr-17
04-20-20 Indication Panels 10-Apr-17
04-30-10 Cabin Settings Overview 03-Apr-08
04-30-20-10 General 03-Apr-08
04-30-20-20 Function Access 06-Oct-11

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

04-30-20-30 Description and Operation 03-Apr-08
04-30-30-10 General 05-Jan-17
04-30-30-20 Function Access 05-Jan-16
04-30-30-30 Description and Operation 05-Jan-16
04-30-40-10 General 03-Apr-08
04-30-60-10 General 03-Apr-08
04-30-70-10 General 03-Apr-08
04-40 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP) 03-Oct-12
05-10 Communication Principles 10-Apr-17
05-20-10 General 03-Apr-08
05-20-20 PA from Cabin 10-Apr-17
05-20-30 PA from Cockpit 03-Jul-09
05-30-10 General 02-Jul-14
05-30-20 Calls from Cabin 10-Apr-17
05-30-30 Calls from Cockpit 03-Jul-09
05-40-10 General 03-Apr-08
05-40-30 Description and Operation 03-Jul-09
05-50-10 General 10-Apr-17
05-50-20 Pax Call from a Seatrow 10-Apr-17
05-50-30 Pax Call from a Lavatory 03-Jul-09
06-10-10 General 06-Oct-09
06-10-20 Function Access 06-Oct-09
06-10-30-10 AUDIO / CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP 06-Oct-09
06-10-30-20 AUDIO / CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP 06-Oct-09
06-20-10 General 06-Oct-09
06-20-30-10 PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT Page on the FAP 02-Apr-09
06-30-10-10 General 06-Oct-09
06-30-10-20 Function Access 01-Jul-08
06-30-10-30-10 Cabin Lighting System Control via FAP 10-Apr-17

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

06-30-10-30-20 Cabin Lighting System Control via Mini FAP 03-Oct-12
06-30-10-30-30 Cabin Lighting System Control via AAP 03-Apr-08
06-30-10-30-40 General Cabin Illumination 02-Aug-11
06-30-10-30-50 Entry Area Illumination 02-Aug-11
06-30-10-30-60 Cabin Zone Illumination 02-Aug-11
06-30-10-30-70 Room Illumination 10-Apr-17
06-30-10-30-80 Miscellaneous Lights 06-Oct-09
06-30-10-40 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP) 03-Apr-08
06-30-20-10 General 03-Apr-08
06-30-20-20 Location 03-Apr-08
06-40-10 General 05-Apr-16
06-40-20 Function Access 05-Jan-16
06-40-30 Description 05-Jan-16
06-40-40 Indications 05-Jan-16
06-50-10 General 10-Apr-17
06-50-30 Function Access 08-Jan-09
06-50-50 Operation 13-Jan-15
06-60-10 General 15-Jan-14
06-60-20 Location 16-Jul-10
06-60-30 Function Access 08-Apr-15
06-60-40-10 Potable Water System 16-Jul-10
06-60-40-20 Waste Disposal System 16-Jul-10
06-60-40-30 Air Supply System 03-Apr-08
06-60-40-40 Water/Waste System Control via the FAP 08-Apr-15
06-70-10 General 03-Oct-12
06-80-10 General 06-Oct-09
06-80-30 Description and Operation 03-Jul-09
06-90-10 General 03-Oct-12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

06-90-40 Indications 06-Oct-09
06-100-10 General 06-Oct-09
06-110-10 General 06-Oct-09
06-120-10 General 03-Oct-12
06-120-30-10 Galley Cooling Overview 03-Oct-12
06-120-30-20 Galley Cooling Principles 03-Oct-12
06-120-30-30 Pre-Conditioning 03-Oct-12
06-120-30-40-10 General Information about Galley Cooling Controls 03-Oct-12
06-120-30-40-20 Cockpit Controls 03-Oct-12
06-120-30-40-30 Cabin Controls 10-Apr-17
06-120-40 Operation 03-Oct-12
06-120-50 Indications 10-Apr-17
06-120-70 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP) 03-Oct-12
06-130-10 General 06-Oct-09
06-130-20 Function Access 01-Jul-08
06-130-40 Indications 01-Jul-08
06-130-50 Operation 13-Jul-16
06-130-60 Function Recovery Procedures 06-Oct-09
06-140-10 General 06-Oct-09
06-140-20 Location 01-Jul-08
06-140-40 Description and Operation 05-Jan-16
06-150-10 General 10-Apr-17
06-160-10 General 10-Apr-17
06-160-20 Location 10-Apr-17

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

06-180-10 General 05-Jul-13
06-180-20 Function Access 16-Jul-10
06-200-10 General 10-Apr-17
06-210-10 General 10-Apr-17
06-220-10 General 04-Jul-12
07-10 Description 03-Apr-08
07-20 Location 10-Apr-17
07-30 Operational Sequence 03-Apr-08
07-40 Containers 03-Apr-08
07-50 Oxygen Masks 03-Apr-08
07-60 Oxygen mask manual shut-off 03-Apr-08
07-70 Inadvertent oxygen mask deployement 03-Apr-08
08-10 In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) System Description 03-Apr-08
08-20-10 Overview 16-Jul-10
08-20-20-10 Location 16-Jul-10
08-20-20-20 Description 16-Jul-10
08-20-30-10 Location 16-Jul-10
08-20-30-20 Description 13-Oct-15
08-20-40-10 General 08-Jan-10
08-20-40-20-10 General 02-Oct-13
08-20-40-20-20 Location 16-Jul-10
08-20-40-20-30 Description 02-Oct-13
08-20-40-30 Keyboard 09-Jul-15
08-20-40-40 Card Reader 09-Jul-15
08-20-40-50 DVD Player 05-Apr-11
08-20-40-60 CD-Player 04-Oct-08
08-20-40-70 DVD-ROM 10-Apr-17
08-20-40-80 Video Cassette Player (VCP) 04-Oct-08

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

08-20-40-90 IFE Telephone Handset 13-Jan-15
08-20-40-100 Printer 05-Apr-11
08-20-40-110 Fax 04-Oct-08
08-20-40-120 Floppy Disk Drive Unit (FDDU) 04-Apr-12
08-20-40-140 IFE Control Center Outlets 13-Oct-15
08-20-40-200 IFE Control Center Switches 13-Jul-16
08-20-50 IFE System Power Up/Shut Down 02-Jul-14
08-20-60 Smoke Detection for the IFE System 04-Apr-13
08-20-70 Indications 04-Oct-08
08-30-10 General 03-Apr-08
08-30-20-20 Operation 09-Jul-15
08-30-30-20 Operation 13-Jan-15
08-30-40-20 Operation 13-Jan-15
08-30-70-10 General 10-Apr-17
08-30-70-30-10 Description 05-Apr-16
08-30-70-70-20 Operation 13-Jul-16
08-30-90-10 Description 05-Apr-11
08-40-10 General 03-Apr-08
08-40-20 Passenger Handset 13-Oct-15
08-40-30-30-20 Operation 08-Jan-09
08-40-40-20-10 Description 08-Jan-09
08-40-50-10-10 Description 10-Apr-17
09-10-10 Overview 10-Apr-17
09-20-30 Slideraft Use for Ditching 10-Apr-17
09-30-10 General 03-Apr-08
09-30-20 Aircraft Configuration 03-Apr-08
10-10-10 General 08-Oct-14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

11-10-10 General 01-Jul-08
11-20-10 General 01-Jul-08
11-40-10 General 04-Jan-12
11-40-20 Location of Medical Outlets 10-Apr-17
11-40-30 Description & Operation 13-Jan-15
12-10 Introduction 16-Jul-10
12-20-10 Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview 10-Apr-17
12-20-20 Emergency Equipment Preflight Inspection 10-Apr-17
12-20-30 Crewmembers' Stations Preflight Checklists 10-Apr-17
12-30-00 Introduction 03-Apr-08
12-30-10 Galley Electrical Panel Preflight Check 02-Oct-10
12-30-20 Coffeemakers Preflight Check 03-Oct-12
12-30-30 Espresso Makers Preflight Check 03-Oct-12
12-30-60 Ovens Preflight Check 03-Oct-12
12-30-70 Freezer / Chillers Preflight Check 10-Apr-17
12-30-80 Trash Compactors Preflight Check 10-Apr-17
12-30-90 Trolley Lift Preflight Check 03-Apr-08
12-30-100 Trolleys Preflight Check 03-Apr-08
12-30-120 Upper Deck Aft Galley Barrier Preflight Check 03-Apr-08
12-30-130 Galley Cooling System/ Supplementary Cooling System Preflight Check 05-Jul-13
12-40-10 Cabin Communication Preflight Check 05-Jul-13
12-40-20 Emergency Lighting System Preflight Checklist 08-Apr-15
12-40-40 FAP Cabin Systems Status Preflight Check 10-Apr-17
12-40-50 Inflight Entertainment System (IFE) Preflight Check 10-Apr-17
12-50-10 Cabin Crew Seat Preflight Check 03-Apr-08
12-50-40 Lavatory Preflight Check 02-Apr-10
13-10 Introduction 05-Jul-13
13-20 Abbreviations 03-Apr-08
13-25-10 Effective Briefings for Cabin Operations 13-Jan-15
13-25-20 Crew Communication 05-Jul-13

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

13-30 Phases Of Flight 03-Apr-08
13-40 Direct View Seats 10-Apr-17
13-50 Preflight Briefing 03-Apr-08
13-60 Passenger Door Operation 10-Apr-17
13-70 Cabin Crew Duties 06-Oct-16
13-80 Operational Recommendations for the Use of Stairs 02-Apr-09
13-90 Door Arming Procedure 02-Oct-13
13-100 Door Disarming Procedure 02-Oct-13
13-110 Cabin Ready Notification 03-Apr-08
13-120 Access To Cockpit 03-Apr-08
13-130 Cockpit Sliding Window Operation 03-Apr-08
13-140 Passenger Safety Briefing 03-Apr-08
13-150 Crew Rest Compartments Normal Operation 05-Jul-13
13-160 Refueling /Defueling with Passengers Onboard 06-Oct-16
13-170 Onboard Mobile Telephony System (OMTS) 10-Apr-17
13-180 Dangerous Goods 13-Jan-15
14-10 Introduction 08-Jan-09
14-20 Smoke and Fire Procedures 10-Apr-17
14-30 Emergency Communications 02-Oct-13
14-40 Emergency Cabin Evacuation 13-Jan-15
14-50 Emergency Cockpit Evacuation 02-Apr-09
14-60 Depressurization 06-Oct-16
14-70 Crew Rest Compartment Procedures 10-Apr-17
14-80 Turbulence Management and Procedures 08-Jan-10
14-90 Additional Abnormal / Emergency Procedures 06-Oct-16
14-100-10 Evacuation Awareness 13-Jan-15
14-100-20 Turbulence Threat Awareness 05-Jul-13
14-100-30 Cabin Depressurization Awareness 05-Jul-13
14-100-40 Cabin Smoke Awareness 05-Jul-13
14-100-50 Managing In Flight Fires 13-Jan-15
14-100-60 Ditching 05-Jul-13
15-03-70 Recovery of Trolley Lift Functions 05-Jul-13
15-03-80 Recovery of Stowages 03-Apr-08
15-03-90 Recovery of Galley Equipment 02-Apr-09
15-03-100 Recovery/Deactivation of Lavatory Functions 03-Apr-08
15-04 Recovery of CIDS Functions 03-Apr-08
15-06-60 Recovery of Water / Waste Functions 09-Jul-15
15-08-20 Recovery of IFE Control Center 03-Apr-08

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

16-10 Boarding 03-Apr-08
16-20 Door Closure to Takeoff 03-Apr-08
16-30 In-Flight to "Top of Descent" 03-Apr-08
16-40 Approach 03-Apr-08
16-50 After Landing 03-Apr-08
16-60 Special Announcements 03-Apr-08
18-10 Introduction 10-Apr-17
18-CCB2 Main Deck Slide Arming Difficullties 08-Jan-09
18-CCB7 Operational Limitations of the Steam Ovens Installed in the UD Galleys. 10-Apr-17
18-CCB11 TROLLEY OPERATION IN UPPER DECK AFT GALLEY STAIRS AREA 02-Oct-10
AND FORWARD OR AFT STAIRS AREAS
18-CCB12 Erroneous indication on the FAP DOORS/SLIDES Pages 05-Jul-13

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LIST OF EFFECTIVE CABIN CREW BULLETINS
A380
M(1) Identification T(2) E(3) Rev date Title

CCB11 issue 2.0 W N 02-Oct-10 TROLLEY OPERATION IN UPPER DECK AFT GALLEY STAIRS
AREA AND FORWARD OR AFT STAIRS AREAS
CCB12 issue 2.0 W N 05-Jul-13 ERRONEOUS FAP DOOR INDICATION
CCB2 issue 1.0 W N 08-Jan-09 Main Deck Slide Arming Difficulties - Approval
CCB7 issue 1.0 W N 10-Apr-17 Operational Limitations of the BE Aerospace Steam Ovens Installed
in the Upper Deck Galleys ON UAE A380-800-appro
(1) Evolution code
(2) Type of OEB: R=Red, W=White
(3) Affects ECAM: Y=Yes, N=No
UAE A380 PLP-LECCB P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LIST OF EFFECTIVE CABIN CREW BULLETINS
A380
UAE A380 PLP-LECCB P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LIST OF AIRLINE MODIFIED DOCUMENTARY UNITS
A380
M(1) Localization T(2) DU Title DU Identification DU Date

No modified DUs
(1) Evolution code
(2) Temporary Information
UAE A380 PLP-LAMDU P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LIST OF AIRLINE MODIFIED DOCUMENTARY UNITS
A380
UAE A380 PLP-LAMDU P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LIST OF EFFECTIVE TEMPORARY DOCUMENT UNITS
A380

03-90-40 x Procedure to prevent Water Boiler Failure 00022448.0001001 22-Jul-09
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165,
0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Reason for issue
This temporary information instructs the cabin crew how to proceed to prevent water boiler from overheating.
04-20-10 x Operation of the FAP 00026764.0001001 29-Jul-15
Applicable to: ALL
05-30-10 x Cabin Interphone Call to the cockpit, or 00025639.0001001 01-Jul-14
including the cockpit
Applicable to: ALL
Reason for issue
This temporary DU is issued to inform operators that the Cabin Interphone Call to the cockpit, or including the cockpit
may not be indicated in the cockpit in some cases. This is due to a CIDS deviation.
This TDU is revised to inform operators that in some cases, the cockpit may appear to be busy, despite there is no
ongoing call including the cockpit.
06-40-10 x SYSTEM Deviation with operational impact 00026823.0001001 11-Jan-16
Applicable to: ALL
Reason for issue
This TDU has been created to describe a system deviation that impacts the FAP Doors/Slides page.
09-10-20 x Outside View 00025371.0001001 11-Jul-14
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0025, 0077-0083, 0098, 0119, 0127, 0136-0140, 0142, 0150, 0178
Reason for issue
This Temporary DU is only applicable when the door OPEN pb is temporarily deactivated following AOT A52R009-14
and the CLOSE pb is deactivated following AOT A52R005-13. The OPEN pb and the CLOSE pb will be reactivated
after the installation of a new Local Door Controler (LDC) P/N.
09-10-30 x Risk of Injury at the Passenger Door Frame 00021389.0001001 31-Oct-08
Applicable to: ALL
Reason for issue
This temporary information is provided due to a concern about a protruding door frame fitting that could cause injuries
to boarding passengers, especially children.
The door frame fitting has been redesigned and will be installed in all aircraft included in the configuration of the
modification 67745 T75268.
09-10-30 x Normal Opening from the Outside 00025369.0001001 11-Jul-14
Reason for issue
This Temporary DU is only applicable when the door OPEN pb is temporarily deactivated following AOT A52R009-14.
The OPEN pb will be reactivated after the installation of a new Local Door Controller (LDC) P/N.
UAE A380 PLP-LETDU P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LIST OF EFFECTIVE TEMPORARY DOCUMENT UNITS
A380

09-10-30 x Normal Closing from the Outside 00025370.0001001 11-Jul-14
Reason for issue
This Temporary DU is only applicable when the door CLOSE pb is temporarily deactivated following AOT
A52R005-13. The CLOSE pb will be reactivated after the installation of a new Local Door Controller (LDC) P/N.
13-60 x Normal Passenger Door Operation From 00025368.0001001 11-Jul-14
The Outside
Reason for issue
This Temporary DU is only applicable when the door OPEN pb and CLOSE pb are temporarily deactivated following
AOT(s) A52R009-14 and A52R005-13.
The OPEN pb and CLOSE pb will be reactivated after the installation of a new Local Door Controller (LDC) P/N.
(1) Evolution code
(2) Temporary Information
UAE A380 PLP-LETDU P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
AIRCRAFT ALLOCATION TABLE
A380
This table gives, for each delivered aircraft, the cross reference between:
- The Manufacturing Serial Number (MSN)
- The Fleet Serial Number (FSN) of the aircraft as known by AIRBUS S.A.S.
- The registration number of the aircraft as known by AIRBUS S.A.S.
- The aircraft model
M(1) MSN FSN Registration Number Model

0007 -- A6-EDF 380-861
0009 -- A6-EDJ 380-861
0011 -- A6-EDA 380-861
0013 -- A6-EDB 380-861
0016 -- A6-EDC 380-861
0017 -- A6-EDE 380-861
0020 -- A6-EDD 380-861
0023 -- A6-EDG 380-861
0025 -- A6-EDH 380-861
0028 -- A6-EDI 380-861
0030 -- A6-EDK 380-861
0042 -- A6-EDM 380-861
0046 -- A6-EDL 380-861
0056 -- A6-EDN 380-861
0057 -- A6-EDO 380-861
0077 -- A6-EDP 380-861
0080 -- A6-EDQ 380-861
0083 -- A6-EDR 380-861
0086 -- A6-EDS 380-861
0090 -- A6-EDT 380-861
0098 -- A6-EDU 380-861
0101 -- A6-EDV 380-861
0103 -- A6-EDW 380-861
0105 -- A6-EDX 380-861
0106 -- A6-EDY 380-861
0107 -- A6-EDZ 380-861
0108 -- A6-EEA 380-861
0109 -- A6-EEB 380-861
0110 -- A6-EEC 380-861
0111 -- A6-EED 380-861
0112 -- A6-EEE 380-861
0113 -- A6-EEF 380-861
UAE A380 PLP-AAT P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

0116 -- A6-EEG 380-861
0119 -- A6-EEH 380-861
0123 -- A6-EEI 380-861
0127 -- A6-EEJ 380-861
0132 -- A6-EEK 380-861
0133 -- A6-EEL 380-861
0134 -- A6-EEM 380-861
0135 -- A6-EEN 380-861
0136 -- A6-EEO 380-861
0138 -- A6-EEP 380-861
0139 -- A6-EER 380-861
0140 -- A6-EES 380-861
0141 -- A6-EEQ 380-861
0142 -- A6-EET 380-861
0147 -- A6-EEU 380-861
0150 -- A6-EEV 380-861
0153 -- A6-EEW 380-861
0154 -- A6-EEX 380-861
0157 -- A6-EEY 380-861
0158 -- A6-EEZ 380-861
0159 -- A6-EOA 380-861
0164 -- A6-EOB 380-861
0165 -- A6-EOC 380-861
0167 -- A6-EVA 380-842
0168 -- A6-EOD 380-861
0169 -- A6-EOE 380-861
0171 -- A6-EOF 380-861
0172 -- A6-EOG 380-861
0174 -- A6-EOH 380-861
0178 -- A6-EOI 380-861
0182 -- A6-EOJ 380-861
0184 -- A6-EOK 380-861
0186 -- A6-EOL 380-861
0187 -- A6-EOM 380-861
0188 -- A6-EON 380-861
0190 -- A6-EOO 380-861
0200 -- A6-EOP 380-861

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

0201 -- A6-EOQ 380-861
0202 -- A6-EOR 380-861
0203 -- A6-EOS 380-861
0204 -- A6-EOT 380-861
0205 -- A6-EOU 380-861
0206 -- A6-EOV 380-861
0207 -- A6-EOW 380-861
0208 -- A6-EOX 380-861
0209 -- A6-EOY 380-861
0210 -- A6-EOZ 380-861
0211 -- A6-EUA 380-861
0213 -- A6-EUB 380-861
0214 -- A6-EUC 380-861
0216 -- A6-EUD 380-861
0217 -- A6-EUE 380-861
0218 -- A6-EUF 380-861
0219 -- A6-EUG 380-861
0220 -- A6-EUH 380-861
0221 -- A6-EUI 380-861
0222 -- A6-EUJ 380-861
0223 -- A6-EUK 380-861
0224 -- A6-EUL 380-861
0225 -- A6-EUM 380-842
0226 -- A6-EUN 380-842
0227 -- A6-EUO 380-842
0228 -- A6-EUP 380-842
0229 -- A6-EUQ 380-842
0232 -- A9-EUR 380-842
0234 -- A6-EUS 380-842
0236 -- A6-EUT 380-842
0238 -- A6-EUU 380-842
0239 -- A6-EUV 380-842
0240 -- A6-EUW 380-842
0241 -- A6-EUX 380-842
0242 -- A6-EUY 380-842

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

0244 -- A6-EUZ 380-842
N 0248 -- A6-EVC 380-842
N 0249 -- A6-EVD 380-842
(1) Evolution code : N=New, R=Revised

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LIST OF MODIFICATIONS
A380
M(1) Modification Linked SB Incorp. Date Title

25-8013 00 08-Oct-14 EQUIPMENT / FURNISHINGS - TROLLEY LIFT SYSTEM -
INSTALL TROLLEY LIFT CONVEYANCE SYSTEM
ENHANCEMENT PACK
Applicable to: MSN 0011
25-8028 01 03-Nov-09 EQUIPMENT / FURNISHINGS - COCKPIT - INSTALL A
MECHANICAL BACK - UP LOCKING DEVICE FOR THE
COCKPIT DOOR
Applicable to: MSN 0011-0016, 0020
25-8039 00 04-Jan-11 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - MD
COMPARTMENT-INSTALL SECOND INDEPENDENT
ESCAPE PATH FOR CABIN CREW IN C/FCRC.
Applicable to: MSN 0011-0020
25-8079 00 05-Jul-13 E/F - CURTAINS AND PARTITIONS/ELEC CLASS
DIVIDERS - INSTALL NEW SWITCH ASSEMBLY FOR THE
EMWS
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0009, 0017-0057
25-8091 02 02-Oct-13 EQUIPMENT / FURNISHINGS - CABIN ATTENDANT
SEATS (CAS) - INSTALL A DOUBLE CAS INSTEAD OF
SINGLE CAS FORWARD OF DOOR M3R
25-8112 02 05-Jan-16 EQUIPMENT / FURNISHINGS - STAIRS - INSTALL AFT
STAIRS BARRIER
44-8010 01 15-Jan-14 CABIN SYSTEMS-CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA
SYSTEM-DEFINE AND INSTALL CIDS SOFTWARE 5.0
AND ASSOCIATED CAMS UPDATE
44-8019 03 09-Jan-13 CABIN SYSTEMS - CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA
SYSTEM (CIDS) - REPLACE CABIN ASSIGNMENT
MODULE (CAM)
46-8060 00 02-Oct-13 INFORMATION SYSTEMS - CABIN INFORMATION
NETWORK SYSTEM (CINS) - INSTALL ALNA V2
SOFTWARE FOR ON-BOARD MOBILE TELEPHONY
SYSTEM (OMTS) FUNCTIONALITY
46-8099 01 10-Apr-17 INFORMATION SYSTEMS - CABIN INFORMATION
NETWORK SYSTEM (CINS) - INSTALL NEW ALNA V2.3
SOFTWARE
UAE A380 PLP-LOM P 1/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

46-8139 00 10-Apr-17 INFORMATION SYSTEMS - CABIN INFORMATION
NETWORK SYSTEMS - UPGRADE ALNA SOFTWARE
FOR IP TRAFFIC ROUTING FROM ALNA (AIRLINE
NETWORK ARCHITECTURE) TO IFE (IN-FLIGHT
ENTERTAINMENT)
T60420 13-Jul-16 CABIN SYSTEMS - LANDSCAPE CAMERA SYSTEM -
INSTALL LANDSCAPE CAMERA
Applicable to: ALL
T60771 04-Oct-08 EQUIPMENT FURNISHINGS - MAIN DECK LAVATORIES -
DEFINE LAVATORY MODUL LM-U&V (PRM)
Applicable to: ALL
T60778 04-Oct-08 EQUIPMENT FURNISHINGS - UPPER DECK LAVATORIES
- DEFINE LAVATORY MODUL LU-U&V (PRM)
Applicable to: ALL
T60814 01-Sep-06 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT - INSTALL A CABIN LAYOUT FOR
VERSION UAE01.
0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T60815 01-Jul-08 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT - INSTALL A CABIN LAYOUT FOR
VERSION UAE02
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167,
0178-0184, 0190-0216, 0225-0229, 0241-0244
T61379 25-8103 01 06-Oct-09 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHING - COCKPIT SEATS INSTALL A
WALL-MOUNTED 5TH OCCUPANT SEAT
0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T61735 01-Oct-07 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - LININGS AND FURNISHING
- DEFINE NEW SWITCH PANEL AT DOOR M1LH
Applicable to: ALL
T62658 01-Sep-06 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - EMERGENCY -
INSTALLATION OF AUTOMATIC ELT WITH CONTROL
PANEL IN COCKPIT
Applicable to: ALL
T62687 04-Oct-08 WATER/WATER - POTABLE - DEFINITION AND
CERTIFICATION OF DRINKING FOUNTAIN
Applicable to: ALL

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

T62790 08-Apr-15 Cabin Systems - Inflight Entertainment System - Install an
additional PED ON/OFF Control Switch in Cockpit
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0226-0229, 0241-0244
T63706 01-Jul-08 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - PASSENGER COMPT. -
UPPER DECK - DEFINE AND INSTALL MINI-SUITES FOR
CABIN VIPER PROJECT
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T63708 01-Jul-08 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS -MAIN DECK
COMPT.-DEFINE MD CABIN/FLIGHT CREW REST
COMPT.FORWARD OF DOOR M5 (9 AND 2 BUNKS).
0168-0174, 0186-0188
T63724 03-Apr-08 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - UPPER DECK LAVATORIES
DEFINE TWO SHOWER UNITS IN FWD CABIN, LH AND
RH OF CABIN STAIRS
T63884 04-Oct-08 Equipment/Furnishings - Linings and Furnishings - Define
Electromechanical Window Shades in new Upper Deck
Sidewall Panels
T64000 06-Oct-16 Equipment/Furnishing - Trolley Lift System - NON INSTALL
BASIC L02 TROLLEY LIFT AFT OF DOOR M2
T64752 12-Jul-07 AIR CONDITIONING - SUPPLEMENTAL COOLING -
INSTALLATION OF CENTRALIZED REFRIGERATION
UNTIS (CRUS) ON A380-800 (CAPACIT MAX 90
TROLLEYS)
T67128 03-Apr-08 air conditioning-humidification-Installation of Air
Humidification System in cabin/flight crew rest compartment
fwd of doors M5.
0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T67178 03-Apr-08 Cabin Systems - Generals - CIDS Cabin Intercommunication
Data System - Define CIDS for Emirates (UAE01)
0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

T67179 03-Apr-08 CABIN SYSTEMS- INFLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM-
DEFINE AND INSTALL IFE FOR EMIRATES UAE01
VERSION.
0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T67180 08-Jan-09 CABIN SYSTEMS- INFLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM-
DEFINE AND INSTALL IFE FOR EMIRATES UAE02
VERSION.
0178-0184, 0190-0216, 0225-0229, 0241-0244
T67257 08-Jan-09 Cabin Systems - CIDS Cabin Intercommunication Data
System - DEFINE CIDS FOR EMIRATES (UAE02)
0178-0184, 0190-0216, 0225-0229, 0241-0244
T67277 01-Jul-08 CABIN SYSTEM - CABIN MONITORING SYSTEM - DEFINE
AND INSTALL A CABIN VIDEO MONITORING SYSTEM
0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T67278 02-Apr-09 CABIN SYSTEMS - CABIN VIDEO MONITORING SYSTEM
- DEFINE & INSTALL A MAIN DECK & UPPER DECK
CABIN VIDEO MONITORING SYSTEM
0178-0184, 0190-0216, 0225-0229, 0241-0244
T68194 01-Jul-08 E/F - ANCILLIARY EQUIPMENT - define heated floor panel
installation
Applicable to: ALL
T69193 02-Jan-07 E/F ? Cabin Escape Facilities ? Define and install survival kits
on upper deck doors
Applicable to: ALL
T69799 03-Jan-08 Information Systems - Cabin Information - Adapt system
provisions for NSS/OIS - CINS according to CRU deficiencies
Applicable to: ALL
T69911 01-Jul-08 OXYGEN - FLIGHT CREW PORTABLE OXYGEN DEVICES
- INSTALL COCKPIT PBE ALTERNATE EQUIPMENT
(SFE)-B/E AEROSPACE ISG, LENEXA
Applicable to: ALL
T72159 46-8010 04 02-Aug-11 Information Systems - Cabin Information Network System -
Adapt system provisions from NSS/OIS to ALNA V2 HESU
(Blade Centrix)
Applicable to: ALL

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

T72526 44-8017 00 01-Jul-08 CABIN SYSTEMS - IFE - Head End and Cabin Distribution -
Installation of an additional power switch for the IFE Cabin
Workstation (CWS)
Applicable to: ALL
T72553 03-Jul-09 Information System - Cabin Information Network System -
Install a Cabin Information Network System (CINS) for
UAE02
0178-0184, 0190-0216, 0225-0229, 0241-0244
T72593 46-8010 04 04-Jul-12 Information System - Cabin Information Network System -
Install the 1st Head-End Server Unit (HESU) (BladeCentrix)
Applicable to: ALL
T72605 03-Oct-12 Cabin System - On-board Mobile Telephone System - Define
the OMTS - System
T72607 04-Jul-12 Cabin System - On-board Mobile Telephone System - Install
the OMTS-Equipment
T72671 02-Apr-09 E/F - Curtains & Partitions/Electr. Class Div. - Define and
Install Cockpit Door Module Cabin decompression Flap
Release Mechanism (FRM)
Applicable to: ALL
T73127 04-Apr-12 Equipment/Furnishings- Passenger Compartment - Install
miscellaneous improvements in cabin from UAE01 008
Applicable to: MSN 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174,
0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T73629 08-Jan-09 Equipment/Furnishing - Passenger Compartment - INSTALL
MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS IN CABIN FROM
UAE01 002
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0009, 0013-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138,
0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T73643 06-Oct-09 Equipment/Furnishing - PASSENGER COMPARTMENT -
INSTALL MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS IN CABIN
FROM UAE01 006
0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T74755 44-8011 00 02-Apr-09 CABIN SYSTEMS - CIDS - DEFINE AND INSTALL NEW
CIDS COCKPIT HANDSET
Applicable to: ALL

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

T74756 02-Apr-09 CABIN SYSTEMS - CIDS - DEFINE NEW CIDS CABIN
HANDSET
T74757 44-8010 01 03-Nov-09 Cabin Systems - CIDS - Define and Install CIDS Software
Standard 5.0
T75185 01-Jul-08 Cabin Systems - CIDS - Define and install CIDS software
Standard 3.4
Applicable to: ALL
T75327 06-Oct-09 Equipment/Furnishing - Passenger Compartment - Install
miscellaneous Improvements in cabin from UAE01 007
Applicable to: MSN 0009, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165,
0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T75328 04-Apr-12 Equipment/Furnishing - Passenger Compartment - Install
miscellaneous Improvements in cabin from UAE02 006
Applicable to: MSN 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0216,
0225-0229, 0241-0244
T77057 04-Jul-12 Onboard Information System (OIS) - Maintenance
Application - Define customized digital cabin logbook (DCL)
software
T78103 03-Jul-09 Information System - Cabin Information Network System -
Install a Cabin Information Network System (CINS) ALNA v2
for UAE01
0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T78132 06-Oct-11 E/F-Curtains and Partitions/Electrical Class Dividers- Define
mechanical back-up locking device for cockpit door
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0009, 0017, 0023-0249
T78563 03-Oct-12 Air Conditioning - Supplemental Cooling - Define and Install
Centralized Equipment (OEM) and change Supplier to
Liebherr.
T78990 06-Oct-09 E/F-MD Compartment-Instl miscellaneous improvements and
a second independent escape path in MD C/FCRC FWD of
door 5
Applicable to: MSN 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174,
0186-0188

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

T80578 02-Aug-11 E/F - CURTAINS AND PARTITIONS/ELECTRICAL CLASS
DIVIDERS - DEFINE AND INSTALL NEW COCKPIT DOOR
MODULE ON A380
T80595 02-Aug-11 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - CURTAINS AND
PARTITIONS/ELECTRICAL CLASS DIVIDERS - Define new
Switch Assy for the EmWS
T80611 04-Jul-12 Information Systems - Cabin Information Network System -
Install a cabin information network system (CINS) with OMTS
support for UAE
T82010 04-Jul-12 CABIN SYSTEMS- CIDS - DEFINE AND INSTALL CIDS
Software Standard 6.0
Applicable to: ALL
T82119 08-Apr-15 Lights - Cabin Emergency Lighting - Define Symbolic Exit
Sign Lenses for A380 A/C
T82269 08-Apr-15 Information Systems - CINS - Install CWLU with enhanced
wireless standard capability
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0249
T82421 04-Apr-13 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT - INSTALL MISCELLANEOUS
IMPROVEMENTS IN CABIN FROM UAE02 021
Applicable to: MSN 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0216, 0225-0229, 0241-0244
T82551 08-Apr-15 Cabin Systems - CIDS - Define and install CIDS adaptions
from UAE02 024
Applicable to: MSN 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0216, 0225-0229, 0241-0244
T82626 02-Oct-13 Equipment/Furnishings - Passenger Compartment - ADAPT
CABIN LAYOUT CONFIGURATION FROM UAE02 024
Applicable to: MSN 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0216, 0225-0229, 0241-0244
T82640 02-Oct-13 Equipment/Furnishing - Passenger Compartment - ADAPT
Applicable to: MSN 0147-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T82642 09-Jul-15 CABIN SYSTEMS - CIDS - Adapt the CIDS configuration
from UAE01 024
Applicable to: MSN 0147-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T82907 05-Jul-13 Information Systems - Cabin Information Network System
(CINS) - Install new ALNA software adaptation for UAE

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A380

T82943 44-8064 02 02-Apr-14 CABIN SYSTEMS - CIDS - Define and Install Software
Standard 6.1
Applicable to: ALL
T83000 08-Apr-15 Equipment/Furnishings - Passenger Compartment - ADAPT
CABIN LAYOUT CONFIGURATION FROM UAE02 to
UAE04
T83032 46-8105 00 02-Apr-14 Information Systems - CINS - Define & install new ALNA
software for UAE
Applicable to: ALL
T84714 09-Jul-15 Cabin Systems - CIDS - Define and install CIDS adaptions
from UAE01 032
Applicable to: MSN 0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T84735 13-Jul-16 Equipment/Furnishings - Passenger Compartment - Adapt
Cabin Layout Configuration from UAE01 035
Applicable to: MSN 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
T85706 13-Jul-16 E/F - LOWER DECK COMPT. - DEFINE A CABIN CREW
REST COMPTARTMENT IN FORWARD CARGO
COMPARTMENT
T85716 13-Jul-16 CABIN SYSTEMS - TV/ DATA BROADBAND
TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM - Define and install system
provisions for PANASONIC GCS System for UAE
T85717 13-Jul-16 CABIN SYSTEMS - TV/ DATA BROADBAND
TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM - INSTALL PANASONIC GCS
CONNECTIVITY SYSTEM - EXTV
T85847 06-Oct-16 Equipment/Furnishings - Passenger Compartment - ADAPT
T86611 05-Jan-17 Equipment/Furnishings - Passenger Compartment - ADAPT
T86614 05-Jan-17 CABIN SYSTEMS - CIDS - Adapt the CIDS configuration
from UAE04 011
(1) Evolution code

CCOM 10-Apr-17
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
00-10 General Introduction

Main CCOM Changes.......................................................................................................................... 1
Foreword.............................................................................................................................................. 2
Comments and Enquiry ....................................................................................................................... 2
General ................................................................................................................................................ 3
Presentation......................................................................................................................................... 3
Pagination............................................................................................................................................ 5
Revision/Updating................................................................................................................................ 6
Warnings, Cautions and Notes ............................................................................................................ 6
Customization ...................................................................................................................................... 7
00-40 List of Abbreviations

Abbreviations ....................................................................................................................................... 1
00-50 Units conversion table

Units Conversion Table........................................................................................................................ 1
00-70 A380 CCOM on Ops Library Browser (OLB) FAP

Level of information.............................................................................................................................. 1
UAE A380 00-TOC P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 00-TOC P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
INTRODUCTION
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
A380
MAIN CCOM CHANGES

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE
The purpose of the Main CCOM Changes is to provide general information about the CCOM
revision and to highlight the main changes for:
- Standard Operating Procedures (Chapter 13)
- Abnormal /Emergency Procedures (Chapter 14)
- System Description affecting a basic cabin system.
Note: In addition, each Documentary Unit (DU) provides highlights with the reason(s) for change
and uses revision bars to indicate the revised sections.
TIMEFRAME
The subjects in the Main CCOM Changes are categorized by month and, are published regardless
of the revision cycle that is applicable to each Operator.
NOVEMBER 2008
PRECAUTIONARY EVACUATION PROCEDURE
The Precautionary evacuation procedure was deleted for the following reason: In case of obvious
rapid disembarkation on the stand initiated by the flight crew, specific airline procedures for both
aircraft and on ground activities should apply.
OCTOBER 2010
DOOR ARMING PROCEDURE
The Standard Operating Procedure "Door arming procedure" is modified to clarify that in case of
door closing from the outside cabin crew have to check that the door is correctly locked. As a
consequence, the cabin crew responsible of the door has to check first the mechanical flags then
the DSIP.
In addition, the door arming procedure is now classified Airworthiness Related Procedure.
Continued on the next page
UAE A380 00-10 P 1/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
JANUARY 2014
In the ABNORMAL and EMERGENCY procedures section:
- The OVERHEAD BINS SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE is revised to take into account the potential
presence of lithium batteries. Refer to 14-20 OVERHEAD BIN Smoke/Fire Procedure
- New procedures LITHIUM BATTERIES FIRES and STORAGE PROCEDURE AFTER A LITHIUM
BATTERY FIRE are added.
Refer to 14-20 LITHIUM BATTERY FIRERefer to 14-20 STORAGE PROCEDURE AFTER A
LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE
FOREWORD
Applicable to: ALL
The CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL (CCOM) includes:

- System description of the standard version of the aircraft,
- Operating instructions,
- Function Recovery Procedures (FRP ) for items and / or equipments managed by the cabin crew,
- Normal and Abnormal / Emergency procedures.
"Standard aircraft" signifies the aircraft as delivered by Airbus, with all applicable Service Bulletins
(SBs) embedded. All airline-specific equipment can be added via the Customer Originated Change
(COC) procedure.
In keeping with the philosophy of the FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL (FCOM), the manual
includes only the information dedicated to this particular aircraft configuration.
In case of conflict between this CCOM and the FCOM or the regulations of the Approved Authorities’
Procedures, the FCOM and the regulations of the Approved Authorities’ Procedures will apply.
COMMENTS AND ENQUIRY

Applicable to: ALL
All manual holders and users are encouraged to forward any questions and suggestions regarding the
Cabin Crew Operating Manual (CCOM) to :
AIRBUS
BP 33
1 Rond-point Maurice Bellonte
31707 BLAGNAC CEDEX - FRANCE
Fax : 33 (0) 561.93.29.68
Email : fltops.a380std@airbus.com
Attn. : FLIGHT OPERATIONS SUPPORT - STLX
UAE A380 00-10 P 2/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The CCOM must address the unique requirements dictated by its use in a cabin environment and,
possibly, by the conditions associated with abnormal or emergency situations. Some subjects are also
included in the FCOM, but each manual is specific to the applicable crew.
The CCOM content and format shall also satisfy the requirements for use as a reference document
during cabin crew training.
The CCOM will be available in the following electronic formats :
- Extensible Markup Language (XML).
- Portable Document Format (PDF, open Adobe specification).
The CCOM is delivered on CD-ROM, or online using Airbus World community.
No paper versions will be made available.
PRESENTATION
Applicable to: ALL
The CCOM is made up of one volume, which is divided into 17 chapters. Each chapter is divided into
pre-defined sections. Optional sections can be added to address, airline-specific requirements (Ex :
airline requests...).
Each section is made up of Documentary Units (DU), which are information segments containing
technical data. Each DU is assigned an effectivity.
- Chapter PLP : PRELIMINARY PAGES
This chapter provides: The table of contents, the List of documentary units, the list of modifications,
the aircraft allocation Table.
- Chapter 00 : INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides general information about the manual.
- Chapter 01 : AIRCRAFT GENERAL
The chapter presents an overview of the aircraft.
- Chapter 02 : COCKPIT
This chapter provides information of cockpit dedicated to cabin crew.
- Chapter 03 : CABIN LAYOUT
This chapter provides descriptive and operational information on the cabin layout.
- Chapter 04 : CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM (CIDS)
This chapter provides information on the CIDS.
- Chapter 05 : CABIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
This chapter provides information on the : Passenger address (PA), Cabin interphone, Service
interphone and passenger call system.
UAE A380 00-10 P 3/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
- Chapter 06 : CABIN SYSTEMS

This chapter provides informations on the Cabin Music, Pre-Recorded Announcements, Lights, Air
Conditioning/Temperature Control, Water/Waste, Smoke Detection, Seat Settings, Systems Info,
Cabin Ready Signaling, Lights Pre-selection, Galley Cooling, floor temperature, humidifier,
windows shades, digital cabin log book.
- Chapter 07: CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
This chapter provides descriptive and operational information on cabin oxygen system.
- Chapter 08 : IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT (IFE)
This chapter provides information on the use of the: IFE control centers, cabin crew functions and
on passenger functions.
- Chapter 09 : DOORS AND SLIDES
This chapter provides descriptive and operational information on the Passenger Doors, Evacuation
Devices, Controls and Indicators, Aircraft Configuration in Crash Situations.
- Chapter 10: EVACUATION (EVAC) AND ALERT (ECAS) SYSTEMS
This chapter provides descriptive and operational information on EVAC and ALERT systems.
- Chapter 11 : EMERGENCY AND MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
This chapter provides descriptive and operational information on the emergency equipment and
medical equipment.
- Chapter 12 : PREFLIGHT CHECKLISTS
This chapter provides the preflight checklist for the: Cabin emergency equipment, Galley
equipment, Cabin Systems, Cabin Equipment.
- Chapter 13 : STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOP)
This chapter provides normal procedures for standard aircraft operations by the cabin crew.
- Chapter 14 : ABNORMAL / EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
This chapter provides abnormal and emergency procedures for cabin crew.
- Chapter 15 : FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURES (FRP)
This chapter provides Function Recovery Procedures to assist cabin crew to reset a cabin function
or a cabin system during flight when it is possible.
- Chapter 16 : ANNOUNCEMENTS
This chapter provides announcements for different phases of flight.
- Chapter 17 : SECURITY SENSITIVE INFORMATION
This chapter provides security sensitive information.
UAE A380 00-10 P 4/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
PAGINATION
Applicable to: ALL
FORMAT
The "PDF" CCOM is designed with the following paper layout:
- Page format and size: A4
- Orientation : Portrait
- Standard character type and size : Helvetica, 10 points.
The PDF CCOM page is composed of the following three zones :
- A header,
- A footer,
- A body.
HEADER
The header is composed of the following three parts :
- The left side : Includes the manual's title, the applicable aircraft program, and the applicable logo
(company logo, or Airbus logo by default)
- The middle : Indicates the title of the current chapter at the top of the zone, and the title of the
current section at the middle of the zone, the tittle of the subdivision at the bottom of the zone.
- The right side : Provides the sections's identification and revision date.
header
FOOTER
The footer contains such remaining Operation Manual identification data, not included in the header,
as : The extracted Document IDENT.
UAE A380 00-10 P 5/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
footer
REVISION/UPDATING
Applicable to: ALL
REVISION
The CCOM is continuously revised. When a reason for change is needed (criteria, correction,..), the
CCOM is revised and provided at the next delivery.
The frequency of revision is in accordance with the customer requirements.
The revision date indicates the manual's date of the assembly.
A section is always revised in its entirety, and the changes are indicated in the Table Of Content (TOC)
. Each evolution is identified by a "revision" mark in the left-hand margin of the TOC entry.
The revision mark in the LEDU can be "N" for new , "R" for revised or "E" for effectivity change. It is
indicated in the First Column of the LEDU table.
The revision mark in the CCOM content is indicated by a line in the left margin with one or more
numerical indexes on the same line. The numerical index refers to the corresponding index of the
highlight page, located in the preliminary pages.
UPDATING
The CCOM is now globally updated.
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES

Applicable to: ALL
WARNING : An operating procedure, technique, etc., which may result in injury or loss of life, if not
carefully followed.
CAUTION : An operating procedure, technique, etc., which may result in damage to equipment, if not
carefully followed.
NOTE : An operating procedure, technique, etc., considered essential to emphasize.
UAE A380 00-10 P 6/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
CUSTOMIZATION
Applicable to: ALL
Several criteria are taken into account for the customization of a CCOM, and can be grouped
according to their function :
- Technical criteria : Represents the aircraft’s technical definition, including the :
• Aircraft's identification, or model,
• Technical definition (Factory Modifications, Service Bulletins, etc.),
• Customer Originated Changes (COC) .
- Operational criteria : Represents the aircraft’s operational environment, including the :
• Operator,
• Associated authorities.
- CCOM customization is specified in the :
• Aircraft Allocation Table (AAT) , and
• List of Modifications Table (LOM) .
AIRCRAFT ALLOCATION TABLE (AAT)
This tables gives, for each delivered aircraft, the cross reference between:
- The Manufacturing Serial Number (MSN)
- The Fleet Serial Number (FSN) of the aircraft as known by Airbus S.A.S.
- The registration number of the aircraft as known by Airbus S.A.S.
- The aircraft model
LIST OF MODIFICATIONS (LOM)
The List Of Modifications Table (LOM) lists the product’s applicable Factory Modifications and Service
Bulletins, along with their various cross-references. SBs appear when embodied on at least one
aircraft within the fleet. The LOM contains the following information :
- Codes describing the update :
• N = New criteria for revision
• R = Revision : SB change for an existing Change Identification Number (CIN), validity change,
or title change for the criteria.
- Date corresponding to the revision date for which the criteria was incorporated.
- Validity information is optional, and is expressed the same format as on the manual’s technical
pages (MSN, or Registration Number). Grouping is applied in the case of an MSN, or FSN.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE DOCUMENTARY UNITS (LEDU)
An effectivity is assigned for each DU. The LEDU provides:
- The evolution code "R", "N" or "E"
UAE A380 00-10 P 7/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
• R = Revised
• N = New
• E = Effectivity change
- The localization of the DU: chapter, section and subdivision
- The status of the DU temporary or permanent if blank.
- DU title, the configuration criteria and the effectivity (in the customer fleet context)
- The identification code
- The version date.
Note: Effectivity can either be expressed in terms of MSN, or registration number (tail number),
depending on the customer’s preference. However, MSN is the default.
SUMMARY OF HIGHLIGHT
The summary of highlight is presented in two formats:
- A global Summary of highlight indicates the creations, suppressions or movement at a chapter
level.
- A Summary of highlight, located at the beginning of each chapter, highlights the changes made to
the chapter.
UAE A380 00-10 P 8/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
A380
ABBREVIATIONS
Applicable to: ALL
A
Abbreviation Term
AA Airworthiness Authorities
AAP Additional Attendant Panel
AAT Aircraft Allocation Table
ABN Abnormal
ABP Able Bodied Passenger
ABV Above
AC Alternating Current
A/C Aircraft
ACARS Aircraft Communication Addressing and Reporting System
ACC Aft Cargo Compartment
ACP Area Call Panel (Cabin) or Audio Control Panel (Cockpit)
ACU Air Cooling Unit
ADB Area Distribution Box
ADIRS Air Data and Inertial Reference System
ADS Automatic Dependent Surveillance
ADV Advisory
AED Automated External Defibrillator
AEVC Avionic Equipment Ventilation Computer
AIDS Aircraft Integrated Data System
AIP Additional Indication Panel
ALT Altitude
ALTN Alternate
AMM Aircraft Maintenance Manual
AMS Aircraft Management System
AMU Audio Management Unit
ANT Antenna
AOD Audio On Demand
AOG Aircraft On Ground
APU Auxiliary Power Unit
ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ARN Aircraft Registration Number
UAE A380 00-40 P 1/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
ARPT Airport
A/S Airspeed
ASAP As Soon As Possible
ASP Audio Selector Panel
ATA Air Transport Association of America
ATC Air Traffic Control
ATR Audio Tape Reproducer
ATSU Air Traffic Service Unit
ATT Attitude
AVNCS Avionics
AVOD Audio/Video on Demand
AWY Airway
B
Abbreviation Term
BARO Barometric
BAT Battery
B/C Business Class
BCC Bulk Cargo Compartment
BCL Battery Charge Limit
BFE Buyer Furnished Equipment
BGM Boarding Music
BITE Built-In Test Equipment
BMC Bleed Monitoring Computer
BRK Break
BRT Bright
BTL Bottle
BTS Base Transceiver Station
C
Abbreviation Term
CA Cabin Attendant
CAAP Civil Aviation Advisory Publication
CAB Cabin
CAM Cabin Assignment Module
UAE A380 00-40 P 2/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
CAPT Captain
CAS Cabin Attendant Seat
CAT Category
CAUT Caution
C/B Circuit Breaker
CBMU Circuit Breaker Monitoring Unit
CC Cabin Crew
CCB Cabin Crew Bulletin
CCDA Cabin Crew Digital Assistant
CCL CIDS Caution Light
CCOM Cabin Crew Operating Manual
CCR Credit Card Reader
CCRC Cabin Crew Rest Compartment
CCS Cabin Communication System
CD Compact Disc
CDU Control and Display Unit
CECAM Centralized Cabin Monitoring
CELLI Ceiling Emergency LED Light
CFDS Centralized Fault Display System
CG Center of Gravity
CH Channel
CHG Change
CHK Check
CIDS Cabin Intercommunication Data System
CIN Change Indication Number
CINS Cabin Information Network System
CKPT Cockpit
C/L Check List
CLB Climb
CLG Ceiling
CLR Clear
CLSD Closed
CM Cell Modem
CMC Central Maintenance Computer
CMD Command
CMI Cabin Management Interface
UAE A380 00-40 P 3/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
CMS Central Maintenance System, Cabin Management System

CMT Cabin Management Terminal
CNTL Control
CNTOR Contactor
COC Customer Originated Changes
COMP Compartment
CPT Captain
CPTR Computer
COM Communication
CONF Conference Call on Handset
CONT Continued
CP Crew Panel
CPCU Cabin Pressure Control Unit
CRC Continuous Repetitive Chime, Crew Rest Compartment
CRG Cargo
CRM Crew Resource Management
CRS Course
CRSD Crew Rest Smoke Detection
CRU Central Refrigeration Unit
CRZ Cruise
CSTR Constraint
CSU Cassette Stowage Unit
CT Crew Terminal
CTL Control
CTL PNL Control Panel
CTLR Controller
CTR Center
CTU Cabin Telecommunication Unit
CVMS Cabin Video Monitoring System
CVR Cockpit Voice Recorder
CWLU Cabin Wireless LAN Units
CWS Central Warning System, Cabin Work Station, Crew Work Station
D
Abbreviation Term
dB Decibel
UAE A380 00-40 P 4/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
DC Direct Current
DCC Digital Cockpit Controller
DCL Digital Cabin Logbook
DCR Dock-on Crew Rest
DEG Degree
DES Descent
DEST Destination
DET Detection
DEU Decoder Encoder Unit
DFDR Digital Flight Data Recorder
DFS Duty Free Shop
DIM Dimming
DIR Direction
DISC Disconnect
DISCH Discharge
DISPL Display
DIST Distance
DSCS Door Slide Control System
DSIP Door and Slide Indication Panel
DSU Data Server Unit
DU Display Unit
DVD Digital Versatile Disc
DVD-ROM Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory
E
Abbreviation Term
EASA European Aviation Safety Agency
E/C Economy Class
ECAM Electronic Centralized Aircraft Monitoring
ECAS Emergency Crew Alerting System
ECS Environmental Control System
EEPMS Emergency Escape Path Marking System
EFF Electronic Flight Folder
EHCS Electronic Handforce Control System
EIS Electronic Instruments System
ELEC Electricity
UAE A380 00-40 P 5/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
ELEV Elevator, Elevation

ELMU Electrical Load Management Unit
ELT Emergency Locator Transmitter
EMER Emergency
EMFL Edge Mounted Flooding Light
EMWS Electromechanical Window Shade
ENG Engine
EOD Explosive Ordnance Disposal
EPSU Emergency Power Supply Unit
EVAC Evacuation
EWD Engine and Warning display
EWS Electrical Window Shade
Abbreviation Term
F/A First Aid
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FAIL Failure
FAP Flight Attendant Panel
FAR Federal Aviation Regulations
F/C First Class
FCC Forward Cargo Compartment
FCOM Flight Crew Operating Manual
FCRC Flight Crew Rest Compartment
FCTM Flight Crew Training Manual
FCU Flush Control Unit
FDAU Flight Data Acquisition Unit
FDB Floor Disconnect Box
FDDU Floppy Disc Drive Unit
FDIU Flight Data Interface Unit
FES Fire Extinguishing System
FF Fast Forward
FL Flight Level
FLT Flight
FM Flight Manual
FMC Flight Management Computer
UAE A380 00-40 P 6/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
F/O First Officer

FOSP Flight Operation Standard Package
FPEEPMS Floor Proximity Emergency Escape Path Marking System
FRP Function Recovery Procedure
FRQ Frequency
FS Full Size (trolley)
FSB Fasten Seat Belt
FSM Fault System Management
FSN Fleet Serial Number
FT Foot, Feet
FT/MN Feet Per Minute
FTSP Floor Temperature Setting Panel
FWC Flight Warning Computer
FWD Forward
FWS Flight Warning System
G
Abbreviation Term
GCS Global Communications Suite
GEN Generator
GFI Ground Fault Interruption
GND Ground
GPRS General Packet Radio Service
GRVTY Gravity
GS Ground Speed
GSM Global System for Mobile Communication
GSP Ground Service Panel
GWDU Galley Waste Disposal Unit
H
Abbreviation Term
HFP Heated Floor Panel
HI High
HP High Pressure
HPV High Pressure Valve
UAE A380 00-40 P 7/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
HS Handset
HZ Hertz
I
Abbreviation Term
IATA International Air Transport Association
IAVM In-Armrest Video Monitor
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
IDENT Identification
IFE In-Flight Entertainment
IFEC In Flight Entertainment Center
IGN Ignition
IMM Immediate
IND Indication
INOP Inoperational
INT Interphone
INTENS Intensity
IP Internet Protocol
IPCU Ice Protection Control Unit
IPRAM Integrated Prerecorded Announcement
IR Inertial Reference
IRS Inertial Reference System
ISPSS In-Seat Power Supply System
J
Abbreviation Term
JAR Joint Aviation Requirements
JB Junction Box
K
Abbreviation Term
KG Kilogram
KT Knot
UAE A380 00-40 P 8/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
L
Abbreviation Term
LAN Local Area Network
LAV Lavatory
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LD Lower Deck
LDCRC Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment
LDF Lower Deck Facilities
LDG Landing
LD LAV Lower Deck Lavatory
LD-MCR Lower Deck - Mobile Crew Rest
LED Light Emitting Diode
LEDU List of Effective Documentary Units
L/G Landing Gear
LGCIU Landing Gear Control Interface Unit
LH Left Hand
LIM Limitation
LO Low
LOM List Of Modifications
LONG Longitude
LP Low Pressure
LRBL Least Risk Bomb Location
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
LSU Lavatory Service Unit
LT Lighting
LVL Level
LWR Lower (or Lower Deck; depending on context)
M
Abbreviation Term
M Main Deck, e.g. for passenger door designation (M1R, M4L, etc)
MAINT Maintenance
MAN Manual
MB Milibar
MCDU Multipurpose Control and Display Unit
UAE A380 00-40 P 9/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
MDCRC Main Deck Crew Rest Compartment

MD Main Deck
MECH Mechanic; mechanical
MED Medium
MEL Minimum Equipment List
MGMT Management
MIC Microphone
MIN Minimum
MINI FAP Mini Flight Attendant Panel (mini-FAP)
MIP Manual Inflation Pushbutton
Misc Miscellaneous
MKR Marker (radio) Beacon
MLW Maximum Design Landing Weight
MMEL Master Minimum Equipment List
MMO Mach Max Operating Speed
MMS Media Message Service
MN Minute
MP-FAP Multi Purpose Flight Attendant Panel
MRT Manual Release Tool
MSA Minimum Safe Altitude
MSG Message
MSL Mean Sea Level
MSN Manufacturer Serial Number
MSU Media Server Unit
MTOW Maximum design Takeoff Weight
MWP Manual Warning Panel
MZFW Maximum design Zero Fuel Weight
Abbreviation Term
N/A Not Applicable
NATS North American Telephone System
NAV Navigation
ND Navigation Display
NLG Nose Landing Gear
NM Nautical Mile
UAE A380 00-40 P 10/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
NOC Network Operations Center

NORM Normal
NS No Smoking
NSS-CC Network Server System-Cabin Communication
NTPD Normal Temperature Pressure Dry
NTS Non Textile Surface
NTSB National Transportation Safety Board
O
Abbreviation Term
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OBCE Onboard Control Equipment
OBRM Onboard Replaceable Module
OCCPD Occupied
OCM Operation Control Module
OCM Oven Control Module
OFF/R Off/Reset
OFST Offset
OHSC Overhead Stowage Compartment
OIT Onboard Information Terminal
OL Outboard Left
OMS Onboard Maintenance System
OMT Onboard Maintenance Terminal
O/P Output
OPP Opposite
OPS Operations
OPT Optional
OR Outboard Right
OSCU Oxygen System Control Unit
OVBD Overboard
OVHD Overhead
OVHT Overheat
OVRD Override
OVSPD Overspeed
OXY Oxygen
O2 Oxygen
UAE A380 00-40 P 11/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
P
Abbreviation Term
PA Passenger Address
PAT Primary Access Terminal
PAX Passenger
PAX SYS IFE Function on FAP
pb, PB Pushbutton
pb sw Pushbutton Switch
PBE Portable Breathing Equipment
PCB Passenger Call Button
PCU Passenger Control Unit
PDF Portable Document Format
PDLS Privacy Door Locking System
PED Portable Electronic Device
PERF Performance
PES Passenger Entertainment System
PIM Programming and Indication Module
PISA Passenger Interface and Supply Adapter
PLS Passenger Lighted Signs
PML Portable Media Loader
P/N Part Number
PNL Panel
POS Position
PR Pressure
PRAM Prerecorded Announcement and Music
PRIO Priority
PRM Passenger with Reduced Mobility
PROC Procedure
PRV Pressure Regulation Valve
PSI Pound per Square Inch
PSIU Passenger Service Information Unit
PSP Pre-Selected Passenger
PSS Passenger Services System
PSU Passenger Service Unit
PT Point
PTP Programming and Test Panel
UAE A380 00-40 P 12/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
PTT Push-To-Talk
PURS Purser
PWCU Potable Water Control Unit
PWDP Potable Water Drain Panel
PWIP Potable Water Indication Panel
PWR Power
PWS Potable Water System
PWSP Potable Water Service Panel
Q
Abbreviation Term
QCCU Quantity Calculation and Control Unit
QRH Quick Reference Handbook
QT Quart (US)
QTY Quantity
R
Abbreviation Term
RA Radio Altitude
RAD/INT Function on ACP in the Cockpit
RADVR Random Access Digital Video Reproducer
RC Repetitive Chime
RCC Remote Control Center
RCDR Recorder
RCL Recall
RCP Radio Control Panel
RCVR Receiver
REG Regulation
REL Release
REV Reverse
REW Rewind
RH Right Hand
R/L Reading Light
RMP Radio Management Panel
ROM Read-Only Memory
UAE A380 00-40 P 13/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
RQRD Required
RS Reset Restore
RSVR Reservoir
RTE Route
RTS Return-To-Seat
RVC Remote Volume Control
RWY Runway
Abbreviation Term
SAT Static Air Temperature
SB Service Bulletin
SC Single Chime
SCR Smart Card Reader
SCS Supplement Cooling System
SCU System Control Unit
SD System Display, Smoke Detection
SDCP Smoke Detection Control Panel
SDCU Smoke Detection Control Unit
SDM Smart Display Unit
SDP Smoke Detection Panel
SDU Seat Display Unit
SEB Seat Electronic Box
SEL Selector, Select
SELCAL Selective Calling System
SEND Send Function on Handset
SEU Seat Electronic Unit
SERV INT Service Interphone
SFCU Seat Function Control Unit
SFE Seller Furnished Equipment
SGS Seat Group Switch
SMS Short Message Service
S/N Serial Number
SOP Standard Operation Procedure
SPD Speed
SPM Seat Power Module
UAE A380 00-40 P 14/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
S/R Seat Row

SSC Single Stroke Chime
SSID Service Set Identifier
SSPC Solid State Power Controller
STAT Static
STBY Standby
STD Standard
STS Status
SVCE INTPH Service Interphone
SW Switch
SYS System
T
Abbreviation Term
TBC To Be Continued
TBD To Be Determined
T/C Tourist Class
TCAS Traffic Collision Alert System Avoidance System
TCS Temperature Control System
TEL Telephone
TEMP Temperature
TK Tank
TMR Timer
T.O. Take Off
TOC Table Of Contents
TSM Trouble Shooting Manual
TTL Taxi, Takeoff and Landing
TU Tapping Unit
U
Abbreviation Term
U Upper Deck, e.g. for passenger door designation (U1R, U2L, etc.)
UD Upper Deck
UP Upper
USB Universal Serial Bus
UAE A380 00-40 P 15/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
V
Abbreviation Term
VC Ventilation Controller
VCC Video Control Center
VCP Video Cassette Player
VCR Video Cassette Recorder
VCU Video Control Unit
VENT Ventilation
VHCU Versatile Heating Control Unit
VHDU Versatile Heating Data Unit
VHF Very High Frequency
VIB Vibration
VLV Valve
VOD Video On Demand
VOL Volume
VTR Video Tape Reproducer
W
Abbreviation Term
WACO Water Cooler
WAP Wireless Access Point
WARN Warning
WBM Weight and Balance Manual
WDB Wall Disconnect Box
WDO Window
WiFi, WIFI, Wi-Fi, WI-FI Wireless Fidelity
WIPDU Water Ice Protection Data Unit
WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
WMFL Wall Mounted Flood Light
WMS Warning and Maintenance System
WOW Weight On Wheels
WSHLD Windshield
WT Weight
UAE A380 00-40 P 16/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
WWP Water Waste Page
X
Abbreviation Term
XML Extensible Markup Language
XMTR Transmitter
Y
Abbreviation Term
YC Yankee Class, Economy Class
Z
Abbreviation Term
Z Zone
UAE A380 00-40 P 17/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
A380
UAE A380 00-40 P 18/18

CCOM 08-Apr-15
INTRODUCTION
UNITS CONVERSION TABLE
A380

Applicable to: ALL
Designation Metric to US US to Metric

LENGTH 1 millimeter (mm) = 0.0394 inch (in) 1 inch (in) = 25.4 millimeter (mm)
1 meter (m) = 3.281 feet (ft) 1 foot (ft) = .3048 meter (m)
1 meter (m) = 1.094 yard (yd) 1 yard (yd) = .914 meter (m)
1 kilometer (km) = .540 nautical mile 1 nautical mile (nm) = 1.852 kilometer
(nm) (km)
SPEED 1 meter/second (m/s) = 3.281 1 foot/second (ft/s) = .03048
feet/second (ft/s) meter/second (m/s)
1 kilometer/hour (km/h) = .540 knot (kt) 1 knot (kt) = 1.852 kilometer/hour (km/h)
WEIGHT 1 gram (g) = 0.353 ounce (oz) 1 ounce (oz) = 28.35 grams (g)
1 kilogram (kg) = 2.2046 pounds (lb) 1 pound (lb) = .4536 kilogram (kg)
1 ton (t) = 2 204.6 pounds (lb) 1 pound (lb) = 0.0004536 ton (t)
FORCE 1 Newton (N) = .2248 pounds (lb) 1 pound (lb) = 4.448 Newtons (N)
1 deca Newton (daN) = 2.248 pounds 1 pound (lb) = .448 deca Newton (daN)
(lb)
PRESSURE 1 BAR = 14.505 pounds per square inch 1 pound per square inch (P.S.I.) = .0689
(P.S.I.) bar
1 millibar (mbar) = 1 hpa = .0145 P.S.I.
1 P.S.I. = 68.92 millibars (mbar) = 68.92
hpa
VOLUME 1 liter (l) = .2642 US Gallons 1 US Gallon = 3.785 liters (l)
1 cubic meter (m3) = 264.2 US Gallons 1 US Gallon = 0.03785 cubic meter (m3)
1 liter (l) = 1.0568 Qt 1 Qt = 0.94625 liter (l)
1 cubic meter (m3) = 1056.8 Qts 1 Qt = 0.000946 cubic meter (m3)
MOMENTUM 1 meter x deca Newton (m. daN) = 88.50 1 pound x inch (lb. in) = .0113 meter x
pound x inch (lb. in) deca Newton (m. DaN)
TEMPERATURE t (°C) = 5/9 {t (°F) - 32} t (°F) = t (°C) x 1.8 + 32
UAE A380 00-50 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
INTRODUCTION
A380
UAE A380 00-50 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
INTRODUCTION
A380 CCOM ON OPS LIBRARY BROWSER (OLB) FAP
A380
LEVEL OF INFORMATION
Applicable to: ALL
To provide an appropriate level of information, three layer have been applied to the CCOM content:
- Layer 1 : This layer of information provides the "need to know" information, to have a global
understanding sufficient to perform all the cabin crew tasks.
- Layer 2 : This layer of information provides the "nice to know" information.
- Layer 3 : This layer of information provides the "expert" level of information, to have a precise and
exhaustive understanding.
UAE A380 00-70 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
INTRODUCTION
A380 CCOM ON OPS LIBRARY BROWSER (OLB) FAP
A380
UAE A380 00-70 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
APPROBATION - AIRWORTHINESS RELATED
PROCEDURES
A380
AIRWORTHINESS RELATED PROCEDURES

Applicable to: ALL
APPROVAL REFERENCE
Approval date: 20-Jan-2015
Approval reference: L25ME1501875
Approved by: Mr Jean francois PETIT-Certification Manager and Cabin Safety
Reason for issue: To comply with Airworthiness Requirements.
LIST OF AIRWORTHINESS RELATED PROCEDURES

Applicable to: ALL
The CCOM procedures that are marked "Airworthiness Related" provide procedures and limitations
that are mandatory, in order to meet cabin safety airworthiness requirements.
These procedures are validated by the Airbus Office of Airworthiness. Modifications to these
procedures must be reviewed by the Operator's National Aviation Authorities for acceptance.
The list of Airworthiness Related procedures as agreed by the EASA Certification Panel is;
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
- Door arming procedure
- Direct View (table of required cabin crew seat occupancy)
- Recommendations for the use of the Forward and Aft Stairs
- Access to Cockpit
- Cockpit door opening from the cabin
- Cockpit door opening from the cabin
- Privacy Door Module Operation
ABNORMAL AND EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
SMOKE AND FIRE PROTECTION (SPECIFIC FOR A380)
- Aft and Forward Stair Smoke Barrier Installation
- LDCRC Smoke/Fire Procedure
UAE A380 001 P 1/2

CCOM 08-Apr-15
APPROBATION - AIRWORTHINESS RELATED
PROCEDURES
A380
EMERGENCY CABIN EVACUATION

- Cabin Crew Duties for Evacuation
- Cabin Crew Assigned Areas (table)
- Emergency Passenger Door Operation (information related to the M3 barber pole, the M1 slide
extension, MIP)
- On Ground Evacuation (information related to the stairs area and the MIP)
- Upper Deck Planned Ditching (complete procedure)
- Unplanned Ditching (information related to M3, MIP, and the stairs area)
ADDITIONAL ABNORMAL / EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
- Bomb on Board ( information related to the Least Risk Bomb Location (LRBL)
- Portability of Main Deck Sliderafts
UAE A380 001 P 2/2

CCOM 08-Apr-15
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
01-10 Aircraft Presentation

General ............................................................................................................................................... 1
01-20 Aircraft Dimensions

Aircraft Dimensions.............................................................................................................................. 1
01-30 Performance
Performance ........................................................................................................................................ 1
01-40 Unpressurized Compartments

Unpressurized Compartments ............................................................................................................. 1
01-50 Flight Controls

Basic Flight Principles.......................................................................................................................... 1
Surface Flight Controls ........................................................................................................................ 2
01-60 Landing Gears

Landing Gears ..................................................................................................................................... 1
01-70 Cargo Compartments

Cargo Compartments .......................................................................................................................... 1
01-80 Cabin Doors

Cabin Doors......................................................................................................................................... 1
UAE A380 01-TOC P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 01-TOC P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
AIRCRAFT PRESENTATION
A380
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
- General: The A380–800 is a long range, twin-aisle, subsonic, civil transportation aircraft.
- Engines: The aircraft has four high bypass, turbofan engines. Two engines are mounted
underneath each wing.
- Cockpit: The cockpit is located between the upper and main deck. The cockpit contains a minimum
of four seats: The captain and first officers seat are at the front of the cockpit, and, the two observer
seats at the back. An additional fifth seat may be installed as an option.
- Aircraft deck layout: The A380–800 has a total of three decks:
• A lower deck: which has the cargo compartments, and a Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment
(LDCRC) (Optional)
• A main deck: which is a passenger cabin, and,
• An upper deck which is also a passenger cabin that extends to the length of the fuselage.
Two staircases provide access between the main deck and the upper deck. One staircase is
located forward of the cabin. The second, a spiral staircase, is located at the rear of the cabin.
- Cabin: The passenger seating configuration may be customized in accordance with the operators
requirements. The A380–800 has been certified for a maximum of 853 passenger seats.
Note: For customized seating configurations the maximum number of crew can be reduced in
accordance with Jar-Ops 1.990.
UAE A380 01-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
A380
UAE A380 01-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
A380
AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
Applicable to: ALL
Aircraft dimensions
AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
The dimensions of the aircraft are measured from the static ground line.
The main dimensions of the A380–800 are:
- Length: 70.400 m (230.97 ft) measured from nose tip to tail tip
- Width: 79.750 m (261.65 ft) measured from wing tip to wing tip
- Height: 24.066 m (78.96 ft) measured from the static ground line to the top of the tail fin.
UAE A380 01-20 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Apr-11
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
A380
UAE A380 01-20 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Apr-11
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
PERFORMANCE
A380
PERFORMANCE
Applicable to: ALL
MAXIMUM DESIGN SPEEDS

- VMO — 340 Knots
- MMO — 0.89
MAXIMUM OPERATING ALTITUDE
43100 feet (FL 431)
Typical A380 International Profile
Note: These curves are given for information only. The approved values are stated in the
Operating Manuals specific to the airline operating the aircraft.
UAE A380 01-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
PERFORMANCE
A380
UAE A380 01-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
UNPRESSURIZED COMPARTMENTS
A380
Applicable to: ALL
Unpressurized Compartments
UAE A380 01-40 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
A380
UAE A380 01-40 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A380
BASIC FLIGHT PRINCIPLES

Applicable to: ALL
A380 Basic Flight Principles
THE FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

The flight control system includes:
- Control inputs from the cockpit, using the rudder pedals, side sticks, rudder trim control panels, and
the pitch trim controls
- A data concentrator which indicates, warnings and maintenance functions
- An electrical back up system, which is used when normal electrical power is not available.
- A Computer that controls the surfaces, and monitors the control surface positions
UAE A380 01-50 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A380
SURFACE FLIGHT CONTROLS

Applicable to: ALL
Flight Control Surfaces
FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES

The function of the flight controls is to manoeuvre the aircraft in manual or Auto Pilot (AP) mode along
the principal axes, roll, yaw and pitch. Roll, yaw and pitch is a three dimensional coordination through
the aircraft's center of gravity
- Roll axis — is the upward and downward movement of wing tips of the aircraft. This is controlled by
the ailerons and spoilers, located on the wings
- Yaw axis — is a movement of the nose of the aircraft from side to side. This is controlled by the
rudders located on the tail fin.
- Pitch axis — is the upward and downward movement of the nose of the aircraft. This movement is
controlled by the Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer and the elevators.
UAE A380 01-50 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
LANDING GEARS
A380
LANDING GEARS
Applicable to: ALL
Landing Gears
The A380–800 landing gear system consists of five gears.

- One Nose Landing Gear (NLG)
- Two Wing Landing gears and,
- Two Body Landing Gears.
UAE A380 01-60 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
LANDING GEARS
A380
The landing gear doors open to enable the extension and retraction of the landing gears. Following
the extension or retraction of the landing gears the landing gear doors close to align with the
aerodynamic profile of the of the wings and the fuselage.
UAE A380 01-60 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
A380
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
Applicable to: ALL
Cargo Compartments Overview
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
The A380–800 has three cargo compartments in the lower deck of the aircraft, all the cargo
compartment doors are located on the right side of the aircraft.
The forward and aft cargo compartments are designed to carry containers and pallets.
The bulk cargo compartment is designed for bulk loading and the transportation of live animals.
UAE A380 01-70 P 1/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
A380
UAE A380 01-70 P 2/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
CABIN DOORS
A380
CABIN DOORS
Applicable to: ALL
Cabin Door Arrangement
The A380–800 cabin doors are fail-safe/plug-type doors which open in a forward direction, parallel to
the fuselage. Normal passenger door operation is in the electrical mode. The cabin doors may be
opened from the outside of the aircraft or, from the inside of the aircraft. If, no electrical power is
available the cabin doors may opened manually.
The A380–800 has 16 type “A” cabin doors.
- There are 5 pairs of doors on the main deck,
UAE A380 01-80 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Apr-11
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
CABIN DOORS
A380
- 3 pairs of doors on the upper deck.

Note: The M3 cabin doors are for emergency use only.
DOOR DIMENSIONS
The type “A” door dimensions are as follows:
Width: 1.262 m (4.14 ft)
Height 1.930 m (6.33 ft)
UAE A380 01-80 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Apr-11
COCKPIT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
02-10 Introduction
02-10-10 General
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT............................................................................................................... 1
02-10-20 Cockpit Component Overview

Cockpit Components Overview............................................................................................................ 1
02-20 Onboard Information Terminal

02-20-10 General
General ................................................................................................................................................ 1
02-20-20 Location
Location ............................................................................................................................................... 1
02-30 Cockpit Seats

02-30-10 General
GENERAL............................................................................................................................................ 1
02-30-20 Location and Description

Location and Description of Cockpit Seats .......................................................................................... 1
02-40 Cockpit Windows

02-40-10 General
General ................................................................................................................................................ 1
02-40-20 Location
Windows location................................................................................................................................. 1
02-40-30 Description and Operation

Sliding Windows .................................................................................................................................. 1
02-50 Escape Rope

ESCAPE ROPE ................................................................................................................................... 1
02-60 Secured Cockpit Door

02-60-10 General
General ................................................................................................................................................ 1
UAE A380 02-TOC P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
02-60-20 Location
COCKPIT DOOR Location...................................................................................................................1

Description ...........................................................................................................................................1
Operation..............................................................................................................................................4
02-60-40 Controls and Indicators

General.................................................................................................................................................1
Keypad .................................................................................................................................................2
Deadbolt...............................................................................................................................................4
CKPT door panel..................................................................................................................................4
02-70 Flight Crew Rest Compartment

02-70-10 General
Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Introduction ......................................................................................1
02-70-20 Location
Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Location ..........................................................................................1

Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Entrance Door..................................................................................1
Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Bunks...............................................................................................6
Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Info Panel.........................................................................................9
Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Folding Table .................................................................................10
Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Stowage Compartments ................................................................11
Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Additional Equipment.....................................................................11
Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Safety Installations.........................................................................11
Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Evacuation .....................................................................................12

Entrance Door - Keypad.......................................................................................................................1
Entrance Door - Visual Indicators.........................................................................................................1
Entrance Door - Opening System ........................................................................................................1
Entrance Door - Dead Bolt Indicator ....................................................................................................2
Entrance Door - Dead Bolt Slider .........................................................................................................2
UAE A380 02-TOC P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
02-90 Avionics Bay

MAIN AvionicS bay .............................................................................................................................. 1
02-100 Cockpit Oxygen

02-100-10 General
General ................................................................................................................................................ 1
02-100-20 Fixed Oxygen System Description

Oxygen System Description ................................................................................................................ 1
02-100-30 Oxygen-Controls and Indicators

Location ............................................................................................................................................... 1
Overhead Panel................................................................................................................................... 2
Oxygen Indications on ECAM DOOR Page......................................................................................... 3
Cockpit mask stowage box .................................................................................................................. 5
02-100-40 Cockpit Masks

Flight Crew Oxygen Mask.................................................................................................................... 1
Controls and Indicators........................................................................................................................ 2
How to stow the mask.......................................................................................................................... 5
How to Don the Mask........................................................................................................................... 7
02-100-50 Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE)

General ................................................................................................................................................ 1
02-110 Cockpit Panels Related to Cabin Systems

02-110-10 General
General ................................................................................................................................................ 1
02-110-20 Location
VENT Panel ......................................................................................................................................... 1
Electrical Power ................................................................................................................................... 2
Air Conditioning ................................................................................................................................... 4
Communications .................................................................................................................................. 5
Lights ................................................................................................................................................... 6
Oxygen ................................................................................................................................................ 7
Cabin Systems..................................................................................................................................... 8
Doors ................................................................................................................................................... 9
UAE A380 02-TOC P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380

02-110-30-21 Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning Panel..........................................................................................................................1
VENT Panel..........................................................................................................................................3
02-110-30-23 Communications
ELT Panel.............................................................................................................................................1
EVAC Panel .........................................................................................................................................2
Calls Panel ...........................................................................................................................................4
RMP .....................................................................................................................................................7
Outside Cockpit-call Components ........................................................................................................9
Cockpit Handset.................................................................................................................................11
02-110-30-24 Electrical Power

ELEC panel ..........................................................................................................................................1
CABIN Panel ........................................................................................................................................4
02-110-30-33 Lights
PAX SIGNS Overhead Panel...............................................................................................................1
EMER EXIT LT Overhead Panel..........................................................................................................5
02-110-30-35 Oxygen
Oxygen Controls and Indicators...........................................................................................................1
Oxygen Maintenance Panel .................................................................................................................3
02-110-30-44 Cabin Systems

Entertainment Panel.............................................................................................................................1
02-110-30-52 Doors
CKPT Door Panel.................................................................................................................................1
DOOR/OXY System Display ................................................................................................................3
02-120 Cockpit Emergency Equipment

Cockpit Emergency Equipment ............................................................................................................1
UAE A380 02-TOC P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
INTRODUCTION
General
A380
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
Applicable to: ALL
The A380 Cockpit is designed for maximum comfort and convenience, providing various types of
equipments and stowage possibilities.
In addition, the cockpit is thermally and acoustically insulated.
UAE A380 02-10-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
INTRODUCTION
General
A380
UAE A380 02-10-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
INTRODUCTION
Cockpit Component Overview
A380
COCKPIT COMPONENTS OVERVIEW

Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188,
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Cockpit Components Overview
UAE A380 02-10-20 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
INTRODUCTION
Cockpit Component Overview
A380
COCKPIT COMPONENTS OVERVIEW

Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0216,
0225-0229, 0241-0244
Cockpit Components Overview
UAE A380 02-10-20 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
ONBOARD INFORMATION TERMINAL
General
A380
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The A380 cockpit is equipped with two Onboard Information Terminals (OIT). These terminals are
available for CCOM consultation.
UAE A380 02-20-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
General
A380
UAE A380 02-20-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
Location
A380
LOCATION
Applicable to: ALL
Onboard Information Terminals
UAE A380 02-20-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
Location
A380
UAE A380 02-20-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
General
A380
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The A380 cockpit has:

- Adjustable seats for both pilots
- An adjustable rotating seat for the third occupant
- A folding seat for the fourth occupant (the fifth occupant seat is optional).
Each seat has a shoulder harness .
UAE A380 02-30-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
General
A380
UAE A380 02-30-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
Location and Description
A380
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF COCKPIT SEATS

Applicable to: MSN 0007-0009, 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184,
0190-0216, 0225-0229, 0241-0244
Location of the Cockpit Seats
UAE A380 02-30-20 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
A380
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Location of the Cockpit Seats
UAE A380 02-30-20 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
A380
Applicable to: ALL
Captain and First Officer Seats
The Captain (CAPT) and First Officer (F/O) seats are symmetrical, and have the same functions.
Both seats are electrically powered to: L2
- Move the seats backwards and forwards, horizontally and vertically.

- Provide floor lighting.
Manuals controls enable the flight crew to:
- Adjust the seats.
- Override the electrical controls, if necessary.
UAE A380 02-30-20 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
A380
All backrest adjustments can only be mechanically controlled.

Third Occupant's Seat
The third occupant's seat is similar to the Captain's or the First Officer's seat. It can only be
mechanically controlled, and can rotate.
In its extreme forward position, the seat can rotate clockwise, to a 90° position. L2
The third occupant's life vest is stowed in the backrest of the Captain's seat.
UAE A380 02-30-20 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
A380
Fourth Occupant's Seat
The fourth occupant's seat is a folding seat, and cannot be adjusted.

To use the seat, the occupant can fold the seat down. When not in use, the seat will automatically fold L2
back to its stowed position.

The fourth occupant's life vest is stowed in the backrest of the First Officer's seat.
UAE A380 02-30-20 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
A380
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The fifth occupant seat does not have an adjustment device.

Fifth Occupant's Seat
The fifth occupant's seat is a folding seat, and cannot be adjusted.

It is attached to the wall that is at the entrance of the cockpit.
To use the seat, the occupant can fold the seat down. When not in use, the seat will automatically fold L2
back to its stowed position.
UAE A380 02-30-20 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
COCKPIT WINDOWS
General
A380
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The cockpit is equipped with fixed and sliding windows, that are installed at the front and sides of the
cockpit.
There are four fixed windows:
- Two are located on each side of the cockpit, and are fitted with an anti-icing and defogging system.
- Two are located on the front windshield, and are also part of the integral security type, specifically
designed to protect against bird impact.
There are two sliding windows:
- They are located on each side of the windshield, and can be used as an emergency exit.
UAE A380 02-40-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT WINDOWS
General
A380
UAE A380 02-40-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT WINDOWS
Location
A380
WINDOWS LOCATION
Applicable to: ALL
Windows Location
UAE A380 02-40-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT WINDOWS
Location
A380
UAE A380 02-40-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT WINDOWS
Description and Operation
A380
SLIDING WINDOWS
Applicable to: ALL
The sliding windows can be opened from the inside.

The flight crew can use them as emergency exits: There is a small compartment located above each
sliding window that contains an escape rope. Refer to 02-50 ESCAPE ROPE
The sliding window is a type 4 emergency exit. L3
L1
Note: Do not stow objects in the sliding window area, to ensure the sliding windows can be opened
when necessary.
Sliding Windows
UAE A380 02-40-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A380
HOW TO OPERATE SLIDING WINDOWS

Each sliding window has a control handle to open or close the window. The control handle can be
manipulated by the cabin crew, without power assistance.
TO OPEN THE SLIDING WINDOWS
- Press and hold the unlock pb, until the red unlock indicator comes on to show that the window is
unlocked.
- Pull out the control handle. This will free the sliding window from its fixed frame.
- Move the sliding window backward.
TO CLOSE THE SLIDING WINDOWS
- Press and hold the unlock pb, until the red unlock indicator comes on to show that the window is
unlocked.
- Move the sliding window forward in front of its fixed frame.
- Push the control handle. This will move the sliding window into its frame and lock the sliding
window.
For SOP:Refer to 13-130 Cockpit Sliding Window Operation
UAE A380 02-40-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
ESCAPE ROPE
A380
ESCAPE ROPE
Applicable to: ALL
The emergency evacuation procedure enables the crew to evacuate the cockpit by opening the sliding
windows and using a 8.6 m(28.2 ft ) long knotted rope (Refer to 14-50 Cockpit Evacuation Through
Window).
The rope is stored above each sliding window, on either side of the overhead panel.
The cover plate of each stowage compartment (indicated with red labels) is held closed by velcro
enabling it to be opened quickly.
The ropes and their attachments can support a load of 181.6 kg (400.4 lb). L2
Escape rope
L1
UAE A380 02-50 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
ESCAPE ROPE
A380
UAE A380 02-50 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
SECURED COCKPIT DOOR
General
A380
GENERAL
A forward-opening hinge door separates the cockpit from the cabin. It has an electric-locking latch, that
the flight crew controls.
The cabin crew requests access to the cockpit via a keypad.
There are two entry modes:
- Normal
- Emergency.
The door is bulletproof and fully compliant with rapid decompression requirements.
A mechanical override enables the flight crew to open the door from inside the cockpit.
GENERAL
A forward-opening hinge door separates the cockpit from the cabin. It has an electric-locking latch, that
the flight crew controls.
The cabin crew requests access to the cockpit via a keypad.
There are two entry modes:
- Normal
- Emergency.
The door is bulletproof and fully compliant with rapid decompression requirements.
A mechanical override enables the flight crew to open the door from inside the cockpit.
The flight crew can lock the door by using the deadbolt.
UAE A380 02-60-10 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
General
A380
UAE A380 02-60-10 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
COCKPIT DOOR LOCATION

Applicable to: ALL
Cockpit Door Location
UAE A380 02-60-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
Location
A380
UAE A380 02-60-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
A380
DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
COCKPIT DOOR DESCRIPTION

COCKPIT DOOR DESCRIPTION
PROTECTION AGAINST DECOMPRESSION

In the case of rapid decompression in the cockpit:
- The pressure sensors enable the upper decompression panel to open forward
- The cockpit door is unlocked automatically.
UAE A380 02-60-30 P 1/4

CCOM 06-Oct-11
COCKPIT
A380
The upper decompression panels automatically opens, if the differential pressure between the L2
cabin and the cockpit is at, or above 0.145 PSI.

In the case of rapid decompression in the cabin: L1
- The escape panel opens automatically

The escape panel automatically opens, if the pressure in the cockpit is more than approximately L2
0.5 PSI. (in the range of 0.435 PSI-0.580 PSI)

ESCAPE PANEL L1
If required, it is possible to evacuate the cockpit through the escape panel.Refer to 14-50 Cockpit
Evacuation Through Cockpit Door
The flight crew can open the escape panel if:
- The cockpit door is jammed in the closed position, or
- There is an emergency.
The flight crew can open the escape panel with the flap release mechanism by:
- Rotating the handle cover in order to access the panel release handle
- Pushing the panel release handle, and turning it in any direction in order to unlock the escape
panel.
If the escape panel is unlocked, the locked indicator is red.
UAE A380 02-60-30 P 2/4

CCOM 06-Oct-11
COCKPIT
A380
ESCAPE PANEL
UAE A380 02-60-30 P 3/4

CCOM 06-Oct-11
COCKPIT
A380
OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
COCKPIT DOOR OPERATION

The cabin crew uses the keypad to request access to the cockpit. There are two types of cockpit
access request:
NORMAL ACCESS:
Refer to 13-120 Cockpit Door Opening From the Cabin
To request access to the cockpit, the cabin crew types a code, and validates it using the “#” key, on
the keypad.
The Operator defines this code (between 0 and 7 digits). L2
A buzzer sounds in the cockpit for 2 seconds with an audio message “DOOR PLEASE”. L1
After the flight crew identifies the person requesting access, they can unlock the door with the
CKPT DOOR sw.
EMERGENCY ACCESS:
Refer to 14-50 Cockpit Evacuation Through Cockpit Door
If necessary, emergency access to the cockpit can be requested.
To request emergency access to the cockpit, the cabin crew types an emergency code, and
validates it using the “#” key, on the keypad.
The Operator defines this emergency code (between 2 and 7 digits). L2
A buzzer sounds in the cockpit until the flight crew unlocks, or locks the door using the CKPT L1
DOOR sw.
If the flight crew does not respond, the door automatically unlocks for 5 s after 30 s (default time
period).
The Operator can define this time-period (between 15 and 120 seconds). L2
UAE A380 02-60-30 P 4/4

CCOM 06-Oct-11
COCKPIT
Controls and Indicators
A380
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
General
UAE A380 02-60-40 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380
KEYPAD
Applicable to: ALL
Keypad Control
UAE A380 02-60-40 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380
DOOR INDICATORS
The CKPT DOOR sw is set to UNLOCK, by the flight crew.
The door is not locked, and can be opened.
The CKPT DOOR sw is set to LOCK, by the flight crew. L12
The door is locked, and cannot be opened.

The keypad cannot be used.
The Operator defines the locking time-period (between 5 to 20 minutes).
Any key is pressed.
NUMBER KEYS
Enables the cabin crew to enter the access code:
Normal access: Zero to seven digit code (to be programmed by the Operator)
Emergency access: Two to seven digit code (to be programmed by the
Operator).
VALIDATION KEY
Validates a code.
UAE A380 02-60-40 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380
DEADBOLT
Applicable to: ALL
DEADBOLT
When turned to the left, unlocks the Cockpit Door Module.
When turned to the right, locks the Cockpit Door Module.
CKPT DOOR PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
COCKPIT DOOR PANEL
UAE A380 02-60-40 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380
CKPT DOOR SW
The door is unlocked.
The door is locked. L12
The door automatically locks when it closes.

Note: If the cabin crew enters the emergency access code on the keypad,
the door automatically unlocks for 5 seconds, after a defined
time-period.
The Operator defines this time–period .
The keypad and the buzzer are inhibited for a defined time-period.
The Operator defines this time-period (between 5 and 20 minutes).
Note: When the switch is released, it returns to the NORM position.
COCKPIT DOOR INDICATION

: Steady: the door is open.
Flashing: An emergency access code is entered on the keypad.
: Steady : the automatic locking and unlocking of the cockpit door

is failed.
The cockpit door can be locked, and unlocked manually using the
dead bolt.
Flashing : the CDLS is off, and the door is free to open from the
cockpit or from the cabin.
UAE A380 02-60-40 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380
COCKPIT DOOR INDICATOR

Steady: The door is open.
The automatic locking and unlocking of the cockpit door is failed.

The cockpit door can be locked, and unlocked manually using the dead bolt.
UAE A380 02-60-40 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT
General
A380
FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT - INTRODUCTION

Applicable to: MSN 0011-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188
The Flight Crew Rest Compartment (FCRC) offers a little privacy to the flight crewmembers in their
off-duty times. To enable the occupants to relax or to sleep, the FCRC absorbs background noise from
the aircraft and the cabin.
UAE A380 02-70-10 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
General
A380
UAE A380 02-70-10 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT - LOCATION

Overview (Including FCRC Entrance Door Location)
UAE A380 02-70-20 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
UAE A380 02-70-20 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT - ENTRANCE DOOR

The flight crew can enter the Flight Crew Rest Compartment (FCRC) via the entrance door on the left
hand aisle.
A keypad lock secures the closed entrance door against opening by unauthorized persons.
On the crew rest side, the entrance door can be locked by a dead bolt, e.g. in case of a keypad lock
failure.
Note: If the entrance door is locked by the dead bolt from the crew rest side, the entrance door
cannot be opened via the keypad anymore.
On the cabin side of the entrance door, a dead bolt indicator shows whether the dead bolt currently
locks the entrance door or not (Refer to Entrance Door - Dead Bolt Indicator).
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 1/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
HOW TO OPERATE THE ENTRANCE DOOR

HOW TO ENTER THE FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT
Keypad Lock Panel - Cabin Side
In the figure above, the door unlock lever is shown in the locked position.
1. Enter the access code by using the keypad.
Note: The access code is defined by the airline.
2. Turn the door unlock lever clockwise.
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 2/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
CAUTION Do not turn the door unlock lever counter-clockwise. Otherwise a mechanical
failure of the keypad lock is possible.
If the code was entered correctly, the visual indicators will turn green. If this is not the case L2
repeat step 1 and 2.

3. Pull at the door unlock lever to open the entrance door. L1
4. Turn the door unlock lever back to the locking position.

The visual indicators turn red. L2
HOW TO CLOSE AND LOCK THE ENTRANCE DOOR L1
Use the door unlock lever to close the entrance door.

Note: To easily close the entrance door, turn the door unlock lever. From the cabin side, turn the
door unlock lever clockwise.
CAUTION From the cabin side, do not turn the door unlock lever counter-clockwise. Otherwise
a mechanical failure of the keypad lock is possible.
The entrance door is closed correctly if you can hear a click. L2
L1
Note: If the entrance door is closed correctly, it is locked automatically by the keypad lock.
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 3/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
HOW TO LOCK / UNLOCK THE ENTRANCE DOOR USING THE DEAD BOLT
Keypad Lock Panel - Crew Rest Side
Push the dead bolt slider to the opposite side.
- The entrance door is locked by the dead bolt when the dead bolt slider is on the left side.
- The entrance door is not locked by the dead bolt when the dead bolt slider is on the right side.
HOW TO LEAVE THE FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT
1. Turn the door unlock lever in any direction to unlock the entrance door.
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 4/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
2. Push the door unlock lever to open the entrance door.

HOW TO OVERRIDE THE LOCKED ENTRANCE DOOR L2
For information about how to override the locked entrance door Refer to Keypad Lock and Dead
Bolt Override from the Cabin Side
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 5/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT - BUNKS

The bunks enable the flight crew to relax or to sleep during the flight. To ensure privacy, each bunk has
a curtain.
Each bunk has its own Personal Service Unit, which is installed in the lining above. When entering a
bunk, always place the head at the bunk end with the Personal Service Unit, to ensure access to the
oxygen mask in case of an abnormal situation.
It is possible to convert the two bunks to a seat bench.
HOW TO CONVERT THE BUNKS
Note: Two placards on the front side of the upper bunk explain how to convert the bunks.
HOW TO CONVERT THE BUNKS TO A SEAT BENCH
Note: Before converting the bunks to a seat bench, open the curtain of the lower bunk and secure
it in the fully open position.
On the lower bunk:
1. Lift both cubic mattress inserts (Step A).
Converting the Bunks to a Seat Bench - Figure 1
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 6/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
2. Unlock both latches in the holes formerly covered by the cubic mattress inserts (Step B).
3. Insert two fingers of each hand into the small holes in the surface of the mattress.
4. Pull (the movable part of) the mattress as far as possible into the aisle to extend the seat base
(Step C).
5. Lock both latches in the holes formerly covered by the cubic mattress inserts.
6. Restore both cubic mattress inserts.
7. Take the seat belts out of the gap in the mattress (See CONVERTING THE BUNKS TO A SEAT
BENCH - FIGURE 2 ).
On the upper bunk:
1. Support the upper bunk using one hand.
2. Unlock the latches on the front side of the upper bunk (Step D).
3. Carefully lower the front side of the mattress until it reaches the mattress of the lower bunk.
Converting the Bunks to a Seat Bench - Figure 2
Now the seat bench is ready for use. The mattress of the upper bunk is the seatback, the mattress
of the lower bunk is the seatpan.
Note: To ensure personal safety, always use the seat belts when sitting on the seat bench.
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 7/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
HOW TO CONVERT THE SEAT BENCH TO BUNKS

On the seatback:
1. Lift the bottom side of the mattress until the mattress is horizontal and hold it.
2. Push backwards (the movable part of) the mattress as far as possible.
3. Lock both latches on the front side of the upper bunk.
On the seatpan:
1. Stow the seat belts in the recess behind the mattress (See CONVERTING THE BUNKS TO A
SEAT BENCH - FIGURE 2 ).
2. Lift both cubic mattress inserts.
3. Unlock both latches in the holes formerly covered by the cubic mattress inserts.
4. Push (the movable part of) the mattress backwards as far as possible.
5. Lock both latches in the holes formerly covered by the cubic mattress inserts.
6. Restore both cubic mattress inserts.
Now the bunks are ready for use.
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 8/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT - INFO PANEL

Info Panel Parts
(1) Mini FAP

(2) Loudspeaker
(3) Handset
(4) Power Outlet (Vacuum Cleaner)
MINI FAP
The mini FAP enables the occupants of the Flight Crew Rest Compartment (FCRC) to control and/or to
monitor the main systems of the FCRC:
- Lights
For more information: Refer to Crew Rest Area Illumination Control via FAP / Mini FAP or Refer to
How to Control the Crew Rest Area Illumination via FAP / Mini FAP
- Air conditioning / temperature control
For more information: Refer to General Information about Air Conditioning
- Smoke detection
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 9/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
For more information: Refer to Description of the Smoke Detection System

LOUDSPEAKER
The loudspeaker transmits:
- Announcements/messages sent by a crewmember in the cabin or by the flight crew in the cockpit
- Acoustic warning signals in case of abnormal situations.
HANDSET
The handset enables the internal communication between the occupants of the Flight Crew Rest
Compartment (FCRC) and the flight crew in the cockpit or the cabin crew.
For more information: Refer to Handset Description
POWER OUTLET
This power outlet supplies power to e.g. a shaver or a vacuum cleaner.
FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT - FOLDING TABLE

To save space in the flight crew rest compartment (FCRC), the installed table is a wall-mounted folding
table.
When in use, the folding table has a load limit of 68 kg / 150 lbs.
CAUTION Do not sit on the folding table or exceed its load limit. This will cause damage to the
folding table.
HOW TO OPERATE THE FOLDING TABLE

HOW TO FOLD OUT THE FOLDING TABLE
1. Unlock the double slam latch at the upper end of the stowed folding table.
2. Lower the folding table until it is horizontal.
HOW TO STOW THE FOLDING TABLE
1. Lift the folding table until it is vertical.
2. Make sure that the double slam latch has clicked.
The folding table is locked.
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 10/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT - STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS

There are three stowage compartments for the occupants of the Flight Crew Rest Compartment
(FCRC):
- A bigger one, e.g. for coats and crew items, on the right hand wall.
- A smaller one, e.g. for shoes, on the right hand wall.
- One for flat items below the bunks.
This stowage compartment is a drawer.
All stowage compartments are secured against uncontrolled opening by double slam latches.
FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT - ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT

LCD SCREEN 
An LCD screen is installed in the ceiling at the foot end of each bunk. If a bunk occupant wants to use
the LCD screen, it can be fold down manually.
LOUDSPEAKER
The loudspeaker is installed in the ceiling of the crew rest compartment.
It transmits:
- Announcements/messages sent by a crewmember in the cabin or by the flight crew in the cockpit.
STOOL 
At the wall on the opposite side of the bunks, there is a folding stool installed.
If a crew rest occupant wants to sit, the stool has to be operated like a cinema seat.
FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT - SAFETY INSTALLATIONS

EMERGENCY LIGHT
The emergency light illuminates the area where it is installed.
To get more information Refer to Emergency Lighting - Overview
SMOKE DETECTOR
The smoke detector is installed in the ceiling. It detects smoke in the area, where it is installed and
gives an alert to the flight crew in the cockpit and the cabin crew in the cabin.
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 11/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT - EVACUATION

In case of an emergency situation, a quick evacuation of the Flight Crew Rest Compartment (FCRC)
could be essential. The preferred evacuation path is through the entrance door of the FCRC.
If the way through the entrance door is blocked (e.g. by a fire), there is a second evacuation path
through the wall that separates the FCRC from the Cabin Crew Rest Compartment (CCRC).
EVACUATION PATH THROUGH THE WALL
There is an escape hatch between the FCRC and the CCRC leading through the wall.
1. Remove the escape hatch from the wall and put it aside.
a. Pull at both latch covers and put them aside.
Escape Hatch - Overview
b. Turn the D-ring handle of the latches in the direction shown on the placard until the escape
hatch is unlocked.
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 12/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
Escape Hatch - Latches
c. Push the escape hatch through the wall, into the CCRC.
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 13/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
Removing the Escape Hatch
2. Climb through the hole in the wall.

3. Leave the CCRC through the entrance door of the CCRC.
UAE A380 02-70-30 P 14/14

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
ENTRANCE DOOR - KEYPAD

The flight crew uses these keys to enter the Operator-defined access code.
ENTRANCE DOOR - VISUAL INDICATORS

When the visual indicators are red, the entrance door is locked.
When the visual indicators are green, the entrance door is unlocked.
ENTRANCE DOOR - OPENING SYSTEM

The door unlock lever is in vertical position: The entrance door is locked.
From the cabin side:
When turned clockwise, the entrance door is unlocked.
From the crew rest side:
When turned in any direction, the entrance door is unlocked.
UAE A380 02-70-40 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
A380
ENTRANCE DOOR - DEAD BOLT INDICATOR

The dead bolt is activated from the crew rest side.

The entrance door cannot be opened via the keypad.
The dead bolt is released from the crew rest side.
The entrance door can be opened via the keypad.
ENTRANCE DOOR - DEAD BOLT SLIDER

- When pushed to the left, the entrance door is locked by the dead bolt.
- When pushed to the right, the entrance door is not locked by the dead bolt.
UAE A380 02-70-40 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
AVIONICS BAY
A380
MAIN AVIONICS BAY

Applicable to: ALL
MAIN AVIONICS BAY

The main avionics bay is accessible from :
- The cockpit, through a hatch
This hatch is in the floor behind the Captain's seat. A ladder is fixed in the avionics compartment for
access from the cockpit.
- The forward cargo compartment through two doors
- The exterior of the aircraft, an inward opening hatch provides external access to the avionics
compartment.
This hatch is on the lower part of the fuselage and is forward left of the Nose Landing Gear (NLG)
bay.
It may be manually operated from the interior as well as exterior.
A telescopic ladder is stored near the door, and can be deployed when needed.
Main Avionics Bay
UAE A380 02-90 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
AVIONICS BAY
A380
UAE A380 02-90 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
General
A380
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The oxygen system is designed to supply oxygen to the flight crew.

The oxygen system has a:
- Fixed oxygen system in the cockpit, that supplies adequate oxygen to the cockpit occupants in the
case of depressurization or emission of smoke and noxious gases.
- Fixed oxygen system in the cabin, that supplies oxygen to the cabin occupants (passengers and
cabin crew) in case of depressurization.
- Portable oxygen system for the cockpit and cabin, that is to be used as protection for the crew
during in-flight emergencies, or for first aid purposes.
Oxygen System Location
UAE A380 02-100-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
General
A380
UAE A380 02-100-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
Fixed Oxygen System Description
A380
OXYGEN SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Applicable to: ALL
The fixed oxygen system in the cockpit has:

- One oxygen bottle, located in the upper avionics bay.
- An overboard discharge indicator. This indicator is normally green. The indicator turns yellow, if
there is any overpressure in the oxygen system. The overboard discharge indicator is installed on
the fuselage skin visible from the outside of aircraft.
- A pressure-reducer transmitter. This is connected directly to the oxygen bottle, and supplies oxygen
at a pressure suitable for the user.
It has a relief valve that can discharge oxygen overboard, in the case of overpressure. L2
Overpressure will be indicated by the overboard discharge indicator.

- A supply valve. This is normally open. The flight crew can manually close the valve to stop oxygen L1
supply by using the CREW SUPPLY pb-sw that is on the OXYGEN Overhead Panel.
- Four (five) oxygen mask. Each mask covers the entire face, and it's stowed in its own stowage box.
The stowage box is next to each flight crew station.
UAE A380 02-100-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
Fixed Oxygen System Description
A380
Fixed Oxygen System for the Cockpit
UAE A380 02-100-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
Oxygen-Controls and Indicators
A380
LOCATION
Applicable to: ALL
UAE A380 02-100-30 P 1/6

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A380
OVERHEAD PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
Oxygen Cockpit Panel
CREW SUPPLY PB-SW

The CREW SUPPLY pb-sw controls oxygen supply to the masks in the cockpit.
pb-sw pressed, (normal position during flight). The supply valve is open, and
supplies oxygen to the masks.
The OFF legend comes on white. The supply valve is closed, and doesn't supply
oxygen to the masks.
UAE A380 02-100-30 P 2/6

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A380
OXYGEN INDICATIONS ON ECAM DOOR PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The ECAM is located in the cockpit on the center pedestral. It is defined as the centralized aircraft
systems/configuration monitoring, and helps the crew to maintain the aircraft in a safe and permanent
operational status.
The ECAM DOOR page displays oxygen system information.
Cockpit Oxygen System Indications
UAE A380 02-100-30 P 3/6

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A380
CKPT INDICATION
Normal operation of the oxygen system. L12
On ground, it indicates that the oxygen capacity is sufficient for two flight
crewmembers.
- The oxygen system is off (the CREW SUPPLY pb-sw is OFF) L12
The REGUL PR LO indication also appear.

Or
- The oxygen system has low pressure.
The CKPT indication appears with:
• The REGUL PR LO indication, on ground, if there is a low pressure in the
distribution manifold
• The oxygen pressure value appears in amber, if low pressure is detected in
the oxygen bottle.
Associated with the following ECAM alert: OXY CKPT BOTTLE PRESS LO.
OXYGEN PRESSURE VALUE
The pressure is equal to, or above the minimum necessary to dispatch the aircraft
with four flight crewmembers.
On ground only, appears with the amber half-frame, if: The pressure is below the
minimum necessary to dispatch the aircraft with four flight crewmembers.
However, the pressure may be sufficient to dispatch the aircraft with less than four
flight crewmembers.
Low pressure is detected in the oxygen bottle. L12
This occurs, when the pressure is below 350 PSI.

Associated with the following ECAM alert: OXY CKPT BOTTLE PRESS LO .
REGUL PR LO INDICATION
Appears on ground, when: L12
- The oxygen CREW SUPPLY pb-sw is OFF, or

- The oxygen pressure in the oxygen distribution manifold is low.
Oxygen pressure is low, if it goes below 47 PSI.
UAE A380 02-100-30 P 4/6

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A380
COCKPIT MASK STOWAGE BOX

Applicable to: ALL
Mask Stowage Box
UAE A380 02-100-30 P 5/6

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A380
OXYGEN FLOW INDICATOR

Oxygen is flowing.
Oxygen is not flowing.
PRESS TO TEST AND RESET PB

When pressed, the PRESS TO TEST AND RESET pb either tests, or resets, the
oxygen system.
- If the mask has not been taken out of the stowage box (OXY ON flag is not
visible), this pushbutton tests the oxygen system.
When the system is operating correctly, the oxygen flow indicator will be yellow
for a few seconds.
- If the mask has been taken out of the stowage box and restowed (OXY ON flag
is visible), this pushbutton resets the oxygen system. In this case:
• The oxygen supply to the mask is cut off
• The mask microphone is deactivated
• The OXY ON flag disappears.
OXY ON FLAG
As soon as the mask is pulled out of its stowage box, oxygen flows to the mask,
and the left door of the stowage box is closed again, the OXY ON flag appears.
UAE A380 02-100-30 P 6/6

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
Cockpit Masks
A380
FLIGHT CREW OXYGEN MASK

Applicable to: ALL
Flight Crew Oxygen Mask
UAE A380 02-100-40 P 1/8

CCOM 08-Oct-14
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
Cockpit Masks
A380
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

Applicable to: ALL
Regulator
UAE A380 02-100-40 P 2/8

CCOM 08-Oct-14
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
Cockpit Masks
A380
RED GRIPS
When the red grips are pressed together, the harness inflates.
When the red grips are released, the harness deflates.
EMERGENCY SELECTOR
For prevent smoke, smell, ashes from entering the mask, or to remove condensation, the
EMERGENCY selector provides overpressure.
- When pressed, and until released, supplies oxygen overpressure
- When turned, permanently supplies oxygen overpressure.
L2
Note: If the cabin altitude is above 30 000 ft, oxygen overpressure is automatically supplied.
UAE A380 02-100-40 P 3/8

CCOM 08-Oct-14
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
Cockpit Masks
A380
N/100% SELECTOR
The N/100% selector has two positions:
When the selector is set to the 100% position, the mask provides 100% pure
oxygen at all cabin altitudes.
When the selector is set to the "N" position, the mask provides a mixture of ambient L12
air from the cockpit, and oxygen.

The proportion of air and oxygen in the mixture depends on the cabin altitude.
Note: If the cabin altitude is above 30 000 ft, the mask automatically provides 100% oxygen.
UAE A380 02-100-40 P 4/8

CCOM 08-Oct-14
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
Cockpit Masks
A380
HOW TO STOW THE MASK

Applicable to: ALL
How to stow the mask
STEP 1
Coil the hose that is connected to the mask, and put it in the bottom of the stowage box.
STEP 2
Fold the harness, and put it in the mask.
UAE A380 02-100-40 P 5/8

CCOM 08-Oct-14
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
Cockpit Masks
A380
STEP 3
Put the mask in the stowage box.
Make sure that the:
- Mask touches the bottom of the stowage box
- N/100% selector is face up, and at the 100% position.
STEP 4
Close the doors of the mask stowage box.
Firmly press the PRESS TO TEST AND RESET pb.
When released, check that the OXY ON flag disappears.
STEP 5
Press the EMERGENCY selector, and check that the oxygen flow indicator remains black.
UAE A380 02-100-40 P 6/8

CCOM 08-Oct-14
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
Cockpit Masks
A380
HOW TO DON THE MASK

Applicable to: ALL
To don the flight crew oxygen mask:

How to Don the Mask
STEP 1 AND 2
Remove the mask from its stowage box, by squeezing the red grips toward each other, and pulling the
mask out of its box.
UAE A380 02-100-40 P 7/8

CCOM 08-Oct-14
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
Cockpit Masks
A380
The stowage box opens, and the:

- Mask is immediately supplied with oxygen
- Mask harness immediately inflates
- Mask microphone is active.
STEP 3 AND 4
Don the mask, and release the red grips. This will deflate the mask harness, and keep the mask in
position.
Note: The visor of each mask may have a protective film to help prevent scratches. This film is
optional, and can be removed at any time
UAE A380 02-100-40 P 8/8

CCOM 08-Oct-14
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE)
A380
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
For further information regarding Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) Refer to 11-20-10 General
UAE A380 02-100-50 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A380
UAE A380 02-100-50 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT PANELS RELATED TO CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
GENERAL
The following descriptions are relative to the cockpit panels with cabin system interactions:
- Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning:Refer to 02-110-30-21 Air Conditioning Panel L2
- Communications L1
ELT :Refer to 02-110-30-23 ELT Panel L2
EVAC:Refer to 02-110-30-23 EVAC Panel

Calls:Refer to 02-110-30-23 Calls Panel
RMP:Refer to 02-110-30-23 Transmission Keys and Reception Knobs
Outside Cockpit-call Components:Refer to 02-110-30-23 Outside Cockpit-call Components
Cockpit Handset:Refer to 02-110-30-23 Cockpit Handset
- Electrical Power L1
Electrical Power:Refer to 02-110-30-24 ELEC Panel L2
Electrical Power:Refer to 02-110-30-24 CABIN Panel

- Lights L1
Signs:Refer to 02-110-30-33 Signs Overhead Panel L2
Emergency Exit:Refer to 02-110-30-33 EMER EXIT LT Overhead Panel

- Oxygen L1
Oxygen:Refer to 02-110-30-35 Oxygen Panel L2
- Cabin Systems L1
Cabin Systems:Refer to 02-110-30-44 Entertainment Panel L2
- Doors L1
Doors:Refer to 02-110-30-52 CKPT Door Panel L2
DOOR/OXY System Display:Refer to 02-110-30-52 ECAM DOOR/OXY Page
UAE A380 02-110-10 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
General
A380
GENERAL
- Air Conditioning
- Communications L1

- Lights L1

- Oxygen L1
- Cabin Systems L1
- Doors L1
UAE A380 02-110-10 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
General
A380
GENERAL
- Air Conditioning
- Vent Panel L1
Vent panel:Refer to 02-110-30-21 VENT Panel L2
- Communications L1

- Lights L1

- Oxygen L1
- Cabin Systems L1
- Doors L1
UAE A380 02-110-10 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
General
A380
UAE A380 02-110-10 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
VENT PANEL
Typical VENT Panel Location
UAE A380 02-110-20 P 1/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
ELECTRICAL POWER
Typical Electrical Power Panel Location
UAE A380 02-110-20 P 2/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
ELECTRICAL POWER
Typical Electrical Power Panel Location
UAE A380 02-110-20 P 3/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
AIR CONDITIONING
Applicable to: ALL
Typical Air Conditioning Panel Location
UAE A380 02-110-20 P 4/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
COMMUNICATIONS
Applicable to: ALL
Typical Communication Panels Location
UAE A380 02-110-20 P 5/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
LIGHTS
Applicable to: ALL
Typical Passenger Signs Panel Location
UAE A380 02-110-20 P 6/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
OXYGEN
Applicable to: ALL
Typical Oxygen Panel Location
UAE A380 02-110-20 P 7/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
CABIN SYSTEMS
Applicable to: ALL
Typical Entertainment Panel Location
UAE A380 02-110-20 P 8/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
DOORS
Applicable to: ALL
Typical Doors Panel Location
UAE A380 02-110-20 P 9/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
Location
A380
UAE A380 02-110-20 P 10/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380 Air Conditioning
AIR CONDITIONING PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM COCKPIT
CABIN SELECTOR
The cabin temperature is 24 °C (75.2 °F) .
Note: The temperature ranges from 18 °C (64 °F) (COLD) to 30 °C (86 °F)
(HOT).
.
Cabin temperature regulation is only controlled from the Flight Attendant

Panel (FAP).
UAE A380 02-110-30-21 P 1/4

CCOM 04-Apr-12
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SELECTOR
The cockpit temperature is 24 °C (75.2 °F) .
Note: The temperature ranges from 18 °C (64 °F) (COLD) to 30 °C (86 °F)
(HOT) .
.
UAE A380 02-110-30-21 P 2/4

CCOM 04-Apr-12
COCKPIT
VENT PANEL
SUPPLEMENTAL COOLING SYSTEM
The COOLG pb-sw is in the normal position.

A Supplemental Cooling capacity is automatically provided to cool food and
beverage trolleys in the galleys.
The Supplemental Cooling System is OFF.
The Supplemental Cooling System is failed.
UAE A380 02-110-30-21 P 3/4

CCOM 04-Apr-12
COCKPIT
UAE A380 02-110-30-21 P 4/4

CCOM 04-Apr-12
COCKPIT
A380 Communications
ELT PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
ELT panel
ELT LIGHT
The ELT is not transmitting.
The ELT is either transmitting, or running a self-test.

Note: If the ELT is transmitting when the aircraft is on the ground, the
external horn sounds.
UAE A380 02-110-30-23 P 1/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
COCKPIT
A380 Communications
ELT SELECTOR
The Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) is armed, and automatically
transmits the emergency radio signal, when the aircraft sustains an abnormal
load factor
The ELT is on, and transmits the emergency radio signal
- The ELTstops transmitting, or

- An ELTself-test starts.
EVAC PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
Evac Panel
UAE A380 02-110-30-23 P 2/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
COCKPIT
A380 Communications
COMMAND PB
No evacuation is ordered by the Captain or by the Chief Purser.
Evacuation is ordered by the Chief Purser. The EVAC light flashes and the horn
sounds in the cockpit.
When pressed:
- The ON and the EVAC lights come on
- The horn sounds in the cockpit
- The EVACUATION ALERT message appears on all Attendant Indication
Panels (AIP) in the cabin
- The evacuation aural alert sounds in the cabin.
HORN OFF PB
When pressed, the horn aural alert in the cockpit goes off.
UAE A380 02-110-30-23 P 3/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
COCKPIT
A380 Communications
CAPT AND PURS SW

Evacuation can be ordered by the Captain only.
Evacuation can be ordered by the Captain or the Chief Purser.
CALLS PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
CALLS PANEL
UAE A380 02-110-30-23 P 4/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
COCKPIT
A380 Communications
PILOT REST PB
When pressed, a high/low chime sounds in the forward (aft) crew rest.
Note: In the case there is only one Pilot Rest Compartment, the PILOT REST
FWD pb and the PILOT REST MAIN pb, affect the same crew rest
location.
DECK/PURS PB
When pressed:
- A pink light, on the associated Area Call Panel(s) (ACP), comes on
- The CAPTAIN CALL message appears on the associated Attendant Information
Panel(s) (AIP)
- A high/low chime is generated via the associated cabin loudspeakers.
ALL PB
When pressed:
- A pink light, on all the ACPs in the cabin, comes on
- The CALL ALL CAPT message appears on all AIPs in the cabin
- A high/low chime is generated via the cabin loudspeakers.
MECH PB
When pressed:
- The COCKPIT CALL light on the nose gear ground service panel comes on
- An external horn sounds (as long as the MECH pbis pressed).
UAE A380 02-110-30-23 P 5/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
COCKPIT
A380 Communications
EMER PB-SW
No EMER call is made by the flight crew, or received from the cabin.
An EMER call is received from the cabin. The CALL light flashes, and a buzzer
sounds three times.
The ATT transmission key lights flash on all RMPs.
When pressed:
- The ON and the CALL lights come on
- A pink light, on all ACPs in the cabin, comes on
- The CALL PRIO CAPT appears on all AIPs in the cabin
- Three successive high/low chimes are generated via the cabin loudspeakers.
UAE A380 02-110-30-23 P 6/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
COCKPIT
A380 Communications
RMP
Applicable to: ALL
RMP General
UAE A380 02-110-30-23 P 7/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
COCKPIT
A380 Communications
MECH OR ATT TRANSMISSION KEYS

The associated way of communication is not in transmission mode. L12
Press the transmission key to activate the transmission mode.

Note: Only one way of communication at a time can be in
transmission mode on each RMP.
Steady: The associated way of communication is in transmission

mode. Press the transmission key to deactivate the transmission
mode.
Flashes when a cabin crew call or ground mechanic call is received.

The buzzer sounds until the call is picked up.
PA TRANSMISSION KEY
The PA transmission key has to be pressed as long as the flight crewmember
wants to speak.
In this case, it is not necessary to use a PTT sw.
RECEPTION KNOBS
The associated way of communication is not in reception mode. Press, and
release in the out position to activate the reception mode.
The associated way of communication is in reception mode. Press, and

release in the in position to deactivate the reception mode.
The volume in the boomset is adjusted by rotating the knob.
UAE A380 02-110-30-23 P 8/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
COCKPIT
A380 Communications
The Interphone/Radio Push-To-Talk switch (INT/RAD PTT sw) is in the off

position.
Communication via the boomset or the oxygen mask microphone is transmitted

by the way of communication that is selected in transmission mode. The switch is
spring-loaded to the off position.
The flight crewmembers communicate with each other and the ground crew via
the boomset, or the oxygen mask microphones (i.e. conference mode). The
switch remains in the INT position until the flight crew selects another position.
OUTSIDE COCKPIT-CALL COMPONENTS

Applicable to: ALL
Outside Cockpit-call Components
L2
Note: This panel is located on the nose landing gear.
UAE A380 02-110-30-23 P 9/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
COCKPIT
A380 Communications
COCKPIT CALL SW
The COCKPIT CALL sw is in the off position.
The COCKPIT CALL sw is in the on position.

An aural warning sounds in the cockpit as long as the COCKPIT CALL sw is hold on.
The MECH light in the cockpit flashes amber for 60 seconds as soon as the
COCKPIT CALL sw is released.
Note: The COCKPIT CALL sw is spring loaded to the off position.

COCKPIT CALL LIGHT
The COCKPIT CALL light is in the off position. L12
The COCKPIT CALL light is in the on position.

A call from the cockpit is waiting for an answer.
The blue light remains, until the HORN RESET sw is activated.
UAE A380 02-110-30-23 P 10/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
COCKPIT
A380 Communications
HORN RESET SW
The HORN RESET sw is in the off position.
When the HORN RESET sw is briefly push up.

The COCKPIT CALL light goes off.
Note: The HORN RESET sw is spring-loaded to the off position.
COCKPIT HANDSET
Applicable to: ALL
Link to cockpit handset description:Refer to 05-10 Handset Description
UAE A380 02-110-30-23 P 11/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
COCKPIT
A380 Communications
UAE A380 02-110-30-23 P 12/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
COCKPIT
A380 Electrical Power
ELEC PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
ELEC panel
UAE A380 02-110-30-24 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
GALLEY PB-SW
The galleys are supplied. Some galleys may be automatically shed, if
necessary.
All galleys are manually shed.
PAX SYS PB-SW

Complete IFE system (including the exTV system) and seats are
supplied
All electrical power to the complete IFE system (including the exTV
system) and seats is cut off.
PAX SYS PB-SW

Complete IFE system and seats are supplied
All electrical power to the complete IFE system and seats is cut off.
UAE A380 02-110-30-24 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
COMMERCIAL (1) (2) PB-SW

All commercial loads are supplied.
Some commercial loads may be automatically shed, if necessary.
Corresponding commercial loads are manually shed. L12
The commercial loads are:

- All galleys
- In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system
- The exTV system
- Ground servicing
- The cargo loading system
- Water and waste ice protection
- Lavatory and cabin lights
- The water heaters
- The heating floor panels.
COMMERCIAL (1) (2) PB-SW

All commercial loads are supplied. L12
Some commercial loads may be automatically shed, if necessary.
Corresponding commercial loads are manually shed.

The commercial loads are:
- All galleys
- In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system
- Ground servicing
- The cargo loading system
- Water and waste ice protection
- Lavatory and cabin lights
- The water heaters
- The heating floor panels.
UAE A380 02-110-30-24 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
CABIN PANEL
CABIN Panel
PAX PERSONAL ELEC SPLY PB-SW

Normal operation: The Portable Electronic Device (PED) power outlets are L12
electrically supplied.
The passenger seats are equipped with power outlets where passengers can
connect their electronic devices.
The Flight Crew press the PAX PERS ELEC SPLY pb-sw to switch off all the
PED power outlets.
UAE A380 02-110-30-24 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380 Lights
PAX SIGNS OVERHEAD PANEL

SIGNS PANEL
UAE A380 02-110-30-33 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380 Lights
NO MOBILE SW
The NO MOBILE signs, and the EXIT signs come on in the cabin. L12
Depending on CIDS programming, an associated low tone chime sounds in the

cabin.
The NO MOBILE signs come on automatically in the cabin, when: L12
- The aircraft is flying over a country where the use of mobile phone is not
authorized, or
- The aircraft altitude is approximately below 13 000 ft .
Depending on CIDS programming, an associated low tone chime sounds in the
cabin.
The EXIT signs come on automatically in the cabin, when
- The slats are extended, or
- The landing gear is extended.
The NO MOBILE signs, and the EXIT signs go off in the cabin. L12
Depending on the CIDS programming, an associated low tone chime sounds in the
cabin.
Note: In the case of excessive cabin altitude (i.e. if the cabin altitude exceeds the
maximum of: 9 550 ft and the landing field elevation + 1 000 ft), then the
FASTEN SEAT BELT signs, and the EXIT signs come on in the cabin,
regardless of the position of the SEAT BELT sw and of the NO
MOBILE sw.
UAE A380 02-110-30-33 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380 Lights
Applicable to: ALL
SEAT BELTS SW
Fasten Seat Belt and Return to Seat signs come on
Fasten Seat Belt and Return to Seat signs automatically comes on in specific L12
conditions.
Note: The sign is activated when the NLG is locked in down position, Slats
1(2) down and oil is in low press.
Fasten Seat Belt and Return to Seat signs are switched off
UAE A380 02-110-30-33 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380 Lights
NO SMOKING SW
NO SMOKING signs come on
NO SMOKING signs automatically come on in specific conditions. L12
Note: The sign is activated when the NLG is locked in down position
NO SMOKING signs are switched off
UAE A380 02-110-30-33 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380 Lights
EMER EXIT LT OVERHEAD PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
EMER EXIT LT
Note: The EMER EXIT LT panel controls the cabin emergency lighting system.
EMER EXIT LT SW
The emergency exit lighting system is ON. L12
The emergency exit lighting system is armed and ready to operate

automatically.
Note: The emergency lighting system comes ON automatically, in the
case of a less of:
- AC ESS busbar, or
- AC electrical power.
The emergency exit lighting system is OFF.
EMER EXIT LT INDICATOR

The EMER EXIT LT Indicator comes on when the EMER EXIT LT sw is in
the off position.
UAE A380 02-110-30-33 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380 Lights
UAE A380 02-110-30-33 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380 Oxygen
OXYGEN CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

Applicable to: ALL
OXYGEN PANEL
The MASK MAN ON pb is a guarded pb

Normal position.
If the cabin altitude is above 13 800 ft, the masks drop automatically.
The guard is open, and the pb is pressed: the mask will drop.
Oxygen flows toward the passenger masks.

The light remains on, until the RESET pb on the OXYGEN maintenance panel is
pressed.
UAE A380 02-110-30-35 P 1/4

CCOM 01-Jul-08
COCKPIT
A380 Oxygen
Oxygen Indications on ECAM DOOR Page
UAE A380 02-110-30-35 P 2/4

CCOM 01-Jul-08
COCKPIT
A380 Oxygen
OXYGEN MAINTENANCE PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
OXYGEN MAINTENANCE PANEL
Maintenance personnel uses this pushbutton to reset the control circuit, after the oxygen system has
been used.
When pressed, resets the oxygen system : the PAX SYS ON light (on the oxygen L12
panel) goes off.

When the reset is completed, ON goes off. The reset lasts approximately three
seconds.
The reset has failed.
UAE A380 02-110-30-35 P 3/4

CCOM 01-Jul-08
COCKPIT
A380 Oxygen
UAE A380 02-110-30-35 P 4/4

CCOM 01-Jul-08
COCKPIT
A380 Cabin Systems
ENTERTAINMENT PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
ENTERTAINMENT PANEL
IFEC PB-SW
Normal operation. No smoke is detected.
Smoke is detected in the IFE Center. L12
The ventilation extraction fan automatically stops, and electrical

power to the IFE System and exTV System is cut off. The
SMOKE light remains on, as long as smoke is detected.
All electrical power to the IFE System is cut off.
All electrical power to the IFE Center is cut off, and smoke is
detected.
UAE A380 02-110-30-44 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380 Cabin Systems
IFEC PB-SW
Normal operation. No smoke is detected. L12
Smoke is detected in the IFE Center.

The ventilation extraction fan automatically stops, and electrical power to the IFE
Center is cut off. The SMOKE light remains on, as long as smoke is detected.
All electrical power to the IFE Center is cut off.
All electrical power to the IFE Center is cut off, and smoke is detected.
Applicable to: ALL
CWS PB-SW
Normal operation. No smoke is detected.
Smoke is detected in the Cabin Work Station (CWS).

The SMOKE light remains on, as long as smoke is detected.
The CWS is electrically shutoff.
The CWS is electrically shutoff, and smoke is detected.
UAE A380 02-110-30-44 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
A380 Doors
CKPT DOOR PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
COCKPIT DOOR PANEL
The door is unlocked.
The door automatically locks when it closes.

Note: If the cabin crew enters the emergency access code on the keypad, the
door automatically unlocks for 5 seconds, after a defined time-period.
The Operator defines this time–period .
The keypad and the buzzer are inhibited for a defined time-period.
The Operator defines this time-period (between 5 and 20 minutes).
Note: When the switch is released, it returns to the NORM position.
UAE A380 02-110-30-52 P 1/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
A380 Doors
COCKPIT DOOR INDICATOR

Steady: The door is open.
The automatic locking and unlocking of the cockpit door is failed.

The cockpit door can be locked, and unlocked manually using the dead bolt.
UAE A380 02-110-30-52 P 2/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
A380 Doors
DOOR/OXY SYSTEM DISPLAY

Applicable to: ALL
ECAM DOOR/OXY Page - Cabin Door
CABIN DOOR SYMBOL

The door is closed and locked
The door is not closed
UAE A380 02-110-30-52 P 3/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
A380 Doors
CABIN DOOR INDICATION

The door is not locked, and at least one engine is running.
The information is not valid.
SLIDE INDICATION
The slide is armed
The slide is disarmed.
UAE A380 02-110-30-52 P 4/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
COCKPIT EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380

Applicable to: ALL
For further information regarding Emergency Equipment:Refer to 11-10-10 General Information about
Emergency Equipment
UAE A380 02-120 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT
A380
UAE A380 02-120 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN LAYOUT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
03-10 Deck Configuration

03-10-10 General
Aircraft Overview ................................................................................................................................. 1
03-10-20 Location
Zone Concept ...................................................................................................................................... 1
Upper Deck Layout .............................................................................................................................. 1
Main Deck Layout ................................................................................................................................ 3
Lower Deck Layout .............................................................................................................................. 7
Seating Capacity and Equipment Data................................................................................................ 9
03-20 First Class

03-20-10 Location
UD Zone 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 1

Minisuite............................................................................................................................................... 1
Minisuite - Seat .................................................................................................................................... 2
Minisuite - Credenza............................................................................................................................ 4
Minisuite Control Unit........................................................................................................................... 6
Minisuite - Table .................................................................................................................................. 9
Minisuite - Additional Equipment........................................................................................................ 10
Minisuites Carry-On Stowage Area ................................................................................................... 13
Minisuite - Sliding Doors .................................................................................................................... 15
Minisuite - Wardrobe.......................................................................................................................... 16
Minisuite Information Panel ............................................................................................................... 18
F/C Seat............................................................................................................................................. 19
Seat Belt ............................................................................................................................................ 20
03-20-30 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP)

Minisuite Recovery .............................................................................................................................. 1
Minisuite Recovery - Sliding Doors...................................................................................................... 1
Minisuite Recovery - Seat.................................................................................................................... 4
03-30 Business Class

03-30-10 Location
UD Zone 2............................................................................................................................................ 1
UD Zone 3............................................................................................................................................ 3
UAE A380 03-TOC P 1/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380

B/C Seat...............................................................................................................................................1
Seat Belt...............................................................................................................................................2
03-40 Economy Class

03-40-10 Location
UD Zone 1 ............................................................................................................................................1
UD Zone 2 ............................................................................................................................................2
UD Zone 4 ............................................................................................................................................3
MD Zone 5............................................................................................................................................4
MD Zone 6............................................................................................................................................6
MD Zone 7..........................................................................................................................................10
MD Zone 8..........................................................................................................................................11

E/C Seat...............................................................................................................................................1
Seat Belt...............................................................................................................................................2
03-50 Crew Stations

03-50-20 Location
Cabin Crew Stations on the Upper Deck..............................................................................................1
Cabin Crew Stations on the Main Deck................................................................................................3
03-50-30 Description
Typical Cabin Crew Stations ................................................................................................................1
Typical Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS)....................................................................................................5
03-60 Stairs
03-60-10 General
Introduction...........................................................................................................................................1
03-60-20 Location
All Stairs ...............................................................................................................................................1
Forward Stairs......................................................................................................................................1
Aft Stairs...............................................................................................................................................4
UAE A380 03-TOC P 2/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
03-60-40 Operation
Forward Stairs - How to Operate the Staircase Barrier ....................................................................... 1
Forward Stairs - How to Operate the Theater Cord ............................................................................. 9
Forward Stairs - How to Install the Smoke Curtain ............................................................................ 11
Aft Stairs - How to Operate the Staircase Barrier .............................................................................. 14
Aft Stairs - How to Operate the Theater Cord.................................................................................... 22
Aft Stairs - How to Install the Smoke Curtain..................................................................................... 24
03-70 Trolley Lift(s)

03-70-10 General
Trolley Lift - Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 1
03-70-20 Location
Location of the Trolley Lift.................................................................................................................... 1
Main Parts of a Trolley Lift ................................................................................................................... 1
Capacity and Load Limit ...................................................................................................................... 2
Lift Cage Position During Take-Off and Landing ................................................................................. 4
03-70-40 Operation
Door Operation .................................................................................................................................... 1
Load Handling...................................................................................................................................... 9
Lift Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 29

Operating Panel................................................................................................................................... 1
OPERATIVE Indicator ......................................................................................................................... 2
Display and Messages......................................................................................................................... 3
Locks and Latches............................................................................................................................... 5

Trolley Lift Recovery - OPERATIVE Indicator Is OFF.......................................................................... 1
Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "OVERLOAD".......................................................................... 4
Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "STOP" .................................................................................... 5
Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "FAULT" .................................................................................. 6
Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "TRAILING" or "JAMMING"..................................................... 7
Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "LOW TEMPERATURE" or "OVERTEMPERATURE"
or "VOLTAGE DROP"...................................................................................................................... 8
UAE A380 03-TOC P 3/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
Trolley Lift Recovery - Final Check and Result ....................................................................................9

Trolley Lift Error Messages ................................................................................................................10
03-80 Stowages
03-80-10 General
General Information about Stowage Compartments ............................................................................1

Overhead Stowage Compartments with Movable / Fixed Bins ............................................................1
Other Stowages..................................................................................................................................20

03-80-30-10 Overhead Bins
Unlocking an Overhead Bin .................................................................................................................1
03-90 Galleys
03-90-10 Galley Description
The Purpose of a Galley.......................................................................................................................1
Galley Types ........................................................................................................................................2
Electrical Equipment - General.............................................................................................................2
Electrical Panel.....................................................................................................................................3
03-90-20 Location
Galley Location.....................................................................................................................................1

03-90-30-10 General
Removable Galley Items ......................................................................................................................1
Equipment of the Water/Waste Cabin System .....................................................................................1
03-90-30-20 Trolley
Trolley Description................................................................................................................................1
Trolley Operation..................................................................................................................................2
03-90-30-30 Container/Standard Unit

Container/Standard Unit Description....................................................................................................1
Container/Standard Unit Operation......................................................................................................2
UAE A380 03-TOC P 4/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
03-90-30-40 Latches
Latches - General ................................................................................................................................ 1
1/4 Turn Retainer Latch ....................................................................................................................... 2
Intermediate Latch ............................................................................................................................... 3
Slam Latch / Sliding Latch ................................................................................................................... 5
03-90-30-50 Water Tap

Water Tap Description ......................................................................................................................... 1
Water Tap Operation ........................................................................................................................... 1
03-90-30-60 Water Shutoff Valve

Water Shutoff Valve Description.......................................................................................................... 1
Water Shutoff Valve Operation ............................................................................................................ 3
03-90-30-70 Waste Water Draining

Waste Water Draining Description....................................................................................................... 1
Waste Water Draining Operation......................................................................................................... 3
03-90-40 Galley Inserts

Coffee Maker ....................................................................................................................................... 1
Espresso Maker................................................................................................................................... 6
Steam Oven....................................................................................................................................... 12
OCM .................................................................................................................................................. 13
Microwave Oven ................................................................................................................................ 18
Microwave Oven ................................................................................................................................ 27
Refrigerating Unit/Wine Chiller .......................................................................................................... 33
Trash Compactor ............................................................................................................................... 39
Trash Compactor ............................................................................................................................... 49
Bun Warmer....................................................................................................................................... 55
Toaster............................................................................................................................................... 57
Remote Water Boiler ......................................................................................................................... 61
Folding Trolley ................................................................................................................................... 66

03-90-50-10 Coffee and Espresso Maker
Espresso Maker Recovery................................................................................................................... 1
03-90-50-20 Oven and Warmer

Microwave Oven Recovery.................................................................................................................. 1
UAE A380 03-TOC P 5/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
03-90-50-60 Remote Water Boiler

Remote Water Boiler Recovery............................................................................................................1
03-90-50-100 Recovery of the Sink Function

Galley Sink Unblocking ........................................................................................................................1
03-90-50-110 Deactivation of Galley Functions

Deactivate a Galley (Leakage).............................................................................................................1
03-100 Lavatories
03-100-10 General
General Information about the Lavatories ............................................................................................1
03-100-20 Location
Location of the Lavatories on the Upper Deck .....................................................................................1
Location of the Lavatories on the Main Deck .......................................................................................4
Description of the Lavatory Interior ......................................................................................................1
Description of the Lavatory Doortypes .................................................................................................5
Description of the Lavatory Smoke Detection System .........................................................................9
Lavatory for Handicapped Passengers ..............................................................................................10
03-100-40 Operation
Operation of the Washroom Functions.................................................................................................1
Operation of the Toilet Functions .........................................................................................................3
Operation of other Lavatory Functions .................................................................................................5
Door Operation...................................................................................................................................17
Preparation of a Lavatory for Handicapped Passengers....................................................................18

03-100-50-10 Recovery of Washroom Functions
Water Faucet Recovery........................................................................................................................1
Water Faucet Pouring ..........................................................................................................................3
Washbasin unblocking .........................................................................................................................5
03-100-50-20 Deactivation of Lavatory Functions

Lavatory Messages on the FAP ...........................................................................................................1
Deactivate a Lavatory (Waste Tank full) ..............................................................................................2
UAE A380 03-TOC P 6/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
Deactivate a Lavatory (Leakage)......................................................................................................... 3

Deactivate a Lavatory (Overflowing and/or Clogging) ......................................................................... 7
Deactivate a Lavatory (Noise)............................................................................................................ 10
03-100-50-40 Emergency Operation of the Lavatory Doors

Opening a Single Lavatory Door from the outside when Locked......................................................... 1
Opening a Bi-Folding Lavatory Door when Locked ............................................................................. 4
Removing a Bi-Folding Lavatory Door ................................................................................................. 7
03-110 Shower Rooms

03-110-10 General
General Information About the Shower Rooms ................................................................................... 1
03-110-20 Location
Location of the Shower Rooms............................................................................................................ 1
Description of a Shower Room ............................................................................................................ 1
Shower Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 4
Shower Unit Components.................................................................................................................... 6
Oxygen Masks in the Shower Room.................................................................................................... 9
Heated Floor Panels Control.............................................................................................................. 10
Hair Dryer Function............................................................................................................................ 12
Manual Shut-Off Valve....................................................................................................................... 14
03-110-40 Operation
Operation of the Shower ..................................................................................................................... 1
How to Operate the Shower................................................................................................................. 2
How to Clean the Shower After Use .................................................................................................... 5
How to Connect the Hair Dryer in the Hair Dryer Compartment .......................................................... 5
How to OPEN / Close the Access Door to the Manual Shut-Off Valve................................................ 7

Shower Water Shut-Off in Case of a Heavy Leakage.......................................................................... 1
Shower Recovery after FAP Message LOW WATER QUANTITY ...................................................... 6
UAE A380 03-TOC P 7/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
03-120 Crew Rest Compartment

03-120-10 General
Crew Rest Compartment - Introduction................................................................................................1
03-120-20 Location
Crew Rest Compartment - Location .....................................................................................................1
03-120-30 Description/Operation
Crew Rest Compartment......................................................................................................................1
Crew Rest Compartment - Entrance Door ...........................................................................................3
Crew Rest Compartment - Entrance Hatch........................................................................................12
Crew Rest Compartment - The Interior ..............................................................................................16
Crew Rest Compartment - Bunks.......................................................................................................16
Crew Rest Compartment - Info Panel ................................................................................................17
Crew Rest Compartment - Stowage Compartments ..........................................................................21
Crew Rest Compartment - Additional Equipment...............................................................................22
Crew Rest Compartment - Safety Installations ..................................................................................25
Crew Rest Compartment - Emergency Exit Hatch .............................................................................31
Crew Rest Compartment - Evacuation...............................................................................................43

Entrance Door - Keypad.......................................................................................................................1
Entrance Door - Visual Indicators.........................................................................................................1
Entrance Door - Opening System ........................................................................................................1
Entrance Door - Dead Bolt Indicator ....................................................................................................2
Entrance Door - Dead Bolt Slider .........................................................................................................2
03-130 Other Cabin Areas/Additional Cabin Equipment

03-130-30 Bar
03-130-30-10 General
Bar Area ...............................................................................................................................................1
03-130-30-20 Location
Bar Location (Upper Deck)...................................................................................................................1
03-130-30-30 Description and Operation

Bar in First Class (Social Area) ............................................................................................................1
Bar in Onboard Lounge........................................................................................................................5
UAE A380 03-TOC P 8/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
03-130-30-40 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP)

Bar in First Class (Social Area)............................................................................................................ 1
Bar in Onboard Lounge ....................................................................................................................... 3
03-130-50 Baby Bassinet

03-130-50-10 General
General Information about the INNOVINT 725x-Series....................................................................... 1

How to Install / Remove a Baby Bassinet of the INNOVINT 725x-Series............................................ 1
UAE A380 03-TOC P 9/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 03-TOC P 10/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
General
A380
AIRCRAFT OVERVIEW
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin of the aircraft is divided into three decks:

- a main deck
- an upper deck
- a lower deck
The main and upper deck are divided into utility and sitting areas. The equipment and furnishing which
is installed in the aircraft gives comfort to passengers and crew.
The lower deck with its compartments is for cargo transport. Optional an Lower Deck-Cabin Crew Rest
Compartment (LD-CCRC) can be installed in the aft cargo compartment.
Deck Overview
UAE A380 03-10-10 P 1/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
General
A380
UAE A380 03-10-10 P 2/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380
ZONE CONCEPT
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft is divided into different zones per deck to allow an easy classification of the equipment,
seats and furnishing.
Assigned Area FWD FWD/MID MID/AFT AFT

Upper Deck (UD) Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
Main Deck (MD) Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8
Lower Deck (LD) Zone 9 (FCC) Zone 10 (ACC/BCC)
UPPER DECK LAYOUT

The upper deck with the relevant equipment is shown below.

Upper Deck
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 1/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380
UPPER DECK LAYOUT


Upper Deck
UPPER DECK LAYOUT


Upper Deck
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 2/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380
UPPER DECK LAYOUT

Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0238

Upper Deck
MAIN DECK LAYOUT

The main deck with the relevant equipment is shown below.

Main Deck
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 3/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380
MAIN DECK LAYOUT


Main Deck
MAIN DECK LAYOUT

Applicable to: MSN 0147-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188

Main Deck
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 4/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380
MAIN DECK LAYOUT

Applicable to: MSN 0153-0164, 0178-0184, 0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0216, 0225

Main Deck
MAIN DECK LAYOUT

Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140

Main Deck
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 5/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380
MAIN DECK LAYOUT

Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0142

Main Deck
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 6/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380
LOWER DECK LAYOUT

The lower deck is divided into three cargo compartments:

- 1 Forward Cargo Compartment (FCC) with Lower Deck-Cabin Crew Rest Compartment
(LD-CCRC)
- 1 Aft Cargo Compartment (ACC)
- 1 Bulk Cargo Compartment (BCC)
Lower Deck
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 7/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380
LOWER DECK
The lower deck is divided into three cargo compartments:

- 1 Forward Cargo Compartment (FCC)
- 1 Aft Cargo Compartment (ACC) with Lower Deck-Cabin Crew Rest Compartment (LD-CCRC)
- 1 Bulk Cargo Compartment (BCC)
Lower Deck
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 8/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380
SEATING CAPACITY AND EQUIPMENT DATA

Following tables give an overview about the seating capacity per deck and passenger class, as well as
the quantity of the different parts installed in the cabin (e.g. stowages, galleys, lavatories, ...)
SEATING CAPACITY
Class \ Deck Upper Deck Main Deck (MD) Lower Deck (LD) Total per Class
(UD)
First Class (F/C) 14 — — 14
Business Class (B/C) 76 — — 76
Economy Class (E/C) — 426 — 426
Total per Deck 90 426 — total 516 seats
EQUIPMENT DATA
Class C/A Seats Lavatories Galleys Stowages Coat
Stowages
Deck UD MD UD MD UD MD UD MD UD MD
F/C 4 — 3 — 3 — 6 — — —
B/C 4 — 4 — 6 — 7 — — —
E/C — 17 — 11 — 7 — 7 — —
Total per Deck 8 17 7 11 9 7 11 5 — —
Total per A/C 25 18 16 20 —
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 9/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380

SEATING CAPACITY
(UD)
First Class (F/C) — — — —
Economy Class (E/C) 120 437 — 557
EQUIPMENT DATA
Stowages
F/C — — — — — — 4 — — —
B/C 6 — 4 — 6 — 7 — — —
E/C 3 17 2 11 3 6 6 5 — —
Total per Deck 9 17 6 11 9 6 13 5 — —
Total per A/C 26 17 15 18 —
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 10/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380

SEATING CAPACITY
(UD)
EQUIPMENT DATA
Stowages
F/C 4 — 1 — 3 — 4 — — —
B/C 4 — 4 — 6 — 7 — — —
E/C — 17 — 11 — 7 — 5 — —
Total per Deck 8 17 5 11 9 7 11 5 — —
Total per A/C 25 16 16 16 —
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 11/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380

SEATING CAPACITY
(UD)
EQUIPMENT DATA
Stowages
F/C 4 — 1 — 3 — 4 — — —
B/C 4 — 4 — 6 — 7 — — —
E/C — 17 — 11 — 7 — 5 — —
Total per Deck 8 17 5 11 9 7 11 5 — —
Total per A/C 25 16 16 16 —
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 12/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380

SEATING CAPACITY
(UD)
EQUIPMENT DATA
Stowages
F/C 4 — 1 — 3 — 4 — — —
B/C 4 — 4 — 6 — 3 — 2 —
E/C — 16 — 10 — 7 — 3 — —
Total per Deck 8 16 5 10 9 7 7 3 2 —
Total per A/C 24 15 16 10 2
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 13/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
DECK CONFIGURATION
Location
A380
UAE A380 03-10-20 P 14/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
Location
A380
UD ZONE 1
Applicable to: ALL
The First Class (F/C) location with the relevant equipment is shown below.
F/C - Zone 1 on the Upper Deck
UAE A380 03-20-10 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
Location
A380
UAE A380 03-20-10 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
MINISUITE
Not yet available.
MINISUITE
The first class is equipped with 14 minisuites.

MINISUITE COMPONENTS
Minisuite Components
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 1/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
Number Component Description

1 Table Refer to Minisuite - Table
2 Sliding Door Refer to Minisuite - Sliding Doors
3 Literature Pocket The literature pocket can be used to stow:
- Safety cards
- Magazines
- Newspapers
- etc.
4 Seat Refer to Minisuite - Seat
5 Carry-on Stowage Refer to Minisuite - Carry-on Stowage Area
Area
6 Credenza Refer to Minisuite - Credenza
MINISUITE - SEAT
The seat of the minisuite has several electrical seat functions.

There are seven seat driving functions:
- Seat translation (forward/backward)
- Head rest (up/down)
- Back rest (up/down)
- Seat pan (up/down)
- Arm rest (up/down)
- Leg rest (up/down)
- Legrest extension (up/down)
There are two non-driving functions:
- Lumbar support bladder (inflate/deflate)
- Massage function (ON/OFF)
The massage function is available for the back rest, the seat pan and the leg rest.
The different seat functions can be controlled using:
- The Minisuite Control Unit (all seat functions)
Refer to Minisuite Control Unit
- The Seat Control Unit (only preset positions of the seat ).
Note: For Taxi, Take-Off and Landing (TTOL), the seat must be in the designated TTOL position.
The TTOL position can be reached using either the Minisuite Control Unit or the Seat Control
Unit.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 2/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
If any seat driving function fails, Refer to Minisuite Recovery - Seat

SEAT CONTROL UNIT
The Seat Control Unit is located in the aisle side armrest. It has three pushbuttons to drive the seat to
three preset positions:
Seat Control Unit
HOW TO DRIVE THE SEAT TO A PRESET POSITION

Press the desired pushbutton of the Seat Control Unit to start the related seat drive functions. Keep
pressing the pushbutton until the seat has reached the corresponding preset position.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 3/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
MINISUITE - CREDENZA
Credenza Components

1 USB Ports There are two USB Ports for the connection of Personal Electronic
Devices (PED).
2 Mini Bar The mini bar has a thermal insulation and a lid.
The mini bar contains space for up to seven bottles.
The passenger can open and close the mini bar by using the
PRESS pb (see number 4).
3 Tray Table The tray table can be installed for example when meals are served. It
can be released by using the PRESS pb (see number 5).
4 PRESS pb for the Mini Pressing the PRESS pb for the mini bar opens or closes the mini bar
Bar lid and elevates or lowers the mini bar itself.
Press and hold PRESS pb until the mini bar lid is entirely open or
closed and the mini bar is entirely elevated or lowered.
5 PRESS pb for the Tray Pressing the PRESS pb for the tray table releases the tray table.
Table The tray table can now be lifted and installed in its horizontal position.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 4/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380

6 Air Outlet Turning the ring on the air outlet controls the air flow rate between
0 % and 100 %.
Swivelling the air outlet controls the air flow direction.
7 Control Panel The control panel has five pushbuttons. The pushbuttons have the
typical passenger control unit functions. Control Panel.
8 Stowage Compartment The stowage compartment has a manually operated cover and an
interior light.
9 Minisuite Control Unit The Minisuite Control Unit enables passengers to control the
minisuite functions.
Refer to Minisuite Control Unit.
10 Stowage Compartment The stowage has manually operated cover.
Note: This stowage compartment is installed in the outboard
minisuites, only.
CONTROL PANEL
Control Panel Components
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 5/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380

1 PAX CALL pb Pressing the PAX CALL pb starts a PAX CALL.
Note: To reset the PAX CALL, press the PAX CALL RESET pb on the
Minisuite Information Panel on the outside of the minisuite.
Refer to Minisuite Information Panel
2 PAX CALL light The PAX CALL light comes ON when the PAX CALL pb was pressed.
3 PRESS pb Pressing the PRESS pb releases the Minisuite Control Unit from its
cradle.
4 ON / OFF pb Pressing the ON / OFF pb switches ON or OFF the table lamp.
5 BRIGHT / DIM pb Pressing the BRIGHT / DIM pb sets the table lamp to a different
brightness. Pressing the BRIGHT / DIM pb several times changes the
brightness in a cycle to DIM1 - DIM2 - BRT - DIM1 etc.
MINISUITE CONTROL UNIT

The Minisuite Control Unit enables the passenger to control the features and functions of the minisuite.
Normally the Minisuite Control Unit is stored in its cradle on the credenza. The Minisuite Control Unit
can be operated either when it is in the cradle or ,when it is released from the cradle, as a hand-held,
wireless remote control.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 6/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
Minisuite Control Unit

1 Minisuite Control The Minisuite Control Unit has a touch screen to select and to operate
Unit the features and functions of the minisuite.
2 PRESS pb Pressing the PRESS pb releases the Minisuite Control Unit from the
cradle.
3 Cradle The cradle is the docking station for the Minisuite Control Unit.
HOW TO OPERATE THE FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS OF THE MINISUITE

The Minisuite Control Unit controls these features and functions:
- Minisuite: Sliding doors
- Minisuite: Privacy divider in the center minisuites
- Minisuite: Lights
- Minisuite: Video & audio functions
- Minisuite: Service features
- Seat: Headrest
- Seat: Recline
- Seat: Legrest & legrest extension
- Seat: Lumbar support
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 7/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
- Seat: Massage function.

The passenger can select and operate the desired features and functions via several touch screen
menus on the Minisuite Control Unit.
Typical Touch Screen Menu
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 8/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
MINISUITE - TABLE
Minisuite Table Components

1 READING LIGHT sw The READING LIGHT sw switches the reading light (no. 2) ON or
OFF.
2 Reading Light The reading light is a spotlight.
The passenger can swivel the reading light to the desired position.
3 Drawer The drawer size is adapted to letter sized paper.
Pushing at the front side opens the drawer.
4 Video Screen The video screen has a size of 51 cm / 20 in.
It enables to display:
- Different programmes of the In-Flight Entertainment system (IFE
system)
- The passenger safety briefing video
- Live sequences from the aircraft outboard cameras.
5 Make-up Compartment Pressing the lid down opens the make-up compartment.
There is a lighted make-up mirror on the inside of the lid,
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 9/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380

6 Power Port The power port supplies 110 VAC for Personal Electronic Devices
(PED).
The power port is covered by a flap that folds downwards.
When the power port is in use, the blue POWER IN USE light (PC)
on the Minisuite Information Panel comes ON.
Refer to Minisuite Information Panel
7 Table Lamp The table lamp can be dimmed.
It can be operated via the control panel in the credenza or via the
Minisuite Control Unit.
Refer to Minisuite - Credenza
8 Lighted Sign Area The lighted sign area contains the NO SMOKING light and the
FASTEN SEAT BELT light.
MINISUITE - ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT

PROVISIONS FOR A BABY BASSINET

Only the center minisuites have provisions to attach a baby bassinet:
- Under the table ("floor" provision)
- On the sidewall above the credenza ("wall" provision)
Note: Installing the baby bassinet under the table means that the baby bassinet requires space in the
carry-on stowage area (Refer to Minisuite - Carry-on Stowage Area).
If there is carry-on baggage to stow, install the baby bassinet in the wall provision.
Before the baby bassinet can be installed, remove the cover of the wall provision. There is no cover on
the floor provision.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 10/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
HOW TO REMOVE THE COVER OF THE WALL PROVISION

Provision Covered
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 11/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
Provision with Cover Removed
1. Put the fingers behind the cover at the center of the top side.
2. Carefully pull at the cover until it is removed from the provision.
Note: When the baby bassinet is not in use anymore, put the cover back by carefully pushing it
onto the provision.
For the installation of the baby bassinet Refer to General Information about the INNOVINT
725x-Series and Refer to How to Install / Remove the INNOVINT 725x-Series.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 12/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
MINISUITES CARRY-ON STOWAGE AREA

The carry-on stowage area is located underneath the table. There are two retractable retention belts to
secure the carry-on baggage of the passenger. The reels of the retention belts are located in the
credenza and the buckles in the forward interior bulkhead.
Note: Prior to taxi, take-off and landing the cabin crew must make sure that all carry-on baggage is
properly stowed and secured using the retention belts. If the retention belts do not work
properly or do not hold the carry-on baggage properly due to the baggage size, the carry-on
baggage has to be stowed somewhere else.
Carry-On Stowage Area
HOW TO OPERATE THE RETENTION BELTS

Note: Both retention belts have to be used to stow the carry-on baggage properly.
WARNING Danger of injury: Do not let go of the retention belt. The belt is under tension and may
cause injury when snapping back.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 13/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
HOW TO INSTALL A RETENTION BELT

1. Pull the retention belt out of the credenza.
2. Slip the buckle insert into the buckle below the vanity table until you hear a click.
Retention Belt Next to the Buckle
Retention Belt Installed
HOW TO REMOVE A RETENTION BELT

1. Take the buckle insert in one hand and hold it.
2. Lift the cap of the buckle until it opens.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 14/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
Removing the Retention Belt
3. Using the buckle insert, guide the retention belt back to the credenza.
MINISUITE - SLIDING DOORS

The minisuite is equipped with sliding doors.

To ensure privacy, the passenger can close the sliding doors via the Minisuite Control Unit (Refer to
Minisuite Control Unit)
Note: For Taxi, Take-off and Landing the sliding doors must remain open.
If the sliding doors are closed and blocked, Refer to Minisuite Recovery - Sliding Doors
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 15/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
MINISUITE - WARDROBE
The wardrobe is located on the forward side of the minisuite and is accessible from the aisle.
The wardrobe door has a double slam latch.
The wardrobe is deep and high to hold lengthy garments. A courtesy light illuminates the wardrobe
inside.
TWO HIDDEN SWITCHES IN THE WARDROBE
There are two switches in the wardrobe that must only be operated by the cabin crew. To hide them
from passengers' eyes, and to avoid misuse, they are located inside the wardrobe beneath its top side,
directly behind the Minisuite Information Panel (Refer to Minisuite Information Panel).
The hidden switches are called TTOL CUTOFF sw and SPM sw.
SPM Switch and TTOL CUTOFF Switch Inside the Wardrobe (Top Side)
THE TTOL CUTOFF SWITCH

The TTOL CUTOFF sw can be used to prepare the minisuite for Taxi, Take-Off and Landing
(TTOL).
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 16/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
When activated, the TTOL CUTOFF sw has these effects:

- The TTOL CUTOFF light on the Minisuite Information Panel comes ON to indicate that the
TTOL CUTOFF sw was activated.
- When the sliding doors of the minisuite are closed, they open automatically (necessary for
TTOL).
- The seat can be operated towards the TTOL position, only.
Note: The seat may not necessarily be in TTOL position when the TTOL CUTOFF sw was
pressed. Only when the TTOL light on the Minisuite Information Panel is ON, the seat is
in TTOL position!
THE SPM SWITCH
The SPM sw is a guarded switch. It sheds the power supply from the Seat Power Module (SPM).
Note: The SPM sw should only be used in case of a serious malfunction. To avoid inadvertent
activation, it has a hidden location and is protected by a cover (see the graphic above: the
cover is red).
How to Operate the SPM Switch
1. Lift the cover.
2. Switch the toggle switch to the other position (the ON and the OFF position are shown in the
graphic above).
3. Lower the cover.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 17/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
MINISUITE INFORMATION PANEL

The Minisuite Information Panel is located on the outside of the minisuite, above the wardrobe door.
Minisuite Information Panel

1 SUITE The SUITE DESIGNATION light is a lighted alphanumeric, e.g.
DESIGNATION light SUITE 4A. The SUITE DESIGNATION light is constantly illuminated
when the aircraft power is ON.
2 DO NOT There are two possibilities to activate the DO NOT DISTURB light,
DISTURB light both from the Minisuite Control Unit:
- On the touch screen menu LIGHTS:
Touch the PRIVACY LIGHTS button.
Note: The sliding doors remain open.
- On the touch screen menu PRIVACY:
Touch the CLOSE SLIDING DOORS button until the sliding
doors are closed.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 18/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380

3 POWER IN USE light When the power port is in use, the blue POWER IN USE light (PC)
comes ON.
Refer to Minisuite - Table
4 TTOL light When the minisuite seat is in position for Taxi, Take-Off and Landing
(TTOL), the TTOL light comes ON (green).
5 TTOL CUTOFF light When the TTOL CUTOFF sw in the wardrobe was pressed, the
yellow TTOL CUTOFF light comes ON.
6 PAX CALL light / The PAX CALL RESET pb has an integrated PAX CALL light.
PAX CALL RESET pb The PAX CALL light comes on when the passenger has activated
the PAX CALL via the control panel on the credenza.
Refer to Minisuite - Credenza
To reset the PAX CALL light press the illuminated PAX CALL
RESET pb.
F/C SEAT
Applicable to: ALL
Instead of F/C seats the aircraft is equipped with minisuites: Refer to 03-20-20 Minisuite.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 19/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
SEAT BELT
Applicable to: ALL
A seat belt is part of each cabin seat. The belts secure passengers and crewmembers on their seats
during the different flight phases (e.g. taxi, take off, landing, ...) and protect them against skidding
through the cabin during turbulences. Because these turbulences can come up very fast and
unexpected, the passengers should keep their belts closed during the whole flight to avoid any injury.
HOW TO CLOSE / OPEN THE SEAT BELT
Close and Open the Seat Belt
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 20/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
CLOSING THE SEAT BELT

1. Take the belt buckle in one hand and the buckle insert in the other hand.
2. Slip the buckle insert into the belt buckle until it snaps into place.
Note: Loosen the free strap end of the belt by moving the buckle towards it, if the belt is too
short for closing. The belt should be slacken during this procedure.
OPENING THE SEAT BELT
1. Lift the cap of the belt buckle until it opens.
2. Take the belt buckle in one hand and the buckle insert in the other hand.
3. Put down the seat belt and make sure that its position on the seat causes no danger of tripping.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 21/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
HOW TO FASTEN / LOOSEN THE SEAT BELT

Fasten and Release the Seat Belt
FASTEN THE SEAT BELT

Refer to Fig.1
WARNING Danger of injury!

To avoid injury, make sure that the seat belt is not twisted during the fastening
procedure.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 22/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
1. After closing the seat belt, pull the free strap end until the seat belt is tightened.
2. Check whether the seat belt is locked and tightened correctly.

Make sure that the seat belt is locked and tightened correctly. If not, injury may
occur.
LOOSEN THE SEAT BELT

Refer to Fig.2
1. Take the seat belt buckle in one hand and move it towards the free strap end.
Note: The belt should slacken by this procedure.
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 23/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
UAE A380 03-20-20 P 24/24

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
Function Recovery Procedures (FRP)
A380
MINISUITE RECOVERY
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
If the sliding doors of a minisuite are blocked or seat driving functions fail during the flight, here are
some checklists to assist the cabin crew in recovering the corresponding minisuite function.
For function recovery of the sliding doors: Refer to Minisuite Recovery - Sliding Doors
For function recovery of the seat: Refer to Minisuite Recovery - Seat
MINISUITE RECOVERY - SLIDING DOORS

UAE A380 03-20-30 P 1/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
The sliding doors cannot be opened via the Minisuite Control Unit.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Inform the passenger that the sliding doors will be opened from outside
the minisuite.
Open the wardrobe door and push the TTOL CUTOFF sw.
TTOL Cutoff Switch in the Wardrobe
The TTOL CUTOFF sw is located inside the wardrobe, on the upper side,
behind the minisuite information panel.
Did the sliding doors open? Go to 4 Go to 2
UAE A380 03-20-30 P 2/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
YES NO
2. Ask the passenger to assist the door opening.
Explain the location of the sliding doors override button to the passenger.
Sliding Doors Override Button (In the Literature Pocket Inside the
Minisuite)
Ask the passenger to press and hold the sliding doors override button.
Use the recessed grips (inside the minisuite) to open the sliding doors
manually.
Recessed Grip in the Middle of the Sliding Door (View from Inside the
Minisuite)
Did the sliding doors open? Go to 4 Go to 3

3. The sliding doors have to be opened manually, using force. This may
require more than one crewmember.
Pull the sliding doors apart. Go to 4 Go to 4
4. Ask the Purser to make an entry into the cabin logbook about the sliding
doors failure.
Mention
- The affected minisuite
- The countermeasures taken. END END
UAE A380 03-20-30 P 3/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
MINISUITE RECOVERY - SEAT

CAUTION The mechanical override controls must be used with the seat free of any load. DO NOT
USE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL CONTROLS AT THE SAME TIME.
One or all electrical seat driving functions failed.
YES NO
1. Check on the FAP whether the power supply of the seat column including
the affected seat has tripped due to an Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI). A
GFI maybe caused by a faulty Personal Electronic Device (PED) which
was connected to the power supply.
The power supply of a seat column has tripped due to a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) when these indications appear on the IFE POWER page
on the FAP:
- A text message (GFI) TRIPPED
- The corresponding button of the affected seat column is gray (OFF)
- The affected seat column on the aircraft symbol is amber.
Is there a GFI TRIPPED message on the FAP? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. Reset the GFI TRIPPED message on the FAP (Refer to RESET A GFI
TRIPPED MESSAGE ON THE FAP).
Note: In the Function Recovery Procedure RESET A GFI TRIPPED
MESSAGE ON THE FAP there is a Seat Group Switch (SGS)
mentioned. There is no SGS for the minisuites, because each
minisuite has an individual Seat Power Module switch (SPM
switch). Every time the SGS is mentioned, perform the relevant
action at all SPM switches in the affected seat column.
Was the power supply reset of the affected seat column succesful? Go to 4 Go to 3
3. Switch OFF the power supply of the seat by setting the corresponding
SPM sw to the OFF position. Wait for approximately 3 min, then reset the
SPM sw to the ON position. Go to 4 Go to 4
UAE A380 03-20-30 P 4/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
YES NO
SPM Switch in the Wardrobe
4. On the Minisuite Control Unit, test all seat driving functions by touching
the corresponding icons. Is at least one seat driving function inoperative? Go to 5 Go to 17
5. Does the leg rest extension move electrically? Go to 7 Go to 6
6. Push and hold the LEG REST EXTENSION OVERRIDE lever on the side
of the leg rest and push or pull the leg rest extension to the desired
position (entirely in for TTOL position). Go to 7 Go to 7
UAE A380 03-20-30 P 5/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
YES NO
Leg Rest Extension Recovery
7. Does the leg rest move electrically? Go to 9 Go to 8

8. Get access to the override levers by sliding the cover up. Push and hold
the LEG REST OVERRIDE lever and lift or lower the leg rest to the
desired position (entirely down for TTOL position). Go to 9 Go to 9
UAE A380 03-20-30 P 6/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
YES NO
Seat Recovery
9. Does the back rest move electrically? Go to 11 Go to 10

the BACK REST OVERRIDE lever and lift or lower the back rest to the
desired position (entirely up for TTOL position). Go to 11 Go to 11
(SEAT RECOVERY )
11. Does the seat move forward or back electrically? Go to 13 Go to 12
the TRANSLATION OVERRIDE lever and move the seat forward or back
to the desired position (entirely back for TTOL position). Go to 13 Go to 13
(SEAT RECOVERY )
13. Does the arm rest move up or down electrically? Go to 15 Go to 14
14. Push and hold the ARM REST OVERRIDE lever and lift or lower the arm
rest to the desired position (for TTOL position see figure ARM REST IN
TTOL POSITION). Go to 15 Go to 15
(SEAT RECOVERY )
UAE A380 03-20-30 P 7/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
FIRST CLASS
A380
YES NO
Arm Rest in TTOL Position
15. Does the head rest move up or down electrically? Go to 17 Go to 16

16. Push down or pull up the head rest manually to the desired position
(entirely down for TTOL position). Go to 18 Go to 18
17. The seat is operative. END END
18. At least one seat driving function is inoperative. If set to TTOL position,
the seat can be used for Taxi, Take-off and Landing (TTOL). The Purser
must enter the seat driving function failure in the cabin logbook. END END
UAE A380 03-20-30 P 8/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
BUSINESS CLASS
Location
A380
UD ZONE 2
The Business Class (B/C) location with the relevant equipment is shown below.
B/C - Zone 2 on the Upper Deck
UAE A380 03-30-10 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
BUSINESS CLASS
Location
A380
UD ZONE 2
The B/C location with the relevant equipment is shown below.

B/C - Zone 2 in the Upper Deck
UAE A380 03-30-10 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
BUSINESS CLASS
Location
A380
UD ZONE 3

UAE A380 03-30-10 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
BUSINESS CLASS
Location
A380
UD ZONE 3

UAE A380 03-30-10 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
BUSINESS CLASS
A380
B/C SEAT
Applicable to: ALL
The equipment of the business class passenger seat consist of:

Overview (Example)
WARNING Risk of injury to small children's fingers when operating the movable armrest.
Advise passengers travelling with small children of the potential risk related to the
armrest movement.
UAE A380 03-30-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN LAYOUT
BUSINESS CLASS
A380
SEAT BELT
Applicable to: ALL
For the description and operation of the Seat Belt: Refer to 03-20-20 Seat Belt.
UAE A380 03-30-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
UD ZONE 1
The E/C location with the relevant equipment is shown below.

E/C - Zone 1 in the Upper Deck
UAE A380 03-40-10 P 1/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
UD ZONE 2

UAE A380 03-40-10 P 2/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
UD ZONE 4
Applicable to: ALL

UAE A380 03-40-10 P 3/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
MD ZONE 5
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0249

E/C - Zone 5 in the Main Deck
UAE A380 03-40-10 P 4/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
MD ZONE 5

UAE A380 03-40-10 P 5/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
MD ZONE 6

UAE A380 03-40-10 P 6/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
MD ZONE 6

UAE A380 03-40-10 P 7/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
MD ZONE 6

UAE A380 03-40-10 P 8/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
MD ZONE 6
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0178-0184, 0190, 0204-0207,
0210-0216, 0225

UAE A380 03-40-10 P 9/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
MD ZONE 7
Applicable to: ALL

UAE A380 03-40-10 P 10/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
MD ZONE 8

UAE A380 03-40-10 P 11/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
MD ZONE 8

UAE A380 03-40-10 P 12/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
MD ZONE 8

UAE A380 03-40-10 P 13/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
Location
A380
MD ZONE 8
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0142

UAE A380 03-40-10 P 14/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
A380
E/C SEAT
Applicable to: ALL
The equipment of the economy class passenger seat consist of:

Typical E/C Seat
WARNING Risk of injury to small children's fingers when operating the movable armrest.
Advise passengers travelling with small children of the potential risk related to the
armrest movement.
UAE A380 03-40-20 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-11
CABIN LAYOUT
ECONOMY CLASS
A380
SEAT BELT
Applicable to: ALL
For the description and operation of the Seat Belt: Refer to 03-20-20 Seat Belt.
UAE A380 03-40-20 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-11
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Location
A380
CABIN CREW STATIONS ON THE UPPER DECK

The cabin upper deck is equipped with a total of 6 cabin attendant stations with 8 Cabin Attendant
Seats (CAS).
One additional CAS is installed in the center of the fwd area.
Location of the CA Stations and CAS
UAE A380 03-50-20 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Location
A380
CABIN ATTENDANT STATIONS ON THE UPPER DECK

The cabin upper deck is equipped with a total of 6 cabin attendant stations with 8 Cabin Attendant
Seats (CAS).
Location of the CA Stations and CAS
UAE A380 03-50-20 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Location
A380
CABIN CREW STATIONS ON THE MAIN DECK

The cabin main deck is equipped with a total of 10 cabin attendant stations with 16 Cabin Attendant
Seats (CAS).
One additional CAS is installed in the center of the fwd entrance area.
Location of CA Stations and CAS
UAE A380 03-50-20 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Location
A380
CABIN ATTENDANT STATIONS ON THE MAIN DECK

Seats (CAS).
UAE A380 03-50-20 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Location
A380

Seats (CAS).
One additional CAS are installed in the center of the fwd entrance area.
UAE A380 03-50-20 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Location
A380

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Seats (CAS).
UAE A380 03-50-20 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
TYPICAL CABIN CREW STATIONS

Applicable to: ALL
The typical Cabin Crew (CC) Station with FAP at the upper and main deck are equipped as follows:
- 1 FAP located above the Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS) or near the CC Station
- 1 AIP located in the door frame
- 1 Handset located at the headrest
- 1 CAS with the relevant emergency equipment
The maximum number of FAP amounts to 10 on the entire aircraft.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 1/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
Typical CC Station with FAP
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 2/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
The typical Cabin Crew (CC) Stations with mini FAP on the upper deck and on the main deck are
equipped as follows:
- 1 mini FAP located above/beside the Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS)
- 1 AIP located in the door frame
The maximum number of mini FAP amounts to 28 on the entire aircraft.
Typical CC Station with Mini FAP
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 3/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
The typical Cabin Crew (CC) Stations on the upper deck and on the main deck are equipped as
follows:
- 1 AIP located in the door frame/beside the Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS)
Typical CC Station
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 4/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
TYPICAL CABIN ATTENDANT SEAT (CAS)

Applicable to: ALL
The equipment of the single CAS consist of:

Single CAS
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
The restraint system consist of the seat belt and two shoulder straps integrated in the cabin attendant
seat.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 5/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
Fasten seat-belt procedure:

1. Close the lap belt (1).
2. Pull the unlocked free strap end (2) and tighten the belt.
3. Pull down the shoulder straps (3).
4. Insert the shoulder straps (3) into the lap belt fastener.
Loosen seat-belt procedure:
Open the lap belt fastener through turning the cap of the fastener to the left or right side.
Fasten and Loosen of the Seat Belt
CAUTION If the CAS is not occupied, the lap belt must be stowed in the Fasten seat-belt position.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 6/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
The equipment of the double CAS consist of:

Double CAS
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
The restraint system consist of the seat belt and two shoulder straps integrated in the cabin attendant
seat.
Fasten seat-belt procedure:
1. Close the lap belt (1).
2. Pull the unlocked free strap end (2) and tighten the belt.
3. Pull down the shoulder straps (3).
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 7/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
4. Insert the shoulder straps (3) into the lap belt fastener.
Loosen seat-belt procedure:
Open the lap belt fastener through turning the cap of the fastener to the left or right side.
Fasten and Loosen of the Seat Belt
CAUTION If the CAS is not occupied, the lap belt must be stowed in the Fasten seat-belt position.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 8/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
TYPICAL HIGH COMFORT CAS

The high comfort Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS) is a special seat with additional features, increasing
crew comfort during the flight.
These features include:
- A seat extension: See How to Extend the Seat
- A legrest (if installed): See Operation of the Legrest (if installed)
- A moveable headrest: See Operation of the Adjustable Headrest
- An armrest extension: See Operation of the Armrest Extension
- A tray table: See Operation of the Tray Table
The high comfort CAS can be installed on the Upper (UD) and/or on the Main Deck (MD) of the aircraft.
For the location of the installed high comfort CAS on the UD: Refer to 03-50-20 Cabin Crew Stations
on the Upper Deck and on the MD: Refer to 03-50-20 Cabin Crew Stations on the Main Deck.
High Comfort CAS
OPERATION OF THE HIGH COMFORT CAS

1. Pull down the seat pan until it stops in the horizontal position.
2. While holding down the seat pan, apply body weight onto the seat pan.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 9/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
3. Release the body weight from the seat pan to return the seat into its stowed position.
HOW TO EXTEND THE SEAT
2. Apply body weight onto the seat pan.
3. Lift up the recline lever on the right front of the seat pan.
4. Slide the seat pan forward to the desired extend position.
5. Release the recline lever and make sure that the seat pan is in a locked position.
Seat in Fully Extended Position
HOW TO RETRACT THE SEAT
CAUTION In order to avoid damage to the seat:

- Ensure that, before retracting the seat, the mechanisms are free of foreign
objects and/or the restraint system (lap belts and buckle must be in a neutral
position).
- Do not position any objects between the seat pan and the back rest.
1. Lift up the recline lever on the right front of the seat pan.
2. Slide the seat pan backward to the desired position.
3. Release the recline lever and make sure that the seat pan is in a locked position.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 10/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
Note: To stow the seat, push the seat pan back to the last locking position (horizontal position).
This will unlock the seat from the extended position.
OPERATION OF THE LEGREST (IF INSTALLED)
Some high comfort CAS are equipped with an additional feature:
HOW TO DEPLOY THE LEGREST
1. Release the legrest latch in the center of the bottom of the legrest.
2. Pull down the legrest. The seat pan moves towards the horizontal position.
Deploying the Legrest
3. Hold down the legrest and rotate the legrest support legs to the fully extended position.
4. Lift up the recline lever to lock the seat in the extended position.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 11/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
Legrest Fully Deployed
HOW TO STOW THE LEGREST

1. Release the seat pan.
2. Lift up the recline lever to guide the seat in the stowed position.
CAUTION In order to avoid damage to the seat:
- Ensure that the legrest support legs have rotated into their stowed position
and hold them there.
3. Push the legrest flat against the seat pan so that the legrest latch closes.
OPERATION OF THE ADJUSTABLE HEADREST
For the comfort of the crewmembers, the headrest of the high comfort CAS is adjustable to different
body heights.
HOW TO ADJUST THE HEADREST HEIGHT
1. Pull down the headrest cushion until the desired position is reached.
2. Move the headrest cushion vertically up or down into one of the six possible positions.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 12/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
CAUTION The headrest cushion must be stowed in the fully up position for taxi, takeoff and
landing.
Adjusting the Headrest
OPERATION OF THE ARMREST EXTENSION

For the comfort of the crewmembers, the armrests of the high comfort CAS are extendable.
HOW TO DEPLOY THE ARMRESTS
2. Apply body weight onto the seat pan.
3. Pull down the armrests.
The armrest pads extend forward when the seat is fully reclined.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 13/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
Deploying the Armrest
HOW TO STOW THE ARMRESTS

The armrests return automatically to the vertical position when the cabin crewmember stows the
seat.
OPERATION OF THE TRAY TABLE
For the comfort of the crewmembers, the high comfort CAS has a tray table.
HOW TO USE THE TRAY TABLE
1. Turn one of the tray table latch, located on the right and left side, to the vertical position.
2. Pull the tray table out of the seat cover.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 14/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
Deploying the Tray Table (1)
3. Pull down the armrests.

4. Insert the tray table pivot lugs into the hole at the end of each armrest.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 15/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
Deploying the Tray Table (2)
HOW TO STOW THE TRAY TABLE

1. Remove the tray table from the armrests.
2. Move the armrests to the vertical position.
3. Insert the tray table into the seat cover.
4. Turn the tray table latch 45° to the stowed position..
OPERATION OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM
The restraint system secures crewmembers while they are seated on the high comfort CAS. After
using the restraint system, the cabin crewmember must stow it properly.
HOW TO CLOSE AND RELEASE THE BUCKLE
1. Close the buckle by inserting the latch into the release box until there is a distinct clicking sound.
2. Pull both lap belt straps away from the center until the lap belt is low and tight around the waist.
3. Release the buckle by twisting the lever in either direction until the latch ejects from the buckle.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 16/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
Seat with Restraint System Properly Stowed
HOW TO STOW THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM PROPERLY

1. Buckle up the restraint system.
2. Stow the lap belts behind the seat pan cushion.
CAUTION The lap belt must hang loosely to allow stowing the restraint system inside the
dished areas of the cushion when the seat pan is in the stowed position.
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 17/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW STATIONS
Description
A380
UAE A380 03-50-30 P 18/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
General
A380
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
There are three different types of stairs in the aircraft:

FORWARD STAIRS
The forward stairs connect the main deck with the upper deck. They enable passengers and
crewmembers to go from one deck to the other. Refer to Recommendations for Use of Forward Stairs
AFT STAIRS
The aft stairs connect the main deck with the upper deck. They enable crewmembers and passengers
to go from one deck to the other.
Refer to Recommendations for Use of Rear Stairs
COCKPIT STAIRS
The cockpit stairs connect the main deck with the cockpit. They enable the flight crew and the cabin
crew to enter the cockpit.
UAE A380 03-60-10 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jul-11
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
General
A380
UAE A380 03-60-10 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jul-11
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Location
A380
ALL STAIRS
Applicable to: ALL
Overhead View
UAE A380 03-60-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Location
A380
UAE A380 03-60-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Description
A380
FORWARD STAIRS
On the upper deck side of the FWD stairs there is a wall-mounted staircase barrier to prevent
passengers or trolleys from falling down the forward stairs.
WARNING The staircase barrier must be stowed for taxi, takeoff and landing in order to ensure a
quick evacuation in case of an emergency. If the staircase barrier is installed in case of
an evacuation, injury to or suffocation of passengers and/or cabin crew in this area is
possible.
Note: The MD Cabin Attendant Seat position provides only a limited view of the staircase barrier.
Therefore the cabin crew must pay increased attention to the FWD stairs area for Taxi, Takeoff
and Landing.
UAE A380 03-60-30 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Description
A380
FORWARD STAIRS
The forward stairs are the main connection between the main deck and the upper deck of the A380. To
read more about the use of the forward stairs, please Refer to Quick Reference Table for Use of the
Forward Stairs.
STAIRCASE ILLUMINATION
To read more about staircase illumination, please Refer to Types of Cabin Light, Refer to Definition of
Illuminated Areas.
THEATER CORD (IF INSTALLED)
If installed, there is at least one theater cord to hinder passengers using the forward stairs during
certain times of the flight.
Standard position of the theater cord is the main deck end of the forward stairs. Depending on the
aircraft configuration this theater cord can be installed alternatively on the upper deck end of the
forward stairs. It is even possible that there is one theater cord at the standard position and additionally
a second one on the upper deck end of the forward stairs.
Theatre Cord (Standard Position)
UAE A380 03-60-30 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Description
A380
WARNING All theater cords must be properly stowed for taxi, take-off and landing in order to
ensure a quick evacuation in case of an emergency. Otherwise, in case of an
evacuation, injury or suffocation to passengers and/or cabin crew in this area is
possible.
To properly stow the theater cord(s) either remove the theater cord(s) and put it/them into a stowage
nearby the forward stairs or - only if there is a hook installed on the staircase wall - fix the theater
cord(s) on the staircase wall.
Note: Due to the reduced visibility of the upper deck end of the forward stairs, the cabin crew must
increase attention to this area during taxi, take-off and landing.
STAIRCASE EMERGENCY LIGHTING
To read more about staircase emergency lighting, please Refer to Emergency Lighting - Cabin
Emergency Lights.
SMOKE CURTAIN
To minimize the negative effects of smoke on the persons in the deck, which is not directly affected by
smoke, a smoke curtain can be installed at the forward stairs. The smoke curtain is integrated in the
upper deck ceiling area of the staircase. A smoke curtain release lever opens the smoke curtain
compartment. When released, the smoke curtain deploys through gravity. Then the smoke curtain
must be tightened and fastened to the staircase sidewalls.
To read more about installing the smoke curtain, please Refer to Forward Stairs - How to Install the
Smoke Curtain.
UAE A380 03-60-30 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Description
A380
AFT STAIRS
The aft stairs are the second connection between the Main Deck (MD) and the Upper Deck (UD) of the
A380. To read more about the use of the aft stairs, please Refer to Quick Reference Table for Use of
the Aft Stairs.
At the aft stairs the following are installed:
- Staircase barrier
- Theater cord
- Staircase illumination
- Staircase emergency lighting
- Smoke curtain
STAIRCASE BARRIER
The staircase barrier is wall-mounted.
The cabin crew must install the staircase barrier when loading/unloading the aft trolley lift on the UD to
prevent a trolley from accidentally falling down the aft stairs.
WARNING Ensure that the staircase barrier is open for Taxi, Takeoff and Landing. This is
necessary for a quick evacuation in case of an emergency. If the staircase barrier is not
open, injury or suffocation to passengers or cabin crewmembers in that area is possible.
For more information about the installation of the staircase barrier, Refer to How to Operate the
Staircase Barrier
THEATER CORD
The theater cord is a removable, flexible barrier that can be installed at the MD end of the aft stairs. It
will hinder passengers from using the aft stairs.
At each end of the theater cord are snap hooks that can be hooked into eyes on the sidewalls of the aft
stairs. If necessary, the cabin crew can unhook the theater cord to open the deck-to-deck passage. For
more information Refer to How to Operate the Theater Cord.
When to install and how to use the theater cord is in the responsibility of the airline.
WARNING The theater cord has to be removed for Taxi, Takeoff and Landing in order to ensure a
quick evacuation in case of an emergency. Otherwise, in case of an evacuation, injury
or suffocation to passengers and/or cabin crew in this area is possible.
For Taxi, Takeoff and Landing, the theater cord must be stowed in a stowage near the aft stairs.
UAE A380 03-60-30 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Description
A380
Theater Cord Blocking the Deck-to-Deck Passage

For more information about staircase emergency lighting, please Refer to Emergency Lighting - Cabin
Emergency Lights.
SMOKE CURTAIN
To minimize the negative effects of smoke on the persons on the deck, that is not directly affected by
smoke, a smoke curtain can be installed at the aft stairs. The smoke curtain is integrated in the UD
sidewall of the staircase. To install the smoke curtain correctly, it must be tightened and fastened to the
opposite staircase sidewall.
For more information about the installation of the smoke curtain, please Refer to Aft Stairs - How to
Install the Smoke Curtain.
UAE A380 03-60-30 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Description
A380
AFT STAIRS
The aft stairs are the second connection between the Main Deck (MD) and the Upper Deck (UD) of the
A380. To read more about the use of the aft stairs, please Refer to Quick Reference Table for Use of
the Aft Stairs.
STAIRCASE BARRIER
The staircase barrier is a wall-mounted barrier which has two functions:
- When loading / unloading the aft trolley lift on the upper deck, the staircase barrier prevents a trolley
from accidentally falling down the aft stairs.
- The staircase barrier also hinders passengers using the aft stairs during certain times of the flight.
WARNING The staircase barrier must be opened for taxi, take-off and landing in order to ensure a
quick evacuation in case of an emergency. Otherwise, in case of an evacuation, injury
or suffocation to passengers and/or to the cabin crew in this area is possible.
To read more about the installation of the staircase barrier, please Refer to How to Operate the
Staircase Barrier.
STAIRCASE ILLUMINATION
To read more about staircase illumination, please Refer to Types of Cabin Light, Refer to Definition of
Illuminated Areas.
For more information about staircase emergency lighting, please Refer to Emergency Lighting - Cabin
Emergency Lights.
SMOKE CURTAIN
To minimize the negative effects of smoke on the persons on the deck, that is not directly affected by
smoke, a smoke curtain can be installed at the aft stairs. The smoke curtain is integrated in the UD
sidewall of the staircase. To install the smoke curtain correctly, it must be tightened and fastened to the
opposite staircase sidewall.
For more information about the installation of the smoke curtain, please Refer to Aft Stairs - How to
Install the Smoke Curtain.
UAE A380 03-60-30 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
FORWARD STAIRS - HOW TO OPERATE THE STAIRCASE BARRIER

Main Components of the Staircase Barrier
HOW TO INSTALL THE STAIRCASE BARRIER

1. Turn both 1/4-turn retainers to unlock the staircase barrier (in the figure below: a = closed, b =
open).
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 1/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
How to Open the 1/4-Turn Retainers
2. Swivel the staircase barrier out of the retaining bracket.

Note: Look at the staircase barrier joint to ensure that the staircase barrier has made a full 90 °
turn. Otherwise the staircase barrier joint jams and it is not possible to carry out the next
operation steps.
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 2/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
How to Swivel the Staircase Barrier
3. Lower the staircase barrier:
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 3/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
How to Lower the Staircase Barrier
a. Ensure that the red locking indicator is visible before the staircase barrier reaches the locking
bracket.
CAUTION Do not entirely lower the staircase barrier when the locking indicator is green.
Otherwise the locking pin is in locked position too early and, when in contact to
the locking bracket, could cause damage to itself or to the locking bracket.
b. Guide the staircase barrier entirely down into the locking bracket.
4. Lock the staircase barrier:
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 4/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
How to Lock the Staircase Barrier
a. Shift the collar towards the locking bracket until it clicks in the locked position.
b. Check that the green locking indicator is visible and the UNLOCK pb came out to ensure the
staircase barrier is installed correctly.
HOW TO STOW THE STAIRCASE BARRIER
1. Unlock the staircase barrier:
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 5/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
How to Unlock the Staircase Barrier
a. Press and hold the UNLOCK pb (step 1 in the figure above).

b. Shift the collar away from the locking bracket to unlock the staircase barrier (step 2 in the figure
above).
2. Lift the staircase barrier:
a. To avoid any damage, check that the red locking indicator is visible and that both 1/4-turn
retainers are open (= in their vertical position).
CAUTION Do not lift the staircase barrier when the locking indicator is green. Otherwise the
locking pin is in locked position and could cause damage to the FWD stairs
ceiling panel.
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 6/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
b. Guide the staircase barrier into vertical position.

3. Swivel the staircase barrier into the retaining bracket.
Note: Look at the staircase barrier joint to ensure that the staircase barrier has made a full 90 °
turn. Otherwise the staircase barrier joint jams and it is not possible to carry out the next
operation step.
How to Swivel the Staircase Barrier
4. Turn both 1/4-turn retainers to lock the staircase barrier (in the figure below: a = open, b = closed).
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 7/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
How to Lock the Staircase Barrier
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 8/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
FORWARD STAIRS - HOW TO OPERATE THE THEATER CORD

Applicable to: ALL
Note: A theater cord is an optional feature of the forward stairs. If installed, the theater cord location
may differ from the location shown below. But the operation itself is the same.
HOW TO INSTALL THE THEATER CORD
WARNING Do not install the theater cord for Taxi, Takeoff and Landing in order to ensure a quick
evacuation in case of an emergency. Otherwise, in case of an evacuation, injury or
suffocation to passengers and/or cabin crew in that area is possible.
Theater Cord Position When the FWD Stairs Are Closed
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 9/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
1. Depending on the location where the theater cord is stowed:

Open one snap hook, release it from the eye and remove the theater cord from the hook on the
sidewall(s) of the FWD stairs.
Alternatively take the theater cord out of the stowage near the FWD stairs.
2. Install the snap hook(s) of the theater cord in the eye(s) on the sidewall(s) of the FWD stairs.
Now the deck-to-deck passage via the FWD stairs is blocked.
HOW TO OPEN THE DECK-TO-DECK PASSAGE
Theater Cord Position When the FWD Stairs Are Open
1. Open the snap hook(s) and release the theater cord from the eye(s).
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 10/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
Put the theater cord into a stowage near the FWD stairs.
Alternatively fix the theater cord on the sidewall of the FWD stairs:
a. Put the theater cord under the hook and, with its free end, approach the eye where the fixed end
is on (see figure above).
b. Install the open snap hook of the theater cord in the eye on the sidewall of the FWD stairs.
FORWARD STAIRS - HOW TO INSTALL THE SMOKE CURTAIN

Applicable to: ALL
1. Release the smoke curtain.

Releasing the Smoke Curtain
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 11/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
Note: On the upper deck side of the staircase, below the bottom end of the RH handrail there is
the smoke curtain release lever.
The cover of the smoke curtain release lever is placarded with Smoke Curtain Lever.
a. To get access to the smoke curtain release lever, open it's cover by pressing on the left side of
the cover.
b. Swivel out the cover and hold it in fully open position using the left hand.
c. Using the left hand, pull up the smoke curtain release lever.
Now the smoke curtain compartment in the staircase ceiling opens and the smoke curtain
deploys through gravity.
2. Use the velcro strips to fasten the smoke curtain to the outer side of the staircase sidewalls.
Note: The velcro strips are located in the gap between the staircase sidewalls and the Shower
Spa.
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 12/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
Fastening the Smoke Curtain to the Staircase Sidewalls
Now the smoke curtain is installed.
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 13/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
AFT STAIRS - HOW TO OPERATE THE STAIRCASE BARRIER

Applicable to: ALL
The staircase barrier prevents a trolley from accidentally falling down the aft stairs.
WARNING Install the staircase barrier every time before loading or unloading the aft trolley lift at
the upper deck. A falling trolley can cause serious injury to persons in the aft stairs area
on the main deck.
Depending on the airline policy or national airworthiness regulations the staircase barrier must be used
additionally to prevent passengers, especially children, from falling down the stairs.
The staircase barrier is a bi-folded fence door.
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 14/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
Operating Parts
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 15/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
HOW TO INSTALL THE STAIRCASE BARRIER

Staircase Barrier in Stowed Position
1. Unlatch the staircase barrier from the outer sidewall:

Slide both latch handles of the sidewall latch into unlatched position (see figure below).
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 16/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
Sidewall Latch
2. Grasp the handle of the staircase barrier and pull it.

a. Release the two fence door wings from each other.
b. Pull the staircase barrier straight across the aisle towards the inner sidewall.
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 17/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
Staircase Barrier in Intermediate Position
3. Latch the staircase barrier:

a. Carefully insert the two tongues on the outmost side of the staircase barrier into the grooves on
the inner sidewall.
Now the staircase barrier is in the correct position.
b. Slide the handle of the center latch to the latched position.
Now the staircase barrier is installed correctly.
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 18/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
Staircase Barrier Installed and Latched
HOW TO STOW THE STAIRCASE BARRIER

1. Unlatch the staircase barrier:
Slide the handle of the center latch to the unlatched position.
2. Use the handle to push and fold the staircase barrier:
a. Carefully guide the two tongues out of the grooves on the inner sidewall.
b. Fold the staircase barrier straight across the aisle towards the outer sidewall.
3. Connect both fence door wings:
Press the two fence door wings against each other until the pilot pin is entirely in the pilot pin
location hole.
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 19/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
Pilot Pin and Sidewall Latch
4. Latch the staircase barrier on the outer sidewall:

a. Push the staircase barrier against the outer sidewall and hold it in this position.
b. Slide both latch handles of the sidewall latch into latched position (see figure above).
HOW TO REMOVE THE STAIRCASE BARRIER
The aft stairs are an alternative escape path in case of an aircraft evacuation. For Taxi, Takeoff and
Landing the staircase barrier must not block the escape path. If the staircase barrier jams and there is
no possibility to stow it, two quick-release pins enable the cabin crew to entirely remove the staircase
barrier.
Note: To remove the staircase barrier two crewmembers are recommended. One who holds the
staircase barrier and one who removes the quick-release pins.
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 20/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
How to Remove the Staircase Barrier
WARNING To avoid injury to persons onboard the aircraft it is mandatory to safely stow the
removed staircase barrier for Taxi, Takeoff and Landing, e.g. in a nearby lavatory (then
close and lock it).
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 21/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
AFT STAIRS - HOW TO OPERATE THE THEATER CORD

Note: A theater cord is an optional feature of the aft stairs.

HOW TO INSTALL THE THEATER CORD
WARNING Do not install the theater cord for Taxi, Takeoff and Landing in order to ensure a quick
evacuation in case of an emergency. Otherwise, in case of an evacuation, injury or
suffocation to passengers and/or cabin crew in that area is possible.
Theater Cord Position when the Aft Stairs are Closed
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 22/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380

Open one snap hook, release it from the eye and remove the theater cord from the hook on the
sidewall(s) of the aft stairs.
Alternatively take the theater cord out of the stowage near the aft stairs.
2. Install the snap hook(s) of the theater cord in the eye(s) on the sidewall(s) of the aft stairs.
Now the deck-to-deck passage via the aft stairs is blocked.
HOW TO OPEN THE DECK-TO-DECK PASSAGE
Theater Cord Position When the Aft Stairs Are Open
1. Open the snap hook(s) and release the theater cord from the eye(s).
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 23/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
Put the theater cord into a stowage near the aft stairs.
Alternatively fix the theater cord on the sidewall of the aft stairs:
a. Put the theater cord under the hook and, with its free end, approach the eye where the fixed end
is on (see figure above).
b. Install the open snap hook of the theater cord in the eye on the sidewall of the aft stairs.
AFT STAIRS - HOW TO INSTALL THE SMOKE CURTAIN

Applicable to: ALL
1. Open the smoke curtain cover by pulling the recessed grip.

Smoke Curtain Cover
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 24/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
2. Swivel the smoke curtain cover to the fully open position (at an angle of 90 degrees).
3. Grasp both fabric loops on the front side of the smoke curtain and pull the smoke curtain out of it's
compartment.
Fabric Loops on the Smoke Curtain
4. Move the smoke curtain along the smoke curtain rail until it reaches the end position at the opposite
sidewall.
5. Press the three snap fasteners (upper, central, lower) to their counterparts on the sidewall.
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 25/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STAIRS
Operation
A380
Snap Fastener (Example: Central)
Now the smoke curtain is installed.
CAUTION If there is the need to unfasten the smoke curtain – either partly or fully – from the
staircase sidewall, carefully lift up the snap fastener(s), which are quite stiff to operate.
Do not pull at the fabric around the snap fastener(s). Otherwise the snap fastener(s) can
be ripped easily out of the fabric.
UAE A380 03-60-40 P 26/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
General
A380
TROLLEY LIFT - INTRODUCTION

Aircraft with One Trolley Lift
INFORMATION ABOUT PURPOSE AND USE OF THE TROLLEY LIFT

The trolley lift onboard the aircraft enables the transportation of trolleys, standard units or loose items
from the main deck to the upper deck, and vice versa. It is also possible to use the trolley lift
temporarily for the stowage of trolleys.
WARNING Any other than this intended use of the trolley lift, especially the transportation of
persons or animals, is strictly forbidden.
Note: The trolley lift is designed and certified to prevent spreading of smoke and fire. Therefore, the
inner door of the trolley lift (cage door) should remain closed at any time except during the
loading of trolleys, standard units or loose items.
UAE A380 03-70-10 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
General
A380
TROLLEY LIFT(S) - INTRODUCTION

Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0216, 0225
TROLLEY LIFTS DESIGNATION

Trolley Lifts Onboard (Aircraft Standard Configuration)
Note: In other AIRBUS Manuals the forward trolley lift is designated as "Trolley Lift L02" (L Zero
Two).
INFORMATION ABOUT PURPOSE AND USE OF THE TROLLEY LIFTS
The trolley lifts onboard the aircraft enable the transportation of trolleys, standard units or loose items
from the main deck to the upper deck, and vice versa. It is also possible to use the trolley lifts for the
stowage of trolleys.
WARNING Any other than this intended use of a trolley lift, especially the transportation of persons
or animals, is strictly forbidden.
Note: The trolley lifts are designed and certified to prevent spreading of smoke and fire. Therefore,
the inner door of the trolley lifts (cage door) should remain closed at any time except during the
loading of trolleys, standard units or loose items.
UAE A380 03-70-10 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Location
A380
LOCATION OF THE TROLLEY LIFT

Overhead View
UAE A380 03-70-20 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Location
A380
LOCATION OF THE TROLLEY LIFTS

Overhead View
UAE A380 03-70-20 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Description
A380
MAIN PARTS OF A TROLLEY LIFT

Applicable to: ALL
Overview (Typical)
Note: In other AIRBUS Manuals the outer door is designated as "trunk door" and the inner door is
designated as "cage door".
UAE A380 03-70-30 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Description
A380
CAPACITY AND LOAD LIMIT

The trolley lift onboard the aircraft has this capacity:

- One full-size trolley or
- One or two half-size trolley(s) or
- Up to six standard units or
- Loose items/waste bags
CAUTION Do not exceed the load limit of the trolley lift! Overload can significantly damage the
trolley lift.
The trolley lift onboard the aircraft has these load limits:
- 108 kg / 238 lbs during flight (warning limit)
- 180 kg / 397 lbs on ground (absolute limit)
Note: In case of an emergency during flight and for safety reasons only (e.g. to move the trolley
lift to the safer position on the main deck), exceeding the warning limit can be taken into
account
The folding shelf has a load limit of 40 kg / 88 lbs, which is also placarded in the lift cage.
UAE A380 03-70-30 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Description
A380
CAPACITY AND LOAD LIMIT

All trolley lifts onboard the aircraft have the same capacity:
- One full-size trolley or
- One or two half-size trolley(s) or
- Up to six standard units or
- Loose items/waste bags
CAUTION Do not exceed the load limit of the trolley lift! Overload can significantly damage the
trolley lift.
A placard, in the lift cage of every trolley lift, indicates the load limit of the trolley lift.
All trolley lifts onboard the aircraft have the same load limit:
- 108 kg / 238 lbs during flight (warning limit)
- 180 kg / 397 lbs on ground (absolute limit)
Note: In case of an emergency during flight and for safety reasons only (e.g. to move the trolley
lift to the safer position on the main deck), exceeding the warning limit can be taken into
account
The folding shelf has a load limit of 40 kg / 88 lbs, which is also placarded in the lift cage.
UAE A380 03-70-30 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Description
A380
LIFT CAGE POSITION DURING TAKE-OFF AND LANDING

Applicable to: ALL
WARNING The trolley lift(s) should not be operated during the following flight phases:
- Take-Off and Initial Climb
- Final Approach and Landing
Opening the inner door during these flight phases can result in injury to the operating
person and damage to the trolley lift caused by moving trolleys.
The lift cage is most secure, when it is on the main deck. Therefore the lift cage automatically moves to
the main deck in these conditions:
- If the lift cage reaches the upper deck and the outer door will not be opened within a certain time,
depending on the flight phase:
• Within 120 seconds (presetting) during the flight phase Cruise.
L2
Note: The maintenance crew may have adjusted this time to a value between 30 and 600
seconds.
• Within 20 seconds (presetting) during the flight phases Take-Off and Initial Climb, Final Climb, L1
Approach, Final Approach and Landing.

L2
Note: The maintenance crew may have adjusted this time to a value between 10 and 60
seconds.
- If there is no data communication between the trolley lift controller and the associated aircraft L1
computer for 120 seconds during any flight phase.

Note: If at least one upper deck door of the trolley lift is still open, the automatic transit is blocked.
Then the display on the operating panel indicates CLOSE DOOR !. When the door is closed,
the lift cage will move automatically to the main deck after 20 seconds (presetting).
L2
Note: The maintenance crew may have adjusted this time to a value between 10 and 600 seconds.
UAE A380 03-70-30 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
DOOR OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
Note: The following instructions refer to both the forward trolley lift and the aft trolley lift.
HOW TO OPEN THE OUTER DOOR (TRUNK DOOR)
Note: The outer door is locked by an automatic door lock if the lift cage is not behind it. In this case it
is not possible to open the outer door.
CAUTION Do not try to open the outer door if the lift cage is not behind it. Otherwise the outer door
and its operating parts could be damaged.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 1/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
Steps to Open the Outer Door (Trunk Door)
STEP 1
Slide the latch handle of the manual door lock to the open position.
STEP 2
Slide the latch handle of the door latch to the open position and hold it.
STEP 3
Pull the latch handle of the door latch until the outer door is entirely open.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 2/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
The outer door is entirely open when the door stopper on the upper side of the outer door snaps into
place and holds the outer door in open position.
HOW TO CLOSE THE OUTER DOOR (TRUNK DOOR)
Note: It is not possible to close the outer door if the inner door (cage door) is not correctly closed and
latched.
Steps to Close the Outer Door (Trunk Door)
STEP 1
Slide the latch handle of the door latch to the open position and hold it.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 3/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
STEP 2
WARNING Hold the latch handle, when closing the outer door, in order to prevent jamming
fingers between the outer door and the door frame.
Push the outer door gently against the door frame.
CAUTION To prevent damage to the outer door and the door latch of the inner door, do not try
to close the outer door with force, if:
- There is still a gap between the outer door and the door frame and
- It is not possible to move the outer door gently towards the door frame.
Then open the outer door again and check whether the inner door is correctly
latched or whether there is an object jamming between the outer door and the door
frame.
STEP 3
Slide the latch handle of the door latch to the closed position.
Note: Instead of sliding the latch handle, it is possible to simply release it. Because the door latch
is spring-loaded, the door bolt snaps into place.
STEP 4
To additionally lock the trolley lift: Slide the latch handle of the manual door lock to the closed
position.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 4/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
Note: The following instructions refer to both the forward trolley lift and the aft trolley lift.
HOW TO OPEN THE INNER DOOR (CAGE DOOR)
Steps to Open the Inner Door (Cage Door)
STEP 1
Lift the T-handle of the door latch all the way up, and then slide it horizontally to the open position.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 5/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
STEP 2
Pull the T-handle of the door latch to open the inner door. If the inner door is in an intermediate
position, stop pulling the inner door and use the second hand to hold the inner door in the
intermediate position.
STEP 3
Slide the T-handle of the door latch horizontally to the opposite side, and then lower it entirely to the
closed position. The closed position is reached when the T-handle is level with the door surface.
Note: Instead of lowering the T-handle, it is possible to simply release it. Because the T-handle is
spring-loaded, normally it reaches the closed position automatically. In very few cases it
can happen that the T-handle does not reach the closed position. Then correct its position
manually.
STEP 4
Use the second hand to entirely open the inner door.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 6/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
HOW TO CLOSE THE INNER DOOR (CAGE DOOR)

Steps to Close the Inner Door (Cage Door)
STEP 1
Lift the T-handle of the door latch all the way up, and then slide it horizontally to the open position.
STEP 2
WARNING Hold the T-handle of the door latch, when closing the inner door, in order to prevent
jamming fingers between the inner door and the door frame.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 7/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
Push the inner door gently against the door frame.
CAUTION To prevent damage to the inner door and the door latch of the inner door, do not try
to close the inner door with force, if:
- There is still a gap between the inner door and the door frame and
- It is not possible to move the inner door gently towards the door frame.
In this case open the inner door again and check whether there is an object jamming
between the inner door and the door frame.
STEP 3
Slide the T-handle of the door latch horizontally to the opposite side, and then lower it entirely to the
closed position. The closed position is reached when the T-handle is level with the door surface.
Note: Instead of lowering the T-handle, it is possible to simply release it. Because the T-handle is
spring-loaded, normally it reaches the closed position automatically. In very few cases it
can happen that the T-handle does not reach the closed position. Then correct its position
manually.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 8/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
LOAD HANDLING
Applicable to: ALL
Note: If not mentioned explicitly, the following instructions are applicable to both the forward trolley
lift and the aft trolley lift.
AFT TROLLEY LIFT ONLY: BEFORE INSERTING OR REMOVING A TROLLEY
WARNING Before inserting or removing a trolley on the upper deck, fix the trolley barrier to prevent
the trolley from falling down the rear stairs. Otherwise severe injury to persons at the
main deck end of the rear stairs as well as damage to the trolley itself and/or the aircraft
furniture is possible.
HOW TO INSERT THE FULL-SIZE TROLLEY

Note: (forward trolley lift only)
If the intermediate latch is in latched position, move down the handle until the intermediate
latch is level with the sidewall.
CAUTION Make sure that the shelf is in vertical position. Otherwise damage to the shelf when
inserting the trolley is possible.
If the shelf is not in the vertical position, move it up by hand until it is locked magnetically in the vertical
position.
WARNING When pushing the trolley into the lift cage, make sure that your hands are on the front
side of the trolley only, in order to avoid jamming fingers between the trolley and the lift
cage.
1. On the trolley: Press down on the green pedal to release the trolley brake.
2. With the pedals showing towards the trolley lift (Forward Trolley Lift) or with the pedals showing
towards you (Aft Trolley Lift) respectively and with your hands on the front side of the trolley,
carefully push the trolley into the lift cage until it reaches the rearmost position.
3. On the trolley: Press down on the red pedal to apply the trolley brake.
HOW TO REMOVE THE FULL-SIZE TROLLEY
WARNING When pulling the trolley out of the lift cage, make sure that your hands are on the front
side of the trolley only, in order to avoid jamming fingers between the trolley and the lift
cage.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 9/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
1. On the trolley:
Press down on the green pedal to release the trolley brake.
2. With your hands on the front side of the trolley, carefully pull the trolley out of the lift cage.
3. On the trolley:
Press down on the red pedal to apply the trolley brake.
FORWARD TROLLEY LIFT
HOW TO INSERT ONE HALF-SIZE TROLLEY
If the shelf is not in the vertical position, move it up by hand until it is locked magnetically in the
vertical position.
WARNING It is important to push the trolley into the lift cage with your hands on the nearest face
of the trolley. Do NOT place your hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the
trolley. Otherwise jamming the fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
CAUTION Always latch the trolley in the lift cage before operating the trolley lift in order to
prevent damage to both the lift cage and the trolley.
On the Main Deck

1. Move up the handle of the intermediate latch on the sidewall of the lift cage to the latched
position.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 10/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
Intermediate Latch in Latched Position
2. On the trolley:
3. With the pedals showing towards the trolley lift and with your hands on the nearest face of
the trolley:
Carefully push the trolley into the lift cage until it touches the intermediate latch.
On the Upper Deck
Note: If the intermediate latch is in latched position, move down the handle until the
intermediate latch is level with the sidewall.
1. On the trolley:
2. With the pedals showing towards the trolley lift and with your hands on the nearest face of
the trolley:
Carefully push the trolley into the lift cage until it reaches the rearmost position.
position.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 11/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
HOW TO REMOVE ONE HALF-SIZE TROLLEY
WARNING It is important to pull the trolley out of the lift cage with your hands on that part of the
trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional latch panel. Do NOT place
your hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the trolley. Otherwise jamming
the fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
On the Main Deck / On the Upper Deck

1. Move down the handle of the intermediate latch on the sidewall of the lift cage to the
unlatched position.
Intermediate Latch in Unlatched Position
2. With your hands on that part of the trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional
latch panel:
Carefully pull the trolley out of the lift cage.
3. On the trolley:
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 12/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
AFT TROLLEY LIFT
HOW TO INSERT ONE HALF-SIZE TROLLEY
vertical position.
If the intermediate latch is in latched position, move down the handle until the intermediate latch is
level with the sidewall.
CAUTION Always latch the trolley in the lift cage before operating the trolley lift in order to
prevent damage to both the lift cage and the trolley.

1. On the trolley:
2. With the pedals showing towards you and with your hands on the nearest face of the trolley:
position.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 13/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
HOW TO REMOVE ONE HALF-SIZE TROLLEY

1. Move down the handle of the intermediate latch on the sidewall of the lift cage to the
unlatched position.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 14/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
2. With your hands on that part of the trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional
latch panel:
3. On the trolley:
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 15/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
BEFORE INSERTING OR REMOVING A TROLLEY
Note: Remember to immediately remove the trolley barrier after having inserted or removed the
trolley.
HOW TO INSERT THE TWO HALF-SIZE TROLLEYS
If the shelf is not in the vertical position, move it up by hand until it is locked magnetically in the vertical
position.
If the intermediate latch is in latched position, move down the handle until the intermediate latch is level
with the sidewall.
WARNING It is important to push the trolley into the lift cage with your hands on the nearest face of
the trolley. Do NOT place your hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the
1. Insert the first trolley:

a. On the trolley:
b. With the pedals showing towards you and with your hands on the nearest face of the trolley:
2. Insert the second trolley:
a. On the trolley:
Carefully push the trolley into the lift cage until it touches the first trolley.
Note: The additional latch and the intermediate latch must not be engaged when operating two
half-size trolleys.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 16/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
HOW TO REMOVE THE TWO HALF-SIZE TROLLEYS
trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional latch panel. Do NOT place your
hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the trolley. Otherwise jamming the
fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
1. Remove the first trolley:

a. With your hands on that part of the trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional latch
panel:
b. On the trolley:
2. Remove the second trolley:
panel:
b. On the trolley:
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 17/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
BEFORE INSERTING OR REMOVING A TROLLEY
Note: Remember to immediately remove the trolley barrier after having inserted or removed the
trolley.
CAUTION Before inserting the trolleys into the lift cage, make sure that the wheel guides, on both
sidewalls slightly above the lift cage floor, are in the vertical position in order to prevent
damage to both the wheel guides and the trolleys.
If the wheel guides are not in the vertical position, move them up by hand until they are locked
magnetically in the vertical position.
If the intermediate latch is in latched position, move down the handle until the intermediate latch is level
with the sidewall.
WARNING When pushing a trolley into the lift cage, make sure that your hands are on the front side
of the trolley only, in order to avoid jamming fingers between the trolley and the lift cage.

a. On the trolley:
a. On the trolley:
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 18/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional latch panel. Do NOT place your
hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the trolley. Otherwise jamming the
fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.

panel:
b. On the trolley:
panel:
b. On the trolley:

vertical position.

a. On the trolley:
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 19/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380

b. With the pedals showing towards the trolley lift and with your hands on the nearest face of
the trolley:
a. On the trolley:
b. With the pedals showing towards the trolley lift and with your hands on the nearest face of
the trolley:
Note: The additional latch and the intermediate latch must not be engaged when operating
two half-size trolleys.

a. With your hands on that part of the trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional
latch panel:
b. On the trolley:
latch panel:
b. On the trolley:
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 20/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
AFT TROLLEY LIFT
vertical position.

a. On the trolley:
b. With the pedals showing towards you and with your hands on the nearest face of the
trolley:
a. On the trolley:
b. With the pedals showing towards you and with your hands on the nearest face of the
trolley:
Note: The additional latch and the intermediate latch must not be engaged when operating
two half-size trolleys.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 21/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380

latch panel:
b. On the trolley:
latch panel:
b. On the trolley:
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 22/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
HOW TO INSERT STANDARD UNITS

1. Take the first standard unit and put it on the floor of the lift cage.
2. If necessary, put other standard units, one at a time, on top of the previous one.
3. If necessary, additionally use the folding shelf to stow standard units in the lift cage.
CAUTION Respect the load limit of the shelf. Otherwise the shelf could be damaged.
Note: The load limit of the shelf is placarded in the lift cage.
a. Move down the shelf by hand until it is in the horizontal position.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 23/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
Moving Down the Shelf (Standard Units not Shown)
b. Take the first standard unit and put it on the shelf.

c. If necessary, put a second standard unit on top of the previous one.
HOW TO REMOVE STANDARD UNITS
1. If the shelf is in use:
a. Grasp the standard units on the shelf, one at a time, and take them out of the lift cage.
b. Move up the shelf by hand until it is locked magnetically in the vertical position.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 24/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
Moving Up the Shelf (Standard Units not Shown)
2. Grasp the standard units on the floor, one at a time, and take them out of the lift cage.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 25/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
0225-0229, 0241-0244
HOW TO INSERT STANDARD UNITS

1. Take the first standard unit and put it on the floor of the lift cage.
2. If necessary, put other standard units, one at a time, on top of the previous one.
3. If necessary, additionally use the folding shelf to stow standard units in the lift cage.
CAUTION Respect the load limit of the shelf. Otherwise the shelf could be damaged.
Note: The load limit of the shelf is placarded in the lift cage.
a. Move down the shelf by hand until it is in the horizontal position.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 26/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
Moving Down the Shelf (Standard Units not Shown)
b. Take the first standard unit and put it on the shelf.

c. If necessary, put a second standard unit on top of the previous one.
HOW TO REMOVE STANDARD UNITS
1. If the shelf is in use:
a. Grasp the standard units, one at a time, and take them out of the lift cage.
b. Move up the shelf by hand until it is locked magnetically in the vertical position.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 27/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
Moving Up the Shelf (Standard Units not Shown)
2. Grasp the standard units on the floor, one at a time, and take them out of the lift cage.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 28/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
LIFT OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO MOVE THE LIFT CAGE UP

Steps to Move the Lift Cage Up
AT FULL SPEED (STANDARD MODE)

STEP 1
Press the UP ARROW pb on the operating panel.
Note: At full speed, it takes the lift cage 10 seconds to move from the main deck to the upper
deck.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 29/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
AT HALF SPEED (LOW NOISE MODE)

Note: Select the low noise mode when it is important not to disturb the passengers, such as at
night.
At half speed, it takes the lift cage 20 seconds to move from the main deck to the upper
deck.
STEP 1
Press the DOWN ARROW pb on the operating panel.
This activates the low noise mode.
STEP 2
Within 15 seconds after having pressed the DOWN ARROW pb, press the UP ARROW pb on
the operating panel.
Note: If the time gap between pressing the DOWN ARROW pb and UP ARROW pb is greater
than 15 seconds, the trolley lift software interprets the DOWN ARROW pb command as
inadvertent. Therefore the lift cage will move up with full speed.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 30/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
HOW TO MOVE THE LIFT CAGE DOWN

Steps to Move the Lift Cage Down
AT FULL SPEED (STANDARD MODE)

STEP 1
Press the DOWN ARROW pb on the operating panel.
Note: At full speed, it takes the lift cage 10 seconds to move from the upper deck to the main
deck.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 31/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
AT HALF SPEED (LOW NOISE MODE)

Note: Select the low noise mode when it is important not to disturb the passengers, such as at
night.
At half speed, it takes the lift cage 20 seconds to move from the upper deck to the main
deck.
STEP 1
Press the UP ARROW pb on the operating panel.
This activates the low noise mode.
STEP 2
Within 15 seconds after having pressed the UP ARROW pb, press the DOWN ARROW pb on
the operating panel.
Note: If the time gap between pressing the UP ARROW pb and DOWN ARROW pb is greater
than 15 seconds, the trolley lift software interprets the UP ARROW pb command as
inadvertent. Therefore the lift cage will move with full speed.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 32/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
Note: If the trolley lift is in an abnormal or emergency condition, it is possible to stop the lift cage
while it is moving from the one deck to the other.
DO NOT USE THE STOP pb FOR TROLLEY LIFT OPERATION IN NORMAL CONDITIONS!
Stopping/Restarting the Lift Cage
HOW TO STOP THE LIFT CAGE

STEP 1
Press the STOP pb on any operating panel to immediately stop the lift cage movement at the
current position.
The STOP pb comes on and the OPERATIVE indicator goes off.
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 33/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
Operation
A380
HOW TO RESTART THE LIFT CAGE
CAUTION Before restarting the lift cage make sure that the trolley lift is no longer in an abnormal or
emergency condition, in order to avoid trolley lift damage.
STEP 1
On the same operating panel, where the STOP pb has been pressed to stop the lift cage:
Note: The deck where the STOP pb has been pressed is indicated on the display of both
operating panels (STOP UD/ STOP MD). Additionally the STOP pb which has been
pressed is illuminated.
Press the illuminated STOP pb.
The STOP pb goes off and the OPERATIVE indicator comes on.
STEP 2
While the trolley lift re-initalizes itself:
Wait until the display on the operating panel is clear.
STEP 3
Press either the UP ARROW pb or the DOWN ARROW pb to move the lift cage to a deck position.
The lift cage moves with half speed (low noise mode).
UAE A380 03-70-40 P 34/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
OPERATING PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
Components of the Operating Panel
Note: The OK pb is for maintenance purpose only and should not be pressed from a member of the
cabin crew. Furthermore the access to the maintenance menu is code protected.
UAE A380 03-70-50 P 1/10

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
OPERATIVE INDICATOR
Applicable to: ALL
The OPERATIVE indicator is located on every operating panel of the trolley lift.
Indication Status When

OPERATIVE Indicator: The trolley lift is in normal condition after trolley lift power on.
ON
Trolley Lift:
OPERATIVE
OPERATIVE Indicator: Each time when the trolley lift is in any of the following conditions:
OFF
- Before trolley lift power ON.
Trolley Lift:
- The trolley lift is in the initialization phase.
INOPERATIVE
Refer to Display and Messages
- The trolley lift is in the referencing phase.
Refer to Display and Messages
- A STOP pb-sw was pressed.
- The trolley lift is in an abnormal condition.
Refer to Trolley Lift Error Messages.
UAE A380 03-70-50 P 2/10

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES

Applicable to: ALL
The display provides information about the current trolley lift status.
A maximum of four lines can be displayed.
MESSAGES IN NORMAL CONDITION

For messages in fault condition: Refer to Trolley Lift Error Messages
Message Trolley Lift Status Cabin Crew Action

CAGE The lift cage is on the current deck. If the outer door is opened when the
The message flashes for 20 seconds. message is flashing, the message
appears no longer on the display.
CLOSE DOOR ! The lift cage is on the upper deck and To automatically move the lift cage to
the open doors block the automatic the main deck, close the inner and the
transit to the main deck. outer door.
UD DOOR OPEN The doors on the indicated deck are When loading or unloading the lift cage
MD DOOR OPEN open. is finished, close the inner and the outer
door.
The message no longer appears on the
display.
ESW The trolley lift is in the initialization Do not touch any trolley lift component
TL-CONTROLLER phase: during the initialization phase.
F:000:017 C:000:018 It (re)sets to the start configuration.
P/N:300–000–100 The initialization phase automatically
V02.00 E:76C8 begins:
I:B6E9
- After trolley lift power on.
- After releasing the STOP pb.
The initialization time depends on
different trolley lift parameters and can
vary from 10 to 90 seconds. The
initialization phase is over when the
OPERATIVE indicator comes on.
UAE A380 03-70-50 P 3/10

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380

HALF SPEED The trolley lift is in the low noise mode None
(the lift cage is at half speed).
Therefore it takes the lift cage 20
seconds to go from one deck to the
other.
LIFT CALL - The doors are open and Close the inner and the outer door to
- the UP ARROW pb or the DOWN enable trolley lift movement.
ARROW pb has been pressed. After the doors are closed the lift cage
can be sent to the other deck by
pressing the UP ARROW pb or the
DOWN ARROW pb.
MAN. ADJUST The outer or inner door cannot be 1. Tip on the UP ARROW pb and the
opened because of a floor level DOWN ARROW pb to manually
discrepancy between lift cage and adjust the position of the lift cage.
deck. This is due to a failure of the 2. Open the outer door to check
automatic adjustment function. whether the manual adjustment was
Both the UP ARROW pb and the sufficient.
DOWN ARROW pb are illuminated. Proceed with step 1,
- if it is not possible to open the
outer door or
- if outer door and inner door can
be opened, but there is still a
floor level discrepancy.
MOVE LIFT TO MD ! The lift cage will be moved None.
automatically from the upper deck to
Note: Opening of the outer door
the main deck within the next 30
within these 30 seconds is
seconds.
possible. After closing the
outer door the counter will start
again (10 to 600 seconds
depending on flight phase and
presetting).
UAE A380 03-70-50 P 4/10

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380

REFERENCING The trolley lift is in the referencing Do not touch any trolley lift component
phase: during the referencing phase.
It (re)adjusts the lift cage regarding
deck position.
The referencing phase automatically
begins:
- After a FAULT reset and a trolley lift
power on.
- If the lift cage position is beyond the
tolerance.
The referencing phase is part of the
initialization phase after a FAULT reset.
The referencing phase is over when
the OPERATIVE indicator comes on.
LOCKS AND LATCHES

Applicable to: ALL
The intermediate latch is in the sidewall of the lift cage. It is used to prevent a single half-size trolley
inside the lift cage from rolling.
CAUTION Always latch the trolley in the lift cage before operating the trolley lift in order to prevent
damage to both the lift cage and the trolley.

The intermediate latch has two handles. They allow the operation of the intermediate latch from two
sides.
UAE A380 03-70-50 P 5/10

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
UAE A380 03-70-50 P 6/10

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
UAE A380 03-70-50 P 7/10

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
AFT TROLLEY LIFT

UAE A380 03-70-50 P 8/10

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
UAE A380 03-70-50 P 9/10

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
UAE A380 03-70-50 P 10/10

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
TROLLEY LIFT RECOVERY - OPERATIVE INDICATOR IS OFF

Applicable to: ALL
The green OPERATIVE indicator is OFF in these cases:

- The green OPERATIVE indicator is defective.
- The power supply of the inoperative trolley lift is currently unavailable.
- An error message is on the display. Then please refer to the Function Recovery Procedure, which
corresponds to the error message.
In order to find out which of the first two causes is responsible for the trolley lift inoperability, please follow
this check list.
If the OPERATIVE indicator is OFF on at least one operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift, L12
please follow this procedure:
YES NO
1. On another operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift: Is the green
OPERATIVE indicator ON? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. The OPERATIVE indicator is defective.
Note: A defective OPERATIVE indicator normally should not have an
influence on the trolley lift operation.
Report to the purser, who will:
- inform all cabin crewmembers that the OPERATIVE indicator is
defective for the remainder of the flight
- make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. Go to 8 Go to 8
3. Using the cabin interphone: Call the flight crew.
Ask whether the flight crew
- has access to the Power Distribution Control System (PDCS) page on
the Onboard Information Terminal
- is allowed to perform a reset of the trolley lift power supply.
Does the flight crew answer to both questions with "Yes"? Go to 4 Go to 7
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 1/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
YES NO
4. Ask the flight crew to check on the Onboard Information Terminal on the
Power Distribution Control System (PDCS) page whether the trolley lift
circuit breaker is still activated.
To display the circuit breaker of the FWD trolley lift (= shown as "Trolley
Lift 1 L02"), the flight crew should select:
ATA = 25, Panel = SPDB2 and FIN = 1ML.
To display the circuit breaker of the aft trolley lift (= shown as "Trolley Lift
2 AFT"), the flight crew should select:
ATA = 25, Panel = SPDB6 and FIN = 2ML.
Has the corresponding circuit breaker still the status CLOSED? Go to 5 Go to 6
5. Ask the flight crew to do a reset:
a. They should set the circuit breaker to the status OPEN.
b. After approximately one minute of waiting, they should set the circuit
breaker back to the status CLOSED.
Wait for confirmation. Go to 8 Go to 8
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 2/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
YES NO
6. The circuit breaker has the status OPEN.
WARNING Do not set this circuit breaker back to the status

CLOSED during flight. Otherwise a potentially
hazardous situation may be created, e.g. a fire in the
aircraft wiring.
Note: The aviation authorities give clear recommendations regarding

tripped / open circuit breakers (e.g. in EASA Safety Information
Bulletin 2009-07):
"A tripped circuit breaker should not be reset in flight unless
deemed necessary for continued safe flight and landing.
Only one reset should be attempted.
Crewmembers may create a potentially hazardous situation
when they reset a CB without knowing what caused it to trip. A
reset should only be done after consulting the relevant
documentary resources e.g. the quick reference handbook
(QRH), the minimum equipment list (MEL), the aircraft flight
manual (AFM), the company operations manual, and/or
maintenance manuals.
Whenever any circuit breaker trips while the aircraft is in
operation, a thorough investigation including a visual inspection
of the appropriate electrical wiring and cable harnesses should
subsequently be undertaken." Go to 7 Go to 7
7. The trolley lift is inoperative.
- inform all cabin crewmembers that the trolley lift is inoperative for the
remainder of the flight
ground. END END
8. Please Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Final Check and Result END END
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 3/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
TROLLEY LIFT RECOVERY - DISPLAY SHOWS "OVERLOAD"

Applicable to: ALL
If the display on the operating panel shows OVERLOAD, please follow this procedure:
YES NO
1. Is the lift cage in a deck position (Upper Deck or Main Deck)? Go to 2 Go to 4
2. The load in the lift cage exceeded the absolute limit of the trolley lift.
Note: To see the warning limit, please Refer to Capacity and Load
Limit Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Partially remove the load.
a. Open the outer and the inner door.
b. Remove the extra load.
c. Close the inner and the outer door. Go to 5 Go to 5
4. The load in the lift cage exceeded the warning limit of the trolley lift.
Note: To see the warning limit, please Refer to Capacity and Load
Limit. Go to 5 Go to 5
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 4/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
TROLLEY LIFT RECOVERY - DISPLAY SHOWS "STOP"

Applicable to: ALL
If the display on the operating panel shows "STOP UD" or "STOP MD", please follow this
procedure:
YES NO
1. On the related operating panel (Upper Deck or Main Deck) of the
inoperative trolley lift: Is the STOP pb-sw illuminated? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. Trolley lift movement has been interrupted by pressing the STOP pb-sw.
a. Ask other cabin crewmembers why the STOP pb-sw has been
pressed.
b. Eliminate the cause of the interruption.
c. On the operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift where the
STOP pb-sw is illuminated: Press the STOP pb-sw again. Go to 10 Go to 10
inoperative trolley lift:
a. Press the STOP pb-sw.
b. Check whether "STOP UD" or "STOP MD" is still on the display and
keep this in mind.
c. Press the STOP pb-sw again. Go to 4 Go to 4
inoperative trolley lift: Does the display show "STOP UD" or "STOP MD"
now? Go to 5 Go to 10
inoperative trolley lift: Is the STOP pb-sw illuminated now? Go to 6 Go to 7
6. After you pressed the STOP pb-sw first, did the display show "STOP UD"
or "STOP MD"? Go to 9 Go to 2
7. After you pressed the STOP pb-sw first, did the display show "STOP UD"
or "STOP MD"? Go to 9 Go to 8
8. The light in the STOP pb-sw is defective. The function of the STOP pb-sw
is not affected, the trolley lift can be operated as usual. Go to 10 Go to 10
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 5/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
YES NO
ground. END END
TROLLEY LIFT RECOVERY - DISPLAY SHOWS "FAULT"

Applicable to: ALL
If the display on the operating panel shows "FAULT", please follow this procedure:
YES NO
1. On any operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift:
a. Press the STOP pb-sw .
b. Press the STOP pb-sw again. Go to 2 Go to 2
2. On any operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift: Is the FAULT
message still on the display? Go to 3 Go to 4
ground. END END
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 6/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
TROLLEY LIFT RECOVERY - DISPLAY SHOWS "TRAILING" OR "JAMMING"

Applicable to: ALL
If the display on the operating panel shows "TRAILING" or "JAMMING", please follow this
procedure:
YES NO
1. On any operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift: Is the JAMMING
message on the display? Go to 2 Go to 4
2. On any operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift: To reverse the
original move of the lift cage press the UP ARROW pb or DOWN
ARROW pb, depending on the original moving direction.
Note: When it is important not to disturb the passengers, such as at
night, select the low noise mode. Refer to How to Move the Lift
Cage Up/Down Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Did the lift cage reach the deck where it started (Upper Deck / Main
Deck)? Go to 7 Go to 6
4. The TRAILING message is on the display.
On any operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift: To continue the
original move of the lift cage press the UP ARROW pb or DOWN
ARROW pb, depending on the original moving direction.
5. Did the lift cage reach the target deck (Upper Deck / Main Deck)? Go to 7 Go to 1
ground. END END
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 7/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
TROLLEY LIFT RECOVERY - DISPLAY SHOWS "LOW TEMPERATURE" OR

"OVERTEMPERATURE" OR "VOLTAGE DROP"
Applicable to: ALL
If the display on the operating panel shows "LOW TEMPERATURE" or "OVERTEMPERATURE" or

"VOLTAGE DROP", please follow this procedure:
YES NO
1. Possible cause: Temperature or voltage out of permitted range.
Wait until the LOW TEMPERATURE or OVERTEMPERATURE or
VOLTAGE DROP message disappears and the OPERATIVE indicator
comes on again.
Note: Check from time to time whether the error message is still on the
display or not. Go to 2 Go to 2
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 8/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
TROLLEY LIFT RECOVERY - FINAL CHECK AND RESULT

Applicable to: ALL
To find out whether the function recovery was successful, please follow this procedure:
YES NO
1. On any operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift: Depending on the lift
cage position press the UP ARROW pb or DOWN ARROW pb.
2. Does the lift cage start moving? Go to 4 Go to 3
Report to the purser, who will
ground. END END
4. The trolley lift is operative.
Make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground about the fact that the trolley lift was temporarily inoperative and
how it was recovered. END END
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 9/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380
TROLLEY LIFT ERROR MESSAGES

Applicable to: ALL
In case of a trolley lift failure the following error messages can appear on the display of all operating
panels.
Note: If the trolley lift does not work properly, refer also to one of these Function Recovery
Procedures:
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - OPERATIVE Indicator Is OFF
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "OVERLOAD"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "STOP"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "FAULT"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "TRAILING" or "JAMMING"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "LOW TEMPERATURE" or
"OVERTEMPERATURE" or "VOLTAGE DROP"
Message Displayed Trolley Lift Status Cabin Crew Action

FAULT Displayed if a trolley lift fault is detected. Reset the trolley lift manually:
The consequences are:
1. Press the STOP pb.
- The lift cage stops immediately. 2. Press the STOP pb again.
- Depending on the fault, the lift cage
If the manual reset is successful:
either remains at its current position
Restart the lift cage by pressing
or automatically returns to its start
either the UP ARROW pb or DOWN
position.
ARROW pb.
- The trolley lift is inoperative.
If the manual reset is not
- The OPERATIVE indicator is off.
successful:
- An error message (“Lift inoperative”)
is automatically sent to the Flight - Inform all cabin crewmembers
Attendant Panel (FAP). that the trolley lift is inoperative
for the remainder of the flight.
- Make an entry in the cabin
logbook to inform the
maintenance crew on ground.
JAMMING Displayed if the lift cage can no longer - Inform all cabin crewmembers
move due to jamming or another that the trolley lift is inoperative
mechanical fault. for the remainder of the flight.
The consequences are: - Make an entry in the cabin
logbook to inform the
- The trolley lift is inoperative.
maintenance crew on ground.
- The OPERATIVE indicator is off.
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 10/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380

LOW TEMPERATURE Displayed if the trolley lift temperature is Wait!
below –15°C / 5°F. When the trolley lift temperature
The consequences are: goes above –15°C / 5°F, the trolley
lift automatically returns to the
- The trolley lift is temporarily
operative state.
inoperative.
- The OPERATIVE indicator is off. - The LOW TEMPERATURE
message no longer appears on
the display.
- The OPERATIVE indicator
comes on again.
ARROW pb.
NO TLC DATA Displayed temporarily during a manual Wait!
reset after a FAULT message. After one second the NO TLC DATA
message no longer appears on the
display.
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 11/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380

OVERLOAD Displayed if the weight measurement If the load in the lift cage exceeded
identifies a trolley lift overload. The the warning limit or the absolute
weight measurement is performed when limit:
the lift cage starts moving.
1. Open the outer and the inner
There are two load limits:
door.
- The warning limit (120 kg / 265 lbs, 2. Remove the extra load.
during flight only). 3. Close the inner and the outer
- The absolute limit (240 kg / 530 lbs, door.
on ground and during flight). 4. Restart the lift cage by pressing
either the UP ARROW pb or
If the load in the lift cage exceeds the
DOWN ARROW pb.
warning limit:
When the load in the lift cage no
- The lift cage stops immediately.
longer exceeds the absolute limit,
- The OPERATIVE indicator is on.
the OVERLOAD message no longer
- The lift cage automatically moves
appears on the display.
back to the start position.
If the load in the lift cage exceeded
Restarting the lift cage is possible. the warning limit and there is not
If the load in the lift cage exceeds the enough time to remove the extra
absolute limit: load:
- The lift cage stops immediately. either the UP ARROW pb or DOWN
- The OPERATIVE indicator is on. ARROW pb.
- The lift cage automatically moves
back to the start position. - The lift cage moves to the other
deck.
Restarting the lift cage is not possible - The overload transit is saved in
without removing the surplus load. a log file.
- When the outer door is opened,
the OVERLOAD message no
longer appears on the display.
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 12/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380

OVERTEMPERATURE Displayed if the temperature in the Wait!
trolley lift drive is close to the upper When the trolley lift has cooled
operation temperature limit. The most down to a defined temperature, the
likely reason for this error message is trolley lift automatically returns to
that many trolley lift cycles with heavy the operative state.
load have been done.
- The OVERTEMPERATURE
message no longer appears on
- The trolley lift is temporarily the display.
inoperative. - The OPERATIVE indicator
- The OPERATIVE indicator is off. comes on again.
ARROW pb.
STOP UD Displayed if the STOP pb on the After having eliminated the reason
STOP MD corresponding operating panel (upper for the interruption, reset the trolley
deck or main deck) was pressed. lift into operative state by pressing
The consequences are: the STOP pb again.
- The lift cage stops immediately. - The STOP UD or STOP MD
- The trolley lift is temporarily message no longer appears on
inoperative. the display.
- The OPERATIVE indicator is off. - The OPERATIVE indicator
comes on again.
ARROW pb.
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 13/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
TROLLEY LIFT(S)
A380

TRAILING Displayed if the lift cage does not Restart the lift cage by pressing
operate with normal speed on the way either the UP ARROW pb or DOWN
to the other deck. ARROW pb.
- The lift cage stops.
- The trolley lift is temporarily
inoperative.
- The OPERATIVE indicator flashes
once, but remains on.
Note: After three times TRAILING
during the same transit, any lift
cage movement is blocked and
the JAMMING message
appears on the display (Refer
to the JAMMING message).
VOLTAGE DROP Displayed if there is no sufficient power Wait!
to move the lift cage. When there is sufficient power
The consequences are: again, the trolley lift automatically
returns to the operative state.
- The lift cage stops immediately.
- The trolley lift is temporarily - The VOLTAGE DROP message
inoperative. no longer appears on the
- The OPERATIVE indicator is off. display.
- The OPERATIVE indicator
comes on again.
ARROW pb.
UAE A380 03-70-60 P 14/14

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS

Applicable to: ALL
Normal purpose of all stowage compartments is to stow various objects:

- Emergency equipment
- Passenger clothes
- Carry on baggage
- Miscellaneous equipment.
WARNING Do not use the stowage compartments for any abnormal purposes!
Injury to persons is possible.
All stowage compartment doors or drawers have a locking mechanism. The locking mechanism
prevents the door or the bin from inadvertent opening, e.g. caused by flight manoeuvres or by
turbulences.
WARNING Make sure that the doors or the bins of all stowage compartments are closed and
correctly latched during:
- Taxi
- Take off
- Turbulences
- Landing.
Injury caused by moving doors, bins and/or falling items is possible.
Depending on the compartment function, the load limit is specific. It is shown on a placard on the inner
side of each stowage compartment.
WARNING Do not overload the stowage compartment!

Overload may cause a failure of the locking mechanism (danger of inadvertent opening)
or damage to the stowage compartment attachment. To avoid this, make sure that the
load is evenly distributed to all stowage compartments.
Depending on their function and location in the cabin, different types of stowage compartments are
installed:
- Overhead Stowage Compartments (OHSC) with a fixed bin
- Overhead Stowage Compartments (OHSC) with a movable bin
- Coat stowages
UAE A380 03-80-10 P 1/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
General
A380
- Additional stowage compartments (e.g. doghouses).

Note: When OHSC with a movable bin are installed, some of these are equipped with an Electronic
Handforce Control System (EHCS). This system assists passengers and crewmembers when
closing or opening the related movable bin and reduces the needed handforce.
UAE A380 03-80-10 P 2/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OVERHEAD STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS WITH MOVABLE / FIXED BINS

Typically overhead stowage compartments (OHSC) are installed above the seat rows in the cabin.
They are attached to make overhead stowage compartment rows. At their bottom side, each OHSC
contains oxygen containers and Passenger Service Units (PSUs). Each oxygen container provides the
passengers in the related seat row with oxygen masks. The PSU provides the passengers with:
- Reading lights (Refer to 06-30-10-30-80 Reading Lights — General).
- Lighted signs (Refer to 04-20-20 Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS)).
- Passenger call system (Refer to 05-50-10 General Information on Passenger Call System).
- Loudspeakers.
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 1/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OHSC Components
OHSC TYPES
Adapted to the cabin configuration, there are different sizes of overhead stowage compartments.
Depending on their position in the cabin, two types of OHSCs are installed:
- Lateral OHSC (above the window seat rows)
- Center OHSC (above the center seat rows).
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 2/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
Lateral and Center OHSC
OHSC ARRANGEMENT
The OHSC can differ from each other in terms of size and bin type for reasons of their position in the
cabin in relation to the cabin configuration. Depending on these customer options different types of
OHSCs can be installed:
- OHSC with a fixed bin (available for small and large compartment sizes),
- OHSC with a movable bin (only available for the small compartment size),
- OHSC with a movable bin and reduced height (only available for the large compartment size).
Additionally, there are different spacers (occasionally usable) and endcaps installed to complete each
OHSC row.
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 3/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
The following overview shows where the different OHSCs are installed in the cabin.
Location of the OHSCs
Deck Class OHSC Type L2
Economy Class Lateral and center OHSC

UD Lateral OHSC
Business Class
Center OHSC with reduced height
MD Economy Class Lateral and center OHSC
OHSC BIN TYPES L1
OHSC WITH A MOVABLE BIN

OHSCs with movable bins are available in different compartment sizes:
- Small compartments
- Large compartments
- Compartments with a reduced height.
To open or close an OHSC with a movable bin, lift the latch located in the middle of the bin and
move the bin downwards (open position) or upwards (closed position). During opening or closing
support the bin movement with at least one hand to avoid uncontrolled opening of the OHSC.
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 4/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
WARNING After closing the bin check that the bin door of the OHSC is locked correctly. Stowed
items could fall out of the compartment and cause injury to persons.
Movable Bin in CLOSED (1) and OPEN (2) Position
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 5/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OVERHEAD STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS (OHSC) WITH EHCS

0210-0216, 0225
- Loudspeakers.
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 6/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OHSC Components
OHSC TYPES
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 7/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OHSC ARRANGEMENT
- OHSC with a movable bin and reduced height (only available for the large compartment size),
- OHSC with a movable bin and an integrated Electronic Handforce Control System (EHCS, only
available for the large compartment size).
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 8/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OHSC row.
Movable OHSC's with power assistance are installed as follows: L2
Deck Class OHSC Type

No lateral OHSC
Minisuites
No center OHSC
UD
Lateral OHSC without EHCS
Business Class
Center OHSC with reduced height, no EHCS
Lateral OHSC with/without EHCS
MD Economy Class
Center OHSC with/without EHCS
OHSC BIN TYPES L1
Depending on the OHSC bin type, the bin door latch position is different:
- For movable bins in the middle of the door
- For fixed bins centered at the bottom edge of the door.
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 9/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OHSC WITH A FIXED BIN

OHSCs with fixed bins are available in different compartment sizes:
To open or close an OHSC with a fixed bin, lift the latch at the bottom edge of the bin door and
move the door upwards (open position) or downwards (closed position).
items could fall out of the compartment and cause injury to persons. In the case of a
OHSC latching or damper device failure: unload, close and identify as inoperative.
Fixed Bin in CLOSED (1) and OPEN (2) Position
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 10/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380

UAE A380 03-80-20 P 11/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OHSC WITH A MOVABLE BIN (LARGE) AND EHCS

Large OHSCs typically have an integrated EHCS. The EHCS is installed inside each of these large
sized compartments, not visible for passengers or crewmembers.
Before opening or closing an OHSC equipped with EHCS, put one hand directly below the related
latch in the middle of the bin (sensor area), then lift the latch with the other hand. The sensor
activates the EHCS, which will assist the opening or closing of the OHSC.
WARNING After closing the bin, check that the bin door of the OHSC is locked correctly. Stowed
items could fall out of the compartment and cause injury to persons. In the case of
an OHSC latching or damper device failure: unload, close and identify as
inoperative.
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 12/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OVERHEAD STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS (OHSC) WITH EHCS

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
- Loudspeakers.
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 13/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OHSC Components
OHSC TYPES
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 14/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OHSC ARRANGEMENT
- OHSC with a movable bin and reduced height (only available for the large compartment size),
- OHSC with a movable bin and an integrated Electronic Handforce Control System (EHCS, only
available for the large compartment size).
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 15/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OHSC row.
Movable OHSC's with power assistance are installed as follows: L2
Deck Class OHSC Type

No lateral OHSC
Minisuites
No center OHSC
UD
Lateral OHSC without EHCS
Business Class
Center OHSC with reduced height, no EHCS
Lateral OHSC with/without EHCS
MD Economy Class
Center OHSC with/without EHCS
OHSC BIN TYPES L1
Depending on the OHSC bin type, the bin door latch position is different:
- For movable bins in the middle of the door
- For fixed bins centered at the bottom edge of the door.
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 16/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OHSC WITH A FIXED BIN

OHSCs with fixed bins are available in different compartment sizes:
To open or close an OHSC with a fixed bin, lift the latch at the bottom edge of the bin door and
move the door upwards (open position) or downwards (closed position).
items could fall out of the compartment and cause injury to persons. In the case of a
OHSC latching or damper device failure: unload, close and identify as inoperative.
Fixed Bin in CLOSED (1) and OPEN (2) Position
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 17/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380

UAE A380 03-80-20 P 18/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OHSC WITH A MOVABLE BIN (LARGE) AND EHCS

Large OHSCs typically have an integrated EHCS. The EHCS is installed inside each of these large
sized compartments, not visible for passengers or crewmembers.
Before opening or closing an OHSC equipped with EHCS, put one hand directly below the related
latch in the middle of the bin (sensor area), then lift the latch with the other hand. The sensor
activates the EHCS, which will assist the opening or closing of the OHSC.
WARNING After closing the bin, check that the bin door of the OHSC is locked correctly. Stowed
items could fall out of the compartment and cause injury to persons. In the case of
an OHSC latching or damper device failure: unload, close and identify as
inoperative.
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 19/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380
OTHER STOWAGES
Applicable to: ALL
In addition to the OHSC which is mainly used for passengers baggage, there are other types of
stowage compartments on board of the aircraft:
- Stowages (S)
- Coat stowages (C)
- Doghouses (D).
These stowage compartments are used for different purposes, e.g. for stowing emergency equipment,
passenger clothes, blankets or pillows etc.
They are normally located near the door/cabin attendant areas and indicated with a placard on the
outside (Refer to 03-10-20 Seating Capacity and Equipment Data).
If aircraft related items are stowed inside these compartments, this is indicated by the placards, e.g.
first aid kit.
Different kind of latches secure the compartment doors against uncontrolled opening and their normal
opening/closing are similar to the other latches installed in the cabin (Refer to 03-90-30-40 Slam Latch
/ Sliding Latch). Special latches, as used for doghouses, are explained by a placard.
UAE A380 03-80-20 P 20/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380 Overhead Bins
UNLOCKING AN OVERHEAD BIN

Applicable to: ALL
Movable Overhead Bin
UAE A380 03-80-30-10 P 1/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380 Overhead Bins
When pulling at the bin handle, the movable overhead bin does not open.
YES NO
1. Push up the movable overhead bin with one hand to support the weight
and simultaneously pull at the bin handle using the other hand. Does the
movable overhead bin open now? END Go to 2
2. Unlock both emergency release latches (called latch in the following)
using a manual release tool.
Note: Instead of the manual release tool a folded magazine or safety
instructions card can be used alternatively.
a. At the position shown in the graphic:
Insert the manual release tool through the sealing into the gap
between the jammed movable overhead bin and the adjacent
overhead bin. It can be helpful to detach the gap sealing by pulling it
out of the retainer in order to improve the access.
b. Slide the manual release tool slowly down to the latch.
c. Carefully use the manual release tool to shift the pin on the latch to
the unlocked position.
d. When the latch is unlocked, unlock the latch on the opposite side of
the jammed movable overhead bin by repeating the operating steps a
to c.
e. Support the bin with the second hand to avoid rapid opening and
down falling objects.
f. Pull at the bin handle.
Does the movable overhead bin open now? Go to 5 Go to 3
3. Check whether the movable overhead bin is equipped with an Electronic
Handcraft Control System (EHCS). Does the movable overhead bin have
an EHCS? Go to 4 Go to 6
UAE A380 03-80-30-10 P 2/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380 Overhead Bins
YES NO
4. Release the EHCS cable from the movable overhead bin using the
manual release tool.
Note: Instead of the manual release tool a folded magazine or safety
instructions card can be used alternatively.
a. Insert the manual release tool through the sealing into the gap
between the jammed movable overhead bin and the adjacent
overhead bin. It can be helpful to detach the gap sealing by pulling it
out of the retainer in order to improve the access.
b. Slide the manual release tool slowly up to the emergency release
lever in order to release the EHCS cable.
c. Release the EHCS cable on the opposite side of the jammed movable
overhead bin by repeating the operating steps a and b.
d. Support the bin with the second hand to avoid rapid opening and
down falling objects.
e. Pull at the bin handle.
Does the movable overhead bin open now? Go to 5 Go to 6
5. The movable overhead bin is open. Enter the relevant details of the
performed recovery action into the cabin logbook. END END
6. The movable overhead bin is still locked. Enter the failure into the cabin
logbook. END END
UAE A380 03-80-30-10 P 3/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGES
A380 Overhead Bins
UAE A380 03-80-30-10 P 4/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Description
A380
THE PURPOSE OF A GALLEY

Applicable to: ALL
DEFINITION
A galley is an area especially designed for in-flight catering purposes:
- To stow and prepare meals
- To stow and prepare hot or cold drinks
- To hold removable galley items like full-size and/or half-size trolleys and containers/standard units
- To integrate several (electrical) galley items like ovens, beverage makers, freezers, etc.
- To stow catering equipment like cutlery, cups, towels, etc. (e.g. in stowages or containers/standard
units)
- To compact and to stow waste.
Galleys are for cabin crew use only.
LIMITATION
If a galley compartment is capable to take more than one trolley / trash compactor side by side:
In order to secure the trolleys / trash compactors properly inside the compartment and to prevent them
from an unintended release either ALL or NO trolleys / trash compactors must be stowed in the
compartment during takeoff, landing and turbulence.
This limitation is also addressed through a placard installed in the galley.
INTRODUCTION
As the cabin itself is adapted to the needs of the airline, so are the galleys. Their number and location
is linked with one specific cabin layout. The galley monuments can be "stand-alones" or arranged in
groups. If arranged in groups, a pelmet - installed as a ceiling on the top of the galleys - may connect
the galley monuments.
To learn more about the galleys in your specific aircraft and the installations:
- Refer to Galley Location
- Refer to Galley Types
- Refer to Electrical Equipment - General
- Refer to Removable Galley Items
- Refer to Equipment of the Water/Waste Cabin System
UAE A380 03-90-10 P 1/6

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Description
A380
GALLEY TYPES
Applicable to: ALL
There are two galley types:

- Wet galleys
A wet galley has connections to some or all of these cabin systems:
• Potable water system
• Waste water system
• Air ventilation / air condition system
• Galley cooling / supplemental cooling system
• Electrical power supply.
- Dry galleys
A dry galley has no connection to any system. Therefore a dry galley is used for food/equipment
storage and meal preparation only.
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

Applicable to: ALL
Wet galleys have the following electrical equipment:

- Work lights
- An electrical panel (including galley cooling control).
- Air vents
- Power outlets
- Galley inserts
The quantity, location and type of this electrical equipment depends on the individual galley
configuration.
UAE A380 03-90-10 P 2/6

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Description
A380
ELECTRICAL PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The electrical panels are installed in several galleys.
DESCRIPTION
The electrical panels are designed to control the devices in the galley.
Note: The following illustrations are examples. They show two typical layouts of electrical panels.
The layouts and the equipment are different according to the galleys installed. Each galley
insert has its own C/B installed on one of these panels. If necessary, each galley insert
electrical supply can be switched off by pulling the related C/B(s) and/or by using the main
galley power OFF switch(es).
For the location of the galleys: Refer to 03-90-20 Galley Location.
UAE A380 03-90-10 P 3/6

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Description
A380
Typical Electrical Panel (Example 1)
UAE A380 03-90-10 P 4/6

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Description
A380
Typical Electrical Panel (Example 2)
Control/Indicator Title Description

Circuit The circuit breaker operates automatically and secures the related
breaker electrical circuit. When the circuit breaker trips, the circuit has an
overload.
CAUTION It is not allowed to reset a tripped circuit breaker.

if you reset it, you can cause an overload to the
system. Make an entry in the aircraft logbook to
record the tripped circuit breaker.
Indication The indication light shows the status of a device. The indication light
light can have several colors.
WORK The cabin crew can set the WORK LIGHT sw to the following
LIGHT sw positions:
- BRIGHT
- DIM
- OFF.
UAE A380 03-90-10 P 5/6

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Description
A380
MAIN The MAIN POWER sw supplies the galley with electrical power
POWER s (ON) or removes the electrical power from the galley (OFF).
w
Toggle The cabin crew can set the toggle switch to the ON or OFF position
switch for to switch ON or OFF the related device.
devices
Selector The cabin crew can use the selector to control the device. Several
positions are possible (e.g. temperature, selection of items to be
cooled).
UAE A380 03-90-10 P 6/6

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Location
A380
GALLEY LOCATION H1
ON THESE POSITIONS GALLEYS ARE LOCATED:

Upper Deck
Main Deck
GALLEY FEATURES
1. Supplemental Cooling System
Following galleys are equipped with a supplemental cooling system in order to cool food in the
galleys:
G1U6, G1U7, G3U2, G3U3, G3U4, G3U5, G3U6,
Upper Deck
G3U7
Main Deck G2M1, G2M2, G2M3, G2M4, G4M1, G4M2
UAE A380 03-90-20 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Location
A380
Refer to Supplemental Cooling System

2. Wet Galleys
For the wet galleys, connection is required to the:
- potable water system
- waste water system
- air extraction system
- cabin ventilation system
- terminal block for galley power supply.
GALLEY LOCATION

Upper Deck
UAE A380 03-90-20 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Location
A380
Main Deck
GALLEY FEATURES
galleys:
G1U4, G1U6, G3U2, G3U3, G3U4, G3U5, G3U6,
Upper Deck
G3U7
Main Deck G2M1, G2M4, G2M5, G4M1, G4M2
2. Wet Galleys
UAE A380 03-90-20 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Location
A380
GALLEY LOCATION
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188

Overview
GALLEY FEATURES
galleys:
G1U6, G1U7,
Upper Deck
G3U2, G3U3, G3U4, G3U5, G3U6, G3U7
G2M1, G2M3, G2M4
Main Deck
G4M1, G4M2
2. Wet Galleys
UAE A380 03-90-20 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Location
A380

GALLEY LOCATION
Applicable to: MSN 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0178-0184, 0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0216, 0225

Overview
GALLEY FEATURES
galleys:
G1U6, G1U7,
Upper Deck
G3U2, G3U3, G3U4, G3U5, G3U6, G3U7
G2M1, G2M3, G2M4
Main Deck
G4M1, G4M2
2. Wet Galleys
UAE A380 03-90-20 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Location
A380

UAE A380 03-90-20 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 General
REMOVABLE GALLEY ITEMS

Applicable to: ALL
There are some removable galley items for the purpose of stowing and securing catering equipment
and/or galley equipment during taxi, takeoff, landing and turbulence.
For more details:
- Refer to Trolley - Definition
- Refer to Container/Standard Unit - Description
EQUIPMENT OF THE WATER/WASTE CABIN SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
The galleys have the following equipment of the water/waste (cabin) system:
- Water tap Refer to Water Tap
- Water shut-off valve Refer to Water Shut-Off Valve
- Waste water draining Refer to Waste Water Draining
- Galley Waste Disposal Unit (GWDU) (optional).
UAE A380 03-90-30-10 P 1/2

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 General
UAE A380 03-90-30-10 P 2/2

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Trolley
TROLLEY DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
TROLLEY - DEFINITION
A trolley is a latchable mobile storage and transport unit with a (parking) brake.
Depending on the purpose of the trolley, there are basically these different types:
- Catering trolley
It contains food and beverages only.
Purpose 1: Transport from the catering company (in)to the aircraft.
Purpose 2: Storage in a galley (normally in chilled environment only).
Purpose 3: Meal delivery to the passengers onboard the aircraft.
- Waste trolley
It takes the waste, especially from the mealtime, collected by the cabin crew.
- Shopping trolley (Duty-free/Onboard shop)
Normally it contains amenity products offered to the passengers.
Refer to Trolley - Description.
TROLLEY - DESCRIPTION
There are trolleys with two different sizes:
- full-size trolleys
- half-size trolleys.
Both trolley types differ in length, interior volume and load limit. The load limit of a trolley is linked with
its park position. Therefore the trolley compartments (park positions) have placards that indicates the
load limits
CAUTION Do not overload the trolleys, because this can damage the locking mechanism (danger
of uncontrolled opening), the trolley housing, and/or the galley.
To avoid overloading the trolley, distribute some items to other trolleys.
The operation of both trolley types is the same.
UAE A380 03-90-30-20 P 1/6

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Trolley
Overview
Refer to How to Remove a Trolley from its Compartment

Refer to How to Insert a Trolley into its Compartment
Refer to How to Operate the Trolley Brake
Refer to How to Operate the Trolley Door
TROLLEY OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO REMOVE A TROLLEY FROM ITS COMPARTMENT

1. Open all latches and securing devices at the trolley compartment.
(How to open the latch: Refer to Latches - General).
2. Disengage the trolley brake.
(How to disengage the brake: Refer to How to Operate the Trolley Brake).
3. Pull the trolley out of its compartment.
UAE A380 03-90-30-20 P 2/6

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Trolley
HOW TO INSERT A TROLLEY INTO ITS COMPARTMENT

1. Check that all related latches/securing devices are in open position.
CAUTION If the latches/securing devices are not in open position, put them into the open
position before inserting the trolley. Otherwise damage to the latches/securing
devices, caused by the trolley, is possible.
2. If necessary turn the trolley around until its brake pedals are on the front side.
3. Carefully insert the trolley into its compartment.
4. Engage the trolley brake.
Refer to How to Operate the Trolley Brake
5. Close the latches/securing devices at the trolley compartment.
CAUTION To correctly secure removable galley items when not in use, close and lock ALL
latches and lock ALL other securing devices installed in the galley. A single
latch/securing device not used causes overload and/or damage to the properly used
latch(es)/securing device(s).
Refer to Latches - General

HOW TO OPERATE THE BRAKE SYSTEM

Carefully operate the trolley brake to minimize the risk of clamping feet.
ENGAGING THE TROLLEY BRAKE

Push the red pedal using a foot to engage the brake. The red pedal will stay in lower position.
UAE A380 03-90-30-20 P 3/6

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Trolley
Engaging
DISENGAGING THE TROLLEY BRAKE

Push the green pedal using a foot to disengage the brake. The step onto the green pedal will
release the red pedal. The red pedal will come to the upper position. After releasing the green
pedal, it will also move back in the upper position.
UAE A380 03-90-30-20 P 4/6

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Trolley
Disengaging
UAE A380 03-90-30-20 P 5/6

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Trolley
HOW TO OPERATE THE TROLLEY DOOR

Trolley Door Operation
OPENING
1. Turn the latch handle to the OPEN position.
2. Swivel out the trolley door using the handle.
L2
Note: The door will remain open, when swiveled out to an angle of 270°.
CLOSING L1
1. Swivel in the door.

2. Ensure that the latch handle is in OPEN position.
3. Push the door against the housing and hold it with one hand.
4. Turn the latch handle to the CLOSED position using the other hand.
UAE A380 03-90-30-20 P 6/6

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Container/Standard Unit
CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT DESCRIPTION

Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
For catering purposes, there are standardized steel boxes. The designation of these steel boxes is
either container or standard unit. A container/standard unit stores, protects and transports meals on
trays and/or beverages in drawers.
L2
Note: Do not use a container for any other than the designated purposes.
CAUTION Do not overload a container/standard unit. L1
Overloading may damage the locking mechanism (danger of uncontrolled door

opening) or the housing of the container/standard unit.
Note: There are placards inside the container/standard unit or in front of the galley compartment that
indicate the load limit.
In the aircraft, the container/standard unit is inserted in the corresponding galley compartment. 1/4-turn
retainers on the galley compartment frame prevent the container/standard unit from inadvertently leave
position. A handle eases inserting or removing the container/standard unit.
To remove or to open a container/standard unit Refer to How to Remove/Insert a Container/Standard
Unit.
DESCRIPTION
A container/standard unit has a closed housing with a door on the front side. A door keep the content of
a container/standard unit in place. A latch prevents the door from uncontrolled opening and enables
the cabin crew to easily open or close the door.
To open or to close a container/standard unit Refer to How to Open/Close a Container/Standard Unit.
UAE A380 03-90-30-30 P 1/4

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Components of a Container/Standard Unit
CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO OPEN A CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT

1. On the door of the container/standard unit: Lift and hold the slam latch until the door is unlocked.
2. Using the slam latch, carefully swing out the door.
3. Release the slam latch.
HOW TO CLOSE A CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT
Note: The containers/standard units have a specific load limit, placarded either somewhere on the
housing or on the inside. Before closing the door, make sure that the content of the
container/the standard unit does not exceed the specific load limit.
1. Swing the door in.
2. Carefully push the door toward the housing until the slam latch snaps into place.
UAE A380 03-90-30-30 P 2/4

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Note: Container/standard units are removable galley items. After removal, immediately load/unload
the galley item. Then immediately re-insert the galley item into its compartment. Only in its
compartment, the removable galley items are stowed safely.
HOW TO REMOVE A CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT

Do not remove any galley item during turbulence.
Before you take out any container/standard unit, check its weight. Maybe it is heavy.
The higher a heavy container/standard unit is stowed, the more carefully it must be
handled. If necessary, ask a crewmember for assistance.
1. Unlock the latch(es) which hold the container/the standard unit in place.
2. Firmly grasp the handle of the container/the standard unit and pull the galley item out of its
compartment.
3. Put down the container/the standard unit.
Note: Use an even surface which is wide enough to accommodate the galley item. Check that the
galley item is placed safely before you open the container/the standard unit.
HOW TO INSERT A CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT INTO ITS COMPARTMENT
1. Place the container/standard unit in front of its compartment and carefully push it into the
compartment.
2. Lock the latch(es) which hold the container/the standard unit in place.
UAE A380 03-90-30-30 P 3/4

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
UAE A380 03-90-30-30 P 4/4

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Latches
LATCHES - GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
Latches secure galley items and galley equipment.

When not in use:
- Stow trays and loose items
- Stow and secure removable galley items like trolleys (carts) and containers/standard units
WARNING Make sure that removable galley items are correctly stowed and latched/locked
when not in use. Otherwise injury to persons caused by unsecured galley items is
possible.
Note: To assist the latches/securing devices on the galley, the trolleys must be blocked
additionally with their brake.
- Latch/secure all galley inserts, doors, drawers and trolley (cart) doors.
WARNING Clamping fingers between a latch and an item is possible. Be careful!
To learn more about:

- 1/4-Turn Retainer Latches: Refer to 1/4 Turn Retainer Latch
- Intermediate Latches: Refer to Intermediate Latch
- Slam Latches and Sliding Latches: Refer to Slam Latch / Sliding Latch
UAE A380 03-90-30-40 P 1/6

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Latches
1/4 TURN RETAINER LATCH

Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL 1/4 TURN RETAINER LATCH

1/4-turn retainer latches secure intermediate items.
1/4-turn retainer latches are available in different sizes.
WARNING Unsecured items may cause personal injury or damage to the interior of the aircraft.
Ensure that all items are correctly latched.
Danger of trapping!
Trapping of fingers between the latch and the items is possible. Be careful!
CAUTION Always latch, stow, and secure all doors, drawers, inserts, containers, shelves, cart
doors, stow carts and any other loose items.
Note: Additionally respect the general safety advices and recommendations about the use of
latches.
OPERATION
How to lock the latches
Turn the applicable 1/4-turn retainer 90° until it locks the item.
UAE A380 03-90-30-40 P 2/6

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Latches
How to unlock the latches

Turn the applicable 1/4-turn retainer 90° until it unlocks the
item.
INTERMEDIATE LATCH
Applicable to: ALL
INTERMEDIATE LATCH GENERAL

Intermediate latches are installed to lock doors, sliding tables, boards, etc.
WARNING Unsecured items may cause personal injury or damage to the interior of the aircraft.
Ensure that all items are correctly latched.
Danger of trapping!
Trapping of fingers between the latch and the items is possible. Be careful!
CAUTION Always latch, stow, and secure all doors, drawers, inserts, containers, shelves, cart
doors, stow carts and any other loose items.
Note: Additionally respect the general safety advices and recommendations about the use of
latches.
UAE A380 03-90-30-40 P 3/6

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Latches
OPERATION
How to unlock an intermediate latch
The illustration shows an intermediate latch in the locked
position. In this position the latch indicator is green (green
dot).
To unlock, turn the intermediate latch 90° (a 1/4-turn) in any
direction.
The red dot indicates that the intermediate latch is in the
unlocked position.
How to lock an intermediate latch

The illustration shows an intermediate latch in the unlocked
position. In this position the latch indicator is red (red dot).
To lock, turn the intermediate latch 90° (a 1/4-turn) in any
direction.
The green dot indicates that the intermediate latch is in the
locked position.
UAE A380 03-90-30-40 P 4/6

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Latches
SLAM LATCH / SLIDING LATCH

Applicable to: ALL
SLAM LATCH / SLIDING LATCH GENERAL

Slam latches are installed to close doors.
Sliding latches are installed to latch doors.
Doors or compartments can have both, slam latches and slam latches/sliding latches combinations.
Note: Respect the general safety advices and recommendations about the use of latches.
OPERATION
How to unlock the Slam Latch / Sliding
Latches
The illustration shows the Slam Latch / Slam latches
Sliding Latches in the locked position. To unlock the slam latch:
1. Lift the slam latch until the door unlatches.
2. Pull at the slam latch to open the door.
Slam latch with combined sliding latches:
1. Unlock the sliding latch by sliding the handle.
The locking indicator shows the red dot when the door is
not locked.
2. Lift the slam latch until the door unlatches.
3. Pull at the slam latch to open the door.
How to lock the Slam Latch / Sliding

Latches
UAE A380 03-90-30-40 P 5/6

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Latches
The illustration shows the Slam Latch / Slam latches

Sliding Latches in the unlocked position. To lock the slam latch:
1. Use the slam latch to close the door.
2. Push the door against the housing until the slam latch
clicks into place with a snap.
Slam latch with combined sliding latches:
1. Use the slam latch to close the door.
2. Push the door against the housing until the slam latch
clicks into place with a snap.
3. Lock the sliding latch by sliding the handle. The locking
indicator shows the green dot when the door is not
locked.
UAE A380 03-90-30-40 P 6/6

CCOM 04-Jan-12
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Water Tap
WATER TAP DESCRIPTION

Applicable to: ALL
There are water taps in specific wet galleys.

The cabin crew can obtain water from the aircraft water system by using the water tap.
Refer to Water Tap Operation
WATER TAP OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
How to start the flow of water from the water tap:

1. Hold a container (e.g. a cup or a can etc.) under the water tap.
2. Press and hold the operating pb that is on the front of the water tap.
Water Tap
How to stop the water-flow:

1. Release the operating pb of the water tap.
UAE A380 03-90-30-50 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Water Tap
UAE A380 03-90-30-50 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Water Shutoff Valve
WATER SHUTOFF VALVE DESCRIPTION

Applicable to: ALL
There are water shutoff valves in the water supply lines. There is one shutoff valve in each one of the
wet galleys.
The water shutoff valve can be set to the ON or OFF position, to open or close the valve.
Closing the water shutoff valve stops the potable water supply to such galley equipment as the boiler,
water tap, steam oven, etc. in case of a leakage between the water shutoff valve and the connected
galley equipment (downstream). This procedure will shut down the water supply of the related wet
galley and not the water supply of the entire aircraft.
Note: If the water leakage is in front of the water shutoff valve (upstream) a shut down of the Potable
Water System (PWS) must be performed. Refer to 06-60-50 How to Shut Down the Water
Supply via the FAP.
CAUTION Switch off all electrical galley equipment connected to the water line after the water
shutoff valve has been closed. This will prevent any electrical equipment from heating
up while empty and will avoid the risk of potential hazards.
Note: The following illustration is an example. The shutoff valve may be located inside a trolley
compartment. To handle the shutoff valve it may be necessary to remove the trolley out of its
compartment.
UAE A380 03-90-30-60 P 1/4

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Typical Water Shutoff Valve
Refer to Water Shutoff Valve Operation
UAE A380 03-90-30-60 P 2/4

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
WATER SHUTOFF VALVE OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
The water flows.
The water does not flow.
UAE A380 03-90-30-60 P 3/4

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
UAE A380 03-90-30-60 P 4/4

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Waste Water Draining
WASTE WATER DRAINING DESCRIPTION

Applicable to: ALL
The normal purpose of the waste water draining system is to discard residual water or liquids.
The waste water from the galleys will be drained from sink to the drain valve.
There is an drain valve in each drain line. This valve prevents cabin air loss through the drain line, due
to the cabin ambient pressure difference.
The drain valve has a flexible membrane that opens by the weight of a water column in the drain line. L2
The membrane closes automatically, when the water column decreased.

The water drains overboard through one of the drain masts, that are under the aircraft fuselage. L1
The waste water draining system has these components:

- Sinks
- Operating knobs for drain valves
Waste Water Draining Waste Water Draining
- Drain valves
UAE A380 03-90-30-70 P 1/4

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Drain Valve
- Drain masts
Refer to Waste Water Draining Operation
UAE A380 03-90-30-70 P 2/4

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
WASTE WATER DRAINING OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
Normally the drain valve works automatically.
In case of overflow of the sink, the drain valve can be operated manually.
CAUTION The following items must not be poured into the sink, because they can damage the
waste water draining system:
- Milk
- Cream
- Milk with acidic liquids (e.g. orange juice, apple juice, vinegar, etc.)
- Coffee grounds
- Tea leaves
- Food
WARNING Be careful when handling with hot water. Hot water can cause serious burns.
OPERATION
Pull and release the operating knob of the drain valve.
Note: The operation handle may differ in various galleys.
In some wet galleys is the handle directly located at the drain valve. The drain valve is located
at the rear wall of the trolley compartment. Therefore it may be necessary to remove the trolley
out of its compartment.
Drain Valve Operating Drain Valve Operating
The liquid in the drain line will be drained off through the drain mast.
UAE A380 03-90-30-70 P 3/4

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
After discarding liquids flush the sink occasionally with hot water.
UAE A380 03-90-30-70 P 4/4

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
COFFEE MAKER
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The coffee maker is designed to supply freshly brewed coffee or hot water during all phases of normal
flight.
The hot water flows through the coffee in the brew tray and into the coffee pot.
WARNING - Insert only one coffee pillow pack into the brew cup during coffee preparation.
- Do not operate the coffee maker without the coffee pot.
- Ensure that the brew cup is inserted and the brew lever is in down position.
Note: The coffee maker will not operate when the coffee pot is not in position.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 1/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
Coffee Maker
LAMP TEST
To perform a lamp test, press and hold the LOW WATER/LAMPTEST pb.
All lamps should light up when the LOW WATER/LAMPTEST pb is pressed.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 2/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO PREPARE THE COFFEE MAKER

1. Pull the secondary latch and lift it to the upper position.
2. Lift the brew lever to the upper position.
3. Insert the brew cup.
4. Insert the coffee pot.
5. Pull the brew lever down to its lower position.
6. Pull the secondary latch and push it down to the lower position.
HOW TO SWITCH ON THE COFFEE MAKER
1.
Press the POWER ON pb.

Verify that the POWER ON pb is illuminated.
2.
Note: If the LOW WATER light lights up, wait for the tank to be filled before L2
proceeding.
The coffee maker will not operate when the LOW WATER light is
illuminated.
HOW TO SWITCH OFF THE COFFEE MAKER L1
If the POWER ON pb is illuminated, the coffee maker is on.

1. To switch off the coffee maker press the POWER ON pb again.
2. Verify that the POWER ON pb extinguishes.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 3/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO BREW COFFEE

1. Pull out the secondary latch and lift it up.
2. Lift the brew lever up.
3. Remove the brew cup and place a coffee pillow pack in the brew cup, covering the bottom as
evenly as possible.
4. Insert the brew cup fully into the coffee maker.
5. Pull the brew lever down to its lower position.
6. Pull out the secondary latch and push it down.
7.
Press the BREW pb.

Verify that the BREW pb is illuminated.
8. When the coffee pot is filled charged with hot coffee, the BREW pb extinguishes automatically.
9. Lift the brew lever up.
10.Carefully remove the coffee pot for serving.
11.Carefully remove the coffee pot for serving.
Note: The brew cycle will be interrupted automatically if the water temperature gets too low for
brewing coffee, e.g. when the hot water has been withdrawn from the faucet during the brew
cycle. The brew cycle will automatically continue when the water temperature is high enough
again for brewing coffee.
WARMER PLATE OPERATION
1. Ensure that a filled non insulated coffee pot is inserted in the coffee maker.
2. Secure the coffee pot by lowering the brew lever and the secondary latch.
3.
CAUTION Use the warmer plate operation only with a non insulated
coffee pot.
Press the WARMER ON pb to turn the warmer plate on.

Verify that the WARMER ON pb lights up.
4. To switch off the warmer plate, press the WARMER ON pb again.

Verify that the WARMER ON pb light extinguishes.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 4/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO OBTAIN HOT WATER

1. Ensure that the coffee maker is switched on.
Refer to How to switch ON/OFF the coffee maker
2. Place a suitable cup below the hot water faucet.
3. Pull or push the faucet handle to obtain water at tank temperature.
4. Release the faucet handle, when the cup is full.
FAULT INDICATOR
The FAULT INDICATOR light comes on in yellow, if one of the three heating
elements fails.
However, if the coffee maker can be operated further with the remaining two
heating elements. Note that the brew cycle will last longer due to less heating
power.
The FAULT INDICATOR light comes on in red, if two or all heating elements fail.
In this case the coffee maker has to be switched off.
Make an entry into the cabin logbook.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 5/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
ESPRESSO MAKER
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The espresso maker is installed in a wet galley and supplied with water from the aircraft water system.
The espresso maker is for preparing espresso, coffee and cappuccino.
A steam mode can be used to produce milk foam for cappuccino coffee, hot chocolate and to heat
water (for tea and other hot drinks).
Note: The following illustration is an example. Depending on the actual ordered coffee maker, the
colors may differ.
Espresso Maker
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 6/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
1. ON/OFF pb
2. READY indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED)
3. Coffee pad
4. Pad holders
5. Handle
6. Cup
7. SMALL CUP pb
8. LARGE CUP pb
9. Steam outlet
10.STEAM pb
11.NO WATER indicator LED
12.FAIL indicator LED
13.RUN TIME/HOURS indicator LED
14.DRAIN pb
HOW TO START THE ESPRESSO MAKER
Note: The following illustrations are examples. Depending on the actual ordered coffee maker, the
colors may differ.
1.
Push the ON/OFF pb. The indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) comes ON.
2.
Wait until the READY indicator LED (2) comes ON.

Then the espresso maker is ready to operate.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 7/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO PREPARE ESPRESSO/COFFEE

colors may differ.
1.
Ensure that the yellow READY indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) (2) is ON.
2. Place a espresso/coffee pad (3) in one or both pad holders (4), face down, as written on the pads.
3. Push the handle (5) down to the locked position.
CAUTION The espresso maker does not operate with the handle in the upright position. The
handle has to be locked in the down position first.
4. Place the espresso/coffee cup (6) under the pad holder (4).
5.
5. Push the left SMALL CUP pb (7) for a small cup of espresso in the left cup,
or
push the right SMALL CUP pb for a small cup of espresso in the right cup.
Or push the left LARGE CUP pb (8) for a long coffee in the left cup, or
push the right LARGE CUP pb for a long coffee in the right cup.
The Espresso/Coffee Maker will then make the selected size of coffee on the
selected side.
6. When the Espresso/Coffee Maker has finished the brewing cycle, lift the handle, remove the used
coffee pad and insert a new pad.
Repeat the operation for new espresso/coffee.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 8/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO PREPARE CAPPUCCINO

colors may differ.
1.
Make sure that the READY indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) (2) is ON.
2. Place a half full large cup with milk under the steam outlet (9).
Dip the steam outlet spout into the milk until the mark.
WARNING When operating the steam function be careful. Steam can cause serious burns.
3.
With the cup of milk under the steam outlet , push the STEAM pb (10) to start
the steam function.
Keep on frothing the milk until satisfactory foam is created. The steam will
remain ON for approximately two minutes.
Push the STEAM pb (10) again to turn it OFF earlier.
If the steam is not enough, push the STEAM pb (10) again to start another
cycle.
4. To froth the milk properly, apply circular and top to bottom movements. The pump operates
intermittently, which is normal.
5. When the milk is hot and foamed push the STEAM pb (10) to turn OFF the steam function, unless it
has automatically stopped.
6.
Insert a coffee cup (6) under the coffee pad holder (4), place a coffee pad
onto the filter and push the handle (5) down and push the SMALL CUP pb (7).
When the brewing cycle is finished the cappuccino is ready to serve.
Pour the coffee into the frothed milk.
7. Clean the plastic steam outlet (9) immediately after operation, using a damp sponge, and again
operating the STEAM pb (10) to clean it inside.
CAUTION The steam outlet must be replaced with a new outlet after each flight.
Note: - The milk foam can also be prepared in a jug and the foam poured onto a cup of espresso.
- The steam and coffee functions can be used simultaneously and the steam function unlike
the coffee function works with the handle in either up or locked position.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 9/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO SWITCH OFF THE ESPRESSO MAKER

Before setting the Espresso Maker out of service, initiate one brew cycle without coffee pods.
colors may differ.
1. Push the handle (5) down to the locked position.
2.
Make sure that the READY indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) (2) is ON.
3. Place the coffee cups (6) in the area under the coffee pod holder (4).
4.
Push the left LARGE CUP pb (8). After a few seconds, the water flows into the
filter cup.
When the water has reached its preset amount it stops automatically.
Repeat the operation for the right LARGE CUP pb.
Push the STEAM pb to start the steam function. Let the steam flow through
the outlet until it automatically stops.
5. When the cycles are finished discard the cups into the sink of the galley.
6.
Push the ON/OFF pb (1). The ON/OFF indicator LED goes OFF.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 10/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
NO WATER INDICATION
colors may differ.
If the NO WATER indication Light Emitting Diode (LED) comes ON perform the
following steps:
1. Check whether the water supply to the galley is turned ON.

Refer to Water Shutoff Valve
2.
Push the ON/OFF pb of the espresso maker.

The ON/OFF indication LED goes OFF.
3. Push the ON/OFF pb of the espresso maker again.

The ON/OFF indication LED comes ON.
If the NO WATER indication comes ON again:
- Push the ON/OFF pb to deactivate the espresso maker.
4. Make an entry in the cabin logbook to record the deactivation.
FAIL INDICATION
If the FAIL indication LED comes ON perform the following steps:
1. Push the ON/OFF pb of the espresso maker.

- The ON/OFF indication LED goes OFF.
- The FAIL LED goes OFF.
2. Make an entry in the cabin logbook to record the deactivation.
For further Fault Recovery Procedure:
Refer to Espresso Maker Recovery
The drain function should be performed after each flight.
1. Start the espresso maker. See Refer to How to start the espresso maker.
2. Bring the handle down into its locked position.
3. Push the DRAIN pb.
Note: The drain function will stop automatically.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 11/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
STEAM OVEN
Applicable to: ALL
OVEN GENERAL
The steam oven heats pre-cooked meals onboard the aircraft using a water injection system and a
pressurized oven cavity.
The steam oven is installed in a galley. It is equipped with a door that opens towards the user.
It is connected to the aircraft electrical and potable water system.
The oven is controlled by an Oven Control Module (OCM), which is part of the galley compartment.
The OCM is used to operate the oven and to provide the user with all kind of information such as error
messages, temperature, progress time etc. The information is displayed on a LCD screen. Refer to
Oven Control Module (OCM)
Steam Oven and Oven Control Module
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 12/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
OCM
Applicable to: ALL
OVEN CONTROL MODULE (OCM)

The OCM controls an oven with a microprocessor based system. The OCM contains three standard
customer specified programs and a FAN program.
The display indicates the cooking time settings, selected cooking functions and error messages.
The OCM can be programmed quickly and easily to select the desired cooking function by pressing the
pushbuttons on the control panel . The control panel consist of six function keys and four indication
LEDs.
Oven Control Module
1. CLEAR/STOP pb Stops or resets a program at any time.

2. ON/OFF pb Turns the oven ON or OFF.
3. ON/OFF light Light will flash in stand-by mode and continuously during operation.
4. SELECT pb Selects a menu item.
5. + pb Scrolls up in a menu or prolongs cooking time settings.
6. START/PAUSE light Light is on during any running program. Light is flashing during the
pause.
7. START/PAUSE pb Starts a cooking cycle and confirms a selected program.
8. - pb Scrolls down in a menu or reduces cooking time settings.
9. FAIL light Light will flash when an error is detected.
10. READY light Light will flash when program has ended.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 13/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO SWITCH ON THE OVEN

Note: The following operation steps take place at the Oven Control Module (OCM) of the related
oven.
When the oven is switched on, it starts a self test.
After the self test, the oven switches to the program selection menu. A standard program can be
selected.
When the selected program has ended the OCM will return to the program selection menu.
1. Ensure that the main power is connected to the galley.

The green ON/OFF light will flash which indicates that the main
power is switched on.
2. Press the ON/OFF pb to switch on the oven.
Stand-by Screen The oven will perform a self-test.
After the self-test is finished, the display shows the stand-by
screen.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 14/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO START A STANDARD PROGRAM

1.
Stand-by Screen Change into the stand-by mode. L12
The oven is in the stand-by mode after switching it on.

The stand-by screen is shown.
2.
Press the + pb or - pb to select one of the standard programs:

- 150 °C
- 130 °C
- 110 °C
- Fan
- 110 °C Convection
- 130 °C Convection
3.
Press the SELECT pb to select the program.
4.
Press the START/PAUSE pb to start the program.

The START/PAUSE light will illuminate.
5.
As soon as the program has ended, the READY light flashes.

The display shows heating cycle completed.
The OCM beeps five times.
6.
The heating cycle completed message can be cleared by pressing the

CLEAR/STOP pb.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 15/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO STOP A PROGRAM

1.
Press the CLEAR/STOP pb to stop a running program. The

oven will return to the stand-by mode. The display will show
the stand-by screen.
Stand-by Screen
Note: It is not possible to resume the stopped program to restart cooking. A new program or
menu has to be selected from the menu.
HOW TO CHANGE THE COOKING TIME BEFORE RUNNING A STANDARD PROGRAM
Note: The cooking time can only be changed in standard programs. It is not possible to change the
time of pre-defined menus.
1.
Stand-by Screen On the basis of the stand-by screen select a standard

program, where the cooking time should be changed.
Refer to 03-90-40 How to Start a Standard ProgramHow to
start a standard program (step 1-3)
2.
Press the + pb or – pb to increase or decrease the cooking time.
3.
Press the START/PAUSE pb to start the program.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 16/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO CHANGE THE COOKING TIME DURING A RUNNING STANDARD PROGRAM

Note: The cooking time can only be changed into standard programs. It is not possible to change the
cooking time of pre-defined menus.
1.
Standby Screen On the basis of the stand-by screen start a standard

program, where the coooking time should be changed.
Refer to 03-90-40 How to Start a Standard ProgramHow to
start a standard program (step 1-4)
2.
Press the + pb or – pb during the program is running. L12
The remaining cooking time can now be changed.

The maximum time is depends on the temperature of the program. High
temperature programs are limited in time. The oven will be immediately
use the changed time.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 17/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
MICROWAVE OVEN
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The Microwave Oven is installed in the galley of the aircraft.
A square tray is installed in the oven instead of turn table for smooth operation.
WARNING Do not operate this oven with open door. This can result in harmful exposure to
microwave energy.
WARNING Do not operate the oven if it is damaged. It is particularly important that the oven door
close properly and that there is no damage to the door, hinges and latches, door seals
and sealing surfaces.
CAUTION Some products such as whole eggs and sealed containers - for example closed glass -
explode and should not be heated in this oven. Use this equipment only for its intended
use. Do not use corrosive chemicals in this equipment. This type of oven is specifically
designed to heat, cook, or dry food.
CAUTION Do not use any metal wares. Electrical spark may occur and the microwave oven may
be damaged. The metal wares include aluminum foil and so on.
CAUTION Do not operate the oven empty. The unit will cause hard damage on electrical parts
within and surrounding area.
20 memory banks which can store cooking programs are provided. Information in these memory banks
are not lost due to power interruptions.
11 preset power levels are provided for accurate level-setting (0 % to 100 % at intervals of 10 %).
There is an automatic power shut-down system for safety. This system prevents the oven, if an error
during the running occurs.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 18/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
Microwave Oven
1. Digital display
2. Touch control pb
3. Main switch
4. Door handle
5. Door latches
6. Oven door with see-through window
7. Door latch handle
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 19/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
CONTROL PANEL
Control Panel
1. VOLUME knob for setting signal sound.

2. MEMORY pb for setting memory
3. SELECT TIME pb
4. SELECT POWER pb for setting variable power level
5. STOP/CLEAR pb - Push to stop operation of oven and clear remaining heating time
6. START pb - Push to operate oven after door is closed and time is set
7. Ten number pads for time and memory programming
8. MAIN ON/OFF pb
9. CHECK pb for checking memory
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 20/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO START THE MICROWAVE OVEN

1.
Push the MAIN ON/OFF pb and unlock the door lock lever.
2. Open the door.

Oven light and fan motor work while the door is open.
The digital display will show 0.
3. Close the door.
Note: If the door is opened during the cooking process, the oven stops. If the START pb is not
pushed within 1 min after the door is closed, the oven turns OFF.
Oven light and fan motor work for 1 min whenever the door is closed or after completion of the L3
cooking process.
Input by using the touch control pads is allowed only during this 1 min period.
Note that this 1 min period is restarted if any control pad is touched. After this 1 min, all electric
circuits are shut OFF automatically and the control pads become inoperable. To allow again the
input by using the control pads, open and close the door.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 21/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO OPERATE THE MICROWAVE OVEN BY USING THE STORED PROGRAMS

The microwave oven has 20 memory banks for storing cooking programs. The first ten memory banks
have been previously programmed.
Note: The programs can be changed by the customer.
PRE-PROGRAMS MEMORY BANKS
The parameters of the previously programmed first ten memory banks are:
1. 10 s cooking time, 100 % power
5. 1 min cooking time, 100 % power
6. 1 min 15 s cooking time, 100 % power
8. 2 min cooking time, 100 % power
10.3 min cooking time, 100 % power
Note: The data stored in the memory banks are not lost in case of power interruption and do not
need any battery to store the information.
COOKING BY USING ONE OF THE MEMORY BANKS
Note: The following example demonstrates the using of program 1. The using of the programs 2 to 9
is analogical.
The pre-programmed parameters of program 1 are:
- 10 s cooking time
- 100 % power.
If it is wanted to cook by using the program 11 to 20, the desired number pushbutton must be
pushed twice.
Proceed the following steps:
1. Open the door and place food in oven.
2. Close the door.
3.
Push the 1 pb.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 22/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
4.
Push the START pb.
5. The display shows:

Display
HOW TO CANCEL THE PROGRAM LOCK

There is a program lock to protect the contents of the memory banks. The procedure to release this
protection is as follows:
1.
Push the START pb twice.
2.
Push for example the 0 pb to delete the program lock for program 0.
3. After releasing the program locking, new values can be entered.

HOW TO MAKE A NEW ENTRY INTO A MEMORY BANK
The memory programs of the memory banks can be changed. Each program allows to operate with 3
different power levels. The power levels are 30 %, 60 % and 100 %.
Additionally there are 3 stages with different times and power levels per memory bank available.
SETTING THE TIME AND THE POWER LEVEL:
For example to set 4 min cooking time at 60 % output power for the first stage setting, and 2 min
cooking time at 30 % output power for the second stage setting for memory bank 1. The procedure
shall be as follows:
1. Open and close the door.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 23/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
2. Push the MEMORY pb (1 to 0).

3.
Push the 1 pb.
4. Enter the cooking time for the first stage:

- Push the SELECT TIME pb
- Push the 4 pb
- Push the 0 pb
- Push the 0 pb.
5. Enter the power level for the first stage:

- Push the SELECT POWER pb
- Push the 6 pb.

First Stage
7. Enter cooking time for the second stage:
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 24/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380

- Push the 2 pb
- Push the 0 pb
- Push the 0 pb.
8. Enter the power level for the second stage:

- Push the 3 pb.

Second Stage
10.
Push the MEMORY pb.
Note: If the memory program could not be entered, please perform the steps first:
See : How to Cancel the Program Lock .
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 25/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO OPERATE THE MICROWAVE OVEN MANUALLY

The microwave oven can manually be programmed for 3 cooking sequences (stages) and has 11
preset power levels.
The parameter are:
- Cooking sequence: Max. 3 stages
- Microwave power level: 0 to 100 %
- Cooking time: Max. 15 min for each stage. Total cooking time is maximum 30 min.
Note: The following example demonstrates the manual operating.
The supposed parameters for the example are:
- 2 min and 30 s cooking time
- Power level 50 %.
Proceed the following steps:
1. Open the door, place food into the oven and close the door.
2. Enter the cooking time:
- Push the 2 pb
- Push the 3 pb
- Push the 0 pb.
3. Enter the power level:
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 26/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380

- Push the 5 pb.
4.
Push the START pb.

Display
Note: It is not necessary to push the SELECT POWER pb for 100 % power. If the cooking time is
over the maximum time, the display will show EE9.
Note: It is possible to select different power levels in different stages. For example:
- Stage 1: 5 min at 70 % power level
- Stage 2: 20 min at 30 % power level.
MICROWAVE OVEN
Applicable to: MSN 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249 H2
The microwave ovens are installed in galleys. The aircraft electrical system supplies the microwave
ovens.
The microwave oven is controlled by a control panel, that is located on the door of the microwave oven.
The microwave oven has a left hinged door.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 27/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
MICROWAVE OVEN H3
The microwave oven is designed to heat precooked meals or liquids on board the aircraft. A rotating
glass plate is installed in the microwave oven.
It is possible to heat the meals and the liquids for a maximum time limit of 30 min.
Any time entered higher than 30 min will be reduced to 30 min. L2
Microwave Oven
L1
CONTROL PANEL
The control panel is the interface between the user and the microwave oven.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 28/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
Control Panel
Item Title Description

1 Display The display shows informative messages, remaining time and error codes.
2 MENU pb The cabin crew can use the MENU pb to:
- Enable/disable the buzzer sound
- Display the number of cooking cycles
- Display the accumulation of the cooking time.
This function only operates at idle.
3 POWER Pushing the POWER LEVEL pb changes the heating program. The following
LEVEL pb heating programs are available:
- High
- Medium
- Low.
The power level is reset to High at the end of each cooking cycle.
4 PRESET p The cabin crew can enter and save any cooking time. Pushing the PRESET pb
b changes the displayed cooking time with the saved cooking time.
5 1...0 pb Pushing the 1...0 pb enables the cabin crew to enter the cooking time in minutes
and seconds (mm:ss).
6 START/ST Pushing the START/STOP pb starts/stops the heating program.
OP pb
7 CLEAR/RE Pushing the CLEAR/RESET pb resets the time to 0:00.
SET pb This function only operates at idle.
8 1 MIN pb Pushing the 1 MIN pb adds 1 min to the displayed time.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 29/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO OPERATE THE DOOR H4
The cabin crew uses the door latch to open and to close the microwave oven door.
How to Open the Door
1. Turn the secondary latch clockwise to unlock the door.
2. Pull the door latch and open the door.
Note: The light inside the microwave oven turns ON when the door is open.
How to Close the Door
1. Close the door and push the door until the door latch engages with a snap.
2. Turn the secondary latch counterclockwise to lock the door.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 30/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO START UP THE MICROWAVE OVEN H5
When power is applied to the galley, the display backlight of the microwave oven turns fully ON and
"WAVEJET AX" appears for 3 s. After 3 s, "0:00" is displayed.
HOW TO OPERATE THE MICROWAVE OVEN
WARNING Do not use the microwave oven if it is damaged. It is particularly important that the
microwave oven door closes correctly. Defects on the door, hinges, latches, door seals
and sealing surfaces can cause injury and/or damages.
CAUTION The microwave oven must not be operated in the following cases:
- With an open door. This will have harmful impacts due to the microwave oven
energy.
- With the microwave oven empty. The microwave oven will cause damage on
electrical parts within and the surrounding area.
Do not use any metal wares in the microwave oven. Electrical sparks may occur and the
microwave oven can be damaged.
Do not heat products such as whole eggs and sealed containers (e.g. closed glass).
They may explode and must not be heated in this microwave oven.
Do not use corrosive chemicals in this microwave oven. It can cause damage.
1. Push the 1...0 pb to enter a cooking time in minutes and seconds (mm:ss). The numbers will scroll
from the right to the left as they are entered.
2. Push the POWER LEVEL pb several times to select the heating program High, Medium or Low.
3. Push START/STOP pb to start the cooking cycle.
When the cooking cycle is over, the message "FINISHED" is shown in the display and the buzzer
sounds, if enabled.
HOW TO TURN OFF THE MICROWAVE OVEN
The microwave oven turns OFF automatically when it is at idle and no pushbutton is pushed for 60 s.
The display backlight is reduced and "WAVEJET AX" is displayed with reduced brightness.
Note: To activate the microwave oven for heating again, push the START/STOP pb. No other
pushbutton is accepted.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 31/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO INTERRUPT THE MICROWAVE OVEN H6
The cabin crew can interrupt the cooking program by the following steps:
1. Open the microwave oven door.
The countdown of the cooking time stops.
2. Close the microwave oven door again and push the START/STOP pb to continue the cooking
program.
The countdown of the cooking time continues.
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BUZZER SOUND H7
The cabin crew can enable or disable the buzzer sound. This function only operates at idle.
1. Push the MENU pb. The display shows "Chime/Buzzer".
2. Push
- 0 pb to switch OFF the buzzer sound
- 1 pb to select a short beep
- 2 pb to select a long beep.
HOW TO ENTER AND SAVE A PRESET H8
The cabin crew can enter and save any cooking time of a maximum of 30 min. This function operates
only at idle.
1. Enter the desired cooking time in minutes and seconds (mm:ss) on the display.
2. Enter the desired power level by pushing the POWER LEVEL pb.
3. Push and hold the PRESET pb until "Stored" is shown in the display and the buzzer sound, if
enabled, sounds.
The PRESET cooking time is now saved for future use.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 32/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
REFRIGERATING UNIT/WINE CHILLER

GENERAL
The refrigerating unit is a vapor cycle system refrigeration unit. It provides air cooling within an integral
insulated cavity.
The refrigerating unit may contain one or more shelves to hold on-board food.
Approximately 31 liters of volume is available for storing food and beverages.
Internal cavity temperature is selectable.
There are three modes selectable:
1. Wine Chiller
2. Refrigerator
3. Freezer
Refrigerating Unit
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 33/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
GENERAL
The operation panel is used to monitor and control the refrigerating unit.
The operating panel comprises of LED lights, a two-line display and push-buttons.
The push-buttons allow the user to switch ON or OFF the refrigerating unit or to select the desired
cooling functions.
Control Panel
1. ON light
2. TEMP WARNING light
3. FAIL light
4. Display
5. MODE pb
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 34/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
6. ON / OFF pb
CONTROL AND INDICATION
Illuminates when the refrigerating unit is switched on by pushing
the ON/OFF pb. The unit starts cooling.
Illuminates when the current temperature is above the target

temperature.
Illuminates when an unrecoverable error has been detected.
Indicates cooling functions, temperature settings and informative

messages.
When pressed, changes the mode of the unit:

One of the following modes is selectable:
- Freezer
- Refrigerator
- Wine Chiller
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 35/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
When pressed, turns the cooling of the refrigerating unit ON or

OFF.
INITIALIZING THE REFRIGERATING UNIT

1. Switch on the power supply at the related galley.
2. The refrigerating unit will flash each LED in sequence and then flash each LED in the opposite
sequence to test each LED. The display will indicate that the unit is initializing.
The refrigerating unit is able to communicate with a smart galley, assuming the connection to the L2
galley includes a CAN bus.

TURNING ON L1
1. After turning on, the unit displays the previously selected mode.
2.
Press ON / OFF to begin cooling with the previously selected mode.
3.
The unit displays the mode (e.g. Freezer) and the green ON LED will be
illuminated.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 36/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO SELECT A STANDARD MODE

There are three standard modes selectable.
1. Wine Chiller
2. Refrigerator
3. Freezer
The display indicates the currently selected mode.
To choose a different standard mode press theMODE pb . Each press of the

MODE pb selects the next mode.
Note: Depending on the customer version, there are different modes selectable.
HOW TO SWITCH OFF THE REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER
To switch off the refrigerating unit press the ON / OFF pb to stop the cooling
process. The OFF message is shown on the display, and the green ON LED
extinguishes.
Note: If the unit has a loss of power during the cooling operation, the current temperature selection
will be saved internally. After power has been restored, the unit will automatically begin cooling
at the previously selected mode setting.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 37/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
ADDITIONAL DISPLAY MESSAGES

There are additional messages which could appear in the display during operation.
The following table lists the display messages and their corresponding meaning.
Message Meaning
OFF The cooling process has been stopped by pressing the ON /OFF pb.
Pressing the ON /OFF pb again, will resume the cooling process.
AUTO DEFROST During normal operation the refrigerating unit will periodically enter an automatic
defrost to avoid internal ice building. During defrost the displays indicates that
defrost is in progress. After defrost has ended, the display indicates the current
selected mode (WINE CHILLER, REFRIGERATOR, FREEZER).
DOOR NOT - The door latch is not in the LOCK position while cooling is in progress.
LOCKED - The green ON LED remains illuminated while the door is open.
- The door latch must be in the locked position to remove the DOOR NOT
LOCKED indication.
UNIT FAILED An unrecoverable error has occurred. The red FAIL light is illuminated and the
green ON light is extinguished.
TARGET: 4 C Temp Warning Message. If the internal temperature is higher than the
ACTUAL: 7 C temperature of the selected mode, the Temp Warning light illuminates and the
current temperature is displayed along with the selected (target) temperature.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 38/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
TRASH COMPACTOR
DESCRIPTION
The trash compactor reduces the in-flight waste volume to a minimum. It consists of a fixed part
(compaction unit) and a moveable part (collection trolley). When disconnected the collection trolley is
used for collecting the waste in the cabin. Three small trash bins located inside the collection trolley
store the collected in-flight waste until it will be compacted under very high force. After having finished
a compaction process, it is possible to add more waste into the same trash bin and to start a new
compaction process.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 39/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
TRASH COMPACTOR COMPONENTS

FRONT SIDE COMPONENTS
Main Components
1. Galley Unit Assembly

Compaction Module
2. Control panel
Centralizes operating elements.
3. Trolley release latch
Disconnects the collection trolley mechanically from the compaction unit.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 40/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
4. Collection trolley
Moveable unit for collecting waste.
5. Pedals of collection trolley brake
Red and green pedal to engage and disengage the collection trolley brake.
Control Panel Components
1. POWER ON pushbutton switch (with integrated POWER ON light)

Connects the control panel with electrical power.
As long as connected the POWER ON light is constantly illuminated.
2. POWER OFF pushbutton switch
Disconnects the control panel from electrical power.
The POWER ON light goes off.
3. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Displays warnings, operating instructions, status and error messages.
4. COMPACT pushbutton switches ALL, REAR, MIDDLE, FRONT (each with integrated
COMPACT light)
Start compaction process in the selected trash bin or in all trash bins.
During the compaction process the corresponding compact light is constantly illuminated.
Note: Compaction process can not be started if the collection trolley is not correctly locked in
compaction position. This is a safety function to protect the trash compactor from
damage.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 41/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
5. (Optional) CLEAN pushbutton switch under cover marked "Ground Services only"
CAUTION The CLEAN pushbutton switch is not to be operated by the cabin Crew.
Else trash compactor damage is possible.
OPERATION
TAKING THE TRASH COMPACTOR INTO SERVICE
1. Check for galley power.
2. Push the POWER ON pushbutton switch.
For approximately two seconds, the LCD shows the following message:
CYCLES: "XXXXX"
HOURS : "YYYYY"
"XXXXX" represents the total number of compaction processes.
"YYYYY" represents the total flight hours.
The trash compactor is now ready for working.
This is also expressed by the appearing LCD message:
READY TO COMPACT
PRESS BUTTON
OPERATING THE COLLECTION TROLLEY BRAKE
WARNING Danger of Injury!

Carefully operate the collection trolley brake to minimize the risk of clamping feet.
Engaging the collection trolley brake

Push the red pedal using a foot to engage the collection trolley brake.
Disengaging the collection trolley brake
Push the green pedal using a foot to disengage the collection trolley brake.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 42/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO REMOVE THE COLLECTION TROLLEY

REMOVING THE COLLECTION TROLLEY FROM THE TRASH COMPACTOR COMPARTMENT
1. Make sure that the collection trolley brake is engaged.
If needed Refer to "Operating", paragraph "Engaging the collection trolley brake".
2. Swivel the securing latch at the top of the trash compactor compartment into open position.
3. Disengage the collection trolley brake.
If needed Refer to "Operating", paragraph "Disengaging the collection trolley brake"
4. Using the right hand press the trolley release latch and hold it in pressed position.
5. Using the left hand pull the collection trolley until it has left the trolley release latch.
The LCD shows the following message:
TROLLEY DISENGAGED
INSERT TROLLEY
PLEASE DO NOT FILL
ABOVE MAX FILL LIMIT
6. Remove the right hand from the trolley release latch.
7. Pull the collection trolley fully out of the trash compactor compartment.
Now the trolley is ready for waste collection. Move it to the passenger zone.
HOW TO OPERATE THE COLLECTION TROLLEY
COLLECTION TROLLEY OPERATION IN PASSENGER ZONES
WARNING Danger of Injury!

1. Carefully move the collection trolley through the aisle and endanger no
passengers.
2. Always Activate the collection trolley brake when stopping or parking the
collection trolley.
3. Make sure that the collection trolley will not be handled by passengers.
COLLECTING WASTE
Remember the following hints when collecting the waste.
Separating the waste
It is recommended to separate the waste. Thus there are the 3 trash bins to store the different
kinds of waste separately.
Acceptable items for compaction:
- plastic items
- aluminium and steel cans
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 43/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
- paper and packaging

- small amounts of liquid
- food items
CAUTION Avoid compacting:

- newspapers
- cigarettes and other flammables
- glasses or bottles
Filling in the waste
Do not fill in waste above the maximum filling level marked by the red bar at the trash bin border.
A good method to check whether the maximum filling level is exceeded or not is to fold down the
fire doors. If at least one of them does not reach horizontal position, the maximum filling level is
exceeded. Fold up the fire doors again and if necessary remove the surplus of waste items.
CAUTION Overfilling the collection trolley can cause damage of the compaction unit.
Extinguishing fire in a trash box

In case of fire in a trash box, two fire doors integrated in the trolley housing allow to extinguish
the fire by suffocation.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 44/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
Fire Door
1. If the collection trolley brake is not secured against rolling away:

Engage the collection trolley brake.
Refer to Operation, paragraph "Engaging the collection trolley brake".
2. Shift a finger behind each fire door (1) using the round recesses in the collection trolley's
sidewall and fold down both fire doors simultaneously.
3. Lock the fire doors.
a. Grasp the fastener (2) on the top side of one fire door.
b. Turn the fastener (2) into locking position.
c. Repeat the last 2 steps using the fastener (2) on the top side of the fire door.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 45/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
4. If possible move the collection trolley away from the passenger zone.
a. Disengage the collection trolley brake.Refer to Operation, paragraph "Disengaging the
collection trolley brake".
b. Move the collection trolley to the next galley zone.
c. Engage the collection trolley brake.
.
5. Advice another crew member to take a portable fire extinguisher.
6. Protect both hands with fire gloves.
7. Carefully re-open the fire doors.
8. If the fire is still burning extinguish it with the portable fire extinguisher.
INSERTING THE COLLECTION TROLLEY INTO THE TRASH COMPACTOR COMPARTMENT
CAUTION Before inserting the collection trolley into the trash compactor compartment make
sure that
- both fire doors are in vertical position
- the waste in each trash bin Does not exceed the maximum filling level
1. Make sure that the securing latch at the top of the trash compactor compartment is in open
position.
2. Place the collection trolley in front of the trash compactor compartment with the brake pedals at
the front side.
3. Shift the collection trolley into the trash compactor compartment, until the trolley release latch
snaps.
4. Engage the collection trolley brake.Refer to Operation, paragraph "Engaging the collection
trolley brake".
5. Swivel the securing latch at the top of the trash compactor compartment into close position.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 46/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO START A COMPACTION PROCESS

STARTING A COMPACTION PROCESS
1. Press the COMPACT pushbutton switch (one of ALL, REAR, MIDDLE, FRONT) referring to the
trash bin, where the compaction process is to be started.
During the compaction process the LCD shows the following message:
Example 1: COMPACT ALL pushbutton switch has been pressed
COMPACTING
ALL BINS
PLEASE WAIT
Example 2: COMPACT MIDDLE pushbutton switch has been pressed
COMPACTING
MIDDLE BIN
PLEASE WAIT
An indicator bar right above the message visualizes the compaction progress.
Note: The duration of the ALL BINS compaction process is about 3 times longer than a single
bin compaction process.
2. After compaction process is completed, the LCD normally shows the message:
COMPACTING COMPLETE
READY TO
REMOVE TROLLEY
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 47/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
TAKING THE TRASH COMPACTOR OUT OF SERVICE

Note: Before taking the trash compactor out of service, insert the collection trolley into the trash
compactor compartment.
Refer to How to operate the Colletion Trolley, paragraph "Inserting the collection trolley into
the trash compactor compartment"
1. Look at the LCD. For a regular taking out of service the following message must be displayed:
READY TO COMPACT
PRESS BUTTON
2. Press the POWER OFF pb.
The trash compactor is taken out of service now.
IN-FLIGHT CLEANING PROCEDURES
Due to the potentially corrosive nature of food and beverages, particular attention is necessary to keep
the trash compactor clean and in operable condition.
Note: Wipe all exposed areas with a wet cloth.
Take only a little water to clean the following:
- Control panel
- Fire door hinges
- Latches and locks
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 48/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
TRASH COMPACTOR
Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION
The trash compactor reduces the in-flight waste volume to a minimum. Small trash boxes located
inside the trash compactor store the collected in-flight waste until it is compacted under very high force.
After having finished a compaction process, it is possible to add more waste into the same trash box
and to start a new compaction process. As soon as the trash box is full, the trash compactor shows a
corresponding message on its LC display. Replacing the full trash box by an empty one makes the
trash compactor ready for further compaction processes.
There are two types of trash compactors available: The FS version includes one full size trash box (full
depth of the device). The HS version includes 2 half size trash boxes. When the first box has been
filled it can be pushed to the back compartment inside. Then the second half size trash box can be
inserted.
Trash Compactor Components
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 49/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
OPERATING THE TRASH COMPACTOR

START UP / SWITCH OFF
- To start-up the trash compactor press the "ON" key on the Control Panel. The ON State
Indicator will illuminate.
- To switch off the trash compactor press the “OFF” key.
WARNING If the trash compactor automatically shuts down, it will go into a "FAIL" state. If this
occurs, shut off the trash compactor immediately.
PREPARATION / INSERTION OF A TRASH BOX

1. Fold the trash box as shown in the following illustration (See Step 1 and Step 2 ).
Note: Ensure that the two short flaps are attached (with point of glues) to the relevant vertical
sides of the trash box. This is important to avoid jamming during compaction.
2. Check the display for the message "INSERT BOX".
3. Open the front door by using the 3-way latch.
4. Wait for the display message: "INSERT BOX. CLOSE FRONT DOOR". Disengage the security
latch and properly insert the trash box (See Step 3 and Step 4 ).
5. Close the front door and security latch.
6. Wait for the display message "READY TO COMPACT".
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 50/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
Preparation / Insertion of a trash box
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 51/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
COMPACTING TRASH
Control Panel
1. Disengage the security latch and open the trash drawer by pulling the drawer handle.
2. Wait for the display message "FEED WASTE" and fill in the waste from the top of the trash
drawer.
3. Close the drawer by pushing the drawer handle and engage the security latch.
4. Wait for the display message "READY TO COMPACT". and press the "COMPACT" key.
Note: During compaction the display shows "COMPACTING...", during running the
progressive status of compaction is displayed by means of dark dots and a percentage
level of available volume.
5. The compacting cycle stops after a time depending on the waste quantity inside the box and the
display shows "COMPACT DONE".
6. After a few seconds the message "READY TO COMPACT" is displayed again and the device is
ready for a new cycle of feeding waste.
STOPPING THE COMPACT CYCLE
To interrupt (or stop) the cycle, push the "COMPACT" key. To restart compaction push the
"COMPACT" key again.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 52/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO ADD AN ADDITIONAL TRASH BOX

INSERTING THE SECOND TRASH BOX (HS, HALF SIZE VERSION)
When the trash box is full a message on the display says: "THE BOX IS FULL. PUSH IT
BACKWARD”
1. Disengage the security latch and open the front door.
2. Pull out the lateral wall release lever to facilitate the box sliding.
3. Push the full box inwards until it reaches the back panel.
4. Push back the lateral wall release lever.
5. Check the display for the message "INSERT BOX". Insert the new half size trash box and close
the door and engage the security latch.
INSERTING A NEW TRASH BOX
(Also valid for HS version, but with 2 trash boxes)
When the trash box is full a message on the display says: "BOX FULL. REPLACE BOX":
1. Disengage the security latch and open the trash drawer by pulling the drawer handle. It is
necessary to pull out the lateral wall release lever, so that the internal lateral side can be
released.
2. Remove the full trash box.
3. Push back the lateral wall release lever.
4. Check the display for the message "INSERT BOX". Insert the new full size trash box.
5. Close the door and security latch.
TRASH BOX IS CRUSHED
The unit is equipped with a feature that allows detection in case the contained box is crushed.
1. Whenever the trash box would be crushed the following message will be displayed: "BOX IS
CRUSHED. PUSH THE COMPACT TO RESET" and the "FAIL" LED blinks.
2. Push the COMPACT key, wait that the compaction plate is restored in the top position. The
following message will be displayed: "BOX IS CRUSHED. REPLACE IT".
3. Thus open the front door and remove the box to change it.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 53/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
CLEANING OF THE TRASH COMPACTOR

CLEANING
Note: Both trash boxes (only one for the full size version) must be taken out from the compactor
drawer before starting the cleaning procedure.
2. With the door closed, press the key "CLEAN".
3. Follow the instructions on the display. On the display the message appears "PLEASE WAIT.
MOVING FOR CLEAN".
4. Then the display shows "READY TO CLEAN"; "OFF UNIT MANUALLY". Now open the front
door and perform the cleaning.
5. Close the door and engage the security latch. The display must state: "PUSH CLEAN TO
RESET".
6. Push the key "CLEAN". On display the message appears "RESETTING...Please Wait".
7. When the plate is restored on the display the following message appears: "INSERT BOX".
ORDINARY CLEANING PROCEDURE
Perform the following cleaning procedures during ordinary aircraft cleaning at the end of every
flight:
2. With the door closed, press the key "CLEAN".
3. Follow the instructions on the display. On display the message appears "PLEASE WAIT.
MOVING FOR CLEAN".
4. Then the display shows "READY TO CLEAN"; "OFF UNIT MANUALLY". Now open the front
door.
5. Use a soft bristle brush to clean the flexible protection. Dry the protection with compressed air or
steam.
6. Close the front door and engage the security latch.
7. Push again the key "CLEAN". On display the message appears "RESETTING...Please Wait".
8. Switch off the waste compactor by pressing the "OFF" key on the front panel.
9. Clean the internal drawer surfaces and the external parts (non electrical parts) with a cloth
dampened with hot water and detergent. After cleaning thoroughly, wipe all surfaces with clean
cloth dampened with hot water. Then dry clean with lint-free cloth.
Note: Pull out and perform cleaning with water and detergent on the internal surfaces of the
drawer and the internal parts of the external structure once a month or when it is dirty.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 54/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
BUN WARMER
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The bun warmer is installed in a galley and is powered by the aircraft electrical system.
The only purpose of the bun warmer is to warm buns.
The bun warmer is a device with a thermostatically controlled heating-element. L2
Bun Warmer
L1
HOW TO TAKE THE BUN WARMER INTO SERVICE

1. Slide the locking door latch to the open position.
2. Open the door of the bun warmer by pulling the door latch.
3. Use the insert and position the buns.
4. Position the insert with the buns in the bun warmer.
5. Close the door.
Use the door latch to close the door, until you hear a snap. Make sure that the door fits correctly in
the housing
6. Slide the locking door latch to the closed position.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 55/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO HEAT UP THE BUNS

1. Push the ON pb-sw to switch ON the bun warmer. The ON light and the HEAT light L12
comes on.
Note: The bun warmer has one basic operating mode to warm up the unit to its
firmly adjusted temperature. You can switch the bun warmer ON and OFF
only with the ON pb-sw.
2. The bun warmer operates for 15 minutes and heats up the buns.
3. After 15 minutes the bun warmer switches into the HOLD mode automatically.
Note: In the hold mode the bun warmer operates with reduced power and lower
temperature to keep the buns warm.
HOW TO RESTART THE WARMING CYCLE

To restart the warming cycle from the HOLD mode:
1. Press the ON pb-sw two times.

The ON light stays on and the HEAT light comes on.
2. The bun warmer operates for additional 15 minutes and heats up the buns.
3. After 15 minutes the bun warmer switches back into the HOLD mode again.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 56/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO SWITCH OFF THE BUN WARMER

1. Press the ON pb-sw to switch the bun warmer off.
All lights of the bun warmer go off.
2. After use, and after the bun warmer is cooled, wipe it with a clean lint-free cloth.
3. Close the door.
Use the door latch to close the door, until you hear a snap. Make sure that the door
fits correctly in the housing
TOASTER
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
1. The toaster is installed in a galley and is supplied from the aircraft electrical system.
2. The normal purpose of the toaster is to toast pieces of bread.
The toaster allows you to make 2 or 4 pieces of toast at a time.
Use the Toaster only for the designated purpose!
3. The toaster is a self-contained unit, mounted on a sliding shelf. The shelf can be slide forward on
the galley work surface.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 57/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
Toaster
The toaster has these main components:

(1) Power ON/OFF pb-sw
(2) 2-SLICE SELECTOR switch
(3) 4-SLICE SELECTOR switch
(4) Heating indicator
(5) Ejection handle
(6) Timer.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 58/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO OPERATE THE TOASTER

1. Make sure that the toaster is clean.
2. Slide the toaster on the sliding shelf towards you on the galley work surface.
Make sure that the toaster sliding shelf is correctly latched.
Do not put your fingers in the slots.
CAUTION Danger of:

- Burning!
Do not operate the toaster when it is stowed in the galley. The area of the toaster
has to be kept free. Make sure that there is enough ventilation and distance to
other components.
- Electrocution!
Do not handle with liquids near the toaster.
3. Press the ON/OFF pb-sw (1) to the ON position. The green light comes on.
4. Select either the 2-SLICE (2) or 4-SLICE (3) SELECTOR switch as required.
Note: Either the 2 SLICE indication or the 4 SLICE indication comes on, depending on which
mode is selected.
5. Move the lever (5) to the RAISE position and place the bread in the slots:
- For 2 slices put one in slot 1 and one in slot 2 (the 2 front slots).
- For 4 slices put one in each slot.
CAUTION Fill always a slice of bread into slot 1 and slot 2 if the 2-SLICE mode is selected.
Fill always a slice of bread into all slots if the 4-SLICE mode is selected.
Operating the toaster without any bread in the selected slots can cause
overheating. An overheating thermostat will disconnect the heating elements
from electrical power.
WARNING Do not reset tripped thermal switch or circuit breakers.
6. Move the lever to the LOWER position.

7. Set the timer by turning the rotary switch (6).
WARNING Monitor the toaster during its operation!
8. Listen for the sound of the attention getter telling you that the toast is ready.
9. Move the lever (5) to the RAISE position and carefully remove the toast.
Note: After use, always press the ON/OFF pb-sw to the OFF position.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 59/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO TAKE THE TOASTER OUT OF SERVICE

1. Press the ON/OFF pb-sw to the OFF position. The green light goes off.
2. Clean the toaster (only if necessary):
WARNING Danger of damage! Do not use sharp tools to remove foreign particles!
- Withdraw the crumb tray and empty its content into a waste container.
- Wipe the crumb tray clean with a solution of water and mild detergent.
- Wipe the crumb tray dry with a lint-free cloth.
- Reinstall the crumb tray to the toaster. Make sure that it is correctly inserted.
3. Slide the toaster back into its compartment in the galley by moving the sliding shelf.
4. Secure the sliding shelf and make sure that it is correctly latched.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 60/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
REMOTE WATER BOILER

Temporary DU: 00022448.0001001
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
HOW TO PREVENT WATER BOILER FAILURE
CAUTION Due to technical issue on the water boiler, the water boiler should be operated as the
following procedure describes.
To operate the water boiler, only comply with the following procedure. This document
replaces all other CCOM documents of the remote water boiler until this documents has
no effectivity.
1. Ensure that the galley water supply is available.

Check that the galley water shut-off valve is in the ON position
(valve is open).
Refer to Water Shutoff Valve Description
2. Ensure that the galley power is switched ON.
LOW WATER / LAMP TEST
3. Perform a LAMP TEST by pressing the LOW WATER pb. All

pushbuttons should light up, otherwise check the galley power
circuit breaker.
4. In order to ensure that water is available from the water boiler,

pull at the water tap handle to obtain some water from water
boiler.
POWER ON
5. Press the POWER ON pb. The POWER ON LED should
illuminate.
Note: Currently, the level sensor might provide wrong
information. Therefore, the LOW WATER indication
should be ignored until next advise.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 61/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
READY
6. When the water in the tank reaches the set temperature, the
READY indicator comes on in green.
When water is tapped the heater remains ON until operating
temperature has been reached again.
Note: If the water temperature drops below 72 °C (161 °F) the
green READY indicator will extinguish.
SERVICE
7. The SERVICE light must not come ON.

If the SERVICE light comes ON in yellow or red, press the
POWER ON pb to switch OFF the water boiler.
The water boiler is declared inoperative and has to be replaced at SERVICE
the next possibility.
POWER ON
8. After obtaining hot water, switch OFF the water boiler!

Press the POWER ON pb and ensure that the indicator lamp
extinguishes.
Note: A recovery plan for this water boiler is scheduled in Jan 2010.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 62/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
Applicable to: ALL
REMOTE WATER BOILER

The remote water boiler has a volume of 5.7 liters of hot water at 88 °C (190 °F) for in-flight catering.
The first heating up time takes approximately six minutes until the READY light comes ON.
The remote water boiler consists of a water boiler, an electrical box, a control panel on the galley and a L2
galley side interconnecting pipe work and wiring.

The water boiler consists of a tank with six heating elements, two thermistors, a level sensor, a float
valve, a relief valve and a terminal limiter.
The switch panel is installed in the galley working area and has the following controls and indications: L1
- A POWER ON pb (indicating white when ON)

- A green READY light indicator (indicating in green when READY)
- A LOW WATER light indicator (indicating in red) / LAMP TEST pb
- A SERVICE pb light with multicolor light (yellow/red).
When the remote water boiler components are mounted and connected to the relevant pipe work and L2
wiring, the remote water boiler will provide hot water and cold water. In conjunction with an (optional)
mixing valve it will provide a pre-set water temperature to water taps.
Remote Water Boiler
L1
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 63/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
STARTING THE REMOTE WATER BOILER

1. Ensure that the galley water shutoff valve is in the ON
position (valve is open).
Refer to Water Shutoff Valve Description
2. Ensure that the galley power is switched ON.
LOW WATER / LAMP TEST
3. Perform a LAMP TEST by pressing the LOW

WATER pb. All pushbuttons should be illuminated.
Otherwise check the galley power circuit breaker.
POWER ON
4. Press the POWER ON pb. The POWER ON LED will
be illuminated.
Note: If the water tank is empty, the LOW WATER
indicator lights up for about 30 s. Wait until the
tank fills. The lamp will extinguish when the tank
is filled.
5. When the water in the tank reaches the preset READY
temperature the READY indicator will illuminate in
green.
When water is tapped the heater remains ON until
operating temperature has been reached again
Note: If the water temperature drops below 72 °C
(161 °F) the green READY indicator will
extinguish.
6. If there is a minor failure, the SERVICE light illuminate SERVICE
in yellow (e.g. one heating element fails).
In this stage the Remote Water Boiler can be operated
but the time to prepare hot water will increase.
Note: The SERVICE light remains ON in yellow until
the service is done.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 64/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
7. If there is a major failure in the electronic system, the SERVICE

SERVICE light will illuminate in red and the remote
water boiler is shut down. It can only be reactivated by
the maintenance personnel.
Note: The SERVICE light remains ON in red until the
service is done.
OBTAINING WATER
POWER ON
1. Ensure that the remote water boiler is switched ON.
READY
2. Ensure that the green READY indicator is ON.
3. Place a suitable cup below the hot water tap.

4. Pull at the water tap handle to obtain water at tank
temperature.
5. Release the water tap handle, when the cup is full.
SWITCHING OFF THE REMOTE WATER BOILER

POWER ON
Press the POWER ON pb and ensure that the

indicator lamp extinguishes.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 65/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
FOLDING TROLLEY
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE FOLDING TROLLEY

The folding trolley is a foldable mobile storage and transport unit with a parking brake.
The cabin crew uses the folding trolley to transport magazines, blankets, towels, etc. in the cabin.
DESCRIPTION OF THE FOLDING TROLLEY
The folding trolley has two or three shelves. The cabin crew uses the shelves to transport items.
The folding trolley has swivel castors at each corner of the frame. Two castors have foot-operated
brakes to prevent the accidental movement of the trolley.
When not in use, the cabin crew must fold and stow the folding trolley in a galley stowage
compartment.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 66/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
Folding Trolley Overview
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 67/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO UNFOLD THE FOLDING TROLLEY

1. Unfold with care. Hinged parts may clamp hands and fingers.
2. When not in use, move the folding trolley to a place where it is not an obstacle for
passengers or crewmembers.
CAUTION Do not overload or sit on the folding trolley. Excessive weight may damage the shelves
or the castors.
Operation Overview
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 68/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
In order to prepare the folding trolley for service, follow the steps below:
1. Fold out the left and right sides of the frame, one after another, until they lock in position.
2. Lift the upper shelf to the horizontal position.
3. Fold down the table shelves to the horizontal position until they rest on the sides of the frame.
4. Slide the extension plates tables outward from under the top shelf panels.
5. Move the folding trolley to a place where it is needed, or where it is not an obstacle for any person.
HOW TO OPERATE THE BRAKE SYSTEM

Operate the trolley brake with care. The brake mechanism may clamp feet.
Two of the trolley castors have integrated brakes. One brake is on the front castor, the other brake is
on the back castor. A swing lever on top of these castors enables the cabin crew to operate the brake
using a foot.
Brake System Overview
To operate the brake system, follow the steps below:

1. Use one foot to push down the front end of the swing lever in order to engage the brake.
2. Use one foot to push down the rear end of the swing lever in order to disengage the brake.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 69/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
HOW TO FOLD THE FOLDING TROLLEY

Unfold with care. Hinged parts may clamp hands and fingers.
CAUTION Do not overload or sit on the folding trolley. Excessive weight may damage the shelves
or the castors.
Operation Overview
In order to stow the folding trolley, follow the steps below:

1. Slide the extension tables under the top shelf panels.
2. Lift the table shelves to the vertical position.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 70/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
3. Fold down the upper shelf to the vertical position.

4. Fold in the left and right sides of the frame, one after another.
5. Stow the folding trolley.
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 71/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Galley Inserts
A380
UAE A380 03-90-40 P 72/72

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Coffee and Espresso Maker
ESPRESSO MAKER RECOVERY

Applicable to: ALL
colors may differ.
Espresso Maker
UAE A380 03-90-50-10 P 1/4

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
The NO WATER Light Emitting Diode (LED) is ON.
YES NO
1. Is the water shutoff valve in the OPEN position? Go to 5 Go to 2
2. Set the water shutoff valve to OPEN position.
Refer to Water Shutoff Valve Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Is the NO WATER LED OFF? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The espresso maker is operative. END END
5. The espresso maker is inoperative. Make an entry into the cabin logbook.
Inform the purser. END END
The READY LED remains OFF three minutes after switching ON.
YES NO
Normally, three minutes after switching ON the espresso maker, the
READY LED comes ON.
1. Is the espresso maker switched ON and is the ON/OFF LED ON? Go to 4 Go to 2
2. Push the ON/OFF pb to switch ON the espresso maker.
Wait for three minutes until the READY LED comes ON.
Is the READY LED ON now? Go to 3 Go to 4
The coffee function or the steam function is not selectable.
YES NO
2. Push the ON/OFF pb to switch ON the espresso maker.
Wait for three minutes until the READY LED comes ON.
Is the coffee function or the steam function selectable now? Go to 3 Go to 4
UAE A380 03-90-50-10 P 2/4

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
The FAIL LED is ON.
YES NO
2. – Push the ON/OFF pb to switch OFF the espresso maker.
– Push the ON/OFF pb again to switch ON the espresso maker.
Is the FAIL LED OFF now? Go to 4 Go to 5
3. – Push the ON/OFF pb to switch ON the espresso maker.
Is the FAIL LED OFF now? Go to 4 Go to 5
UAE A380 03-90-50-10 P 3/4

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
UAE A380 03-90-50-10 P 4/4

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Oven and Warmer
MICROWAVE OVEN RECOVERY

Applicable to: ALL
Microwave Oven
The microwave oven does not operate.
YES NO
1. Is the digital display on? Go to 4 Go to 2
2. Is the ON/OFF pb in the ON position? Go to 5 Go to 3
3. Push the ON/OFF pb to ON position. Is the digital display on? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. Is the microwave door properly closed? Go to 9 Go to 7
5. In relevant galley, is the MICROWAVE OVEN C/B tripped?
CAUTION Do not reset a tripped circuit breaker. Go to 10 Go to 6
UAE A380 03-90-50-20 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Oven and Warmer
YES NO
6. Resetting the microwave oven.
CAUTION The cabin crew has to ask the flight crew for
permission before performing a RESET by pulling and
pushing the relevant circuit breaker.
In the relevant galley, pull the MICROWAVE C/B.

Wait one minute.
Then push the circuit breaker to reactivate the microwave oven.
Was the system reset successful? Go to 9 Go to 10
7. Close the microwave oven door. Is the oven operative? Go to 8 Go to 10
8. Push the STOP/CLEAR pb to clear any messages on the display. Is the
digital display cleared? Go to 9 Go to 10
9. The microwave oven is operative. END END
10. The microwave oven is inoperative. Make an entry into the cabin logbook.
UAE A380 03-90-50-20 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Remote Water Boiler
REMOTE WATER BOILER RECOVERY

Applicable to: ALL
Remote Water Boiler
The LOW WATER indicator lights up in red
YES NO
1. Is the galley water shutoff valve in the OPEN position? Refer to Water
Shutoff Valve Description. Go to 3 Go to 2
2. Open the galley water shutoff valve.
Wait 30 s until the water boiler is filled with water.
Is the LOW WATER indicator still ON? Go to 6 Go to 5
3. Is the remote water boiler switched ON for less than 30 s? Go to 4 Go to 6
UAE A380 03-90-50-60 P 1/4

CCOM 02-Oct-10
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
YES NO
4. Wait 30 s until the water boiler is filled with water.
Is the LOW WATER indicator still ON? Go to 6 Go to 5
5. The remote water boiler is operative. END END
6. The remote water boiler is inoperative. Make an entry into the cabin
logbook. END END
The SERVICE indicator lights up in yellow
YES NO
If one heating element has failed, or one power phase is interrupted, the
SERVICE indicator illuminates in yellow.
The remote water boiler can be operated. The time to prepare hot water
will increase. The SERVICE indicator remains illuminated until the
maintenance service is done.
UAE A380 03-90-50-60 P 2/4

CCOM 02-Oct-10
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
The SERVICE indicator lights up in red
YES NO
If there is a major failure in the electronic system, the SERVICE indicator
illuminates in red.
The remote water boiler is shut down and can only be reactivated by
maintenance personnel.
Switch OFF the remote water boiler.
UAE A380 03-90-50-60 P 3/4

CCOM 02-Oct-10
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
UAE A380 03-90-50-60 P 4/4

CCOM 02-Oct-10
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Recovery of the Sink Function
GALLEY SINK UNBLOCKING

Applicable to: ALL
Waste Water Draining
Note: The location of the Drain Release Handle is normally next to the sink in the related wet galley.
UAE A380 03-90-50-100 P 1/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
Drain Valve
The Galley Sink does not gets empty.
YES NO
1. Clean the sink from obstruction. Does the sink drain after it has been
cleaned? Go to 4 Go to 2
2. To drain the sink pull the drain release handle
Does the sink drain now? Go to 4 Go to 5
UAE A380 03-90-50-100 P 2/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
YES NO
3. If access is possible: Open the panel under the sink and pull the airstop
valve ring.
Does the sink drain now? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The sink is unblocked. END END
5. The sink is blocked. Make an entry into the cabin logbook. Inform the
purser. When possible, describe the sink as inoperative with a placard. END END
UAE A380 03-90-50-100 P 3/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
UAE A380 03-90-50-100 P 4/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A380 Deactivation of Galley Functions
DEACTIVATE A GALLEY (LEAKAGE)

Applicable to: ALL
The purpose of this procedure is to close the water shutoff valve inside the galley to stop a permanent
water flow which comes from a (heavy) leakage.
A water leak is detected inside the galley
YES NO
1. Remove the trolley out of its compartment, if necessary.
Close the galley water shutoff valve.
Typical Water Shutoff Valve
Does the water flow stop? Go to 3 Go to 2
UAE A380 03-90-50-110 P 1/4

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
YES NO
2. Perform a shut down of the entire Potable Water System (PWS) via the
FAP:
Note: A shut down of the PWS leads to the loss of the complete water
distribution on all decks of the aircraft, including all lavatories
and galleys. In some cases this is the only way to stop a heavy
leakage (e.g. in case of a broken water line).
Typical WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP - All Decks
Select the WATER/WASTE page. Use the related function button in

the 1st level function selector row.
Typical WATER/WASTE MAIN DECK Page
Touch the related aircraft symbol or push the corresponding button of

the deck selector (on the left hand side of the screen) to select the
Main Deck.
On the WATER SUPPLY control pad, push the SHUT DOWN button.
The color of this button will change from gray (shut down not active) to
green (shut down active).
Confirm the Shut Down of the Potable Water System
UAE A380 03-90-50-110 P 2/4

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
YES NO
3. Switch off all electrical galley equipment connected to the potable water
line. These galley equipment is inoperative. Enter the failure into the
cabin logbook. END END
UAE A380 03-90-50-110 P 3/4

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
UAE A380 03-90-50-110 P 4/4

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE LAVATORIES

Applicable to: ALL
LAVATORY LOCATION
There are lavatories on the main and upper deck, assigned to specific areas in different zones.
Optional lavatories can be installed on the lower deck, named Lower Deck Facilities “LDF”.
Refer to Upper Deck.
Refer to Main Deck.
Refer to Typical Lavatory Interior.
Each lavatory has a toilet and washroom function with the related equipment and connections.
They can also have different sizes. L2
Possible sizes are 37”, 42”, 50” and 60” modules.
UAE A380 03-100-10 P 1/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
General
A380
UAE A380 03-100-10 P 2/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Location
A380
LOCATION OF THE LAVATORIES ON THE UPPER DECK

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Lavatories can be located at the following locations.

Zones on the Upper Deck
For details of the lavatory locations see the table below.
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4

Lavatory No. — LU — LU
36 65/66 (PRM), 73, 74
For more information about lavatories for handicapped passengers (PRM lavatories): Refer to
03-100-30 Lavatory for Handicapped Passengers.
UAE A380 03-100-20 P 1/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Location
A380

0210-0216, 0225


Lavatory No. — LU — LU
36 65/66 (PRM), 73, 74
UAE A380 03-100-20 P 2/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Location
A380



Lavatory No. LU — — LU
11, 12 65/66 (PRM), 73, 74
UAE A380 03-100-20 P 3/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Location
A380
LOCATION OF THE LAVATORIES ON THE MAIN DECK


Zones on the Main Deck

Lavatory No. LM LM — LM
11, 12, 13, 14 41/42 (PRM), 53 83, 94
UAE A380 03-100-20 P 4/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Location
A380

Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127


11, 12 41/42 (PRM), 53 81, 82, 83, 94
UAE A380 03-100-20 P 5/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Location
A380

Applicable to: MSN 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0216, 0225-0229, 0241-0244


11, 12 35, 41/42 (PRM), 53 81, 82, 83, 94
UAE A380 03-100-20 P 6/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Location
A380



11, 12 35, 41/42 (PRM), 54 83, 94
UAE A380 03-100-20 P 7/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Location
A380
UAE A380 03-100-20 P 8/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Description
A380
DESCRIPTION OF THE LAVATORY INTERIOR

Applicable to: ALL
TYPICAL INTERIOR
In the standard configuration each lavatory has:
- A toilet bowl with flush function and lamp
- Toilet paper roll holders
- A wash basin with faucet (infrared operated)
- Dispenser for liquid soap, paper towels, tissues, water cups and toilet seat covers
- A drinking fountain (not installed in each lavatory)
- A mirror
- A handrail, installed on the opposite wall of the mirror
- A waste bin with a self-closing flap and an integrated fire extinguisher
- A return-to-seat sign
- A razor socket
- An attendant call-button
- An air supply
- An air extraction
- A passenger oxygen mask
- A Refer to 03-100-30 Lavatory Single blade DOOR
- A Refer to 03-100-30 Lavatory Bi-Folding Door
- A Refer to 03-100-30 Lavatory for Handicapped Passengers
- A coat hook
- A loudspeaker
- A smoke detector
- A baby nursing table (not installed in every lavatory)
- An urinal bowl (not installed in every lavatory)
- Lights (in the ceiling, behind and beneath the mirror).
UAE A380 03-100-30 P 1/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Description
A380
Lavatory Interior
Lavatory Interior
UAE A380 03-100-30 P 2/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Description
A380
EQUIPMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF THE LAVATORY WASHROOM

Following equipment is installed below the washroom mirror:
- A Return-To-Seat sign (illuminates if requested by the flight crew),
- a razor socket (110 V/60 Hz),
- an Area Call pb (illuminates if pushed),
- an air outlet supplied by the air conditioning system, and
- a water basin with a faucet (to select cold and/or hot water).
Equipment of the Washroom
UAE A380 03-100-30 P 3/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Description
A380
DRINKING FOUNTAIN
The drinking fountain provides water to the passengers and may be located:
- On the outside wall of a lavatory
- Inside a lavatory.
Note: The following illustration is an example. The design may differ, depending on the cabin layout
and the customer implementation.
Drinking Fountain on the outside wall of a lavatory (Example)
UAE A380 03-100-30 P 4/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Description
A380
Note: The self-closing flap which is located below the drinking fountain leads to the waste bin of the
lavatory.
DESCRIPTION OF THE LAVATORY DOORTYPES

Applicable to: ALL
SINGLE BLADE DOOR

The single blade door of each lavatory has on the outside:
- A spring-loaded coverplate hiding the emergency unlocking latch and the flags VACANT or
OCCUPIED,
- an ashtray, and
- a door handle with a related catch in the door frame.
UAE A380 03-100-30 P 5/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Description
A380
Components on the Outside
Inside the single blade door there is:

- A coat hook,
- a latch with the indications VACANT or OCCUPIED,
- an ashtray, and
- a door handle with a related catch in the door frame.
UAE A380 03-100-30 P 6/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Description
A380
Components from the Inside
UAE A380 03-100-30 P 7/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Description
A380
BI-FOLDING DOOR
The bi-folding door of each lavatory has on the outside:
- A spring-loaded coverplate hiding the emergency unlocking latch and the flags VACANT or
OCCUPIED,
- an ashtray,
- door lockers in three corners, and
- a metal cover where the door should be pushed for opening.
Equipment on the Outside
The equipment on the inside of the bi-folding door is similar to the components of the single blade door:
- A coat hook,
- a latch with the indications VACANT or OCCUPIED,
UAE A380 03-100-30 P 8/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Description
A380
- an ashtray, and
- a door handle combined with a metal cover plate to close the door.
DESCRIPTION OF THE LAVATORY SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
Each lavatory is equipped with a smoke detector, installed in the lavatory extraction duct (located in the
lavatory ceiling).
Note: Do not use any spray next to the smoke detector to avoid a smoke alert.
DESCRIPTION
The smoke detection system monitors the amount of smoke inside the extracted lavatory air. It has
connections to the CIDS (Smoke Detection Function) and the FWC.
The smoke related cabin warnings are:
- A triple chime, coming from the cabin loudspeakers (repeated every 30 seconds)
- A red flashing indicator light and a steady text (SMOKE LAV X) on all AIP's
- An amber flashing light on the related ACP
- An amber flashing call light, located on the related lavatory wall
- A red indication SMOKE LAV on the FAP, mini FAP and/or the related AAP.
For further information on the smoke detection system and the subsequent CIDS indications please
Refer to 06-70-30 Description of the Smoke Detection System, to get access to the related FAP or mini
FAP pages please Refer to 06-70-20 Position of the Smoke Detection System on the FAP.
OPERATION
If smoke enters into the measuring chamber of the detector, a warning signal is transmitted to the CIDS
and FWC.
The CIDS activates the related indications on the FAP, mini FAP, AAP, AIP and the ACP.
The FWC activates the related indications in the cockpit.
By pushing the LAV SMOKE/RESET pb on the FAP, mini FAP and/or on the related AAP the aural and
visual warning as well as the warning indications on the ACP and AIP are turned off. The indication on
the FAP disappears as soon as the density of smoke drops below the threshold of the respective
smoke detector.
UAE A380 03-100-30 P 9/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Description
A380
If there is a fire in the waste bin, the fire extinguisher operates automatically.
When the temperature in the waste bin increases to approximately 77 °C (170.6 °F.), the fusible plug
installed in the end of the discharge tube melts and lets the extinguishing agent flow into the waste bin.
Waste-Bin Fire Extinguisher
LAVATORY FOR HANDICAPPED PASSENGERS

Applicable to: ALL
LAVATORY FOR HANDICAPPED PASSENGERS

The aircraft is equipped with at least one lavatory for handicapped passengers. These lavatories are
also called PRM (Person with Reduced Mobility) lavatories.
UAE A380 03-100-30 P 10/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Description
A380
PRM LAVATORY COMBINING TWO UNITS

A lavatory for Persons with Reduced Mobility (PRM) can be located in the center, between the aisles.
For more information about the location: Refer to 03-100-20 Location of the Lavatories on the Upper
Deck
or Refer to 03-100-20 Location of the Lavatories on the Main Deck.
In order to provide sufficient space for a handicapped passenger, the PRM lavatory is larger than a
normal lavatory. This lavatory has an outward opening single blade door and a dividing door between
two center lavatories.
Typical Center PRM Lavatory
DIVIDING DOOR IN THE PRM LAVATORY

Enough space is provided by opening a dividing door between the two center lavatories.
UAE A380 03-100-30 P 11/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Description
A380
Dividing Door in the PRM Lavatory
For more information about the operation: Refer to 03-100-40 How to Prepare a PRM Lavatory
Combining Two Units.
UAE A380 03-100-30 P 12/12

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
OPERATION OF THE WASHROOM FUNCTIONS

Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE WATER FAUCET

A water faucet is installed inside each lavatory.
It has these main components:
- A water outlet
- An operating part to activate the water flow.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE WATER FAUCET
Typical Electrical Water Faucet
The electrical water faucet operates as follows:

1. The water flow will start automatically if the infrared sensor detects hands below the water outlet.
2. Adjust the water temperature by pushing the associated button (red for warmer water, blue for
colder water).
3. The water flow will stop automatically if the hands are removed.
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 1/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
RAZOR SOCKET POWER OUTLET

This connection to the aircraft power system supplies razors or similar electronic devices used in
washrooms with energy.
The Razor Socket is supplied with 115 V and

60 Hz.
LAVATORY AIR OUTLET

Each lavatory has its own air outlet which is connected to air conditioning system.
The quantity of fresh air blown through that nozzle can be adjusted by turning it clockwise (less air) or
counterclockwise (more air).
Air Outlet
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 2/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
OPERATION OF THE TOILET FUNCTIONS

Applicable to: ALL
TOILET- / URINAL FLUSH BUTTON

Flush Push-Button Push the Flush pb to activate a toilet- or a urinal
flush cycle.
The Flush pb also indicates different flush modes of the toilet- or the urinal system:
1. Steady blue light : The flush cycle is in progress
2. Steady amber light : The toilet- or the urinal system is turned off
3. Flashing blue light : The automatic flush cycle after bowl full condition is in progress
4. Flashing amber light : The maintenance disinfection mode running
CAUTION Do not press the FLUSH pb, if it is flashing amber. Otherwise a toilet and faucet
maintenance operation (e.g. continuous water flowing) is possible.
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 3/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
BABY NURSING TABLE

Some lavatories are equipped with a baby nursing table and can be identified by an associated
placard.
Baby Nursing Table
The baby nursing table is attached to the lavatory wall panel above the toilet unit.
Note: Before using the nursing table make sure that the work area is clean and ready for service.
Putting the nursing table into service:
1. Unlock the latch
2. Lift the latch until the nursing table is unlatched from the stop
3. Use the latch to pull the nursing table down from its position
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 4/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
4. Fold down the nursing table onto its sidewall support.

Taking the nursing table out of service:
1. Fold the nursing table upwards to the stop
2. Push the nursing table against the stop until the latch engages with the snap.
OPERATION OF OTHER LAVATORY FUNCTIONS

Applicable to: ALL
MIRROR DOOR OPENING

Depending on the aircraft configuration there are two different ways to open the mirror door.
- Open the door by a push on the spring-loaded mirror door.
- Open the door via the separate pushbutton.
Mirror Door Opening - Separate Pushbutton (Example)
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 5/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
RETURN-TO-SEAT SIGN (RTS)

The RETURN-TO-SEAT sign comes on when the
FASTEN SEAT BELTS signs are switched on.
ATTENDANT CALL BUTTON

With the cabin ATTENDANT CALL pb one of the
cabin crewmember is called.
The amber lavatory call light comes on, as well as
the assigned light on the ACP's. In addition there
will be an associated indication on the assigned
AIP's.
To reset an attendant call the cabin ATTENDANT
CALL pb must be pressed again.
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 6/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
DRINKING FOUNTAIN
To obtain water from the drinking fountain follow the steps below:
1. Place a suitable container below the drinking fountain (e.g. a cup from the dispenser, located next
to the drinking fountain).
2. Push and hold the operating push-button to start the water flow.
3. Release the push-button to stop the water flow.
4. Remove the cup from below the faucet.
Note: The following illustration is an example. The design may differ, depending on the cabin layout
and the customer implementation.
Water Fountain
For more information about the water shut-off valve: Refer to 03-100-40 Manual Water shut-off Valve
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 7/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
The paper cup dispenser of the drinking fountain, located at the outside wall of a lavatory, must be
refilled from inside the lavatory.
Note: Depending on the cabin layout, the following illustrations may be mirror inverted.
MIRROR DOOR OPENING
Mirror Door Opening
To open the mirror door:

- Push the button below the mirror.
- The mirror door moves slightly towards the lavatory inside.
- Open the mirror door until the paper cup holder can be fully accessed.
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 8/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
REFILLING PAPER CUPS

Refilling Paper Cups to the Paper Cup Holder
To refill paper cups:

- Swing the paper cup holder towards the lavatory inside.
- Fill new, clean, suitable paper cups into the holder.
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 9/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
PAPER CUPS IN STOWED POSITION

Paper Cups in stowed position
To set the paper cups into the stowed position:

- Swing the paper cup holder back to the vertical position (step 1).
- Carefully push the mirror door back to the closed position, until the pushbutton snaps into place with
a click (step 2).
WARNING Ensure that the mirror door is closed. A not closed door can cause injuries.
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 10/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
PAPER CUP DISPENSER

Paper Cup Dispenser
Now the paper cups can be pulled out of the paper cup dispenser.
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 11/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
CONTROL DEVICE, WATER HEATER AND THERMOSTAT

A control device is installed in each lavatory below the wash basin and has connections to the faucet,
thermostat and the water heater.
Note: In the First Class Lavatories the control device is connected to the temperature unit and the
faucet via the indication device.
The control device has:
- An ON/OFF sw
- A D/C indicator light
- An A/C indicator light
- A heater indicator light
- A CLEAN pb (deactivates an infrared water faucet for 60 s).
Note: Depending on the aircraft configuration, an additional CLEAN pb can be installed outside the
washstand.
A water heater is installed in each lavatory below the wash basin and has a connection to the hot water
line of the thermostat.
The water heater has these main components:
- A Water inlet and outlet connection
- A water tank
- An electrical connection to the control device.
A thermostat is installed in each lavatory below the wash basin and has connections to the cold / hot
water supply and an electrical connection to the control device.
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 12/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
Faucet related Modules under the Washbasin
The water temperature is regulated to 50 °C (122 °F). The outlet temperature at the water heater is L2
between 40 °C (104 °F) and 50 °C (122 °F), depending on flow and water inlet temperature. If the
thermal control has a malfunction, an overheat switch cuts the electrical supply between 72 °C
(161.6 °F) and 82 °C (179.6 °F).
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 13/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
LAVATORY DRAIN VALVE ASSEMBLY

A drain-valve assembly is installed under the wash basin of each lavatory. It lets the wastewater drain
from the wash basin through the wastewater line to the assigned drain mast. Additionally it stops the
loss of air pressure through the drain mast in case of a malfunction.
There can be two different types of drain assemblies installed:
1. A selectable drain assembly with a CLOSED and an OPEN position (selectable with the related
lever), or
2. a permanently OPEN drain assembly.
The OPEN position allows the wastewater to flow out of the wash basin, the CLOSED position will
keep the wastewater inside the wash basin (the inlet of the permanently open drain assembly can be
closed with a plug).
A malfunction of the wastewater drainage can be overridden by pulling the related ring located at the
top of the drain valve.
To solve such a problem please Refer to Washbasin Unlocking.
Drain Valve
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 14/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
MANUAL WATER SHUT-OFF VALVE

All lavatories are equipped with at least one manual water shut-off valve. Some lavatories are
equipped with a shut-off valve for the sink and an additional valve for the toilet. A placard indicates the
relevant access door which must be opened before getting access (e.g in case of a leakage).
Turn the related valve handle to the CLOSED position if it is necessary to stop the water flow. The
different handle positions of the manual shut-off valve(s) are shown on the related placards.
CAUTION Switch off the water heater after the manual water shut-off valve(s) has been closed.
This will prevent the water heater from heating while empty and will avoid the risk of
potential hazards (Refer to 03-100-40 Water Heater).
Example of the Manual Water Shut-off Valve(s) in a Lavatory
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 15/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
An additional water shut-off valve can be installed if a lavatory is equipped with a drinking fountain.
With this valve the water supply of the drinking fountain can be stopped.
Drinking Fountain Shut-Off Valve
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 16/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
DOOR OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
NORMAL LOCKING OF A LAVATORY DOOR

Inside each lavatory door there is a latch to operate the door-locking mechanism.
Latch Positions of the Lavatory Door from Inside
Operate the lavatory door from the inside as follows:

- To lock the door move the latch towards the locking symbol on the left hand side and the locked
door condition (lavatory occupied) is indicated by a red flag.
- To unlock the door move the latch towards the arrow symbol on the right hand side and the
unlocked door condition (lavatory vacant) is indicated by a green flag.
On the outside of each lavatory door the related flags are visible:
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 17/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
If the red OCCUPIED flag is visible, the lavatory

door is locked.
If the green VACANT flag is visible, the lavatory

door is unlocked and can be opened.
PREPARATION OF A LAVATORY FOR HANDICAPPED PASSENGERS

Applicable to: ALL
PREPARATION OF A LAVATORY FOR HANDICAPPED PASSENGERS

Typically, the cabin crew has to prepare a PRM (Passenger with Reduced Mobility) lavatory before a
handicapped passenger can use it.
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 18/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
HOW TO PREPARE A PRM LAVATORY COMBINING TWO UNITS

When a handicapped passenger wants to use the lavatory, ask him to wait and follow the steps
described below.
1. Check if the center lavatory with the bi-folding door is vacant.
2. Close and lock the door of the vacant lavatory.
a. When the door is closed, lift the cover plate.
b. Slide the unlocking pin from the right to the left side. The flag of the latch should read
OCCUPIED.
Latch to Change the Flag to OCCUPIED
3. Check if the center lavatory with the single blade lavatory is vacant.
4. Fully open the single blade door of the vacant lavatory.
5. Lift the cover above the dividing door and push the bolt from the left to the right and hold it in this
position to release the dividing door lock.
6. Turn the latch handle of the dividing door counter clockwise to unlock the door (if it doesn't work
smoothly, rattle at the latch). When the door is disengaged you can release the bolt of the dividing
door lock.
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 19/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
Open the Dividing Door
7. Push at the door to fold it. The door will slide to the right in the rail in the ceiling of the lavatory.
8. Push the folding door elements to the right until it has folded completely and is flat to the right
lavatory wall.
9. Secure the door elements in the open position with the stopper located in the upper door guide
channel.
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 20/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
Secure the Dividing Door
Now the handicapped passenger can use the lavatory.
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 21/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Operation
A380
UAE A380 03-100-40 P 22/22

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A380 Recovery of Washroom Functions
WATER FAUCET RECOVERY

Applicable to: ALL
UAE A380 03-100-50-10 P 1/6

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
There is no water pouring from the water faucet when it is operated
YES NO
1. Open the access door below the washstand. Check the control device if it
is ON and the A/C or the D/C indicator is illuminated. If not, put the
ON/OFF sw to the ON position. Is the A/C or D/C indicator illuminated
and the water faucet is operative now? Go to 5 Go to 2
2. Check, if the "Clean" pb of the control device is illuminated. If yes, wait for
60 s until the light goes off. Operate the water faucet. Is water pouring
from the faucet now? Go to 5 Go to 3
3. Check the lavatory water shut-off valve. It is located near to the floor
below the washstand or the bench in the First Class Lavatory. Is the
water shut-off valve closed? END Go to 4
If the water shut-off valve is found closed: Report to purser.
4. Reset the control device. Open the access door below the washstand:
- At the control device , set the switch from the ON to the OFF position.
- Wait 5 s, then set the control device back to the ON position and wait
10 sagain.
- Close the access door.
Operate the water faucet. Is water pouring from the faucet now? Go to 5 Go to 6
5. The water faucet is operative. Report to the purser. END END
6. The water faucet does not operate, or water system failed. Enter the
failure into the cabin logbook. END END
UAE A380 03-100-50-10 P 2/6

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
WATER FAUCET POURING

Applicable to: ALL
Water is pouring from the water faucet without command
YES NO
1. Open the access door under the washbasin and tap on the thermostat.
Does the water pouring stop? Go to 4 Go to 2
UAE A380 03-100-50-10 P 3/6

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
2. Reset the control device:
- Set the switch to the OFF position.
- Wait 5 s, switch it ON and wait 10 s again. Does the water pouring
stop? Go to 4 Go to 3
3. Close the lavatory water shut-off valve. It is located near to the floor
below the washstand or the bench in the First Class Lavatory. Tap on the
electronic-mechanical valves, then open the water shutoff valve again.
Does the water pouring stop? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The water faucet is operative now. Periodically, check the faucet. Close
the access door and report to the purser. END END
CAUTION Closing the lavatory water shut-off valve will
deactivate the toilet rinse system. The related lavatory
should be disabled (lavatory deactivation procedure).
5. On the lavatory floor, close the lavatory water shutoff valve and switch off
the control module below the washstand. The purser must enter the
failure in the cabin logbook. END END
UAE A380 03-100-50-10 P 4/6

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
WASHBASIN UNBLOCKING
Applicable to: ALL
Airstop
The Lavatory Washbasin does not empty
YES NO
1. Check the washbasin plug and remove existing waste. Is the washbasin
emptying now? END Go to 2
UAE A380 03-100-50-10 P 5/6

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
2. Open the door under the washbasin and pull the Air Stop Valve ring. Is
the washbasin emptying now? END Go to 3
3. The Washbasin is blocked. Report to the purser who must enter the
failure into the cabin logbook. END END
UAE A380 03-100-50-10 P 6/6

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A380 Deactivation of Lavatory Functions
LAVATORY MESSAGES ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
In the case of a lavatory failure there will be an associated FAP message on the WATER/WASTE page
which reports the affected lavatory (LAV XY) in a list box. Additionally, the locations of the affected
lavatories will be displayed in amber characters next to the aircraft symbol, together with the dedicated
lavatory name. The CAUTION button, located in the upper left corner of the screen, also comes on in
amber.
For more information about the possible FAP messages: Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to
the Lavatories
Typical Lavatory INOP Message on the FAP
Note: The lavatory names depend on the CAM programming and their location in the aircraft.
It may be necessary to deactivate a lavatory due to the following reasons:
- The connected waste tank is full: Refer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a Lavatory (Waste Tank full)
- There is a leakage in the corresponding lavatory: Refer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a Lavatory
(Leakage)
- The washbasin or toilet in a lavatory is overflowing or clogged: Refer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a
Lavatory (Overflowing and/or Clogging)
UAE A380 03-100-50-20 P 1/12

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
- There is noise in a lavatory: Refer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a Lavatory (Noise)
DEACTIVATE A LAVATORY (WASTE TANK FULL)

Applicable to: ALL
On the FAP , one or more toilet error message(s) is (are) visible.
YES NO
1. Select the WATER/WASTE page on the FAP: Is the indicated waste level
of the waste tank(s) “FULL” ? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. If the waste tank(s) is (are) full, deactivate and close all lavatories
corresponding to the relevant tank(s). Enter the failure into the cabin
logbook and report to the flight crew. END END
3. In the cabin, check at the failure associated lavatory the real toilet
condition and the indication of the corresponding AIP. Is the relevant toilet
really failed ? END Go to 4
4. If the toilet is found correctly operating, it can be used normally.
Periodically check the toilet function and enter the incident into the cabin
logbook. END END
Note: For other error messages related to the WATER/WASTE system
please
- Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to the Vacuum
System
- Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to the Galleys
- Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to the Lavatories
- Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to the Waste
System
- Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to the Potable
Water System
- Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to the ICE
Protection System
UAE A380 03-100-50-20 P 2/12

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
DEACTIVATE A LAVATORY (LEAKAGE)

Applicable to: ALL
For more information about the manual shut-off valve: Refer to 03-100-40 Manual Water shut-off Valve
UAE A380 03-100-50-20 P 3/12

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A water leak is detected inside the lavatory monument
YES NO
1. Open the relevant access door/panel:
- Close the lavatory water shut-off valve(s)
- Switch off the control module below the washstand. Refer to
03-100-40 Water Heater
- Does the water flow stop? Go to 3 Go to 2
UAE A380 03-100-50-20 P 4/12

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
2. Perform a shut down of the entire Potable Water System (PWS) via the
FAP:
distribution on all decks of the aircraft, including all lavatories
and galleys. In some cases this is the only way to stop a heavy
leakage (e.g. in case of a broken water line).


the deck selector (on the left hand side of the screen) to select the
Main Deck.
The color of this button will change from gray (shut down not active) to
green (shut down active).
UAE A380 03-100-50-20 P 5/12

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
3. Close the door of the lavatory, lock and tag the door ("Out of Order"). The
lavatory is inoperative. Enter the failure into the cabin logbook. END END
Note: Depending on the airline policy it is possible to use the toilets
without the rinse system if they are rinsed periodically by the
cabin crew, e.g. with a bottle of water.
UAE A380 03-100-50-20 P 6/12

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
DEACTIVATE A LAVATORY (OVERFLOWING AND/OR CLOGGING)

Applicable to: ALL
UAE A380 03-100-50-20 P 7/12

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Clogging of toilet in combination with rinse valve open
YES NO
1. Push the toilet Flush pb to empty the toilet bowl. Is the toilet bowl
drained? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. Push the toilet Flush pb again. Does the toilet bowl start to overflow again
and again? Go to 3 END
Note: The rinse valve fills the toilet bowl quickly (less than 1 min and a
high level water sensor will send a signal to operate the flush
valve in this case. This action will drain the potable water tank (in
long term) because it will be repeated as many times until the
intervention of a crewmember.
- Switch off the control device below the washstand. Refer to 03-100-40
Water Heater
- Close the door of the lavatory, lock and tag the door ("Out of Order").
The lavatory is inoperative and the failure must be entered into the
Note: Depending on airline policy it is possible to use the toilet without
the rinse system, if the drain is not blocked. In this case the
deactivated toilet should be rinsed periodically by the cabin crew,
e.g. with a bottle of water.
The toilet is overflowing (rinse valve open)
YES NO
1. Push the toilet Flush pb to empty the toilet bowl. Does the toilet bowl start
to overflow again and again? Go to 2 END
Note: The rinse valve fills the toilet bowl quickly (less than 1 min and a
high level water sensor will send a signal to operate the flush
valve in this case. This action will drain the potable water tank (in
long term) because it will be repeated as many times until the
intervention of a crewmember.
UAE A380 03-100-50-20 P 8/12

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
Water Heater
Note: Depending on airline policy it is possible to use the toilet without
the rinse system. In this case the deactivated toilet should be
rinsed periodically by the cabin crew, e.g. with a bottle of water.
The toilet bowl drain is blocked
YES NO
1. Is the toilet bowl drain blocked (waste not drained) ? Go to 2 END
2. Push the toilet Flush pb . Is the bowl drained now? END Go to 3
Water Heater
UAE A380 03-100-50-20 P 9/12

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
DEACTIVATE A LAVATORY (NOISE)

Applicable to: ALL
UAE A380 03-100-50-20 P 10/12

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
The toilet makes noises (flush valve open)
YES NO
1. If there is an excessive noise level due to permanent suction, the toilet
flush valve is open and will not close:
- Push the toilet Flush pb and
- throw a blanket or cushion into the toilet bowl.
Open the relevant access door/panel:
- Close the lavatory water shut-off valve(s).
- Switch off the control module below the washstand. Refer to
03-100-40 Water Heater
UAE A380 03-100-50-20 P 11/12

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
UAE A380 03-100-50-20 P 12/12

CCOM 08-Oct-14
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A380 Emergency Operation of the Lavatory Doors
OPENING A SINGLE LAVATORY DOOR FROM THE OUTSIDE WHEN LOCKED

Applicable to: ALL
If a single lavatory door is closed and can not be opened anymore (from the inside or outside) the cabin
crew must perform the procedure described below.
Coverplate / Latch and Flag in Emergency Opening
UAE A380 03-100-50-40 P 1/10

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Lock Pin in the Closed Position
UAE A380 03-100-50-40 P 2/10

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Lock Pin in the Open Position
A single lavatory door is closed as well as locked and needs to be opened from the outside.
YES NO
1. If the flag on the lavatory door shows OCCUPIED:
1. Lift the cover plate wit the inscription LAVATORY.
2. Slide the latch to show VACANT on the flag.
3. Turn the door handle.
Can you open the door now? END Go to 2
2. If turning the door handle does not open the door, use a coin to unlock the
door latch:
1. Turn the lock pin with the coin by 90 degrees (left or right) to unlock
the door latch.
2. Pull at the door handle.
Can you open the door now? Go to 3 Go to 4
UAE A380 03-100-50-40 P 3/10

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
3. The door is open. However, it is likely that the lock will jam again. This
means that the lavatory is inoperative. Deactivate the lavatory:
1. Close and latch the lavatory. The flag on the lavatory door must show
OCCUPIED.
2. Tag the door with an "Out of Order" sign.
3. Make an entry into the cabin logbook. END END
4. The door can not be opened without force.
1. Use force and pull firmly at the door handle. The lock will break and
the lavatory will be inoperative.
2. Deactivate the lavatory. The flag on the lavatory door must show
OCCUPIED.
3. Close and latch the lavatory.
4. Tag the door with an "Out of Order" sign.
OPENING A BI-FOLDING LAVATORY DOOR WHEN LOCKED

Applicable to: ALL
WARNING Be careful when holding the locked bi-folding lavatory door. It could be unlocked from the
inside and fold together, causing injuries.
UAE A380 03-100-50-40 P 4/10

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Opening a Bi-Folding Lavatory Door when the Lock is Jammed
UAE A380 03-100-50-40 P 5/10

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A BI-FOLDING LAVATORY DOOR IS CLOSED AND THE LOCK IS JAMMED
YES NO
1. Use the emergency unlocking procedure:
1. Lift the cover plate LAVATORY above the OCCUPIED flag.
2. Push the unlocking pin from the right to the left until the flag shows
VACANT.
Is it possible to open the lavatory door? END Go to 2
2. Use two of the three door lockers: The lockers in the upper right and the
lower right corner of the bi-folding lavatory door.
1. Turn the safety pins about 90 degrees to unlock the door lockers.
2. Unlock the two door lockers one by one by moving the safety pins up
to release the locks.
3. Turn the bi-folding door about 90 degrees toward you. Then lift up the
bi-folding door to release the damper.
Can the door be opened? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. Deactivate the lavatory in order that nobody is locked in again.
1. Replace the door with all locks:
- First replace the lower corner of the bi-folding door without the
lock.
- Then push the door into its frame and lock all locks.
2. Tag the door with a "Out of Order" sign.
4. If the door can not be opened, the door has to be removed. For more
information: Refer to 03-100-50-40 Removing a Bi-Folding Lavatory Door END END
UAE A380 03-100-50-40 P 6/10

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
REMOVING A BI-FOLDING LAVATORY DOOR

Applicable to: ALL
WARNING - Do not proceed with the procedure described below if there are turbulences. There is a
danger of injury: The door may fall down and hurt some one or fingers may be clamped.
- To avoid injuries request a second crew member to help with the procedure.
If opening a bi-folding lavatory door when locked does not help, follow the procedure described below. For
information about opening a locked bi-folding lavatory door:Refer to 03-100-50-40 Opening a Bi-Folding
Lavatory Door when Locked
UAE A380 03-100-50-40 P 7/10

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
Removing a Bi-Folding Lavatory Door
UAE A380 03-100-50-40 P 8/10

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A bi-folding lavatory door is locked and can not be opened from the inside or outside.
YES NO
1. To remove the bi-folding lavatory door:
1. Unlock the upper (1) and lower (2) outside latches of the door, then
unlock the upper inner latch (3).
2. Use one foot to push against the outer lower part of the door. The
upper inner part of the door will come out.
3. Grasp the door at the upper part and hold it. Swivel the door out of its
frame.
WARNING Hold on to the door. It may cause injuries if it falls.
4. Remove the door, and secure it. Go to 2 Go to 2

2. Deactivate the lavatory in order that nobody is locked in again.
1. Replace the door with all locks:
- First replace the lower corner of the bi-folding door without the
lock.
- Then push the door into its frame and lock all locks.
2. Tag the door with a "Out of Order" sign.
UAE A380 03-100-50-40 P 9/10

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
UAE A380 03-100-50-40 P 10/10

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE SHOWER ROOMS

There are two shower rooms provided in the First Class cabin on the Upper deck. These facilities
provide First Class passengers the opportunity to shower and change in comfort during the flight.
When the First Class cabin is at full passenger capacity, the system provides each passenger the
possibility of having a shower for a duration of 5 min.
The shower function is set up by the cabin crew via the Flight Attendant Panel FAP.
SHOWER ROOM MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY IN-FLIGHT
The number of oxygen masks installed in the shower room is three (3). The shower compartment must
not be occupied by more than two persons at any one time during a flight.
For more information about the oxygen masks in the shower room: Refer to 03-110-30 Oxygen Masks
in the Shower Room.
USE OF THE SHOWER ROOMS
The shower room must not be occupied on ground, during taxi, takeoff, landing, turbulence, or any time
when the FASTEN SEAT BELT signs are switched ON.
CAUTION The shower unit is not a stowage.

Make sure that the shower unit is always empty for its intended use.
TIME-OUT WARNING
The cabin crew can set a time-out warning for the shower time on the SHOWER CONTROL page on
the FAP. The time-out warning indicates to the passenger in the shower compartment, that the shower
time will be over soon. When the time-out time is reached the time-out warning stops the water flow in
the shower.
For example, if the TOTAL WATER TIME is set to 5 min, and the cabin crew set a time-out warning of
30 s, the water flow in the shower compartment will stop after 4 min and 30 s.
The water flow can be started again for the remaining shower time.
For more information about how to set a time-out warning: Refer to 06-180-40 How to Set a Time-Out
Warning from the FAP
SHOWER CLEANING MODE
The cabin crew can start a cleaning mode from the FAP. The cleaning mode provides water to enable
the cabin crew to clean the shower compartment after its use.
For more information about how to start the cleaning mode: Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start the
Cleaning Mode on the FAP
UAE A380 03-110-10 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
General
A380
UAE A380 03-110-10 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Location
A380
LOCATION OF THE SHOWER ROOMS

Two shower rooms are installed in the Upper Deck (UD) forward cabin. One is on the right hand side
and one on left hand side of the forward stairs.
Location of the Shower Rooms
UAE A380 03-110-20 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Location
A380
UAE A380 03-110-20 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
DESCRIPTION OF A SHOWER ROOM

A shower rooms consists of:

- A shower unit
For more information about the shower unit:Refer to 03-110-30 Shower Unit
- A washbasin
- A toilet
- An illuminated mirror
- Heated floor panels
- An information column.
Shower Room Overview - Toilet Side
Two ambient smoke detectors are located:

- Inside the air extraction above the toilet
- At the ceiling level above the shower unit.
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 1/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
Shower Room Overview - Information Column Side
The information column has the following:

- A video screen
- A floor heating control panel
For more information about the floor heating control panel: Refer to 03-110-30 Heated Floor Panels
Control
- A return to seat sign
- A hair dryer compartment
For more information about the hair dryer compartment: Refer to 03-110-30 Hair Dryer Function
- Two drawers for stowage
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 2/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
- A towel-rail
- Two toilet paper holders
- A stowage compartment.
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 3/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
SHOWER UNIT
The shower unit is located right behind the shower room door.
Shower Unit
The shower unit consists of a:

- A Hand Held Shower Head
- A Shower Hose
- A Fixture for the shower hose
- Slide bar
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 4/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
- A Thermostat Unit
- WATER CONTROL pb-sw
- TIME REMAINING indicator
- Passenger Information Panel
- A Shower Door with a Proximity Switch.
For more information about the shower unit components: Refer to 03-110-30 Shower Unit Components
PASSENGER INFORMATION PANEL
The passenger information panel located inside the shower unit contains the following:
- A PULL OXYGEN MASK OUTSIDE sign
Note: In the case of a depressurization the PULL OXYGEN MASK OUTSIDE sign comes ON.
The oxygen masks are outside the shower unit. The cabin crew should brief the
passengers on the location and use of the oxygen masks, before the passengers use the
shower unit.
- A RETURN TO SEAT sign
- A CABIN CREW CALL pb.
Passenger Information Panel
SHOWER DOOR WITH A PROXIMITY SWITCH

The shower door is equipped with a proximity switch. It operates as follows:
When the shower door is opened the water flow from the shower head stops. Closing the door will not
start the water flow automatically. The passenger has to start the shower again by pushing the WATER
CONTROL pb-sw.
Note: When the CLEANING MODE is initiated from the FAP, it is possible to activate the water flow
while the shower door is open. Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start the Cleaning Mode on the FAP
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 5/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
SHOWER UNIT COMPONENTS

Shower Unit Components
HAND HELD SHOWER HEAD

The hand held shower head is fixed to the slide bar via a wall supply elbow.
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 6/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
By default the hand held shower head in the wall supply elbow is fixed at the highest position on the
slide bar and the shower hose is fixed to the shower unit wall by a special fixture. The passenger can
remove the shower head from the wall supply elbow as well as the shower hose from the fixture. The
passenger can also adjust the height of the shower head. Refer to 03-110-40 How to Operate the
Shower
Note: Make sure that the shower head fits tightly into wall supply elbow. It must "click" into the wall
supply elbow in order not to fall out of the support.
SHOWER HOSE AND SHOWER HOSE FIXTURE
By default the shower hose is fixed to the shower unit wall by a special fixture. This is to avoid any
damage to the hose and to make sure no bacteria can grow due to residual water in the shower hose.
TIME REMAINING INDICATOR
When the cabin crew has initiated a shower on the FAP upon passenger request, the lighted TIME
REMAINING indicator in the shower compartment comes on. This indicates to the passenger that the
shower is ready for use.
TIME REMAINING Indicator
The TIME REMAINING indicator displays the following:
Indication Description
1 The full shower time is available for the passenger.
1/2 Half of the original shower time is available.
1/4 A quarter of the original shower time is available.
0 The shower time is over.
THERMOSTAT UNIT
A thermostat unit is installed in each shower unit. The thermostat unit allows the passenger to mix hot
and cold water to the selected temperature.
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 7/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
The thermostat unit has a minimum flow rate of 5 l per minute (1.32 US Gal per minute). L2
The maximum water temperature is 40 °C. L1
WATER CONTROL PUSH-BUTTON

The WATER CONTROL pb enables the passenger to start and stop the water flow in the shower.
When the shower is ready for use the WATER CONTROL pb turns green.
PASSENGER INFORMATION PANEL
The passenger information panel located inside the shower unit contains the following:
- A PULL OXYGEN MASK OUTSIDE sign
Note: In the case of a depressurization the PULL OXYGEN MASK OUTSIDE sign comes on.
The oxygen masks are located outside the shower unit. It is strongly recommended that the
cabin crew brief the passengers on the location and use of the oxygen masks, before the
passengers use the shower unit.
- A RETURN TO SEAT sign
- A CABIN CREW CALL pb.
Passenger Information Panel
SHOWER DOOR WITH A PROXIMITY SWITCH

The shower door is equipped with a proximity switch. It operates as follows:
When the shower door is opened the water flow from the shower head stops. Closing the door will not
start the water flow automatically. The passenger has to start the shower again by pushing the WATER
CONTROL pb-sw.
Note: If the CLEANING MODE is initiated from the FAP, it is possible to activate the water flow while
the shower door is open. Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start the Cleaning Mode on the FAP
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 8/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
OXYGEN MASKS IN THE SHOWER ROOM

There are three (3) oxygen masks in the shower room. The oxygen masks are in the overhead panel
above the washbasin.
In case of a depressurization, the oxygen masks will drop into the shower room.
Oxygen Mask Location
Note: The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate the location of the oxygen masks in the case
of a depressurization.
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 9/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
HEATED FLOOR PANELS CONTROL

The shower rooms on the aircraft have heated floor panels. The passenger can adapt the temperature
of the heated floor panels via the Floor Temperature Setting Panel (FTSP)
LOCATION OF THE FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTING PANEL
The FTSP is located on the information column.
Information Column with Floor Temperature Setting Panel
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 10/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTING PANEL

The FTSP has an LCD with a touch screen. The passenger can select a temperature by touching
either + or -. The number in the middle of the LCD indicates the temperature adjustments (values 1 to
9).
Floor Temperature Setting Panel
The numbers in the middle on the LCD correspond to the following temperatures:
Indication on the FTSP Temperature in °C (°F)

1 12 to 16 (53,6 to 60,8)
2 14 to 18 (57,2 to 64,4)
3 16 to 20 (60,8 to 68)
4 18 to 22 (64,4 to 71,6)
5 20 to 24 (68 to 75,2)
6 22 to 26 (71,6 to 78,8)
7 24 to 28 (75,2 to 82,4)
8 26 to 30 (78,8 to 86)
The default temperature setting is 5.
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 11/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
HAIR DRYER FUNCTION

Each shower room on the aircraft each has a hair dryer compartment in the information column.
Hair Dryer Compartment with Start Pushbutton
The cabin crew can connect a hair dryer to a socket in the hair dryer compartment. The socket for the
hair dryer plug is hidden behind a panel.
CAUTION The panel hides the socket and the plug from the passengers. The panel is installed for
safety reasons.
After connecting the hair dryer, the panel must be closed again.
The power supply to the hair dryer is started via a pushbutton in the hair dryer compartment. Pushing
this pushbutton will supply power for 5 min. It is possible to start the power again after the elapsed
5 min.
An additional pushbutton outside the shower room door enables the cabin crew to switch OFF the
power to the hair dryer in an emergency.
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 12/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
Pushbutton Outside the Shower Room
If the power was switched OFF via the pushbutton outside the shower room, it can be switched ON L2
again via the pushbutton in the hair dryer compartment. There is no need for a reset when power is
needed again.
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 13/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Description
A380
MANUAL SHUT-OFF VALVE

There are two manual shut-off valves installed below the lavatory washing table. In shower room on
the right hand side of the aircraft (in flight direction) the shower water shut-off valve is on the right hand
side. In the shower room on the left hand side of the aircraft (in flight direction) the shower shut-off
valve is on the left hand side.
The shut off valve on the respective other side stops the water flow for the faucet and the toilet.
A placard indicates the relevant access door which must be opened before getting access.
Turn the related valve handle to the CLOSED position if it is necessary to stop the water flow. The
different handle positions of the manual shut-off valve(s) are shown on the related placards.
Shower Water Shut-Off Valve
UAE A380 03-110-30 P 14/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Operation
A380
OPERATION OF THE SHOWER

Before a passenger can take a shower, the cabin crew must activate the shower from the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP). Before switching ON the showers at the FAP, the cabin crew has to make sure
that the water system is pressurized.
When a passenger has taken a shower and has left the shower room and the shower has been
cleaned, the cabin crew must deactivate the shower from the FAP.
The cabin crew can control and monitor the shower function by selecting the SHOWER CONTROL
page on the FAP. There is a FAP located at U1L near the shower rooms.
For information about the SHOWER CONTROL page: Refer to 06-180-30 The SHOWER CONTROL
Page.
For information about how to activate a shower from the FAP: Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start a
Shower from the FAP.
For information about how to operate the shower: Refer to 03-110-40 How to Operate the Shower.
UAE A380 03-110-40 P 1/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO OPERATE THE SHOWER

Shower Unit
The TIME REMAINING indicator indicates to the passenger the remaining shower time. For more
information: Refer to 03-110-30 Shower Unit Components.
For information about the shower control via FAP: Refer to 06-180-20 Position of the SHOWER
CONTROL Page on the FAP.
HOW TO ADJUST THE HEIGHT OF THE SHOWER HEAD
The shower head is adjustable in height.
UAE A380 03-110-40 P 2/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Operation
A380
By default the hand held shower head in the wall supply elbow is fixed at the highest position on the
slide bar and the shower hose is fixed to the shower unit wall by a special fixture. The passenger can
remove the shower head from the wall supply elbow as well as the shower hose from the fixture. The
passenger can also adjust the height of the shower head. Refer to 03-110-40 How to Operate the
Shower
To adjust the height of the shower head follow the steps below:
1. Remove the shower head from the wall supply elbow.
2. Turn the knob located on the side of the wall supply elbow to loosen it from the slide bar.
3. Move the wall supply elbow on the slide bar to the required height.
4. Turn the knob to tighten and secure the wall supply elbow in place.
5. Insert the shower head into the wall supply elbow.
Note: Make sure that the shower head fits tightly into wall supply elbow. It must "click" into the
wall supply elbow in order not to fall out of the support.
HOW TO ADJUST THE WATER TEMPERATURE
A thermostat unit is installed in each shower unit. The thermostat allows the passenger to mix hot and
cold water to the selected temperature.
Thermostat and WATER CONTROL Pushbutton Switch
The thermostat unit has a minimum flow rate of 5 liters per minute (1.32 gallons per minute) L2
UAE A380 03-110-40 P 3/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Operation
A380
The maximum water temperature is 40 °C. L1
The passenger can control the water temperature manually by turning the knob with the red and blue
indications. Turning the knob to the left (red indicator) will supply hot water, or to the right (blue
indicator) will supply cold water.
HOW TO ACTIVATE THE WATER FLOW.
When the cabin crew has activated the shower function the time remaining indicator is ON to indicate
that the shower is ready for use.
1. Press the WATER CONTROL pb in the shower unit. The green light comes ON and the water flow
stars in the shower.
Note: It is possible to stop the water flow during a shower without reducing the remaining shower
time.
2. To stop the water flow during a shower session press the WATER CONTROL pb.
The green light goes OFF and the water stops flowing to the shower.
Note: Opening the shower door during a shower session will stop the water flow. The water will
not flow again automatically when the door is closed. To restart the water flow press the
WATER CONTROL pb again.
The water flow stops automatically to indicate the near end of the shower time if a time out warning
was preset.
When a time-out warning is preset, the water flow is available for the remainder of the preselected
time.
3. If the water flow has stopped, check the time remaining indicator. If there is still shower time
remaining the automatic stop was the preset time out warning.
4. To restart the water flow, press the WATER CONTROL pb.
UAE A380 03-110-40 P 4/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO CLEAN THE SHOWER AFTER USE

After each use of the shower it must be cleaned.

For information about how to start the cleaning mode: Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start the Cleaning
Mode on the FAP
CAUTION THE MIRRORS AND SHOWER DOOR ARE MADE OF ACRYLIC. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED CLEANING MATERIALS.
- DO NOT USE CLEANING AGENTS SUCH AS ACETONE OR EQUIVALENT.
THESE WILL DAMAGE THE SURFACE.
- DO NOT USE ABRASIVE MATERIALS SUCH AS SCOTCH-BRITE PADS OR
EQUIVALENT. THESE WILL DAMAGE THE SURFACE.
Clean the surfaces with a mild soap solution. Use a soft brush or a clean lint free cloth. Use a mild
disinfectant to clean the shower floor. Rinse the soap and disinfectant with water.
HOW TO CONNECT THE HAIR DRYER IN THE HAIR DRYER COMPARTMENT

It is recommended that the cabin crew connects the hair dryers in the shower compartments prior to
the first customer shower and disconnects the hair dryers after the last customer shower.
UAE A380 03-110-40 P 5/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Operation
A380
Access Panel to Hair Dryer Socket
To connect the plug of the hair dryer to the hidden socket follow the steps below:
1. Open the hair dryer compartment door in the information column.
2. Open the panel at the top of the hair dryer compartment.
3. Insert the plug of the hair dryer into the socket.
4. Position the cord of the hair dryer that it fits into the cut out in the panel.
5. Close the panel and make sure that it will not open on its own.
CAUTION The panel hides the socket and the plug from the passengers. The panel is installed
for safety reasons.
6. Coil up the cord of the hair dryer and store it together with the hair dryer in the compartment. Ensure
that neither will fall out of the compartment when the compartment door is opened.
7. Close the hair dryer compartment door in the information column.
UAE A380 03-110-40 P 6/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO OPEN / CLOSE THE ACCESS DOOR TO THE MANUAL SHUT-OFF VALVE
A placard indicates the relevant access door which must be opened before getting access.
HOW TO OPEN THE ACCESS DOOR TO THE MANUAL SHUT-OFF VALVE
To access the shut-off valves follow the steps described below.
1. Push against the upper left corner of the access door. The door will open a little.
2. Grab the door at the opening and open it fully.
HOW TO CLOSE THE ACCESS DOOR TO THE MANUAL SHUT-OFF VALVE
To close the access door push it closed until there is a clicking sound.
UAE A380 03-110-40 P 7/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Operation
A380
UAE A380 03-110-40 P 8/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
A380
SHOWER WATER SHUT-OFF IN CASE OF A HEAVY LEAKAGE

The purpose of this procedure is to close the manual water shut-off valve inside the shower compartment
to stop a permanent water flow which comes from a (heavy) leakage of the shower unit.
Heavy Leakage inside the Shower Unit
YES NO
1. Is it possible to enter the affected shower compartment (maybe blocked
by a passenger) ? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. Inside the shower compartment, push at the door of the washing table to
open it, and unlatch the inner door to get access to the shut-off valves.
Close the manual shower water shut-off valve. Does the water flow stop ? Go to 5 Go to 3
UAE A380 03-110-50 P 1/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
A380
YES NO
Note: If it is not possible to get access to the shower compartment or if
the water flow does not stop after closing the manual shower
water shut-off valve, a shut down of the entire Potable Water
System (PWS) can be performed.
UAE A380 03-110-50 P 2/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
A380
YES NO
3. Perform a shut down of the entire PWS via the FAP:


the deck selector ( on the left hand side of the screen) to select the
Upper Deck.
The color of this button will change from GRAY (shut down not active)
to GREEN (shut down active).
a. Confirm the PWS shut down on the pop-up blue card with the YES
button.
b. Depending on the system condition (e.g. water level inside the tank),
UAE A380 03-110-50 P 3/8
CCOM the shut down of the PWS can take up to a few minutes (3-6 min). 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
A380
YES NO
4. Once the shower compartment is accessible:
a. Check that there is no water leakage (successful shut down of the
potable water system (PWS).
b. Push at the door of the washing table to open it, and unlatch the inner
door to get access to the shut-off valves.
c. Close the manual shower water shut-off valve.
d. On the FAP, deactivate the PWS shut down to recover the water
supply:
- Select the WATER/WASTE page with the related function button
in the 1st level function selector row.
- On the WATER SUPPLY control pad push the SHUT DOWN
button. The color of this button will change from GREEN (shut
down active) to GRAY (shut down deactivated).
- Depending on the system condition (e.g. water level inside the
tank), the deactivation of the PWS shut down can take up to a few
minutes (1-7 min).
Has the water leakage inside the shower unit stopped?
Note: If the water starts to flow again, a final shut down of the PWS
must be initiated immediately. Go to 5 Go to 3
UAE A380 03-110-50 P 4/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
A380
YES NO
5. On the FAP, select the SHOWER CONTROL page. Use the related
function button in the 2nd level function selector row, and switch OFF the
affected shower unit. The relevant ON/OFF button is on one of the
SHOWER UNIT control pads. When the cabin crew pushes the ON/OFF
button, it will change from GREEN (ON) to GRAY (OFF).
Typical SHOWER CONTROL Page
Close and lock the affected shower compartment and make an entry into
the cabin logbook.
Note: If the water supply is recovered (PWS shut down deactivated)
and only the shower water shut-off valve has been closed, the
compartment can still be used as a lavatory (all other lavatory
functions should be available). END END
UAE A380 03-110-50 P 5/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
A380
SHOWER RECOVERY AFTER FAP MESSAGE LOW WATER QUANTITY

The message SHOWER OFF LOW WATER QUANTITY appears on the SHOWER CONTROL page on
the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)
YES NO
1. At the FAP:
Select the WATER/ WASTE page to check if water pressure is available.
Is water pressure available? Go to 2 Go to 13
2. At the FAP:
Select the SHOWER CONTROL page to check the water quantity.
Is the water quantity sufficient on the WATER QUANTITY control pad?
Note: The WATER QUANTITY control pad indicates the available
amount of available potable water on the aircraft in %. Go to 3 Go to 13
3. At the FAP:
Start the cleaning mode by pushing the CLEAN MODE button for the
corresponding shower unit. Go to 4 Go to 4
4. Go to the affected shower unit and check the time indicator. Is the time
indicator ON and flashing? Go to 5 Go to 13
5. In the shower:
1. Turn the thermostat unit to hot.
2. Push the WATER CONTROL pb to start the water flow.
Is the green light of the WATER CONTROL pb ON? Go to 6 Go to 13
6. Does the water flow? Go to 7 Go to 8
7. Push the WATER CONTROL pb to start the water flow again.
Push the WATER CONTROL pb again if the water does not flow
smoothly.
Note: In the cleaning mode, the water flow can be started up to three
times for a maximum duration of 10 seconds each time. Go to 12 Go to 12
UAE A380 03-110-50 P 6/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
A380
YES NO
8. Check the position of the shower water shut-off valve.
Was the shower water shut-off valve in the closed position?

Note: There are two shut-off valves under the wash table.
In shower room on the right hand side of the aircraft (in flight
direction) the shower water shut-off valve is on the right hand
side.
In the shower room on the left hand side of the aircraft (in flight
direction) the shower shut-off valve is on the left hand side. Go to 9 Go to 13
9. If the shower water shut-off valve was in the closed position:
Open the shower water shut-off valve. Go to 10 Go to 10
10. At the FAP:
Activate the cleaning mode again by pushing the CLEAN MODE button
for the second time. Go to 11 Go to 11
11. In the shower:
Does the water flow after pushing the WATER CONTROL pb? END Go to 13
12. When the water runs smoothly the shower is ready for use:
For information about starting the shower for a passenger Refer to
06-180-40 How to Start a Shower from the FAP. END END
13. Make an entry into the cabin logbook about the shower failure mentioning
the:
- Shower unit
- Countermeasures taken. END END
UAE A380 03-110-50 P 7/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
A380
UAE A380 03-110-50 P 8/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
CREW REST COMPARTMENT
General
A380
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - INTRODUCTION

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The aircraft has a Cabin Crew Rest Compartment (CCRC). The CCRC enables the off-duty cabin crew
to relax or to sleep during the flight.
When occupying the CCRC, the cabin crew action must comply with all the information given on
placards and must respect the relevant operating procedures (Refer to Crew Rest Compartments
Normal Operation).
UAE A380 03-120-10 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
General
A380
UAE A380 03-120-10 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
Location
A380
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - LOCATION

MAIN DECK CREW REST COMPARTMENT (MD-CRC)

Overview (Including CCRC Entrance Door Location)
UAE A380 03-120-20 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jan-17
CABIN LAYOUT
Location
A380
UAE A380 03-120-20 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jan-17
CABIN LAYOUT
Description/Operation
A380

BEFORE ENTERING THE CREW REST COMPARTMENT

Note: The Crew Rest Compartment is exclusively reserved for the crewmembers. Do not allow
passengers to enter the Crew Rest Compartment.
WARNING Every crewmember, who wants to enter the Crew Rest Compartment has to be trained
for evacuation situations.
This crewmember must be familiar with:
- The evacuation paths
- The operation of the Crew Rest Compartment's doors and emergency exits
- The use of the emergency equipment.
Note: Before the first crewmember enters the Crew Rest Compartment, a crewmember, who is on
duty (e.g. the purser), must be informed that the Crew Rest Compartment is going to be
occupied now.
WARNING To ensure the safety of the Crew Rest Compartment occupants, their number must not
exceed the number of bunks. The number of oxygen masks in the Crew Rest
Compartment is adapted to the number of bunks. Additional occupants would not get an
oxygen mask, which implies a risk of suffocation!
USING THE CREW REST COMPARTMENT
WARNING Do not stay in the Crew Rest Compartment during

- Taxi
- Take-off
- Landing.
In case of an emergency in these flight phases, it can be necessary to evacuate the
aircraft. Therefore all crewmembers must sit on their cabin attendant seats in these
flight phases.
Note: The Crew Rest Compartment is collectively used by all crewmembers.

Please remember:
- Do not eat or drink in the Crew Rest Compartment!
- Be quiet while staying in the Crew Rest Compartment!
- Do not leave the Crew Rest Compartment in a mess!
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 1/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
WARNING Do not smoke in the Crew Rest Compartment! Otherwise smoke or fire is possible and
can result in loss of life or injury to all persons in the aircraft.

BEFORE ENTERING THE LOWER DECK CREW REST COMPARTMENT

Note: The Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment (LDCRC) is exclusively reserved for the
crewmembers. Do not allow passengers to enter the LDCRC or even the staircase.
WARNING Every crewmember, who wants to enter the LDCRC, has to be trained for evacuation
situations.
This crewmember must be familiar with:
- The evacuation paths
- The operation of doors and hatches on the way to the main deck
- The use of the emergency equipment
Note: Before the first crewmember enters the LDCRC, a crewmember, who is on duty (e.g. the
purser), must be informed that the LDCRC is going to be occupied now.
WARNING To ensure the safety of the LDCRC occupants, their number must not exceed the
number of bunks. The number of oxygen masks in the LDCRC is adapted to the number
of bunks. Additional LDCRC occupants would not get an oxygen mask, which implies a
risk of suffocation!
USING THE LOWER DECK CREW REST COMPARTMENT
WARNING Do not stay in the LDCRC during

- Taxi
- Takeoff
- Landing
In case of an emergency in these flight phases, it can be necessary to evacuate the
aircraft. Therefore all crewmembers must sit on their cabin attendant seats in these
flight phases.
Note: The LDCRC is collectively used by all crewmembers.

Please remember:
- Do not eat or drink in the LDCRC!
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 2/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
- Be quiet while staying in the LDCRC!

- Do not leave the LDCRC in a mess!
WARNING Do not smoke in the LDCRC! Otherwise smoke or fire is possible and can result in loss
of life or injury to all persons in the aircraft.
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - ENTRANCE DOOR

The cabin crew can enter or leave the Crew Rest Compartment through the entrance door.
For the location of the entrance door in the cabin: Refer to Crew Rest Compartments - Location
A keypad lock secures the closed entrance door against opening by unauthorized persons.
failure.
cannot be opened via the keypad anymore.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 3/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380

HOW TO ENTER THE CREW REST COMPARTMENT
1. To make sure that no key has been pressed before entering the access code, clear any previous
inputs.
Note: To clear any previous inputs, turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER clockwise.
2. Use the keypad to enter the access code.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 4/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380

If the access code was correct, the visual indicators turn green.
If the access code was wrong, the visual indicators remain red. In this case, clear your previous
inputs and enter the correct access code.
Note: To clear your previous inputs, turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER clockwise.
3. To open the entrance door, turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER counter-clockwise and hold it in
this position.
CAUTION Avoid damage to the keypad lock!
Ensure turning the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER counter-clockwise to open the
entrance door. If you have turned the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER clockwise, the
access code was cleared. Turning the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER
counter-clockwise now, can cause damage to the keypad lock.
4. Pull at the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER to open the entrance door.

5. Turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER back to its middle position.
The visual indicators turn red.
HOW TO CLOSE AND LOCK THE ENTRANCE DOOR
Use the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER to close the entrance door.
Note: To easily close the entrance door, turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER. From the cabin side,
turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER counter-clockwise.

Ensure turning the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER counter-clockwise to close the entrance
door.
When you hear a click the entrance door is closed correctly.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 5/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
In the figure above, the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER is shown in the locked position.
- The entrance door is locked by the dead bolt when the dead bolt slider is on the right side.
- The entrance door is not locked by the dead bolt when the dead bolt slider is on the left side.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 6/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
HOW TO LEAVE THE CREW REST COMPARTMENT

1. Turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER in any direction to unlock the entrance door and hold it in
position.
2. Push at the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER to open the entrance door.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 7/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - ENTRANCE DOOR

The cabin crew can enter or leave the Cabin Crew Rest Compartment (CCRC) through the entrance L2
door. For entrance door location: Refer to Crew Rest Compartment - Location.
A keypad lock secures the closed entrance door against opening by unauthorized persons. L1
failure.
cannot be opened via the keypad anymore (Refer to Entrance Door - Dead Bolt Indicator).
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 8/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380

HOW TO ENTER THE CREW REST COMPARTMENT
1. To make sure that no key has been pressed before entering the access code, clear any previous
inputs.
Note: To clear any previous inputs, turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER clockwise.
2. Use the keypad to enter the access code.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 9/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380

If the access code was correct, the visual indicators turn green.
If the access code was wrong, the visual indicators remain red. In this case, clear your previous
inputs and enter the correct access code.
Note: To clear your previous inputs, turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER clockwise.
3. To open the entrance door, turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER counter-clockwise and hold it in
this position.
Ensure turning the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER counter-clockwise to open the
entrance door. If you have turned the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER clockwise, the
access code was cleared. Turning the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER
counter-clockwise now, can cause damage to the keypad lock.
4. Pull at the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER to open the entrance door.

5. Turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER back to its middle position.
The visual indicators turn red.
HOW TO CLOSE AND LOCK THE ENTRANCE DOOR
Use the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER to close the entrance door.
Note: To easily close the entrance door, turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER. From the cabin side,
turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER counter-clockwise.

Ensure turning the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER counter-clockwise to close the entrance
door.
When you hear a click the entrance door is closed correctly.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 10/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
In the figure above, the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER is shown in the locked position.
- The entrance door is locked by the dead bolt when the dead bolt slider is on the right side.
- The entrance door is not locked by the dead bolt when the dead bolt slider is on the left side.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 11/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
HOW TO LEAVE THE CREW REST COMPARTMENT

1. Turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER in any direction to unlock the entrance door and hold it in
position.
2. Push at the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER to open the entrance door.
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - ENTRANCE HATCH

The entrance hatch is at the top of the staircase.

During the flight the entrance hatch is constantly open, unless smoke is detected in the Lower Deck
Crew Rest Compartment (LDCRC). If smoke is detected and there is the need to operate the fire
extinguishing system of the LDCRC, the entrance hatch must be closed. When closed, the entrance
hatch is a smoke barrier, which entirely covers the staircase.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 12/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
HOW TO OPERATE THE ENTRANCE HATCH

Entrance Hatch (Open)
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 13/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
Entrance Hatch (Closed)
HOW TO CLOSE THE ENTRANCE HATCH
WARNING Do not close the entrance hatch unless:

- A smoke detector in the crew rest compartment detects smoke.
- All occupants have left the crew rest compartment.
When closed, the entrance hatch shuts off the air ventilation in the crew rest
compartment. Then injury or suffocation to crewmembers in the crew rest
compartment is possible.
1. While holding the entrance hatch in position, turn both 1/4-turn retainers on the sidewall to
unlock the entrance hatch.
2. Carefully guide the entrance hatch entirely downwards.
3. Grasp the entrance hatch handle, lift it and turn it to lock the entrance hatch in closed position.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 14/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
Entrance Hatch Handle (in Position LOCK)
4. Release the entrance hatch handle.

HOW TO OPEN THE ENTRANCE HATCH
1. Grasp the entrance hatch handle, lift it and turn it to unlock the entrance hatch.
Entrance Hatch Handle (in Position UNLOCK)
2. Carefully guide the entrance hatch entirely upwards.

3. While holding the entrance hatch in position, turn both 1/4-turn retainers on the sidewall to lock
the entrance hatch in open position.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 15/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - THE INTERIOR

CREW REST COMPARTMENT - BUNKS

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
To ensure privacy, each bunk has a curtain.

Each bunk has its own Personal Service Unit, which is installed in the lining above. When entering a
bunk, always place the head at the bunk end with the Personal Service Unit to ensure access to the
oxygen mask in case of an abnormal situation.
To ease the access to the bunks in the mid or top level, there are footsteps and handrails/handles
installed.
Note: Always use the footsteps and handrails/handles when entering or leaving an upper level bunk.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 16/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - INFO PANEL

ATTENDANT INDICATION PANEL (AIP)

The AIP provides the occupants of the crew rest compartment with important textual information for the
cabin crew.
For more information: Refer to Additional Attendant Panel (AIP)
MINI-FAP
The mini-FAP is the control unit for these systems in the crew rest compartment:
- Lights
- Heaters/Temperature Control
- Humidification (if installed).
Customized additional functions may be implemented. For more information Refer to Mini FAP in the
Crew Rest Compartments
LIGHTS
The mini-FAP has a LIGHTS page where the lights in the crew rest compartment can be adjusted.
For more information Refer to Crew Rest Area Illumination Control via FAP / Mini FAP
HEATERS/TEMPERATURE CONTROL
How to Switch the Heater ON or OFF
Note: In the following the heater control of the FCRC is shown as an example. Operation is
possible only via the mini-FAP in the FCRC.
Heater control in the CCRC is identical, but operation is possible only via the mini-FAP
in the CCRC.
1. On the function selector: Touch the CABIN HEATER key.
The CABIN HEATER key changes its color to green and the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL
HEATERS page appears on the mini-FAP screen.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 17/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
2. On the FCRC control pad: In the HEATER CONTROL area touch the ON/OFF key once.
The status of the FCRC heater changes to the opposite and is updated accordingly in the
HEATER STATUS display.
How to Set the Temperature in the Crew Rest Compartment
Note: In the following the temperature control of the FCRC is shown as an example.
Operation is possible only via the mini-FAP in the FCRC.
Temperature control in the CCRC is identical, but operation is possible only via the
mini-FAP in the CCRC.
1. On the function selector: Touch the TEMP. key.
The TEMP. key changes its color to green and the CABIN TEMPERATURE page appears on
the mini-FAP screen.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 18/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
2. On the FCRC control pad: Touch the + or – key to increase or decrease the desired heating
level.
The heating level is updated accordingly in the SELECTED HEATING LEVEL display.
Note: The temperature scale is divided in heating level units (from 1 to 5). The default
heating level is three (3) – the medium level.
HUMIDIFICATION (IF INSTALLED)
For more information about the humidification system Refer to Crew Rest Compartment - Additional
Equipment
HANDSET
The handset enables the internal communication between the occupants of the crew rest compartment
and the cabin crew or the flight crew.
For more information: Refer to Handset Description
INFO SIGN "LEAVE COMPARTMENT"
If the info sign LEAVE COMPARTMENT comes on, all occupants must leave the crew rest
compartment immediately and quickly.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 19/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
Note: The info sign LEAVE COMPARTMENT comes on in the event of low air flow or a smoke
alarm.
Depending on the aircraft configuration there may come on a symbol instead of the text
"LEAVE COMPARTMENT".
INFO SIGN "FASTEN SEAT BELT"
If the info sign FASTEN SEAT BELT comes on, fasten the lap belt immediately.
LOUDSPEAKER
- Vocal messages sent by a crewmember in the cabin or by the flight crew
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - INFO PANEL

Info Panel Parts
(1) Mini FAP

(2) Power Outlet 115 V / 60 Hz
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 20/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
(3) Handset
MINI FAP
The mini FAP enables the occupants of the Cabin Crew Rest Compartment (CCRC) to control and/or
to monitor the main systems of the CCRC:
- Lights
For more information: Refer to Crew Rest Area Illumination Control via FAP / Mini FAP or Refer to
How to Control the Crew Rest Area Illumination via FAP / Mini FAP
- Air conditioning / temperature control
For more information: Refer to General Information about Air Conditioning / Temperature Control
- Smoke detection
For more information: Refer to Description of the Smoke Detection System.
POWER OUTLET
This power outlet is installed supplies power to e.g. a shaver or a vacuum cleaner.
HANDSET
The handset enables the internal communication between the occupants of the Cabin Crew Rest
Compartment (CCRC) and the cabin crew or the flight crew.
For more information: Refer to Handset Description.
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The Crew Rest Compartment (CRC) has stowage compartments to stow clothing and personal
belongings of the crewmembers. The stowage compartments have latches to keep the doors or
drawers closed. Each stowage compartment has a specific load limit, which is shown on a placard on
the inside.
Note: Do not overload a stowage compartment. Overload can cause a failure of the latch and can
lead to an uncontrolled door or drawer opening. To minimize the risk of injury to the CRC
occupants, stow the surplus items in other stowage compartments.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 21/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT

LOUDSPEAKER
At least one loudspeaker is installed in the crew rest compartment.
LCD SCREEN 
the LCD screen, it can be swivelled out manually.
STOOL 
The stool is wall-mounted. If a crew rest occupant wants to sit, the stool has to be operated like a
cinema seat.
HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM 
The humidification system is installed in the FCRC. The FCRC occupants can switch ON or OFF the
humidification via the mini-FAP.
HOW TO SWITCH THE HUMIDIFICATION ON OR OFF
1. On the function selector: Touch the HUMID. key.
The HUMID. key changes its color to green and the HUMIDIFICATION page appears on the
mini-FAP screen.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 22/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
Humidification
2. On the FCRC control pad: In the HUMID. CONTROL area touch the ON/OFF key once. The
status of the FCRC humidifier changes to the opposite and is updated accordingly in the
HUMIDIFIER STATUS display.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 23/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT

LOUDSPEAKER
At least one loudspeaker is installed in the crew rest compartment.
LCD SCREEN 
the LCD screen, it can be swivelled out manually.
STOOL 
The stool is wall-mounted. If a crew rest occupant wants to sit, the stool has to be operated like a
cinema seat.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 24/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - SAFETY INSTALLATIONS

EMERGENCY LIGHT
SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
Basic component of the smoke detection system is the smoke detector. The smoke detector is installed
in the ceiling. It detects smoke in the area where it is installed and gives an alert to the smoke detection
system.
When Smoke is Detected
The smoke detection system:
- Closes the air conditioning isolation valve to stop the air flow to the Lower Deck Crew Rest
Compartment (LDCRC),
- Sets the LDCRC lighting to 100% intensity, to ease the evacuation of the LDCRC occupants,
- Sends a signal to the fire extinguishing system (FES):
The CLOSE HATCHES indication on the FES panel comes on.
- Warns the crewmembers.
For more information about how to proceed in case of a smoke alarm: Refer to Lower Deck Crew Rest
Compartment Smoke/Fire Procedure
HOW THE SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM WARNS THE CREWMEMBERS
In the LDCRC via:
- Loudspeaker:
A single low chime sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. Following the single low chime, a
repetitive triple chime (smoke alarm) sounds every 30 seconds.
- Attendant Indication Panel (AIP):
• The smoke location message comes on.
• The red indicator light flashes.
- Personal Service Unit (PSU) of each bunk:
The LEAVE COMPARTMENT sign comes on.
- Info panel(s) with a LEAVE COMPARTMENT sign:
In the cabin via:
- Loudspeaker:
A repetitive triple chime (smoke alarm) sounds every 30 seconds.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 25/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
- The smoke indicator on the staircase housing:

It flashes amber.
- The respective Area Call Panel (ACP):
The amber lights flash.
- Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) and Mini-FAP:
• The FAP smoke page shows the affected area.
• The SMOKE RESET button comes on.
- All Attendant Indication Panels (AIPs):
• The smoke location message comes on.
• The red indicator light flashes.
In the cockpit (flight crew) via:
- Electronic Centralized Aircraft Monitoring (ECAM):
A smoke warning message comes on.
FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
To extinguish a fire in the Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment without danger to the cabin crew, a
stationary Fire Extinguishing System (FES) is installed.
The fire extinguishing system (FES) in the LDCRC consists of:
- Two fire extinguishing bottles
Fire extinguishing bottle 1 first quickly discharges, in order to saturate the LDCRC with extinguisher L2
agent.
The discharge time is approximately 1 min. L3
Fire extinguishing bottle 2 then slowly discharges, to provide sufficient extinguisher agent L2
concentration.
The discharge time is 240 min. L3
- Fire extinguishing pipes with several wall outlets L1
- One FES panel for status indication and activation of the fire extinguishing system, located in the
staircase housing (outside the LDCRC).
FES PANEL
On the FES panel, there are three main components installed:
- The FES sw
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 26/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
FES Switch
- The indication panel
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 27/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
Indication Panel with Five Lamps
- The lamp test pushbutton

LAMP TEST Pushbutton
Note: The position of these three main components on the FES panel is in the responsibility of
the galley manufacturer, because the staircase housing is part of the galley.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 28/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
Part on FES Panel Description

FES sw A plastic cover and a seal protects the FES sw against inadvertent
actuation.
Once set to position F.E.S. DISCHARGE, the discharge of the fire
extinguishing system starts.
SMOKE LDCRC lamp Normal state is off.
When on, it indicates that smoke in the LDCRC is detected.
CLOSE HATCHES lamp Normal state is off.
When on, it indicates that the entrance hatch and - if opened - the
emergency exit hatch must be closed before starting the fire
extinguishing system.
DO NOT OPEN Normal state is off.
HATCHES lamp When on, it indicates that both the entrance hatch and the emergency
exit hatch are closed and correctly locked.
Note: When the DO NOT OPEN HATCHES lamp comes on, the
CLOSE HATCHES lamp goes off.
BOTTLE 1 Normal state is off.
DISCHARGED lamp When on, it indicates that the first fire extinguishing bottle is empty.
BOTTLE 2 Normal state is off.
DISCHARGED lamp When on, it indicates that the second fire extinguishing bottle is empty.
LAMP TEST pb All lamps on the FES panel come on as long as the LAMP TEST pb is
pressed.
The LAMP TEST pb is for checking purposes only.
For more information about how to proceed in case of a smoke alarm: Refer to Lower Deck Crew
Rest Compartment Smoke/Fire Procedure
How to Start the FES Discharge
On the FES panel:
1. Remove the seal on the plastic cover above the FES sw.
2. Open the plastic cover.
3. Set the FES sw to the FES DISCHARGE position.
AIR CONDITIONING LOW FLOW ALARM
When the air flow into the LDCRC is too low
- The LDCRC lighting is set to 100% intensity, to ease the evacuation of the LDCRC occupants,
- The LDCRC occupants are warned.
For more information about how to proceed in case of an air conditioning low flow alarm, please: Refer
to Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment Air Conditioning Low Flow
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 29/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
HOW THE LDCRC OCCUPANTS ARE WARNED

The LDCRC occupants are warned via
- Loudspeaker:
A continuous high chime sounds for 30 seconds.
L2
Note: It is not possible to reset this chime.
- Personal Service Unit (PSU) of each bunk: L1

- Info column and info panel (in the changing room):
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - SAFETY INSTALLATIONS

EMERGENCY LIGHT
SMOKE DETECTOR
The smoke detector is installed in the ceiling. It detects smoke in the area where it is installed and
gives an alert to the flight crew in the cockpit and the cabin crew in the cabin.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 30/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH

In case of an emergency situation, quick evacuation of the Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment
(LDCRC) occupants could be essential. If the normal evacuation path via the staircase is blocked, e.g.
by a fire, the emergency exit hatch offers a second evacuation path.
Note: Do not open the emergency exit hatch unless there is an emergency situation and the normal
evacuation path via the staircase is blocked.
WARNING Do not block the emergency exit hatch from the cabin side. Otherwise the LDCRC
occupants cannot use the emergency exit hatch if needed for LDCRC evacuation. If the
emergency exit hatch is blocked, serious injury or suffocation to the LDCRC occupants
is possible.
Note: If the LDCRC is occupied, ask passengers standing on the emergency exit hatch for minutes
to move to another place in the cabin.
After all occupants have left the LDCRC, the emergency exit hatch must be closed and locked
immediately.
WARNING Do not leave the emergency exit hatch open, when evacuation of the LDCRC is
finished. An open emergency exit hatch blocks an evacuation path in the cabin and - if
occurring - enables smoke in the LDCRC to contaminate the cabin. A blocked
evacuation path and/or smoke in the cabin can cause serious injury or suffocation to
anyone in the cabin.
HOW TO OPERATE THE EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH

HOW TO OPEN THE EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH FROM INSIDE THE LOWER DECK CREW REST
COMPARTMENT
1. Remove the hatch cover.
a. Grasp the curtain rail lining with both hands at or next to the positions indicated by the two
arrow placards on the hatch cover.
b. Use both hands to pull the curtain rail lining with force to release it.
Note: Curtain rail lining and hatch cover stick together, both move at the same time.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 31/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
How to Pull Out the Curtain Rail Lining
c. Stop the initial move and use one hand to hold the hatch cover on its bottom side.
d. Use the second hand to carefully pull out the curtain rail lining while the other hand
simultaneously guides the hatch cover.
e. With the hand on the curtain rail lining: Carefully lower the curtain rail lining and put it aside,
e.g. on the upper bunk, ideally aside from the hatch area.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 32/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
How to Lower the Curtain Rail Lining
f. Use the free hand to hold the insulation package in place.

g. Use the hand on the hatch cover to carefully lower it and to put it aside.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 33/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
How to Lower the Hatch Cover
2. Remove the insulation package.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 34/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
How to Remove the Insulation Package
L2
Note: The insulation package has three layers which are connected one to another via the
seam.
3. If necessary place both feet on the lower bunk to stand in a better position to open the L1
emergency exit hatch.

4. Unlock the emergency exit hatch.
a. Grasp the handle of the release mechanism (colored red) and pull it down to release it from
the stowed position.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 35/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
How to Pull Down the Handle of the Release Mechanism
b. In a rather slow but continuous move: Pull the handle downwards along the curved groove to
the end position.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 36/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
How to Pull the Handle of the Release Mechanism Downwards
Note: It is important that the handle of the release mechanism has reached the end
position once despite the emergency exit hatch unlocks before. Only with the handle
in the end position the emergency exit hatch slightly pops up and can be removed.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 37/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
Handle in End Position
c. Release the handle of the release mechanism.

Note: The release mechanism is spring-loaded, therefore it is no matter that the handle
slightly goes back automatically.
5. Use both hands to push the emergency exit hatch upwards till it has left the hatch frame and put
it to the left side (= towards flight direction, any other direction is not possible because of the
installed bonding cable).
HOW TO OPEN THE EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH FROM THE CABIN
1. Remove the piece of carpet from the emergency exit hatch.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 38/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
a. Pull the cord which fixes the piece of carpet on the emergency exit hatch until the cord is
entirely removed.
b. Remove the piece of carpet.
2. Lift the emergency exit hatch and put it aside.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 39/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
a. Lift the handle of the locking mechanism.

b. Turn the handle counterclockwise until the emergency exit hatch is unlocked.
c. Use the handle to lift the emergency exit hatch vertically.
d. Grasp the emergency exit hatch safely with both hands and put it to the left side (= towards
flight direction, any other direction is not possible because of the installed bonding cable).
e. Lay the emergency exit hatch down on the floor.
f. To protect the handle of the locking mechanism from damage, turn it back and lower it to its
stowed position.
3. Grasp and remove the insulation package.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 40/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
L2
Note: The insulation package has three layers which are connected one to another via the
seam.
4. Use a foot to kick the hatch cover away (see figure below). L1
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 41/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
HOW TO CLOSE THE EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH FROM THE CABIN

1. Lift the emergency exit hatch and put it into the hatch frame.
a. Lift the handle of the locking mechanism.
b. Turn the handle counterclockwise to the unlocked position.
c. Use the handle to lift the emergency exit hatch.
d. Grasp the emergency exit hatch safely with both hands and put it over the hatch frame.
e. Use the handle of the locking mechanism to lower the emergency exit hatch until it fits into
the hatch frame.
2. Lock the emergency exit hatch.
a. If it is necessary to push down the emergency exit hatch that it can be locked, place yourself
on the emergency exit hatch but do not stand on the handle of the locking mechanism.
b. Turn the handle of the locking mechanism clockwise to the locked position.
c. Lower the handle to its stowed position.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 42/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
CREW REST COMPARTMENT - EVACUATION

In case of an emergency situation, a quick evacuation of the Cabin Crew Rest Compartment (CCRC)
could be essential. The preferred evacuation path is through the entrance door of the CCRC.
If the way through the entrance door is blocked (e.g. by a fire), there is a second evacuation path
through the wall that separates the CCRC from the Flight Crew Rest Compartment (FCRC).
EVACUATION PATH THROUGH THE WALL
There is an escape hatch between the CCRC and the FCRC leading through the wall.
1. Remove the escape hatch from the wall and put it aside.
a. Pull at both latch covers and put them aside.
Escape Hatch - Overview
b. Turn the D-ring handle of the latches in the direction shown on the placard until the escape
hatch is unlocked.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 43/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
Escape Hatch - Latches
c. Use the D-ring handles to pull the escape hatch into the CCRC and put the escape hatch aside.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 44/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
Removing the Escape Hatch
2. Climb through the hole in the wall.

3. Leave the FCRC through the entrance door of the FCRC.
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 45/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
UAE A380 03-120-30 P 46/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
ENTRANCE DOOR - KEYPAD

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The cabin crew uses these keys to enter the Operator-defined access code.
ENTRANCE DOOR - VISUAL INDICATORS

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
When the visual indicators are red, the entrance door is locked.
When the visual indicators are green, the entrance door is unlocked.
ENTRANCE DOOR - OPENING SYSTEM

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The door unlock lever is in vertical position: The entrance door is locked.
From the cabin side:
When turned counter-clockwise, the entrance door is unlocked.
From the crew rest side:
When turned in any direction, the entrance door is unlocked.
UAE A380 03-120-40 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
A380
ENTRANCE DOOR - DEAD BOLT INDICATOR

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The dead bolt is activated from the crew rest side.

The entrance door cannot be opened via the keypad.
The dead bolt is released from the crew rest side.
The entrance door can be opened via the keypad.
ENTRANCE DOOR - DEAD BOLT SLIDER

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
- When pushed to the right, the entrance door is locked by the dead bolt.
- When pushed to the left, the entrance door is not locked by the dead bolt.
UAE A380 03-120-40 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
OTHER CABIN AREAS/ADDITIONAL CABIN EQUIPMENT
Bar
A380 General
BAR AREA
Applicable to: ALL
There are two bars in the aircraft:

- The bar in the onboard lounge
- The bar in the First Class.
At the bar in the onboard lounge, a crewmember - the lounge attendant - is available as a bartender
and serves the desired drinks and snacks to the passengers.
The bar in the First Class presents, once prepared just before the bar service starts, drinks and snacks
to interested First Class passengers.
UAE A380 03-130-30-10 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
A380 General
UAE A380 03-130-30-10 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
A380 Location
BAR LOCATION (UPPER DECK)

Applicable to: ALL
Bar in First Class and Bar in Onboard Lounge
UAE A380 03-130-30-20 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Apr-14
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
A380 Location
UAE A380 03-130-30-20 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Apr-14
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
A380 Description and Operation
BAR IN FIRST CLASS (SOCIAL AREA)

Applicable to: ALL
Overview
The bar in the first class consists of two sections:

- The decorative upper section.
It has space to present snacks and drinks to the first class passengers at certain times. Outside
these times and if the display doors are closed, the illuminated water feature creates a waterfall
effect. The water flows into the drip tray which leads finally to a water sump inside the bar
monument. A pump starts the water cycle from new.
- The functional lower section.
UAE A380 03-130-30-30 P 1/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
In two trolley compartments, it holds up to four catering trolleys. The trolley compartments doors are
bi-fold. Solenoid latches unlocks the trolley compartment doors electrically. The renouncement of
mechanically-operated latches hinders passengers from opening the trolley compartment doors.
On the sidewall of the bar, there is the bar control panel. It enables the crew to start/stop the water
feature and to open the trolley compartment doors. The bar control panel is covered when not in use.
Note: There are two covers:
- The left cover is installed to cover the circuit breakers only.
- The right cover is installed to cover all other components of the bar control panel.
The Bar Control Panel
UAE A380 03-130-30-30 P 2/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
WATER FEATURE
HOW TO START THE WATER FEATURE
1. Check whether the water feature is ready for operation:
a. If the display doors are open, remove all items from the display shelves and close the display
doors.
b. Make sure the drip tray is free from debris and has no blockages.
2. Open both covers of the bar control panel.
3. Check that the water level indicator on the bar control panel is at least midway between LOW
and FULL (minimum start level).
If the water level is below the minimum start level: Refer to Bar in First Class (Social Area)
4. Close the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN.
The water feature is connected to the power supply of the aircraft.
5. Check whether the PWR indicator is ON.
Note: If the PWR indicator is OFF: Refer to Bar in First Class (Social Area)
6. Set the water feature ON/OFF pb-sw to ON.
7. Check that the water feature operates correctly:
a. Make sure the water flows.
b. Make sure there are no water leaks or water spillage.
Note: If the water feature does not operate correctly: Refer to Bar in First Class (Social Area)
8. Close the covers of the bar control panel.
HOW TO STOP THE WATER FEATURE
2. Set the water feature ON/OFF pb-sw to OFF.
3. Open the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN.
The water feature is disconnected from the power supply of the aircraft.
4. Check that the PWR indicator is OFF.
TROLLEY COMPARTMENT
HOW TO OPEN A TROLLEY COMPARTMENT DOOR
2. Close the circuit breaker DOOR CONT.
Both solenoid latches are connected to the actuation circuit.
3. Press the DOOR RELEASE button corresponding to the trolley compartment door to be opened
(left or right).
The solenoid latch of the selected trolley compartment door is released.
UAE A380 03-130-30-30 P 3/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
4. Open the trolley compartment door and move it to the fully open position.
HOW TO SECURE A TROLLEY IN THE TROLLEY COMPARTMENT
1. On the trolley:
2. With your hands on the front side of the trolley:
Carefully push the trolley entirely into the trolley compartment.
3. On the trolley:
4. Latch the trolley.
Engage all these 1/4-turn latches:
- The primary latch (the long one) on the top side of the trolley compartment
- The secondary latch (the short one) on the top side of the trolley compartment
- The two latches on the sidewall of the trolley compartment.
HOW TO RELEASE A TROLLEY FROM THE TROLLEY COMPARTMENT
WARNING Trolleys shall remain stowed and latched during flight.
1. Unlatch the trolley.

Disengage all these 1/4-turn latches:
- The primary latch (the long one) on the top side of the trolley compartment
- The secondary latch (the short one) on the top side of the trolley compartment
- The two latches on the sidewall of the trolley compartment.
2. On the trolley:
3. With your hands on the front side of the trolley:
Carefully pull the trolley entirely out of the trolley compartment.
4. On the trolley:
HOW TO CLOSE A TROLLEY COMPARTMENT DOOR
1. Carefully move the open trolley compartment door to the fully closed position.
Note: The trolley compartment door is in fully closed position when a click indicates that the
solenoid latch has mechanically engaged.
2. Check that the trolley compartment door is locked correctly.
UAE A380 03-130-30-30 P 4/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
BAR IN ONBOARD LOUNGE

Applicable to: ALL
Overview Bar Complex
The bar in the onboard lounge consists of two units:

- The horseshoe-shaped bar desk unit.
On its top, there is space to serve drinks and snacks to the passengers in the onboard lounge.
Underneath the top, there are the bar control panel and facilities both to store bar equipment and for
waste disposal.
A handrail enables the passengers in front of the bar desk unit to hold themselves, e.g. in case of
an unexpected flight maneuver.
UAE A380 03-130-30-30 P 5/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
- The display and stowage unit.

In the upper section there is space (e.g. on the desk surface and in the display doors) to present
snacks and drinks to the passengers in the onboard lounge at certain times.
On each side of the lower section there is a chilled trolley compartment to hold one half-size
catering trolley. Both trolley compartments are covered by a trolley compartment door which is
locked by a latch. In the middle of the lower section, facing towards the bar desk unit, there is a
chilled compartment for the stowage of cold drinks.
Another part of the bar complex is the ceiling with the horseshoe-shaped lighting panel which reflects
the shape of the bar desk unit. A combination of dimmable spotlights (in the lighting panel) and
lightstrips (used for indirect illumination of the bar desk unit) create a stylish and comfortable look. To
adapt the bar illumination to a brightness matching the lounge atmosphere best, the bar control panel
offers bar/lounge lighting control features to the crewmember serving the bar.
BAR ENTRY FLAP
HOW TO OPEN THE BAR ENTRY FLAP
1. With one hand, give support to the bar entry flap.
2. With the other hand, unlock the release lever underneath the bar entry flap.
3. Lower the bar entry flap against the gas damper to the vertical position.
HOW TO CLOSE THE BAR ENTRY FLAP
1. Lift the bar entry flap to the horizontal position and hold it in position using one hand.
2. With the other hand, lock the release lever underneath the bar entry flap.
BAR CONTROL PANEL
The bar control panel enables the crewmember working in the bar/lounge area to control the
bar/lounge lighting and the cooling unit (ACU).
UAE A380 03-130-30-30 P 6/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
Bar Control Panel
HOW TO SWITCH ON THE BAR/LOUNGE LIGHTING

On the bar control panel, press the PWR ON pb.
The LED of the PWR ON pb comes ON to indicate that the bar/lounge lighting is ON.
HOW TO SWITCH OFF THE BAR/LOUNGE LIGHTING
On the bar control panel, press the PWR OFF pb.
The LED of the PWR ON pb goes off to indicate that the bar/lounge lighting is OFF.
HOW TO SET THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE BAR/LOUNGE LIGHTING
Press either the ▴ pb or the ▾ pb as often as necessary to set the bar/lounge lighting to the desired
brightness.
UAE A380 03-130-30-30 P 7/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
The eight LED's beside the ▴ pb and the ▾ pb indicate the current brightness.
HOW TO SWITCH ON THE AIR COOLING UNIT OF THE DISPLAY AND STOWAGE UNIT
1. On the bar control panel, press the ACU ON pb.
2. Check the bar control panel whether the FAULT indicator is OFF.
If the FAULT indicator is ON, Refer to Bar in Onboard Lounge
Note: Depending on the current temperature in the chilled compartment and the trolley
compartments, it is possible that the TEMP WARN indicator is on, too. It should go OFF
when the temperature in the chilled compartment and in the trolley compartments falls
below the warning level.
3. Check the chilled compartment whether there is a cooling effect.
Note: To ensure that beverage and food in the catering trolleys and in the chilled compartment
are properly stowed in cold condition, do regular checks of the TEMP WARN and the
FAULT indicator on the bar control panel. If at least one of them is ON, Refer to Bar in
Onboard Lounge
HOW TO SWITCH OFF THE AIR COOLING UNIT OF THE DISPLAY AND STOWAGE UNIT
On the bar control panel, press the ACU ON pb.
UAE A380 03-130-30-30 P 8/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
A380 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP)
BAR IN FIRST CLASS (SOCIAL AREA)

Applicable to: ALL
In case the water feature does not operate properly, follow the appropriate of the three following function
recovery procedures.
On the bar control panel: The water level indicator is below the minimum start level.
YES NO
1. Carefully pour a very small amount of mineral water into the drip tray and
wait a few minutes until the mineral water reaches the water sump inside
the bar monument.
CAUTION Do not pour too much mineral water into the drip tray.
Otherwise spilling of either the drip tray or the water
sump inside the bar monument is possible. Spilling
water can cause damage to the electrical system of
the bar monument and/or of the aircraft.
Note: Normally the maintenance crew on ground checks the water

level of the water feature and adds water if necessary. If the
maintenance crew is not available (e.g. during flight), the purser
may decide that a crewmember should do this job. Then use still
mineral water only. Go to 2 Go to 2
2. On the bar control panel: Check the water level indicator.
Is the water level at least midway between LOW and FULL (minimum
start level)? END Go to 1
The water feature is ready for operation.
On the bar control panel: Though the water feature PWR indicator should be ON, it is OFF.
YES NO
1. Is the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN tripped? Go to 7 Go to 2
2. Open the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN.
The water feature is disconnected from the power supply of the aircraft. Go to 3 Go to 3
3. After approximately one minute, close the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN.
The water feature is connected to the power supply of the aircraft. Go to 4 Go to 4
UAE A380 03-130-30-40 P 1/6

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
YES NO
4. Is the PWR indicator ON now? END Go to 5
5. Set the water feature ON/OFF pb-sw to ON.
Is the water flowing? Go to 6 Go to 7
6. The PWR indicator is defective. Water feature operation is possible.
ground. END END
7. The water feature has an electrical fault and is inoperative for the
remainder of the flight.
a. Set the water feature ON/OFF pb-sw to OFF.
b. Open the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN.
The water feature is disconnected from the power supply of the
aircraft.
c. Make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
The water feature does not operate correctly (e.g. water leakage, water spillage or no water flow)
YES NO
1. On the water feature or in the drip tray or on the bar monument: Is there
water leakage or water spillage? Go to 6 Go to 2
2. On the water feature: No water is flowing? Go to 3 Go to 5
3. On the bar control panel: Is the PWR indicator ON? Go to 4 Go to 7
4. Is the water level indicator at the EMPTY mark? Go to 8 Go to 5
5. The water feature has an unspecified fault and is inoperative for the
a. On the bar control panel: Set the water feature ON/OFF pb-sw to
OFF.
aircraft.
c. Make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
UAE A380 03-130-30-40 P 2/6

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
YES NO
6. The water feature has a fault in the water cycle and is inoperative for the
a. On the bar control panel: Set the water feature ON/OFF pb-sw to
OFF.
aircraft.
c. Collect the water until there is no water leakage or water spillage
anymore.
d. Make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
7. Though the water feature PWR indicator should be ON, it is OFF.
See the specific Function Recovery Procedure above. END END
8. The water feature has not enough water for operation.
See the specific Function Recovery Procedure above. END END
BAR IN ONBOARD LOUNGE

Applicable to: ALL
In the display and stowage unit, there are two main power switches installed:
- The ACU POWER sw:
• In position ON, it connects the ACU to the aircraft's 115 V AC power system.
• In position OFF, it disconnects the ACU from the aircraft's 115 V AC power system.
- The DIMMER BOX POWER sw:
• In position ON, it connects the bar/lounge lighting to the aircraft's 115 V AC power system.
• In position OFF, it disconnects the bar/lounge lighting from the aircraft's 115 V AC power system.
UAE A380 03-130-30-40 P 3/6

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
ACU POWER Switch (Left) and DIMMER BOX POWER Switch (Right)
There is a system emergency (e.g. smoke) in either the bar/lounge lighting system or in the bar
cooling system.
YES NO
1. Is the system emergency in the bar cooling system? Go to 2 Go to 3
UAE A380 03-130-30-40 P 4/6

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
YES NO
2. Set the ACU POWER sw to the OFF position.
Note: For safety reasons, do not set the ACU POWER sw back to the
ON position again for the remainder of the flight. Go to 4 Go to 4
3. Set the DIMMER BOX POWER sw to the OFF position.
Note: For safety reasons, do not set the DIMMER BOX POWER sw to
the ON position again for the remainder of the flight. Go to 4 Go to 4
4. Inform the purser about the system emergency:
- Which system is affected.
- That the system is OFF.
- Further actions taken as a consequence of the system emergency.
Note: Enter these information into the cabin logbook to inform the
maintenance crew on ground. END END
On the bar control panel: The TEMP WARN indicator is ON
YES NO
1. On the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP): Check whether the GALLEY
COOLING page displays the error message COMPLETE SYSTEM
FAILURE / NO COOLING OF: ALL LOCATIONS.
Is this error message displayed on the FAP? Go to 2 Go to 4
2. On the electrical panels of all other switched-ON ACU's: Check whether
each TEMP WARN indicator (TEMP WARNING indicator respectively) is
ON.
Are all TEMP WARN or TEMP WARNING indicators ON? Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Refer to SCS Reset after Complete System Failure END END
4. On the bar control panel: Is the FAULT indicator ON, too?
If yes, read the Function Recovery Procedure "On the bar control panel:
The FAULT indicator is ON" (follows below). END Go to 5
5. Check the chilled compartment and the trolley compartments whether the
doors are entirely closed.
Are all doors entirely closed? Go to 7 Go to 6
6. Close the door which is not entirely closed. Go to 8 Go to 8
7. Relocate food or beverages that can go bad without cooling to other
chilled compartments in the aircraft. Go to 8 Go to 8
UAE A380 03-130-30-40 P 5/6

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN LAYOUT
Bar
YES NO
8. On the bar control panel: Check regularly whether the TEMP WARN
indicator goes OFF.
Is the TEMP WARN indicator still ON? Go to 9 Go to 10
9. Due to unknown reasons the cooling capability of the ACU is not
sufficient. Use the chilled compartment and the trolley compartments only
to stow food and beverages, which need no cooling.
ground. END END
10. The chilled compartment and the trolley compartments are ready for
cooling beverages and food again.
Enter the fact that the TEMP WARN indicator was ON for a certain time
into the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on ground. END END
On the bar control panel: The FAULT indicator is ON
YES NO
1. On the bar control panel: Press the ACU ON pb to switch OFF the ACU. Go to 2 Go to 2
2. After approximately 1 min: Restart the bar cooling system.
Refer to Bar in Onboard Lounge Go to 3 Go to 3
3. On the bar control panel: Is the FAULT indicator still ON? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The ACU is inoperative for the remainder of the flight.
- Relocate food or beverages that can go bad without cooling to other
chilled compartments in the aircraft
- Inform the purser about the loss of cooling in the bar in the onboard
lounge
- Make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
5. The chilled compartment and the trolley compartments are ready for
cooling beverages and food again.
Enter the fact that the FAULT indicator was ON for a certain time into the
cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on ground. END END
UAE A380 03-130-30-40 P 6/6

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN LAYOUT
Baby Bassinet
A380 General
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE INNOVINT 725X-SERIES

Applicable to: ALL
Following description is valid for the baby bassinets of the INNOVINT 725X-Series.
GENERAL
Baby bassinets provide passengers travelling with babies with a place for their baby to sleep during the
flight. It can be installed on a partition wall, lavatory or galley wall, always in front of the passengers
travelling with the baby. Two quick release pins attach the bassinet to the related wall, inserted into
special holes.
When not in use, the baby bassinet should be folded to the minimum size and stowed.
LIMITATIONS
To ensure a safe flight to the baby obey the following limitations:
- Do not use the baby bassinet during taxi, take-off, turbulences and landing.
- The zipper must be closed while a baby is lying in the bassinet.
- Do not use the baby bassinet for any other purpose than to lay a baby inside.
- Do not exceed a maximum body weight of 11 kg (24 lbs) or an age above 12 month.
Note: An overload will not occur if the baby fits smooth into the baby bassinet (bassinet length:
75 cm).
A baby aged 9 to 12 month has an average length of 74 cm (29 inch) and a weight between
9.2 kg (20 lbs) and 11.4 kg (25 lbs).
WARNING When a baby is inside the baby bassinet:

- Do not lean against the baby bassinet
- Do not hang items on it (overload)
- Do not unlock it
The baby bassinet may fall from the wall and injury could occur to the baby.
PREFLIGHT CHECK
Prior to the installation of the baby bassinet:
- Check that the baby bassinet is not damaged and its textile is not torn.
- Check that the pins and the corresponding holes in the related monument are not defective,
damaged or blocked.
UAE A380 03-130-50-10 P 1/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN LAYOUT
Baby Bassinet
A380 General
UAE A380 03-130-50-10 P 2/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN LAYOUT
Baby Bassinet
HOW TO INSTALL / REMOVE A BABY BASSINET OF THE INNOVINT 725X-SERIES

Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION
The baby bassinet from INNOVINT (725X-Series) consists of:
Baby Bassinet from INNOVINT
UAE A380 03-130-50-20 P 1/4

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN LAYOUT
Baby Bassinet
OPERATION
HOW TO INSTALL THE BABY BASSINET
How to insert the Pins
1. Kindly ask the persons in front of the monument where the baby bassinet has to be installed to
leave the seats for the time of installation. This allows staying in front of the monument for the
installation of the baby bassinet.
2. On both sides, simultaneously open and hold the spring loaded flaps (A), and press and hold the
pin release buttons (B).
3. Simultaneously insert the pins in their corresponding holes in the monument and release both
pin release buttons and flaps (C).
Note: Do not insert the pins fully into the corresponding holes.
4. Continue inserting the pins (D) until it clicks (E).
5. Check the safe attachment of the baby bassinet to the monument by pulling back each pin !
UAE A380 03-130-50-20 P 2/4

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN LAYOUT
Baby Bassinet
HOW TO REMOVE THE BABY BASSINET

How to release the Pins
1. Kindly ask the persons in front of the baby bassinet to leave the seats for the time of
deinstallation. This allows staying in front of the monument for the deinstallation of the baby
bassinet.
2. On both sides, simultaneously open and hold the spring loaded flaps (A) and press and hold the
pin release buttons (B).
3. Pull the pins out of the corresponding holes from the monument (C) until they are out, then
release both pin release buttons and flaps (D).
UAE A380 03-130-50-20 P 3/4

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN LAYOUT
Baby Bassinet
UAE A380 03-130-50-20 P 4/4

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM (CIDS)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
04-10 CIDS Introduction

Introduction of the CIDS....................................................................................................................... 1
Components of the CIDS in the Cabin................................................................................................. 4
Integrated Systems of the CIDS .......................................................................................................... 6
04-20 CIDS Components

04-20-10 Control Panels
Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) ............................................................................................................... 1
Mini Flight Attendant Panel (Mini FAP).............................................................................................. 14
Additional Attendant Panel (AAP)...................................................................................................... 22
04-20-20 Indication Panels

Attendant Indication Panel (AIP).......................................................................................................... 1
Area Call Panel (ACP) ......................................................................................................................... 2
Passenger Call Lights.......................................................................................................................... 4
04-30 Cabin Settings on the FAP

04-30-10 Cabin Settings Overview
Cabin Settings on the FAP .................................................................................................................. 1
04-30-20 Cabin Programming

04-30-20-10 General
General Information on Zones Programming....................................................................................... 1
04-30-20-20 Function Access

Access to Zone Menu .......................................................................................................................... 1

Defining Zones..................................................................................................................................... 1
Cabin Programming Operation ............................................................................................................ 2
04-30-30 Layout Selection

04-30-30-10 General
General Info about Layout Selection.................................................................................................... 1

Access to the Layout Menu ................................................................................................................. 1
UAE A380 04-TOC P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380

Selecting Cabin Layout on the FAP .....................................................................................................1
Layout Selection Operation ..................................................................................................................2
04-30-40 PA Level Adjustment

04-30-40-10 General
General Information on PA Level Adjustment ......................................................................................1

Access to PA Level Menu ....................................................................................................................1

How to make a Passenger Address .....................................................................................................1
Adjusting PA Level ...............................................................................................................................2
PA Level Adjustment Operation ...........................................................................................................4
Controls and Indicators for PA Level Adjustment.................................................................................6
04-30-60 Software Download

04-30-60-10 General
General Information on Software Download ........................................................................................1

Access to Software Download Menu....................................................................................................1

Downloading Software .........................................................................................................................1
Software Download Operation .............................................................................................................2
Controls and Indicators for Software Download ...................................................................................5
04-30-70 FAP Set-up

04-30-70-10 General
General Information on FAP Set-up .....................................................................................................1

Access to the FAP Set-up Menu ..........................................................................................................1

Change FAP Settings...........................................................................................................................1
FAP Set-up Operation ..........................................................................................................................2
CIDS - System Power-up .....................................................................................................................3
UAE A380 04-TOC P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
04-40 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP)

CIDS Reset After Cabin System Failure(s) in Flight or on Ground with Passengers on Board ............ 1
CIDS Reset After Cabin System Failure(s) on Ground with no Passengers on Board........................ 5
Recovering a Frozen FAP.................................................................................................................... 7
Recovering a Frozen Mini FAP............................................................................................................ 8
UAE A380 04-TOC P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 04-TOC P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS INTRODUCTION
A380
INTRODUCTION OF THE CIDS

The Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) is a microprocessor-based system. It operates,

controls and monitors the main cabin systems. The CIDS also continuously monitors its own
performance and the performance of the connected equipment. The operation of the CIDS is possible
both on the ground and in flight during all flight phases.
CIDS Description Parts
UAE A380 04-10 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS INTRODUCTION
A380
The CIDS automatically performs different system and unit tests, before and during the flight. It detects L2
and indicates possible faults in its components or the connected equipment. Some of these faults can
be reset in flight by the Cabin Crew (CC), if applicable Function Recovery Procedures (FRPs) are
available.
GENERAL INTRODUCTION OF THE CIDS

The Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) is a microprocessor-based system. It operates,

controls and monitors the main cabin systems. The CIDS also continuously monitors its own
performance and the performance of the connected equipment. The operation of the CIDS is possible
both on the ground and in flight during all flight phases.
UAE A380 04-10 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS INTRODUCTION
A380
CIDS Description Parts
UAE A380 04-10 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS INTRODUCTION
A380
COMPONENTS OF THE CIDS IN THE CABIN

Depending on the function of the CIDS components there are Control Panels and Indication Panels in
the cabin.
Components of the CIDS in the Cabin
L2
L1
Note: Many of the above functions are accompanied by a chime or by chime sequences. The
possible chime types are described here:Refer to 05-10 Sounds, Light Indications, and
Chimes.
UAE A380 04-10 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS INTRODUCTION
A380
COMPONENTS OF THE CIDS IN THE CABIN

Depending on the function of the CIDS components there are Control Panels and Indication Panels in
the cabin.
Components of the CIDS in the Cabin
L2
L1
Note: Many of the above functions are accompanied by a chime or by chime sequences. The
possible chime types are described here:Refer to 05-10 Sounds, Light Indications, and
Chimes.
UAE A380 04-10 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS INTRODUCTION
A380
INTEGRATED SYSTEMS OF THE CIDS

Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) provides the following control possibilities:
Integrated Systems of the CIDS
UAE A380 04-10 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
FLIGHT ATTENDANT PANEL (FAP)

Applicable to: ALL
THE DESCRIPTION OF THE FLIGHT ATTENDANT PANEL (FAP)

The main control panels in the cabin are the Flight Attendant Panels (FAPs). They are used to
program, to control and to indicate the status of the CIDS and the related cabin systems (Refer to
Operation of FAP).
The FAPs are divided into two areas:
1. The touch screen
It includes: L2
- The header (to indicate the title of each selected system page)
- The display area (to indicate each selected system page)
- The system and function buttons (to control system functions).
2. The sub panel. L1
It is used to activate main functions, that must operate independently from the FAP touch screen. It L2
includes:
- A row of hard keys
- A headphone jack
- A USB-port.
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 1/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
Multi-Purpose Flight Attendant Panel

L1
THE FAP HARD KEYS

The following table shows the functions of the FAP hard keys.
Typical FAP Hard Key Function

EMER Activates the Emergency Lighting System
PED POWER (if Activates / deactivates the In-Seat Power Supply System (ISPSS)
installed  )
LIGHTS MAIN ON/OFF Activates / deactivates the Cabin Lighting System on ground only
LAV MAINT Sets the lavatory lights to full brightness in the case of lavatory maintenance
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 2/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
SCREEN 30 sec LOCK Sets the touch screen in a sleep mode for a time period of 30 seconds for
cleaning
EVAC CMD Activates the Evacuation Alert System
EVAC RESET Resets the aural warning of the Evacuation Alert System
SMOKE RESET Resets the aural warning of the Lavatory Smoke System, activates local
visual warnings (ACP, AIP)
DECMP CHIME RESET Resets the aural warning of the Decompression Chime
(if installed  )
FAP RESET Initiates a software reset of the integrated PC-Card
PAX SYS (if installed  ON (default setting):
)
- Activates the Passenger Entertainment System
- Supplies the IFE system and the seats with electrical power.
OFF:
- Deactivates the Passenger Entertainment System
- All electrical power to the IFE system and the seats is deactivated (IFE
System Emergency Shutdown).
Note: Even only one PAX SYS pb-sw in the OFF position will shut down
the IFE and the seat power.
CAUTION The cabin crew can use the PAX SYS pb-sw to reset all
cabin PAX systems. The PAX SYS pb-sw is an
emergency pushbutton-switch! A regular use of this
pushbutton-switch can result in damage of passenger
system components.
STORAGE MEDIUMS BELOW THE SUBPANEL OF THE FAP L2
THE CABIN ASSIGNMENT MODULE (CAM)

The FAP is customized via the Cabin Assignment Module (CAM).
The Cabin Assignment Module (CAM) stores the CIDS configuration data. The CAM is installed in
the subpanel of the FAP and includes cabin configurations (e.g. cabin zoning, seat relation to
loudspeakers, passenger lighted signs, chime sequences, audio levels).
THE ON BOARD REPLACEABLE MODULE (OBRM)
The On Board Replaceable Module (OBRM) is the storage device for the system software (e.g. for
the Director software, for the FAP software). It is installed in the subpanel of the FAP.
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 3/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
THE INTEGRATED PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT & BOARDING MUSIC (IPRAM)

The Integrated Prerecorded Announcement & Boarding Music (IPRAM) is a programmable storage
medium for prerecorded messages/announcements and boarding music audio data. It is installed in
the subpanel of the Master FAP. The CIDS system controls a number of announcement channels to
provide prerecorded announcements all passenger related loudspeakers.
FAP RESET VIA PIN HOLE L1
In the case of a frozen FAP, it is possible to reset the related FAP via a pin hole. However, this FAP
reset is used preferably for maintenance purpose.
FAP Rest via the Pin Hole
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 4/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
LOCATION OF THE MP-FAP(S)

MP-FAPs in the Cabin
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 5/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
Temporary DU: 00026764.0001001

Applicable to: ALL
CIDS DEVIATIONS
There are known software deviations on the FAP pages described below.
These deviations will be removed as soon as a new software update is available.
1. SPORADIC DOUBLE INDICATION OF A MESSAGE ON THE FAP SYSTEM INFO / MISC PAGE
Observation: The message 'LOWER DECK ACCESS DOOR 5 CLOSED' is sporadically displayed
twice on the FAP SYSTEM INFO/MISC page.
Solution: The message is indicated correctly, the second message can be disregarded. There is no
further functional impact to the system.
2. SPORADIC INDICATION OF A MESSAGE ON THE FAP SYSTEM INFO / CIDS INTERN PAGE
Observation: The message 'LIMITED MINI-FAP FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE "Mini-FAP XXX"'
(whereas XXX is the position of the respective installation) may be displayed on the FAP SYSTEM
INFO / CIDS INTERN page.
Solution: The message can be disregarded. There is no further functional impact to the system.
3. FAP / MINI FAP SCREEN SAVER DEACTIVATION (ONLY FOR DISPLAYS WITHOUT AN
ACCESS CODE AFTER SCREEN SAVER)
Observation: Touching the screen of the FAP / mini FAP in order to deactivate the screen saver can
cause an unintended command.
Reason: The previously operated page on the FAP / mini FAP is still active in the background and
an active button from this previously displayed page is being touched. Depending on the CAM
programming, the upcoming page (which appears after the screen saver deactivation) may not
display the unintentionally touched button.
Solutions to prevent an unintended touching of an active button BEFORE leaving the FAP / Mini
FAP to the screen saver:
- Select a page which contains only few command buttons (e.g. 'Seat Settings'), if the previously
operated page will be displayed after the screen saver deactivation by default, or
- Select the CAM assigned "Start page after screen saver deactivation", if this CAM assigned
page will be displayed after the screen saver deactivation by default.
Solution for the screen saver deactivation:
- Touch the top middle part of the screen of the FAP / mini FAP (right below the screen frame)
where there are no buttons.
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 6/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION OF THE FAP COMPONENTS

The FAP consists of a screen and of a hardkey panel.
NAVIGATION ON THE FAP SCREEN
Navigation on the FAP
The navigation on the FAP screen is done by buttons. The FAP screen is divided into several areas:
Header Location: Upper side of the Contains: The CAUT button and the Help button
FAP screen
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 7/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
Deck Selector Location: Left side of the Contains: The ALL, Upper Deck, Main Deck and
FAP screen Lower Deck buttons
Function Button Location: Lower side of the Contains: The Screen Off button, the Function
Row FAP screen Selector, and the Cabin Status button
FAP Page Location: Middle of the FAP Contains: The aircraft symbols, control pads, and list
screen boxes
SYSTEM PAGES
On the Cabin Status page there are 5 system pages. They can be selected by touching the aircraft
symbols. The following system pages are available on the Cabin Status page:
Audio Refer to Audio page

Lights Refer to Lights page
Doors / Slides Refer to Doors/Slides page
Temperature Refer to Cabin Temperature page
Water / Waste Refer to Water & Waste
BUTTONS ON THE FAP SCREEN

Active Button Active Button Activated Button Button Function “OFF” Function
with Caution Not Available / of Activated Button
Indicator Function disabled Disabled
(Becomes Amber
and Flashes when
Automatically
Activated)
CAUTION HANDLING
The CAUT button always appears in the upper left corner of the touch screen. In case of a caution
message, the CAUT button will become amber and will flash until the related messages have been
checked by the cabin crew.
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 8/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
An information message appears in the heading of the touch screen as long as the related page has L2
not been checked by the cabin crew. The CAUT button goes off if all messages/errors have been
resolved by the cabin crew, either on ground or in flight.
STATUS INDICATION AND PASSWORD PROTECTION L1
The SYSTEM INFO page on the FAP indicates the status of several cabin systems. After selecting the
SYSTEM INFO page, an amber indicator, next to the related button will come on, if there is a fault
message on another page. To display the faults of the different systems, touch the related button on
the SYSTEM INFO page.
Indication: The faults of the following systems are displayed on the SYSTEM INFO page: L2
- CIDS Internals
- Ice Protection
- Power Management.
The password protection prevents from unauthorized use of the screen, the screen is automatically L1
locked after it is switched off. If the screen is switched on by touching the screen or an auto event, the
cabin crew must enter a password. The SMOKE page is the only page that can be displayed without
entering a password.
The following system pages are protected by a password: L2
- Cabin Programming (Refer to Cabin Programming menu)

- Layout Selection (Refer to Layout Selection menu)
- Level Adjustment (Refer to PA Level Adjustment menu)
- Software Downloading (Refer to Software Download menu).
SCREEN OFF FUNCTION AND SCREEN SAVER L1
Screen off function: The SCREEN OFF button is located in the lower left corner of the touch screen.
When the cabin crew touches the SCREEN OFF button or if there is no input for more than 10 minutes,
the touch screen switches off and the screen saver comes on.
The cabin crew can reactivate the touch screen by touching it or by entering the password on the
ENTER ACCESS CODE page in case the SCREEN OFF function is protected. In the case of an auto
event the screen will come on automatically.
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 9/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
The Integrated Cabin Systems are on the FAP CABIN STATUS page. The CABIN STATUS page
displays a Function Selector which is divided into 3 levels, and displays the following function buttons:
Example of Integrated Cabin Systems Menu
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 10/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
FAP Cabin Status, 1st Level
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 11/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
FAP Cabin Status, 2nd Level
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 12/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
FAP Cabin Status, 3rd Level
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 13/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
MINI FLIGHT ATTENDANT PANEL (MINI FAP)

Applicable to: ALL
The Mini Flight Attendant Panels (Mini FAPs) are installed in the door areas near the cabin crew
stations on both decks of the aircraft to control several functions of the CIDS and of the related cabin
systems. As an option, the mini FAPs can also be installed in some Cabin and Flight Crew
compartments (Refer to Operation of Mini FAPs).
Mini FAP
The following functions are available:

- SMOKE RESET: Resets the aural warning of the Lavatory Smoke System
- EVAC RESET: Resets the aural warnings of the Evacuation Alert System
- SCREEN 30 sec LOCK: Sets the touch screen in a sleep modus for a time period of 30 s for
cleaning purpose.
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 14/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
There are also Mini Flight Attendant Panels (Mini FAPs) installed in some Cabin and Flight Crew
compartments
Mini FAP in the Crew Rest Compartment

- LAV OCC: Information on the state of the related lavatory (occupied)
- DECMP CHIME RESET: Resets the aural warning of the in the case of either an low flow condition
or a (cabin) decompression condition.
Note: Pressing this pb immediately turns off the buzzer, even if the low flow or (cabin)
decompression condition remains.
- SCREEN 30 sec LOCK: Sets the touch screen in a sleep modus for a time period of 30 s for
cleaning purpose.
0225-0229, 0241-0244
There are no mini FAPs installed in the Crew Rest Compartment.
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 15/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
Typical Location of the Mini-FAPs in the Cabin
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 16/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
Typical Location of the Mini-FAPs in the Cabin
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 17/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
Applicable to: ALL
The Mini-FAP enables the cabin crew to control different cabin systems. The status of several cabin
systems is also indicated on the Mini-FAP. The Mini-FAP is similar to an FAP, but it has fewer
functions.
(Refer to Description of the Mini-FAP)
Layout of the Mini-FAP Screen
The Mini-FAPs can be customized to specific Operator requirements via the Mini-FAP CAM (Cabin L2
Assignment Module) assignment.

The Mini-FAPs have the following modules: L1
- The Display Unit has a functional area: the Header. The header row displays the title of the selected
function system page.
- The Display Area for CIDS functions displays the interactive buttons and functions of the selected
function system page.
- The Extra Display area for an aircraft symbol indicates the areas in which the changes to the
selected system function are performed.
- Function Selector
With the keys in the function selector the user can select the different function system pages
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 18/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
- The subpanel contains buttons and some interfaces (e.g. USB outlet). Typical functions are
installed on the subpanel as hard keys or switches.
The Integrated Cabin Systems can be found on the Mini FAP Cabin Status page. The Cabin Status
page displays a Function Selector menu that is divided into 2 levels which reveal the following menus:
Integrated Cabin Systems from Mini FAP Page
Refer to Overview Cabin Systems from FAP.
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 19/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
Mini-FAP, 1st Level
Refer to Mini FAP, 2nd level.
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 20/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
Mini-FAP, 2nd Level
Refer to Mini FAP, 1st Level.
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 21/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
ADDITIONAL ATTENDANT PANEL (AAP)

Applicable to: ALL
The AAPs are installed in different locations in the aircraft. The AAPs enable the cabin crew to control
some of the cabin systems additionally to the FAP or Mini-FAP (Refer to Operation of the AAP).
There are AAPs installed in the galley area.
AAP in the Galley Area

- Switch the galley center illumination to Bright, Dim 1, or Dim 2 (CNTR BRT, CNTR DIM 1, CNTR
DIM 2)
- Switch the galley side illumination to Bright, Dim 1, or Dim 2 (SIDE BRT, SIDE DIM 1, SIDE DIM 2).
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 22/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
Typical Location of the AAPs in the Cabin
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 23/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
Typical Location of the AAPs in the Cabin
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 24/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
Applicable to: ALL
Refer to Description of the AAP.

The cabin crewmembers can control different functions by pushing the Additional Attendant Panel
(AAP) pushbuttons. The AAP may have following functions in the cabin:
- Cabin Lighting Control
- Call Reset Functionality
- Lavatory Smoke Warning
- Chime Inhibit Functionality.
The AAP in the crew rest compartment has the following pushbuttons:
Pushbutton on the AAP Function of the AAP Pushbutton in the Crew Rest Compartment
Push this pushbutton to switch the lights to on/off.
Push this pushbutton to switch the lights to 50%.
Push this pushbutton to switch the lights to 10%.
Push this pushbutton to control the lights from the changing area.
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 25/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Control Panels
A380
UAE A380 04-20-10 P 26/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
ATTENDANT INDICATION PANEL (AIP)

Applicable to: ALL
The Attendant Indication Panels (AIPs) are located near all cabin crew stations on the different decks
of the aircraft to display CIDS-related messages.
The AIPs provide cabin crew far reaching call functions. Their displays indicate dial and call information L2
from the PA / Interphone system and other system-related information (e.g. Lavatory Smoke
Location/PAX Calls).
Typical AIP
L1
The AIP display has two rows where all messages appear.
There are two indicator lights (pink and green) on the display. The pink light is used for system and
emergency information, the green light is used for communication information.
Typical Location of the AIPs in the Cabin
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 1/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
AREA CALL PANEL (ACP)

Applicable to: ALL
The Area Call Panels (ACPs) are located in the entrance areas. Some of them are integrated in the
EXIT sign housing.
The ACPs provide a visual indication related to system information (e.g. Lavatory Smoke Location,
PAX Calls, interphone calls).
The ACP has four or five fields that are controlled separately. Each field contains colored LEDs. When
the lights are on they can be seen from the front and the back of the ACP. The fields are individually
activated to indicate the different system information. The lights come on continuously or flash.
Typical ACP with 5 colored LEDs
Note: The different indications (BLUE, AMBER, PINK) are only visible when they are on.
The following table shows the types of information visible on the ACP:
System Information Color on ACP Light Modus

PAX Call Blue Steady
PAX Call (from Lavatory) Amber Steady
LAV Smoke Amber Flashing
Attendant Call Pink Steady
Purser Call (from Cockpit) Pink Flashing
Purser Call (from Cabin) Pink Steady
EMER Call Pink Flashing
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 2/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
Typical Location of the ACPs in the Cabin
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 3/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
PASSENGER CALL LIGHTS

Applicable to: ALL
The Passenger Call System controls:

- The passenger call activation
- The lighting of passenger call indications
- The activation of passenger call chimes.
The CIDS processes the normal and automatic operation of the following signs:
- PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICES (PED) signs (or optionally No Smoking signs)
- FASTEN SEAT BELT signs
- RETURN TO SEAT signs
- RETURN TO CABIN signs
- EXIT signs in the aircraft.
(Refer to Operation of Passenger Call Lights).
(Refer to Passenger Lighted Signs).
Passenger Service Unit (PSU)
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 4/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
ACTIVATION OF PAX CONTROL LIGHTS

After the call activation there are ACP segments visible and messages on the AIP. A call chime is
heard from all loudspeakers in the related cabin area after every call activation.
CALL RESET FROM SEATS, CABIN CREW STATIONS AND LAVATORIES
If passengers press the call pushbutton a second time, the call indications will be reset. The related call
light and the related AIP messages will go off.
The related ACP light will go off, if no other calls in the ACP related area are active. L2
CALL RESET FROM THE FAP AND THE MINI FAP L1
The cabin crew can reset passenger calls from the FAP and from the Mini-FAP via the related reset
commands. The reset commands can be applied for each cabin zone individually.
CHIME INHIBITION
The cabin crew can prevent the activation of passenger call chimes with the help of inhibit commands
from the FAP and from the Mini-FAP. Through related buttons on the FAP or Mini-FAP the chime can
be suppressed generally of per zone.
CALL INHIBITION
It is possible to completely prevent a passenger seat from activating calls. This can be done on the
Seat Setting page of the FAP. All inhibitions are reset when the aircraft changes from the flight phase
to the landing phase.
INITIATING CALLS
Passengers can initiate calls by pressing a passenger call pushbutton. Passenger call pushbuttons are
installed close to each seat, in each lavatory and at each cabin crew station. The calls can be made
either from the Passenger Service Unit (PSU) or from the Passenger Control Unit (PCU) (Refer to PAX
Control Lights), that is part of the IFE system.
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 5/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
There are different signs installed on board the aircraft that indicate security guidelines for the
passengers. Most of these signs are controlled by the Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS) system, some
operate independently of this system.
When the signs are activated or deactivated, an attention chime triggers in the respective cabin area.
The Passenger Lighted Signs system controls the following signs:
- NO SMOKING signs
As a sub-function of the Passenger Lighted Signs it is possible to perform the non-smoker L2
area/aircraft programming.
L1
Refer to Information on Zone Programming
Seat rows, seat columns, cabin zones/areas, stair or even the entire aircraft can be defined as L2
non-smoker sections. The respective signs are switched on by a pre-defined database or via the
on-board programming, regardless of the position of the cockpit switches.
- FASTEN SEAT BELT L1
- EXIT
- RETURN TO SEAT
- RETURN TO CABIN
- LAVATORY OCCUPIED.
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 6/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS)
Usually, all of these signs come on during taxi, takeoff and landing. L2
The signs are switched off when the aircraft is not in the cruise flight phase (for example to permit
smoking in the related areas), if there are no extreme circumstances, e.g. turbulences.
The control switches for the signs are located in the cockpit, but the signs can also come on
automatically in specific conditions (e.g. Landing Gear up/down).
Independently from the passenger lighted-signs system, each lavatory is equipped with a LAVATORY
OCCUPIED SIGN (LOS). This sign displays the location of the lavatories and indicates if the lavatories
are either occupied (RED light on) or free (GREEN light on).
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 7/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
There are different signs installed on board the aircraft that indicate security guidelines for the
passengers. Most of these signs are controlled by the Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS) system, some
operate independently of this system.
When the signs are activated or deactivated, an attention chime triggers in the respective cabin area.
The Passenger Lighted Signs system controls the following signs:
- NO SMOKING signs
As a sub-function of the Passenger Lighted Signs it is possible to perform the non-smoker L2
area/aircraft programming.
L1
Refer to Information on Zone Programming
Seat rows, seat columns, cabin zones/areas, stair or even the entire aircraft can be defined as L2
non-smoker sections. The respective signs are switched on by a pre-defined database or via the
on-board programming, regardless of the position of the cockpit switches.
- FASTEN SEAT BELT L1
- EXIT (the "running man" symbol shows the correct exit direction)
- RETURN TO SEAT
- RETURN TO CABIN
- LAVATORY OCCUPIED.
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 8/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS)
Usually, all of these signs come on during taxi, takeoff and landing. L2
The signs are switched off when the aircraft is not in the cruise flight phase (for example to permit
smoking in the related areas), if there are no extreme circumstances, e.g. turbulences.
The control switches for the signs are located in the cockpit, but the signs can also come on
automatically in specific conditions (e.g. Landing Gear up/down).
Independently from the passenger lighted-signs system, each lavatory is equipped with a LAVATORY
OCCUPIED SIGN (LOS). This sign displays the location of the lavatories and indicates if the lavatories
are either occupied (RED light on) or free (GREEN light on).
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 9/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
The control switches for the Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS) in the cockpit have the following command
modes:
- ON
- AUTO
- OFF.
Note: Depending on customer cabin requirements, other signs can be installed in the cabin instead
of the NS Signs (e. g. No Portable Equipment signs).
NS Switch Panel in the Cockpit
POSITION OF NO SMOKING (NS) SWITCH IN THE COCKPIT

1. No Smoking switch in the ON position
If the No Smoking control switch on the cockpit overhead panel is in the ON position, the No L2
Smoking and the EXIT signs are switched on.

2. No Smoking switch in the AUTO position L1
If the No Smoking control switch on the cockpit overhead panel is in the AUTO position, the No L2
Smoking and EXIT signs will come on if one of the following conditions applies:
1. Condition I: Nose landing gear down, locked
2. Condition II: Nose landing gear down, locked or Slat_1 or Slat_2.
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 10/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
3. No Smoking switch in the OFF position L1
If the No Smoking control switch on the cockpit overhead panel is in the OFF position, all No L2
Smoking and EXIT signs will be off. Only the No Smoking signs in pre-programmed NON SMOKER
areas will remain on.
POSITION OF THE NO MOBILE SWITCH IN THE COCKPIT

The No Mobile sw can be found in the cockpit. Refer to: Refer to 02-110-30-33 Signs Overhead Panel
OPERATION OF THE NO MOBILE SIGNS
The No Mobile signs are activated conforming the following reference: Refer to 06-210-10 General
Information about the Cabin Connectivity System
Applicable to: ALL
If the Flight Crew sets the SEAT BELT sw to ON (or AUTO under certain conditions), the FASTEN
SEAT BELT (FSB) signs and the RETURN TO SEAT signs come on in the cabin.
FSB Switch Panel in the Cockpit
POSITION OF THE FSB SWITCH IN THE COCKPIT

1. FSB switch in the ON position
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 11/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
If the FSB control switch on the cockpit overhead panel is in the ON position, the FSB and Return L2
To Seat signs will come on. In addition, a related message will show on the ECAM display.
2. FSB switch in the AUTO position L1
If the FSB control switch on the cockpit overhead panel is in the AUTO position, the FSB and L2
Return To Seat signs will be active if the following input conditions apply:
1. Condition I: Nose landing gear down, locked or Slat_1 or Slat_2 and oil pressure high
2. Condition II: Nose landing gear down, locked or Slat_1 or Slat_2
3. Condition III: Nose landing gear down locked.
3. FSB switch set to the OFF position. L1
If the FSB control switch on the cockpit overhead panel is in the OFF position, FSB and Return To L2
Seat signs will be off.

CABIN DECOMPRESSION L1
In case of cabin decompression, all FSB and EXIT signs come on, regardless of the position of the
cockpit switches.
The Return To Seat signs are off.
SIGN FLASH
The SIGN FLASH function is defined in the CAM. L2
After activation of the No Smoking, FSB or Return To Seat signs, the signs flash for a pre-defined time L1
with a pre-defined frequency and then stay on continuously.

ATTENTION CHIME
Activation and deactivation of the signs causes an attention chime to sound in the related cabin area.
Note: The deactivation (as well as the activation) of the PLS will usually generate an attention chime.
As an option, this chime can be suppressed (in the CAM) on customer request.
CLASS DIVIDER L2
It is possible to install movable class dividers in the cabin. The dividers can have additional NS and
FSB signs. The operation of these signs is the same as for the normal NS and FSB signs.
SIGNS DIMMING L1
The Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS) adapt to the lighting level of the general lighting, to make sure that
the signs are always visible.
Different modes are available to decrease or increase the lighting level of the passenger lighted signs: L2
The lighting level of the PLS decreases or increases in relation to the level of the general lighting.
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 12/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
The online loudspeaker level adjustment function enables to manually adjust the volume of the
loudspeakers and chimes.
Refer to Online Loudspeaker Level Adjustment
Loudspeaker
The adjustment is possible within fixed limits. The cabin crew can adjust different groups of L2
loudspeaker individually. The Online Loudspeaker Level Adjustment page is access protected.
The loudspeaker groups are:
- Upper deck rooms
- Main deck rooms
- Lower deck rooms
- Upper deck cabin crew areas
- Main deck cabin crew areas
- Lower deck cabin crew areas
- Upper / main deck stair areas
- Main / lower deck stair areas
- Lavatories.
All loudspeakers can be adjusted in groups of:
- Variable upper deck cabin zones
- Variable main deck cabin zones
- Fixed upper deck cabin segments
- Fixed main deck cabin segments.
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 13/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CIDS COMPONENTS
Indication Panels
A380
The Online Level Loudspeaker Adjustment page can only be displayed on one FAP at a time. If this
page is displayed on one FAP in the aircraft, and another crew member tries to start the same page on
another FAP, a warning message will appear on the FAP where the crewmember is trying to see the
page. All changes to the loudspeaker levels are immediately applicable, so that an acoustical check is
possible before the changes are saved. Changes to the loudspeaker levels must be ended pushing
SAVE and then OK. After an unsuccessful change a failure message appears on the FAP.
The Online Loudspeaker Level Adjustment page can only be displayed on one FAP at a time.
If no change is done to the loudspeaker levels, the pre-defined loudspeaker levels in the CAM are
applicable.
The Reset button sets the loudspeaker levels back to the pre-defined levels in the CAM.
All changes to the loudspeaker levels are immediately applicable. It is possible to perform an
acoustical check before the changes are saved. Changes to the loudspeaker levels must be ended
with SAVE and the OK buttons.
L2
Note: The Online Loudspeaker Level Adjustment can only be displayed on one FAP in the aircraft at
a time. If a page is being displayed on one FAP, a warning message will appear on the other
FAP, if a crewmember tries to access the same page.
If the user exits the level adjustment page and does not push the SAVE and the OK buttons before, all
changes are cancelled. After an unsuccessful change a failure message shows on the FAP. The
progress of the save procedure shows on the FAP.
UAE A380 04-20-20 P 14/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SETTINGS ON THE FAP
Cabin Settings Overview
A380

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin settings of the CIDS is divided conforming the following illustration.
Cabin Settings on the FAP
If a cabin setting is changed, it is not necessary to perform a hardware change of CIDS components. L2
Only the software database must be changed to adapt e. g. the new cabin zoning.
UAE A380 04-30-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Cabin Settings Overview
A380
UAE A380 04-30-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Cabin Programming
A380 General
GENERAL INFORMATION ON ZONES PROGRAMMING

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin programming functionality enables the operators to modify the pre-defined aircraft zones.
Several functions of the CIDS operate in relation to different cabin zones. The cabin crew can change
the configuration of these zones via the cabin programming pages on the FAP. (Refer to Access to the
Zone Menu)
The following cabin programming modes are available on ground and in flight (Refer to Cabin
Programming Operation):
- Cabin Zones Programming
- No Smoking Zones Programming
- Non Smoker Aircraft Programming.
(Refer to Defining Zones).
The cabin programming page can only be displayed on one FAP in the aircraft at a time. If the page is
displayed on one FAP in the aircraft and another crew member tries to access the same page on
another FAP, a warning message will show on that FAP.
UAE A380 04-30-20-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Cabin Programming
A380 General
UAE A380 04-30-20-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Cabin Programming
A380 Function Access
ACCESS TO ZONE MENU

Applicable to: ALL
GETTING ACCESS TO THE ZONE MENU

1. CABIN STATUS PAGE
Step 1: On the CABIN STATUS page touch the scroll right icon ▸ from the Function Selector in
order to get to the second level page.
Cabin Status — Main Deck
2. CABIN PROGRAMMING PAGE

Step 2: Touch the Cabin Prog. button from the Function Selector to open the CABIN
PROGRAMMING page.
UAE A380 04-30-20-20 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-11
Cabin Programming
Cabin Programming Page
UAE A380 04-30-20-20 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-11
Cabin Programming
DEFINING ZONES
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can choose one cabin layout out of a maximum of three pre-defined and three
modifiable cabin layouts, via the FAP page.
Three different programming modes are available via the FAP page. They are accessible on ground
and in flight.
The three programming modes are (Refer to Cabin Programming Operation):
1. Cabin Zones Programming
This mode will change the length of cabin zones.
2. No Smoking Zones Programming
This mode will change the length of no smoking zones.
3. Non Smoker Aircraft Programming
This mode will change the entire aircraft to non smoker aircraft.
Note: The Cabin Programming page can only be displayed on one FAP in the aircraft at a time. If a
page is being displayed on one FAP, a warning message will appear on the other FAP, if a
crewmember tries to access the same page.
The crew must confirm the changes on the programming pages of the FAP with the Save key. If
changes are not confirmed they will be cancelled. The progress of the save procedure will be displayed
on the FAP.
UAE A380 04-30-20-30 P 1/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Cabin Programming
CABIN PROGRAMMING OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
PROGRAMMING MODES
CABIN ZONES PROGRAMMING
The CABIN ZONES PROGRAMMING mode enables the cabin crew to change the length of cabin
zones.
Cabin Programming – Zone Limits
A change of the cabin zone boundaries on the CABIN ZONES PROGRAMMING page will L2
immediately appear on all related buttons and displays of the zone related FAP pages. It is possible
to define eight cabin zones per aircraft deck. The smallest cabin zone has one seat row.
Each lavatory and its related functions are assigned to a number of seat rows. Therefore, the
lavatory is assigned to the cabin zone that the seat row belongs to.
All changes to the cabin zones are stored in the CAM.
NO SMOKING ZONES PROGRAMMING L1
The CABIN ZONES PROGRAMMING mode enables the cabin crew to change the length of the no
smoking zones.
UAE A380 04-30-20-30 P 2/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Cabin Programming
No Smoking Zones Programming
The non smoking aircraft key disables previous programming of no smoking zones programming. L2
The programming is enabled again, if the key is touched a second time.

Cabin crew areas are individually defined as smoking zones or no smoking zones in the CAM.
NON SMOKER AIRCRAFT PROGRAMMING L1
This programming mode enables the cabin crew to change the aircraft non smoker areas to
nonsmoker aircraft.
UAE A380 04-30-20-30 P 3/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Cabin Programming
Cabin Programming – Non Smoker Aircraft
There are four different ways of programming non smoker areas: L2
1. Symmetrical normal programming

Non smoker areas begin and end with the cabin zone boundary. The non smoker areas
boundaries have to be the same for the left, center and right seat row column.
2. Asymmetrical normal programming
Non smoker areas begin and end with the cabin zone boundary. The non smoker areas
boundaries can be set individually for the left, center and right seat row column.
UAE A380 04-30-20-30 P 4/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Layout Selection
A380 General
GENERAL INFO ABOUT LAYOUT SELECTION

Applicable to: ALL
The LAYOUT SELECTION functionality enables the operator to select between pre-defined aircraft
layouts. It is possible to choose one of a maximum of three pre-defined and three modifiable cabin
layouts (M-CAM) to be effective for the CIDS software.
The CAM layouts can only be selected when the aircraft is on ground, the CAM data is available and L2
the function is not used on another FAP.

If one of the required conditions does not apply, a LAYOUT SELECTION CURRENTLY DISABLED
message will be displayed on the FAP.
The modified layouts must be stored. The menus that create modified layouts are:
- Cabin Zones Programming
- Smoking Zones Programming
- Online Loudspeaker Level Adjustment.
After a layout change, the IFE system is automatically informed about the change.
Layout Selection — Selection Page
L1
The LAYOUT SELECTION page displays all available layouts with the following information: L2
UAE A380 04-30-30-10 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jan-17
Layout Selection
A380 General
1. Version number
2. Storage date
3. Information text.
When the operator selects one layout and touches the LOAD button, a progress page will appear on L1
the FAP. If the change is successful, a confirmation message will appear and the new layout will
become active.
Refer to Access to Layout Menu
FAP – Layout Selection – Load Procedure
UAE A380 04-30-30-10 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jan-17
Layout Selection
ACCESS TO THE LAYOUT MENU

Applicable to: ALL
Push the scroll right icon ▸ from the Function Selector in order to get to the second level page. This is
possible from every page.
Then push the LAYOUT SELECT. button from the Function Selector to get to the LAYOUT
SELECTION page.
Layout Selection Page
UAE A380 04-30-30-20 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jan-16
Layout Selection
UAE A380 04-30-30-20 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jan-16
Layout Selection
SELECTING CABIN LAYOUT ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The LAYOUT SELECTION page displays all available layouts.

It provides also the following information: L2
- Version number
- Storage date
- Information text.
Layout Selection – Selection Page
L1
The cabin crew can select a layout and then touch the LOAD key.
A progress page will appear on the FAP. If a change is successful, a confirmation message will appear
and the new layout will become active (Refer to Layout Selection Operation).
UAE A380 04-30-30-30 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jan-16
Layout Selection
LAYOUT SELECTION OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
A progress page will appear on the FAP.

Layout Selection – Load Procedure
If a change is not successful, a failure message will appear on the FAP, and the previous layout will
remain active.
UAE A380 04-30-30-30 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jan-16
PA Level Adjustment
A380 General
GENERAL INFORMATION ON PA LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

Applicable to: ALL
The Passenger Address (PA) transmits announcements from the cockpit and each cabin crew station
through all assigned PAX loudspeakers.
The PA level adjustment enables Operators to modify the volume of the announcements/music and of
the chimes in all defined cabin areas independently. Level adjustment is possible in flight and on
ground (Refer to Description of PA Level Adjustment).
UAE A380 04-30-40-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PA Level Adjustment
A380 General
UAE A380 04-30-40-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PA Level Adjustment
ACCESS TO PA LEVEL MENU

Applicable to: ALL
Push the scroll right icon ▸ from the Function Selector in order to get to the second level page. This is
possible from every page.
Push the LEVEL ADJUST. button from the Function Selector to get to the LEVEL ADJUSTMENT page.
Level Adjustment – All Pages
UAE A380 04-30-40-20 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-11
PA Level Adjustment
UAE A380 04-30-40-20 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-11
PA Level Adjustment
HOW TO MAKE A PASSENGER ADDRESS

Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO MAKE A PASSENGER ADDRESS

The following table shows the possibilities to make Passenger Address calls. The handset must be in
standby mode.
How to make ... Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Step 5:

Direct PA Push PA Push PTT
PA to Current Push PA Push DECK until the Push PTT
Deck desired deck is selected
PA to Selected Push PA Push PTT
Deck
PA to All Decks Push PA Push ALL Push PTT
PA to Selected Push PA Push one of the numeric Push PTT
Deck keys 1 to 6 to select the
Area a area a
PA to Selected Push PA Push one of the numeric Push + Push one of the Push PTT
Deck keys 1 to 6 to select the numeric keys 1 to 6 to
Area + Area b area a select the area b
HOW TO MAKE A PASSENGER ADDRESS TO CRC

The following table shows the possibilities to make Passenger Address to Crew Rest Compartments
(CRC).
How to make ... Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4:

PA to CRC Push PA Push REST Push DECK until desired deck is Push PTT
On Selected selected
Deck
PA to CRC Push PA Push REST Push ALL DECKS Push PTT
On All Decks
UAE A380 04-30-40-30 P 1/8

CCOM 05-Jan-17
PA Level Adjustment
ADJUSTING PA LEVEL
Applicable to: ALL
On the PA LEVEL ADJUSTMENT page the cabin crew can change the volume of announcements /
music and chimes in all defined cabin areas separately.
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Page
The level adjustment functions are available on ground and in flight.

- PA announcements from the cockpit
PA announcements are made from the cockpit using the cockpit handset or the equipment L2
connected to the Audio Management Unit (AMU) (boomset, microphone, and oxygen mask).
- PA announcements from the cabin handset L1
PA announcements can be made from cabin handsets. L2
- Priorities L1
- Source priorities
The PA sources have different priorities. A source with a higher PA priority interrupts a PA L2
announcement from a source with a lower priority. Only the announcement from the source with
the higher priority is heard.
- Functional priorities L1
UAE A380 04-30-40-30 P 2/8

CCOM 05-Jan-17
PA Level Adjustment
In addition, the PA functions have different functional priorities. The PA function with the higher L2
functional priority overrides the function with the lower functional priority.
- Resetting selected PA functions L1
If the PA function is initiated by the handset function keys, the function is cancelled after hooking L2
the handset on to the cradle or by pressing the RESET button on the handset.
If the function is initiated by pressing the PTT, releasing the PTT pushbutton will cancel the
function.
- Attention chimes L1
As an option, it is possible that a selected PA function generates a chime for the related L2
loudspeakers.
- PA indications L1
Dial and status information related to PA system functions is displayed on the respective Attendant L2
Indication Panel (AIP).

- Gain adjustment L1
In case of low cabin pressure or engine on (high oil pressure) the volume of a PA announcement L2
will be increased. If a cabin handset is in use, the volume of the PA announcement in the respective
handset area will decrease to avoid feedback.
For aural annunciations in the cabin, specific tone sequences (e.g. chimes) are heard in the
respective cabin areas via the loudspeakers.
The call annunciation in the cockpit is done by the activation of output commands to the audio
management system of the cockpit.
UAE A380 04-30-40-30 P 3/8

CCOM 05-Jan-17
PA Level Adjustment
PA LEVEL ADJUSTMENT OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
CHANGE THE PA LEVEL SETTINGS

Touch the ADJUST button to change the settings in a specific area.
L2
Note: The ROOMS is only displayed if a related CREW REST room is installed and assigned to it.
The following example shows a LEVEL ADJUSTMENT page where the CABIN ZONES are
activated.
Level Adjustment – Item Selection
L1
SAVE CONFIRMATION
In the example above, first class is selected and highlighted in the list box.
Other cabin areas can be selected using the UP/DOWN buttons. L2
A scrollbar, located on the right hand side of the list box, indicates that there are further locations L1
available (e.g. lavatories).

The volume of announcements or chimes can be increased/decreased touching the related plus (+) or L2
minus (-) buttons on the touch screen.
UAE A380 04-30-40-30 P 4/8

CCOM 05-Jan-17
PA Level Adjustment
Note: In order to complete the procedure, the save key must be touched. Otherwise, the changes
made to the level adjustment are not taken into account and the system goes back to the
previous settings after exiting the page. To reset the modifications, touch the Default button.
All values will be set to the assigned CAM basic values.
Level Adjustment — Save Confirmation
L1
UAE A380 04-30-40-30 P 5/8

CCOM 05-Jan-17
PA Level Adjustment
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR PA LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

Applicable to: ALL
BUTTONS FOR PA LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

The following buttons help to control the PA Level Adjustment:
Adjust the PA Level in the Cabin Zones.
Adjusts the PA Level in the Attendant Areas.
Adjusts the PA Level in the room areas.
Adjust the PA Level in the lavatory areas.
Adjust the PA Level in the stair areas.
UAE A380 04-30-40-30 P 6/8

CCOM 05-Jan-17
PA Level Adjustment
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT PAGE

Touch the CABIN ZONES key to access the VOLUME ADJUSTMENT page.
On this page it is possible to choose the following values: L2
- Cabin zone with the up/down arrows

- The assigned announcement volume
- The assigned chime volume.
The Default pushbutton is used to reset the values to the default values.
Volume Adjustment window
L1
SAVING THE ADJUSTMENT CHANGES

Save the changes pressing the SAVE key.
The following page will appear:
UAE A380 04-30-40-30 P 7/8

CCOM 05-Jan-17
PA Level Adjustment
Saving the Adjustment Changes
Touch the OK key to save the changes or CANCEL to return to the VOLUME ADJUSTMENT page.
UAE A380 04-30-40-30 P 8/8

CCOM 05-Jan-17
Software Download
A380 General
GENERAL INFORMATION ON SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

Applicable to: ALL
This function enables maintenance personnel to upload software to specific components of the CIDS
system.
The following systems are supported by software:
1. Directors
2. Flight Attendant Panels (FAPs)
3. Mini-FAPs
4. Decoder-Encoder Units (DEUs)
5. Handsets.
Refer to Refer to Downloading Software.
The software is provided by the FAP/OBRM and can only be loaded when the aircraft is on ground.
UAE A380 04-30-60-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Software Download
A380 General
UAE A380 04-30-60-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Software Download
ACCESS TO SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD MENU

Applicable to: ALL
The maintenance crew enters the access code for the SOFTWARE LOADING menu.
Software Loading – Access Code
UAE A380 04-30-60-20 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-11
Software Download
UAE A380 04-30-60-20 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-11
Software Download
DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE
Applicable to: ALL
The SOFTWARE LOADING menu enables maintenance personnel updating the software of some
CIDS components. The software loading function is a maintenance activity.
Therefore, other CIDS functionalities are not available during the DOWNLOAD/OMS information L2
operation and global uploading operation initiated by the FAP and the DOWNLOAD/OMS.
CIDS Components — Load Section
L1
The respective downloaded software is intermediately stored in the OBRM module and then handled L2
by the FAP for transfer to the target components.

(Refer to Software Loading Operation). L1
UAE A380 04-30-60-30 P 1/6

CCOM 05-Jan-17
Software Download
SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
Start Loading
UAE A380 04-30-60-30 P 2/6

CCOM 05-Jan-17
Software Download
Loading in Process
UAE A380 04-30-60-30 P 3/6

CCOM 05-Jan-17
Software Download
Loading Completed
UAE A380 04-30-60-30 P 4/6

CCOM 05-Jan-17
Software Download
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

Applicable to: ALL
SOFTWARE LOADING Menu — Components Details
Software Loading menu with loadable features

(Displays when software version is identical)
UAE A380 04-30-60-30 P 5/6

CCOM 05-Jan-17
Software Download
Software Loading menu

(Displays when software versions are partly different)
Software Loading menu

(Displays when software is not loadable).
UAE A380 04-30-60-30 P 6/6

CCOM 05-Jan-17
FAP Set-up
A380 General
GENERAL INFORMATION ON FAP SET-UP

Applicable to: ALL
The FAP can be changed using the FAP set-up functionality. The maintenance crew can change the
configuration of the FAP. Usually, this page is accessed when the aircraft is on ground. (Refer to
Access to FAP SET-UP Menu)
UAE A380 04-30-70-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
FAP Set-up
A380 General
UAE A380 04-30-70-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
FAP Set-up
ACCESS TO THE FAP SET-UP MENU

Applicable to: ALL
On the CABIN STATUS page the cabin crew can touch the right arrow key from the function selector in
order to get to the second level page. Then the cabin crew can touch the FAP Set-Up key from the
function selector to open the FAP SET-UP page. (Refer to Change FAP Settings)
FAP Set-up page
UAE A380 04-30-70-20 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-11
FAP Set-up
UAE A380 04-30-70-20 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-11
FAP Set-up
CHANGE FAP SETTINGS

Applicable to: ALL
The following parameters can be changed on the FAP SET-UP page:

- Brightness of the display
- Volume of the loudspeakers
- Volume of the headphones.
It is possible to remove the following storage media from their slots:
- Integrated Prerecorded Announcement & Boarding Music (IPRAM)
- Cabin Assignment Module (CAM)
- On Board Replaceable Module (OBRM).
Refer to FAP Set-Up Operation
UAE A380 04-30-70-30 P 1/4

CCOM 02-Apr-10
FAP Set-up
FAP SET-UP OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
The FAP display can be set with the up/down arrow keys.
The FAP volume for the loudspeakers or the headphones can be

set with the up/down arrow keys.
The three cards (IPRAM, CAM, OBRM) can be removed after

touching the related Remove keys.
Switch the touch screen click on/off with the ON/OFF key.
UAE A380 04-30-70-30 P 2/4

CCOM 02-Apr-10
FAP Set-up
CIDS - SYSTEM POWER-UP

Applicable to: ALL
FAP BOOT PHASE

When the CIDS is powering up, the FAP will display the system power-up page.
When the power-up sequence is completed, a Cabin Assignment Module (CAM) assigned page (e.g.
Cabin Status) or a screen saver will appear.
Boot Phase of the FAP
FAP BOOT ERROR L2
If the system does not receive any data from the active CIDS director, the FAP will display a fault page
(blue card).
UAE A380 04-30-70-30 P 3/4

CCOM 02-Apr-10
FAP Set-up
Blue Card
UAE A380 04-30-70-30 P 4/4

CCOM 02-Apr-10
FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURES (FRP)
A380
CIDS RESET AFTER CABIN SYSTEM FAILURE(S) IN FLIGHT OR ON GROUND WITH PASSENGERS
ON BOARD
Applicable to: ALL
If a cabin system has failed, this has an impact on the operation of the cabin. In order to recover the cabin
system, the Cabin Crew has to request the Flight Crew to perform a CIDS reset as described below. Cabin
systems are e.g.: Passenger Address (PA), Cabin Communication Systems, Cabin Lighting, or Flight
Attendant Panel functions.
A cabin system has failed. L12
YES NO
1. Inform the Flight Crew that the CIDS is inoperative. Request the Flight
Crew to perform a reset on the CIDS 1 RESET button.
Note: In order to perform the reset, the Flight Crew pulls the CIDS 1
RESET button.
1. When the Flight Crew has confirmed the reset, wait 1 minute.
2. Randomly check the system pages on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP) e.g. LIGHTS, CABIN TEMPERATURE, etc.
Note: In most cases the first reset will be successful.
Are the system pages available? Go to 8 Go to 2
2. The Flight Crew will keep the CIDS 1 RESET button pulled.
Is the system operative? Go to 8 Go to 3
UAE A380 04-40 P 1/8

CCOM 03-Oct-12
A380
YES NO
3. Inform the Flight Crew that the CIDS is inoperative.
Note: In order to perform the reset, the Flight Crew pushes back the
CIDS 1 RESET button.
Note: The CIDS 1 takes into account the default settings. These
default settings lead to:
- Full bright cabin illumination
- The basic CIDS functions (e.g. PA, interphone) are lost for 30
seconds.
- The FAPs and mini FAPs are not available for 5 minutes.
1. When the Flight Crew has confirmed the reset, wait 5 minutes.
RESET button.
UAE A380 04-40 P 2/8

CCOM 03-Oct-12
A380
YES NO
seconds.
RESET button.
UAE A380 04-40 P 3/8

CCOM 03-Oct-12
A380
YES NO
seconds.
8. The CIDS is operative again.
Enter the failure symptoms and the recovery process into the cabin
logbook. END END
9. The CIDS is inoperative, or partially inoperative.
Report the failure to the flight crew and make an entry into the cabin
logbook. END END
UAE A380 04-40 P 4/8

CCOM 03-Oct-12
A380
CIDS RESET AFTER CABIN SYSTEM FAILURE(S) ON GROUND WITH NO PASSENGERS ON

BOARD
Applicable to: ALL
If a cabin system has failed, this has an impact on the operation of the cabin. In order to recover the cabin
system, the Cabin Crew has to request the Flight Crew to perform a CIDS reset as described below. Cabin
systems are e.g.: Passenger Address (PA), Cabin Communication Systems, Cabin Lighting, or Flight
Attendant Panel functions.
UAE A380 04-40 P 5/8

CCOM 03-Oct-12
A380
A cabin system has failed.
YES NO
Crew to perform a reset of the CIDS. Wait for instructions from the Flight
Crew.
Note: In order to perform the reset,
1. The Flight Crew pulls the CIDS 3 RESET button, then waits 5
seconds
seconds
seconds
In the cockpit: The ECAM will trigger the CAB COM CIDS
1+2+3 FAULT alert. This alert must be disregarded.
In the cabin: On the FAP and on the mini FAP, there is a Blue
Card with the information "No FAP / Mini-FAP Information
Available".
4. The Flight Crew pushes at the SAME time all three buttons,
the CIDS 1 RESET, the CIDS 2 RESET, and the CIDS 3
RESET.
Note: This action leads to CIDS default settings:
- Activation of the Fasten Seat Belts (FSB), and No Smoking
signs
- Temporary unavailability (5 minutes) of PA Interphone,
chimes, FAPs, and mini FAPs.
2. Randomly check the system pages on the FAP, e.g. LIGHTS, CABIN
TEMPERATURE, etc.
2. The CIDS is operative again.
logbook. END END
UAE A380 04-40 P 6/8

CCOM 03-Oct-12
A380
YES NO
3. The CIDS is inoperative, or partially inoperative.
Report the failure to the Flight Crew and make an entry into the cabin
logbook. END END
RECOVERING A FROZEN FAP

Applicable to: ALL
If any FAP screen is frozen or black follow the procedure described below.
YES NO
1. Touch the screen on sensitive places in order to activate the screen
again. Is the FAP screen active and operating now? END Go to 2
2. Go to all FAPs and touch the screens on sensitive places in order to
activate the screens. Are the screens active and unlocked? END Go to 3
3. At any active and operating FAP screen:
Use the active and operating screen for the rest of the flight to control and
monitor the cabin systems.
Make an entry into the cabin logbook about the failure of FAP screen(s). END END
4. All FAPs are inoperative.
Report to the flight crew and perform the CIDS reset procedure. Refer to
04-40 CIDS Reset After Cabin System Failure(s) in Flight or on Ground
with Passengers on Board
Make an entry into the cabin logbook about the failure of FAP screens. END END
UAE A380 04-40 P 7/8

CCOM 03-Oct-12
A380
RECOVERING A FROZEN MINI FAP

Applicable to: ALL
If any mini FAP screen is frozen or black follow the procedure described below.
YES NO
1. Touch the screen on sensitive places in order to activate the screen
again. Is the mini FAP screen active and operating now? Go to 2 END
2. Report to the flight crew and perform the CIDS reset procedure. Refer to
04-40 CIDS Reset After Cabin System Failure(s) in Flight or on Ground
with Passengers on BoardIs the mini FAP active and operating now?
Make an entry into the cabin logbook about the failure of the mini FAP
screens. END END
UAE A380 04-40 P 8/8

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
05-10 Communication Principles

General Information on Communication .............................................................................................. 1
PA System - General Information about Handset Operation ............................................................... 3
Handset Description............................................................................................................................. 7
Handset Philosophy........................................................................................................................... 11
Quick Reference to Passenger Address............................................................................................ 15
Quick Reference to Cabin Interphone Call ........................................................................................ 17
Sounds, Light Indications, and Chimes ............................................................................................. 19
05-20 PA System
05-20-10 General
General Information on the Passenger Address System..................................................................... 1
05-20-20 PA from Cabin

Via Cabin Handset............................................................................................................................... 1
Passenger Address – Functional and Source Priorities....................................................................... 1
Passenger Address Settings ............................................................................................................... 4
Operation of the Passenger Address System...................................................................................... 5
05-20-30 PA from Cockpit

Passenger Address from the cockpit via the Cockpit Handset ............................................................ 1
Passenger Address from the Cockpit via the Audio Equipment .......................................................... 1
Passenger Address Monitoring............................................................................................................ 2
05-30 Cabin Interphone

05-30-10 General
General Information about the Cabin Interphone................................................................................. 1
Cabin Interphone Call to the cockpit, or including the cockpit ............................................................. 2
05-30-20 Calls from Cabin

Operation of the Cabin Interphone System.......................................................................................... 1
Emergency Call ................................................................................................................................... 2
PRIO Calls ........................................................................................................................................... 2
Answering/Transferring/Rejecting Calls............................................................................................... 3
Call Indications/Chimes/Priorities ........................................................................................................ 4
UAE A380 05-TOC P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
05-30-30 Calls from Cockpit

Via Calls Panel and Audio Equipment..................................................................................................1
Via Cockpit Handset.............................................................................................................................1

Cabin Interphone locked ......................................................................................................................1
05-40 Service Interphone

05-40-10 General
General Information on Service Interphone .........................................................................................1
05-40-20 Location
Location of the Jacks............................................................................................................................1

System Operation of the Service Interphone .......................................................................................1
Cockpit to Ground Crew Calls ..............................................................................................................2
Ground Crew to Cockpit Calls ..............................................................................................................2
Operation of the Service Interphone System .......................................................................................3
05-50 Passenger Call System

05-50-10 General
General Information on Passenger Call System ..................................................................................1
05-50-20 Pax Call from a Seatrow

Calls initiated via PSU..........................................................................................................................1
Calls initiated via PCU..........................................................................................................................1
Indications of this Call ..........................................................................................................................2
Reset of a Passenger Call via FAP and Mini FAP ...............................................................................3
Via AAP................................................................................................................................................3
05-50-30 Pax Call from a Lavatory

Calls initiated via LSU ..........................................................................................................................1
UAE A380 05-TOC P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COMMUNICATION PRINCIPLES
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ON COMMUNICATION

Communication Principles
UAE A380 05-10 P 1/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT COMMUNICATION

Communication Principles
UAE A380 05-10 P 2/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
PA SYSTEM - GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT HANDSET OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
PICKING UP THE HANDSET

In order to pick up the handset from its cradle, the Cabin Crew must press at the back of the handset.
The button has the inscription PRESS. Once the button has been pressed, the handset will be easily
removable from its cradle.
Picking up the Handset
HANDLING OF THE HANDSET MICROPHONE

In order to optimize the handling of the handset and to minimize problems with low level
announcements, use the handset like a normal telephone handset.
Cabin Crew should not hold the handset upside-down during announcements. Used upside-down the
sensitivity of the handset is the least. The output level as well as the effect of the noise-cancelling
feature is reduced. Announcements can be hardly heard in the cabin or may be impossible to
understand.
UAE A380 05-10 P 3/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Correct Handset Microphone Use
HANDLING OF THE HANDSET CORD

Do not stretch the handset cord over 2 meters (80 inches).
This may cause damage to the cord supports at both ends of the cord and will lead to handset
malfunction.
UAE A380 05-10 P 4/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Correct Handset Cord Use
HANDLING OF THE HANDSET CRADLE

In order to avoid problems with broken housings, place the handset on the support bracket and push it
gently to "click" it into its correct position. This way the handset will stay in its position under normal
conditions.
If not placed correctly in the support bracket, the handset may fall out of its cradle, onto the cabin floor,
and will be damaged.
UAE A380 05-10 P 5/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Correct Handset Cradle Use
UAE A380 05-10 P 6/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
HANDSET DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
HANDSET WITH SUPPORT BRACKET

The cabin crewmembers use the cabin handsets for the Cabin Interphone functions and for PAs. An
integrated keyboard is used to make different calls or announcements. An integrated display provides
the related PA/Interphone dialing and calling information as well as certain system information.
The handsets can operate during the entire flight and on ground. The cabin handsets are installed in a L2
vertical position near the cabin crew stations in the pressurized area of the cabin.
A handset has the following components: L1
- Integrated keyboard with 18 keys including:

- 6 Function keys
- 3 Multi-Function softkeys
- 6 Numeric keys
- 2 Transmission keys (SEND and RESET/CORRECT)
- 1 Plus key.
- Integrated display
- Push-to-Talk key
- Microphone unit with a preamplifier
- Earphone.
The handset assembly consists of a receiver assembly and a support bracket which are linked together
with a cable assembly.
UAE A380 05-10 P 7/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Handset
Note: In order to use the handset, push the unlocking mechanism, and then lift the receiver assy
from the support bracket.
The handsets have the following functions: L2
- Select the related functions and establish a communication link with the integrated keyboard. A
RESET key is available. The keys provide a tactile feedback when you push them.
- Select up to 8 functions with the function keyboard. A RESET function is available. The keys give a
tactile feedback when you push them.
- The integrated display shows PA/Interphone dialing and calling information and system related
information. It has a backlight illumination.
- The Push-To-Talk key initiates a DIRECT PA. The PTT key also validates special selected PAs and
establishes also a communication link. It has a backlight illumination and gives a tactile feedback.
- The earphone is used to distribute clear acoustic signals without distortion and without background
noise. When you hook on the handset, the handset is in a standby mode with minimized power
consumption. If the handset is not in its bracket it is connected to the electrical power.
UAE A380 05-10 P 8/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
APPEARANCE AND DESCRIPTION OF THE COCKPIT HANDSET L1
Cockpit Handset
UAE A380 05-10 P 9/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
APPEARANCE AND DESCRIPTION OF THE CABIN HANDSET

Cabin Handset
HANDSET DISPLAY EXPLANATION

Handset Display Explanation
UAE A380 05-10 P 10/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
HANDSET PHILOSOPHY
Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO PERFORM AN EMER CALL

In order to perform an EMER call, push the EMER key.
This will address every other handset including the Cockpit handset. Every handset can take part in the
communication (similar to a CONF call).
Keys for an EMER Call
HOW TO PERFORM A SIMPLE CALL

In order to perform a direct call:
1. Press the relevant function key (PRIO, CAPT, CONF, PURS)
2. Press SEND key.
UAE A380 05-10 P 11/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Keys for a Simple Call
HOW TO PERFORM A COMBINED CALL

All function keys can be used together with all other keys. Dialling possibilities are shown on the
display.
UAE A380 05-10 P 12/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Combined Calls
In order to perform a combined call:

1. Press the relevant function keys
2. Press the relevant softkey (repeat as many times as needed)
Note: Softmenus are proposed above the softkeys.
3. Press SEND key.
PRIO CONCEPT
The PRIO key allows to perform a higher priority call or a PA and will be indicated as such. A PRIO call
can interrupt lower priority calls.
Priority calls are:
1. Level 0: Emergency Calls
2. Level 1: Security Calls (optional)
3. Level 2: Priority Calls
4. Level 3: Priority Purser Calls
5. Level 4: Conference Calls
6. Level 5: Normal Calls.
UAE A380 05-10 P 13/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
PRIO Concept
UAE A380 05-10 P 14/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
QUICK REFERENCE TO PASSENGER ADDRESS

Applicable to: ALL
PA ON BOTH DECKS
Press the PTT key.
PA on Both Decks
Note: The PA will be distributed on all decks (including the Crew Rest Compartments).
PA ON THE CURRENT DECK
1. Press the PA key
2. Press and hold the PTT key.
UAE A380 05-10 P 15/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
PA on the Current Deck
Note: The PA will be distributed on the current deck.
UAE A380 05-10 P 16/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
QUICK REFERENCE TO CABIN INTERPHONE CALL

Applicable to: ALL
SIMPLE CABIN INTERPHONE CALL

In order to perform a simple Captain Call:
1. Press the CAPT key.
2. Press the SEND key.
Simple Cabin Interphone Call
COMBINED CABIN INTERPHONE CALL

In order to perform a combined Call:
1. Press the relevant function keys.
2. Press the relevant softkey (repeat as many times as needed)
Note: Softmenus are proposed above the softkeys.
3. Press the SEND key.
UAE A380 05-10 P 17/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Combined Cabin Interphone Call
UAE A380 05-10 P 18/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
SOUNDS, LIGHT INDICATIONS, AND CHIMES

Applicable to: ALL
THE POSSIBLE SOUNDS

The possible sound types are listed below.
Sound Type Musical Note Name Frequency [Hz]

A g' Lo II 392
B b' Lo I 494
C d'' Hi I 587
D g'' Hi II 784
E a' 440
F c'' 523
G f'' 698
H a'' 880
I c''' 1047
K e''' 1318
CHIMES AND LIGHT INDICATIONS

The cabin and flight crew interphone system allows the telephone communication between all
attendant stations and the cockpit. The communication is supported by the following chimes and light
indications:
Chime
Function Chime Lights on the ACP Chime
Sequence
Passenger Call: Blue
Passenger Light, Steady
Passenger Chime Sequence:
Address Attention A-C-B Passenger Call from
Address A-C-B
Chime Lavatory: Amber Light,
Steady
Emergency Calls
C-B / C-B / Chime Sequence: C-B
Cabin Interphone Conference Calls Pink Light, Flashing
C-B / C-B / C-B
Normal Calls
UAE A380 05-10 P 19/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Purser Call from

Cockpit: Pink Light,
Flashing Chime Sequence:
Cabin Interphone Purser Calls D-C-B
Purser Call from D-C-B
Cabin: Pink Light,
Steady
Seatrow Call: Blue
Seatrow Call
Light, Steady
Passenger Calls Lavatory Call C Chime Sequence: C
Lavatory Call: Amber
Attendant Call
Light, Steady
No Smoking
Passenger Lighted Return to Cabin
B Amber Light, Steady Chime Sequence: B
Signs Fasten Seat Belt
Return to Seat
Chime Sequence:
Waste Rinse Valve Failure A-A-A Amber Light, Flashing
A-A-A
Chime Sequence:
Smoke Alert Smoke Detected A-A-A Amber Light, Flashing
A-A-A
Cockpit to Cabin Chime Sequence:
ECAS K-K-K-K Pink Light, Flashing
Alert K-K-K-K
Decompression Alert Cabin Chime Sequence:
D-D-D-D Pink Light, Flashing
Alert Decompression D-D-D-D-...
Low Air Flow Chime Sequence:
Low Air Flow Alert H-H-H-H Pink Light, Flashing
Condition H-H-H-H-...
Chime Sequence:
Wake Up Wake Up Chime A-A-A-A
A-A-A-A
Cabin
Cabin Decompression
Emergency Decompression Text Pink Light, Flashing
Announcement
Announcement
Evacuation EVAC EVAC Chime Sequence:
Emergency Pink Light, Flashing
Chime Chime EVAC Chime
UAE A380 05-10 P 20/20

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PA SYSTEM
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ON THE PASSENGER ADDRESS SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
The Passenger Address (PA) system is used as a one-way voice communication between the cockpit
crew, the cabin crew and the passengers. The passenger address system distributes the PA related
announcements from the cockpit, the attendant stations, the Pre-recorded Announcements and
Boarding Music (PRAM) and the Video Control Unit (VCU) to all assigned passenger loudspeakers.
The communication is possible over all decks of the aircraft.
Within the PA system the cabin loudspeakers are assigned to the different announcement modes. L2
Audio signals from the IPRAM and other external sources can be distributed via the PA system. The L1
different audio signals are transmitted from the related audio source to the passenger loudspeakers in
the cabin. The PA system provides a number of independent audio channels for distribution of various
PA announcements in different areas (zones/rooms) at the same time.
Different inputs from other aircraft systems control the volume of the PA audio output in order to make
the PA signal easy to understand.
Refer to PA from the Cockpit via Cockpit Handset
Refer to PA from the Cabin via Cabin Handset
Refer to Operation of PA System.
UAE A380 05-20-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PA SYSTEM
General
A380
UAE A380 05-20-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PA SYSTEM
PA from Cabin
A380
VIA CABIN HANDSET

Applicable to: ALL
When a crewmember makes a PA via the cabin handset the audio signal is transmitted to the director
which distributes the signal to the loudspeakers. In addition, the signal is transmitted from the director
to the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system.
Refer to PA from the Cockpit via Cockpit Handset
Refer to PA Functional and Source Priorities
Refer to PA Settings.
PASSENGER ADDRESS – FUNCTIONAL AND SOURCE PRIORITIES

The priority of a PA depends primarily on the function and secondarily on the source.
1 Functional The PA functions have different functional priorities.

Priorities of The PA function with the higher functional priority overrides the function with lower
Interphone Calls functional priority.
1. PA from the AMU
2. Direct PA
3. Priority PA
4. Normal PA
2 Source Priorities The PA sources have different priorities. A source with a higher PA priority interrupts
of Interphone a PA from a source with a lower priority. Only the announcement from the source
Calls with the higher priority is heard.
1 AMU
2 Cockpit Handset
3 Cabin Handset (assigned to Prio 1)
7 External PA Source (assigned to Prio 5)
UAE A380 05-20-20 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PA SYSTEM
PA from Cabin
A380
3 Resetting If the PA function is initiated by the function keys on the handset, the function is
selected PA cancelled after hooking the handset on to the cradle or by pushing the reset button
functions on the handset. If the function is initiated by pushing the PTT, release of the PTT
cancels the function.
4 Attention chimes There is the possibility that a selected PA function generates a chime for the related
loudspeakers.
5 PA indications Dial and status information related to PA system functions is displayed on the
respective Attendant Indication Panel (AIP).
6 Gain adjustment In case of low cabin pressure or engine on (high oil pressure) the volume of a PA is
increased. The volume is also increased in case of a data bus failure (top line). If a
cabin handset is in use, the volume of the PA in the respective handset area is
decreased to avoid a feedback.
UAE A380 05-20-20 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PA SYSTEM
PA from Cabin
A380
PA FUNCTIONAL AND SOURCE PRIORITIES

The priority of a PA depends primarily on the function and secondarily on the source.
1 Functional The PA functions have different functional priorities.

Priorities of The PA function with the higher functional priority overrides the function with lower
Interphone Calls functional priority.
1. PA from the AMU
2. Direct PA
3. Priority PA
4. Normal PA
2 Source PrioritiesThe PA sources have different priorities. A source with a higher PA priority interrupts
of Interphone a PA from a source with a lower priority. Only the announcement from the source
Calls with the higher priority is heard.
1 AMU
2 Cockpit Handset
3 Resetting If the PA function is initiated by the function keys on the handset, the function is
selected PA cancelled after hooking the handset on to the cradle or by pushing the reset button
functions on the handset. If the function is initiated by pushing the PTT, release of the PTT
cancels the function.
4 Attention chimes The chime for the PA attention single chime is deactivated for the related
loudspeakers.
5 PA indications Dial and status information related to PA system functions is displayed on the
respective Attendant Indication Panel (AIP).
6 Gain adjustment In case of low cabin pressure or engine on (high oil pressure) the volume of a PA is
increased. The volume is also increased in case of a data bus failure (top line). If a
cabin handset is in use, the volume of the PA in the respective handset area is
decreased to avoid a feedback.
UAE A380 05-20-20 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PA SYSTEM
PA from Cabin
A380
PASSENGER ADDRESS SETTINGS

Applicable to: ALL
ONLINE LOUDSPEAKER LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

The cabin crew can adjust the volume level of the loudspeaker announcements and chimes using the
online loudspeaker level adjustment function. The adjustment is possible within fixed limits. The cabin
crew can adjust different loudspeaker groups individually.
This function is provided by a FAP screen which allows the user to modify the loudspeaker volumes L2
individually by:
- Zone
- Room
- Cabin crew area
- Lavatory or cabin zone
as defined in the CAM. It is protected by an access code.
The following loudspeaker groups show on the FAP and can be adjusted independently: L1
- Rooms from the upper deck / main deck / lower deck

- Cabin crew areas from the upper deck / main deck / lower deck.
Related to the CAM configuration all other loudspeakers can be adjusted in groups of L2
- Variable upper deck cabin zones

- Variable main deck cabin zones
or
- Fixed upper deck cabin zones
- Fixed main deck cabin zones.
UAE A380 05-20-20 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PA SYSTEM
PA from Cabin
A380
OPERATION OF THE PASSENGER ADDRESS SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) FROM THE CABIN

The following table shows the possibilities to make PAs. The handset must be in standby mode.
How to make ... Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Step 5:

Direct PA Push
PTT
PA to Current Deck Push PA Push
PTT
PA to Selected Push PA Push DECK until Push
Deck the desired deck is PTT
selected
PA to All Decks Push PA Push ALL Push
PTT
PA to Selected Push PA Push a numeric Push
Deck, key 1, .., 6 PTT
in Area a
PA to Selected Push PA Push a numeric Push the + key Push a Push
Deck, key 1, .., 6 numeric key PTT
in Area a + Area b 1, ..., 6
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) TO THE CREW REST COMPARTMENTS (CRC)

The following table shows the possibilities to make PAs to Crew Rest Compartments (CRC). The
handset must be in standby mode.

PA to CRC Push PA Push REST Push DECK until the desired Push
On the Selected deck is selected PTT
Deck
PA to CRC Push PA Push REST Push ALL DECKS Push
On all Decks PTT
Prio PA Push PRIO Push
ALL Zones + CRC PTT
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) FROM THE COCKPIT

Use of the A380 RMP, in combination with the cockpit handset:
UAE A380 05-20-20 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PA SYSTEM
PA from Cabin
A380
- Select Transmission and Reception on the CAB channel

- Pick up the cockpit handset
- Dial and trigger the desired call on the cockpit handset
- Hang up the cockpit handset
- Once the call is accepted by the cabin station, put RAD/INT into the RAD position.
RAD/INT on the RMP
UAE A380 05-20-20 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PA SYSTEM
PA from Cockpit
A380
PASSENGER ADDRESS FROM THE COCKPIT VIA THE COCKPIT HANDSET

Applicable to: ALL
A passenger address (PA) can be initiated from the cockpit using the cockpit handset.
The audio signal is transmitted from the cockpit handset directly to the director which transmits the
signal to the louspeakers. In addition, the signal is transmitted from the director to the In-Flight
Entertainment (IFE) system.
Refer to PA from the Cockpit via Audio Equipment
Refer to PA Monitoring
Refer to PA from the Cabin via Cabin Handset.
Refer to 02-110-20 CommunicationsTypical Communication Panels Location.
PASSENGER ADDRESS FROM THE COCKPIT VIA THE AUDIO EQUIPMENT

Applicable to: ALL
A PA can be initiated from the cockpit using the equipment that is connected to the Audio Management
Unit (AMU) (boomset, microphone and oxygen mask).
The audio signal is transmitted from the audio equipment that is connected to the AMU, via the AMS, to
the director. In addition, the signal is transmitted from the director to the In-Flight Entertainment system
(IFE).
Refer to PA Announcement from the cockpit via the Cockpit Handset
Refer to 02-110-20 CommunicationsTypical Communication Panels Location.
UAE A380 05-20-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Jul-09
PA SYSTEM
PA from Cockpit
A380
PASSENGER ADDRESS MONITORING

Applicable to: ALL
The flight crew can monitor the current PA using the Cockpit Handset. Press the PA key to monitor the
current PA.
The flight crew can monitor the present PA with the highest priority in the cabin via the AMU by turning
the PA reception knob on the RMP.
Refer to PA Announcement from the Cockpit via Audio Equipment.
Turning the PA knob clockwise or counterclockwise controls the volume of the announcement.
Selecting any another function will stop the PA monitoring procedure.
INT, CAB, and PA on the RMP
UAE A380 05-20-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN INTERPHONE
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE CABIN INTERPHONE

Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Interphone system provides communication among the Cabin Interphone stations and also
between the Cabin Interphone stations and the cockpit.
Because the communication links are established independently, a certain number of communication
links can exist at the same time. Also, conference modes are possible, where more than two
interphone sources take part in the communication.
The priority depends primarily on the source and secondarily on the function.
1. Source priorities
The interphone sources have different priorities. A source with a higher priority interrupts a link to
an interphone station with a lower priority. A source with a higher priority that selects a function with
a lower priority also interrupts an existing link.
2. Functional priorities
The interphone functions have different priorities. Every function will override a function with a lower
priority. In general, emergency calls have the highest priority. Emergency calls and Priority Captain
calls initiated from lower sources will interrupt existing links initiated from sources with higher
priority.
Note: In certain areas, two adjacent handsets may be connected in parallel.
The cabin crewmembers cannot use these handsets independently.
The handsets operate on a first come - first served basis: If a call is in progress, the first
handset has control over the call. The second handset is able to participate in the call, but it
cannot end this call or start a new call/PA.
The exception is the emergency call. The cabin crewmembers can initiate it from either
handset.
Refer to Calls from the Cockpit via CALLS Panel and Audio Equipment.
Refer to Calls from the Cabin — Emergency.
Refer to Operation of Cabin Interphone System.
UAE A380 05-30-10 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Jul-14
CABIN INTERPHONE
General
A380
CABIN INTERPHONE CALL TO THE COCKPIT, OR INCLUDING THE COCKPIT

Temporary DU: 00025639.0001001
Applicable to: ALL
CABIN INTERPHONE MISBEHAVIOR IN FLIGHT

SUMMARY
Due to a deviation of CIDS, an interphone call from the cabin may not be indicated in the cockpit, in
some cases. This issue occurs in flight only.
EXPLANATION
After the flight crew has initiated an interphone call from the cockpit CALLS Panel, the first cabin
interphone call to the cockpit - or including the cockpit - is not indicated in the cockpit. This issue
happens with the following interphone calls from the cabin: CAPT, PRIO CAPT, EMER, CONF ALL.
MITIGATION
When the cabin crew initiates an interphone call to the cockpit -or including the cockpit - and if there
is no answer from the cockpit, the cabin crew must reset the call using the handset RED RESET
key, and initiate the call again.
CABIN INTERPHONE MISBEHAVIOR ON GROUND
SUMMARY
Due to a deviation of CIDS, in some cases, when a crew calls the cockpit from any handset in the
cabin, the cockpit may be indicated BUSY on the handset, despite the cockpit interphone is not
busy. This issue occurs on ground only.
EXPLANATION
After the flight crew has initiated an interphone call from the cockpit CALLS Panel to any station in
the cabin, and in the case the called station does not answer, the cockpit will be indicated BUSY on
all cabin handsets during a fixed duration of 5 min.
MITIGATION
If the Cockpit is wrongly indicated "BUSY" on the cabin handset, it is possible to reach the cockpit
from any station in the cabin, using a call of higher priority (PRIO CAPT or EMER).
UAE A380 05-30-10 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Jul-14
CABIN INTERPHONE
Calls from Cabin
A380
OPERATION OF THE CABIN INTERPHONE SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO MAKE CABIN INTERPHONE CALLS

The following table shows the possibilities to make Cabin Interphone Calls. The handset must be in
standby mode.

Call to Captain Push CAPT Push
SEND
Call to Cabin Crew Push REST Push DECK until the Push
Rest Area on the desired deck is selected SEND
Selected Deck
Call to all Cabin Push REST Push ALL Push
Crew Rest Areas SEND
Call to Door Area n Push DECK until the Push a numeric key 1, Push LH / RH until the Push
on the Selected desired deck is .., 6 until the desired desired side is SEND
Deck selected area is selected selected
Call to Door Area n Push a numeric key Push LH / RH until the Push
on the Current 1, .., 6 until the desired side is selected SEND
Deck desired area is
selected
HOW TO MAKE CABIN INTERPHONE CONFERENCE CALLS

The following table shows the possibilities to make Cabin Interphone Conference Calls. The handset
must be in standby mode.
How to make ... Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:

Conference Calls Push CONF Push
to the Current SEND
Deck (no CRCs)
Conference Calls Push CONF Push DECK until the respective Push
to a selected deck deck is selected SEND
(UD / MD) (no Push DECK until the desired deck Push CONF Push
CRCs) is selected SEND
Conference Calls Push CONF Push ALL Push
(all Cabin) SEND
UAE A380 05-30-20 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN INTERPHONE
Calls from Cabin
A380
EMERGENCY CALL
Applicable to: ALL
In order to make an EMER Call the Cabin Crew must simply push the EMER key on any handset.
Every other Cabin Crew member can pick up a handset and participate in the conversation (similar to a
CONF Call).
Refer to Calls from the Cockpit via CALLS Panel and Audio Equipment
Refer to Transfer/Reset a Call
Refer to Call Indications/Chimes/Priorities.
PRIO CALLS
Applicable to: ALL
The following table shows how to make Priority Calls. The handset must be in standby mode.
How to make ... Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:

Push PRIO Push CAPT Push SEND
Prio Call Captain
Push CAPT Push PRIO Push SEND
Push PRIO Push PURS Push SEND
Prio Call Chief Purser
Push PURS Push PRIO Push SEND
Prio Call Cabin Push PRIO Push CONF Push SEND
Conference (no CRC) Push CONF Push PRIO Push SEND
UAE A380 05-30-20 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN INTERPHONE
Calls from Cabin
A380
ANSWERING/TRANSFERRING/REJECTING CALLS
Applicable to: ALL
During an interphone communication audio signals are transmitted from the cabin handset to the
cockpit equipment. The communication is initiated via the keypad on the cabin handsets.
ANSWERING CALLS
The following table shows how to answer calls.
How to answer calls Condition Action

Standby Take off the handset
Handset is on hook
Incoming Call
Dialing in progress Push ACCEPT or
Incoming call SEND
Handset is off hook
Call in progress Call is automatically
Incoming EMER call answered
PROCESSING CALLS (CALL DIVERT, PARTY ADD)

Processing a call will result in a Normal Interphone Dialing. The following options are available:
How to make ... Condition Action

Call Divert Incoming Call Accepted 1. Push DIV
After activation of this function the respective call Current Handset into 2. Dial the desired
function can be redirected to any other station. Standby station.
Party Add All party active 1. Push ADD
The Party Call function enables to invite another 2. Dial the desired
party to an established communication link. station.
As an option, there is a Call Intercept Function, which allows the purser to intercept calls from any
assigned cabin handset with respective dialing codes.
REJECTING CALLS
Condition Action
How to reject calls Handset off hook — Standby Push RESET
How to reject calls Call in progress — Incoming Push REJECT
Call
The interphone communication is reset when the second to last participant has terminated the link by
hooking-on the handset or after the initiating source has dialled the reset command.
UAE A380 05-30-20 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN INTERPHONE
Calls from Cabin
A380
An established link is also reset when all participating sources have reset the function. Activated calls
are automatically cancelled after a certain time, if no requested handset has accepted the call.
CALL INDICATIONS/CHIMES/PRIORITIES
INDICATIONS
Visual interphone call annunciations in the cabin are made by indication of respective messages on the
related AIPs. The respective light segments in the ACPs also come on. The cabin crew is also
informed about the status of the communication mode (e. g. call activated, accepted, engaged or
cancelled) via messages which are displayed at each interphone station.
Additional full telephone signaling is provided at the audio output of the affected interphone audio
equipment.
CALL CHIMES
For aural annunciation in the cabin, certain tone sequences (e. g. chimes) are emitted in the respective
cabin areas via the loudspeakers.
The call annunciation from the cockpit is an annunciation which is activated by the audio management
system of the cockpit.
The chimes are described here: Refer to 05-10 Sounds, Light Indications, and Chimes.
CALL INDICATIONS/CHIMES/PRIORITIES
INDICATIONS
Visual interphone call annunciations in the cabin are made by indication of respective messages on the
related AIPs. The respective light segments in the ACPs also come on. The cabin crew is also
informed about the status of the communication mode (e. g. call activated, accepted, engaged or
cancelled) via messages which are displayed at each interphone station.
Additional full telephone signaling is provided at the audio output of the affected interphone audio
equipment.
CALL CHIMES
For aural annunciation in the cabin, certain tone sequences (e. g. chimes) are emitted in the respective
cabin areas via the loudspeakers.
The call annunciation from the cockpit is deactivated.
The chimes are described here: Refer to 05-10 Sounds, Light Indications, and Chimes.
UAE A380 05-30-20 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN INTERPHONE
Calls from Cockpit
A380
VIA CALLS PANEL AND AUDIO EQUIPMENT

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin and flight crew interphone system allows telephone communication between all cabin crew
stations and the cockpit. There can be one or more links initialized at the same time. In conference
mode communication is possible between more than two interphone stations.
- Interphone functions from cabin
During an interphone communication audio signals are transmitted from the cabin handset to the
cockpit equipment. The communication is initiated by the keypad on the handset.
- Conference mode
Communication between more than two interphone sources is called a conference call. Several
different conference calls are possible at the same time. A conference call can be made between
different interphone sources on each deck but also between different interphone sources on all
three decks.
- Interphone monitoring
If the INTPH monitoring is enabled, the INTPH function with the high function with the highest
priority can be monitored from the cockpit (via the Audio Management Unit (AMU)).
Note: This function is not available if the Service Interphone is active.
Refer to Calls from the Cockpit via Cockpit Handset.
Refer to Calls from the Cabin — Emergency.
VIA COCKPIT HANDSET

Applicable to: ALL
Interphone functions from the cockpit

From the cockpit, an interphone communication can be initiated either by using the call keys on the
cockpit call panel, the cockpit handset, or the equipment connected to the Audio Management Unit
(boomset, microphone and oxygen mask). The audio signal is transmitted from the cockpit handset to
the handset of the selected cabin crew station.
UAE A380 05-30-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN INTERPHONE
Calls from Cockpit
A380
UAE A380 05-30-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN INTERPHONE
A380
CABIN INTERPHONE LOCKED

Applicable to: ALL
It is not possible to use the cabin interphone
YES NO
1. When unhooking the handset, it is not possible to dial. Is it possible to use
the PA function? Go to 2 Go to 4
2. Using the PA, request all cabin crewmembers to check if their interphone
handset is correctly placed in its cradle. Does the interphone system work
now? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. The cabin interphone system is working again.
logbook. END END
4. The cabin interphone system is inoperative.
Enter the failure into the cabin logbook. END END
UAE A380 05-30-40 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN INTERPHONE
A380
UAE A380 05-30-40 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Jul-09
SERVICE INTERPHONE
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ON SERVICE INTERPHONE

Applicable to: ALL
The Service Interphone SVCE INTPH system allows telephone communication between the ground
crew, flight crew and the cabin crew when the aircraft is on ground.
The service personnel use them to speak with each other if their boomsets are connected to the jacks. L2
The flight crew and/or the cabin crew is also able to speak with the connected service personnel
through the acoustical equipment in the cockpit or the attendant handsets in the cabin. Different
indications in the cockpit and in the cabin display the status of the active function.
L1
Refer to Location of the Jacks
Refer to System Operation
Refer to Operation of the Service Interphone.
UAE A380 05-40-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
SERVICE INTERPHONE
General
A380
UAE A380 05-40-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
SERVICE INTERPHONE
Location
A380
LOCATION OF THE JACKS

Applicable to: ALL
The following illustration shows the jacks of the aircraft.

Location of the Jacks
(1) FWD Avionics Compartment

(2) Emergency Avionics Compartment
(3) Hydraulic Compartment
(4) Refuel Panel
UAE A380 05-40-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
SERVICE INTERPHONE
Location
A380
(5) APU
(6) THS Actuator
(7) Bulk Cargo Door
(8) Aft Cargo Compartment
(9) Air Conditioning Bay
(10) FWD Cargo Compartment
(11) Aft Avionics Compartment
(12) Nose Landing Gear
(13) Engine 1, 2, 3, 4.
Note: Jacks on one side of the aircraft are also on the opposite side of the aircraft (e. g. the jacks on
the engines).
UAE A380 05-40-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
SERVICE INTERPHONE
A380
SYSTEM OPERATION OF THE SERVICE INTERPHONE

Applicable to: ALL
MANUAL ACTIVATION L2
For a manual activation of the Service Interphone press the Service Interphone Override sw in the
cockpit. When the service interphone is activated manually, a related indication comes on in the
cockpit.
Refer to Operation of the Service Interphone.
COMMUNICATION LINK L1
The service interphone system always uses the conference mode.

The service interphone signal from the ground crew is sent to the Audio Management Unit (AMU). L2
The flight crew uses the equipment that is connected to the AMU (boomset, microphone and oxygen L1
mask) to make Service Interphone calls.

Both audio signals are mixed to form the conference mode.
Any interphone source that also uses the Service Interphone function connects to the conference L2
mode.
L1
Refer to Cockpit to Ground Crew Calls
Refer to Ground Crew to Cockpit Calls.
INDICATIONS
When the Service Interphone function is active and a boomset is connected to the ground service
jacks, the related AIPs display related messages.
RESET OF SERVICE INTERPHONE FUNCTIONS
The link between the ground crew source and the AMU is reset when the Service Interphone function
is automatically or manually switched to the interactive mode. This occurs when the landing gear is not
on ground or when the Service Interphone Override sw is set to OFF and no external power is
available.
A link from any cabin handset to the ground crew boomset is reset when the handset is hung up or
when the reset pushbutton is pressed.
UAE A380 05-40-30 P 1/4

CCOM 03-Jul-09
SERVICE INTERPHONE
A380
COCKPIT TO GROUND CREW CALLS

Applicable to: ALL
The flight crew is able to communicate with ground stations and with cabin crew members using the
interphone system. In the cockpit, the main interface for communication is the Radio Management
Panel (RMP), which acts as a remote control of the Audio Management Unit (AMU).
In addition to the described Service Interphone system, there is a call system installed which allows the
cockpit crew to get the attention of the ground service personnel.
In order to get the attention of the ground crew, the flight crew must press the MECH pushbutton. An
external horn will be heard. It is located in the nose gear well. Additionally, the blue cockpit call
indicator light comes on (this is located near to the ground power receptacle).
If the MECH pushbutton-switch is released the external horn stops, but the indicator light remains on.
In order to reset this light, the HORN RESET pushbutton-switch must be pushed and released.
The following warnings are provided through the external horn:
-- APU FIRE on ground
-- BLOWERS LOW FLOW on ground with engines shut down
-- ADIRS ON BAT on ground
-- BAT FEED WARN on ground.
GROUND CREW TO COCKPIT CALLS

Applicable to: ALL
The ground crew can perform cockpit calls using the Service Interphone panels located on the outside
of the aircraft.
UAE A380 05-40-30 P 2/4

CCOM 03-Jul-09
SERVICE INTERPHONE
A380
Service Interphone Panel
OPERATION OF THE SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO MAKE SERVICE INTERPHONE CALLS

The cabin crew can make Service Interphone Calls ONLY when the aircraft is on ground. Proceed
conforming the following steps:
1. Step 1: Push the MISC key until Service Interphone Menu is visible
2. Step 2: Push SERVICE INTERPHONE
3. Step 3: Push OK
4. Step 4: Push SEND.
UAE A380 05-40-30 P 3/4

CCOM 03-Jul-09
SERVICE INTERPHONE
A380
UAE A380 05-40-30 P 4/4

CCOM 03-Jul-09
PASSENGER CALL SYSTEM
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ON PASSENGER CALL SYSTEM

The PAX call system controls the passenger call activation, the lighting of the PAX call-light and the
activation of the call-chime. Passengers can initiate calls from the passenger seats and from the
lavatories.
Passenger calls trigger different acoustic and visual signals in the aircraft cabin.
Refer to PAX Call from a Seat Row via PSU.
Refer to PAX Call from a Lavatory via LSU.
Refer to Reset of a PAX Call via FAP.
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE PAX CALL SYSTEM

The PAX call system controls the passenger call activation, the lighting of the PAX call-light and the
activation of the call-chime. Passengers can initiate calls from the passenger seats and from the
lavatories.
Passenger calls trigger different visual signals in the aircraft cabin.
Refer to PAX Call from a Seat Row via PSU.
Refer to PAX Call from a Lavatory via LSU.
UAE A380 05-50-10 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
General
A380
UAE A380 05-50-10 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
Pax Call from a Seatrow
A380
CALLS INITIATED VIA PSU

Applicable to: ALL
INITIALIZATION
Passengers initiate calls, when they press a passenger call pushbutton. Passenger call pushbuttons
are installed near to each seat, in each lavatory and at each cabin crew station. The call can either be
initiated from the Passenger Service Unit (PSU) or from the Passenger Control Unit (PCU), that is part
of the IFE system. Pressing the same pushbutton again will reset the call.
Refer to PAX Call from a Seat Row — via PCU.
CALL RESET FROM SEATS, ATTENDANT STATIONS AND LAVATORIES
If passengers press the call pushbutton a second time, the call indications will be reset. The related call
light and the related AIP messages will go off. The related ACP light will go off, if there are no other
active calls in the ACP related area.
Refer to PAX Call from a Lavatory — via LSU.
Refer to Reset of a PAX Call — via FAP.
CALLS INITIATED VIA PCU

Applicable to: ALL
INITIALIZATION
Passengers initiate calls, when they press a passenger call pushbutton. Passenger call pushbuttons
are installed near to each seat, in each lavatory and at each cabin crew station. The call can either be
initiated from the Passenger Service Unit (PSU) or from the Passenger Control Unit (PCU), that is part
of the IFE system. Pressing the same pushbutton again will reset the call.
Refer to PAX Call from a Seat Row — via PSU.
Refer to PAX Call from a Lavatory — via LSU.
UAE A380 05-50-20 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
INDICATIONS OF THIS CALL

INDICATION
After a call activation information appears on the related visual attention getters (ACP segments and
messages on the AIP).
CHIME
A call chime will be heard from all loudspeakers in the related cabin area after every call activation. A
maximum number of pending (not reset) PAX call chimes can be programmed in the database.
CHIME INHIBITION
The cabin crew can prevent the activation of passenger call chimes with the help of inhibit commands
from the FAP and from the mini FAP. Via the related pushbuttons on the FAP or mini FAP the chime
can be inhibited per zone or for all zones. If assigned in the CAM, it is possible to prevent a new chime
when a certain number of calls are pending.
INDICATIONS OF THIS CALL

INDICATION
After a call activation information appears on the related visual attention getters (ACP segments and
messages on the AIP).
CHIME
The call chimes via all attendant and passenger compartment loudspeakers of the respective zones
are deactivated.
UAE A380 05-50-20 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
RESET OF A PASSENGER CALL VIA FAP AND MINI FAP

Applicable to: ALL
CALL RESET FROM FAP, MINI FAP

The cabin crew can reset passenger calls from the FAP and from the mini FAP via the related reset
commands. The reset commands can be applied for each cabin zone individually.
The passenger call function provides the following call reset features:
- Centralized call reset features
from the FAP, mini FAP or AAP
Refer to Reset of a PAX Call via AAP.
- Decentralized call reset features
from the seats or from the lavatories.
CALL INHIBITION
It is also possible to completely prevent a passenger seat from the possibility to activate a call, e.g. for
night flights. This can be done on the seat setting page of the FAP. All visual indications remain.
Individual seats may be inhibited from pax call functionality by the cabin programming function. All
inhibitions are reset when the aircraft changes from the flight phase to the landing phase.
VIA AAP
Applicable to: ALL
CALL RESET FROM FAP, MINI FAP AND AAP

The passenger call function provides the following call reset features:
- Centralized call reset features
from the FAP, mini FAP or AAP
- Decentralized call reset features
from the seats or from the lavatories.
UAE A380 05-50-20 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
UAE A380 05-50-20 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
Pax Call from a Lavatory
A380
CALLS INITIATED VIA LSU

Applicable to: ALL
CALL RESET FROM SEATS, CABIN CREW STATIONS AND LAVATORIES

If passengers press the call pushbutton for a second time, the call indications will be reset.
The related call light and the related AIP messages will go off.
The related ACP light will go off, if there are no other active calls in the ACP related area.
Refer to PAX Call from a Seatrow — via PSU.
UAE A380 05-50-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Jul-09
Pax Call from a Lavatory
A380
UAE A380 05-50-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
06-10 Audio/Cabin Music

06-10-10 General
General Information about the Cabin Music Function.......................................................................... 1
06-10-20 Function Access

Position of the CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP ................................................................................. 1
Position of the CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP.......................................................................... 2

06-10-30-10 AUDIO / CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP
CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP......................................................................................................... 1
CABIN MUSIC Page Initialization on the FAP ..................................................................................... 4
How to Monitor and Control the Boarding Music from the FAP ........................................................... 5
How to Monitor and Control the Lavatory Music from the FAP............................................................ 7
How to Monitor and Control the Lighting Scenario Music from the FAP.............................................. 9
Failure Messages on the FAP ........................................................................................................... 11
06-10-30-20 AUDIO / CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP

CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP ................................................................................................. 1
CABIN MUSIC Page Initialization on the Mini FAP.............................................................................. 3
How to Monitor and Control the Boarding Music from the Mini FAP.................................................... 4
Failure Messages on the Mini FAP...................................................................................................... 6
06-20 Pre-Recorded Announcements

06-20-10 General
General Information about Prerecorded Announcements ................................................................... 1

Position of the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS Page on the FAP ......................................... 1

06-20-30-10 PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT Page on the FAP
PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS Page on the FAP ................................................................. 1
PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS Page Initialization on the FAP ............................................. 4
How to Monitor and Control the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS from the FAP..................... 4
Failure Message on the PRE-ANNOUNCEMENT Page on the FAP................................................... 6
UAE A380 06-TOC P 1/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
06-30 Lights
06-30-10 Cabin Lighting System
06-30-10-10 General
Types of Cabin Light ............................................................................................................................1
Definition of Illuminated Areas..............................................................................................................2
Cabin Lighting System and Its Elements..............................................................................................3
Cabin Lighting System Control.............................................................................................................4
General Aspects of Cabin Lighting Control ..........................................................................................5

Position of the Cabin Lighting Pages on the FAP ................................................................................1
Position of the CABIN LIGHTING Page on the Mini FAP.....................................................................3

06-30-10-30-10 Cabin Lighting System Control via FAP
FAP Scenario Control...........................................................................................................................1
06-30-10-30-20 Cabin Lighting System Control via Mini FAP

Mini FAP Scenario Control...................................................................................................................1
06-30-10-30-30 Cabin Lighting System Control via AAP

AAP Cabin Lighting Functions..............................................................................................................1
06-30-10-30-40 General Cabin Illumination

Cabin Lighting Elements Overview ......................................................................................................1
General Cabin Settings - FAP Scenario Control ..................................................................................3
06-30-10-30-50 Entry Area Illumination

Entry Area Illumination Control Via FAP / Mini FAP.............................................................................1
How to Control the Entry Area Illumination via FAP / Mini FAP ...........................................................2
06-30-10-30-60 Cabin Zone Illumination

Cabin Zone Illumination Control Via FAP / Mini FAP Scenario Control ...............................................1
How to Control Cabin Zone Illumination Via Scenario Control.............................................................3
06-30-10-30-70 Room Illumination

Crew Rest Area Illumination.................................................................................................................1
Lavatory Illumination ............................................................................................................................2
Galley Illumination................................................................................................................................4
Stairs Illumination.................................................................................................................................6
UAE A380 06-TOC P 2/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
06-30-10-30-80 Miscellaneous Lights

Work Lights.......................................................................................................................................... 1
Reading Lights..................................................................................................................................... 2
06-30-10-40 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP)

Lost Cabin Lighting Control from FAP ................................................................................................. 1
06-30-20 Emergency Lighting System

06-30-20-10 General
Emergency Lighting System - Overview.............................................................................................. 1
06-30-20-20 Location
Emergency Lighting System - Subsystems ......................................................................................... 1

Emergency Lighting - Exit Signs.......................................................................................................... 1
Emergency Lighting - Cabin Emergency Lights................................................................................... 9
Emergency Lighting - Emergency Escape Path marking System...................................................... 13
Overwing Emergency Light................................................................................................................ 13
Escape Slide Emergency Lights ........................................................................................................ 13
Emergency Lighting - System Control ............................................................................................... 14
Cockpit WayLight............................................................................................................................... 15
06-40 Doors/Slides
06-40-10 General
General Information about the DOORS / SLIDES Page...................................................................... 1
SYSTEM Deviation with operational impact ........................................................................................ 1

Position of the DOORS / SLIDES Page on the FAP ........................................................................... 1
DOORS / SLIDES Page on the FAP.................................................................................................... 1
06-40-40 Indications
Messages on the FAP ......................................................................................................................... 1
UAE A380 06-TOC P 3/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
06-50 Air Conditioning/Temperature Control

06-50-10 General
General Information about the Air Conditioning System / Temperature Control ..................................1
06-50-20 Location
Upper Deck Zones and Cabin Temperature Zones .............................................................................1
Main Deck Zones and Cabin Temperature Zones ...............................................................................2
Lower Deck Zones and Cabin Temperature Zones .............................................................................3

Position of the Air Conditioning Controls in the Cockpit .......................................................................1
Position of the TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP ..............................................................................2
General Information about Temperature Selection ..............................................................................1
Additional Air Outlets in the Cabin........................................................................................................2
Cabin Temperature Control from the Cockpit.......................................................................................3
Cabin Temperature Control from the Cabin .........................................................................................4
06-50-50 Operation
How to Set the Temperature for a Temperature Zone .........................................................................1
How to Correct the Temperature Value for All Zones ..........................................................................3
How to Reset the Cabin Temperature to the Predefined Value ...........................................................7

Temperature Control with an Inoperative Sensor.................................................................................1
How to Regulate Hot Air Blowing from Cabin Air Outlets.....................................................................3
06-60 Water/Waste
06-60-10 General
General Information about the Water/Waste System Functions ..........................................................1
06-60-20 Location
Location of the Water and Waste Tanks ..............................................................................................1

Position of the WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP ..............................................................................1
UAE A380 06-TOC P 4/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
06-60-40-10 Potable Water System
Potable Water System ......................................................................................................................... 1
06-60-40-20 Waste Disposal System

Waste Disposal System....................................................................................................................... 1
06-60-40-30 Air Supply System

Air Supply System ............................................................................................................................... 1
06-60-40-40 Water/Waste System Control via the FAP

Water/Waste System Control via the FAP........................................................................................... 1
WATER/WASTE All Decks Page......................................................................................................... 1
WATER/WASTE per Deck Page ......................................................................................................... 3
Control Functions on the WATER/WASTE FAP Page........................................................................ 4
06-60-50 Operation
How to Preselect the Water Quantity for a Flight................................................................................. 1
How to Auto-Flush All Toilets .............................................................................................................. 4
How to Shut Down the Water Supply via the FAP............................................................................... 7
How to Reactivate the Water Supply ................................................................................................ 12

FAP-Messages Related to the Vacuum System.................................................................................. 1
FAP-Messages Related to the Galleys................................................................................................ 3
FAP-Messages Related to the Lavatories ........................................................................................... 4
FAP-Messages Related to the Waste System..................................................................................... 6
FAP-Messages Related to the Potable Water System ........................................................................ 7
FAP-Messages Related to the ICE Protection System........................................................................ 8
06-70 Smoke Detection

06-70-10 General
General Information About the Smoke Detection (SD) System ........................................................... 1

Position of the Smoke Detection System on the FAP.......................................................................... 1
Position of the Smoke Detection System on the Mini FAP .................................................................. 2
UAE A380 06-TOC P 5/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
Description of the Smoke Detection System ........................................................................................1
SMOKE DETECTION Page on the FAP ..............................................................................................2
SMOKE DETECTION Page on the Mini FAP.......................................................................................5
Additional Smoke Indications in the Cabin ...........................................................................................8
06-80 Seat Settings

06-80-10 General
General Information about Seat Settings .............................................................................................1

Position of the SEAT SETTINGS Page on the FAP.............................................................................1

Passenger Call Settings.......................................................................................................................1
Reading Lights Settings .....................................................................................................................11
06-90 System Info

06-90-10 General
General Information about the SYSTEM INFO page ...........................................................................1

Position of the SYSTEM INFO Page on the FAP.................................................................................1
SYSTEM INFO Page............................................................................................................................1
SYSTEM INFO Page/Blue Card...........................................................................................................6
Indications on the SYSTEM INFO Page ..............................................................................................1
Messages on the Miscellaneous Indicator / System Info .....................................................................2
06-100 Cabin Status

06-100-10 General
General Information about the CABIN STATUS Page .........................................................................1

Position of CABIN STATUS Page on the FAP .....................................................................................1
UAE A380 06-TOC P 6/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
CABIN STATUS ALL Page.................................................................................................................. 1
CABIN STATUS per Deck Page.......................................................................................................... 2
06-110 Cabin Ready Signaling

06-110-10 General
General Information about the Cabin Ready Function......................................................................... 1

Position of the CABIN READY Page on the FAP ................................................................................ 1
CABIN READY Page on the FAP ........................................................................................................ 1
06-110-40 Operation
How to Signal CABIN READY on the FAP .......................................................................................... 1
06-120 Galley Cooling/Supplemental Cooling System

06-120-10 General
Galley Cooling - General ..................................................................................................................... 1

Position of the GALLEY COOLING Page on the FAP ......................................................................... 1
06-120-30-10 Galley Cooling Overview
Galley Cooling Overview ..................................................................................................................... 1
06-120-30-20 Galley Cooling Principles

Galley Cooling Principles..................................................................................................................... 1
06-120-30-30 Pre-Conditioning
Pre-Conditioning .................................................................................................................................. 1
06-120-30-40 Galley Cooling Controls

06-120-30-40-10 General Information about Galley Cooling Controls
General Information about Galley Cooling Controls ............................................................................ 1
UAE A380 06-TOC P 7/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
06-120-30-40-20 Cockpit Controls

Cockpit Controls...................................................................................................................................1
06-120-30-40-30 Cabin Controls

Galley Cooling Panel in the Galleys .....................................................................................................1
GALLEY COOLING Page on the FAP/Mini FAP..................................................................................2
06-120-40 Operation
How to Switch ON the Air Cooling Unit ................................................................................................1
How to activate the PRE-CONDITIONING Mode.................................................................................2
How to Switch OFF the Air Cooling Unit ..............................................................................................3
How to Stow Cooled Trolleys ...............................................................................................................4
Error Messages....................................................................................................................................1

SCS Reset after Complete System Failure ..........................................................................................1
06-130 IFE Power

06-130-10 General
General Information about the IFE and Seat Power Control Pages.....................................................1

Position of the IFE POWER Page on the FAP .....................................................................................1
IFE POWER - ALL Page ......................................................................................................................1
IFE POWER PAGE Access Code ........................................................................................................2
IFE POWER MAIN DECK Page ..........................................................................................................4
IFE POWER UPPER DECK Page ....................................................................................................10
IFE POWER LOWER DECK Page ....................................................................................................16
Indications on the FAP .........................................................................................................................1
06-130-50 Operation
How to Turn Off/On the Power of a Seat Power Group .......................................................................1
UAE A380 06-TOC P 8/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
How to Turn Off/On an IFE Power Group ............................................................................................ 4

How to Turn OFF/ON the Landscape Camera .................................................................................... 7
06-130-60 Function Recovery Procedures

Reset a GFI TRIPPED Message on the FAP ...................................................................................... 1
06-140 Floor Temperature Setting

06-140-10 General
Floor Temperature Setting................................................................................................................... 1
06-140-20 Location
Heated Floor Panels on the Main Deck ............................................................................................... 1
Heated Floor Panels on the Upper Deck ............................................................................................. 2

Position of the FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTINGS Page on the FAP ............................................. 1
Position of the HEATED FLOOR PANEL Page on the Mini FAP ........................................................ 1

Setting Temperature Values for the HFP on the FAP.......................................................................... 1
Setting Temperature Values on the Mini FAP...................................................................................... 4
06-150 Humidification/Cabin Heating/Dry Air Generation

06-150-10 General
General Information about Humidification............................................................................................ 1
General Information about Cabin Heating ........................................................................................... 2

Position of the HUMIDIFICATION Page on the Mini FAP ................................................................... 1
Position of the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS Page on the FAP ............................................. 2
Position of the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page on the Mini FAP ..................................... 3

The HUMIDIFICATION Page............................................................................................................... 1
The CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS Page................................................................................. 3
How to Operate the Humidifier............................................................................................................. 5
How to Operate the Cabin Heater........................................................................................................ 6
UAE A380 06-TOC P 9/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
06-160 Window Shades

06-160-10 General
Electromechanical Window Shades .....................................................................................................1
06-160-20 Location
Location of the Electromechanical Window Shades ............................................................................1
Location of the Manual Override Tool ..................................................................................................1

Position of the WINDOW SHADES Page on the FAP..........................................................................1

Description of Electromechanical Window Shades ..............................................................................1
WINDOW SHADES CONTROL Page on the FAP...............................................................................2
How to Operate the Window Blinds from the FAP ...............................................................................5
How to Operate the Window Blinds via the Local Controls ..................................................................6

How to Use the Mechanical Override to Operate the Window Shades................................................1
How to Reset the controller of A Window Shade ................................................................................3
06-180 Shower Control

06-180-10 General
General Information about Shower Control..........................................................................................1

Position of the SHOWER CONTROL Page on the FAP ......................................................................1
The SHOWER CONTROL Page ..........................................................................................................1
06-180-40 Operation
How to Start a Shower from the FAP ...................................................................................................1
How to Set the Shower Time from the FAP .........................................................................................2
How to Set a Time-Out Warning from the FAP ....................................................................................2
How to Start the Cleaning Mode on the FAP .......................................................................................3
UAE A380 06-TOC P 10/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
06-200 Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL)

06-200-10 General
General Information about the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) .............................................................. 1
General Elements of the Digital Cabin Logbook .................................................................................. 2

Position of the Digital Cabin Logbook on the FAP ............................................................................... 1
HOME Page......................................................................................................................................... 1
USER REGISTRATION / CHANGE Pages ......................................................................................... 6
FLIGHT INFORMATION Page............................................................................................................. 9
CREATE DEFECT REPORT Pages.................................................................................................. 11
SCRATCH PAD Page........................................................................................................................ 24
CABIN STATUS Pages ..................................................................................................................... 26
06-200-40 Operation
How to Login or Logout a Registered User.......................................................................................... 1
How to Register a New User................................................................................................................ 5
How to Create a Defect Report Using Keyword Search ...................................................................... 9
How to Create a Defect Report.......................................................................................................... 19
How to Create a Defect Report for a Seat Area................................................................................. 39
How to View Defect Reports in the Logbook ..................................................................................... 61
06-210 Cabin Connectivity System - Cabin Communication

06-210-10 General
General Information about the Cabin Connectivity System ................................................................. 1

Position of the Cabin Connectivity Application on the FAP.................................................................. 1

Cabin Connectivity Application - SERVICE OVERVIEW Page............................................................ 1
Cabin Connectivity Application WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY Page.................................................... 9
How to Turn ON/OFF the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY Service ....................................................... 12
How to Turn ON the Wireless LAN Function for the Whole Cabin..................................................... 13
How to Turn OFF the Wireless LAN Function for the Whole Cabin................................................... 14
UAE A380 06-TOC P 11/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
How to Activate/Deactivate the QUIET MODE...................................................................................15

How to Turn ON/OFF the Mobile Telephony Service.........................................................................16

How to Reset a Faulty Cabin Connectivity Service ..............................................................................1
How to Reset all Cabin Connectivity Services .....................................................................................2
How To Make a Cabin Connectivity System Reset..............................................................................3
06-220 Cabin Video Monitoring System (CVMS)

06-220-10 General
General Information about the CVMS ..................................................................................................1

Position of the CVMS Application on the FAP......................................................................................1
CVMS Application Start Page .............................................................................................................1
CVMS Application Login.......................................................................................................................2
CVMS Home Page ...............................................................................................................................3
CVMS QUAD VIEW Page ....................................................................................................................5
UAE A380 06-TOC P 12/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE CABIN MUSIC FUNCTION

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin music function is controlled and monitored via the CABIN MUSIC page on the FAP or the
mini FAP, if installed.
For more information about the CABIN MUSIC pages:
- Refer to 06-10-30-10 CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP
- Refer to 06-10-30-20 CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
The audio files are customized. Depending on the function, the files are loaded from the Integrated
Prerecorded Announcement Module (IPRAM) (See IPRAM) or an In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) source
(See IFE Source)
The CABIN MUSIC page provides the controls and indications for the following cabin music functions:
- Boarding music (from the IPRAM source)
- Lavatory music (from the IFE source), if installed
- Light scenario music (from the IFE source), if installed.
AUDIO SOURCES
IPRAM
The media containing the audio files for boarding music is a memory card called Integrated
Pre-Recorded Announcement and Music (IPRAM). The data from the IPRAM is loaded via a slot in
the FAP subpanel (master FAP). For more information about the FAP subpanel: Refer to 04-20-10
Operation of the FAP.
IFE SOURCE
The media containing the audio files for the lavatory music and the lighting scenario music source is
part of the In-Flight Entertainment system. The audio files are loaded automatically by the cabin
music function.
BOARDING MUSIC
For Boarding Music Groups the cabin crew can:
- Select an audio channel
UAE A380 06-10-10 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
General
A380
- Adjust the volume

- Switch ON/OFF the music
- Switch ON/OFF the LAVATORY ONLY mode.
LAVATORY MUSIC
For Lavatory Music Groups the cabin crew can:
- Adjust the volume
- Switch ON/OFF the music.
The audio data are supplied by an IFE source.
LIGHT SCENARIO MUSIC
For Light Scenario Music Groups the cabin crew can:
- Switch ON/OFF the music.
- Indicate an automatic trigger: AUTO MODE.
The auto mode is indicated, when the music group is linked to a lighting scenario and is started
automatically. The indication AUTO MODE is displayed in yellow on the corresponding control pad
on the CABIN MUSIC page.
FURTHER INFORMATION ABOUT CABIN MUSIC
- Refer to 06-10-20 Position of the CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP
- Refer to 06-10-20 Position of the CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP
- Refer to 06-10-30-10 CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP
- Refer to 06-10-30-20 CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP.
UAE A380 06-10-10 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE CABIN MUSIC PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the CABIN MUSIC page on the FAP by pushing the MUSIC button on the
function selector. For more information about the FAP function selector: Refer to 04-20-10 Operation of
the FAP.
Up to three control pads (music groups) are displayed on the CABIN MUSIC page. If more than three
music groups are available, pushing a PREV. or NEXT button enable the cabin crew to display the
other available music groups.
Typical CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP
For information about the access to the CABIN MUSIC function via the mini FAP: Refer to Position of
the CABIN MUSIC page on the Mini FAP.
UAE A380 06-10-20 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE CABIN MUSIC PAGE ON THE MINI FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the CABIN MUSIC page on the mini FAP by pushing the MUSIC button on
the function selector. For more information about the mini FAP function selector: Refer to 04-20-10
Operation of the Mini-FAP.
The mini FAP will display the CABIN MUSIC page with the BOARDING GROUP control pad
corresponding to the zone where the mini FAP is installed.
Typical CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP
For information about the access to the CABIN MUSIC function via the FAP: Refer to Position of the
CABIN MUSIC page on the FAP.
UAE A380 06-10-20 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
A380 AUDIO / CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP
CABIN MUSIC PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The CABIN MUSIC page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to monitor and control the music
distributed in the cabin via loudspeakers and/or headsets.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN MUSIC ALL decks page by pushing the MUSIC button of the
function selector at the bottom of the FAP screen.
Typical CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP
Title Function Description

Deck Selector Buttons The deck selector is on the left hand side of the FAP screen.
For the CABIN MUSIC function only the ALL button is enabled.
The cabin crew can control and monitor all cabin music functions via
the ALL decks page.
PREV. Button Pushing the PREV. button will display the previous cabin music
group(s). The PREV. button is enabled when more than three cabin
music groups are available and the NEXT button was pushed.
NEXT Button Pushing the NEXT button will display the next cabin music group(s).
The NEXT button is enabled when more than three cabin music groups
are available.
UAE A380 06-10-30-10 P 1/12

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC

Cabin Music Control pad On the CABIN MUSIC page up to three control pads for cabin music
Group groups may be displayed at a time.
e.g. BOARDING
There may be three different kinds of cabin music groups and
GROUP 2
corresponding control pads with different functions.
- BOARDING MUSIC GROUPS (IPRAM)
- LAVATORY MUSIC GROUPS (IFE source)
- SCENARIO MUSIC GROUPS (IFE source).
The control pads enable the cabin crew to control the cabin music
function for the corresponding cabin music groups.
Channel Text box The channel text box displays the current channel selection, e.g. EASY
LISTENING.
CHAN. SELECT Button Note: The CHAN. SELECT button is only available for the boarding
music groups.
Pushing the CHAN. SELECT button displays or hides the adjust control
pad for the currently selected boarding music group.
VOL. Indicator The volume indicator shows the selected volume level.
Volume adjustment per cabin music group is possible 10 steps using
the ▴ and ▾ icons.
VOL. ▴ (Up Icon Pushing the ▴ icon will increase the volume level of the cabin music in
Arrow) the cabin.
If the maximum volume is reached, the ▴ icon will be disabled.
VOL. ▾ (Down Icon Pushing the ▾ icon will decrease the volume level of the cabin music in
Arrow) the cabin.
If the minimum volume is reached, the icon ▾ will be disabled.
LAV ONLY Button Note: The LAV ONLY button is only available for the boarding music
groups.
Pushing the LAV ONLY button restricts the selected channel of a cabin
music group to lavatory distribution. The ON/OFF button must be
activated to enable this function.
The cabin crew can enable the LAV. ONLY function at any time,
independent of the playback status (ON or OFF).
UAE A380 06-10-30-10 P 2/12

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC

ON/OFF Button Pushing the ON/OFF button starts or stops playing the selected
channel for the corresponding cabin music group.
The button is highlighted in green (enabled and active) when the
corresponding cabin music is playing.
Pushing the highlighted button will turn the corresponding cabin music
OFF.
Pushing the button again will turn ON the corresponding cabin music.
Cabin Music Adjust Control Note: The adjust control pad is only available for boarding music
Group pad groups.
e.g. BOARDING
The adjust control pad for a cabin music group is displayed when the
MUSIC 2
cabin crew has pushed the CHAN. SELECT button on the
corresponding boarding music group control pad.
The buttons on the adjust control pad enable the cabin crew to adjust
the selections for the cabin music function.
SELECTED Text box The SELECTED CHANNEL text box displays the currently selected
CHANNEL channel.
Note: Within the channels list, the selected channel is also
highlighted.
Channels List The channel list displays the available music programs for the
corresponding cabin music group.
Note: The currently selected channel is highlighted in the list.
▴ (UP Arrow) Icon Pushing the ▴ icon next to the channel list enables the cabin crew to
move the highlight UP within the list.
▾ (Down Arrow) Icon Pushing the ▾ icon next to the channel list enables the cabin crew to
move the highlight DOWN within the list.
SELECT Button Pushing the SELECT button changes the selected channel of cabin
music groups. The currently highlighted channel in the channel list will
be displayed in the SELECTED CHANNEL text box above the channel
list, and on the cabin music group control pad.
If a boarding music group is currently playing (active ON) and the
channel is changed via the SELECT button on the adjust control pad,
the current playback status will remain ON, but the newly selected
channel will immediately replace the old channel in the playback
function.
UAE A380 06-10-30-10 P 3/12

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
CABIN MUSIC PAGE INITIALIZATION ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
When the system is powered up, the CABIN MUSIC page is displayed with disabled music group
control pads:
- all buttons are disabled
- the volume indicator is disabled
- the channel name in the CHANNEL text box is replaced by the text INITIALIZING.
In addition, a blue card is displayed on the right side of the music group control pads: WAIT UNTIL
INITIALIZATION HAS BEEN COMPLETED.
UAE A380 06-10-30-10 P 4/12

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
HOW TO MONITOR AND CONTROL THE BOARDING MUSIC FROM THE FAP
Applicable to: ALL
Use the CABIN MUSIC page to monitor and control the boarding music groups.
On the FAP, select the MUSIC button from the function selector. (For information about the function
selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview). The CABIN MUSIC page will display on the
FAP.
There may be several boarding music groups defined for the cabin, depending on the customer
definition. Each boarding music group has its own control pad.
For each boarding music group, the cabin crew can:
- Select an audio channel (See How to Select An Audio Channel)
- Adjust the volume (See How to Adjust the Volume of the Boarding Music)
- Switch ON/OFF the boarding music (See How to Switch ON/OFF the Boarding Music)
- Switch ON/OFF the LAVATORY ONLY mode (See How to Switch ON/OFF the LAVATORY ONLY
Mode) .
HOW TO SELECT AN AUDIO CHANNEL
Follow the steps described below to select an audio channel for a boarding music group:
1. Push the CHAN. SELECT button on the control pad of the desired boarding music group. The
CHAN. SELECT button will turn green and the corresponding adjust control pad is displayed on the
right side of the screen.
UAE A380 06-10-30-10 P 5/12

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
Example of BOARDING MUSIC Groups on the FAP
2. Use the ▴ and ▾ icons on the adjust control pad to scroll through the list of available audio channels.
A blue highlight indicates the current position in the list.
3. When the desired music channel is highlighted, push the SELECT button. The selected audio
channel will be displayed in the SELECTED CHANNEL text box.
HOW TO ADJUST THE VOLUME OF THE BOARDING MUSIC
Change the volume level of a boarding music group by using the ▴ and ▾ icons on the control pad of
the boarding music group. The VOL indicator will change accordingly.
When the cabin crew has selected the highest volume level, the VOL ▴ icon will be indicated as
disabled.
When the cabin crew has selected the lowest volume level, the VOL ▾ icon will be indicated as
disabled.
HOW TO SWITCH ON/OFF THE BOARDING MUSIC
The cabin crew can switch ON or OFF each boarding music group individually.
The status of the boarding music group is indicated by the color of the ON/OFF button.
To switch the boarding music ON, push the gray ON/OFF button. The button will turn green.
To switch the boarding music OFF, push the green ON/OFF button. The button will turn gray.
UAE A380 06-10-30-10 P 6/12

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
HOW TO SWITCH ON/OFF THE LAVATORY ONLY MODE

It is possible to activate the boarding music only for the lavatory/ies of a boarding music group. The
selected music will only play in the lavatories of the selected boarding music group:
The status of the is indicated by the color of the LAV. ONLY button.
To restrict the boarding music to the lavatory/ies, push the gray LAV. ONLY button. The button will turn
green.
To play the boarding music for the whole boarding music group, push the green LAV. ONLY button.
The button will turn gray.
HOW TO MONITOR AND CONTROL THE LAVATORY MUSIC FROM THE FAP
Applicable to: ALL
Use the CABIN MUSIC page to monitor and control the lavatory music groups.
FAP.
There may be several lavatory music groups defined for the cabin, depending on the customer
definition. Each lavatory music group has its own control pad.
For each lavatory music group, the cabin crew can:
- Adjust the volume (See How to Adjust the Volume of the Lavatory Music)
- Switch ON/OFF the boarding music (See How to Switch ON/OFF the Lavatory Music).
UAE A380 06-10-30-10 P 7/12

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
LAVATORY GROUPS on the FAP
HOW TO ADJUST THE VOLUME OF THE LAVATORY MUSIC

Change the volume level of a lavatory music group by using the ▴ and ▾ icons. The VOL indicator will
change accordingly.
When the cabin crew has selected the highest volume level, the ▴ icon will be indicated as disabled.
When the cabin crew has selected the lowest volume level, the ▾ icon will be indicated as disabled.
HOW TO SWITCH ON/OFF THE LAVATORY MUSIC
The cabin crew can switch ON or OFF each lavatory music group individually.
The status of the lavatory music group is indicated by the color of the ON/OFF button.
To switch the lavatory music ON, push the gray ON/OFF button. The button will turn green.
To switch the lavatory music OFF, push the green ON/OFF button. The button will turn gray.
UAE A380 06-10-30-10 P 8/12

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
HOW TO MONITOR AND CONTROL THE LIGHTING SCENARIO MUSIC FROM THE FAP
Applicable to: ALL
Use the CABIN MUSIC page to monitor and control the lighting scenario music groups.
FAP.
There may be several lighting scenario music groups defined for the cabin, depending on the customer
definition. Each lighting scenario music group has its own control pad.
For each lighting scenario music group, the cabin crew can:
- Switch ON/OFF the lighting scenario music (See How to Switch ON/OFF the Lighting Scenario
Music)
- Indicate an automatic trigger: AUTO MODE. (See AUTO MODE Indication).
Example of SCENARIO GROUPS on the FAP
HOW TO SWITCH ON/OFF THE LIGHTING SCENARIO MUSIC

The cabin crew can switch ON or OFF each lighting scenario music group individually.
The status of the lighting scenario music group is indicated by the color of the ON/OFF button.
To switch the lighting scenario music ON, push the gray ON/OFF button. The button will turn green.
UAE A380 06-10-30-10 P 9/12

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
To switch the lighting scenario music OFF, push the green ON/OFF button. The button will turn gray.
AUTO MODE INDICATION
The auto mode is indicated, when the music group is linked to a lighting scenario and is started
automatically. The indication AUTO MODE is displayed in yellow, below the CHANNEL text box and
the ON/OFF button will turn green.
Example of an Scenario Auto Trigger Event
UAE A380 06-10-30-10 P 10/12

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
FAILURE MESSAGES ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
If the Integrated Prerecorded Announcement Module (IPRAM) audio data are not available:
- All buttons are disabled
- The volume indicator is disabled
- The channel name in the CHANNEL text box is replaced by the text INITIALIZING.
In addition, a blue card is displayed on the right side of the music group control pads: NO I-PRAM
MUSIC AVAILABLE - CHECK I-PRAM.
Example of an IPRAM Function Error
UAE A380 06-10-30-10 P 11/12

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
UAE A380 06-10-30-10 P 12/12

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
A380 AUDIO / CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP
CABIN MUSIC PAGE ON THE MINI FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The CABIN MUSIC page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to monitor and control the boarding music
distributed in the cabin via loudspeakers and/or headsets in the corresponding area.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN MUSIC page by pushing the MUSIC button of the function
selector at the bottom of the mini FAP screen.

Boarding Music Control pad On the CABIN MUSIC page the control pad for the boarding music
Group, e.g. group corresponding to the area/zone of the mini FAP is displayed.
BOARDING The control pad enables the cabin crew to control the boarding music
GROUP 1 function for the corresponding boarding music group.
Channel Text box The channel text box displays the current channel selection, e.g.
CLASSIC.
VOL. Indicator The volume indicator shows the selected volume level.
Volume adjustment per boarding music group is possible in 10 steps
using the ▴ and ▾ icons.
UAE A380 06-10-30-20 P 1/6

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC

VOL. ▴ Icon Pushing the ▴ icon will increase the volume level of the boarding music
(UP Arrow) in the cabin.
If the maximum volume is reached, the ▴ icon will be disabled.
VOL. ▾ Icon Pushing the ▾ icon will decrease the volume level of the boarding music
(Down Arrow) in the cabin.
If the minimum volume is reached, the icon ▾ will be disabled.
ON/OFF Button Pushing the ON/OFF button starts or stops playing the selected
channel for the corresponding boarding music group.
The button is highlighted in green (enabled and active) when the
corresponding boarding music is playing.
Pushing the highlighted button will turn OFF the corresponding
boarding music.
Pushing the button again will turn ON the corresponding boarding
music.
LAV ONLY Button Note: The LAV ONLY button is only available for the boarding music
groups.
Pushing the LAV ONLY button restricts the selected channel of a
boarding music group to lavatory distribution. The ON/OFF button must
be activated to enable this function.
The cabin crew can enable the LAV. ONLY function at any time,
independent of the playback status (ON or OFF).
Boarding Music Adjust control The adjust control pad for a boarding music group is displayed on the
Group, e.g. pad right side of the screen. The controls on this control pad enable the
BOARDING cabin crew to adjust the selections for the boarding music function.
GROUP 1
CHANNEL channel.
Note: Within the channels list, the selected channel is also
highlighted.
corresponding boarding music group.
Note: The currently selected channel is highlighted in the list.
UAE A380 06-10-30-20 P 2/6

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC

SELECT Button Pushing the SELECT button changes the selected channel of the
boarding music group. The currently highlighted channel in the channel
list will be displayed in the SELECTED CHANNEL text box above the
channel list, and on the boarding music group control pad.
CABIN MUSIC PAGE INITIALIZATION ON THE MINI FAP

Applicable to: ALL
When the system is powered up, the CABIN MUSIC page is displayed with a blue card: WAIT UNTIL
INITIALIZATION HAS BEEN COMPLETED.
Example of a Cabin Music Initialization on the Mini FAP
UAE A380 06-10-30-20 P 3/6

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
HOW TO MONITOR AND CONTROL THE BOARDING MUSIC FROM THE MINI FAP
Applicable to: ALL
Use the CABIN MUSIC page to monitor and control the boarding music groups.
On the mini FAP, select the MUSIC button from the function selector. (For information about the
function selector: Refer to 04-20-10 Mini-FAP, 1st Level). The CABIN MUSIC page will display on the
mini FAP.
For the boarding music group, the cabin crew can:
- Select an audio channel (See How to Select An Audio Channel)
- Adjust the volume (See How to Adjust the Volume of the Boarding Music)
- Switch ON/OFF the boarding music (See How to Switch ON/OFF the Boarding Music)
- Switch ON/OFF the LAVATORY ONLY mode (See How to Switch ON/OFF the LAVATORY ONLY
Mode) .
HOW TO SELECT AN AUDIO CHANNEL

Follow the steps described below to select an audio channel for a boarding music group:
1. Use the ▴ and ▾ icons on the adjust control pad to scroll through the list of available audio channels.
A blue highlight indicates the current position in the list.
UAE A380 06-10-30-20 P 4/6

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
2. When the desired music channel is highlighted, push the SELECT button. The selected audio
channel will be displayed in the SELECTED CHANNEL text box.
HOW TO ADJUST THE VOLUME OF THE BOARDING MUSIC
Change the volume level of a boarding music group by using the ▴ and ▾ icons on the control pad of
the boarding music group. The VOL indicator will change accordingly.
When the cabin crew has selected the highest volume level, the VOL ▴ icon will be indicated as
disabled.
When the cabin crew has selected the lowest volume level, the VOL ▾ icon will be indicated as
disabled.
HOW TO SWITCH ON/OFF THE BOARDING MUSIC
The cabin crew can switch ON or OFF each boarding music group individually.
The status of the boarding music group is indicated by the color of the ON/OFF button.
To switch the boarding music ON, push the gray ON/OFF button. The button will turn green.
To switch the boarding music OFF, push the green ON/OFF button. The button will turn gray.
HOW TO SWITCH ON/OFF THE LAVATORY ONLY MODE
It is possible to activate the boarding music only for the lavatory/ies of a boarding music group. The
selected music will only play in the lavatories of the selected boarding music group:
The status of the is indicated by the color of the LAV. ONLY button.
To restrict the boarding music to the lavatory/ies, push the gray LAV. ONLY button. The button will turn
green.
To play the boarding music for the whole boarding music group, push the green LAV. ONLY button.
The button will turn gray.
UAE A380 06-10-30-20 P 5/6

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
AUDIO/CABIN MUSIC
FAILURE MESSAGES ON THE MINI FAP

Applicable to: ALL
If the Integrated Prerecorded Announcement Module (IPRAM) audio data is not available a blue card is
displayed: NO I-PRAM MUSIC AVAILABLE - CHECK I-PRAM.
Example of an IPRAM Function Error
UAE A380 06-10-30-20 P 6/6

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can control and monitor pre-recorded announcements via the PRE-RECORDED
ANNOUNCEMENTS page on the FAP.
For more information about the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS page:
- Refer to 06-20-20 Position of the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS Page on the FAP
- Refer to 06-20-30-10 PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS Page on the FAP.
show.
concerned system.
The cabin crew can select and start announcements individually or in groups. Some pre-recorded
announcements start automatically. They have the highest distribution priority.
The audio files containing the prerecorded announcements are customized. The files are loaded from
the Integrated Prerecorded Announcement Module (IPRAM).
IPRAM L2
The media containing the audio files for the prerecorded announcements is a memory card called
Integrated Pre-Recorded Announcement and Music (IPRAM). The data from the IPRAM is loaded via a
slot in the FAP subpanel (master FAP). For more information about the FAP subpanel: Refer to
04-20-10 Operation of the FAP.
UAE A380 06-20-10 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
UAE A380 06-20-10 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS page on the FAP by pushing
the PRE-ANN. button on the function selector. For more information about the FAP function selector:
Refer to 04-20-10 Operation of the FAP:
Typical PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS Page on the FAP
UAE A380 06-20-20 P 1/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-20-20 P 2/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380 PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT Page on the FAP
PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to monitor and
control the pre-recorded announcements distributed in the cabin via loudspeakers and headsets.
The cabin crew can access the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS all decks page by pushing the
PRE- ANN. button of the function selector at the bottom of the FAP.

Deck Selector Buttons The deck selector is on the left hand side of the FAP screen.
For the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS function typically only
the ALL button is enabled.
The cabin crew can control and monitor all pre-recorded
announcement functions via the ALL page.
UAE A380 06-20-30-10 P 1/6

CCOM 02-Apr-09
CABIN SYSTEMS

Pre-Recorded Control pad On the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS page up to two
Announcements control pads for announcement distribution areas may be displayed at
Distribution Area a time.
e.g. ALL DECKS Each control pad enables the cabin crew to control the pre-recorded
announcements function for the corresponding announcement
distribution area.
ON ANNOUNCE Text box The ON ANNOUNCE text box displays the current announcement or
announcement group selection, e.g. AUTO_ANNOUNCE.
STOP Button Pushing the STOP button will stop the currently playing
announcement.
PLAY NEXT Button Pushing the PLAY NEXT button will play the next announcement.
PLAY ALL Button Pushing the PLAY ALL button will play all announcements of the
selected announcement group.
Note: Announcement groups are marked with an + in the list of
selectable announcements.
EDIT MEMO Button Pushing the EDIT MEMO button displays the adjust control pad for
the currently selected announcement group.
MEMO List The MEMO list displays the currently selected announcements.
Note: If an announcement group was selected, the different
announcements of this group will be listed in the MEMO list.
▴ (UP Arrow) Icon Pushing the ▴ icon will scroll up though the MEMO list.
If the first item of the list is reached, the ▴ icon will be disabled.
▾ (Down Arrow) Icon Pushing the ▾ icon will scroll up though the MEMO list.
If the last item of the list is reached, the icon ▾ will be disabled.
CLEAR MEMO Button Pushing the CLEAR MEMO button will clear all currently selected
announcements from the memo list.
CLEAR ALL Button Pushing the CLEAR ALL button will clear all currently selected
announcements form the MEMO list as well as the currently playing
announcement (ON ANNOUNCE text box).
Announcement Adjust Control The adjust control pad for an announcement distribution area is
Group pad displayed when the EDIT MEMO button on the corresponding
e.g. ALTERNATE announcement distribution area control pad was pushed.
The controls on this control pad enable the cabin crew to adjust the
selections for the pre-recorded announcement function.
channel.
UAE A380 06-20-30-10 P 2/6

CCOM 02-Apr-09
CABIN SYSTEMS

corresponding cabin music group.
SELECT Button Pushing the SELECT button changes the selected channel of cabin
music groups. The currently highlighted channel in the channel list will
be displayed in the SELECTED CHANNEL text box above the
channel list, and on the cabin music group control pad.
Navigation controls Buttons Pushing the navigation controls enables the cabin crew to select an
audio announcement or an audio announcement group.
The cabin crew can use the following controls:
- TOP OF THE LIST icon
- SCROLL UP icon
- SCROLL DOWN icon
- BOTTOM OF THE LIST icon.
The TOP OF THE LIST and BOTTOM OF THE LIST icons move the
selection by a maximum of 10 steps in either direction.
If there are not enough entries for the TOP OF THE LIST icon /
BOTTOM OF THE LIST icon, the respective icon will be disabled.
If there are no further entries above or below the colored bar (highlight
position) the respective SCROLL UP or SCROLL DOWN button is
disabled.
OPEN / CLOSE Button Pushing the OPEN / CLOSE button will open or close a selected
(highlighted) announcement group.
DIRECT PLAY Button Pushing the DIRECT PLAY button will play the selected (highlighted)
announcement.
Note: Only announcements can be played directly, not
announcements groups.
ADD TO MEMO Button Pushing the ADD TO MEMO button will add the highlighted
announcement or announcement group to the MEMO list.
UAE A380 06-20-30-10 P 3/6

CCOM 02-Apr-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS PAGE INITIALIZATION ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
When the system is powered up, the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT page is displayed with a
blue card is displayed on the right side of the music group control pads: WAIT UNTIL INITIALIZATION
HAS BEEN COMPLETED.
HOW TO MONITOR AND CONTROL THE PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS FROM THE FAP
Applicable to: ALL
Use the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS page to monitor and control the announcements
groups. On the FAP, select the PRE- ANN. button from the function selector. (For information about the
function selector: Refer to 04-20-10 Overview Cabin Systems from the FAP). The PRE-RECORDED
ANNOUNCEMENTS all decks page will display on the FAP.
There may be up to two announcements groups defined for the cabin, depending on the customer
definition. Each announcements group has its own control pad.
For each boarding music group, the cabin crew can:
- Select one or more announcement(s) to the MEMO list: See How to Select One or More
Announcement(s) to the MEMO List
- Stop, play or clear announcements from the MEMO list: See How to Stop, Play or Clear
Announcements from the Memo List
- Play an announcement directly from the SELECT list: See How to Play an Announcement Directly
from the SELECT List .
UAE A380 06-20-30-10 P 4/6

CCOM 02-Apr-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
HOW TO SELECT ONE OR MORE ANNOUNCEMENT(S) TO THE MEMO LIST

Follow the steps described below to select an announcement for an announcement group:
1. Push the EDIT MEMO button to display the corresponding SELECT list.
2. Use the navigation buttons to scroll through the available announcements
3. Use the OPEN / CLOSE button to open / close the announcement groups (marked with +).
4. Use the ADD TO MEMO button to add the selected (highlighted) announcement to the MEMO list.
5. Select and add as many announcements to the MEMO list as you wish.
6. Push the EDIT MEMO button to close the SELECT control pad again.
HOW TO STOP, PLAY OR CLEAR ANNOUNCEMENTS FROM THE MEMO LIST
Follow the steps described below to stop, play or skip announcement(s) for an announcement group:
1. Push the STOP button to stop a playing announcement.
2. Push the PLAY NEXT button to play the next announcement on the MEMO list or push the PLAY
ALL button to play all announcements on the MEMO list.
3. Push CLEAR MEMO to clear all announcements on the MEMO list or push CLEAR ALL to clear all
announcements on the MEMO list including the currently playing announcement.
UAE A380 06-20-30-10 P 5/6

CCOM 02-Apr-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
HOW TO PLAY AN ANNOUNCEMENT DIRECTLY FROM THE SELECT LIST

Follow the steps described below to play an announcement directly from the SELECT list:
1. Push the EDIT MEMO button to open the SELECT list control pad.
2. Use the navigation buttons to select (highlight) an announcement.
Note: Only announcements can be played directly, not announcements groups.
3. Push the DIRECT PLAY button to start the selected announcement. The announcement title will
appear in the ON ANNOUNCE text box, bypassing the MEMO list.
FAILURE MESSAGE ON THE PRE-ANNOUNCEMENT PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
If the IPRAM (Integrated Pre-Recorded Announcement Module) audio data are not available, a blue
card with the message NO PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT AVAILABLE. CHECK IPRAM.
UAE A380 06-20-30-10 P 6/6

CCOM 02-Apr-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Cabin Lighting System
A380 General
TYPES OF CABIN LIGHT

Applicable to: ALL
There are different types of lights installed in the cabin:

- See Ceiling lights, e.g. light strips, spot lights
- See Effect lights
- See Stairs lights
- Lavatory lights: Refer to Description of the Lavatory Illumination
- Reading lights: Refer to Reading Lights — General.
LIGHT STRIPS
Typically, the cabin is illuminated by light strips, which are located in the ceiling panels above the aisles
and windows.
To give smooth indirect illumination, the light strips are installed in positions that prevent a direct view.
For colored lighting, special versions of the light strips with one or more colored tubes or Light Emitting
Diode (LED) units are available.
SPOT LIGHTS
Spot lights are installed in entry areas, for example. Typically, they are controlled together with the light
strips that are installed in the same area.
Spot lights are typically monochrome LED lights. L2
STAIRS LIGHTS L1
Stairs have lights that are located under each step. As an option, lights can be installed which follow
the stairs ceiling contour.
EFFECT LIGHTS
Effect lights are installed in lavatories as mirror lights and wash table lights. As an option, effect lights
may be installed for emphasizing cabin furniture.
UAE A380 06-30-10-10 P 1/6

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A380 General
DEFINITION OF ILLUMINATED AREAS

Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) controls the Cabin Lighting System. For the
control of the cabin lighting the cabin is divided into the following controlled illuminated areas:
- See Entry areas
- See Cabin zones
- See Rooms
- See Stairs.
The areas are displayed on the control panels (FAP, mini FAP). Via the control panels the level of
illumination of the different areas can be controlled.
ENTRY AREAS
Entry areas include the area at a cabin door, the cross aisle area and the corresponding door across
the aisle.
CABIN ZONES
Typically, the cabin zones include all passenger seating areas. The cabin zones are defined by the
airline and depend on the individual cabin layout. The customized information is stored on the CAM
(Cabin Assignment Module).
ROOMS
Rooms on an aircraft are not necessarily closed compartments. Rooms may be:
- Crew Work Stations (CWS)
- Galleys
- Crew rest areas
- Bars / lounges
- etc.
STAIRS
Stairs are part of the two decks that are connected by it. Thus the illumination of the stairs can be
controlled from both decks, i.e. the corresponding stairs control pad is displayed on both deck pages.
For safety reasons, the stairs illumination can not be turned off. It will always stay on at a predefined
minimum brightness.
UAE A380 06-30-10-10 P 2/6

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A380 General
CABIN LIGHTING SYSTEM AND ITS ELEMENTS

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin lighting system is part of the aircraft lighting system. The cabin lighting system has elements
that depend on the cabin layout:
- Cabin zone illumination (e.g. First, Business and Economy Class)
- Room illumination (e.g. crew rest areas, galleys, work stations etc.)
- Entry area illumination
- Reading lights.
The cabin lighting system is controlled via the Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS).
The CIDS control panels (FAP / mini FAP) display control pads of the cabin lighting elements. Refer to
Cabin Lighting System Control.
Typical Control Pads for Cabin Lighting Elements (FAP)
UAE A380 06-30-10-10 P 3/6

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A380 General
CABIN LIGHTING SYSTEM CONTROL

Applicable to: ALL
CONTROL PANELS
The cabin lighting system is controlled via the Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS).
The cabin lighting system can be controlled from these (CIDS) control panels:
- Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)
- Mini FAP
- Additional Attendant Panel (AAP).
show.
concerned system.
CONTROLLED AREAS
The illumination of the following areas can be controlled via the control displays:
- Cabin zones
- Rooms
- Entry areas
- Staircases.
Refer to Definition of Illuminated Areas.
CONTROL MODES
Cabin lighting can be controlled via two different modes:
- Classic control (standard)
- Scenario control (optional)
Scenario control enables the cabin crew to select predefined lighting scenarios (e.g. BOARD, SLEEP
etc.).
Note: Typically, cabin lighting is controlled via classic control. However, if the cabin zones are
controlled via the optional scenario control, not only the control pads of the cabin zones are
different but also the GENERAL SETTINGS. Thus the CABIN LIGHTING page layout depends
on the control mode of the cabin zones.
UAE A380 06-30-10-10 P 4/6

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A380 General
GENERAL ASPECTS OF CABIN LIGHTING CONTROL

Applicable to: ALL
CIDS POWER-UP
When CIDS is powered up, all cabin lights are illuminated automatically in a predefined brightness. A
power-up has the same effect as pushing the MAIN ON/OFF button when CIDS is already running and
all lights are off (MAIN OFF state).
MAIN ON / OFF
The MAIN ON/OFF function is only available on ground. This function is controlled via the MAIN
ON/OFF button on the GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS.
Typically the cabin lights are illuminated automatically in a predefined brightness (typically bright white
light) after power up and is in the MAIN ON state. The MAIN ON/OFF button is green (activated) in the
MAIN ON state.
The MAIN ON/OFF button is a toggle button:
- If the cabin lighting is ON (MAIN ON state) and the button is pushed, the cabin lighting will go OFF.
The button will turn from green (activated) to gray (enabled).
Note: For safety reasons the staircase illumination will stay ON at a predefined brightness level.
- If the cabin lighting is OFF (MAIN OFF state) and the button is pushed, the cabin lighting will go ON
(MAIN ON state). The button will turn from gray (enabled) to green (activated).
Note: Pushing any light control button on any CIDS control panel when the cabin lighting is OFF
(MAIN OFF state) will switch the cabin lighting to the MAIN ON state. However, only the lights
corresponding to the pushed light control button and the lavatory illumination will go ON.
CABIN DECOMPRESSION
In case of cabin decompression, all lights are switched automatically to predefined brightness (typically
bright white), independent from any selected light setting.
BRIGHTNESS
Generally the cabin illumination is dimmable. Typically there are three illumination levels:
- BRIGHT: 100% visual brightness
- DIM 1: 50% visual brightness
- DIM 2: 10% visual brightness.
Note: The light brightness is automatically dimmed in the cockpit access area if the cockpit door is
open with engines running.
UAE A380 06-30-10-10 P 5/6

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A380 General
UAE A380 06-30-10-10 P 6/6

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
POSITION OF THE CABIN LIGHTING PAGES ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
For cabin lighting functions there are several pages available on the FAP display:
- CABIN LIGHTING ALL page (overview of all decks)
- CABIN LIGHTING MAIN DECK page
- CABIN LIGHTING UPPER DECK page
- CABIN LIGHTING LOWER DECK page (optional)
- READING LIGHT SETTINGS page.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN LIGHTING ALL page by pushing the LIGHTS button on the first
level of the function selector on the FAP.
Typical CABIN LIGHTING ALL Page
On the CABIN LIGHTING ALL page on the FAP aircraft symbols show the lighting status of all aircraft
decks.
The aircraft symbols display the cabin layout and its illuminated areas.
On the aircraft symbol, yellow bars indicate the location and the illumination brightness of the cabin
zones and entry areas. The color intensity of a bar changes when the illumination brightness is
decreased or increased.
UAE A380 06-30-10-20 P 1/4

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Each bar, except entry area bars, is labelled, (e.g. F/C for First Class; B/C for Business Class etc.).
The background color (green) of a deck selector button indicates the deck for which the page is
activated.
NAVIGATING ON THE CABIN LIGHTING PAGES
The lighting of a single deck can be controlled or monitored by two ways:
- Selecting the corresponding deck selector button on the left side of the screen.
- Touching the corresponding aircraft symbol of the desired deck on the CABIN LIGHTING ALL
decks page.
LIGHT INTENSITY INDICATION
The intensity of the color (yellow) of the aircraft symbols indicates the illumination level of the cabin
zones and entry areas.
Color Intensity Illumination Level

Grey Lights are off.
Dark Yellow The lights are dimmed to approximately 10% visual brightness.
Medium Yellow The lights are dimmed to approximately 50% visual brightness.
Bright Yellow The lights are fully bright.
UAE A380 06-30-10-20 P 2/4

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
POSITION OF THE CABIN LIGHTING PAGE ON THE MINI FAP

Applicable to: ALL
After selecting the LIGHTS button from the mini FAP function selector the CABIN LIGHTING page is
displayed.
Typical Mini FAP Classic Control CABIN LIGHTING Page
This example shows a typical mini FAP CABIN LIGHTING page layout displaying the maximum of four
control pads. Each control pad has a header indicating the zone or area it controls.
Control buttons for general lighting functions are on the right side of the screen.
Activated buttons are displayed green.
UAE A380 06-30-10-20 P 3/4

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
UAE A380 06-30-10-20 P 4/4

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Cabin Lighting System Control via FAP

FAP SCENARIO CONTROL
LIGHTING CONTROL GENERAL

For lighting control in general, each aircraft deck is divided into cabin zones, entry areas, staircases
and rooms.
Each illuminated area can be controlled individually via its own control pad. For information about
illuminated areas: Refer to Definition of Illuminated Areas.
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SCENARIO CONTROL
LIGHTING SCENARIOS
There are two types of lighting scenario control available:
- Zone wise lighting scenario control (for individual cabin areas).
The buttons for the zone wise scenarios are on the control pads of the individual cabin areas.
- Entire lighting scenario control (for all areas assigned to the entire scenario, typically the whole
cabin).
The buttons for the entire lighting scenarios are on the GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS control
pad.
There are up to 12 different lighting scenarios available:
- 6 zone wise lighting scenarios
- 6 entire lighting scenarios.
Note: If an entire lighting scenario is started from an FAP (e.g. BOARD), this scenario is started
at the same time for all areas that have scenario control. However, the settings of the entire
lighting scenario may be different for each area.
SCENARIO CONTROLLED ZONES AND AREAS
The scenario controlled areas can be:
- Cabin zones
- Rooms
- Entries
- Staircases.
DAY OR NIGHT MODE
On the GENERAL SETTINGS control pad a DAY/NIGHT mode button is available.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 1/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Depending on DAY or NIGHT mode a scenario typically has different characteristics and settings.
SCENARIO CONTROL
The following pages are available for scenario control:
- CABIN LIGHTING pages for the main deck, upper deck and (optionally) lower deck : Refer to Cabin
Lighting Scenario Control Per Deck
- Initialization mode: Refer to Scenario Control Initialization Mode
For operating the scenario control:
- Refer to How to Start a Scenario
- Refer to How to Fine Tune Scenario Controlled Lights.
SCENARIOS WITH THEME MUSIC 
Some lighting scenarios may be accompanied by a music / audio theme which is provided by the IFE
system.
The music / audio theme will start and stop at the same time as the lighting scenario. However, it is
possible that a delay is programmed for the music / audio theme: for example could the music theme
become audible 15 minutes after the lighting scenario has begun.
Note: If the cabin crew interrupts the lighting scenario manually, the music theme will not be
interrupted or stopped (Refer to 06-30-10-30-10 Scenario Control Per Deck via FAP).
Only the following will turn OFF the lighting scenario and will end the music / audio theme also:
- Pushing the OFF button on the adjust control pad
- Starting a new lighting scenario
- Pushing the DAY/NIGHT button on the GENERAL SETTINGS control pad and thus ending
the running lighting scenario if it is not assigned to the mode that has been selected (DAY
or NIGHT).
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 2/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
LIGHTING CONTROL GENERAL

For lighting control in general, each aircraft deck is divided into cabin zones, entry areas, staircases
and rooms.
Each illuminated area can be controlled individually via its own control pad. For information about
illuminated areas: Refer to Definition of Illuminated Areas.
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SCENARIO CONTROL
LIGHTING SCENARIOS
There are two types of lighting scenario control available:
- Zone wise lighting scenario control (for individual cabin areas).
The buttons for the zone wise scenarios are on the control pads of the individual cabin areas.
- Entire lighting scenario control (for all areas assigned to the entire scenario, typically the whole
cabin).
The buttons for the entire lighting scenarios are on the GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS control
pad.
There are up to 12 different lighting scenarios available:
- 6 zone wise lighting scenarios
- 6 entire lighting scenarios.
Note: If an entire lighting scenario is started from an FAP (e.g. BOARD), this scenario is started
at the same time for all areas that have scenario control. However, the settings of the entire
lighting scenario may be different for each area.
SCENARIO CONTROLLED ZONES AND AREAS
The scenario controlled areas can be:
- Cabin zones
- Rooms
- Entries
- Staircases.
DAY OR NIGHT MODE
On the GENERAL SETTINGS control pad a DAY/NIGHT mode button is available.
Depending on DAY or NIGHT mode a scenario typically has different characteristics and settings.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 3/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
SCENARIOS WITH THEME MUSIC

Some lighting scenarios may be accompanied by a music / audio theme which is provided by the IFE
system.
Note: There is no automatic trigger between the lighting scenario and the music theme. The cabin
crew can start the music theme from the CABIN MUSIC page.
SCENARIO CONTROL
The following pages are available for scenario control:
- CABIN LIGHTING pages for the main deck, upper deck and (optionally) lower deck : Refer to Cabin
Lighting Scenario Control Per Deck
- Initialization mode: Refer to Scenario Control Initialization Mode
For operating the scenario control:
- Refer to How to Start a Scenario
- Refer to How to Fine Tune Scenario Controlled Lights.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 4/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Applicable to: ALL
SCENARIO CONTROL CABIN LIGHTING PER DECK PAGE

The lighting of a single deck can be controlled and monitored in two ways:
- Selecting the corresponding deck selector button on the left side of the screen.
- Touching the corresponding aircraft symbol of the desired deck on the CABIN LIGHTING ALL
decks page.
The illuminated areas are defined by the specific cabin layout.
On the aircraft symbol, yellow bars indicate the location and the illumination brightness of the cabin
zones and entry areas. The color intensity of a bar changes when the illumination brightness is
decreased or increased.
The background of a button on a control pad turns green when activated.
Scenario Control CABIN LIGHTING per Deck Page (Main Deck)
In addition to the aircraft symbol, several control pads are displayed:

- See General Cabin Settings Control Pad (FAP)
- See Entry Areas
- See Control Pad for Scenario Control.
Note: Entry areas are typically controlled by classic control.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 5/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS CONTROL PAD (FAP)

General Cabin Settings Control Pad
Button Description
MAIN ON/OFF The MAIN ON/OFF button is part of the GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS and is
only available on ground. It is a toggle button:
- If the cabin lighting is ON (MAIN ON state) and the button is pushed, the
cabin lighting will go OFF. The button will turn from green (activated) to
gray (enabled).
Note: For safety reasons the staircase illumination will stay ON at a
predefined brightness level.
- If the cabin lighting is OFF (MAIN OFF state) and the button is pushed,
the cabin lighting will go ON (MAIN ON state). The button will turn from
gray (enabled) to green (activated).
Note: Pushing any light control button on any CIDS control panel when the
cabin lighting is OFF (MAIN OFF state) will switch the cabin lighting
to the MAIN ON state. However, only the lights corresponding to the
pushed light control button and the lavatory illumination will go ON.
R/L SET Pushing the R/L SET button turns ON all assigned reading lights.
Note: The function of this button is available on ground, only. The button is
disabled during flight.
R/L RESET Pushing the R/L RESET button turns OFF all assigned reading lights.
Note: The function of this button is available on ground, only. The button is
disabled during flight.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 6/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Button Description
DAY/NIGHT Pushing the DAY/NIGHT button changes the characteristics and setting of
the lighting scenarios adapting to the current lighting outside the cabin
(day/night).
If the NIGHT mode is activated the signs are dimmed automatically
depending on the current cabin lighting intensity.
The active mode is highlighted green on the button.
DAY BOARD/NIGHT Pushing the DAY BOARD/NIGHT BOARD buttons starts the day boarding
BOARD lighting or respectively the night boarding lighting in the whole cabin.
DIM 50%/ DIM 10% Pushing the DIM buttons dims the lighting in the whole cabin.
ENTRY AREAS
Note: Entry areas are typically controlled by classic control. Refer to 06-30-10-30-50 Entry Area
Illumination Control Via FAP / Mini FAP.
CONTROL PAD FOR SCENARIO CONTROL
Cabin Zone Control Pad
All scenario control pads have the same functions and look the same except for the name of the control
pad, e.g. ECONOMY CLASS.
Button Description
SELECT Pushing the SELECT button displays an additional control pad (ADJUST).
Indicator Field Description
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 7/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Button Description
Mode and Status In the first line of the mode and status field the scenario title e.g. CRUISE is
displayed. The title of the current scenario remains displayed, even if it has
been stopped or it has ended, until a new scenario is selected.
The title of a scenario remains displayed until a new scenario is selected.
In the last line of the mode and status field the illumination status of the
corresponding area (e.g. ECONOMY CLASS) is displayed e.g. RUN.
The following illumination status are available:
- RUN: Lighting scenario is running.
- END: Lighting scenario has ended. The last settings of the previous
lighting scenario remain active until a new scenario or other settings are
selected. The name of the scenario remains in the first line of the mode
and status field.
- MOD: The lighting was modified by the ▴ or ▾ buttons. (These buttons are
disabled when a scenario is running.)
- OFF: The lighting is switched off.
- BRT: The lighting is switched to full brightness (typically bright white
light). This will interrupt a running scenario.
The cabin crew can use the ADJUST control pad to adjust the lighting for the selected cabin zone or
room.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 8/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
ADJUST CONTROL PAD (FAP)

ADJUST Control Pad (FAP)
Button Description
Zone wise Scenario Pushing a zone wise lighting scenario button starts the corresponding
Selection scenario in the assigned area.
e.g. CRUISE The activated button remains green (activated) as long as the scenario is
running.
The available zone wise lighting scenario buttons are displayed on the left
side of the ADJUST control pad.
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the lighting in the assigned area to typically
bright white light.
Note: If the BRT button is activated the scenario is interrupted .
▴ and ▾ Pushing ▴ or ▾ increases or decreases the brightness of the lighting in the
assigned area.
These buttons are disabled when a scenario is running.
OFF Pushing the OFF button turns OFF the lights in the assigned area.
Note: For safety reasons the staircase illumination can not be turned OFF
completely. It will always stay ON at a predefined brightness.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 9/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Button Description
SKIP END Pushing the SKIP END button skips the rest of the running scenario to its
end.
REPEAT Pushing the REPEAT button repeats the running scenario (infinite loop).
Pushing the button a second time terminates the loop.
RECOV. Pushing the RECOV. button synchronizes back an overridden scenario after
using BRT, ▴, ▾, OFF.
Note: The ▴ and ▾ buttons are only available when a scenario has ended).
HOLD Pushing the HOLD button pauses the scenario. Pushing the button a second
time continues the scenario.
Indicator Description
Brightness Indicates the current visual brightness (in % or graphically).
CABIN LIGHTING PAGE IN INITIALIZATION MODE

After the power-up of the Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) the cabin is illuminated in a
predefined brightness. All lighting pages on the FAP are displayed in the initialization mode:
There is no scenario active (the mode and status window is blank). All cabin areas are illuminated in
the predefined brightness.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 10/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Typical CABIN LIGHTING Page in Initialization Mode
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 11/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
STARTING A LIGHTING SCENARIO VIA FAP

Lighting scenarios can be started manually for selected cabin areas (zone wise scenarios) or for the
cabin (entire scenarios).
- See How to Start a Zone wise Lighting Scenario via FAP
- See How to Start an Entire Lighting Scenario via FAP
HOW TO START A ZONE WISE LIGHTING SCENARIO VIA FAP
Scenario Control CABIN LIGHTING per Deck Page (Main Deck)
1. To display the CABIN LIGHTING page push the LIGHTS button on the first level of the function
selector of the FAP
For information about the function selector: Refer to Operation of the FAP.
2. Select a deck from the deck selector on the CABIN LIGHTING page.
3. Push the SELECT button on the control pad of the desired cabin zone (e.g. ECONOMY CLASS).
The corresponding ADJUST control pad opens.
4. Select a lighting scenario from the ADJUST control pad. The activated button turns green (e.g.
CRUISE).
The selected zone wise lighting scenario starts in the assigned area.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 12/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
After a zone wise lighting scenario has started, it runs until its end. Its last visual brightness and color is
maintained after it has ended. The BRT button and the ▴ or ▾ buttons on the ADJUST control pad of the
assigned area can be used to adjust the illumination.
The zone wise lighting scenario can be overridden by any other scenario (entire or zone wise lighting
scenario).
HOW TO START AN ENTIRE LIGHTING SCENARIO VIA FAP
selector of the FAP. For information about the function selector: Refer to Operation of the FAP.
3. Select an entire lighting scenario from the GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS control pad. The activated
button turns green (e.g. DAY BOARD)
The selected entire lighting scenario starts in the whole cabin (the assigned areas).
After an entire lighting scenario has started, it runs until its end. Its last visual brightness and color is
maintained after it has ended. The BRT and OFF button on the ADJUST control pads of the individual
cabin zones can be used to adjust the illumination.
The entire lighting scenario can be overridden by any other lighting scenario (entire or zone wise
lighting scenario).
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 13/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
FINE TUNING SCENARIO CONTROLLED LIGHTS VIA FAP

Typically, it is possible to fine tune the illumination brightness of a scenario controlled area if no
scenario is running.
Note: It is not possible to fine tune a running scenario.
Below it is described how to typically modify the local illumination values (fine tuning).
selector of the FAP.
3. Push the SELECT button on the control pad of the desired zone, room or area . The corresponding
ADJUST control pad opens.
4. Use the ▴ or ▾ icon to increase or decrease the light brightness gradually.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-10 P 14/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Cabin Lighting System Control via Mini FAP

MINI FAP SCENARIO CONTROL
Applicable to: ALL
SCENARIO CONTROL CABIN LIGHTING MINI FAP PAGE

By pushing the LIGHTS button on the first level of the function selector of the mini FAP the CABIN
LIGHTING page is displayed.
For information about the function selector: Refer to Operation of the Mini FAP.
Typical Scenario Control CABIN LIGHTING Mini FAP Page
TYPICAL MINI FAP CABIN ZONE CONTROL PAD

All scenario control pads (CABIN ZONE or ROOM) have the same functions and look the same except
for the name of the control pad, e.g. ECONOMY CLASS.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-20 P 1/6

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Button Description
Field
Mode and In the first line of the mode and status field the scenario title e.g. CRUISE is displayed.
Status The title of the current scenario remains displayed, even if it has been stopped or it
has ended, until a new scenario is selected.
In the last line of the mode and status field the illumination status of the corresponding
area (e.g. ECONOMY CLASS) is displayed e.g. RUN.
- END: Lighting scenario has ended. The last settings of the previous lighting
scenario remain active until a new scenario or other settings are selected. The
name of the scenario remains in the first line of the mode and status field.
- MOD: The lighting was modified by the ▴ or ▾ icons. (These icons are disabled
when a scenario is running.)
- BRT: The lighting is switched to full brightness (typically bright white light). This will
interrupt a running scenario.
When the SELECT button is pushed on the cabin zone control pad, the ADJUST control pad is
displayed on the right side of the cabin zone control pad.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-20 P 2/6

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Adjust Control Pad (Mini FAP)
Button Description
Zone wise Scenario Pushing a zone wise lighting scenario button starts the corresponding
Selection scenario in the assigned area.
running.
The available zone wise lighting scenario buttons are displayed on the left
side of the ADJUST control pad.
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the lighting in the assigned area to typically
bright white light.
assigned area.
These icons are disabled when a scenario is running.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-20 P 3/6

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Button Description
SKIP END Pushing the SKIP END button skips the rest of the running scenario to its
end.
ENTRY AREAS / GALLEYS / STAIRS

Note: Entry areas, galleys and stairs are typically controlled by classic control:
- Refer to 06-30-10-30-50 Entry Area Illumination Control Via FAP / Mini FAP
- Refer to 06-30-10-30-70 Galley Illumination Control via FAP / Mini FAP
- Refer to 06-30-10-30-70 Stairs Illumination Control via FAP / Mini FAP
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-20 P 4/6

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
START ZONE WISE LIGHTING SCENARIO VIA MINI FAP

Typical Scenario Control CABIN LIGHTING Mini FAP Page
1. To display the CABIN LIGHTING page push the LIGHTS button on the function selector of the mini
FAP. For information about the function selector: Refer to Operation of Mini FAP.
2. Push the SELECT button of a room / cabin zone control pad.
The ADJUST control pad is displayed.
3. Select a lighting scenario from the ADJUST control pad.
The selected lighting scenario starts in the selected cabin zone.
After a zone wise lighting scenario has started, it runs until its end. Its last visual brightness and color is
maintained after it has ended. The BRT button and the ▴ or ▾ buttons on the ADJUST control pad of the
assigned area can be used to adjust the illumination.
The zone wise lighting scenario can be overridden by any other scenario (entire or zone wise lighting
scenario).
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-20 P 5/6

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-20 P 6/6

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Cabin Lighting System Control via AAP
AAP CABIN LIGHTING FUNCTIONS

Applicable to: ALL
The Additional Attendant Panel (AAP) has pushbuttons to control the cabin lighting. For more
information about the AAP: Refer to Additional Attendant Panel (AAP).
Typical Lighting Control Pushbuttons on the AAP
Pushbutton Description
CABIN (x) Pushing a CABIN pushbutton turns the light in the selected cabin zone to 100%
brightness.
ENTRY (x) Pushing an ENTRY pushbutton turns the light at the corresponding entry area to
100% brightness.
DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 pushbutton turns the light in the selected cabin zone / entry
area to 50% brightness.
DIM 2 Pushing the DIM 2 pushbutton turns the light in the selected cabin zone / entry
area to 10% brightness.
NIGHT Pushing the NIGHT button turns the light in the assigned cabin zone OFF.
Note: The light in the area of lavatories and galleys will remain at a predefined
low brightness.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
General Cabin Illumination
CABIN LIGHTING ELEMENTS OVERVIEW

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin lighting system has subsystems that depend on the cabin layout:
- Cabin zone illumination (e.g. First, Business and Economy Class)
- Room illumination (e.g. crew rest areas, galleys, work stations etc.)
- Entry area illumination
- Reading lights.
CONTROL MODES
Cabin lighting can be controlled via two different modes:
- Classic control (standard)
- Scenario control (optional)
Scenario control enables the cabin crew to select predefined lighting scenarios (e.g. BOARD, SLEEP
etc.).
Note: Typically, cabin lighting is controlled via classic control. However, if the cabin zones are
controlled via the optional scenario control, not only the control pads of the cabin zones are
different but also the GENERAL SETTINGS. Thus the CABIN LIGHTING page layout depends
on the control mode of the cabin zones.
TYPES OF LIGHT
There are different types of light installed in the cabin:
- Ceiling lights, e.g. light strips, spot lights
- Effect lights
- Staircase lights
- Lavatory lights: Refer to Description of the Lavatory Illumination
- Reading lights: Refer to Reading Lights — General.
For more information about types of light: Refer to Types of Light.
BRIGHTNESS
After the power-up of the CIDS, all cabin lights illuminate with predefined brightness (typically bright
white).
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-40 P 1/4

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Note: In case of low cabin-pressure, all lights are switched to predefined brightness (typically bright
white) automatically, independently from any selected light setting.
The general cabin illumination is dimmable and is typically assigned to up to four illumination levels:
- BRIGHT: 100% visual brightness
- DIM1: 50% visual brightness
- DIM2: 10% visual brightness
- NIGHT 1% visual brightness.
A centralized ON/OFF command button (GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS) enables full bright illumination
for cleaning or maintenance purposes (only active on ground).
Note: The light brightness is automatically dimmed in the cockpit access area if the cockpit door is
open with engines running.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-40 P 2/4

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS - FAP SCENARIO CONTROL

Applicable to: ALL
An additional control pad on the CABIN LIGHTING pages provides buttons for GENERAL CABIN
SETTINGS. The general cabin settings have an impact on the entire cabin lighting system.
Button Description
MAIN ON/OFF The MAIN ON/OFF button is part of the GENERAL CABIN
SETTINGS and is only available on ground. It is a toggle button:
- If the cabin lighting is ON (MAIN ON state) and the button is
pushed, the cabin lighting will go OFF. The button will turn from
green (activated) to gray (enabled).
Note: For safety reasons the staircase illumination will stay
ON at a predefined brightness level.
- If the cabin lighting is OFF (MAIN OFF state) and the button is
pushed, the cabin lighting will go ON (MAIN ON state). The
button will turn from gray (enabled) to green (activated).
Note: Pushing any light control button on any CIDS control panel
when the cabin lighting is OFF (MAIN OFF state) will switch
the cabin lighting to the MAIN ON state. However, only the
lights corresponding to the pushed light control button and
the lavatory illumination will go ON.
R/L SET By pushing the R/L SET button, all assigned reading lights are
turned ON.
Note: The function of this button is available on ground, only. The
button is disabled during flight.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-40 P 3/4

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Button Description
R/L RESET By pushing the R/L RESET button, all assigned reading lights are
turned OFF.
Note: The function of this button is available on ground, only. The
button is disabled during flight.
DAY/NIGHT Pushing the DAY/NIGHT button changes the characteristics and
setting of the lighting scenarios adapting to the current lighting
outside the cabin (day / night).
If the NIGHT mode is activated the signs are dimmed automatically
depending on the current cabin lighting intensity.
The active mode is highlighted green on the button.
Entire Scenario Scenario buttons Pushing an entire scenario button starts the corresponding entire
Button (several different lighting scenario in the assigned areas.
buttons, e.g. DAY Pushing the button again starts the currently selected entire lighting
BOARD) scenario again.
Pushing another entire scenario button starts the other entire lighting
scenario.
DIM 50% / DIM There are two DIM buttons (DIM10% and DIM50%) Pushing the DIM
10% buttons dims the lighting in the whole cabin to the according light
intensity.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-40 P 4/4

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Entry Area Illumination
ENTRY AREA ILLUMINATION CONTROL VIA FAP / MINI FAP

Applicable to: ALL
Each entry area illumination can be controlled individually via:

- Mini FAP.
ENTRY AREA ILLUMINATION VIA FAP / MINI FAP
FAP or mini FAP provide individual control pads for each entry area on the CABIN LIGHTING pages
(deck related) to control the entry area illumination.
Entry Area Control Pad
Button Description
BRT Pushing the BRT button typically turns the light in the assigned entry area to
100% visual brightness.
DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 button typically turns the light in the assigned entry area
to 50% visual brightness.
DIM 2 Pushing the DIM 2 button typically turns the light in the assigned entry area
to 10% visual brightness.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-50 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
HOW TO CONTROL THE ENTRY AREA ILLUMINATION VIA FAP / MINI FAP
Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO CONTROL THE ENTRY AREA ILLUMINATION VIA FAP OR MINI FAP
1. Push the LIGHTS button on the first level of the function selector.
2. Select a deck from the deck selector (FAP only).
3. To switch ON the entry area lights at full brightness push BRT on the entry area control pad.
The entry area lights will illuminate with the corresponding brightness.
4. To set the brightness to a desired value push the corresponding button:
- Push DIM 1 to dim the entry area lights to 50% visual brightness.
- Push DIM 2 to dim the entry area lights to 10% visual brightness.
5. To switch OFF the entry area lights push the active (illuminated) button, i.e. DIM 1, DIM 2 or BRT.
The entry area lights will turn off.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-50 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Cabin Zone Illumination
CABIN ZONE ILLUMINATION CONTROL VIA FAP / MINI FAP SCENARIO CONTROL
Applicable to: ALL
To control the cabin zone illumination, each cabin zone has its own control pad.
Button Description
Indicator Field Description
Mode and In the first line of the mode and status field the scenario title e.g. CRUISE is displayed.
Status The title of the current scenario remains displayed, even if it has been stopped or it has
ended, until a new scenario is selected.
In the last line of the mode and status field the illumination status of the corresponding
area (e.g. ECONOMY CLASS) is displayed e.g. RUN.
- END: Lighting scenario has ended. The last settings of the previous lighting scenario
remain active until a new scenario or other settings are selected. The name of the
scenario remains in the first line of the mode and status field.
- MOD: The lighting was modified by the ▴ or ▾ icons. (These icons are disabled when a
scenario is running.)
- BRT: The lighting is switched to full brightness (typically bright white light). This will
interrupt a running scenario.
When the SELECT button is pushed on the cabin zone control pad, the ADJUST control pad is
displayed on the right side of the cabin zone control pad.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-60 P 1/4

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Button Description
Zone wise Scenario Pushing a zone wise lighting scenario button starts the corresponding scenario
Selection in the assigned area.
running.
The available zone wise lighting scenario buttons are displayed on the left side
of the ADJUST control pad.
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the lighting in the assigned area to typically bright
white light.
assigned area.
These buttons are disabled when a scenario is running.
SKIP END Pushing the SKIP END button skips the rest of the running scenario to its end.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-60 P 2/4

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Button Description
HOW TO CONTROL CABIN ZONE ILLUMINATION VIA SCENARIO CONTROL

Applicable to: ALL
3. Depending on the time of the day, push the DAY/NIGHT button on the GENERAL CABIN
SETTINGS control pad.
4. Push the SELECT button of the selected cabin zone control pad (e.g. First Class). The ADJUST
control pad for this cabin zone will be displayed.
5. Push any scenario button on the ADJUST control pad to start the corresponding scenario.
6. To turn the lights in the corresponding cabin zone OFF after the scenario, push the OFF button.
7. To increase or decrease the lighting brightness after the scenario in the corresponding cabin zone,
push either ▴ or ▾.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-60 P 3/4

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-60 P 4/4

CCOM 02-Aug-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Room Illumination
CREW REST AREA ILLUMINATION
Applicable to: ALL
CREW REST AREA ILLUMINATION CONTROL

The lighting of each crew rest area can be controlled individually via Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) or
mini FAP.
CREW REST AREA ILLUMINATION CONTROL VIA FAP / MINI FAP
The mini FAP in the cabin crew rest areas provide control pads for the control of the illumination of the
crew rest areas on the CABIN LIGHTING page. The control pads have the following buttons:
Button Description
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the light in the assigned crew rest area to
100 % visual brightness.
DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 button turns the light in the assigned crew rest area to
approximately 50 % visual brightness.
DIM 2 Pushing the DIM 2 button turns the light in the assigned crew rest area to
approximately 10 % visual brightness.
HOW TO CONTROL THE CREW REST AREA ILLUMINATION VIA FAP OR MINI FAP
3. To switch ON the crew rest area lighting push BRT on the corresponding control pad.
The crew rest area lighting will illuminate with the corresponding brightness.
- Push DIM 1 to dim the light in the crew rest area to approximately 50% visual brightness.
- Push DIM 2 to dim the light in the crew rest area to approximately 10% visual brightness.
5. To switch OFF the light in the crew rest area push the active (illuminated) button, i.e. DIM 1, DIM 2
or BRT. The light in the crew rest area will turn OFF.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-70 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
LAVATORY ILLUMINATION
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LAVATORY ILLUMINATION

Fluorescent tubes provide the general illumination in the lavatories. Additionally, effect lights are
installed for the mirror and washstand.
Each lavatory is typically illuminated by the following lights:
- A light strip in the lavatory ceiling (ceiling lights)
- A light strip above the washstand (washstand lights)
- Mirror lights.
Typical Lavatory Illumination
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-70 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Note: For maintenance purpose or for cleaning the lighting logic can be overridden from the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP): Pushing the LAV MAINT hard key will set all lavatory lights to 100%
visual brightness, even if the door is fully open. Refer to Operation of the Lavatory Illumination.
LAVATORY ILLUMINATION CONTROL
The lavatory illumination is controlled by the Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS).
Sensors in the lavatory door frame monitor the door status (door open, door LOCKED or door
UNLOCKED). The door status influences the brightness of the lavatory lights.
Note: In lavatories for handicapped passengers, the ceiling light is constantly at 100% brightness,
independent from the sensors.
Door Status Brightness of the Ceiling Light Brightness of the Mirror /

Washstand Lights
Door open The ceiling light is dimmed to The mirror and washstand lights are
approximately 10% visual brightness. OFF.
Door closed and The ceiling light is dimmed to The mirror and washstand lights are
UNLOCKED approximately 50% visual brightness. OFF.
Door closed and The ceiling light is turned to typically The mirror and washstand lights are
LOCKED 100% visual brightness. ON (100%).
Note: For maintenance or cleaning purposes the illumination logic can be overridden from the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP): Pushing the LAV MAINT hard key will set all lavatory lights to typically
bright white light, even if the door is open.
LAVATORY ILLUMINATION IN CASE OF SMOKE DETECTION AND CABIN DECOMPRESSION
If there was a cabin decompression, the white light in the lavatory switches automatically to maximum
brightness.
If smoke was detected in a lavatory, the white light in this lavatory switches automatically to maximum
brightness.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-70 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
GALLEY ILLUMINATION
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
GALLEY ILLUMINATION CONTROL VIA FAP

The FAP provide control pads for each galley on the CABIN LIGHTING page to control the illumination
in the corresponding galley.
Example of a Galley Control Pad
Button Description
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the light in the assigned galley to 100% visual
brightness.
DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 button turns the light in the assigned galley to
approximately 50% visual brightness.
HOW TO CONTROL GALLEY LIGHTING VIA FAP OR MINI FAP

3. To switch ON the galley lighting push BRT on the corresponding control pad.
The galley lighting will illuminate with the corresponding brightness.
- Push DIM 1 to dim the galley lighting to approximately 50% visual brightness.
- Push DIM 2 to dim the galley lighting to approximately 10% visual brightness.
5. To switch OFF the galley lighting push the active (illuminated) button, i.e. DIM 1, DIM 2 or BRT. The
galley lighting will turn off.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-70 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
GALLEY ILLUMINATION CONTROL VIA AAP

The AAP in the galleys provide pushbuttons to control the illumination of the galley:
Button Description
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the light in the assigned galley to 100% visual
brightness.
HOW TO CONTROL GALLEY ILLUMINATION VIA THE AAP

1. On the AAP in the galley push the BRT pushbutton to turn the lighting to full brightness.
2. Push DIM 1 or DIM 2 to dim the lighting 50% or 10% brightness. The galley lights will illuminate with
the corresponding brightness.
3. Switch OFF the galley lights by pushing the active (illuminated) pushbutton, i. e. DIM 1, DIM 2 or
BRT.
4. To switch ON the galley lights again, push one of the pushbuttons (BRT, DIM 1 or DIM 2).
The galley lights will turn off.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-70 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
STAIRS ILLUMINATION
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
STAIRS ILLUMINATION CONTROL VIA FAP / MINI FAP

The FAP provide control pads for the stairs from the Main Deck to the Upper Deck on the CABIN
LIGHTING page to control the illumination in the corresponding area.
Typical Stairs Control Pad
Button Description
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the light in the assigned stairs to 100% visual
brightness.
DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 button turns the light in the assigned stairs to
DIM 2 Pushing the DIM 2 button turns the light in the assigned stairs to
Note: For safety reasons the stairs illumination can not be turned OFF. It will always stay ON at a
predefined minimum brightness.
HOW TO CONTROL STAIRS LIGHTING VIA FAP OR MINI FAP
3. To switch stairs lighting to full brightness push BRT on the corresponding control pad.
- Push DIM 1 to dim the stairs lighting to approximately 50% visual brightness.
- Push DIM 2 to dim the stairs lighting to approximately 10% visual brightness.
5. To switch the stairs lighting to minimum visual brightness push the active (illuminated) button, i.e.
DIM 1, DIM 2 or BRT.
Note: For safety reasons the stairs illumination can not be turned OFF. It will always stay ON at a
predefined minimum brightness.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-70 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Miscellaneous Lights
WORK LIGHTS
Applicable to: ALL
The work lights illuminate special working areas for the cabin crewmembers and the attendant seats. It
is a direct down light, similar to the (passenger) reading light. The work lights are manually adjustable
to an angle of +/- 25° and can be individually switched on and off.
WORK LIGHTS LOCATION
The work lights are installed in:
- Entry areas
• Cabin door linings
• Ceiling panels of the attendant stations, next to the cabin attendant seats
• etc.
- Rooms
• Galleys
• Crew Work Stations
• etc.
- Cabin Zones
• Some Passenger Service Units (PSU) above a seat row if a cabin attendant seat is part of this
particular row.
WORK LIGHT SWITCH
The lights are controlled individually by switches near the work light.
The switches are located:
- Next to the lights on a PSU.
- In the cabin door linings.
- Next to the cabin attendant seats (wall-mounted).
- Next to the cabin attendant work areas (wall-mounted)
- On galley switch panels.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-80 P 1/10

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Typical Work Light Switch
READING LIGHTS
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT READING LIGHTS

Reading lights are high intensity lights that illuminate a limited area in front of a seated passenger. For
each seat at least one reading light is installed so that a seated person can read without the aid of
another source of light.
Reading lights are installed in the Passenger Service Unit (PSU). Reading lights are fixed at different
angles aligned with the corresponding seat to minimize the disturbance of the neighboring passenger.
Each passenger can control his own reading light by a pushbutton on the overhead Passenger Service
Unit (PSU) or by a key on the seat-mounted Passenger Control Unit (PCU).
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-80 P 2/10

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
CONTROL FROM THE PASSENGER SEAT

There are two possibilities to control the reading lights:
- A pushbutton on the overhead Passenger Service Units (PSUs)
- A key on the seat-mounted Passenger Control Units (PCUs).
CENTRALIZED CONTROL BUTTONS ON THE CONTROL DISPLAYS
It is possible to control all reading lights or individual reading lights via centralized control buttons on
the CIDS control panels.
ALL READING LIGHTS
To turn ON or OFF all passenger reading lights, CIDS provides centralized control buttons (SET
and RESET) on the FAP / mini FAP.
The centralized control buttons are located on the CABIN LIGHTING page.
Note: The SET and RESET function of the reading lights in the whole cabin is available on
ground, only.
Button / Description
Function
R/L SET Pushing the R/L SET button turns ON all
assigned reading lights.
Note: The function of this button is available
on ground, only. The button is disabled
during flight.
The R/L SET button on the FAPs and mini FAPs
does not show the status of the reading lights
(i.e. the button is not illuminated green when the
reading lights ON).
R/L RESET Pushing the R/L RESET button turns OFF all
assigned reading lights.
Note: The function of this button is available
on ground, only. The button is disabled
during flight.
The R/L RESET button on the FAPs and mini
FAPs does not show the status of the reading
lights.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-80 P 3/10

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
INDIVIDUAL READING LIGHTS

Individual reading lights can be controlled via a SET/RESET buttons on the SEAT SETTINGS page
of the FAP (not available on the mini FAP). For more information about the SEAT SETTINGS page:
Refer to 06-80-30 Seat Settings - Reading Lights Settings
Typical SEAT SETTING Page for Reading Light Settings
Function Description
R/L SET Pushing the R/L SET button turns ON reading lights for individual passenger
seats.
R/L RESET Pushing the R/L RESET button turns OFF reading lights for individual
passenger seats.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-80 P 4/10

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
RESETTING ALL READING LIGHTS

The R/L SETand R/L RESET button function is available on ground, only.
Control Buttons for General Reading Light Settings
HOW TO TURN ON ALL READING LIGHTS ON THE DECK

1. Push the LIGHTS button on the first level of the function selector of the FAP to open the CABIN
LIGHTING page.
2. Select a deck from the deck selector.
3. To turn ON all reading lights on the corresponding deck, push the R/L SET button.
HOW TO TURN OFF ALL READING LIGHTS ON THE DECK
1. Push the LIGHTS button on the first level of the function selector of the FAP to open the CABIN
LIGHTING page.
3. To turn OFF all reading lights on the corresponding deck, push the R/L RESET button.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-80 P 5/10

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
RESETTING INDIVIDUAL READING LIGHTS

Use the SEAT SETTINGS page to turn ON or OFF individual reading lights.
Typical CABIN STATUS - All Page
1. Push the SEAT SETTING button on the first level of the function selector of the FAP to open the
CABIN LIGHTING page.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-80 P 6/10

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Typical SEAT SETTINGS Page – ALL Page

For information about the deck selector: Refer to Operation of the FAP.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-80 P 7/10

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Typical SEAT SETTINGS Page (Main Deck)
3. Push the SELECT button of the READING LIGHT control pad. The READING LIGHT SETTINGS
control pad is displayed.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-80 P 8/10

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Typical READING LIGHT SETTINGS Control Pad
4. To clear any previous selections, push the CLEAR button.

Note: The R/L SET and the R/L RESET buttons have no status indication. If a seat selection is
not completed and the READING LIGHT SETTINGS page is re-selected (page left and
selected again), the target seat window will display the previous, not completed, selection
(seat row number / seat identifier).
This indication handling is necessary to prevent misleading system operations if the
READING LIGHT SETTINGS control pad on the SEAT SETTINGS page is active on other
FAPs.
5. Select an individual seat in the next three steps:
6. To select a seat row, use the ▴ and ▾ icons corresponding to the left list (numbers) . The selected
seat row is highlighted and displayed in the field above the lists.
7. If the desired seat row number is highlighted in the list, push SELECT.
8. To select an individual seat, use the ▴ and ▾ icons corresponding to the right list (letters). The
selected seat is highlighted and displayed in the field above the lists.
9. If the desired seat is highlighted in the list, push SELECT.
10.To turn OFF the reading light of the selected seat, push R/L RESET.
11.To turn back ON the reading light of the selected seat, push R/L SET.
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-80 P 9/10

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Note: If the cabin crew selects a different seat identifier before the selection was confirmed via the
SELECT button, the current identifier in the target window will be overwritten.
If the cabin crew selects a different seat row number, the current indication for the seat row
number in the target seat window will be replaced. In addition, the seat identifier indication in
the target seat window will be deleted (the seat identifier has to be selected again).
UAE A380 06-30-10-30-80 P 10/10

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
LOST CABIN LIGHTING CONTROL FROM FAP

Applicable to: ALL
If the cabin lighting control via FAP or mini FAP is not possible follow the procedure to recover a frozen
FAP: Refer to 04-40 Recovering a Frozen FAP
UAE A380 06-30-10-40 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
UAE A380 06-30-10-40 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Emergency Lighting System
A380 General
EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM - OVERVIEW

Applicable to: ALL
The emergency lighting system supplies basic illumination to the cabin and marks the exits and escape
paths during emergencies.
The emergency lighting system operates independently from the other lighting systems. Some parts of
the emergency lighting system also operate when there is no emergency. Other special items of the
emergency system are integrated parts of the lamps and light units of the normal lighting systems.
The emergency lighting system is controlled and supplied by the Emergency Power Supply Units
(EPSU). The EPSUs are able to supply all emergency lights for a minimum of 10 minutes.
The operation of the emergency lighting system depends on the position of the control switch on the
cockpit overhead-panel (EMER EXIT LT sw) and the position of the control switch on the Flight
Attendant Panels (EMER ON sw) in the cabin. Refer to Emergency Lighting - System Control.
The emergency lighting system has different functions:
- In standard operation:
• Show the way to the exits to leave the aircraft.
- In an emergency:
• Illuminate the cabin, if the general illumination has failed
• Show the way to the exits, if the cabin is full of smoke
• Illuminate the escape paths on the wings
• Illuminate the escape slides.
UAE A380 06-30-20-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A380 General
UAE A380 06-30-20-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A380 Location
EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM - SUBSYSTEMS

Applicable to: ALL
The emergency lighting system includes:

- CABIN EMERGENCY LIGHTS
Emergency lights are installed in the cabin (ceiling, stairs).
- EMERGENCY ESCAPE PATH MARKING SYSTEM (EEPMS)
Different systems are available on customer request. Seat-mounted or floor-mounted lights show
the escape path along the aisles to the emergency exit-doors.
- LAVATORY EMERGENCY LIGHTS
One LED light is installed to ensure illumination in the lavatory.
- EMERGENCY EXIT SIGNS
EXIT-LOCATION and EXIT-MARKING and additional exit signs show the location of the exits.
- SLIDE EMERGENCY LIGHTS
An evacuation slide illumination is part of each slide. It gives sufficient illumination to show the
evacuation path and ground threshold of each slide.
UAE A380 06-30-20-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A380 Location
UAE A380 06-30-20-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
EMERGENCY LIGHTING - EXIT SIGNS

The purpose of the exit signs is to point out clearly to the passenger the next exit. They are illuminated
when the emergency lighting system is activated.
Red letters and arrows are used on lenses with a light emitting surfaces.
EXIT LOCATOR
Exit Locators, which are visible from every spot of the aisles, are installed to indicate the position of the
exit areas. An Area Call Panel (ACP) is integrated in the housing of the Exit Locators.
Exit Locator
EXIT MARKER
Exit Marker indicate the position of the doors and are installed right above the exits. A transparent
window for a sill light is found at the bottom side of the Exit Marker. The exit marking sign illuminates
the doorsill and the door handles when the emergency lighting system is activated.
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 1/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Exit Marker
ADDITIONAL EXIT SIGNS

Additional exit signs are necessary to guide passengers from the stairs to the emergency exits.
Additional exit signs are also installed in the forward part of the cabin in the upper deck, to guide the
passengers out of the dead end to the first available exit.
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 2/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Additional Exit Sign at Cabin Wall
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 3/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Additional Exit Sign at the Cabin Stairs
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 4/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
EMERGENCY LIGHTING - EXIT SIGNS

The purpose of the exit signs is to point out clearly to the passenger the next exit. They are illuminated
when the emergency lighting system is activated.
EXIT LOCATOR
Exit Locators, which are visible from every spot of the aisles, are installed to indicate the position of the
exit areas. An Area Call Panel (ACP) is integrated in the housing of the Exit Locators.
Exit Locator
EXIT MARKER
Exit Marker indicate the position of the doors and are installed right above the exits. A transparent
window for a sill light is found at the bottom side of the Exit Marker. The exit marking sign illuminates
the doorsill and the door handles when the emergency lighting system is activated.
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 5/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Exit Marker
ADDITIONAL EXIT SIGNS

Additional exit signs are necessary to guide passengers from the stairs to the emergency exits.
Additional exit signs are also installed in the forward part of the cabin in the upper deck, to guide the
passengers out of the dead end to the first available exit.
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 6/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Additional Exit Sign at the Cabin Wall
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 7/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Additional Exit Sign at the Cabin Stairs
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 8/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
EMERGENCY LIGHTING - CABIN EMERGENCY LIGHTS

The cabin emergency lights are designed to illuminate the cabin sufficiently to identify the emergency
exit areas. These are the different types of cabin emergency lights:
- Ceiling Emergency LED Lights
- Emergency LED spotlights
- Staircase LED light
CEILING EMERGENCY LED LIGHTS
The Ceiling Emergency LED Lights (CELLI) are installed between two ceiling panels in the upper and
main deck over the main aisles in longitudinal direction. The Ceiling Emergency LED Lights illuminate
the aisles when the emergency lighting system is activated.
Example of Ceiling Emergency LED Lights
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 9/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
EMERGENCY LED SPOTLIGHTS

LED spotlights are used in entry areas, cross aisles, staircases and special areas, where Ceiling
Emergency LED Lights (CELLI) are not possible to install. Most of these spotlights are equipped with
integrated emergency lights to illuminate the above mentioned areas when the emergency lighting
system is activated.
STAIRCASE LED LIGHT
The stairs are considered as evacuation path. Therefore emergency light is provided. The stairs in the
forward, aft and cockpit staircase are illuminated by LED strips. The LED strips are located under each
step.
Example of Staircase LED Lights
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 10/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
EMERGENCY LIGHTING - CABIN EMERGENCY LIGHTS

The cabin emergency lights are designed to illuminate the cabin sufficiently to identify the emergency
exit areas. These are the different types of cabin emergency lights:
- Ceiling Emergency LED Lights
- Emergency LED spotlights
- Staircase LED light
CEILING EMERGENCY LED LIGHTS
The Ceiling Emergency LED Lights (CELLI) are installed between two ceiling panels in the upper and
main deck over the main aisles in longitudinal direction. The Ceiling Emergency LED Lights illuminate
the aisles when the emergency lighting system is activated.
Example of Ceiling Emergency LED Lights
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 11/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
EMERGENCY LED SPOTLIGHTS

LED spotlights are used in entry areas, cross aisles, staircases and special areas, where Ceiling
Emergency LED Lights (CELLI) are not possible to install. Most of these spotlights are equipped with
integrated emergency lights to illuminate the above mentioned areas when the emergency lighting
system is activated.
STAIRCASE LED LIGHT
The stairs are considered as evacuation path. Therefore emergency light is provided. The stairs in the
forward, aft and cockpit staircase are illuminated by LED strips. The LED strips are located under each
step.
Example of Staircase LED Lights
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 12/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
EMERGENCY LIGHTING - EMERGENCY ESCAPE PATH MARKING SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
EMERGENCY ESCAPE PATH MARKING SYSTEM

The Emergency Escape Path Marking System (EEPMS) will guide the passenger to the next exit under
smoke conditions. It consists of a light every two meters:
- Seat-mounted emergency light units, mounted on the aisle side on the outboard seat on rows
depending on the cabin layout
- EEPMS exit identifiers, mounted in the door frame lining in the immediate vicinity of each exit
- Wall mounted floodlights (WMFL) for illumination of areas in front of lavatories, galleys, stowages,
dividers etc. depending on the cabin layout.
- Edge mounted floodlights (EMFL) for illumination of cross aisles and areas in front of lavatories,
galleys, stowages, dividers etc. depending on the cabin layout.
For all light units of the EEPMS LED technology is used. L2
OVERWING EMERGENCY LIGHT

Applicable to: ALL
Door M3 (main deck) has an emergency door light that functions as overwing emergency light. In case
of an emergency the overwing emergency light will guide passengers to the emergency slides.
ESCAPE SLIDE EMERGENCY LIGHTS

Applicable to: ALL
The escape slide emergency lights illuminate the escape slides of all doors and the area in front of the
slides when they are deployed.
At door M3 (main deck) a special form of escape slide is installed, which leads as an escape path from
the door to the edge of the wing, where the slide goes down. This escape path on the wing is also
illuminated by the Emergency Slide Lights.
The emergency slide lights are integrated into the slides.
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 13/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
EMERGENCY LIGHTING - SYSTEM CONTROL

Applicable to: ALL
The emergency lighting system can be controlled from the:

- Cabin
- Cockpit.
The emergency lighting is normally controlled via the EMER EXIT LT sw on the overhead panel in the
cockpit. However the FAP has an EMER hardkey to activate the emergency lighting system manually.
The emergency lighting system can be operated during all phases of flight.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM CONTROL FROM THE COCKPIT
The flight crew activates and controls the emergency lighting system via the EMER EXIT LT sw on the
overhead panel in the cockpit.
EMER EXIT LT
The EMER EXIT LT sw has three positions:

- ON
- ARM
- OFF.
Next to the EMER EXIT LT sw is an OFF indicator. When the aircraft power supply is available, and the
control switch is in the OFF position, the indicator shows OFF in amber. This indicates that the
emergency lighting system is not supplied, and the emergency lights will not be switched on, even in
an electrical emergency.
With the EMER EXIT LT sw in the ON position, emergency lights, exit lights and escape path marking
lights are switched ON.
With the EMER EXIT LT sw in the ARM position, emergency lights, exit lights and escape path marking
lights will be switched ON automatically, if normal power is lost (electrical emergency).
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 14/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM CONTROL FROM THE CABIN

Manual activation of the system is also possible from the EMER pb-sw, which is a hardkey on the FAP
.
Typical FAP Hardkey Panel with EMER pb-sw
COCKPIT WAYLIGHT
Applicable to: ALL
The cockpit waylight is intended to be used in emergency situations:

- If no normal power for cabin lighting is available when the (flight) crew wants to access the aircraft
and the cockpit.
The cockpit waylight is battery powered from the EPSU at door M1L, L2
The cockpit waylight turns OFF automatically after 60 seconds. Switching ON the cockpit waylight is L1
limited to 10 times before engines are running.

COCKPIT WAYLIGHT PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH AT CABIN DOOR M1L
If entering the aircraft when the cabin lights are off (MAIN OFF), the flight crew can illuminate the way
to the cockpit using the COCKPIT WAYLIGHT pb-sw , located at door M1L.
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 15/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Cockpit Waylight Pushbutton-Switch at Cabin Door M1L
COCKPIT WAYLIGHT PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH AT THE COCKPIT DOOR

In order to provide waylight also for leaving the aircraft a second pushbutton-switch is installed on the
left side of the cockpit door next to the lock.
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 16/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
Cockpit Waylight Pushbutton-Switch at the Cockpit Door
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 17/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
UAE A380 06-30-20-30 P 18/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE DOORS / SLIDES PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The status of the doors and slides can be checked at any time via the DOORS / SLIDES page on any
Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).
The cabin crew can view the doors / slides status via two pages:
- DOORS / SLIDES page displaying the status of all doors
- DOORS / SLIDES MAIN DECK or DOORS / SLIDES UPPER DECK page.
For more information about the:
- Access of the pages: Refer to 06-40-20 Position of the DOORS / SLIDES Page on the FAP
- Description of the pages: Refer to 06-40-30 DOORS / SLIDES Page on the FAP
- Door location: Refer to 09-10-10 Door Location
- Door operation: Refer to 09-10-30 Normal Opening from the Inside, Refer to 09-10-30 Normal
Closing from the Inside
SYSTEM DEVIATION WITH OPERATIONAL IMPACT

Temporary DU: 00026823.0001001
Applicable to: ALL
SUMMARY
In some cases, during flight, the CIDS Caution button flashes amber with an information message
indicating the Doors/Slides page.
When the cabin crew selects the corresponding Doors/Slides page:
- there is no associated failure message,
- the information message disappears,
- the CIDS caution button becomes steady amber for the rest of the flight.
OPERATIONAL RECOMMENDATION
When the Caution button flashes on the FAP, with an information message indicating the Doors/Slides
page, the cabin crew must:
- select the Doors/Slides page,
- check there is no associated failure message
If there is no associated failure message, the cabin crew should disregard the caution indication.
UAE A380 06-40-10 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Apr-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
General
A380
UAE A380 06-40-10 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Apr-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE DOORS / SLIDES PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the DOORS / SLIDES page by pushing the DOOR/SLIDES button on the
first level of the function selector on the FAP.
Pushing a button from the deck selector on the DOORS / SLIDES page displays the
- DOORS / SLIDES ALL page, or
- DOORS / SLIDES UPPER DECK page, or
- DOORS / SLIDES MAIN DECK page.
DOORS / SLIDES All Page on the FAP
Note: As the avionics compartment door is not equipped with a slide, disregard part of the legend
"SLIDE: ARMED & READY".
UAE A380 06-40-20 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-40-20 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
Description
A380
DOORS / SLIDES PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The status of the doors and slides can be checked at any time on all Flight Attendant Panels (FAPs).
For information about the
- Access of the pages: Refer to 06-40-20 Position of the DOORS / SLIDES Page on the FAP
- Door location: Refer to 09-10-10 Door Location
- Door operation: Refer to 09-10-30 Normal Opening from the Inside
DOORS / SLIDES All Page on the FAP
- All closed doors with armed slides are shown as green rectangles inside the aircraft symbol,
- All unlocked doors are shown as red rectangles outside the aircraft symbol,
- All open doors are shown as red rectangles outside the aircraft symbol, and
- Information about bottle pressure (low) as well as slide condition (disarmed) are shown in amber
text next to the related door.
UAE A380 06-40-30 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
Description
A380
In addition, the DOORS / SLIDES page provides messages on which the cabin crew has to act: Refer
to 06-40-40 Messages on the FAP
UAE A380 06-40-30 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
Indications
A380
MESSAGES ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
DOORS/SLIDES RELATED MESSAGES

The DOORS / SLIDES page provides messages as shown in the table below. The cabin crew has to
act on these messages as described below.
Message on the FAP Crew Action

NO DATA AVAILABLE If this message is displayed on the DOORS/SLIDES page of the
FAP, the cabin crew must report to the flight crew.
MANUAL USE ONLY If this message is displayed next to a door designation on the
aircraft symbol of the DOORS/SLIDES page, the cabin crew can
only open this door manually. There will be no automatic power
assistance to open the door.
SLIDE FAILURE If this message is displayed next to a door designation on the
aircraft symbol of the DOORS/SLIDES page, the cabin crew can not
use this door for evacuation. The slide for this door is not available
for use.
SLIDE DISARMED If this message is displayed next to a door designation on the
aircraft symbol of the DOORS/SLIDES page, the cabin crew must
check the slide lever position of this door. If the slide lever is in the
disarmed position the cabin crew must move the lever to the armed
position. Check the FAP indication afterwards.
CHECK DOOR If this message is displayed next to a door designation on the
aircraft symbol of the DOORS/SLIDES page and the aircraft is on
ground, the cabin crew must check the door handles. The cabin
crew can not use the corresponding door for evacuation, if the door
is blocked.
Note: If any of the above messages is displayed, the cabin crew should make an entry into the digital
cabin logbook. Refer to 06-200-10 General Information about the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL)
UPPER DECK AVIONICS COMPARTMENT DOOR RELATED MESSAGES
On the DOORS / SLIDES page there is a further information pad concerning the condition of the Upper
Deck avionics compartment door. This door is located on the FWD part of the Upper Deck cabin.
UAE A380 06-40-40 P 1/4

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
Indications
A380
Closed Doors (Normal Condition) (AVNCS marked in Green)
In closed (normal) condition, the avionics compartment door (AVNCS) is marked by a green rectangle.
Messages on the FAP for "Check Upper Avionics Door" and Their Related Buttons
In the case the Upper Deck avionics door is detected as not closed (e. g. an unauthorized opening):
- A triple chime sounds.
UAE A380 06-40-40 P 2/4

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
Indications
A380
The chime is not available in the PDF-format environment.

- On the DOORS / SLIDES page of the FAP:
- The rectangle next to the AVNCS text message will turn from green to red.
- The "Check Upper Avionics Door" pad will come up. This pad contains a RESET CHIME and a
CONFIRM CHECK pushbutton.
Note: The Upper Deck avionics door monitoring (consisting of the triple chime and the "Check Upper
Avionics Door" pad) is only active if all cabin doors are closed.
The cabin crewmembers will check the condition of the Upper Deck avionics compartment door and
ensure that the avionics compartment door is closed.
- On the FAP: Pushing the RESET CHIME pushbutton will switch off the chime.
Note: The chime will be active as long as the RESET CHIME button or the CONFIRM CHECK
button is not pushed.
- If the avionics compartment door is open, a cabin crewmember will close the door from the cabin
side.
- On the FAP the following situations will be possible:
- As long as the avionics compartment door is OPEN: The message AVNCS CHECKED will
appear next to the aircraft symbol, after the CHECK CONFIRM pushbutton has been pushed.
- If the avionics compartment door is CLOSED, the rectangle next to the AVNCS text message
will turn green. After the CONFIRM CHECK pushbutton has been pushed, it is confirmed that
the avionics compartment door has been checked and is safe. The "Check Upper Avionics
Door" pad will disappear.
Note: The "Check Upper Avionics Door" pad will be displayed until the following both
conditions are met:
1. The CONFIRM CHECK pushbutton is pushed, AND
2. The Upper Deck avionics compartment door is closed.
Note: The cabin crew will make an entry into the digital cabin logbook and / or inform the flight
crewmembers, taking into consideration airline policy.Refer to 06-200-10 General Information
about the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL)
UAE A380 06-40-40 P 3/4

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
Indications
A380
UAE A380 06-40-40 P 4/4

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
AIR CONDITIONING/TEMPERATURE CONTROL
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM / TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Applicable to: MSN 0007-0009, 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184,
0190-0216, 0225-0229, 0241-0244
The air conditioning system and the cabin air distribution system makes sure that air temperature, air
freshness and cabin pressure are comfortable for passengers and crew in the cockpit and the cabin
during all operating conditions.
A mix of fresh and recirculated air flows from the under floor mixer unit through the cabin distribution
lines to the air outlets of the cabin.
The outlets are installed above and below the overhead stowage compartments.
In addition, each passenger has an individual and adjustable air outlet. The different rooms of the cabin
(galleys, lavatories, crew rests) are also equipped with additional air outlets.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
For best passenger and crew comfort a Temperature Control System (TCS) controls the temperature
of the air in the cabin and cockpit, which comes from the cabin air distribution system.
The TCS adjusts and controls the temperature of the air in the Upper Deck, the Main Deck, as well as
in the Lower Deck compartments (necessary for the transport of sensitive cargo and for crew rest
compartments).
It is possible to control the cabin temperature from the
- Cockpit: See Temperature Control via AIR Panel in the Cockpit
- Cabin: See Temperature Control via CIDS Control Panels in the Cabin.
show.
concerned system.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL VIA AIR PANEL IN THE COCKPIT
If the CABIN selector on the AIR overhead panel in the cockpit is not set to the PURS SEL position, the
flight crew must set the cabin temperature.
The controls in the cockpit enable the flight crew to select a temperature for the entire cabin. It is not
possible to control the different temperature areas individually.
For more information about temperature control from the cockpit: Refer to 06-50-30 Position of the Air
Conditioning Controls in the Cockpit.
UAE A380 06-50-10 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
TEMPERATURE CONTROL VIA CIDS CONTROL PANELS IN THE CABIN

The TCS enables the cabin crew to control and monitor the current temperature of the different cabin
temperature zones via the CIDS control panels in the cabin (FAP, mini FAP and/or AAP).
Note: The CABIN selector on the AIR overhead panel in the cockpit must be set to PURS SEL.
Otherwise the temperature zones can not be set manually via the CIDS control panels.
The temperature of the different temperature zones can be adjusted individually and independently
from each other via the CIDS control panels.
Note: When the temperature is selected from the CIDS control panels in the cabin, it is done with full
authority. A confirmation by the flight crew is not necessary.
For information about the temperature control via the CIDS control panels: Refer to 06-50-30 Position
of the TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP.
ADJUSTABLE CABIN TEMPERATURE ZONES
Each deck is divided into independently adjustable temperature zones controlled by the
Temperature Control System (TCS).
The independent adjustable temperature zones depend on the aircraft configuration, e.g. the
amount of crew rest compartments.
The temperature zones may be arranged as follows:
- The Main Deck with up to 8 temperature zones
- The Upper Deck with up to 7 temperature zones
- The Lower Deck with 1 temperature zone per compartment.
UAE A380 06-50-10 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT AIR CONDITIONING / TEMPERATURE CONTROL

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The air conditioning system and the cabin air distribution system makes sure that air temperature, air
freshness and cabin pressure are comfortable for passengers and crew in the cockpit and the cabin
during all operating conditions.
A mix of fresh and recirculated air flows from the under floor mixer unit through the cabin distribution
lines to the air outlets of the cabin.
The outlets are installed above and below the overhead stowage compartments.
In addition, each passenger has an individual and adjustable air outlet. The different rooms of the cabin
(galleys, lavatories, crew rests) are also equipped with additional air outlets.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
For best passenger and crew comfort a Temperature Control System (TCS) controls the temperature
of the air in the cabin and cockpit, which comes from the cabin air distribution system.
The TCS adjusts and controls the temperature of the air in the Upper Deck, the Main Deck, as well as
in the Lower Deck compartments (necessary for the transport of sensitive cargo and for crew rest
compartments).
It is possible to control the cabin temperature from the
- Cockpit: See Temperature Control via AIR Panel in the Cockpit
- Cabin: See Temperature Control via CIDS Control Panels in the Cabin.
show.
concerned system.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL VIA AIR PANEL IN THE COCKPIT
If the CABIN selector on the AIR overhead panel in the cockpit is not set to the PURS SEL position, the
flight crew must set the cabin temperature.
The controls in the cockpit enable the flight crew to select a temperature for the entire cabin. It is not
possible to control the different temperature areas individually.
For more information about temperature control from the cockpit: Refer to 06-50-30 Position of the Air
Conditioning Controls in the Cockpit.
UAE A380 06-50-10 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
TEMPERATURE CONTROL VIA CIDS CONTROL PANELS IN THE CABIN

The TCS enables the cabin crew to control and monitor the current temperature of the different cabin
temperature zones via the CIDS control panels in the cabin (FAP, mini FAP and/or AAP).
Note: The CABIN selector on the AIR overhead panel in the cockpit must be set to PURS SEL.
Otherwise the temperature zones can not be set manually via the CIDS control panels.
The temperature of the different temperature zones can be adjusted individually and independently
from each other via the CIDS control panels.
Note: When the temperature is selected from the CIDS control panels in the cabin, it is done with full
authority. A confirmation by the flight crew is not necessary.
For information about the temperature control via the CIDS control panels: Refer to 06-50-30 Position
of the TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP.
ADJUSTABLE CABIN TEMPERATURE ZONES
Each deck is divided into independently adjustable temperature zones controlled by the
Temperature Control System (TCS).
The independent adjustable temperature zones depend on the aircraft configuration, e.g. the
amount of crew rest compartments.
The temperature zones may be arranged as follows:
- The Main Deck with up to 8 temperature zones
- The Upper Deck with up to 7 temperature zones
- The Lower Deck with 1 temperature zone per compartment.
Note: For best passenger and crew comfort the cabin crew should close the provided curtains
between the zones. This will reduce the air exchange and possible drafts due to different
temperature selections.
Flight Crew Rest Compartment
The Flight Crew Rest Compartment (FCRC) is equipped with additional cabin heaters and
humidifiers.
Note: By default the cabin heaters and humidifiers are ON.
The cabin crew can select the temperature for the FCRC on the TEMPERATURE page on the
mini FAP in the FCRC.
Note: If the cabin heater is OFF, it is still possible to select a temperature on the
TEMPERATURE page. However the cabin heater will not turn ON automatically.
For more information: Refer to 06-150-10 General Information about Cabin Heating.
UAE A380 06-50-10 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Location
A380
UPPER DECK ZONES AND CABIN TEMPERATURE ZONES

Applicable to: ALL
The air conditioning system can be controlled deck-wise: The entire Upper Deck (UD) is divided into
four Upper Deck zones (zones 1 thru 4) and up to 7 different independently adjustable cabin
temperature zones.
The cabin temperature zones are displayed as blue rectangles, each containing the current
temperature value (°C or °F) on the CABIN TEMPERATURE page of the FAP. Refer to 06-50-30
Position of the TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
UD - Typical Temperature Zones and the Cabin Zones
UAE A380 06-50-20 P 1/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
Location
A380
MAIN DECK ZONES AND CABIN TEMPERATURE ZONES

Applicable to: ALL
The air conditioning system can be controlled deck-wise: The entire Main Deck (MD) is divided into
four Main Deck zones (zones 5 thru 8) and up to 8 different independently adjustable cabin
temperature zones.
MD - Typical Temperature Zones and Cabin Zones
UAE A380 06-50-20 P 2/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
Location
A380
LOWER DECK ZONES AND CABIN TEMPERATURE ZONES

Applicable to: ALL
The air conditioning system can be controlled deck-wise: The compartments on the Lower Deck (LD),
are divided into two zones (zone 9 and 10) and one independently adjustable cabin temperature zone
per compartment. If installed, the temperature zones are in crew rest compartment(s) inside the
forward and/or inside the aft compartment of the LD.
LD - Typical Temperature Zones and the Cabin Zones
UAE A380 06-50-20 P 3/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
Location
A380
UAE A380 06-50-20 P 4/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS IN THE COCKPIT

Applicable to: ALL
The temperature for the cockpit and the cabin is controlled separately.
There are two selectors on the AIR panel for temperature control:
- CKPT (Cockpit temperature)
- CABIN (Cabin temperature).
Note: Normally the CABIN selector is in the PURS SEL position to enable the cabin crew to control
the cabin temperature via the FAP and mini FAP and /or AAP if installed.
AIR Conditioning Panel Location
UAE A380 06-50-30 P 1/2

CCOM 08-Jan-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
For more information about the AIR conditioning panel in the cockpit: Refer to 02-110-30-21 Air
Conditioning Panel
For information about the temperature control via FAP: Refer to 06-50-30 Position of the
TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
POSITION OF THE TEMPERATURE PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the CABIN TEMPERATURE all decks page by pushing the TEMP. button
on the first level of the function selector on the FAP.
Pushing a button from the deck selector on the CABIN TEMPERATURE all decks page displays the:
- CABIN TEMPERATURE MAIN DECK page
- CABIN TEMPERATURE UPPER DECK page.
If there are controllable temperature areas on the Lower Deck (LD) a corresponding CABIN
TEMPERATURE page is displayed.
Typical CABIN TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
For information about the CABIN TEMPERATURE pages: Refer to 06-50-40 Cabin Temperature
Settings from the Cabin
UAE A380 06-50-30 P 2/2

CCOM 08-Jan-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT TEMPERATURE SELECTION

Applicable to: ALL
The temperature control of the cabin is possible from the cockpit or the cabin.
- Refer to 06-50-40 Cabin Temperature Control from the Cockpit
- Refer to 06-50-40 Cabin Temperature Settings from the Cabin
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM THE CABIN
The cabin crew can manually set the temperature in the entire cabin, on a single deck or in a single
temperature area.
The cabin crew can make the adjustments within a given range on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP),
mini FAP and/or on the Additional Attendant Panel (AAP) (if installed). This range is defined in the
Cabin Assignment Module (CAM) (normally between 18 °C (64 °F) and 30 °C (86 °F)).
The current and the target temperatures of the different cabin temperature areas are indicated on the
CABIN TEMPERATURE page of the FAP, mini FAP and/or on the AAP (if installed).
The ALL RESET button deletes all manual inputs and activates a preselected (CAM defined)
temperature.
The ALL ZONE function enables the cabin crew to adjust the temperature value for all temperature
zones with sensors installed per deck.
Note: Temperature control from the cabin is only possible if the CABIN TEMPERATURE selector on
the cockpit overhead panel AIR is in the PURS SEL position.
TEMPERATURE SETTINGS ON GROUND, PRIOR TO FLIGHT
Set the cockpit and cabin selections for once prior to a flight:
The cabin crew should set all temperature zones to the same value within a range between 23 °C
(73.4 °F) and 24 °C (75 °F) on the CABIN TEMPERATURE pages of the FAP. This is only possible if
the CABIN TEMPERATURE selector on the cockpit overhead panel AIR is in the PURS SEL position.
Note: - On ground, a lower temperature than the recommended 23 °C to 24 °C (73.4 °F to 75 °F)
will unnecessarily increase the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) load.
- In case of a temperature control failure in the cabin (temperature selection via FAP, mini
FAP or AAP is not possible), the flight crew is automatically informed via a corresponding
ECAM alert and can adjust the temperature manually from the cockpit.
TEMPERATURE SETTINGS IN FLIGHT
The cabin crew can adjust the cabin temperature settings on the FAP, mini FAP or AAP. However it is
recommended to do this only if it is necessary.
UAE A380 06-50-40 P 1/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
ADDITIONAL AIR OUTLETS IN THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
There are individual air outlets installed for the passengers above their seats in the Passenger Service
Units (PSU), that are integrated into the Over-Head Stowage Compartments (OHSC).
The direction of the air stream can be adjusted by moving the outlet in its socket in as desired.
Operation of an Air Outlet
Air outlets are also installed in the different rooms of the cabin:
- In the galleys,
- In the lavatories,
- At the door areas,
- At the attendant stations, and
- In the crew rest compartments.
The used air from the cabin is extracted through the floor panels and discharged outboard.
UAE A380 06-50-40 P 2/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM THE COCKPIT

Applicable to: ALL
CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM THE COCKPIT

The CABIN selector on the AIR panel (overhead) in the cockpit controls the cabin temperature.
NORMAL POSITION OF THE COCKPIT SELECTOR
: The CABIN selector on the AIR panel (overhead) is
set to the PURS SEL position.
Note: The selector should always remain in this
position to enable temperature settings from
the cabin.
Note: The air temperature regulation of a crew rest compartment is always independent from the
cabin temperature selector.
TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT RANGE CONTROLLED FROM THE COCKPIT
: If the CABIN selector is not in the PURS SEL
position, settings between 18 °C (64 °F) / COLD and
30 °C (86 °F) / HOT are possible.
The intermediate position corresponds to a
temperature value of 24 °C (75 °F).
If the CABIN selector is used for temperature adjustments (it is not in the PURS SEL position), a
detailed display of temperature information on the FAP and mini FAP is still possible. However,
selections on the FAP are not possible. The cabin temperature can be changed from the cockpit
only.
UAE A380 06-50-40 P 3/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
CABIN TEMPERATURE SETTINGS FROM THE CABIN

The air conditioning zones or zone groups of the aircraft decks are defined in the Cabin Assignment
Module (CAM).
The cabin crew can use the CIDS control panels in the cabin (FAP, mini FAP and/or AAP) to monitor
and control the temperature in the cabin.
The cabin crew can adjust the temperature within a CAM defined range (normally between 18 °C
(64 °F) and 30 °C (86 °F)).
Note: The temperature changes per area should be limited to ±0.5 °C (±0.9 °F) every 30 min.
Disregarding this limitation could lead to noticeable deviations of the current temperature.
If the cabin crew control of the air conditioning system is disabled by the CABIN selector in the cockpit,
the FAP (also mini FAP and / or AAP) serve as displays only.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL VIA FAP
The cabin crew can control and monitor the cabin temperature via the CABIN TEMPERATURE pages
on the FAP.
The current temperature values of the cabin temperature zones are displayed on the aircraft symbol.
When the cabin crew control is enabled by the CABIN selector (set to PURS SEL) in the cockpit, the
cabin temperatures may be changed within the CAM defined range. Any changes will be immediately
in effect and displayed at all relevant stations.
For more information about the CABIN TEMPERATURE pages on the FAP: Refer to 06-50-40 CABIN
TEMPERATURE All Decks Page (FAP)
TEMPERATURE CONTROL VIA MINI FAP / AAP
The cabin crew can use mini FAP and / or AAP (if CAM assigned and installed), to control and monitor
the temperature of a single temperature zone or zone groups.
UAE A380 06-50-40 P 4/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CABIN TEMPERATURE ALL DECKS PAGE (FAP)

The CABIN TEMPERATURE pages on the FAP enable the cabin crew to monitor and control the
temperature in the cabin.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN TEMPERATURE all decks page by pushing the TEMP. button
of the function selector at the bottom of the FAP.
The CABIN TEMPERATURE all decks page gives the cabin crew an overview of all temperature zones
of the cabin. The cabin crew can access the detailed deck information (pages) from this page.
Title Description
Deck Selector The deck selector is on the left hand side of the FAP screen.
Pushing one of the deck selector buttons displays the corresponding
detailed CABIN TEMPERATURE page on the FAP.
Aircraft Symbols Touching one of the aircraft symbols displays the corresponding detailed
CABIN TEMPERATURE page.
Temperature Zones The blue rectangles on the aircraft symbols indicate the temperature
zones and their current temperature.
UAE A380 06-50-40 P 5/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CABIN TEMPERATURE PER DECK PAGE (FAP)

The cabin crew can access the CABIN TEMPERATURE page for a single deck by touching the related
aircraft symbol or by pushing the corresponding button of the deck selector on the CABIN
TEMPERATURE all page.
Typical CABIN TEMPERATURE UPPER DECK Page
Title Description
Deck Selector Pushing one of the deck selector buttons displays the corresponding
detailed CABIN TEMPERATURE page on the FAP.
Temperature Zones on the The blue rectangles on the aircraft symbols indicate the temperature
Aircraft Symbol zones and their current temperature.
Temperature Zones There is one temperature zone button per indicated temperature zone.
Buttons The text on the button indicates the seat row numbers corresponding to
(e.g. S/R 1-5) the temperature zone.
Pushing a temperature zone button displays an additional temperature
zone control pad. The "active" temperature zone button is displayed in
green and the temperature zone "rectangle" on the aircraft symbol has a
green border.
UAE A380 06-50-40 P 6/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
Title Description
Temperature Zone Control When the cabin crew has pushed a temperature zone button (e.g. S/R 1
Pad -5) the corresponding temperature zone control pad is displayed.
Temperature Zone Control Pad
ALL ZONES RESET The cabin crew can reset per deck the temperature of all temperature
Control Pad zones with sensors installed to a predefined value by pushing the RESET
button on the ALL ZONES RESET control pad. ALL ZONES RESET
Control Pad
ALL ZONES Button Pushing the ALL ZONES button displays the ALL ZONES control pad. Via
the ALL ZONES control pad the temperature in all zones with sensors
installed can be adjusted (corrected). ALL ZONES Temperature Control
Pad
TEMPERATURE ZONE CONTROL PAD

Pushing a temperature zone button displays the corresponding temperature zone control pad.
Typical Temperature Zone Control Pad
UAE A380 06-50-40 P 7/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
Title Description
Thermometer The thermometer consists of a scale and a bulb.
There are several indicators linked to the thermometer. The indications
are described below.
Current temperature The current temperature in the selected zone is indicated on the scale
of the thermometer and in the bulb of the thermometer (e.g. 24.0 °C
(75.2 °F)).
Target temperature The currently selected target temperature is indicated by a green arrow
pointing on the temperature scale (e.g. 23.0 °C (73.4 °F)).
Adjustment window: The adjustment window (SELECTED TEMPERATURE) indicates the
SELECTED selected target temperature (e.g. 23.0 °C (73.4 °F)). The value can be
TEMPERATURE adjusted via the ▴ and ▾ icons below the adjustment window.
▴ and ▾ icons Pushing the ▴icon increases the cabin temperature.
Pushing the ▾ icon decreases the cabin temperature.
ALL ZONES TEMPERATURE CONTROL PAD

Pushing the ALL ZONES button displays the ALL ZONES temperature control pad.
Typical ALL ZONES Temperature Control Pad
UAE A380 06-50-40 P 8/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
Title Description
Scale The scale indicates the range within which the temperature in all zones
with sensors installed can be corrected (adjusted).
The selected value will decrease or increase the current temperature in
the different cabin zones.
Green Indicator Arrow The green indicator arrow indicates the currently selected value for
temperature adjustment for all zones with sensors installed.
Adjustment Window: The adjustment window indicates the selected temperature adjustment
TEMPERATURE value. The value can be adjusted via the ▴ and ▾ icons below the
CORRECTION adjustment window.
▴ and ▾ Icons Pushing the ▴ icon selects a higher adjustment value.
Pushing the ▾ icon selects a lower adjustment value.
Note: The temperature changes per area should be limited to ±0.5 °C
(±0.9 °F) every 30 min. Disregarding this limitation could lead to
noticeable deviations of the current temperature.
ACCEPT Button Pushing the ACCEPT button applies the temperature adjustment
(correction).
UAE A380 06-50-40 P 9/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
ALL ZONES RESET CONTROL PAD

Typical ALL ZONES RESET Control Pad
Title Description
Temperature Value In the temperature value display box the preselected temperature (CAM
Display Box defined) is displayed (e.g. 22.0 °C (71.6 °F)).
RESET Button Pushing the RESET button applies the preselected temperature value
to all temperature zones with sensors installed on the displayed deck.
UAE A380 06-50-40 P 10/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO SET THE TEMPERATURE FOR A TEMPERATURE ZONE

Applicable to: ALL
To monitor or control the cabin temperature for a temperature zone follow the steps described below.
1. Push the TEMP. button of the function selector (page bottom) to display the CABIN
TEMPERATURE page of the FAP.
Note: If there is a crew rest compartment installed on the lower deck, an additional temperature
area is displayed on the LD aircraft symbol.
2. To access the desired deck information, touch the related aircraft symbol or push the corresponding
button of the deck selector (located on the left hand side of the screen).
UAE A380 06-50-50 P 1/8

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Typical CABIN TEMPERATURE MAIN DECK Page
3. Push a temperature zone button to display the related TEMPERATURE ZONE control pad.
4. Push the ▴ icon to increase or push the ▾ icon to decrease the temperature of the selected
temperature zone.
UAE A380 06-50-50 P 2/8

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO CORRECT THE TEMPERATURE VALUE FOR ALL ZONES

Applicable to: ALL
To correct the temperature value of all temperature zones with sensors installed follow the steps
described below.
Note: The ALL ZONES function is only applicable per deck.
UAE A380 06-50-50 P 3/8

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
3. Push the ALL ZONES button to display the related ALL ZONES control pad.
UAE A380 06-50-50 P 4/8

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Typical ALL ZONES Temperature Correction for the Upper Deck
4. Push the ▴ icon to increase or push the ▾ icon to decrease the temperature value indicated in the
adjustment window.
5. Push the ACCEPT button to apply the temperature correction to all temperature zones on the deck.
A blue card on the FAP page indicates that the correction is accepted and applied.
UAE A380 06-50-50 P 5/8

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Typical TEMPERATURE CORRECTION ACCEPTED Blue Card
Note: The current temperature of all individual cabin zones will be corrected by the selected
value.
UAE A380 06-50-50 P 6/8

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO RESET THE CABIN TEMPERATURE TO THE PREDEFINED VALUE

Applicable to: ALL
To reset all zones of a deck to a predefined temperature follow the steps below.
2. To access the desired deck information, touch the related aircraft symbol or choose the
corresponding button of the deck selector (located on the left hand side of the screen).
3. Push the ALL ZONES button on the right side of the aircraft symbol to display the ALL ZONE
RESET control pad.
UAE A380 06-50-50 P 7/8

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
4. Push the RESET button on the ALL ZONE RESET control pad to reset all zones to the predefined
temperature (in this case 22 °C (72 °F)).
UAE A380 06-50-50 P 8/8

CCOM 13-Jan-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH AN INOPERATIVE SENSOR

Applicable to: ALL
Typical Temperature Indication of a Faulty or Missing Sensor at the Upper Deck
The current temperature of a zone with a faulty sensor or missing sensor data is indicated as "--" inside
the related blue temperature rectangle in the aircraft symbol. In addition, the indication level of the
animated thermometer on the corresponding TEMPERATURE ZONE control pad is not displayed and "--"
is displayed in the bulb. Nevertheless the SELECTED TEMPERATURE is still displayed and can be
changed with the ▴ or ▾ icon.
If a temperature sensor is faulty or the sensor data is missing the Temperature Control System (TCS)
calculates the average temperature of all other temperature areas. The average temperature is used to
control the temperature of the temperature area with the faulty or missing sensor automatically.
This could lead to low temperatures in less occupied temperature zones (seating areas e.g. First Class).
To avoid this it is possible to increase (or decrease) this calculated temperature value manually via the
normal temperature selection function (▴ or ▾ icon). The adjustment of the current temperature must be
adapted by trying (e.g. according to passenger request).
Note: Due to technical reasons related to the customization of cabin layouts there may be cases where
some cabin temperature sensors are disconnected as per design and therefore the "--" indication
can be a normal condition.
UAE A380 06-50-60 P 1/6

CCOM 05-Apr-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
"--" Is Indicated for a Temperature Zone
YES NO
1. Does any temperature zone on the aircraft symbol indicate "--"? Go to 2 END
2. Does any passenger complain about the temperature in the zone without
sensor information? Go to 3 END
3. On the corresponding CABIN TEMPERATURE xx DECK Page:
1. Push the corresponding temperature zone button and the related
TEMPERATURE ZONE control pad is displayed.
2. Push the ▴ icon to increase or push the ▾ icon to decrease the
temperature of the selected temperature zone, depending on the
customer request.
3. Wait a short time for the change in temperature. Go to 4 Go to 4
4. Is the passenger comfortable with the changes in temperature? END Go to 3
UAE A380 06-50-60 P 2/6

CCOM 05-Apr-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
HOW TO REGULATE HOT AIR BLOWING FROM CABIN AIR OUTLETS

Applicable to: ALL
Hot air is blowing from cabin air outlets
YES NO
1. Is very hot air blowing from cabin air outlets in a specific zone? Go to 2 END
UAE A380 06-50-60 P 3/6

CCOM 05-Apr-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
YES NO
2. To reduce the temperature of the air blowing from the cabin air outlets
follow the actions described below:
1. Push the TEMP. button of the function selector (page bottom) to
display the CABIN TEMPERATURE page of the FAP.
Note: If there is a crew rest compartment installed on the lower
deck, an additional temperature area is displayed on the LD
aircraft symbol.
2. To access the desired deck information, touch the related aircraft

symbol or push the corresponding button of the deck selector (located
on the left hand side of the screen).
Typical CABIN TEMPERATURE MAIN DECK Page
3. Push the temperature zone button of the affected zone to display the
related TEMPERATURE ZONE control pad.
4. Push the ▾ icon to decrease the temperature of the selected
temperature zone by 1 °C (1.8 °F).
5. Close any curtains between the different zones (provided that curtains
are installed) in order to reduce the air exchange between the zones.
Wait a while for the changes to take effect. Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Is the temperature of the air blowing from the cabin air outlets normal? Go to 5 Go to 4
UAE A380 06-50-60 P 4/6

CCOM 05-Apr-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
YES NO
4. If there is another seat available:
Ask the passenger on the affected seat to move to the other seat. Go to 5 Go to 5
5. Make an entry into the cabin logbook mentioning the:
- Fault
UAE A380 06-50-60 P 5/6

CCOM 05-Apr-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
UAE A380 06-50-60 P 6/6

CCOM 05-Apr-11
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE WATER/WASTE SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

Applicable to: ALL
The function of the water/waste system is to:

- Supply water from the potable water tanks to the galleys, lavatories and humidifiers.
- Transport the waste from the toilets in the lavatories to the waste holding tanks.
- Transport waste water from the lavatory washbasins and the galley sinks to the heated drain masts
and overboard.
The water/waste system has these subsystems:
- Potable water system
- Waste disposal system
- Air supply system.
The cabin crew can monitor and control the water waste system via the WATER/WASTE pages on the
FAP:Refer to 06-60-30 Position of the WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP
show.
concerned system.
UAE A380 06-60-10 P 1/2

CCOM 15-Jan-14
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
General
A380
UAE A380 06-60-10 P 2/2

CCOM 15-Jan-14
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Location
A380
LOCATION OF THE WATER AND WASTE TANKS

Applicable to: ALL
Potable Water Tanks and Waste Tanks
UAE A380 06-60-20 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Location
A380
UAE A380 06-60-20 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE WATER/WASTE PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the WATER/WASTE page by pushing the WATER/WASTE button on the
first level of the function selector on the FAP.
Pushing a button from the deck selector on the WATER/WASTE page displays the
- WATER/WASTE MAIN DECK page
- WATER/WASTE UPPER DECK page.
UAE A380 06-60-30 P 1/2

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-60-30 P 2/2

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
A380 Potable Water System
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
The potable water system supplies potable water:

- To the equipment installed in the lavatories, for example: faucets, toilets
- To the equipment installed in the galleys, for example: faucets
- To the humidifiers in crew rest compartments.
The potable water supply can be controlled via electrically or mechanically operated shutoff valves.
POTABLE WATER STORAGE
There are six (optionally seven or eight) potable water tanks onboard the aircraft.
They are located in the landing gear bays, on the left and right hand side.
The maximum quantity of potable water available for each flight is 1 700 l (449 US Gal) with six tanks
or 2 267 l (599 US Gal) with optional eight tanks.
POTABLE WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
The potable water distribution system supplies heated and treated potable water from the potable
water tanks to the galleys and the lavatories.
A water treatment module and a circulation pump supply heated and treated water to the potable water L2
tanks and ensures, that the water inside the tanks does not freeze in cold weather conditions.
The potable water distribution system contains:
- A water heater
- A water conditioner
- A heating control unit.
The potable water from the potable water tanks is supplied via a system of distribution lines. Electrically
and/or mechanically operated valves control the potable water distribution system.
Compressed air from the air supply boost system supplies the pressure to move the potable water from
the tanks to the galleys and the lavatories.
WATER QUANTITY INDICATING L1
The water quantity indicating system supplies information about the quantity of the potable water in the
potable water tanks. Two water level sensors measure the level of the potable water.
The potable water quantity is shown on:
- The Flight Attendant Panels (FAPs) on the Water/Waste pages, and on
- The Potable Water Indication Panel (PWIP) of the Potable Water Service Panel (PWSP). This
panel is located on the right side of the belly fairing outside the aircraft.
UAE A380 06-60-40-10 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
A380 Potable Water System
WATER DRAINING L2
The water tanks and the distribution system can be drained through:
- The fill/drain valve and the fill/drain nipple on the Potable Water Service Panel (PWSP), and
- The drain valve, and drain nipple on the Potable Water Drain Panel (PWDP), located near to the
nose landing gear.
UAE A380 06-60-40-10 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
A380 Waste Disposal System
WASTE DISPOSAL SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
The waste disposal system has two subsystems:

- The vacuum toilet system
It discards the waste from the toilets to the waste tanks. See Vacuum Toilet System
- The waste-water draining system.
It discards the waste water from the washbasins of the lavatories and wet galleys through the drain
masts overboard. See Waste-Water Draining System
VACUUM TOILET SYSTEM
The vacuum toilet system removes waste materials and liquids from the toilets to the waste tanks.
It uses water from the aircraft potable water system to flush the toilets.
Vacuum Toilet System
Left Hand Right Hand

Upper Deck Upper Deck Upper Deck Upper Deck
Upper Deck Floor Lavatories and Galleys Lavatories and Galleys Lavatories Lavatories
Left Hand Galley

Main Deck
Lavatories
Right Hand
Main Deck
Main Deck Floor Lavatories
Upper and Main Deck

Lavatories and Galleys
Potable Water Tanks

(min.6)
Waste Waste Waste Waste

Tank Tank Tank Tank
Aircraft Skin
Forward Potable Water Waste
Drain Panel Forward Aft Service Panel Service Panel
Drain Mast Drain Mast
Potable-Water Line
Waste-Water Line
Toilet-Water Line
There are four waste tanks on board the aircraft. They are located in the aft of the aircraft, near the rear
pressure bulkhead.
UAE A380 06-60-40-20 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
A380 Waste Disposal System
Each of the two waste tanks for the Main Deck has a capacity of 675 l (178 US Gal). And each of the L2
two waste tanks for the Upper Deck has a capacity of 373 l (99 US Gal). The capacity of all four waste
tanks is in total 2 096 l (554 US Gal).
For each waste tank there is a vacuum toilet subsystem. A single vacuum generator supplies each of
the subsystems with the necessary negative pressure (vacuum). The vacuum generator system is only
deactivated during the cruise phase of a flight.
WASTE-WATER DRAINING SYSTEM L1
The waste-water draining system discards the waste water from the galley sinks, the lavatory
washbasins and the humidifiers overboard.
Waste-Water Draining System
Forward Forward Aft Aft

Galley Lavatory Lavatory Galley
Washbasin
Washbasin
Drain-Valve
Assembly
Upper Deck Floor Drain Valve
Forward Forward Aft Aft

Galley Lavatory Washbasin Lavatory Galley
Washbasin
Drain-Valve
Assembly
Main Deck Floor Drain Valve
Aircraft Skin
Forward Drain Mast Aft Drain Mast

Waste Water Drain line
Overflow Line
The waste water flows from the washbasins/sinks in the galleys and lavatories through the drain valves L2
of the drain lines to the drain masts. The drain masts are attached to the outside aircraft structure and
they are heated (ice-protection).
UAE A380 06-60-40-20 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
A380 Air Supply System
AIR SUPPLY SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
The air supply system supplies pressurized air to the potable water system. The pressurized air moves
the potable water from the potable water tanks to the galleys and the lavatories.
The normal operating pressure of the potable water system is between 35 PSI (2.41 bar) and 41 PSI L2
(2.83 bar).
The system has:
- Two air compressors,
- Two air compressor motor controllers,
- An air manifold assembly,
- A depress valve.
UAE A380 06-60-40-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
A380 Air Supply System
UAE A380 06-60-40-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
A380 Water/Waste System Control via the FAP
WATER/WASTE SYSTEM CONTROL VIA THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
WATER/WASTE SYSTEM CONTROL VIA THE FAP

The cabin crew can monitor and control the water/waste system via the WATER/WASTE pages on the
- WATER/WASTE (all decks) page: Refer to 06-60-40-40 WATER/WASTE All Decks Page
- WATER/WASTE MAIN DECK page: Refer to 06-60-40-40 WATER/WASTE per Deck Page
- WATER/WASTE UPPER DECK page
- WATER/WASTE LOWER DECK page (optional).
WATER/WASTE ALL DECKS PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
WATER/WASTE ALL DECKS PAGE

The WATER/WASTE pages on the FAP enable the cabin crew to monitor and control the water/waste
system.
The cabin crew can access the WATER/WASTE all decks page by pushing the WATER/WASTE
button of the function selector at the bottom of the FAP.
The WATER/WASTE all decks page gives the cabin crew an overview of all lavatories and galleys.
The cabin crew can access the detailed deck information (pages) from this page.
UAE A380 06-60-40-40 P 1/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
Title Description
detailed WATER/WASTE page on the FAP.
Aircraft Symbols All decks of the aircraft with water/waste relevant equipment are displayed
on the FAP. Touching one of the symbols displays the WATER/WASTE
per deck page with the detailed information.
UAE A380 06-60-40-40 P 2/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
WATER/WASTE PER DECK PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
WATER/WASTE PER DECK PAGE

The cabin crew can access the WATER/WASTE page for a single deck by touching the related aircraft
symbol or by pushing the corresponding button of the deck selector on the WATER/WASTE all decks
page.
UAE A380 06-60-40-40 P 3/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
Title Description
detailed WATER/WASTE page on the FAP.
WASTE QUANTITY The WASTE QUANTITY indicator shows the current quantity of waste in
Indicator the waste tanks.
WATER QUANTITY The WATER QUANTITY indicator shows the current quantity of water in
Indicator the water tanks.
WATER SUPPLY Control Pushing the SHUT DOWN button on the WATER SUPPLY control pad
Pad shuts down/reactivates the water supply to the cabin. The cabin crew must
confirm/cancel the shut down/reactivation on a displayed blue card by
pushing either the YES or NO button. Refer to 06-60-40-40 Water Supply
Shut Down Function
AUTO FLUSH Button Pushing the AUTO FLUSH button flushes and drains the most forward
toilets and galley sinks to clean the waste lines. A blue card, reading
AUTO FLUSH ACTIVE indicates that the AUTO FLUSH button was
pushed. Refer to 06-60-40-40 Water/Waste Auto Flush Function
PRE-SELECT Button Pushing the PRE-SELECT button displays the SELECTED QUANTITY
control pad. Refer to 06-60-40-40 Water Quantity Preselection
CONTROL FUNCTIONS ON THE WATER/WASTE FAP PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
CONTROL FUNCTIONS ON THE WATER/WASTE FAP PAGE

The cabin crew can use the following control functions on the WATER/WASTE page:
- Auto flush function: Refer to 06-60-40-40 Water/Waste Auto Flush Function
- Water quantity preselection: Refer to 06-60-40-40 Water Quantity Preselection
- Water supply shut down function: Refer to 06-60-40-40 Water Supply Shut Down Function.
UAE A380 06-60-40-40 P 4/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
WATER QUANTITY PRESELECTION

The cabin crew can use the WATER/WASTE page of the FAP to preselect the required quantity of
potable water for the next flight prior to ground servicing. The preselect function allows to store only as
much potable water as necessary (the default setting is 100%).
Typical SELECTED QUANTITY Control Pad on the WATER/WASTE Page
Title Description
WATER QUANTITY The WATER QUANTITY indicator shows the current quantity of water in
Indicator the water tanks.
The preselected quantity is indicated via a green arrow next to the
WATER QUANTITY symbol.
UAE A380 06-60-40-40 P 5/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
Title Description
PRE-SELECT Button Pushing the PRE-SELECT button displays the SELECTED QUANTITY
control pad.
Display Box The display box on the SELECTED QUANTITY control pad displays the
selected water quantity in %.
▴ and ▾ Icons Pushing the ▴ or ▾ icons selects a water quantity between 30% and 100%.
Pushing an icon once increases or decreases the quantity in 10% steps.
Note: The preselection function is not available during servicing procedures. If the PRE-SELECT
button is pushed during a servicing procedure the message SERVICING IN PROGRESS is
displayed on the FAP. The cabin crew has to make any preselection prior to the ground
servicing.
WATER/WASTE AUTO FLUSH FUNCTION
The auto flush function flushes and drains the most forward toilets (lavatories) to clean the waste lines
on all decks. The waste is drained to the waste tanks.
CAUTION After the aircraft has landed at an airport with cold weather conditions (temperatures
below freezing point) it is mandatory to start the auto-flush function to prevent the pipes
from freezing.
To make sure that the entire waste line from the forward to the aft fuselage is flushed, the auto flush is
carried out at the most forward toilet.
For the toilets there is no difference whether they are closed or open, a flush cycle will run at the most
forward toilet.
Selecting the AUTO FLUSH button on the WATER/WASTE page of the FAP initiates the procedure
when the aircraft is in the pre-parking position on ground.
During the flush cycle the AUTO FLUSH button is illuminated in green and a blue card displays with the
message AUTO FLUSH ACTIVE.
UAE A380 06-60-40-40 P 6/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
Typical AUTO FLUSH Function on the FAP - Active
The auto flush will not start at all lines simultaneously, there will be a short time interval between the
flush cycles. A second flush cycle will start automatically after the first one has finished.
The auto flush function does not work:
- During flight
- If the waste tanks are full
- When the aircraft is in service mode
- If the vacuum generation is not available.
WATER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN FUNCTION
The cabin crew can use the shut down function on the FAP to stop or reactivate the supply of potable
water to all lavatories and galleys.
CAUTION Shutting down (depressurize) the entire water supply system is mandatory:
- After landing at an airport where there is a cold weather condition to prevent the
potable water lines from freezing
- After the circuit breaker(s) COM 1 and /or COM 2 (in the cockpit) were pulled by the
flight crew (during flight or on ground)
- In the case of a (massive) water leakage.
Selecting the water supply SHUT DOWN button on the GENERAL A/C SETTINGS control pad of the
WATER/WASTE page on the FAP initiates the potable water shut down procedure for the entire cabin:
- The SHUT DOWN button turns green
UAE A380 06-60-40-40 P 7/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Description
Typical POTABLE WATER SHUT DOWN - Active
- The cabin crew confirms with YES on the indicated blue card
- The message POTABLE WATER SHUT- DOWN ACTIVE is displayed in the message box
- The indication NO WATER PRESSURE is displayed on the aircraft symbol.
To reactivate the potable water supply push the SHUT DOWN button again.
Note: Depending on the water level inside the tank the shut down or reactivation can take up to a few
minutes.
UAE A380 06-60-40-40 P 8/8

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
HOW TO PRESELECT THE WATER QUANTITY FOR A FLIGHT

Applicable to: ALL
To preselect the water quantity for a flight follow the steps described below.
1. Push the WATER/WASTE button of the function selector (page bottom) to display the
WATER/WASTE page of the FAP.
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 1/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
3. Push the PRE-SELECT button to display the SELECTED QUANTITY control pad.
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 2/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
Typical SELECTED QUANTITY Control Pad on the WATER/WASTE Page
4. Use the ▴ or ▾ icons to select the desired water quantity. The selection is displayed in the display
box on the SELECTED QUANTITY control pad. Additionally the selection is displayed with a green
arrow next to the WATER QUANTITY symbol.
Note: The default water quantity is 100%. The quantity can be adjusted in 10% steps. 30% is the
lowest selectable water quantity.
5. Push the PRE-SELECT button to close the SELECTED QUANTITY control pad.
Note: The preselection function is not available during servicing procedures. If the PRE-SELECT
button is pushed during a servicing procedure the message SERVICING IN PROGRESS is
displayed on the FAP. The cabin crew has to make any preselection prior to the ground
servicing.
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 3/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
HOW TO AUTO-FLUSH ALL TOILETS

Applicable to: ALL
CAUTION After the aircraft has landed at an airport with cold weather conditions (temperatures
below freezing point) it is mandatory to start the auto-flush function to prevent the pipes
from freezing.
To clean the waste line, flush and drain the most forward toilets (lavatories) as soon as possible after
landing (landing gear down) by following the steps described below:
1. At the FAP: Push the WATER/WASTE button of the function selector (page bottom) to display the
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 4/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 5/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
3. Push the AUTO FLUSH button to start the flush cycles.

During the flush cycles the AUTO FLUSH button is illuminated in green and a blue card AUTO
FLUSH ACTIVE displays.
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 6/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
Typical Active Auto Flush Function on the FAP
The auto flush will not start at all lines simultaneously, there will be a short time interval between the
flush cycles. A second flush cycle will start automatically after the first one has finished.
HOW TO SHUT DOWN THE WATER SUPPLY VIA THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The SHUT DOWN button on the FAP enables the cabin crew to shut down the potable water supply of
the entire aircraft (e.g. in case of a leakage).
CAUTION Shutting off the entire water supply is mandatory:

- In case of a water leakage in the cabin that cannot be stopped by using the related
manual water shutoff valve(s)
- After landing at an airport where there is a cold weather condition to prevent the
potable water lines from freezing
- After the circuit breaker(s) COM 1 and/or COM 2 (in the cockpit) were pulled by the
flight crew (during flight or on ground).
To shut down the entire water supply follow the steps described below.
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 7/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 8/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
Typical WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP - Main Deck
3. Push the SHUT DOWN button on the GENERAL A/C SETTINGS control pad.
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 9/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
4. Confirm the shut down of the water supply by pushing the YES button on the blue card.
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 10/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
Typical POTABLE WATER SHUT DOWN - Blue Card
A message box indicates the potable water supply shut down.
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 11/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
HOW TO REACTIVATE THE WATER SUPPLY

Applicable to: ALL
To reactivate the water supply after a shut down follow the steps described below.
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 12/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
3. Push the active SHUT DOWN button on the WATER SUPPLY control pad.
4. Push the YES button on the blue card to confirm the reactivation of the water supply.
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 13/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
Operation
A380
Typical POTABLE WATER SHUT DOWN REACTVATION - Blue Card
Depending on the water level inside the tank the reactivation of the potable water system can take up
to a few minutes. The SHUT DOWN button turns back grey.
UAE A380 06-60-50 P 14/14

CCOM 08-Apr-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A380
FAP-MESSAGES RELATED TO THE VACUUM SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
FAP-MESSAGES RELATED TO THE VACUUM SYSTEM

FAP Message Cabin Crew Action Information
- in list box : No action required. Info on OMT for maintenance
NO DATA FROM VACUUM action.
SYSTEM
SYSTEM MAIN DECK - LEFT
SYSTEM MAIN DECK - RIGHT
SYSTEM UPPER DECK - LEFT
SYSTEM UPPER DECK -
RIGHT
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED action.
VACUUM SYSTEM
VACUUM SYSTEM MAIN DECK Connected lavatories inoperative action.
LEFT DISABLED ON GROUND on ground.
VACUUM SYSTEM MAIN DECK Connected lavatories inoperative action.
RIGHT DISABLED ON on ground.
GROUND
VACUUM SYSTEM UPPER Connected lavatories inoperative action.
DECK LEFT DISABLED ON on ground.
GROUND
VACUUM SYSTEM UPPER Connected lavatories inoperative action.
DECK RIGHT DISABLED ON on ground.
GROUND
UAE A380 06-60-60 P 1/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A380

- in list box : Deactivate the connected Info on OMT for maintenance
VACUUM SYSTEM MAIN DECK lavatories. Refer to 03-100-50-20 action.
LEFT DISABLED - WASTE Lavatory Messages on the FAP
TANK FULL
VACUUM SYSTEM MAIN DECK lavatories. Refer to 03-100-50-20 action.
RIGHT DISABLED - WASTE Lavatory Messages on the FAP
TANK FULL
VACUUM SYSTEM UPPER lavatories. Refer to 03-100-50-20 action.
DECK LEFT DISABLED - Lavatory Messages on the FAP
WASTE TANK FULL
VACUUM SYSTEM UPPER lavatories. Refer to 03-100-50-20 action.
DECK RIGHT DISABLED - Lavatory Messages on the FAP
WASTE TANK FULL
VACUUM SYSTEM DISABLED - Lavatories inoperative on ground. action.
GROUND SERVICING
UAE A380 06-60-60 P 2/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A380
FAP-MESSAGES RELATED TO THE GALLEYS

Applicable to: ALL
FAP-MESSAGES RELATED TO THE GALLEYS

- in list box : Shut off water supply in MD Affected galleys are indicated on
SHUT OFF WATER SUPPLY IN galley XXX. Refer to 03-90-30-60 the aircraft symbol.
MAIN DECK GALLEY: Water Shutoff Valve Operation
<XXX>,<XXX>,...
- in list box : Shut off water supply in LD galley Affected galleys are indicated on
SHUT OFF WATER SUPPLY IN XXX. Refer to 03-90-30-60 Water the aircraft symbol.
LOWER DECK GALLEY: Shutoff Valve Operation
<XXX>,<XXX>,...
- in list box : Shut off water supply in UD Affected galleys are indicated on
SHUT OFF WATER SUPPLY IN galley XXX. Refer to 03-90-30-60 the aircraft symbol.
UPPER DECK GALLEY: Water Shutoff Valve Operation
<XXX>,<XXX>,...
- in list box : Close manual vacuum valve in Affected galleys are indicated on
SHUT OFF MANUAL MD galley XXX. the aircraft symbol.
DISCHARGE VALVE IN MAIN
DECK GALLEY:
<XXX>,<XXX>,...
SHUT OFF MANUAL LD galley XXX. the aircraft symbol.
DISCHARGE VALVE IN LOWER
DECK GALLEY:
<XXX>,<XXX>,...
SHUT OFF MANUAL UD galley XXX. the aircraft symbol.
DISCHARGE VALVE IN UPPER
DECK GALLEY:
<XXX>,<XXX>,...
UAE A380 06-60-60 P 3/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A380
FAP-MESSAGES RELATED TO THE LAVATORIES

Applicable to: ALL
FAP-MESSAGES RELATED TO THE LAVATORIES

- in list box : Check lavatory XXX for correct Affected lavatories are indicated
INOP MAIN DECK LAVATORY: function, (e.g. flush cycle, no leak on the aircraft symbol.
<XXX>,<XXX>, ... from rinse valve etc.).
If necessary, deactivate the
related lavatory. Refer to
03-100-50-20 Lavatory
Messages on the FAP
INOP UPPER DECK function, (e.g. flush cycle, no leak on the aircraft symbol.
LAVATORY: <XXX>,<XXX>, ... from rinse valve etc.).
If necessary, deactivate the
03-100-50-20 Lavatory
Messages on the FAP
CHECK MAIN DECK function. If necessary, perform a on the aircraft symbol.
LAVATORY - PERFORM FLUSH flush cycle or deactivate the
CYCLE / CHECK PROPER related lavatory. Refer to
FUNCTION IN <XXX>, <XXX>, 03-100-50-20 Lavatory
... Messages on the FAP
CHECK UPPER DECK function. If necessary, perform a on the aircraft symbol.
LAVATORY - PERFORM FLUSH flush cycle or deactivate the
CYCLE / CHECK PROPER related lavatory. Refer to
FUNCTION IN <XXX>, <XXX>, 03-100-50-20 Lavatory
... Messages on the FAP
- in list box : Shut off the water supply in MD Affected lavatories are indicated
SHUT OFF WATER SUPPLY IN lavatory XXX and deactivate the on the aircraft symbol.
MAIN DECK LAVATORY <XXX> related lavatory. Refer to
03-100-50-20 Lavatory
Messages on the FAP
UAE A380 06-60-60 P 4/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A380

- in list box : Shut off the water supply in UD Affected lavatories are indicated
SHUT OFF WATER SUPPLY IN lavatory XXX and deactivate the on the aircraft symbol.
UPPER DECK LAVATORY related lavatory. Refer to
<XXX> 03-100-50-20 Lavatory
Messages on the FAP
- in list box : Check water faucet in MD Affected lavatories are indicated
CHECK MAIN DECK WATER lavatory XXX. on the aircraft symbol.
FAUCET - CHECK PROPER If necessary, shut off the water
FUNCTION IN <XXX>,<XXX>,... supply and/or deactivate the
03-100-50-20 Lavatory
Messages on the FAP
- in list box : Check water faucet in UD Affected lavatories are indicated
CHECK UPPER DECK WATER lavatory XXX. on the aircraft symbol.
FAUCET - CHECK PROPER If necessary, shut off the water
FUNCTION IN <XXX>,<XXX>,... supply and/or deactivate the
03-100-50-20 Lavatory
Messages on the FAP
- in list box : Maintenance mode active. Affected lavatories are indicated
MAINTENANCE MODE ACTIVE on the aircraft symbol.
IN MAIN DECK LAVATORY:
<XXX>,<XXX>,...
- in list box : Maintenance mode active. Affected lavatories are indicated
MAINTENANCE MODE ACTIVE on the aircraft symbol.
IN UPPER DECK LAVATORY:
<XXX>,<XXX>,...
UAE A380 06-60-60 P 5/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A380
FAP-MESSAGES RELATED TO THE WASTE SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
FAP-MESSAGES RELATED TO THE WASTE SYSTEM

- on blue card : No action required. Info on OMT for maintenance
NO WASTE QUANTITY DATA action.
AVAILABLE
- in list box : No action required, system Info on OMT for maintenance
WASTE QUANTITY DATA LEFT remains usable. action.
NOT VALID X
('X' is displayed in the left waste
quantity display of the waste
tanks)
- in list box : No action required, system Info on OMT for maintenance
WASTE QUANTITY DATA remains usable. action.
RIGHT NOT VALID X
('X' is displayed in the right waste
quantity display of the waste
tanks)
- in list box: No action required. Info on OMT for maintenance
SYSTEM
- in list box : No action required, but toilets During servicing on ground.
WASTE SERVICE DOOR OPEN and GWDUs can not be
and operated.
VACUUM SYSTEM DISABLED -
GROUND SERVICING
- in list box : No action required. Waste tank not empty (level >
WASTE TANK NOT EMPTY - 30%), ground service required.
CHECK LEVEL
and
GROUND SERVICE REQUIRED
UAE A380 06-60-60 P 6/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A380
FAP-MESSAGES RELATED TO THE POTABLE WATER SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
FAP-MESSAGES RELATED TO THE POTABLE WATER SYSTEM

NO WATER PRESELECT action.
AVAILABLE
NO WATER QUANTITY DATA action.
AVAILABLE
NO WATER PRESELECT action.
AVAILABLE
and
POTABLE WATER SERVICE IN
PROGRESS
NO DATA FROM POTABLE action.
WATER SYSTEM
- in list box : No action required. During servicing on ground.
POTABLE WATER SERVICE
DOOR OPEN
- in list box : No action required. During servicing on ground.
POTABLE WATER SERVICE IN
PROGRESS
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED action.
POTABLE WATER
POTABLE WATER Potable water shut down active. action.
SHUT-DOWN ACTIVE
UAE A380 06-60-60 P 7/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A380
FAP-MESSAGES RELATED TO THE ICE PROTECTION SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
FAP-MESSAGES RELATED TO THE ICE PROTECTION SYSTEM

- in list box : To prevent freezing of the system Info on OMT for maintenance
POTABLE WATER ICE , every 10 min. do this: action.
PROTECTION INOP: <area> Operate the water supplied
equipment (toilet, faucet, etc.) in
the related <area>.
Make sure that the water flow is
sufficient.
POTABLE WATER ICE IPCU unit/heater failure. action.
PROTECTION NO DATA
AVAILABLE
- in list box : Shut off the water supply of the Info on OMT for maintenance
WASTE WATER ICE associated (FWD or AFT) action.
PROTECTION INOP: <location> lavatories/galleys. Deactivate the
related lavatories and do not
discard liquids through the galley
sink.
IPCU unit/heater failure.
WASTE WATER ICE No data available from IPCU action.
PROTECTION NO DATA (waste water).
AVAILABLE
AUTOMATIC POWER SAVING IPCU shedding active. action.
ACTIVE
AUTOMATIC POWER SAVING IPCU shedding discrepancy. action.
DISCREPANCY
UAE A380 06-60-60 P 8/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE SMOKE DETECTION (SD) SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
The Smoke Detection (SD) system controls visual and aural smoke warning in the cabin in case of
smoke detection.
In addition, the system indicates smoke sensor INOP messages if a smoke detector has a defect. L2
The smoke sensors of this system are located in the lavatories, rooms, crew rest compartments and L1
IFE control centers.

Whenever smoke is detected, an aural warning is produced and the CIDS control and indication panels
indicate a smoke warning (flashing or steady):
- An amber smoke detection indicator comes on. It is located on lavatory walls, outside crew rest
compartments or IFE control centers.
- The amber segment on the corresponding Area Call Panel (ACP) flashes.
- The name of the affected lavatory or crew rest compartment is indicated on the corresponding AIP
in clear wording, e.g. "SMOKE LM11" (maximum 16 digits).
- The red indicator flashes on all AIPs.
- The red smoke indicator displays on the optional Additional Attendant Panel (AAP) in the
corresponding area.
- The affected location is displayed graphically on the FAP SMOKE DETECTION page.
- A repetitive triple chime (Lo), repeated every 30 seconds, is distributed via all passenger and cabin
attendant station loudspeakers.
The aural warning stays in effect on all decks for only a short time, whereas the local warning (visible
and audible) persists until it is manually reset by the crew.
All FAP and mini FAP and AIP display detailed information about the location of the detected smoke.
All alarm statuses are displayed in the cockpit (on the ECAM) and logged into the Maintenance L2
System.
For information about the position of the SMOKE DETECTION pages on the CIDS control displays: L1
Refer to 06-70-20 Position of the Smoke Detection System on the FAPand Refer to 06-70-20 Position
of the Smoke Detection System on the Mini FAP.
show.
concerned system.
For the description of the SD system: Refer to 06-70-30 Description of the Smoke Detection System.
UAE A380 06-70-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
General
A380
For the description of the SMOKE DETECTION page on the FAP: Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Warning
With a SMOKE Reset Button on the FAP.
For the description of the SMOKE DETECTION page on the mini FAP: Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke
Warning with SMOKE RESET Button on the Mini FAP.
UAE A380 06-70-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
Pushing the SMOKE DETECTION button on the FAP function selector displays the SMOKE
DETECTION page. The SMOKE DETECTION page displays the status of the smoke detectors on all
decks of the aircraft. The deck selector buttons are disabled.
Typical SMOKE DETECTION Page on the FAP
Note: The small squares on the decks of the aircraft indicate the location of the smoke detectors.
Color of the Indicator Description

(Square)
Gray If no smoke is detected and all smoke detectors are operating, the
indicators are light gray.
Amber If there is a smoke sensor fault, or there is no data available, an
indicator is amber.
Red If smoke is detected and the smoke detector is operating, the
indicator is red.
Refer to 06-70-20 Position of the Smoke Detection System on the Mini FAP
Refer to 06-70-30 Description of the Smoke Detection System
UAE A380 06-70-20 P 1/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM ON THE MINI FAP

Applicable to: ALL
Selecting the SMOKE DETECTION button on the mini FAP function selector displays the SMOKE
DETECTION page.
A box on the SMOKE DETECTION page displays the status of the smoke detectors of the area that is
controlled by the mini FAP.
Typical SMOKE DETECTION Page on the Mini FAP
If no smoke is detected and all smoke detectors are operating, the SMOKE DETECTION page displays
the SYSTEM OK message.
On the right hand side of the box there is a scroll bar. If there are more messages available than fit in
the box, this is indicated by the scroll bar. More messages are available if the PREV. PAGE and the
NEXT PAGE button are enabled. The cabin crew can use the PREV. PAGE or NEXT PAGE button to
display the additional messages.
UAE A380 06-70-20 P 2/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Description
A380
DESCRIPTION OF THE SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
The Smoke Detection (SD) system receives signals from smoke detectors that are installed in each
lavatory, IFE control center, room and crew rest compartment.
If smoke is detected in the cabin, the SD system initiates aural and visual warnings that are distributed
via the CIDS for the cabin crew.
If a smoke detector has a fault or does not send any signal the SD system indicates a smoke sensor
fault message (INOP) on the FAP and mini FAP.
CABIN SMOKE WARNING
In the case of smoke in the cabin, there are the following warnings:
1. Aural Warnings
- Triple chime in the cabin, every 30 s.
2. Visual Warnings
- On all FAPs, all mini FAPs: text message with indication of the smoke location (SMOKE hardkey
lighted steady)
- On the AAPs: smoke indicator pushbutton lighted (if available)
- On the AIPs: text message with indication of the smoke location, red LED flashing
- On the ACPs located close to the location of the detected smoke: amber flashing light
- The Smoke Indicator / Call Light (at the respective lavatory or IFE control center) shows the
respective location of the smoke.
If smoke is detected in a lavatory, the illumination of the respective lavatory is switched to a predefined
brightness.
SMOKE IN THE CREW REST COMPARTMENT
If smoke is detected in a CRC, there are the following warnings:
1. Aural Warnings
- A wake-up chime in the respective CRC (duration: 30 s)
- Triple chime every 30 s.
2. Visual Warnings
- The Smoke Indicator / Call Light (at the respective CRC) shows the location of the smoke.
If smoke is detected in a CRC, the illumination of the respective CRC is switched to a predefined
brightness.
UAE A380 06-70-30 P 1/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Description
A380
SMOKE RESET COMMAND

Pushing the SMOKE RESET button on the respective FAP, mini FAP, or AAP (if available) resets the
aural warning in the whole cabin. The visual warnings (ACP and AIP indications) are only reset at the
respective location, all other warnings persist.
Note: The smoke indications on the FAP and on the mini FAPs, and / or AAP remain active as long
as the smoke detected signal is transmitted from the smoke detectors. The same is valid for
the respective smoke indicator call light.
The SMOKE RESET button is available on the activated SMOKE DETECTION page of the FAP or the
mini FAP.
The SMOKE hardkeys are available on the FAP, on the mini FAP, and on the AAP (depending on
customization).
SMOKE DETECTOR FAILURE INDICATION IN THE CABIN
In the case of a smoke detector failure in a lavatory, room, crew rest compartment, or IFE control
center, the CAUTION light on the FAP or mini FAP comes on and a related message appears.
SMOKE DETECTION PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The SMOKE DETECTION page on the FAP may indicate:

- A smoke warning
Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Warning With a SMOKE Reset Button on the FAP or
Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Warning without a SMOKE RESET Button on the FAP
- Smoke sensor faults
Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Sensor Faults / No Sensor Data Available Indication on the FAP
UAE A380 06-70-30 P 2/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Description
A380
SMOKE RESET AVAILABLE ON THE FAP

The example below shows the SMOKE DETECTION page indicating two smoke warnings. The
respective positions/indicators on the aircraft symbol are displayed in red, additionally the respective
position/indicator names are displayed in white with a red background. On the right hand side of the
display the SMOKE DETECTED control pad is displayed including the SMOKE RESET button.
It is possible to reset the smoke chime, the ACP as well as the AIP indication with the SMOKE RESET
button.
The smoke indications on the FAP and the local mini FAP and / or AAP, the lavatory call light as well as
the local chime sequence (aural warning) remain active as long as the smoke detected signal is
transmitted from the smoke detectors.
Typical Smoke Warning with SMOKE RESET Button on the FAP
UAE A380 06-70-30 P 3/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Description
A380
SMOKE RESET BUTTON NOT AVAILABLE

The example below shows the SMOKE DETECTION page indicating two smoke alerts. The respective
positions/indicators on the aircraft symbol are displayed in red, additionally the respective
position/indicator names are displayed in white with a red background. On the right hand side of the
display the SMOKE DETECTED control pad is displayed without a SMOKE RESET button.
Typical Smoke Warning without SMOKE RESET Button on the FAP
UAE A380 06-70-30 P 4/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Description
A380
SMOKE SENSOR FAULTS / NO SENSOR DATA AVAILABLE ON THE FAP

The example below shows the SMOKE DETECTION page with a smoke sensor fault message
(SENSOR INOP / NO DATA AVAILABLE). The respective position/indicator on the aircraft symbol is
displayed in amber, additionally the respective position/indicator name is displayed in amber. On the
right hand side of the display a control pad with the message SENSOR INOP / NO DATA AVAILABLE
is shown.
Example - Smoke Sensor Faults / No Sensor Data Available Indication on the FAP
SMOKE DETECTION PAGE ON THE MINI FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The SMOKE DETECTION page on the mini FAP may indicate:

- A smoke warning
Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Warning with SMOKE RESET Button on the Mini FAP or
Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Warning without SMOKE RESET Button on the Mini FAP
- Smoke sensor faults
Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Sensor Faults / No Sensor Data Available on the Mini FAP
UAE A380 06-70-30 P 5/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Description
A380
SMOKE RESET BUTTON AVAILABLE ON MINI FAP

The example below shows the SMOKE DETECTION page indicating two smoke warnings. The main
message is displayed in the first line. The affected locations are listed in the second line. On the right
hand side of the display the SMOKE control pad is displayed including the SMOKE RESET button.
It is possible to reset the smoke chime, the ACP as well as the AIP indication with the SMOKE RESET
button.
The smoke indications on the FAP and the local mini FAP and / or AAP, the lavatory call light as well as
the local chime sequence (aural warning) remain active as long as the smoke detected signal is
transmitted from the smoke detectors.
Example - Smoke Warning with SMOKE RESET Button on the Mini FAP
UAE A380 06-70-30 P 6/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Description
A380
SMOKE RESET BUTTON NOT AVAILABLE ON MINI FAP

The example below shows the SMOKE DETECTION page indicating two smoke warnings. The main
message is displayed in the first line. The affected locations are listed in the second line. On the right
hand side of the display the SMOKE control pad is displayed.
Example - Smoke Warning without SMOKE RESET Button on the Mini FAP
UAE A380 06-70-30 P 7/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Description
A380
SMOKE SENSOR FAULTS / NO SENSOR DATA AVAILABLE ON THE MINI FAP

The example below shows the SMOKE DETECTION page with a smoke sensor fault message
(SENSOR INOP / NO DATA AVAILABLE). The main message is displayed in the first line. The
affected locations are listed in the second line.
Example - Smoke Sensor Faults / No Sensor Data Available Indication on the Mini FAP
ADDITIONAL SMOKE INDICATIONS IN THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
In case of smoke detection in the cabin, In addition to the smoke indications on the FAP and mini FAP,
there are also indications on the:
- Additional Attendant Panel (AAP)
Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Indication on the Additional Attendant Panel
- Additional Indication Panel (AIP)
Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Indication on the Attendant Indication Panel
- Area Control Panel (ACP)
Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Indication on the Area Call Panel
UAE A380 06-70-30 P 8/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Description
A380
SMOKE INDICATION ON THE ADDITIONAL ATTENDANT PANEL (OPTIONAL)

In case of smoke in a lavatory the SMOKE LAV pb on the related Additional Attendant Panel (AAP)
flashes red.
Typical Indicator on an AAP
It is possible to reset the visual and aural warnings (smoke chime, the ACP as well as the AIP
indication) via the SMOKE LAV pb on the related AAP.
Note: The indications on the FAP stay as long as smoke is detected. If there is no more smoke
detected, the Smoke Detection Control Unit (SDCU) resets all visual and aural indications
automatically.
UAE A380 06-70-30 P 9/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Description
A380
SMOKE INDICATION ON THE ATTENDANT INDICATION PANEL

If smoke has been detected in the cabin, the red indicator of the Attendant Indication Panels (AIP)
located near the location of the smoke origin comes on flashing (or steady according to CAM
assignment).
Smoke Indication on the Attendant Indication Panel
UAE A380 06-70-30 P 10/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Description
A380
In case of smoke in the cabin the amber segments on the corresponding Area Call Panel (ACP) flash.
Amber Indicators on a Typical ACP
UAE A380 06-70-30 P 11/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
Description
A380
In the case of smoke in the cabin the amber segment on the corresponding Area Call Panel (ACP) will
flash.
Amber Indicator on a Typical ACP
UAE A380 06-70-30 P 12/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SEAT SETTINGS

Applicable to: ALL
The SEAT SETTINGS system page is used to provide the control pads that control passenger call and
reading light settings per seat. In addition, this page provides controls for the entire and zone wise
PASSENGER CALL RESET and CHIME INHIBIT.
The cabin crew can access the SEAT SETTINGS page on ground and in flight.
For information about the seat setting function: Refer to 06-80-20 Position of the SEAT SETTINGS
Page on the FAP
For information about the passenger call settings: Refer to 06-80-30 Seat Settings - PASSENGER Call
Settings
For information about the reading light settings: Refer to 06-80-30 Seat Settings - Reading Lights
Settings
show.
concerned system.
UAE A380 06-80-10 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
General
A380
UAE A380 06-80-10 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE SEAT SETTINGS PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
Typical SEAT SETTINGS Page on the FAP (All Decks)
For information about passenger call settings: Refer to 06-80-30 Seat Settings - PASSENGER Call
Settings
For information about reading light settings: Refer to 06-80-30 Seat Settings - Reading Lights Settings.
UAE A380 06-80-20 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-80-20 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS

Applicable to: ALL
PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS

The PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS control pad enables inhibiting passenger calls per seat. It is
possible to re-enable one or all inhibited seat(s).
Typical PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS Control Pad
Title Description
SELECT Button (PASSENGER Pushing the SELECT button on the PASSENGER CALL control pad
CALL control pad) displays the PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS control pad.
When the PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS control pad is displayed
the SELECT button is indicated in green.
Pushing the SELECT button again will "close" the control pad. The
SELECT button will be indicated in grey.
SEAT ROW / SEAT The target seat window displays the selected seat row and seat
IDENTIFIER target window identifier.
When no seat was selected the target seat window is empty.
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 1/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
Title Description
SEAT ROW / SEAT Pushing the navigation controls enables the cabin crew to select an
IDENTIFIER navigation controls individual seat.
- SCROLL UP icon
- SCROLL DOWN icon
The Top of the list and BOTTOM OF THE LIST icons move the
selection by a maximum of 10 steps in either direction. If there are not
enough entries for the TOP OF THE LIST icon / BOTTOM OF THE
LIST icon, the respective icon will be disabled.
If there are no further entries above or below the colored bar
(highlight position) the respective SCROLL UP or SCROLL DOWN
icon is disabled.
SELECT Button (SEAT ROW / Pushing the SELECT button for the SEAT ROW selects the indicated
SEAT IDENTIFIER) seat row.
Pushing the SELECT button for the SEAT IDENTIFIER.
SEAT ROW / SEAT The SEAT ROW / SEAT IDENTIFIER indication are two lists:
IDENTIFIER Indication
- A list of the available seat rows on the left hand side of the control
pad
- A list of the available seat identifiers for the selected seat row on
the right hand side of the control pad.
The selected seat is indicated by a light blue bar.
Scroll bars show that there are more entries (seat row names,
respectively seat identifier) available in the selection boxes.
CLEAR Button Pushing the CLEAR button will undo the selection.
INHIBIT Pushing the INHIBIT button inhibits the passenger call function for
individual passenger seats.
INHIBITED SEATS Selection / The INHIBITED SEATS selection / indication box indicates the
Indication box inhibited seats.
The inhibited seats can be enabled again (individually or all at once).
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 2/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
Title Description
INHIBITED SEATS Navigation Pushing the navigation controls enables the cabin crew to select an
Controls individual seat.
- SCROLL UP icon
- SCROLL DOWN icon
selection by a maximum of 10 steps in either direction.
If there are not enough entries for the TOP OF THE LIST icon /
BOTTOM OF THE LIST icon, the respective icon will be disabled.
button is disabled.
ENABLE Button Pushing the ENABLE button enables the passenger call function for a
selected seat in the INHIBITED SEATS selection / indication box.
ENABLE ALL Button Pushing the ENABLE ALL button enables the passenger call function
for all selected seats in the INHIBITED SEATS selection / indication
box.
CALL RESET Buttons There are CALL RESET buttons for cabin areas and rooms. Pushing
a CALL RESET button for a cabin area or the rooms will reset all calls
in that area (the rooms).
CHIME INHIBIT Buttons There are CHIME INHIBIT buttons for cabin areas and rooms.
Pushing a CHIME INHIBIT button for a cabin area or the rooms will
inhibit all calls in that area (the rooms).
The initial status for the indication of the selection boxes and buttons is: L2
- The selection box for the seat row numbers indicates all CAM assigned seat rows. All related
controls are available/enabled.
- The target seat window is empty
- The selection box for the seat identifier of the inhibited seats will be empty and all related controls
will be inhibited
- The INHIBIT and the CLEAR button will be disabled.
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 3/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
HOW TO SELECT A SEAT FOR PASSENGER CALL FUNCTIONS

Use the SEAT SETTINGS page on the FAP to select a seat for call inhibiting.
1. Push the SEAT SETTING button on the first level of the function selector of the FAP to open the
CABIN LIGHTING page.
Typical SEAT SETTINGS Page – ALL Page

For information about the deck selector: Refer to Operation of the FAP.
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 4/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
Typical SEAT SETTINGS Page (Main Deck)
3. Push the SELECT button of the PASSENGER CALL control pad. The PASSENGER CALL
SETTINGS control pad is displayed.
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 5/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
4. Select an individual seat in the next three steps:

5. To select a seat row, use the ▴ and ▾ icons corresponding to the left list (numbers) . The selected
seat row is highlighted and displayed in the field above the lists.
6. If the desired seat row number is highlighted in the list, push SELECT.
7. To select an individual seat, use the ▴ and ▾ icons corresponding to the right list (seat identifier).
The selected seat is highlighted and displayed in the field above the lists.
8. If the desired seat is highlighted in the list, push SELECT. The selected seat identifier is highlighted
and displayed in the field above the lists (target seat window).
The seat selection is completed.
After a re-selection of a seat identifier, the current identifier in the target seat window will be replaced. L2
After re-selection of a seat row number the current indication for the seat row number in the target seat
window will be replaced, additionally the seat identifier indication in the target seat window will be
deleted (i.e. the seat identifier has to be selected again).
As long as the seat selection (seat row number and seat identifier) is not completed the INHIBIT button
will be inactive.
By pushing the INHIBIT button the corresponding passenger call key corresponding to the seat
selection will be inhibited and the target seat window will be cleared.
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 6/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
In addition, the inhibited seat will appear in the inhibited seats selection/indication box. The INHIBIT
button itself has no status indication.
If the cabin crew did not complete the selection of a seat and the PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS page
is re-selected (page left and selected again), the target seat window will display the previous, not
completed, selection (seat row number and seat identifier).
Note: This indication handling is necessary to prevent misleading system operations, if the
PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS page is active on other FAPs.
L1
Refer to 06-80-30 PAX Call Reset
Refer to 06-80-30 How to Inhibit a Chime
HOW TO INHIBIT A CHIME
Use the SEAT SETTINGS page to inhibit the passenger call chime for individual seats.
When no seat is selected, the passenger call chime inhibit function is disabled and the corresponding
buttons / icons are displayed ghosted.
Typical PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS Control Pad (No Selected Seats)
1. Select the seat for which the passenger call chime shall be inhibited. Refer to 06-80-30 How to
Select A Seat for Passenger Call Functions
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 7/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
2. When the selected seat is displayed in the target seat window, push the INHIBIT button. The
selected seat will be displayed in the INHIBITED SEATS list on the left side of the PASSENGER
CALL SETTINGS control pad.
For information about how to enable the chime for the selected seat(s) again: Refer to 06-80-30 How to
Enable Inhibited Seats
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 8/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
HOW TO ENABLE INHIBITED SEATS

Use the SEAT SETTINGS page to enable the passenger call chime again.
It is possible to enable a single seat or enable all seats for which the passenger call chime is inhibited.
1. Select the desired deck on the SEAT SETTINGS page.
2. Push the SELECT button on the PASSENGER CALL control pad.
3. To enable a single seat, select a seat with the navigation buttons. The selected seat is highlighted
with a colored bar.
4. Push the ENABLE button. The selected seat will be cleared from the selection box.
5. To enable all inhibited seats, push the ENABLE ALL button. All seats will be cleared from the
selection box.
If there are no entries (inhibited seats) in the inhibited seats selection box , the ENABLE and ENABLE
ALL button will be disabled (ghosted).
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 9/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
PAX CALL RESET

The CALL RESET buttons are located on different control pads for the cabin zones and rooms of th
selected deck (customized). The control pads are located below the PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS
control pad.
Typical SEAT SETTINGS MAIN DECK page
To reset the passenger calls in a cabin zone or room, push the CALL RESET button on the control pad
of the desired zone or room.
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 10/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
READING LIGHTS SETTINGS

Applicable to: ALL
READING LIGHT SETTINGS

The READING LIGHT SETTINGS control pad enables the cabin crew to switch on/off (set/reset)
reading lights per seat. The SELECT button on the READING LIGHT control pad will display the
control pad for the READING LIGHT SETTINGS function.
Typical READING LIGHT SETTINGS Control Pad
Title Description
SELECT Button (READING Pushing the SELECT button on the READING LIGHT control pad
LIGHT Control Pad) displays the READING LIGHT SETTINGS control pad.
When the READING LIGHT SETTINGS control pad is displayed the
SELECT button is indicated in green.
Target Seat Window The target seat window displays the selected seat row and seat
identifier.
When no seat was selected the target seat window is empty.
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 11/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
Title Description
SEAT ROW / SEAT Pushing the navigation controls enables the cabin crew to select an
IDENTIFIER Navigation individual seat.
Controls
- SCROLL UP icon
- SCROLL DOWN icon
selection by a maximum of 10 steps in either direction. If there are
not enough entries for the TOP OF THE LIST icon / BOTTOM OF
THE LIST icon, the respective icon will be disabled.
icon is disabled.
SELECT Button (SEAT ROW / Pushing the SELECT button for the SEAT ROW selects the indicated
SEAT IDENTIFIER) seat row.
Pushing the SELECT button for the SEAT IDENTIFIER.
SEAT ROW / SEAT The SEAT ROW / SEAT IDENTIFIER indication are two lists:
IDENTIFIER Indication
- A list of the available seat rows on the left hand side of the control
pad
- A list of the available seat identifiers for the selected seat row on
the right hand side of the control pad.
The selected seat is indicated by a light blue bar.
Scroll bars show that there are more entries available (seat row
names respectively seat identifier) in the selection boxes.
CLEAR Button Pushing the CLEAR button will undo the selection.
R/L SET Button Pushing the R/L SET button turns ON reading lights for individual
passenger seats.
R/L RESET Button Pushing the R/L RESET button turns OFF reading lights for individual
passenger seats.
The initial status for the indication of the selection boxes and buttons is: L2
- The selection box for the seat row numbers indicates all CAM assigned seat rows. All related
controls are available/enabled.
- The target seat window is empty
- The R/L SET and the R/L RESET button is deactivated.
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 12/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
How to select a seat for reading light setting / resetting is described in the LIGHTS chapter. Refer to
06-30-10-30-80 How to Reset an Individual Reading Light
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 13/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A380
UAE A380 06-80-30 P 14/14

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE SYSTEM INFO PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The SYSTEM INFO page provides the status indication of several cabin systems. The cabin crew can
use the SYSTEM INFO page for preflight checks. The following systems/functions are incorporated in
the SYSTEM INFO page:
- CIDS INTERNAL
- FLOOR PANEL
- POWER MANAGEMENT
- MISCELLANEOUS.
The ALL page of the SYSTEM INFO pages displays all relevant messages/failures of the respective
system/function (e.g. CIDS INTERNAL, FLOOR PANEL, etc.) of the entire aircraft. A list box indicates
the relevant messages/failures of the respective system/function.
The list box has a heading for any separate system/function. Each system/function has a separate
selection button. A scroll bar indicates that further messages/failures of a system/function are
available. Scrolling is possible with the NEXT/PREVIOUS buttons.
A special indicator comes up if there are messages/failures (except for the SYSTEM OK message) for
the available systems/functions.
New main messages will be always listed in the first row of the list box. The main messages will be
displayed before already existing main messages. If the cabin crew selects the SYSTEM INFO page,
the first displayed list box content is CIDS INTERNAL. If the CIDS is not supplied with normal and
essential electrical power (full power supply), the systems/functions are not accessible (Refer to Blue
Card).
For further information about the SYSTEM INFO page:
- Refer to 06-90-20 Position of the SYSTEM INFO Page on the FAP
- Refer to 06-90-30 SYSTEM INFO Page
- Refer to 06-90-40 Indications on the SYSTEM INFO Page.
show.
concerned system.
UAE A380 06-90-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
General
A380
UAE A380 06-90-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE SYSTEM INFO PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
Selecting the SYSTEM INFO button from the second level of the FAP function selector displays the
SYSTEM INFO ALL page with the CIDS INTERNALS list box. The list box indicates all current
messages/failures.
Position of the SYSTEM INFO Page on the FAP
On the right hand side of the list box there are four available selection buttons.
- CIDS INTERN (CIDS internal information)
- FLOOR PANEL
- POWER MGMT (Power Management)
- MISC (miscellaneous)
UAE A380 06-90-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-90-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
Description
A380
SYSTEM INFO PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
All available messages/failures are displayed on the SYSTEM INFO ALL page. A scroll bar located on
the right hand side of the list box indicates that further failures/messages are available.
The cabin crew can use the PREV. PAGE and NEXT PAGE buttons to scroll to through the
failures/messages.
For further information:
- Refer to 06-90-30 SYSTEM INFO Page/Blue Card
- Refer to 06-90-40 Indications on the SYSTEM INFO Page
The following list boxes are available:
- See CIDS INTERNALS
- See FLOOR PANEL HEATING
- See POWER MANAGEMENT
- See MISCELLANEOUS .
CIDS INTERNALS LIST BOX
When the SYSTEM INFO page is displayed the CIDS INTERNALS list box is displayed initially: The
CIDS INTERNALS button is indicated in the active/green status and the respective heading (CIDS
INTERNALS) is displayed on the list box.
An amber arrow in front of a selection button indicates that there are messages/failures available.
If there is no message/failure available the SYSTEM OK message is displayed on the active list box.
UAE A380 06-90-30 P 1/6

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
Description
A380
CIDS INTERNALS List Box
FLOOR PANEL HEATING LIST BOX

Pushing the FLOOR PANEL HEATING button displays the FLOOR PANEL HEATING list box with the
relevant messages.
UAE A380 06-90-30 P 2/6

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
Description
A380
FLOOR PANEL HEATING List Box
POWER MANAGEMENT LIST BOX

Pushing the POWER MANAGEMENT button displays the POWER MANAGEMENT list box with the
relevant messages.
UAE A380 06-90-30 P 3/6

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
Description
A380
POWER MANAGEMENT List Box
MISCELLANEOUS LIST BOX

Pushing the MISCELLANEOUS button displays the MISCELLANEOUS list box with the relevant
messages.
UAE A380 06-90-30 P 4/6

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
Description
A380
MISCELLANEOUS List Box
UAE A380 06-90-30 P 5/6

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
Description
A380
SYSTEM INFO PAGE/BLUE CARD

Applicable to: ALL
If the CIDS is not supplied with the complete electrical power (normal and essential) the system is not
able to detect and collect all necessary data to display them on the SYSTEM INFO page. To indicate
the problem a blue card is displayed:
Blue Card on the SYSTEM INFO Page
UAE A380 06-90-30 P 6/6

CCOM 03-Jul-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
Indications
A380
INDICATIONS ON THE SYSTEM INFO PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
Button Description
Pushing the CIDS INTERN button activates the CIDS INTERNALS list
box.
Pushing the FLOOR PANEL button activates the FLOOR PANEL

HEATING list box.
Pushing the POWER MGMT. button activates the POWER

MANAGEMENT list box activated.
Pushing the MISC. button activates the MISCELLANEOUS list box.
UAE A380 06-90-40 P 1/4

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
Indications
A380
MESSAGES ON THE MISCELLANEOUS INDICATOR / SYSTEM INFO

Applicable to: ALL
The SYSTEM INFO page provides messages in the MISCELLANEOUS list box as shown in the table
below. The cabin crew has to act on these messages as described below.
Typical Message on the FAP Cabin Crew Action

SYSTEM OK If this message is displayed in the MISCELLANEOUS list box no cabin
crew action is needed.
TROLLEY LIFT x INOP If this message is displayed in the MISCELLANEOUS list box the
cabin crew has to check the display at the corresponding trolley lift.
Depending on the message displayed on the trolley lift display the
cabin crew has to follow the corresponding instructions.
TROLLEY LIFT x NO DATA If this message is displayed in the MISCELLANEOUS list box the
AVAILABLE cabin crew has to make an entry into the digital cabin logbook and use
another trolley lift.
When the message persists the corresponding trolley lift must be
considered as inoperable.
L / R MAIN AVIONICS DOOR No cabin crew action needed.
NOT CLOSED (LOWER DECK)
Note: The avionics door (e-bay door must be closed before each
flight). If the message persists the cabin crew must inform the
flight crew.
UPPER AVIONICS DOOR NOT If this message is displayed in the MISCELLANEOUS list box the
CLOSED cabin crew has to check and close the door, and report to the flight
crew.
AFT AVIONICS DOOR NOT No cabin crew action needed.
CLOSED
NO E-BAY ACCESS DOORS No cabin crew action needed.
DATA AVAILABLE
LOWER DECK E-BAY ACCESS No cabin crew action needed.
DOOR 1 / 2 OPEN
UPPER DECK E-BAY ACCESS No cabin crew action needed.
DOOR 1 OPEN
AFT E-BAY ACCESS DOOR 1 No cabin crew action needed.
OPEN
UAE A380 06-90-40 P 2/4

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
Indications
A380
Typical Message on the FAP Cabin Crew Action

LOWER DECK ACCESS DOOR x If this message is displayed in the MISCELLANEOUS list box the
CLOSED cabin crew has to check the corresponding entrance hatch leading to
the Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment (LDCRC)  .
Normally, the entrance hatch is open.
The cabin crew has to check why the entrance hatch is closed. If there
is no reason the cabin crew must open the entrance hatch.
Note: The message does not concern the emergency exit hatch for
the lower deck compartment. (The emergency exit hatch is
normally closed.)
NO LOWER DECK ACCESS If this message is displayed in the MISCELLANEOUS list box the
DOORS DATA AVAILABLE cabin crew has to check the corresponding hatch leading to the lower
deck compartments, if installed.
Normally, the entrance hatch is open.
If the entrance hatch is closed the cabin crew has to check why it is
closed. If there is no reason the cabin crew must open the entrance
hatch.
The message does not concern the emergency exit hatch for
Note:
the lower deck compartment. (The emergency exit hatch is
normally closed.)
IFE CENTER LOSS OF COOLING If this message is displayed in the MISCELLANEOUS list box the
cabin crew has to shut down the IFE Center (IFEC) via the IFE
POWER page on the FAP.
IFE CENTER NO COOLING If this message is displayed in the MISCELLANEOUS list box the
DATA cabin crew has to check the Crew Terminal (CT) for failure messages.
If the message persists the cabin crew must shut down the IFEC via
the IFE POWER page on the FAP.
UAE A380 06-90-40 P 3/4

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
Indications
A380
UAE A380 06-90-40 P 4/4

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN STATUS
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE CABIN STATUS PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can use the CABIN STATUS page to get a general overview of the current cabin
systems status.
There is an CABIN STATUS ALL page and pages for each deck, which has relevant cabin systems.
The different system status are displayed via aircraft symbols. Up to five aircraft symbols may be
displayed on each deck page. The aircraft symbols represent the respective system pages.
The CABIN STATUS button is available on every FAP page. The CABIN STATUS button is located on
the right lower corner of the display.
show.
concerned system.
UAE A380 06-100-10 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN STATUS
General
A380
UAE A380 06-100-10 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN STATUS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF CABIN STATUS PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the CABIN STATUS page via the CABIN STATUS button. The CABIN
STATUS button is available on all FAP pages in the lower right corner of the screen.
Typical CABIN STATUS ALL Page
UAE A380 06-100-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN STATUS
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-100-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN STATUS
Description
A380
CABIN STATUS ALL PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The CABIN STATUS page enables the cabin crew to have an overview of the status of all relevant
cabin systems.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN STATUS page by pushing the CABIN STATUS button in the
lower right corner of any FAP page.
Typical CABIN STATUS ALL Page
UAE A380 06-100-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN STATUS
Description
A380
CABIN STATUS PER DECK PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the CABIN STATUS per deck pages via the deck selector on the CABIN
STATUS ALL page.
Typical CABIN STATUS UPPER DECK Page
The cabin status per deck page provides status information of the selected deck about:
- CABIN LIGHTING: Refer to 06-30-10-20 Position of the Cabin Lighting Pages on the FAP
- DOORS / SLIDES. Refer to 06-40-20 Position of the DOORS / SLIDES Page on the FAP
- TEMPERATURE: Refer to 06-50-30 Position of the TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
- WATER / WASTE: Refer to 06-60-30 Position of the WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP
Note: Touching an aircraft symbol will display the cabin system page, e. g. DOORS / SLIDES.
UAE A380 06-100-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN READY SIGNALING
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE CABIN READY FUNCTION

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can use the CABIN READY signaling function to inform the flight crew that all
passengers have boarded and that the aircraft is ready for take off.
The CABIN READY (ALL) page shows all three decks and their status. There are no deck wise pages
for this function.
Each crew station can report that the corresponding area is ready via the AREA READY button. When
all stations have reported their AREA READY, the purser can report CABIN READY to the flight crew
via the master FAP.
show.
concerned system.
UAE A380 06-110-10 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
UAE A380 06-110-10 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE CABIN READY PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the CABIN READY page via a function button (CABIN READY) on the
function selector. (For information about the function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP
Overview).
Typical CABIN READY ALL Decks Page
UAE A380 06-110-20 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Apr-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-110-20 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Apr-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CABIN READY PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
Typical CABIN READY Page on the FAP
Button / Control Pad Description

CABIN READY Control Pad The CABIN READY button on the control pad can have one of these
statuses
- enabled (gray)
- activated (green)
- disabled (grayed out / ghosted).
The legend refers to the indications on the aircraft symbols. The
purser can push the CABIN READY button when the cabin
crewmembers at the other crew stations have declared their areas
to be in the AREA READY status.
UAE A380 06-110-30 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Apr-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
Button / Control Pad Description

When the CABIN READY button is gray (enabled) the CABIN
READY function is enabled and the purser can declare the cabin as
READY by pushing the CABIN READY button.
When the CABIN READY button is green (activated) the purser has
pushed the CABIN READY button to declare the cabin as READY.
If the CABIN READY button is grayed out (disabled) the cabin ready
function is blocked.
When the AREA READY button is gray (enabled) the AREA READY
function is enabled. The cabin crew can declare the area
corresponding to the FAP as READY by pushing the AREA READY
button.
When the AREA READY button is green (activated) a cabin crew
member has pushed the AREA READY button to declare the area
as READY.
UAE A380 06-110-30 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Apr-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO SIGNAL CABIN READY ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
To signal to the flight crew that cabin is ready follow the steps described below.
1. Push the CABIN READY button on the function selector to display the CABIN READY ALL decks
page.
Typical CABIN READY ALL Decks Page
2. When all passengers have boarded and are seated push the AREA READY button.
3. If there are areas displayed as not ready contact the corresponding crew station.
4. When the remaining areas are also ready push the CABIN READY button.
UAE A380 06-110-40 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
CABIN READY Function – Activated
UAE A380 06-110-40 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
GALLEY COOLING/SUPPLEMENTAL COOLING SYSTEM
General
A380
GALLEY COOLING - GENERAL

Applicable to: ALL
The galley cooling system provides cooling capacity for food and beverages stored in trolleys and
trolley compartments in designated galleys.
The galley cooling system uses Air Cooling Units (ACUs) in designated galleys to cool trolley
compartments or individual trolleys Refer to 06-120-30-20 Galley Cooling Principles.
The cabin crew can control and monitor the system from the:
- Flight Attendant Panel (FAP): GALLEY COOLING Page. Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 GALLEY
COOLING Page on the FAP
- GALLEY COOLING panels installed in the cooled galleys. Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 Galley Cooling
Panel in the Galleys.
Note: Galley cooling starts when the cabin crew switches ON at least one ACU in any of the cooled
galleys.
UAE A380 06-120-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
UAE A380 06-120-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE GALLEY COOLING PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
There is a GALLEY COOLING page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP). The cabin crew can use this
page to monitor and control the galley cooling system.
The cabin crew can access the GALLEY COOLING page by pushing the GALLEY COOLING button on
the second level of the function selector on the FAP.
Typical GALLEY COOLING Page on the FAP
Pushing a button from the deck selector on the GALLEY COOLING page displays the:
- GALLEY COOLING MAIN DECK page or
UAE A380 06-120-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
- GALLEY COOLING UPPER DECK page or

- GALLEY COOLING LOWER DECK page, if installed.
For more information about the GALLEY COOLING page: Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 GALLEY
COOLING Page on the FAP.
Note: Each cooled galley has a GALLEY COOLING panel that controls the status of the related
ACU.
UAE A380 06-120-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380 Galley Cooling Overview
GALLEY COOLING OVERVIEW

Applicable to: ALL
The galley cooling has two independent coolant loops: One of them supplies the galleys on the right
side of the aircraft, the other one supplies the galleys on the left side. The center galleys are supplied
either by the right side or by the left side coolant loop.
The main component of each coolant loop is a Central Refrigeration Unit (CRU) that cools down the
coolant. Pumps distribute the coolant to each cooled galley. Heat exchangers in the galleys, so-called
Air Cooling Units (ACUs), provide the galleys with cold air. This cooled air is used to cool the trolleys
that contain food and beverages.
Galley Cooling - Overview
For more information about the cooling principles in the galleys: Refer to 06-120-30-20 Galley Cooling
Principles.
UAE A380 06-120-30-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380 Galley Cooling Overview
UAE A380 06-120-30-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380 Galley Cooling Principles
GALLEY COOLING PRINCIPLES

Applicable to: ALL
An Air Cooling Unit (ACU) provides cool air in a cooled galley to trolley compartments or trolleys.
There are two different principles to supply the trolleys with cooled air:
- See : Air Over
- See : Air Through.
Note: An aircraft can have both types of trolleys: air through and air over.
Both types are optional.
AIR OVER
With the air over principle, the whole trolley compartment, where trolleys are stored, is supplied with
cooled air by the Air Cooling Unit (ACU) of the galley. The cooled air enters the trolley compartment at
the rear wall and circulates around the trolleys. Subsequently, the heated air is led back to the ACU.
Air Over Principle
UAE A380 06-120-30-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380 Galley Cooling Principles
AIR THROUGH
With the air trough principle, a trolley itself is supplied with cooled air by the ACU of the galley. The
cooled air enters the trolley at the rear wall and circulates inside the trolley. Subsequently, the heated
air is led back to the ACU.
Air Through Principle
UAE A380 06-120-30-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380 Pre-Conditioning
PRE-CONDITIONING
Applicable to: ALL
In order to provide galley cooling as soon as possible, the system has a PRE-CONDITIONING mode.
In this mode, the galley cooling system cools down the coolant while the Air Cooling Units (ACUs) on
the aircraft are still OFF.
The cabin crew must activate the PRE-CONDITIONING mode on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) to
start the galley cooling system.
Note: After activating the PRE-CONDITIONING mode, it takes approximately 20 min until the gallley
cooling system is ready.
After the 20 min the cabin crew can activate any ACU at any time. The corresponding ACU(s)
will provide cooled air at once.
Each cooled galley has a GALLEY COOLING panel that controls the status of the related
ACU.
UAE A380 06-120-30-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380 Pre-Conditioning
UAE A380 06-120-30-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380 Galley Cooling Controls
General Information about Galley Cooling Controls
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT GALLEY COOLING CONTROLS

Applicable to: ALL
The following pages and panels are available to control the galley cooling system:
- Cockpit controls: Refer to 06-120-30-40-20 Cockpit Controls
- GALLEY COOLING panel in the galley: Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 Galley Cooling Panel in the
Galleys
- GALLEY COOLING page on the FAP/mini FAP: Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 GALLEY COOLING
Page on the FAP/Mini FAP.
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
Cockpit Controls
COCKPIT CONTROLS
Applicable to: ALL
Galley cooling starts automatically when the corresponding controls in the cockpit are set to ON.
Note: However, the cabin crew must switch ON every Air Cooling Unit (ACU) individually via the
GALLEY COOLING panel in order to provide cooled air to the compartments/trolleys.
Each cooled galley has a GALLEY COOLING panel that controls the status of the related
ACU.
Location of the Control Panels in the Cockpit
Panel Control Description

Overhead Panel SCS1 /SCS2 pb The flight crew can use the SCS1 or SCS2 pb to reset
the supplemental cooling (and subsequently the galley
cooling) in case of a failure. Refer to 06-120-70 SCS
Reset after Complete System Failure.
ELEC Panel GALLEY pb The GALLEY pb must be in the AUTO mode.
COMMERCIAL 1 pb and The COMMERCIAL 1 pb and COMMERCIAL 2 pb must
CMMERCIAL 2 pb be ON.
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
VENT Panel COOLG pb The COOLG pb must be in the AUTO mode.
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
Cabin Controls
GALLEY COOLING PANEL IN THE GALLEYS

Applicable to: ALL
Each Air Cooling Unit (ACU) can be switched ON or OFF via the temperature selector on the GALLEY
COOLING panel in a designated galley. Control lights indicate the status of the ACU
(ON/OFF/FAULT/TEMP WARNING).
The GALLEY COOLING panel consists of:
- An ACU FAULT indicator
- A TEMPERATURE WARNING indicator
- An ACU ON indicator
- An ACU/AC circuit breaker
- An ACU temperature selector.
Note: The GALLEY COOLING panel is customized and can be different in each galley. The following
illustration shows a typical galley cooling panel.
Typical GALLEY COOLING Panel
Control/Indicator Description
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 1/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
ACU FAULT Indicator If the ACU FAULT indicator is ON the ACU is faulty. This requires
maintenance.
TEMP WARNING Indicator If the TEMP WARNING indicator comes ON, the temperature in the
cooled compartment does not correspond to the selected value.
In this case the cabin crew must check if the compartment doors are
completely closed.
The TEMP WARNING indicator will go OFF when the temperature has
reached the selected value.
CAUTION If the TEMP WARNING indicator comes ON, the

cooling temperature of the related compartment is
not sufficient.
To avoid spoiling the food, store it in a compartment
with sufficient cooling.
ACU ON Indicator When the ACU ON indicator is ON, the ACU is ON.
ACU/AC Circuit Breaker The circuit breaker operates automatically and secures the related
electrical circuit. When the circuit breaker trips, the circuit has an
overload.
CAUTION If the circuit breaker has tripped, the ACU is not

operating.
To avoid spoiling the food, store it in a compartment
with sufficient cooling.
Temperature Selector Turning the temperature selector switches ON/OFF the ACU.
Note: The temperature selector is customized and can be different in
the available controls.
GALLEY COOLING PAGE ON THE FAP/MINI FAP

The cabin crew can use the following pages on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) and mini Flight
Attendant Panel (mini FAP) to control the galley cooling:
- The GALLEY COOLING page on the FAP Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 GALLEY COOLING Page on
the FAP
- The GALLEY COOLING page on the mini FAP Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 GALLEY COOLING Page
on the Mini FAP.
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 2/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
GALLEY COOLING PAGE ON THE FAP

The GALLEY COOLING page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) displays galley cooling information
and enables the cabin crew to initiate the PRE-CONDITIONING mode.
GALLEY COOLING PAGE FOR ALL DECKS
The GALLEY COOLING ALL page provides information about all galleys with galley cooling. If an
Air Cooling Unit (ACU) is not operative, it generates an error message and the corresponding galley
appears in amber on the GALLEY COOLING page.
Example of a GALLEY COOLING Page: GALLEY COOLING ALL DECKS
GALLEY COOLING PAGE FOR MAIN DECK

The Main Deck, Upper Deck and Lower Deck pages show the location of the ACUs and detailed
information about the system status, the temperatures and any error messages.
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 3/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
Example of a GALLEY COOLING Page: GALLEY COOLING MAIN DECK
Deck Selector (1)

The deck selector allows the cabin crew to monitor galley cooling for all decks or deck wise.
There are four buttons to select the deck:
- ALL
- UPPER DECK
- MAIN DECK
- LOWER DECK (optional).
System Status (2)
The system status box provides information about the status of the Supplement Cooling System
(SCS).
The following system status are possible:
System Status Description

ACTIVE The system is active. Currently one or more ACUs are ON and
operating normally.
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 4/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
NOT ACTIVE If the status is NOT ACTIVE, one of the following may be the
cause:
- The system is ready to operate but all ACUs are OFF.
- The system is currently not available for galley cooling
because:
- The system is starting and self-testing or
- The cooling performance is needed for the purpose of
avionics ground cooling (if installed) or
- The galley cooling system is in PRE-CONDITIONING
mode and all ACUs are OFF.
- The system is switched OFF via the cockpit COOLG pb.
- There is no electrical power available.
–– There is no status information about the ACU available.
Indication of the Temperature and the ACU Location (3)

LOCATION
The LOCATION box indicates the location of all ACUs on the selected deck. Touching the
UP (▴) or DOWN (▾) buttons selects an ACU for displaying its status and temperature values.
The selected ACU is highlighted.
A green frame indicates the ACU unit on the aircraft symbol.
Note: If there is no temperature information available, this is indicated by “--“. The window
on the left side stays empty.
STATUS
The STATUS box provides information about the current status of the selected ACU.
The following status are possible:
Status Description
ON The ACU is ON
OFF The ACU is OFF
– – (no status available) There is no status information about the ACU available.
SELECTED
The SELECTED box displays the target temperature for the selected ACU. The cabin crew
has set this temperature on the GALLEY COOLING panel in the corresponding galley.
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 5/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
UNIT/ACTUAL
The UNIT/ACTUAL box displays the current temperature of the trolley compartment, that is
cooled by the selected ACU.
Optionally, if there are additional sensors installed in the trolleys, the UNIT/ACTUAL box lists
all the trolleys and compartments, that are supplied with cooled air by the selected ACU.
Next to the listed trolleys and compartments, the current temperature shows.
Note: This option depends on the customer version.
Location of the ACUs (4)
The locations of the galleys with ACUs are shown on the aircraft symbol. The cooled galleys are
green when they have power and operate normally. They are gray when they are OFF.
In case of a failure or limited operation, the related galley is amber and a message appears in
the list box (see Message Box).
Message Box (5)
The MESSAGE box only appears in case of a failure. Additionally, the CAUT button in the upper
left corner of the FAP comes ON in amber. If there are further messages, the NEXT PAGE
button will be active. To get back to the previous messages the PREV PAGE button is available.
For more information about the error messages: Refer to 06-120-50 Error Messages.
Pre-Conditioning (6)
The purpose of the PRE-CONDITIONING mode is to cool down the coolant prior to the
operation the ACUs.
Pushing the PRE-CONDITIONING button starts the PRE-CONDITIONING mode. Cooling will
be available at any ACU as soon as the cabin crew switches the corresponding ACU ON. .
For information about how to use the PRE-CONDITIONING mode:Refer to 06-120-40 How to
Switch ON the Air Cooling Unit.
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 6/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
GALLEY COOLING PAGE ON THE FAP

The GALLEY COOLING page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) displays galley cooling information
and enables the cabin crew to initiate the PRE-CONDITIONING mode.
GALLEY COOLING PAGE FOR ALL DECKS
The GALLEY COOLING ALL page provides information about all galleys with galley cooling. If an
Air Cooling Unit (ACU) is not operative, it generates an error message and the corresponding galley
appears in amber on the GALLEY COOLING page.
Example of a GALLEY COOLING Page: GALLEY COOLING ALL DECKS
GALLEY COOLING PAGE FOR MAIN DECK

The Main Deck, Upper Deck and Lower Deck pages show the location of the ACUs and detailed
information about the system status, the temperatures and any error messages.
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 7/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
Example of a GALLEY COOLING Page: GALLEY COOLING MAIN DECK
Deck Selector (1)

The deck selector allows the cabin crew to monitor galley cooling for all decks or deck wise.
There are four buttons to select the deck:
- ALL
- UPPER DECK
- MAIN DECK
- LOWER DECK (optional).
System Status (2)
The system status box provides information about the status of the galley cooling system.
Status Description
MAINTNANCE The galley cooling system is not available because:
- A system test is running or
- The coolant is currently filled.
COCKPT OFF The flight crew has switched OFF the galley cooling system via the
COOLG pb on the overhead panel in the cockpit.
SYS OFF All ACUs are OFF. Therefore there is no cooling demand.
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 8/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
NO POWER There is no electrical power for the galley cooling system.

SYS FAULT The system has a failure and does not operate.
PRECOND The galley cooling system is in the PRE-CONDITIONING mode. The
coolant is cooled down in advance while the ACUs are still OFF.
STARTUP The galley cooling system is starting.
E-BAY PRIO The ACUs in the cabin deactivate automatically. The avionics
compartment has priority for the cooling capacity because the cabin
temperature exceeds 30 °C (86 °F).
CABIN OFF All ACUs in the cabin are OFF. The cooling units for other equipment are
still ON.
COOLING The galley cooling system operates and at least one ACU is ON.
Indication of the Temperature and the ACU Location (3)

LOCATION
The LOCATION box indicates the location of all ACUs on the selected deck. Touching the
UP (▴) or DOWN (▾) buttons selects an ACU for displaying its status and temperature values.
The selected ACU is highlighted.
A green frame indicates the ACU unit on the aircraft symbol.
Note: If there is no temperature information available, this is indicated by “--“. The window
on the left side stays empty.
STATUS
Status Description
ON The ACU is ON
OFF The ACU is OFF
SELECTED
The SELECTED box displays the target temperature for the selected ACU. The cabin crew
has set this temperature on the GALLEY COOLING panel in the corresponding galley.
UNIT/ACTUAL
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 9/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
Optionally, if there are additional sensors installed in the trolleys, the UNIT/ACTUAL box lists
all the trolleys and compartments, that are supplied with cooled air by the selected ACU.
Next to the listed trolleys and compartments, the current temperature shows.
Location of the ACUs (4)
The locations of the galleys with ACUs are shown on the aircraft symbol. The cooled galleys are
green when they have power and operate normally. They are gray when they are OFF.
In case of a failure or limited operation, the related galley is amber and a message appears in
the list box (see Message Box).
Message Box (5)
The MESSAGE box only appears in case of a failure. Additionally, the CAUT button in the upper
left corner of the FAP comes ON in amber. If there are further messages, the NEXT PAGE
button will be active. To get back to the previous messages the PREV PAGE button is available.
For more information about the error messages: Refer to 06-120-50 Error Messages.
Pre-Conditioning (6)
The purpose of the PRE-CONDITIONING mode is to cool down the coolant prior to the
operation the ACUs.
Pushing the PRE-CONDITIONING button starts the PRE-CONDITIONING mode. Cooling will
be available at any ACU as soon as the cabin crew switches the corresponding ACU ON. .
For information about how to use the PRE-CONDITIONING mode:Refer to 06-120-40 How to
Switch ON the Air Cooling Unit.
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 10/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
GALLEY COOLING PAGE ON THE MINI FAP

The mini Flight Attendant Panel (mini FAP) displays the galley cooling status of the assigned Air
Cooling Units (ACUs).
Typical GALLEY COOLING Page on the Mini FAP
SYSTEM STATUS
The system status box provides information about the status of the galley cooling system.
Status Description
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 11/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
MAINTNANCE The galley cooling system is not available because:

- A system test is running or
- The coolant is currently filled.
COCKPT OFF The flight crew has switched OFF the galley cooling system via the
COOLG pb on the overhead panel in the cockpit.
SYS OFF All ACUs are OFF. Therefore there is no cooling demand.
NO POWER There is no electrical power for the galley cooling system.
SYS FAULT The system has a failure and does not operate.
PRECOND The galley cooling system is in the PRE-CONDITIONING mode. The coolant
is cooled down in advance while the ACUs are still OFF.
STARTUP The galley cooling system is starting.
E-BAY PRIO The ACUs in the cabin deactivate automatically. The avionics compartment
has priority for the cooling capacity because the cabin temperature exceeds
30 °C (86 °F).
CABIN OFF All ACUs in the cabin are OFF. The cooling units for other equipment are still
ON.
COOLING The galley cooling system operates and at least one ACU is ON.
INDICATION OF TEMPERATURE AND COOLING UNIT LOCATION

LOCATION
The LOCATION box indicates the location of all ACUs corresponding to the zone where the mini
FAP is installed. Touching the UP (▴) or DOWN (▾) buttons selects an ACU for displaying its
status and temperature values. The selected ACU is highlighted.
A green frame indicates the related ACU on the aircraft symbol.
Note: If there is no temperature information available, this is indicated by “--“. The window on
the left side stays empty.
STATUS
Status Description
ON The ACU is ON
OFF The ACU is OFF
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 12/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
SELECTED
The SELECTED box displays the target temperature for the selected ACU. The cabin crew has
set this temperature on the GALLEY COOLING panel in the corresponding galley.
UNIT/ACTUAL
Optionally, if there are additional sensors installed in the trolleys, the UNIT/ACTUAL box lists all
the trolleys and compartments, that are supplied with cooled air by the selected ACU. Next to
the listed trolleys and compartments, the current temperature shows.
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 13/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
UAE A380 06-120-30-40-30 P 14/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO SWITCH ON THE AIR COOLING UNIT

Applicable to: ALL
In order to start galley cooling in a designated galley, the cabin crew must switch ON the corresponding
Air Cooling Unit (ACU) via the temperature selector on the galley cooling panel in the related galley.
Note: - All ACUs have to be switched ON individually via the GALLEY COOLING panel in the
related galley.
- The GALLEY COOLING panel is customized and can be different in each galley. The
following illustration shows a typical GALLEY COOLING panel.
Note: After switching ON the ACU, it will take approximately 20 min until the system is ready and the
ACU will provide cooled air.
UAE A380 06-120-40 P 1/4

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO ACTIVATE THE PRE-CONDITIONING MODE

Applicable to: ALL
To activate the PRE-CONDITIONING follow the steps described below.

1. Ensure that all Air Cooling Units (ACUs) are switched OFF.
2. Push the AUTO pb on the GALLEY COOLING page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).
The AUTO pb turns from gray to green.
Typical GALLEY COOLING Page on the FAP
PRE-CONDITIONING will take approximately 20 min.

When the cabin crew switches ON any ACU(s) after these 20 min, galley cooling will be available at
once at the activated ACU(s).
UAE A380 06-120-40 P 2/4

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Note: PRE-CONDITIONING will stop automatically. There is no crew action required.
HOW TO SWITCH OFF THE AIR COOLING UNIT

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can switch OFF each Air Cooling Unit (ACU) via the temperature selector on the
GALLEY COOLING panel in the related galley.
Note: - The cabin crew must switch OFF each ACU individually via the GALLEY COOLING panel
in the related galley.
- The GALLEY COOLING panel is customized and can be different in each galley. The
following illustration shows a typical GALLEY COOLING panel.
UAE A380 06-120-40 P 3/4

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO STOW COOLED TROLLEYS

Applicable to: ALL
The Air Through principle will only work with trolleys made for this cooling principle. They have air inlet
and outlet openings in the doors. These openings must fit on the gaskets of the air-ducts of the Air
Cooling Units (ACUs).
To stow the cooled trolleys follow the steps described below:
CAUTION DANGER OF SYSTEM DAMAGE!

MAKE SURE THAT THE CORRECT TROLLEY IS USED AS A COOLED TROLLEY.
DO NOT USE FORCE!
1. Ensure that the appropriate trolley (Air Over/Air Through) is inserted into the designated trolley
compartment.
2. Close the latches to secure the trolley in position.
UAE A380 06-120-40 P 4/4

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Indications
A380
ERROR MESSAGES
GENERAL
If one part of the Supplemental Cooling System (SCS) fails, cooling performance is reduced.
The Supplement Cooling System has two Central Refrigeration Units (CRU). A failure of one CRU
does not lead to a complete loss of any coolant loop. The other CRU is still able to supply 70% of the
required cooling capacity for the ACUs in the cooled galleys.
If error messages appear on the FAP, the cabin crew can not recover any of them by an action.
However for some errors the cabin crew should make an entry into the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL).
See second table.
ERROR MESSAGES
If the following error messages appear on the Flight Attendant panel (FAP) there are no crew actions
necessary.
Message Description
AUTOMATIC POWER SAVING ACTIVE The electrical load management has switched OFF one or
PAY ATTENTION TO POSSIBLE more cooling components.
TEMPERATURE WARNINGS
GALLEY COOLING NOT AVAILABLE The GALLEY COOLING is not available. The maintenance
DUE TO MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES crew is performing ground servicing or system tests.
TRIGGERED BY GROUND SUPPORT
PANEL OR OMT IN THE COCKPIT
SYSTEM OPERATING The GALLEY COOLING is not available because:
GALLEY COOLING NOT YET ACTIVE
- The avionics ground cooling is active with priority or
- The system is operating for PRE-CONDITIONING or
- The system is starting.
Note: - This message appears only at the startup
of the SCS when the electrical power was
shut down completely.
- This message disappears automatically
after a maximum of 14 min after the
startup.
If the following error messages appear on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP), the cabin crew must
monitor the temperature and store the food/beverages in a correct environment. Make an entry into the
Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL).
Message Description
UAE A380 06-120-50 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Indications
A380
PARTIAL SYSTEM FAULT One of the CRU fails.

COOLING PERFORMANCE MAY BE
AFFECTED WHEN AIRCRAFT ON WARNING Health Hazard!
GROUND Without sufficient cooling, food can no
PAY ATTENTION TO POSSIBLE longer be good.
Note: - If the temperature of a compartment exceeds
its level for a longer period, a temperature
warning will appear on the related GALLEY
COOLING panel.
- The cabin crew must monitor the temperature
in the related galley if it stores temperature
sensitive food or beverages.
COOLING UNIT FAILURE An ACU component has failed and therefore the unit does
NO COOLING OF: not provide cooling.
GAL XXX, GAL YYY, etc.
WARNING Health Hazard!
Without sufficient cooling, food can no
longer be good.

COOLING panel.
COOLING UNIT TEMPERATURE An ACU has detected too high temperature in a cooling
WARNING compartment for a long time.
NOT SUFFICIENT COOLING OF:
ONE SYSTEM SIDE FAULT (coolant loop A single component or several components have failed.
1 or 2 failure) Thus the coolant loop 1 or 2 has failed.
NO COOLING OF: The GALLEY COOLING is not available in any galleys
GAL XXX, GAL YYY, etc. associated with the coolant loop 1 or 2.
UAE A380 06-120-50 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Indications
A380
COMPLETE SYSTEM FAULT A combination of failures which prevent the operation of

NO COOLING OF: both coolant loops have occurred.
ALL GALLEYS The complete system has failed and the GALLEY
COOLING is not available.
ERROR MESSAGES
GENERAL
If one part of the Supplemental Cooling System (SCS) fails, cooling performance is reduced.
The Supplement Cooling System has two Central Refrigeration Units (CRU). A failure of one CRU
does not lead to a complete loss of any coolant loop. The other CRU is still able to supply 70% of the
required cooling capacity for the ACUs in the cooled galleys.
If error messages appear on the FAP, the cabin crew can not recover any of them by an action.
However for some errors the cabin crew should make an entry into the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL).
See second table.
ERROR MESSAGES
If the following error messages appear on the Flight Attendant panel (FAP) there are no crew actions
necessary.
Message Description
LOAD SHEDDING ACTIVE The electrical load management switched OFF one or
PAY ATTENTION TO POSSIBLE more cooling components.
SYSTEM OPERATING FOR AVIONICS The GALLEY COOLING is not available because the
COOLING avionics ground cooling is active with priority.
GALLEY COOLING NOT ACTIVE WHILE
CABIN HOT
SYSTEM OPERATING FOR The GALLEY COOLING is not available because the
PRECOOLING system is operating for PRE-CONDITIONING.
NO GALLEY SELECTED FOR COOLING
SYSTEM STARTING The GALLEY COOLING is not available because the
GALLEY COOLING NOT YET ACTIVE system is starting.
Note: - This message appears only at the startup of
the SCS when the electrical power was shut
down completely.
- This message disappears automatically after
a maximum of 40 s after the startup.
UAE A380 06-120-50 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Indications
A380
DUE TO MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES crew is performing ground servicing or systems tests.
TRIGGERED BY GROUND SUPPORT
PANEL
DUE TO MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES crew is performing ground servicing or systems tests.
TRIGGERED BY OMT IN THE COCKPIT
If the following error messages appear on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP), the cabin crew must
monitor the temperature and store the food/beverages in a correct environment. Make an entry into the
Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL).
Message Description
PARTIAL SYSTEM FAULT One of the CRU fails.
COOLING PERFORMANCE MAY BE
AFFECTED WHEN AIRCRAFT ON WARNING Health Hazard!
GROUND Without sufficient cooling, food can no
PAY ATTENTION TO POSSIBLE longer be good.
COOLING panel.
UAE A380 06-120-50 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Indications
A380
COOLING UNIT FAILURE An ACU component fails and therefore the unit does not
NO COOLING OF: provide cooling.
WARNING Health Hazard!
Without sufficient cooling, food can no
longer be good.

COOLING panel.
COOLING UNIT TEMPERATURE An ACU has detected too high temperature in a cooling
WARNING compartment for a long time.
NOT SUFFICIENT COOLING OF:
LEFT SIDE SYSTEM FAULT A single component or several components have failed.
NO COOLING OF: Thus the left coolant loop has failed.
GAL XXX, GAL YYY, etc. The GALLEY COOLING is not available in any galleys
associated with the left coolant loop.
RIGHT SIDE SYSTEM FAULT A single component or several components have failed.
NO COOLING OF: Thus the right coolant loop has failed.
GAL XXX, GAL YYY, etc. The GALLEY COOLING is not available in any galleys
associated with the right coolant loop.
COMPLETE SYSTEM FAULT A combination of failures which prevent the operation of
NO COOLING OF: both coolant loops have occurred.
ALL GALLEYS The complete system has failed and the GALLEY
COOLING is not available.
UAE A380 06-120-50 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Indications
A380
UAE A380 06-120-50 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
SCS RESET AFTER COMPLETE SYSTEM FAILURE

The GALLEY COOLING page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) displays: COMPLETE SYSTEM
FAILURE / NO COOLING OF: ALL LOCATIONS and the TEMP WARNING light of all switched ON
Air Cooling Units (ACU) is ON.
YES NO
Note: Do not reset the SCS more than once.
A combination of failures prevents the operation of both coolant loops.
1. Is the SCS switched ON in the cockpit? (The COOLG pb at the VENT
panel is pressed in and the OFF light is extinguished.) Go to 3 Go to 2
2. Ask the flight crew to switch ON the SCS.
Is the error message "COMPLETE SYSTEM FAILURE" still displayed on
the FAP? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. Ask the flight crew to reset the SCS once.
Note: Inform the flight crew that it is not recommended to reset the
SCS more than once.
Note: The procedure to reset the SCS is described in the FCOM.
Is the error message "COMPLETE SYSTEM FAILURE" still displayed on
the FAP after the reset? Go to 6 Go to 4
4. Monitor the GALLEY COOLING page on the FAP for 40 minutes. The
error message "COMPLETE SYSTEM FAILURE" must not be displayed
again.
Is the error message displayed again within 40 minutes after the reset? Go to 6 Go to 5
5. The SCS is operative.
If the SCS was reset: Make an entry into the cabin logbook that the SCS
was reset. END END
6. The complete SCS has failed and galley cooling is not available.
Make an entry into the cabin logbook that the SCS is inoperative. END END
UAE A380 06-120-70 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
UAE A380 06-120-70 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE IFE AND SEAT POWER CONTROL PAGES
Applicable to: ALL
The IFE POWER pages provide information about the power status of the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE)
equipment as well as seat power supply.
Seat power supplies the following:
- PED power outlet
- Seat functions (e.g. actuation)
- IFE components (e.g. screen, handset etc.).
The following IFE POWER pages are available at the FAP:
- IFE POWER ALL page
- IFE POWER UPPER DECK page
- IFE POWER MAIN DECK page, and, depending on the layout,
- IFE POWER LOWER DECK page.
On the deck related pages (MAIN DECK, UPPER DECK, LOWER DECK), the status (ON/OFF) of seat
power groups and IFE equipment can be controlled via corresponding control pads.
The IFE POWER pages may be protected by an access code. This depends on the customized
definition of CIDS (Cabin Intercommunication Data System) via the Cabin Assignment Module (CAM).
show.
concerned system.
UAE A380 06-130-10 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
General
A380
UAE A380 06-130-10 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE IFE POWER PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the IFE POWER page by pushing the IFE POWER button on the function
selector. (For information about the function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview)
IFE POWER Button on a Typical Function Selector
UAE A380 06-130-20 P 1/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-130-20 P 2/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
IFE POWER - ALL PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the IFE POWER - ALL page by selecting the IFE POWER button from the
function selector.
The IFE POWER - ALL page gives an overview of the seat power related states. The details of the
power states are displayed on the respective deck pages.
Typical IFE POWER — ALL Page
Note: Typically, the seat power columns do not end/start at the doors as displayed graphically on the
aircraft symbol. The details of the power columns are displayed on the corresponding deck
related IFE POWER page.
On the IFE POWER - ALL page the status of the MAIN DECK and the UPPER DECK is displayed via
seat power columns in aircraft symbols for the two decks. The color of the seat power column indicates
their status:
Color Status
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 1/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
Green The corresponding seat power column is switched ON and power is available.
The status will still indicate green, if only a few of the seats of a seat power
column have failed.
Note: Seat power must be available to use PED power. PED power can be
switched independently via the PED POWER pb-sw on the hardkey
row below the FAP: Refer to FAP Operation..
Amber The corresponding seat power column is switched OFF (manually or
automatically).
The displayed seat power columns can be switched ON or OFF on the deck related IFE POWER
pages.
IFE POWER PAGE ACCESS CODE

Applicable to: ALL
The IFE POWER pages may be protected by an access code, depending on the Cabin Assignment
Module (CAM) definition. When the IFE POWER pages are access code protected, an ENTER
ACCESS CODE control pad pops up when the cabin crew selects one of the deck selector buttons on
the IFE POWER - ALL page.
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 2/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
Typical IFE POWER Page Access Code Control Pad
When the cabin crew has entered the access code, the IFE POWER page for the corresponding deck
is displayed.
If the entered code was wrong, a blue card with the following message will be displayed on the ENTER
ACCESS CODE control pad: ACCESS CODE INCORRECT. ENTER ACCESS CODE AGAIN.
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 3/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
IFE POWER MAIN DECK PAGE

The IFE POWER MAIN DECK page has three parts:

- See Seat power control (SEAT POWER COLUMNS control pad)
- See IFE related power control (individual control buttons for different IFE equipment)
- See Aircraft symbol displaying the status of the selected deck (MAIN DECK).
Note: Depending on the Cabin Assignment Module (CAM) definition, the IFE POWER pages may be
protected by an access code:Refer to 06-130-30 IFE POWER PAGE Access Code.
Typical IFE POWER MAIN DECK Page
SEAT POWER CONTROL

On the SEAT POWER COLUMNS control pad there are nine seat power groups. The cabin crew can
switch these seat power groups ON or OFF. Each seat power group has a label with the location
description (e.g. FWD WDO LH = Forward Window Left Hand side). In addition, each seat power group
has a field where the corresponding seat rows (e.g. S/R 1 — S/R 7) are indicated.
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 4/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
In case of low power a corresponding message is displayed and highlighted in the

field below the seat row indication.
PED power management is active. After 5 min power can be available again.
In case of a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) event the power supply trips and the
corresponding message is displayed and highlighted in the field below the seat
row indication.
Refer to 06-130-60 Reset a GFI TRIPPED Message on the FAP.
If power is OFF for part of a column, the corresponding message is displayed and
highlighted in the field below the seat row indication.
This can only be solved by the maintenance crew.
The seat power is controlled via the ON/OFF button next to the seat row label.
The color of the ON/OFF button indicates the current power status:
Button Color Status

Green ON
Gray OFF
Gray and grayed out OFF and not available
IFE RELATED POWER CONTROL

There are up to seven control pads available for IFE related power groups. Each power group has its
own control pad and ON/OFF button.
Button Color Status

Green ON
Gray OFF
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 5/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
The different IFE POWER pages may display different IFE related power group control pads. Some of
the IFE related power groups can be controlled from every deck.
Refer to the table below for details about the control features of typical IFE related power groups.
Power Group Control

IFE Center (in The cabin crew can control the IFE power to the IFE Center via the IFE CENTER
avionics button. The button is available for all decks.
compartment)
ADB (Area The cabin crew can control the IFE power to the ADBs via the ADB button. ADBs
Distribution Box) are controlled per deck.
OVHD ALL The cabin crew can control the IFE power to the entire overhead system via the
OVHD ALL button on the Main Deck and the Upper Deck page.
CABIN The cabin crew can control the IFE power to the IFE Control Centers via the
WRKSTA/RCC (IFE corresponding button per deck.
Control Center:
Cabin
Workstation/Remot
e Control Center
(RCC))
LANDSC CAMERA The cabin crew can control the IFE power to the landscape camera via the
LANDSC CAMERA button from the MAIN DECK page.
LIVE TV The cabin crew can control the IFE power to the LIVE TV service via the LIVE TV
button. This button is only available on the IFE POWER MAIN DECK page.
Note: If the flight crew has switched OFF the power of the LIVE TV service via
the IFEC sw in the cockpit, the LIVE TV button on the IFE POWER MAIN
DECK FAP page changes to gray. If the cabin crew pushes the LIVE TV
button in this gray state, it sends a “switch ON” command (the button
shortly changes to green), but gets the feedback that another source has
switched OFF the LIVE TV equipment. Therefore the LIVE TV button
returns to gray and saves this reported OFF status in its load group.
When the flight crew switches ON the IFEC sw in the cockpit again, the
GCS system stays OFF and the LIVE TV button stays gray.
In order to turn ON the LIVE TV service again, the cabin crew must push
the LIVE TV button again and the button changes to green.
THE AIRCRAFT SYMBOL

The aircraft symbol shows the available seat power columns. They indicate the current seat power
status. Each seat power column corresponds to a seat power group on the SEAT POWER COLUMNS
control pad.
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 6/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
When a seat power group is ON, the corresponding column is green. When a seat power group is
OFF, the corresponding column is amber.
IFE POWER MAIN DECK PAGE

The IFE POWER MAIN DECK page has three parts:

- See Aircraft symbol displaying the status of the selected deck (MAIN DECK).
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 7/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
SEAT POWER CONTROL


row indication.
Button Color Status

Green ON
Gray OFF

Button Color Status

Green ON
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 8/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
Button Color Status

Gray OFF
Power Group Control

IFE Center (in avionics compartment) The IFE Center can be controlled from all decks.
ADBs (Area Distribution Boxes) ADBs are controlled per deck.
OVHD The entire overhead system can be controlled from
the Main Deck and the Upper Deck.
RCC / CWS (IFE Control Centers i.e. Remote IFE Control Centers are controlled per deck.
Control Center(s) / Crew Work Station)
THE AIRCRAFT SYMBOL

control pad.
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 9/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
IFE POWER UPPER DECK PAGE

The IFE POWER UPPER DECK page has three parts:

- See Aircraft symbol displaying the status of the selected deck (Upper Deck).
Typical IFE POWER UPPER DECK Page
SEAT POWER CONTROL

UAE A380 06-130-30 P 10/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380

row indication.
Button Color Status

Green ON
Gray OFF

Button Color Status

Green ON
Gray OFF
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 11/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
Power Group Control

IFE Center (in the The cabin crew can control the IFE power to the IFE Center via the IFE
avionics compartment) CENTER button. The button is available for all decks.
ADB (Area Distribution The cabin crew can control the IFE power to the ADBs via the ADB button.
Boxes) ADBs are controlled per deck.
OVHD ALL The cabin crew can control the IFE power to the entire overhead system via
the OVHD button on the Main Deck and the Upper Deck page.
CABIN WRKSTA/RCC The cabin crew can control the IFE power to the IFE Control Centers via the
(IFE Control Center: corresponding button, per deck.
Cabin
Workstation/Remote
Control Center (RCC))
LOUNGE IFE The cabin crew can control the IFE power to the IFE equipment in the lounge
on the Upper Deck via the LOUNGE IFE button.
THE AIRCRAFT SYMBOL

control pad.
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 12/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
IFE POWER UPPER DECK PAGE

The IFE POWER UPPER DECK page has three parts:

- See Aircraft symbol displaying the status of the selected deck (Upper Deck).
Typical IFE POWER UPPER DECK Page
SEAT POWER CONTROL

UAE A380 06-130-30 P 13/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380

row indication.
Button Color Status

Green ON
Gray OFF

Button Color Status

Green ON
Gray OFF
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 14/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
Power Group Control

THE AIRCRAFT SYMBOL

control pad.
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 15/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
IFE POWER LOWER DECK PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
On the IFE POWER LOWER DECK page only the IFE related power controls (individual control
buttons for different IFE equipment) are displayed.
Typical IFE POWER LOWER DECK Page
For controlling the IFE related power groups, there are up to seven control pads available. Each power
group has its own control pad and ON/OFF button.
The color of the ON/OFF button indicates the current power status.
Button Color Status

Green ON
Gray OFF
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 16/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
Button Color Status

IFE RELATED POWER GROUPS

Power Group Control

UAE A380 06-130-30 P 17/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Description
A380
UAE A380 06-130-30 P 18/18

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Indications
A380
INDICATIONS ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The status of the IFE power in the seat rows is indicated by the:
- Color of the ON/OFF button
- Text in the field below the seat row indication
- Color of the seat column on the aircraft symbol.
Text below the seat row Column on the aircraft

Status Button
indication symbol
ON active (green) - green
OFF available (gray) - amber
Partial OFF active (green) PARTIAL OFF amber
Power Group not disabled (grayed out) - amber
Available
Level 1 Power active (green) LOW POWER amber
Management
GFI Tripped available (gray) TRIPPED amber
UAE A380 06-130-40 P 1/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Indications
A380
UAE A380 06-130-40 P 2/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Operation
A380
HOW TO TURN OFF/ON THE POWER OF A SEAT POWER GROUP

Applicable to: ALL
Use the IFE POWER pages to turn OFF or ON the power of a seat power group.
Follow the steps below:
1. On the FAP, select the IFE POWER button from the function selector. (For information about the
function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview).
2. Select a deck (here for example MAIN DECK) via the deck selector. (For information about the deck
selector: Refer to Operation of FAP). Typically, an ENTER ACCESS CODE control pad pops up.
UAE A380 06-130-50 P 1/10

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Operation
A380
3. Enter the access code and confirm your entry by pushing ENTER on the ENTER ACCESS CODE
control pad. If the access code is correct, the IFE POWER MAIN DECK page will be displayed.
UAE A380 06-130-50 P 2/10

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Operation
A380
4. On the SEAT POWER COLUMNS control pad select the ON/OFF button of the FWD CENTER
group.
If the button was ON it will turn gray and the power of the seat group is turned OFF.
If the button was OFF it will turn green and the power of the seat group is turned ON.
UAE A380 06-130-50 P 3/10

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Operation
A380
HOW TO TURN OFF/ON AN IFE POWER GROUP

Applicable to: ALL
Use the IFE POWER pages to turn OFF or ON the power of an IFE power group.
function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview).
2. Select a deck (here for example MAIN DECK) via the deck selector. (For information about the deck
selector: Refer to Operation of FAP). Typically, an ENTER ACCESS CODE control pad pops up.
UAE A380 06-130-50 P 4/10

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Operation
A380
control pad. If the access code was correct, the IFE POWER MAIN DECK page will be displayed.
UAE A380 06-130-50 P 5/10

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Operation
A380
4. On the CABIN WORKSTATION control pad select the ON/OFF button.

If the button was ON it will turn gray and the power of the cabin workstation is turned OFF.
If the button was OFF it will turn green and the power of the cabin workstation is turned ON.
UAE A380 06-130-50 P 6/10

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Operation
A380
HOW TO TURN OFF/ON THE LANDSCAPE CAMERA

Applicable to: ALL
Use the IFE POWER pages to turn OFF or ON the power of an IFE power group.
function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview). Typically, an ENTER ACCESS
CODE control pad pops up.
control pad. If the access code was correct, the IFE POWER — ALL page will be displayed.
UAE A380 06-130-50 P 7/10

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Operation
A380
3. Select the MAIN DECK via the deck selector. (For information about the deck selector: Refer to
Operation of FAP). The IFE POWER MAIN DECK page will be displayed.
UAE A380 06-130-50 P 8/10

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Operation
A380
4. On the LANDSCAPE CAMERA control pad select the ON/OFF button.

If the button was ON it will turn gray and the power of the landscape camera turns OFF.
If the button was OFF it will turn green and the power of the landscape camera turns ON.
UAE A380 06-130-50 P 9/10

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Operation
A380
UAE A380 06-130-50 P 10/10

CCOM 13-Jul-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
Function Recovery Procedures
A380
RESET A GFI TRIPPED MESSAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
If there was a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) event and the power supply trips, the cabin crew can switch the
power ON again. However, the procedure described below is only an Airbus recommendation and may
only be applied if it is in accordance with the airline policy.
The power supply of a seat column has tripped when the following indications appear on the FAP
IFE POWER page: a text indication TRIPPED, the corresponding button is OFF (gray), and the
column on the aircraft symbol is amber.
YES NO
Inform the passengers of the affected column that the power will be reset.
1. Ask the passengers of the affected column: Was there an event prior to
the power loss in the affected column? Go to 2 Go to 8
2. Ask the passengers of the affected seat group: Was it a removable
cause? Go to 3 Go to 6
3. If there was a removable cause to the power loss in the affected seat
group, and the corresponding button on the FAP is not disabled (grayed
out):
1. Remove the cause and wait for 3 min.
2. Switch ON the power for the affected column on the FAP and wait for
approximately 5 min.
Note: Do not reconnect the PED that may have caused the GFI!
Is power available again for the remaining PED? END Go to 4
4. If there is still no power available in the affected column, and the
corresponding button on the FAP is not disabled (grayed out):
1. Ask all passengers of the affected column to disconnect all the PED
and wait for 3 min.
3. One by one reconnect the PED.
Do not reconnect the PED that may have caused the GFI!
Is power available again? END Go to 5
UAE A380 06-130-60 P 1/4

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
A380
YES NO
5. If the reset was not successful:
Repeat the procedure.
Note: It is possible to do a maximum of 3 resets, after that the
corresponding button will be disabled (grayed out). Go to 3 Go to 15
6. If there was no removable cause to the power loss in the affected column:
1. Ask the passengers of the affected seat group to disconnect all PED.
2. Switch OFF the related Seat Group Switch (SGS)
4. Switch ON the SGS.
5. One by one reconnect the PED.
Is power available again? END Go to 7
7. If there is still no power available in the affected column:
1. Ask the passengers of the affected seat group to disconnect all the
PED.
2. Switch OFF the SGS.
Note: The power of the affected seat group must remain disabled
during the flight.
3. Switch ON the power for the affected column on the FAP.
4. Make an entry into the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL), mentioning:
- The affected seat group.
8. If there was no event prior to the power loss:
1. Ask all passengers of the affected column to disconnect all PED.
2. Switch OFF all Seat Group Switches (SGS) of the affected column
and wait for 3 min.
Note: The cabin crew can repeat the switching ON via the FAP.
However, it is possible to do a maximum of 3 resets, after
that the corresponding button will be disabled (grayed out).
Did the button and the column on the aircraft symbol turn green? Go to 9 Go to 12
UAE A380 06-130-60 P 2/4

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
A380
YES NO
9. If the button and the column on the aircraft symbol are green:
1. Switch ON one by one the SGS of the affected column.
2. Check the color of the button and the column each time an SGS was
switched on.
Did the button and the column on the aircraft symbol remain green? Go to 11 Go to 10
10. The button is OFF (gray) and the column is amber: The last SGS has
tripped the power supply. The fault must be in the seat group to which the
SGS belongs.
1. Switch OFF the SGS of the faulty seat group and wait for 3 min.
2. Switch ON all remaining SGS, if there are any left.
Do NOT switch ON again the faulty SGS .
Did the button and the column on the aircraft symbol turn green? Go to 11 Go to 15
11. When the button and the column on the aircraft symbol are green:
Reconnect the PED one by one.
Is power available? END Go to 12
12. Is the button green and the column amber? Go to 13 Go to 15
13. If the button is green and the column is amber:
Wait for approximately 5 min. Go to 14 Go to 14
14. Are both the button and the column green? END Go to 15
15. When the reset was not successful:
Make an entry into the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL), mentioning:
- The affected seat column / seat group.
UAE A380 06-130-60 P 3/4

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
IFE POWER
A380
UAE A380 06-130-60 P 4/4

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTING
General
A380

Applicable to: ALL

Floor temperature setting is available to the cabin crew for controlling the temperature of Heated Floor
Panels (HFP).
HFP are installed to increase the temperature of the cabin floor in special areas, normally in the cabin
door and galley areas:
- Upper Deck Refer to 06-140-20 Heated Floor Panels on the Upper Deck
- Main Deck Refer to 06-140-20 Heated Floor Panels on the Main Deck.
The HFPs are installed instead of the normal floor panels and have an integrated and additional
insulated heating element.
The temperature of the HFPs can be controlled via the FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTING page of the
FAP or of the mini FAP (if assigned). Refer to 06-140-40 Setting Temperature Values for the HFP on
the FAP
show.
concerned system.
UAE A380 06-140-10 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
UAE A380 06-140-10 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-09
CABIN SYSTEMS
Location
A380
HEATED FLOOR PANELS ON THE MAIN DECK

Applicable to: ALL
HEATED FLOOR PANELS ON THE MAIN DECK

The heated floor panels (HFP) are located in front of each cabin door.
Heated Floor Panels on the Main Deck
UAE A380 06-140-20 P 1/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
Location
A380
HEATED FLOOR PANELS ON THE UPPER DECK

Applicable to: ALL
HEATED FLOOR PANELS ON THE UPPER DECK

The heated floor panels (HFP) are located in front of each cabin door.
HFPs on the Upper Deck
UAE A380 06-140-20 P 2/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTINGS PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTING page can be selected via a function button (FLOOR TEMP.)
on the function selector. (For information about the function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP
Overview)
Position of the FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTINGS Page on the FAP
POSITION OF THE HEATED FLOOR PANEL PAGE ON THE MINI FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTING page can be selected via a function button (FLOOR TEMP.)
on the function selector.
Position of the FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTINGS Page on the Mini FAP
UAE A380 06-140-30 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Apr-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-140-30 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Apr-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
SETTING TEMPERATURE VALUES FOR THE HFP ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
SETTING TEMPERATURE VALUES ON THE FAP

Select the FLOOR TEMP. function button from the function selector to get access to the FLOOR
TEMPERATURE SETTING page on the FAP. On the ALL page, it is possible to switch ON/OFF all
Heated Floor Panels.
Typical FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTING - ALL Decks Page on the FAP
Related to the selected deck, the temperatures of all installed Heated Floor Panels (HFPs) can be
adjusted on this page. There is a single button for each HFP (e.g. Upper Deck: DOOR 1 RH). Pushing
one of these buttons displays the corresponding control pad.
UAE A380 06-140-40 P 1/6

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Typical FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTING Page on the FAP
The bar graph indicates the current HFP temperature value. The temperature adjustment is indicated
by a green arrow on the right side of the temperature bar graph.
UAE A380 06-140-40 P 2/6

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Typical Control Pad on the CABIN TEMPERATURE MAIN DECK Page
The cabin crew can use the related pushbuttons ( ▴ or ▾) to change the temperature steps of 0.5 within
a range of 1 to 5 (See TEMPERATURE SETTINGS - VALUE TABLE).
Note: A "heating" symbol is displayed in the bulb of the thermometer symbol until the temperature
setting value is reached.
TEMPERATURE SETTINGS - VALUE TABLE
Selectable Temperature Values Temperature at HFP [°C]
5 28–32
4.5 26–30
4 24–28
3.5 22–26
3 20–24
2.5 18–22
2 16–20
1.5 14–18
1 12–16
UAE A380 06-140-40 P 3/6

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
SETTING TEMPERATURE VALUES ON THE MINI FAP

Applicable to: ALL
Typical FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTING Page on the Mini FAP
Select the FLOOR TEMP. function button from the function selector to get access to the FLOOR
TEMPERATURE SETTING page on the mini FAP. Related to the selected deck, the temperatures of
all installed Heated Floor Panels (HFPs) can be adjusted on this page. There is a single button for
each HFP (e.g. Upper Deck: DOOR 1 RH). Pushing one of these buttons displays the corresponding
control pad.
The bar graph indicates the current HFP temperature value. The temperature adjustment is indicated
by a green arrow on the right side of the temperature bar graph.
UAE A380 06-140-40 P 4/6

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
The cabin crew can use the related pushbuttons ( ▴ or ▾) to change the temperature steps of 0.5 within
a range of 1 to 5.
Note: A "heating" symbol is displayed in the bulb of the thermometer symbol until the temperature
setting value is reached.
UAE A380 06-140-40 P 5/6

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
UAE A380 06-140-40 P 6/6

CCOM 05-Jan-16
CABIN SYSTEMS
HUMIDIFICATION/CABIN HEATING/DRY AIR GENERATION
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT HUMIDIFICATION

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
For air humidification there is a humidifier installed in the flight crew rest area.
For more information about the flight crew rest area: Refer to 02-70-10 Flight Crew Rest Compartment
- Introduction.
HUMIDIFIER
The humidifier (humidification system) consists of:
- A humidifier control unit
- An evaporation unit containing a fiberglass pad
- A relative humidity sensor
- A water-valve assembly (water from the potable water system).
The humidifier humidifies the air in the cabin crew area up to an level of 25 % relative humidity at a
temperature of 23 °C.
The humidification system works according to the cold evaporation principle. The pad inside the L2
evaporation unit is kept moist by water sprayed on the pad. Dry and preheated air passes through the
pad. The evaporating water of the pad humidifies the air. The humidity level is controlled by the
humidity control unit which is connected to the relative-humidity sensor and the water-valve assembly.
Humidification starts at a flight level above 26, 000 ft, and stops two hours prior to the top of descend to L1
allow complete drying of the pad prior to landing to avoid the risk of biological contamination.
The crewmembers can monitor and control the humidifier via the mini FAP in the crew rest area. The
current status or any error conditions are displayed on the HUMIDIFICATION page.
show.
concerned system.
UAE A380 06-150-10 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CABIN HEATING

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
For the crew rest compartments and the showers there are electrical heaters installed.
Note: The electrical heating function for the FCRC is linked to the humidification function: If the
heating function is turned OFF, the humidifier in the FCRC is turned OFF, too.
The status of the humidifier on the mini FAP does not change immediately after turning OFF
the heating function.
For more information about the FCRC: Refer to 02-70-10 Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Introduction
For more information about the showers: Refer to 06-180-10 General Information about Shower
Control.
CABIN HEATERS
The electrical cabin heaters are used for air-conditioning and to compensate the water evaporation
cooling effects of the humidifier in the FCRC and the showers.
For information about the humidifier: Refer to 06-150-10 General Information about Humidification.
The crewmembers can monitor and control the cabin heaters via the mini FAP in the crew rest areas
and the FAP. The current status or any fault conditions are displayed on the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL
HEATERS page.
show.
concerned system.
UAE A380 06-150-10 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE HUMIDIFICATION PAGE ON THE MINI FAP

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The cabin crewmembers can access the HUMIDIFICATION page on the mini FAP by pushing the
HUMID. function button of the first level on the function selector.
Typical Humidification Page
UAE A380 06-150-20 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS PAGE ON THE FAP

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Crewmembers can access the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page on the FAP by pushing the
CABIN HEATER function button on the second level of the function selector.
Typical CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS Page on the FAP
UAE A380 06-150-20 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS PAGE ON THE MINI FAP
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Crewmembers can access the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page on the mini FAP in the crew
rest area by pushing the CABIN HEATER function button on the first level of the function selector.
Typical CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS Page
UAE A380 06-150-20 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-150-20 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
THE HUMIDIFICATION PAGE

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The HUMIDIFICATION page on the mini FAP enables the cabin crew to monitor and control the
humidification function.
The cabin crew can access the HUMIDIFICATION page by pushing the HUMID. function button on the
first level of the function selector of the mini FAP.
Title Description
Status Field The status field indicates the name of the humidifier and its status in the
same line.
- ON indicates that the humidifier is ON
- OFF indicates that the humidifier is OFF
- --- indicates a fault or that there is no status information available about
the humidifier.
If there is more than one humidifier available for control, there will be a list
displayed in the status field.
UAE A380 06-150-30 P 1/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Title Description
RESET Pushing the RESET button resets the indicated humidifier.
ON/OFF Pushing the ON/OFF button turns the humidifier ON or OFF.
The humidifier is ON when the button is green (activated). The humidifier is
OFF when the button is gray (enabled).
UAE A380 06-150-30 P 2/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
THE CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS PAGE

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
For the crew rest areas and the showers there are electrical heaters installed.
Note: The electrical heating function for the FCRC is linked to the humidification function: If the
heating function is turned OFF, the humidifier in the FCRC is turned OFF, too.
The CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page on the FAP and mini FAP enables the crew to monitor
and control the heating function.
Note: The cabin crew can select a temperature on the CABIN TEMPERATURE page. It is possible
to select a temperature when the heaters are turned OFF. However this will not turn the
heaters ON automatically. To start the heating the cabin crew has to turn ON the cabin via the
CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page on the FAP or mini FAP by
pushing the CABIN HEATER function button on the first level of the function selector.
Note: The function control for the electrical heaters is the same on the FAP or the mini FAP
UAE A380 06-150-30 P 3/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Typical CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS Page on the Mini FAP
Title Description
Status Field The status field indicates the name of the cabin heater and its status in the
same line.
- ON indicates that the cabin heater is ON
- OFF indicates that the cabin heater is OFF
- --- indicates a fault or that there is no status information available for the
cabin heater.
RESET Pushing the RESET button resets the indicated cabin heater.
ON/OFF By default the cabin heater is ON.
The cabin heater is ON when the button is green (activated). The cabin
heater is OFF when the button is gray (enabled).
Pushing the ON/OFF button turns the cabin heater ON or OFF.
Note: If the cabin heater is OFF, it is still possible to select a temperature
on the TEMPERATURE page. However the cabin heater will not
turn ON automatically.
Note: The electrical heating function is linked to the humidification function: If the heating function is
turned OFF, the humidifier in the FCRC is turned OFF, too.
UAE A380 06-150-30 P 4/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
HOW TO OPERATE THE HUMIDIFIER

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Humidification starts automatically above a flight level of 26, 000 ft and stops two hours prior to the top
of descent. However, the cabin crew can:
- Turn the humidifier ON or OFF.
- Reset the humidifier if there is a fault.
HOW TO TURN ON OR OFF THE HUMIDIFIER

To turn ON or OFF the humidifier follow the steps described below:
1. Push the HUMID. function button on the first level of the function selector on the mini FAP to display
the HUMIDIFICATION page.
2. Push the ON/OFF button on the HUMIDIFICATION page to turn the humidifier OFF. The button
turns gray.
UAE A380 06-150-30 P 5/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
3. Push the ON/OFF button on the HUMIDIFICATION page to turn the humidifier ON. The button turns
green.
HOW TO RESET THE HUMIDIFIER
To reset the humidifier follow the steps described below:
1. Push the HUMID. function button on the first level of the function selector on the mini FAP to display
the HUMIDIFICATION page.
2. Push the RESET button on the HUMIDIFICATION page. The humidification system will restart
(hardware reset).
HOW TO OPERATE THE CABIN HEATER

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Additional electrical heaters are installed in the crew rest area and the showers. The CABIN
TEMPERATURE CONTROL HEATERS page on the FAP and the mini FAP enables the crew to
monitor and control the heating function.
Note: The cabin crew can select a temperature on the CABIN TEMPERATURE page. It is possible
to select a temperature when the heaters are turned OFF. However this will not turn the
heaters ON automatically. To start the heating the cabin crew has to turn ON the cabin heaters
via the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page.
Via the CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL HEATERS page the cabin crew can turn the cabin heaters
ON or OFF.
- Turn the cabin heaters ON or OFF. By default the cabin heaters are ON.
Note: The Flight Crew Rest Compartment (FCRC) is equipped with electrical heaters. The
electrical heating function is linked to the humidification function: If the heating function is
turned OFF, the humidifier in the FCRC is turned OFF, too.
The status of the humidifier on the mini FAP does not change immediately after turning
OFF the heating function.
- Reset the cabin heaters if there is a fault.
UAE A380 06-150-30 P 6/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Typical CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS Page on the Mini FAP
HOW TO TURN ON OR OFF THE CABIN HEATERS

Note: When the cabin heaters are turned OFF the humidifier is turned OFF, too.
To turn ON or OFF the cabin heaters follow the steps described below:
1. Push the CABIN HEATER function button on the first level of the function selector on the mini FAP
to display the CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL HEATERS page.
2. Push the ON/OFF button on the CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL HEATERS page to turn the
cabin heaters OFF. The button turns gray.
3. Push the ON/OFF button on the CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL HEATERS page to turn the
cabin heaters ON. The button turns green.
HOW TO RESET THE CABIN HEATERS
To reset the cabin heaters follow the steps described below:
1. Push the CABIN HEATER function button on the first level of the function selector on the mini FAP
to display the CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL HEATERS page.
2. Push the RESET button on the CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL HEATERS page. The cabin
heating system will restart (hardware reset).
UAE A380 06-150-30 P 7/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
UAE A380 06-150-30 P 8/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
General
A380
ELECTROMECHANICAL WINDOW SHADES

The Electromechanical Window Shade (EMWS) replace the standard window blinds. The EMWS
provide the shading of the passenger compartment by means of two electromechanically driven blinds.
The basic functions of the EMWS are:
- Two-level mechanical shading of the passenger compartment: Refer to 06-160-40 Description of
Electromechanical Window Shades
- Local control by the passenger (minisuite control unit or buttons on the window pane): Refer to
06-160-40 How to Operate the Window Blinds via the Local Controls
- Central crew control via the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP): Refer to 06-160-30 Position of the
WINDOW SHADES Page on the FAP
- Crew control unit on the minisuite shroud (aisle side) 
- Mechanical override (for safety reasons): Refer to 06-160-50 How to Use the Mechanical Override
to Operate the Window Shades.
show.
concerned system.
UAE A380 06-160-10 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
General
A380
UAE A380 06-160-10 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
Location
A380
LOCATION OF THE ELECTROMECHANICAL WINDOW SHADES

The Electromechanical Window Shades (EMWS) replace the standard Airbus window blinds on the
entire Upper Deck (UD).
LOCATION OF THE MANUAL OVERRIDE TOOL

The electromechanical window shades can be operated manually with a mechanical override tool
(hexagonal screwdriver).
Override tools are stowed in the stowage boxes of the cabin attendant seats on the Upper Deck (UD).
Typically the stowage location of the override tools is in the respective left seat of a double attendant
seat, referring to flight direction.
UAE A380 06-160-20 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
Location
A380
Typical Location of the Manual Override Tool
UAE A380 06-160-20 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE WINDOW SHADES PAGE ON THE FAP

The cabin crew can access the WINDOW SHADES page by pushing the WINDOW SHADES button on
the function selector. (For information about the function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP
Overview).
WINDOW SHADES Button on a Typical Function Selector
UAE A380 06-160-30 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-160-30 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
A380
DESCRIPTION OF ELECTROMECHANICAL WINDOW SHADES H9
The electromechanical window shades have two different kinds of blinds:

- A translucent window blind
- An opaque window blind.
The blinds are sequentially lowered, one after the other.
The translucent blind provides partial shading allowing a reduced amount of light to enter the cabin.
The opaque blind provides full light blockage.
The electromechanical window shades can be opened or closed using :
- A local control for the passenger
- A local control for the cabin crew 
- A central cabin crew control via the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)
- A mechanical override.
ELECTROMECHANICAL WINDOW SHADES
Typical Electromechanical Window Shade
UAE A380 06-160-40 P 1/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
A380
WINDOW SHADES CONTROL PAGE ON THE FAP

The WINDOW SHADES CONTROL pages on the FAP enable the cabin crew to monitor and control
the electromechanical window shades.
The cabin crew can access the WINDOW SHADES CONTROL ALL decks page by pushing the
WINDOW SHADES button of the function selector. For more information about the function selector:
Refer to 04-20-10 Operation of the FAP.
The cabin crew can access the WINDOW SHADES CONTROL page for a specific deck by touching
the related aircraft symbol or by pushing the corresponding button of the deck selector on the
WINDOW SHADES CONTROL ALL decks page.
Typical WINDOW SHADES CONTROL Page

FIRST CLASS Button Pushing the FIRST CLASS SELECT button displays the FIRST
SELECT CLASS control pad.
UAE A380 06-160-40 P 2/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
A380

FIRST CLASS Control Pad On the FIRST CLASS control pad there are controls for the
window shades. There are three columns:
- LEFT
Controls for the window shades on the left hand side of the
cabin, only.
- LEFT & RIGHT
Controls for the window shades on both sides of the aircraft.
- RIGHT
Controls for the window shades on the right hand side of the
cabin, only.
In addition, there is a button to enable/disable the local controls
for the whole first class: LOCAL CONTROLS ON/OFF.
OPEN Button Pushing an OPEN button fully opens the window shades on the
corresponding aircraft side, or on both aircraft sides. (LEFT,
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT).
MID Button Pushing an MID button closes the translucent shades and
leaves the opaque shades open on the corresponding aircraft
side, or on both aircraft sides. (LEFT, RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT).
CLOSE Button Pushing an CLOSE button fully closes the translucent and the
opaque window shades on the corresponding aircraft side, or
on both aircraft sides. (LEFT, RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT).
LOCAL CONTROLS Button Pushing the LOCAL CONTROLS ON/OFF button:
ON/OFF
- Enables the local controls of the window shades (button
turns green).
- Disables the local controls of the window shades (button
turns gray)
UAE A380 06-160-40 P 3/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
A380
Typical WINDOW SHADES CONTROL Page with a Message Text Box

MESSAGE List box The MESSAGE list box is displayed if there is a failure of a
window shade.
PREV. PAGE Button Pushing the PREV. PAGE button displays the previous
messages of the list box. This button is only active when there
are more messages than the text box can display at once.
NEXT PAGE Button Pushing the NEXT PAGE button displays the next messages
of the list box. This button is only active when there are more
messages than the text box can display at once.
UAE A380 06-160-40 P 4/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
A380
HOW TO OPERATE THE WINDOW BLINDS FROM THE FAP

To operate the window blinds from the FAP follow the steps below.
1. Push the WINDOW SHADES button on the function selector of the FAP to access the WINDOW
SHADES CONTROL page.
Typical WINDOW SHADES CONTROL Page
2. Push the FIRST CLASS SELECT button. The FIRST CLASS control pad will be displayed.
3. To open the window shades of the LEFT, RIGHT, or LEFT & RIGHT seats, push the respective
OPEN button.
4. To bring the window shades of the LEFT, RIGHT, or LEFT & RIGHT seats to the mid position, push
the respective MID button.
5. To close the window shades of the LEFT, RIGHT, or LEFT & RIGHT seats, push the respective
CLOSE button.
UAE A380 06-160-40 P 5/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
A380
HOW TO OPERATE THE WINDOW BLINDS VIA THE LOCAL CONTROLS H10
There are two operating modes for the window blinds:

- See Tap ON/Tap OFF Mode
- See Sustained Mode.
TAP ON/TAP OFF MODE
To operate the window shades with the tap ON/tap OFF mode, follow the steps below.
1. Tap on the ▾ or the ▴ pushbutton for less than 0.5 seconds.
When you have tapped on the ▾ pushbutton, the translucent window blind moves down first. When
the translucent window blind has moved entirely down, the opaque window blind moves down, too.
When you have tapped on the ▴ pushbutton, the opaque window blind moves up first. When the
opaque window blind has moved entirely up, the translucent window blind will move up, too.
2. To stop the window blinds, tap on the ▾ or the ▴ pushbutton for less than 0.5 seconds.
UP and DOWN Arrow Pushbuttons
SUSTAINED MODE
To operate the window shades with the sustained mode, follow the steps below.
UAE A380 06-160-40 P 6/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
A380
1. Press and hold the ▾ or the ▴ pushbutton for longer than 0.5 seconds.
When you have tapped on the ▾ pushbutton, the translucent window blind moves down first. When
the translucent window blind has moved entirely down, the opaque window blind moves down, too.
When you have tapped on the ▴ pushbutton, the opaque window blind moves up first. When the
opaque window blind has moved entirely up, the translucent window blind will move up, too.
2. To stop the moving window blind, release the pushbutton.
UAE A380 06-160-40 P 7/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
A380
UAE A380 06-160-40 P 8/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
A380
HOW TO USE THE MECHANICAL OVERRIDE TO OPERATE THE WINDOW SHADES H11
To move up/down the window blind(s) manually, use the provided manual override tool, a hexagon
screwdriver.
HOW TO GET THE OVERRIDE TOOL FROM ITS STOWAGE LOCATION
The override tools are stowed in the stowage boxes of the cabin attendant seats in the zones where
the Electromechanical Window Shades (EmWS) are installed. Typically, the override tools are stowed
in the respective left seat of a double attendant seat, in flight direction.
Note: A placard indicates the location of the manual release tools:
- Manual release tool for the oxygen boxes in the Passenger Service Unit (PSU)
- Manual override tool (hexagon screwdriver) to operate the electromechanical window
shades manually.
1. Use the latch of the stowage box of the cabin attendant seat to open the cover.
2. Open the pouch and remove the hexagon screwdriver.
HOW TO OPERATE THE WINDOW SHADES MECHANICALLY
1. Insert the hexagon screwdriver into the hole between the two pushbuttons.
UAE A380 06-160-50 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
A380
Inserted Hexagon Screwdriver
2. Slightly push the hexagon screwdriver downwards. The ball-shaped head of the hexagon
screwdriver will mechanically connect to the window blind drive.
3. Turn the hexagon screwdriver counterclockwise to move up the window blind(s).
Turn the hexagon screwdriver clockwise to move down the translucent window blind.
Note: The opaque window blind cannot be moved down manually.
To entirely move up (or down) the window blind(s), approximately ten full turns of the hexagon
screwdriver are necessary.
Note: If both, the translucent and the opaque window blind are down, they will move up at the
same time.
4. Remove the hexagon screwdriver from the hole.
5. Restore the hexagon screwdriver to the pouch in the stowage box of the cabin attendant seat.
UAE A380 06-160-50 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
A380
HOW TO RESET THE CONTROLLER OF A WINDOW SHADE

The window shades do not operate properly via the controls.
YES NO
1. When operating the window shades via any (electronic) control: Did one
or more window shades stop moving at the wrong position? Go to 2 END
2. To reset the controller of the affected window shade, follow the steps
described below.
1. Go to the faulty window(s).
2. Push both local pushbuttons (▴/▾) in the window pane at the same
time and keep holding them for approximately 5 s.
The pushbuttons will start to flash when the software was reset.
3. Use the local pushbuttons to operate the window blinds. Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Is it possible to move the window shades without any problems? END Go to 4
4. When the reset was not successful:
Make an entry into the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL), mentioning:
- The affected seat.
UAE A380 06-160-50 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
WINDOW SHADES
A380
UAE A380 06-160-50 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SHOWER CONTROL
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SHOWER CONTROL

Applicable to: ALL
The SHOWER CONTROL page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to control and monitor the
showers.
show.
concerned system.
A WATER QUANTITY indicator indicates the available water. Additionally there is a control pad for
each shower unit that provides:
- Information about the shower status
- Indication of the remaining shower time
- ON / OFF control
- Timer reset
- Cleaning Mode control.
Before a passenger can take a shower, the cabin crew must activate the shower from the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP). Before switching ON the showers at the FAP, the cabin crew has to make sure
that the water system is pressurized.
When a passenger has taken a shower and has left the shower room and the shower has been
cleaned, the cabin crew must deactivate the shower from the FAP.
For more information about the operation of the shower: Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start a Shower
from the FAP.
UAE A380 06-180-10 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN SYSTEMS
SHOWER CONTROL
General
A380
UAE A380 06-180-10 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CABIN SYSTEMS
SHOWER CONTROL
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE SHOWER CONTROL PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the SHOWER CONTROL page by pushing the SHOWER button on the
second level of the function selector on the FAP. (For information about the function selector: Refer to
Cabin Systems from FAP Overview)
UAE A380 06-180-20 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
SHOWER CONTROL
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-180-20 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
SHOWER CONTROL
Description
A380
THE SHOWER CONTROL PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The SHOWER CONTROL page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to monitor and control the shower
function.
The cabin crew can access the SHOWER CONTROL page by pushing the SHOWER function button
on the second level of the function selector of the FAP.
Title Description
SHOWER UNIT x For each shower unit there is a control pad on the SHOWER CONTROL
page.
ON/OFF Button Pushing the ON/OFF button on the SHOWER UNIT control pad
activates/deactivates the corresponding shower.
RESET TIMER Button Pushing the RESET TIMER button after a shower activation resets the timer
for the shower time. When the timer is reset the shower is ready for use.
Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start a Shower from the FAP
UAE A380 06-180-30 P 1/4

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
SHOWER CONTROL
Description
A380
Title Description
CLEAN MODE Button Pushing the CLEAN MODE button when the shower is vacant after its use
starts the cleaning mode. Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start the Cleaning Mode
on the FAP
SHOWER STATUS The SHOWER STATUS field on the SHOWER UNIT control pad indicates the
status of the corresponding shower unit. The following statuses are possible:
- SHOWER OFF
- READY FOR USE
- SHOWER LOCKED PREHEATING
- CLEANING MODE
- SHOWER IN USE
- SHOWER IN USE - PAUSED
- SHOWER IN USE - DOOR OPEN
- NO DATA
- SHOWER INOP.
Shower Status for details of the shower status.
REMAINING TIME The remaining shower time is indicated in minutes and in a progress bar on
the SHOWER UNIT control pad.
The green arrow above the progress bar indicates the preset time out
warning. It is positioned relatively to the set total water time (shower time).
The remaining shower time is indicated by a blue bar before the time out
warning: It decreases from the right to the left.
The remaining shower time is indicated by an amber bar after the time out
warning.
SHOWER TIME The SHOWER TIME SETTINGS control pad enables the cabin crew to set
SETTINGS the TOTAL WATER TIME and the TIME OUT WARNING.
TOTAL WATER TIME The cabin crew can set the TOTAL WATER TIME by pushing the ▴ or ▾ icons
on the SHOWER TIME SETTINGS control pad. If the maximum time is
reached the ▴ icon is disabled. If the minimum time is reached the ▾ icon is
disabled.
The corresponding time is indicated in the text box and on the progress bars
of the SHOWER UNIT control pads.
The maximum shower time is 10 min. The minimum shower time is 5 min.
The default is 5 min.
UAE A380 06-180-30 P 2/4

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
SHOWER CONTROL
Description
A380
Title Description
TIME OUT WARNING The cabin crew can set the TIME OUT WARNING by pushing the ▴ or ▾ icons
on the SHOWER TIME SETTINGS control pad. If the maximum time is
reached the ▴ icon is disabled. If the minimum time is reached the ▾ icon is
disabled.
The corresponding time is indicated in the text box and on the progress bars
of the SHOWER UNIT control pads.
The minimum time-out time is 0 s. The maximum time-out time is 1 min. Refer
to 06-180-40 How to Set a Time-Out Warning from the FAP
WATER QUANTITY The WATER QUANTITY control pad indicates the available amount of
available potable water on the aircraft in %.
SHOWER STATUS
Message Description
SHOWER OFF When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status SHOWER OFF, the
shower is off.
SHOWER LOCKED When the cabin crew has pushed the ON/OFF button to activate the
PREHEATING shower function the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status
SHOWER LOCKED PREHEATING. To get this status the cabin crew must
push the ON/OFF button.
READY FOR USE When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status READY FOR USE,
the passenger can start the shower via the WATER CONTROL pb located
in the shower.
SHOWER IN USE When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status SHOWER IN USE
a passenger is taking a shower.
SHOWER IN USE - When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status SHOWER IN
PAUSED USE-PAUSED a passenger is taking a shower but the water is not running.
SHOWER IN USE - When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status SHOWER IN USE -
DOOR OPEN DOOR OPEN a passenger is taking a shower but the shower door is open.
Note: Normally the water stops running when the door of the shower is
open.
UAE A380 06-180-30 P 3/4

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
SHOWER CONTROL
Description
A380
Message Description
CLEANING MODE When the passenger has left the shower room it must be cleaned. The
cabin crew must push the CLEAN MODE button to activate the cleaning
mode. The SHOWER STATUS field will indicate the status CLEANING
MODE.
In this mode the door of the shower can remain open while water is running
to rinse the shower.
During the cleaning mode the cleaning person can activate the water flow
three times by pushing the WATER CONTROL pb each time.
NO DATA When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status NO DATA, the data
flow from and to the shower control unit is disturbed. The cabin crew
should not activate the shower or start the cleaning mode. If the message
persists on the FAP make an entry into the digital cabin logbook.
SHOWER INOP When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status SHOWER INOP
the shower is inoperative. It can not be activated anymore. The cabin crew
must make an entry into the digital cabin logbook.
UAE A380 06-180-30 P 4/4

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN SYSTEMS
SHOWER CONTROL
Operation
A380
HOW TO START A SHOWER FROM THE FAP

The cabin crew control and monitor the shower function via the SHOWER CONTROL page on the
FAP. There is a FAP located at U1L near the shower rooms.
1. Push the SHOWER button on the second level of the function selector to display the SHOWER
CONTROL page.
2. Push the ON/OFF button on the SHOWER UNIT control pad of the desired shower.
Pushing the ON/OFF button activates the shower: The SHOWER STATUS field displays the
message SHOWER LOCKED / PRE-HEATING This indicates to the cabin crew that the water to
the shower is preheating.
3. Wait until the preheating has finished and the SHOWER STATUS displays the message SHOWER
LOCKED.
4. Push the RESET TIMER button.
The default shower time is 5 min.
Note: There is no predefined time-out warning.
Shower time and time-out warning values can be changed by pushing the corresponding ▴ or ▾
icons on the SHOWER TIME SETTINGS control pad when the showers are OFF.
Pushing the RESET TIMER button activates the TIME REMAINING indication inside the shower
unit. The lighted TIME REMAINING indication comes on, which indicates to the passenger that the
shower is ready for use.
Note: By default, the shower time is set at 5 min with no time-out warning. If less passengers are
on board the shower time may be increased in steps of 1 min to a maximum time of 10 min.
When the water in the shower compartment is running, the SHOWER STATUS will display the
message SHOWER IN USE.
The time counter on the FAP page will indicate the remaining shower time to the cabin crew.
UAE A380 06-180-40 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SHOWER CONTROL
Operation
A380
HOW TO SET THE SHOWER TIME FROM THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can set the shower time on the SHOWER TIME SETTINGS control pad on the
SHOWER CONTROL FAP page.
The shower time can only be set if both showers are off (SHOWER STATUS = SHOWER OFF).
1. If the showers are ON but no passengers are using the showers push the ON/OFF buttons.
The ON/OFF buttons will turn from green to gray and the ▴ or ▾ icons on the SHOWER TIME
SETTINGS control pad will be enabled.
2. Use the ▴ or ▾ icons to increase or decrease the shower time in steps of 1 min to a maximum time
of 10 min. 5 min is the minimum shower time.
Note: By default, the shower time is set at 5 min with no time-out warning. If less passengers are
on board the shower time may be increased in steps of 1 min to a maximum time of 10 min.
3. Push the ON/OFF button(s) to activate the shower(s).
HOW TO SET A TIME-OUT WARNING FROM THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can set a time-out warning on the TIME SETTINGS area on the FAP. The time-out
warning indicates to the passenger in the shower compartment, that the shower time will be over soon.
When the time-out time is reached the time-out warning stops the water flow in the shower.
For example, if the TOTAL WATER TIME is set to 5 min, and the cabin crew set a time-out warning of
30 s, the water flow in the shower compartment will stop after 4 min and 30 s. To restart the water flow
for the remaining shower time, the passenger must push the WATER CONTROL pb.
The time-out warning can only be set if both showers are off (SHOWER STATUS = SHOWER OFF).
1. If the showers are ON but no passengers are using the showers push the ON/OFF buttons.
The ON/OFF buttons will turn from green to gray and the ▴ or ▾ icons on the SHOWER TIME
SETTINGS control pad will be enabled.
2. Use the ▴ or ▾ icons to increase or decrease the time-out warning in steps of 10 s to a maximum
time of 60 s.
3. Push the ON/OFF button(s) to activate the shower(s).
UAE A380 06-180-40 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SHOWER CONTROL
Operation
A380
HOW TO START THE CLEANING MODE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cleaning mode provides water to enable the shower compartment to be cleaned after use.
1. Push the SHOWER button on the second level of the function selector to display the SHOWER
CONTROL page.
2. Push the CLEAN MODE button on the SHOWER UNIT control pad of the corresponding shower.
Pushing the CLEAN MODE button enables the cabin crew to clean the shower after use.
Note: The cleaning mode overrides the shower door switch, which allows the cleaning of the
shower with the door open and the water running.
When the CLEAN MODE is ON, the REMAINING TIME indication on the FAP page flashes until the
CLEAN MODE stops.
3. Push the WATER CONTROL pb, located in the shower compartment .
The water flow is activated to the shower hose. The water flow can be activated three times for a
maximum duration of 10 seconds each time by pressing the WATER CONTROL pb.
Note: During the CLEAN MODE the water heater does not come on.
4. Replace the handheld shower head to the wall supply elbow on the slide bar. Make sure that the
wall supply elbow is slid up on the slide bar to the highest position.
This will have the effect that residual water will drip out, ensuring that no bacteria can grow in the
shower hose. Any residual disinfectants will drip out of the shower hose, too. The shower hose
must be empty in order to avoid frost bursting.
5. Deactivate the shower on the FAP:
a. Push the SHOWER button on the second level of the function selector to display the SHOWER
CONTROL page.
b. Push the ON/OFF button on the SHOWER UNIT control pad of the desired shower. Pushing the
ON/OFF button deactivates the shower.
UAE A380 06-180-40 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
SHOWER CONTROL
Operation
A380
UAE A380 06-180-40 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
DIGITAL CABIN LOGBOOK (DCL)
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE DIGITAL CABIN LOGBOOK (DCL)

Applicable to: ALL
The Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) enables the cabin crew to report digitally cabin defects or anything
that concerns the cabin. The DCL is intended to replace the common paper aircraft logbook.
The cabin crew can access the DCL via the FAP.
customized. This will be indicated by the word "example" in the title.
The example will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would show.
The corresponding description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
The DCL is organized in several screens:
- HOME page - Refer to 06-200-30 HOME Page
- USER REGISTRATION page - Refer to 06-200-30 USER REGISTRATION / CHANGE Pages
- FLIGHT INFORMATION page - Refer to 06-200-30 FLIGHT INFORMATION Page
- CREATE DEFECT REPORT page - Refer to 06-200-30 CREATE DEFECT REPORT Page
- SCRATCH PAD page - Refer to 06-200-30 SCRATCH PAD Page
- CABIN STATUS (LOGBOOK) page - Refer to 06-200-30 Logbook Pages Overview.
All reports are first stored in a scratch pad. The reports in the scratch pad can be updated, deleted or
moved into the logbook. If a report is in the logbook it can not be updated or deleted anymore.
Note: The cabin crew members who enter the cabin defect reports must ensure that the crew
member responsible for the cabin is aware about all safety related defect reports. The Airline
normally appoints the crewmember responsible for the cabin per flight phase (e.g. flight crew,
ramp agent, purser).
UAE A380 06-200-10 P 1/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
GENERAL ELEMENTS OF THE DIGITAL CABIN LOGBOOK

The pages of the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) have several different general elements. Their position
and function are described below.
GENERAL ELEMENTS OF THE DCL PAGES
General Elements of the DCL Pages
STATUS BAR
The status bar displays the:
- Status of the DCL
- Error messages
- Information about the entered defect.
SCROLL BAR
If a page contains more information than the screen can display, a scroll bar will indicate to the
cabin crew that more information is available. The green slider of the scroll bar shows the current
position on the page. To view the other information, the cabin crew can use the PREV or NEXT
button. If there is no previous or next page available, the PREV or NEXT button will be inactive.
UAE A380 06-200-10 P 2/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
DECK SYMBOL
The deck symbol indicates the location of the selected section or the selected defect location on the
aircraft depending on the defect.
MENU BAR
The menu bar has three buttons for navigation and help.
Pushing the HELP button opens the help topic for the currently selected function.
Pushing the HOME button opens the start page of the DCL (DCL HOME page).
Pushing the BACK button opens the previously visited page.
TEXT BOX
The text box offers the cabin crew the possibility to enter individual comments for a defect report. A
virtual keyboard can be used to enter the text. See Virtual keyboard.
VIRTUAL KEYBOARD
The cabin crew can use the virtual keyboard to enter all data that is need for a report.
BUTTONS
There are two kinds of selection buttons:
- Selection buttons that initiate an action
- Selection buttons that indicate a selection.
SELECTION BUTTONS THAT INDICATE A SELECTION
Button/Status Description
Active The function of the button is available. Pushing the button will
activate the corresponding action.
Inactive The function of this button is not available.
Button The button is pushed. Releasing the button initiates a function.

depressed
Engaged When selections can be made, pushing the button engages it. The
green color indicates the selection.
UAE A380 06-200-10 P 3/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
Toggle button Pushing this button will toggle between different functions
Virtual keyboard Pushing this button will display a virtual keyboard.
SELECTION BUTTONS THAT INITIATE AN ACTION

The selection buttons that initiate an action are typically located at the bottom of a page. The action,
which the button initiates, is printed on the button. For these buttons there are only three statuses:
- Active
- Inactive
- Button depressed.
UAE A380 06-200-10 P 4/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
SCREEN LAYOUT OF THE DIGITAL CABIN LOGBOOK

The pages of the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) have several different general elements. Their position
and function are described below.
SCREEN LAYOUT OF THE DCL PAGES
Screen Layout of the DCL Pages
STATUS BAR
The status bar displays the:
- Status of the DCL
- Error messages
- Information about the entered defect.
SCROLL BAR
If a page contains more information than the screen can display, a scroll bar will indicate to the
cabin crew that more information is available. The green slider of the scroll bar shows the current
position on the page. To view the other information, the cabin crew can use the PREV or NEXT
button. If there is no previous or next page available, the PREV or NEXT button will be inactive.
UAE A380 06-200-10 P 5/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
DECK SYMBOL
The deck symbol indicates the location of the selected section or the selected defect location on the
aircraft depending on the defect.
MENU BAR
The menu bar has three buttons for navigation and help.
Pushing the HELP button opens the help topic for the currently selected function.
Pushing the HOME button opens the start page of the DCL (DCL HOME page).
Pushing the BACK button opens the previously visited page.
TEXT BOX
The text box offers the cabin crew the possibility to enter individual comments for a defect report. A
virtual keyboard can be used to enter the text. See Virtual keyboard.
BUTTONS
There are two kinds of selection buttons:
- Selection buttons that initiate an action
- Selection buttons that indicate a selection.
SELECTION BUTTONS THAT INDICATE A SELECTION
Active The function of the button is available. Pushing the button will
activate the corresponding action.
Inactive The function of this button is not available.
Button The button is pushed. Releasing the button initiates a function.

depressed
Engaged When selections can be made, pushing the button engages it. The
green color indicates the selection.
Toggle button Pushing this button will toggle between different functions
UAE A380 06-200-10 P 6/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
Virtual keyboard Pushing this button will display a virtual keyboard.
SELECTION BUTTONS THAT INITIATE AN ACTION

The selection buttons that initiate an action are typically located at the bottom of a page. The action,
which the button initiates, is printed on the button. For these buttons there are only three statuses:
- Active
- Inactive
- Button depressed.
UAE A380 06-200-10 P 7/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
UAE A380 06-200-10 P 8/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE DIGITAL CABIN LOGBOOK ON THE FAP

0225-0229, 0241-0244
The Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) is accessed by pushing:

- The MENU hardkey below the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) screen
- The SELECT button on the CABIN LOGBOOK control pad on the FAP screen.
Menu on the Flight Attendant Panel
UAE A380 06-200-20 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE DIGITAL CABIN LOGBOOK ON THE FAP

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) is accessed by pushing:

- The MENU hardkey below the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) screen
- The SELECT button on the CABIN LOGBOOK control pad on the FAP screen.
Menu on the Flight Attendant Panel
UAE A380 06-200-20 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
HOME PAGE
When the cabin crew has selected the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP), the DCL HOME page is displayed.
Example of a DCL HOME Page
The DCL HOME page is divided into different areas:

- Title logo
The layout of the title logo is customized and depends on the airline.
- REPORTING control pad
- USER AND FLIGHT INFORMATION control pad
- EXTRAS AND LAYOUT control pad.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 1/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
Title Type Description

CREATE A Button Pushing the CREATE A DEFECT REPORT
DEFECT button opens the CREATE DEFECT REPORT
REPORT page. It starts the process of creating a new
defect report.
SCRATCHPAD Button Pushing the SCRATCHPAD button opens the
SCRATCHPAD page. This page displays a list of
all defect reports that have been saved on the
scratch pad.
DEFECT Text box The DEFECT REPORTS text box next to the
REPORTING Control
REPORTS SCRATCHPAD button displays the number of
Pad
defect reports that are saved in the scratch pad.
CABIN Button Pushing the CABIN STATUS button opens the
STATUS CABIN STATUS page. This page offers different
filters to view defect reports that have been
moved to the logbook.
OPEN Text box The text box OPEN displays the number of open
defects in the logbook.
DEFERRED Text box The text box DEFERRED displays the number of
deferred defects in the logbook.

USER Button Pushing the USER button opens the USER
REGISTRATION page.
USER Text box The USER text box displays the name of the user
that is currently logged in.
USER AND FLIGHT
FLIGHT Button Pushing the FLIGHT button opens the FLIGHT
INFORMATION
INFORMATION page to open or close flights.
Control Pad
FLIGHT Text box The FLIGHT text box displays the current flight
information or ON GROUND if no flight is open.
STATUS Status The status indicator shows the status of the flight.
Indicator

EXTRAS AND EXTRAS Button Pushing the EXTRAS button opens a page for
LAYOUT Control Pad (LAYOUT) changing the cabin layout, e.g. seat configuration
for the classes.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 2/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
HOME PAGE
When the cabin crew has selected the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP), the DCL HOME page is displayed.
The DCL HOME page is divided into different areas:

- Title logo
The layout of the title logo is customized and depends on the airline.
- REPORTING control pad
- USER AND FLIGHT INFORMATION control pad
- EXTRAS AND LAYOUT control pad.

CREATE A Button Pushing the CREATE A DEFECT REPORT
REPORTING Control DEFECT button opens the CREATE DEFECT REPORT
Pad REPORT page. It starts the process of creating a new
defect report.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 3/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

SCRATCHPAD Button Pushing the SCRATCHPAD button opens the
SCRATCHPAD page. This page displays a list of
all defect reports that have been saved on the
scratch pad and can be further edited or validated
TO COCKPIT Text box The TO COCKPIT text box next to the
SCRATCHPAD button displays the number of
defect reports that are saved in the scratch pad
and shall be send to the cockpit for further
validation.
CABIN Text box The CABIN text box next to the SCRATCHPAD
button displays the number of defect reports that
are saved in the scratch pad and need not to be
send to the cockpit for further validation.
PENDING Button Pushing the PENDING COCKPIT VALIDATION
COCKPIT button opens the SCRATCHPAD page. This page
VALIDATION displays a list of all defect reports that have been
saved on the scratch pad and already transferred
REPORTING Control to the cockpit for further validation.
Pad Text box the PENDING COCKPIT VALIDATION text box
next to the PENDING COCKPIT VALIDATION
button displays the number of defect reports that
are already transferred to the cockpit for further
validation.
CABIN Button Pushing the CABIN STATUS button opens the
STATUS CABIN STATUS page. This page offers different
filters to view defect reports that have been
moved to the logbook.
TECHNICAL Text box The TECHNICAL OPEN text box displays the
OPEN number of open defects in the logbook with
technical impact.
TECHNICAL Text box The TECHNICAL DEFERRED text box displays
DEFERRED the number of deferred defects in the logbook
with technical impact.
CABIN OPEN Text box The CABIN OPEN text box displays the number
of open defects in the logbook with no technical
impact.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 4/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

CABIN Text box The CABIN OPEN text box displays the number
DEFERRED of deferred defects in the logbook with no
technical impact.

USER Button Pushing the USER button opens the USER
REGISTRATION page.
USER Text box The USER text box displays the name of the user
that is currently logged in.
USER AND FLIGHT FLIGHT Button Pushing the FLIGHT button opens the FLIGHT
INFORMATION INFORMATION page to display more flight
Control Pad details.
Text box The FLIGHT text box displays the current / last
flight information.
STATUS Status The status indicator shows the status of the flight
Indicator (open / closed).

EXTRAS AND EXTRAS Button Pushing the EXTRAS button opens a page for
LAYOUT Control Pad (LAYOUT) changing the cabin layout, e.g. seat configuration
for the classes.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 5/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
USER REGISTRATION / CHANGE PAGES

Applicable to: ALL
On the USER REGISTRATION / CHANGE page the cabin crew can:

- Register a new user:See REGISTER NEW USER Control Pad
- Login or logout a registered user:See CHANGE USER Control Pad.
Note: It is possible for any cabin crewmember to create defect reports on the scratch pad without
performing the login process.
Example of a USER REGISTRATION / CHANGE Page
The USER REGISTRATION / CHANGE USER page displays when the cabin crewmember pushes the
USER button on the HOME page.
The registered users are listed (SELECT USER list) below the REGISTER NEW USER control pad.
The USER REGISTRATION / CHANGE USER page has two control pads:
- REGISTER NEW USER
- SELECT USER.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 6/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
REGISTER NEW USER CONTROL PAD

Virtual keyboard Icon Pushing the virtual keyboard icon
displays a virtual keyboard to enter
the:
- New USER ID
- NAME of the new user
- PASSWORD of the new user
- Password confirmation.
USER ID Text box Pushing the virtual keyboard icon next
to the USER ID text box enables the
cabin crew to enter the crew members
user id.
The entered USER ID will be
displayed in the text box.
NAME Text box Pushing the virtual keyboard icon next
to the NAME text box enables the
REGISTER NEW USER cabin crew to enter the crew members
Control Pad name. The entered NAME will be
displayed in the text box.
PASSWORD Text box Pushing the virtual keyboard icon next
to the PASSWORD text box enables
the cabin crew to enter the crew
members password. The entered
PASSWORD is displayed in *.
CONFIRMATION to the CONFIRM PASSWORD text
box enables the cabin crew to confirm
the crew members password. The
confirmed PASSWORD is displayed
in *.
REGISTER NEW USER Button Pushing the REGISTER NEW USER
button registers the new user and
opens a new line on the SELECT
USER control pad.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 7/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
LOGIN / LOGOUT USER

Virtual keyboard Icon Pushing the virtual keyboard icon
displays a virtual keyboard to enter
the PASSWORD for the selected
USER.
to the CONFIRM PASSWORD text
box enables the cabin crew to confirm
the crew members password. The
confirmed PASSWORD is displayed
in *.
In the PASSWORD text box asterisks
indicate that the user has entered a
password.
LOGIN Button Pushing the LOGIN button logs in the
SELECT USER Control corresponding user. The LOGIN
Pad button will turn green.
Pushing the green button of a logged
in user will log out the corresponding
user.
USER ID Text box The USER ID text box displays the
user ID of the corresponding user.
NAME Text box The NAME text box displays the
name of the corresponding user.
REMOVE USER Button Pushing the REMOVE button deletes
the corresponding user from the user
list.
REMOVE ALL USERS Button Pushing the REMOVE ALL USERS
button deletes all users from the user
list.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 8/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
FLIGHT INFORMATION PAGE

When the cabin crew has selected the FLIGHT button on the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) HOME
page, the FLIGHT INFORMATION page opens.
Note: Normally the flight crew enters the flight information. The cabin crew does not to access this
page.
Example of a FLIGHT INFORMATION Page

TAIL NUMBER text box The TAIL NUMBER of the aircraft is displayed automatically in the text
box.
Virtual keyboard Icon Pushing the virtual keyboard icon displays a virtual keyboard to enter the
data for the text box next to it.
FLIGHT NUMBER Text box The FLIGHT NUMBER text box displays the entered flight number.
ORIGIN CODE Text box The ORIGIN CODE text box displays the entered origin code.
ORIGIN Text box The ORIGIN text box displays the entered origin .
DESTINATION Text box The DESTINATION CODE text box displays the entered destination
CODE code.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 9/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

DESTINATION Text box The DESTINATION text box displays the entered destination.
DELAY REASON Text box The DELAY REASON text box displays the entered delay reason.
COMMENTS Text box The COMMENTS text box displays the entered comments.
OPEN Button Pushing the OPEN button opens the flight, closes the FLIGHT
INFORMATION page and displays the HOME page.
CLOSE Button Pushing the CLOSE button closes the flight, closes the FLIGHT
INFORMATION page and displays the HOME page.
CANCEL Button Pushing the CANCEL button cancels the operation (entered data),
closes the FLIGHT INFORMATION page and displays the HOME page.
FLIGHT INFORMATION PAGE

When the cabin crew has selected the FLIGHT button on the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) HOME
page, the FLIGHT INFORMATION page opens.
Note: The flight crew enters the flight information.
FLIGHT INFORMATION Page (Example)
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 10/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

TAIL NUMBER Text box The TAIL NUMBER of the aircraft is displayed in the text box.
FLIGHT PHASE Text box The FLIGHT PHASE text box displays the current flight phase of the
aircraft.
FLIGHT NUMBER Text box The FLIGHT NUMBER text box displays the flight number of the current
/ last flight.
STATUS Text box The STATUS text box contains the status (open / closed) of the current /
last flight.
FROM Text box The first FROM text box displays the code of the airport where the flight
starts / started.
Text box The second FROM text box displays the name of the airport where the
flight starts / started.
TO Text box The first TO text box displays the code of the airport where the flight
ends / ended.
Text box The second TO text box displays the name of the airport where the flight
ends / ended.
CREATE DEFECT REPORT PAGES

Defect reports can be created via the CREATE DEFECT REPORT pages. The first and central
CREATE DEFECT REPORT page is the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECTION page.
The cabin crew has three possibilities to create a defect report via the CREATE DEFECT REPORT -
SELECTION page:
- Pushing the LOCATION button or
- Pushing the MAJOR FUNCTION button or
- Pushing the MOST COMMON COMPONENTS button.
The only difference between the two possibilities is the input order. The result will be the same.
After pushing the LOCATION or MAJOR FUNCTION or MAJOR FUNCTION button the cabin crew is
directed through several pages for input.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 11/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
Navigation on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT Pages
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 12/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
Defect reports can be created via the CREATE DEFECT REPORT pages. The first and central
CREATE DEFECT REPORT page is the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECTION page.
The cabin crew has four possibilities to create a defect report via the CREATE DEFECT REPORT -
SELECTION page:
- Pushing the LOCATION button or
- Pushing the MAJOR FUNCTION button or
- Pushing the MOST COMMON COMPONENTS button or
- Pushing the KEYWORD SEARCH button.
The only difference between the possibilities is the input order. The result will be the same.
After pushing the LOCATION or MAJOR FUNCTION or MOST COMMON COMPONENTS or
KEYWORD SEARCH button the cabin crew is directed through several pages for input.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 13/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECTION PAGE

The CREATE DEFECT REPORT- SELECTION page displays when a cabin crewmember pushes the
USER button on the HOME page.
CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECTION Page (Example)
The displayed deck on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECTION page corresponds to the
selected deck for a previous defect report.

Deck symbol Symbol The deck symbol indicates the location of the defect.
MOST Button Pushing the MOST COMMON COMPONENTS button opens the
COMMON SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page with a list of the most common
COMPONENTS components.
DECK Button Pushing the DECK button opens the SELECT DECK page. On
this page the cabin crewmember can select the deck on which the
defect occurred.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 14/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

LOCATION Button Pushing the LOCATION button opens the SELECT AREA page.
On this page the cabin crewmember can select the defect area.
The cabin crewmember is then led through several CREATE
DEFECT REPORT pages where input is needed. Refer to
06-200-30 Navigation on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT Pages
MAJOR Button Pushing the MAJOR FUNCTION button opens the SELECT
FUNCTION MAJOR FUNCTION page. On this page the cabin crewmember
can select the major function of the defect. The cabin
crewmember is then led through several CREATE DEFECT
REPORT pages where input is needed. Refer to 06-200-30
COMPONENT Button The COMPONENT button is disabled if the cabin crewmember
has not entered a defect information via the LOCATION button,
the MAJOR FUNCTION button or the MOST COMMON
COMPONENTS button, yet.
When the cabin crewmember has entered the defect information,
the COMPONENT button is enabled to change the component if
necessary.
DEFECT Button The DEFECT button is disabled, if the cabin crewmember has not
entered a defect information via the LOCATION button, the
MAJOR FUNCTION button or the MOST COMMON
the button is enabled to change the defect if necessary.
COMMENT Text box The COMMENT text box is disabled, if the cabin crewmember has
with virtual not entered a defect information via the LOCATION button, the
keyboard button MAJOR FUNCTION button or the MOST COMMON
COMPONENTS button, yet. When the cabin crewmember has
entered the defect information, pushing the virtual keyboard button
next to the COMMENT text box enables the function to enter one
or more comments.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 15/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

SEVERITY Button The SEVERITY text box is disabled, if the cabin crewmember has
not entered a defect information via the LOCATION button, the
COMPONENTS button, yet. When the cabin crewmember has
entered the defect information, pushing the SEVERITY button
opens the SEVERITY page. On this page the cabin crewmember
can chose one of the following:
- MAJOR
- MEDIUM
- MINOR.
MEL CDL Button This function is disabled.
REFERENCE
TO BE Toggle button The TO BE VALIDATED BY toggle button is disabled, if the cabin
VALIDATED BY crewmember has not entered a defect information via the
LOCATION button, the MAJOR FUNCTION button or the MOST
COMMON COMPONENTS button, yet.
pushing the TO BE VALIDATED BY toggle button toggles
between
- CABIN and
- COCKPIT.
NAME Text box Pushing the virtual keyboard button next to the NAME text box
enables the cabin crewmember to enter the name of the user
entering the defect report. The automatic default in the NAME text
box is the name of the cabin crewmember that is currently logged
in.
PRINT Button The PRINT button is disabled.
SEND TO Button The SEND TO GROUND button is disabled.
GROUND
SAVE Button Pushing the SAVE button saves the current detailed information
about the defect. After saving the defect report the SCRATCH
PAD page opens.
COPY Button The COPY button is disabled.
closes the CREATE DEFECT REPORT page and displays the
HOME page.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 16/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECTION PAGE

The CREATE DEFECT REPORT- SELECTION page displays when a cabin crew member pushes the
CREATE DEFECT REPORT button on the HOME page.
The displayed deck on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECTION page corresponds to the
selected deck for a previous defect report.

Deck symbol Symbol The deck symbol indicates the location of the defect.
KEYWORD Button Pushing the KEYWORD SEARCH button opens the keyword
SEARCH search page. On this page the crew member can search a
component by entering parts of the components name.
MOST Button Pushing the MOST COMMON COMPONENTS button opens the
COMMON SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page with a list of the most common
COMPONENTS components.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 17/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

DECK Button Pushing the DECK button opens the SELECT DECK page. On
this page the cabin crew member can select the deck on which the
defect occurred.
LOCATION Button Pushing the LOCATION button opens the SELECT AREA page.
On this page the cabin crew member can select the defect area.
The cabin crew member is then led through several CREATE
DEFECT REPORT pages where input is needed. Refer to
06-200-30 Navigation on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT Pages
MAJOR Button Pushing the MAJOR FUNCTION button opens the SELECT
FUNCTION MAJOR FUNCTION page. On this page the cabin crew member
can select the major function of the defect. The cabin crew
member is then led through several CREATE DEFECT REPORT
pages where input is needed. Refer to 06-200-30 Navigation on
the CREATE DEFECT REPORT Pages
COMPONENT Button The COMPONENT button is disabled if the cabin crew member
has not entered a defect information via the LOCATION button,
the MAJOR FUNCTION button, the MOST COMMON
COMPONENTS button or the KEYWORD SEARCH button, yet.
When the cabin crew member has entered the defect information,
the COMPONENT button is enabled to change the component if
necessary.
DEFECT Button The DEFECT button is disabled, if the cabin crew member has not
entered a defect information via the LOCATION button, the
the button is enabled to change the defect if necessary.
COMMENT Text box The COMMENT text box is disabled, if the cabin crew member
with virtual has not entered a defect information via the LOCATION button,
keyboard button the MAJOR FUNCTION button or the MOST COMMON
COMPONENTS button, yet. When the cabin crew member has
entered the defect information, pushing the virtual keyboard button
next to the COMMENT text box enables the function to enter one
or more comments.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 18/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

SEVERITY Button The SEVERITY text box is disabled, if the cabin crew member has
not entered a defect information via the LOCATION button, the
COMPONENTS button, yet. When the cabin crew member has
entered the defect information, pushing the SEVERITY button
opens the SEVERITY page. On this page the cabin crew member
can chose one of the following:
- MAJOR
- MEDIUM
- MINOR.
TO BE Toggle button The TO BE VALIDATED BY toggle button is disabled, if the cabin
VALIDATED BY crew member has not entered a defect information via the
LOCATION button, the MAJOR FUNCTION button or the MOST
COMMON COMPONENTS button, yet.
pushing the TO BE VALIDATED BY toggle button toggles
between
- CABIN and
- COCKPIT.
NAME Text box Pushing the virtual keyboard button next to the NAME text box
enables the cabin crew member to enter the name of the user
entering the defect report. The automatic default in the NAME text
box is the name of the cabin crew member that is currently logged
in.
PRINT Button The PRINT button is disabled.
SAVE Button Pushing the SAVE button saves the current detailed information
about the defect. After saving the defect report the SCRATCH
PAD page opens.
COPY Button The COPY button is disabled.
closes the CREATE DEFECT REPORT page and displays the
HOME page.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 19/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
LOCATION - SEAT AREA PAGE

If the defect concerns a seat or seat group, the cabin crew can use the LOCATION - SEAT AREA page
to enter the specific location of the defect.
The LOCATION - SEAT AREA page displays when a cabin crewmember pushes the LOCATION
button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT- SELECTION page and then pushes the SEAT AREA
button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page.
LOCATION - SEAT AREA Page (Example)
The LOCATION - SEAT AREA page enables the cabin crew to select:
- All seats on a deck
- A seat region
- A single seat
- A combination of seat region(s) and single seat(s).

Deck symbol Symbol The deck symbol displays the location of the defect.
The cabin area of the currently displayed seats in the selection area is
highlighted in green.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 20/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

SEAT ROW Buttons Pushing a SEAT ROW button on the deck symbol displays the
(SR) corresponding seats in the selection area.
SEAT Button Pushing a SEAT button selects the corresponding seat as location of a
defect. The corresponding SEAT button will turn green.
Pushing the active (green) SEAT button will deselect the defect location
and the button will turn gray.
If the SELECTION MODE is SEAT REGION, pushing SEAT buttons in the
respective opposite corners selects the seat region. The seat button of the
seat region will turn green. ( SELECTION MODE)
Pushing the active (green) SEAT buttons in the respective opposite
corners will deselect the defect location.
When a seat or a seat region is selected the SELECT ALL button will turn
partially green.
SELECTION Toggle Pushing the SELECTION MODE toggle button toggles between:
MODE button
- SINGLE SEAT
- SEAT REGION.
SELECTED Virtual Pushing the virtual keyboard button displays a virtual keyboard where the
SEAT(S) keyboard cabin crewmember can enter the affected seat(s).
button E.g.: The cabin crewmember enters "03-07A-C;09B" to indicate that the
seats in row 03 to 07 in column A to C and seat 09B have a defect.
SELECT ALL Button Pushing the SELECT ALL button selects all seats displayed in the
selection areas as location of a defect . All SEAT buttons and the SELECT
ALL button will turn green.
Pushing the active (green) SELECT ALL button will deselect all seats.
A partially green SELECT ALL button indicates that a seat or a seat region
is selected.
SELECTED Text box The SELECTED text box indicates the number of selected seats.
TOTAL Text box The TOTAL text box indicates the total number of seats on the selected
deck.
OK Button Pushing the OK button confirms the selection of the defect location and
opens the SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 21/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
LOCATION - SEAT AREA PAGE

If the defect concerns a seat or seat group, the cabin crew can use the LOCATION - SEAT AREA page
to enter the specific location of the defect.
The LOCATION - SEAT AREA page displays when a cabin crew member pushes the LOCATION
button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT- SELECTION page and then pushes the SEAT AREA
button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page.
The LOCATION - SEAT AREA page enables the cabin crew to select:
- All seats on a deck
- A seat region
- A single seat
- A combination of seat region(s) and single seat(s).

Deck symbol Symbol The deck symbol displays the location of the defect.
The cabin area of the currently displayed seats in the selection area is
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 22/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

SEAT ROW Buttons Pushing a SEAT ROW button on the deck symbol displays the
(SR) corresponding seats in the selection area.
SEAT Button Pushing a SEAT button selects the corresponding seat as location of a
defect. The corresponding SEAT button will turn green.
Pushing the active (green) SEAT button will deselect the defect location
and the button will turn gray.
If the SELECTION MODE is SEAT REGION, pushing SEAT buttons in the
respective opposite corners selects the seat region. The seat button of the
seat region will turn green. ( SELECTION MODE)
Pushing the active (green) SEAT buttons in the respective opposite
corners will deselect the defect location.
When a seat or a seat region is selected the SELECT ALL button will turn
partially green.
SELECTION Toggle Pushing the SELECTION MODE toggle button toggles between:
MODE button
- SINGLE SEAT
- SEAT REGION.
SELECTED Virtual Pushing the virtual keyboard button displays a virtual keyboard where the
SEAT(S) keyboard cabin crew member can enter the affected seat(s).
button E.g.: The cabin crew member enters "03-07A-C;09B" to indicate that the
seats in row 03 to 07 in column A to C and seat 09B have a defect.
SELECT ALL Button Pushing the SELECT ALL button selects all seats displayed in the
selection areas as location of a defect . All SEAT buttons and the SELECT
ALL button will turn green.
Pushing the active (green) SELECT ALL button will deselect all seats.
A partially green SELECT ALL button indicates that a seat or a seat region
is selected.
SELECTED Text box The SELECTED text box indicates the number of selected seats.
TOTAL Text box The TOTAL text box indicates the total number of seats on the selected
deck.
OK Button Pushing the OK button confirms the selection of the defect location and
opens the SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 23/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
SCRATCH PAD PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
SCRATCH PAD PAGE

When the cabin crew member has saved a defect report, it is moved to the SCRATCH PAD page and
the number of defect reports shown on the this page will be upgraded.
All users are permitted to delete, edit, copy, print and save defect reports within the scratch pad. The
function MOVE TO LOG is limited to special user groups.
The SCRATCH PAD page displays when a cabin crew member pushes the SCRATCH PAD button on
the HOME page.
Example of a SCRATCH PAD Page
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 24/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

Headline of Toggle Details of the defect reports are listed in the headline of the defect report
the List list.
The headline of the scratch pad defect report list consists of:
- LOCATION
- COMPONENT DEFECT
- ATA FAULT CODE
- SEVERITY RELEVANCE
- NAME
- UTC
- ID
The list can be sorted by either of the details. An arrow on the
corresponding toggle button indicates whether the sorting is ascending (▴)
or descending (▾).
SELECT Buttons Pushing the SELECT button of a defect report selects the corresponding
report for the functions that are described below.
The SELECT button will turn green and the SELECT ALL button will turn
partially green.
Pushing the active (green) SELECT button deselects the corresponding
defect report.
SELECT ALL Button Pushing the SELECT ALL button selects all defect reports of the scratch
pad for the functions that are described below. The SELECT ALL button
and all SELECT buttons will turn green.
Pushing the active (green) SELECT ALL button deselects all defect reports.
SELECTED Text box The SELECTED text box indicates the number of selected defect reports.
TOTAL Text box The TOTAL text box indicates the total number of the defect reports on the
scratch pad.
DETAILS Button Pushing the DETAILS button displays the details of the previously selected
defect report(s).
MOVE TO Button Pushing the MOVE TO LOG button moves the selected defect report(s) to
LOG the logbook if the crewmember has the corresponding authority.
DELETE Button Pushing the DELETE button deletes the selected defect report(s) from
scratch pad. A further confirmation is required on a separate page.
PRINT Button Pushing the PRINT button prints the selected defect report(s), on the
standard printer.
NEW Button Pushing the NEW button starts the process to create a new defect report
(same as create defect report on the start page).
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 25/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

COPY Button Pushing the COPY button generates a copy of the selected defect report.
The cabin crewmember can use this button as a shortcut for creating a
similar defect report (leads to a completely filled defect report page).
CABIN STATUS PAGES

LOGBOOK PAGES OVERVIEW

The logbook is a collection of all defect reports that have been MOVED TO LOG from the scratch pad.
There are 4 different logbook pages:
- CABIN STATUS Refer to 06-200-30 CABIN STATUS Page
- CABIN STATUS BY AREA Refer to 06-200-30 CABIN STATUS BY AREA Page
- CABIN STATUS: DEFECT REPORT LISTING Refer to 06-200-30 DEFECT REPORT LISTING
Page
- CABIN STATUS: FURTHER REPORTS (filters) Refer to 06-200-30 CABIN STATUS FURTHER
REPORTS Page.
LOGBOOK PAGES OVERVIEW

The logbook is a collection of all defect reports that have been MOVED TO LOG from the scratch pad.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 26/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CABIN STATUS PAGE

The cabin crew can view the cabin status and select filters (SELECT REPORTS buttons) for the defect
report list on the CABIN STATUS page.
The CABIN STATUS page displays when the cabin crew pushes the CABIN STATUS button on the
HOME page.
Example of a CABIN STATUS Page

CABIN STATUS Button Pushing the CABIN STATUS button opens the DEFECT REPORT
LISTING page.
This page shows in a list all open and deferred defect reports of the
aircraft.
OPEN Text box The OPEN text box indicates the number of defect reports that are still
open.
DEFERRED Text box The DEFERRED text box indicates the number of deferred defect
reports.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 27/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

CABIN STATUS Button Pushing the CABIN STATUS BY AREA button opens the CABIN
BY AREA STATUS BY AREA page.
This page shows the number of defect reports of an area of a deck.
IFE Button Pushing the IFE button opens the CABIN STATUS: IFE DEFECT
REPORT LISTING page.
NON IFE Button Pushing the NON IFE button opens the CABIN STATUS: NON IFE
DEFECT REPORT LISTING page.
LAST FLIGHT Button Pushing the LAST FLIGHT button opens the DEFECT REPORT
LISTING page of the last flight.
This page shows in a list all defect reports that occurred during the last
flight.
HISTORY Button Pushing the HISTORY button opens the DEFECT REPORT LISTING
HISTORY page.
This page shows all defect reports of the aircraft in a list. Open,
deferred and fixed defect reports are listed.
FURTHER Button Pushing the FURTHER REPORTS button opens the CABIN STATUS:
REPORTS FURTHER REPORTS page.
This page shows special filter settings. With the special filter setting
the cabin crew can create a customized list of defect reports.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 28/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CABIN STATUS PAGE

The cabin crew can view the cabin status and select filters (SELECT REPORTS buttons) for the defect
report list on the CABIN STATUS page.
The CABIN STATUS page displays when the cabin crew pushes the CABIN STATUS button on the
HOME page.

CABIN STATUS Button Pushing the CABIN STATUS button opens the DEFECT REPORT
LISTING page.
This page shows in a list all open and deferred defect reports of the
aircraft.
TECHNICAL Text box The TECHNICAL OPEN text box indicates the number of defect
OPEN reports with technical impact that are still open.
TECHNICAL Text box The TECHNICAL DEFERRED text box indicates the number of
DEFERRED deferred defect reports with technical impact.
CABIN OPEN Text box The CABIN OPEN text box indicates the number of defect reports
without technical impact that are still open.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 29/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

CABIN Text box The CABIN DEFERRED text box indicates the number of deferred
DEFERRED defect reports without technical impact.
CABIN STATUS Button Pushing the CABIN STATUS BY AREA button opens the CABIN
BY AREA STATUS BY AREA page.
This page shows the number of defect reports of an area of a deck.
IFE Button Pushing the IFE button opens the CABIN STATUS: IFE DEFECT
REPORT LISTING page.
NON IFE Button Pushing the NON IFE button opens the CABIN STATUS: NON IFE
DEFECT REPORT LISTING page.
NOT SENT TO Button Pushing the NOT SENT TO GROUND button opens the DEFECT
GROUND REPORT LISTING page. This page shows in a list all defect reports
without technical impact, which have not been sent to ground in their
current state.
LAST FLIGHT Button Pushing the LAST FLIGHT button opens the DEFECT REPORT
LISTING page of the last flight.
This page shows in a list all defect reports that occurred during the last
flight.
HISTORY Button Pushing the HISTORY button opens the DEFECT REPORT LISTING
HISTORY page.
This page shows all defect reports of the aircraft in a list. Only fixed
defect reports are listed.
FURTHER Button Pushing the FURTHER REPORTS button opens the CABIN STATUS:
REPORTS FURTHER REPORTS page.
This page shows special filter settings. With the special filter setting
the cabin crew can create a customized list of defect reports.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 30/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
Applicable to: ALL
CABIN STATUS BY AREA PAGE

The CABIN STATUS BY AREA page displays the number of defect reports related to the areas of a
deck. It is differentiated between OPEN and DEFERRED reports. When the cabin crew selects another
deck, the display changes accordingly.
The cabin crew can view a report listing for an area by pushing the corresponding button. Only the
buttons that correspond to areas for which reports are available are active.
Example of a CABIN STATUS BY AREA Page

AREA Button Pushing an AREA button displays a report listing for the corresponding area.
DECK Button Pushing a DECK button selects the deck for which the areas and the numbers of
the corresponding reports will be displayed.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 31/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
DEFECT REPORT LISTING PAGE

The DEFECT REPORT LISTING page is one of the logbook pages. The list of defect reports is
displayed depending on the set up filters.
The DEFECT REPORT LISTING displays when the cabin crew pushes one of the SELECT REPORTS
buttons on the CABIN STATUS page.
Example of a DEFECT REPORT LISTING Page
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 32/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

Headline of the Toggle Details of the defect reports are listed in the headline of the defect report
List listing.
The headline of the scratch pad defect report listing consists of:
- LOCATION
- COMPONENT DEFECT
- ATA FAULT CODE
- SEVERITY RELEVANCE
- STATUS
- UTC flight
- ID
The list can be sorted by either of the details. An arrow on the
corresponding toggle button indicates whether the sorting is ascending
(▴) or descending (▾).
SELECT Buttons Pushing the SELECT button of a defect report selects the corresponding
report for the functions that are described below.
The SELECT button will turn green and the SELECT ALL button will turn
partially green.
Pushing the active (green) SELECT button deselects the corresponding
defect report.
SELECT ALL Button Pushing the SELECT ALL button selects all defect reports of the scratch
pad for the functions that are described below. The SELECT ALL button
and all SELECT buttons will turn green.
Pushing the active (green) SELECT ALL button deselects all defect
reports.
SELECTED Text box The SELECTED text box indicates the number of selected defect
reports.
TOTAL Text box The TOTAL text box indicates the total number of the defect reports on
the scratch pad.
DETAILS Button Pushing the DETAILS button displays the details of the previously
selected defect report(s).
ACTION Button Pushing the ACTION button starts the process to create an action.
PRINT Button Pushing the PRINT button prints the selected defect report(s), on the
standard printer.
SEND TO Button Pushing the SEND TO GROUND button sends the selected defect
GROUND reports to ground.
NEW Button Pushing the NEW button starts the process to create a new defect report
(same as create defect report on the start page).
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 33/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

COPY Button Pushing the COPY button generates a copy of the selected defect
report. The cabin crew member can use this button as a shortcut for
creating a similar defect report (leads to a completely filled defect report
page).
CABIN STATUS FURTHER REPORTS PAGE

The cabin crew can use the CABIN STATUS FURTHER REPORTS page to select special filter
settings for a customized list of defect reports.
The CABIN STATUS FURTHER REPORTS page displays when the cabin crew pushes the FURTHER
REPORTS button on the CABIN STATUS page.
Example of a CABIN STATUS FURTHER REPORTS Page
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 34/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

SEVERITY Buttons Selecting
- MAJOR or
- MEDIUM or
- MINOR
displays a list of defect reports with the selected severity.
STATUS Buttons Selecting
- OPEN or
- DEFERRED or
- FIXED
displays a list of defect reports with the selected status.
DECK Buttons Selecting
- UPPER DECK or
- MAIN DECK or
- LOWER DECK
displays a list of defect reports of the selected deck.
DATE Text Selecting the virtual keyboard displays the virtual keyboard page to enter
box(es) the date on which defect reports were created.
and virtual Only defect reports that have been created between “from” and “to” date will
keyboard be displayed.
ATA Text box Selecting the virtual keyboard displays the virtual keyboard page to enter an
and virtual ATA information.
keyboard Only defect reports of the inserted specification are shown.
OK Button Pushing the OK (SHOW DEFECT REPORTS) button opens the CABIN
STATUS: FURTHER REPORTS DEFECT REPORT LISTING page.
RESET Button Pushing the RESET button deselects the previously selected criteria.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 35/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CABIN STATUS FURTHER REPORTS PAGE

The cabin crew can use the CABIN STATUS FURTHER REPORTS page to select special filter
settings for a customized list of defect reports.
The CABIN STATUS FURTHER REPORTS page displays when the cabin crew pushes the FURTHER
REPORTS button on the CABIN STATUS page.
Example of a CABIN STATUS FURTHER REPORTS Page

SEVERITY Buttons Selecting
- MAJOR or
- MEDIUM or
- MINOR
displays a list of defect reports with the selected severity.
You can also select multiple buttons.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 36/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380

STATUS Buttons Selecting
- OPEN or
- DEFERRED or
- FIXED
displays a list of defect reports with the selected status.
DECK Buttons Selecting
- UPPER DECK or
- MAIN DECK or
- LOWER DECK
displays a list of defect reports of the selected deck.
DATE Text Selecting the virtual keyboard displays the virtual keyboard page to enter
box(es) the date on which defect reports were created.
and virtual Only defect reports that have been created between “from” and “to” date will
keyboard be displayed.
ATA Text box Selecting the virtual keyboard displays the virtual keyboard page to enter an
and virtual ATA information.
keyboard Only defect reports of the inserted specification are shown.
RELEVANCE Buttons Selecting
- TECHNICAL or
- CABIN
displays a list of defect reports with the selected technical impact.
SENT TO Buttons Selecting
GROUND
- SENT or
- NOT SENT
displays a list of defect reports with the selected sending status.
SELECTED Text Box The SELECTED DEFECT REPORTS text box displays the number of
DEFECT defect reports you will see when pressing OK (SHOW DEFECT
REPORTS REPORTS). This number is updated after each button press and entering in
the text boxes.
OK Button Pushing the OK (SHOW DEFECT REPORTS) button opens the CABIN
STATUS: FURTHER REPORTS DEFECT REPORT LISTING page.
RESET Button Pushing the RESET button deselects the previously selected criteria.
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 37/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
UAE A380 06-200-30 P 38/38

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO LOGIN OR LOGOUT A REGISTERED USER

HOW TO LOGIN A REGISTERED USER

To login a registered user follow the steps described below:
1. Push the USER button on the HOME page of the DCL to display the USER REGISTRATION page.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 1/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
2. Select a user from the SELECT USER list.

3. Push the virtual keyboard icon in the line of the selected user to display the virtual keyboard.
4. Enter the password and confirm it with OK on the virtual keyboard.
5. Push the LOGIN button in the line of the selected user.
The LOGIN button turns green to indicate that the selected user is logged in.
The USER REGISTRATION page closes automatically and the HOME page is displayed again.
HOW TO LOGOUT A REGISTERED USER
To logout a registered user follow the steps described below:
1. Push the USER button on the HOME page of the DCL to display the USER REGISTRATION page
2. Select the logged in user from the SELECT USER list: The corresponding LOGIN button is
3. Push the highlighted LOGIN button. The button turns grey and the user is logged out.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 2/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO LOGIN OR LOGOUT A REGISTERED USER

HOW TO LOGIN A REGISTERED USER

To login a registered user follow the steps described below:
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 3/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
2. Select a user from the SELECT USER list.

3. Push the virtual keyboard icon in the line of the selected user to display the virtual keyboard.
4. Enter the password and confirm it with OK on the virtual keyboard.
5. Push the LOGIN button in the line of the selected user.
The LOGIN button turns green to indicate that the selected user is logged in.
The USER REGISTRATION page closes automatically and the HOME page is displayed again.
HOW TO LOGOUT A REGISTERED USER
To logout a registered user follow the steps described below:
1. Push the USER button on the HOME page of the DCL to display the USER REGISTRATION page
2. Select the logged in user from the SELECT USER list: The corresponding LOGIN button is
3. Push the highlighted LOGIN button. The button turns grey and the user is logged out.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 4/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO REGISTER A NEW USER

If a cabin crewmember is not listed on the USER REGISTRATION page, follow the steps described
below for the login:
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 5/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
2. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to enter the USER ID on the REGISTER NEW USER control
pad on the USER REGISTRATION page . Push the OK button on the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page
to confirm the entered user id. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will close and the user id will be
displayed in the corresponding text box.
3. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to enter the NAME. Push the OK button on the VIRTUAL
KEYBOARD page to confirm the entered name. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will close and the
name will be displayed in the corresponding text box.
4. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to enter the PASSWORD. Push the OK button on the
VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page to confirm the entered password. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will
close and the password will be displayed in asterisk (*) in the corresponding text box.
5. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to confirm the PASSWORD. Push the OK button on the
6. Confirm and save the entries with the REGISTER NEW USER button. The USER REGISTRATION
page will close and the DCL HOME page will open. The name of the previously registered user will
be displayed in the USER text box. The user is automatically logged in.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 6/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO REGISTER A NEW USER

If a cabin crew member is not listed on the USER REGISTRATION page, follow the steps described
below for the login:
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 7/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
2. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to enter the USER ID on the REGISTER NEW USER control
pad on the USER REGISTRATION page . Push the OK button on the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page
to confirm the entered user id. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will close and the user id will be
displayed in the corresponding text box.
3. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to enter the NAME. Push the OK button on the VIRTUAL
KEYBOARD page to confirm the entered name. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will close and the
name will be displayed in the corresponding text box.
4. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to enter the PASSWORD. Push the OK button on the
5. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to confirm the PASSWORD. Push the OK button on the
6. Confirm and save the entries with the REGISTER NEW USER button. The USER REGISTRATION
page will close and the DCL HOME page will open. The name of the previously registered user will
be displayed in the USER text box. The user is automatically logged in.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 8/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO CREATE A DEFECT REPORT USING KEYWORD SEARCH

normally appoints the crew member responsible for the cabin per flight phase (e.g. flight crew,
Below is an example of how to create a defect report for a defect in the cabin using keyword search.
In this example the defect is a dirty return to cabin sign next to a galley on the main deck.
To create a defect report in the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) for this defect, follow the steps below.
1. Push the CREATE DEFECT REPORT button on the DCL HOME page. The CREATE REPORT
page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 9/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Screen Layout of the DCL Pages
2. Push the DECK button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT page.

The CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT DECK page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 10/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT DECK Page (Example)
3. Push the button for the deck for which the defect has to be reported.
The selected deck will be indicated in the corresponding text box and the aircraft symbol will display
the corresponding deck on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT page.
4. Push the KEYWORD SEARCH button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT page.
The CREATE DEFECT REPORT - KEYWORD SEARCH page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 11/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Example of KEYWORD SEARCH Page
5. To search for a specific component (e.g. RETURN TO CABIN SIGN) simply enter some characters
of a word of the component (e.g. the first three characters of the word CABIN).
After each single key press, the list of components is reduced to those components matching the
entered characters.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 12/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Example of KEYWORD SEARCH Page after some typing
6. To enter a part of another word for searching the component (e.g. RETURN TO CABIN SIGN)
simply add a blank and enter some characters of the next word of the component (e.g. the first
three characters of the word RETURN).
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 13/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Example of KEYWORD SEARCH Page after some more typing
7. Push the RETURN TO CABIN SIGN button. The SELECT DEFECT page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 14/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Example of a SELECT DEFECT Page
8. Push the DIRTY button. The SELECT AREA page will display on screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 15/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Example of a SELECT AREA Page
9. Push the GALLEY button. The SELECT LOCATION - GALLEY page will display on screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 16/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Example of a SELECT LOCATION - GALLEY Page
10.Push the GM22 button to select the galley 22 in the forward cabin. The CREATE DEFECT
REPORT page displays and all selections from the previous steps are indicated in the
corresponding text boxes.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 17/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Example of a created DEFECT REPORT
11.Push the SEVERITY button. The CHANGE SEVERITY page displays on the screen.
12.Push the MEDIUM button, for example.
13.Push the SAVE button to save the defect report into the scratch pad.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 18/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO CREATE A DEFECT REPORT

normally appoints the crewmember responsible for the cabin per flight phase (e.g. flight crew,
Below is an example of how to create a defect report for a defect in the cabin.
In this example the defect is a flickering wash-table light in a lavatory on the main deck.
1. Push the CREATE DEFECT REPORT button on the DCL HOME page. The CREATE DEFECT
REPORT page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 19/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380

UAE A380 06-200-40 P 20/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
4. Push the LOCATION button. The CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page will display
on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 21/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA Page (Example)
5. Push the LAVATORY button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page. The
LAVATORY page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 22/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Example of a LAVATORY Page
6. Push the LM14 button to select the lavatory 14 in the forward cabin. The SELECT MAJOR
FUNCTION page for LAVATORY LM14 will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 23/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION - LAVATORY Page (Example)
7. Push the LIGHT button. The SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page for LAVATORY, LM14, LIGHT will
display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 24/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Example of a SELECT COMPONENT Page
8. Push the SPECIAL LIGHTS button. The SELECT COMPONENT page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 25/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
SELECT COMPONENT Page
9. Push the WASHTABLE LIGHTS button. The SELECT DEFECT page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 26/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
10.Push the FLICKERING button. The CREATE DEFECT REPORT page displays and all selections
from the previous steps are indicated in the corresponding text boxes.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 27/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
DEFECT REPORT Created (Example)
13.Push the SAVE button to save the defect report to the scratch pad.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 28/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO CREATE A DEFECT REPORT BEGINNING WITH LOCATION

normally appoints the crew member responsible for the cabin per flight phase (e.g. flight crew,
Below is an example of how to create a defect report for a defect in the cabin.
In this example the defect is a flickering wash-table light in a lavatory on the main deck.
1. Push the CREATE DEFECT REPORT button on the DCL HOME page. The CREATE DEFECT
REPORT page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 29/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380

UAE A380 06-200-40 P 30/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 31/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
5. Push the LAVATORY button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page. The
LAVATORY page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 32/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Example of a LAVATORY Page
6. Push the LM14 button to select the lavatory 14 in the forward cabin. The SELECT MAJOR
FUNCTION page for LAVATORY LM14 will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 33/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION - LAVATORY Page (Example)
7. Push the LIGHT button. The SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page for LAVATORY, LM14, LIGHT will
display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 34/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
8. Push the SPECIAL LIGHTS button. The SELECT COMPONENT page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 35/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
SELECT COMPONENT Page
9. Push the WASHTABLE LIGHT button. The SELECT DEFECT page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 36/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
10.Push the FLICKERING button. The CREATE DEFECT REPORT page displays and all selections
from the previous steps are indicated in the corresponding text boxes.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 37/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
DEFECT REPORT Created (Example)
13.Push the SAVE button to save the defect report to the scratch pad.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 38/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO CREATE A DEFECT REPORT FOR A SEAT AREA

Below is an example of how to create a defect report for a defect in a seat area.
In the example the defect is a PED connectivity / in-seat power - internet operation malfunction at
several seats on the main deck.
1. Push the CREATE DEFECT REPORT button on the HOME page.

The CREATE DEFECT REPORT page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 39/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380

UAE A380 06-200-40 P 40/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 41/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
5. Push the SEAT AREA button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page. The
SEAT AREA page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 42/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
Example of a SEAT AREA Page
6. Push the SELECTION MODE toggle button to select SEAT REGION.

7. Push the SEAT buttons on two opposite corners of a quad to select a region of seats.
The activated buttons indicate the selected seats. In addition the SELECTED SEAT(S) text box
displays the numbers of the selected seats.
8. Push a SEAT button in any other quad to select an additional single seat.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 43/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
SEAT AREA Page with Selections (Example)
9. Push the OK button to confirm the selected seats.

The SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page for SEAT AREA will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 44/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION - SEAT AREA Page (Example)
10.Push the IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT button. The SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page for
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 45/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION - IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT Page (Example)
11.Push the SEAT POWER SUPPLY button. The SELECT COMPONENT page for SEAT POWER
SUPPLY will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 46/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
12.Push the PED CONNECTIVITY / IN-SEAT POWER - INTERNET OPERATION button.

The SELECT DEFECT page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 47/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
13.Push the MALFUNCTION button. The initial CREATE DEFECT REPORT page displays and all
selections are indicated in the corresponding text boxes.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 48/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
CREATE DEFECT REPORT Page with Data (Example)
15.Push the MEDIUM button, for example, then confirm the selection with the OK button.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 49/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO CREATE A DEFECT REPORT FOR A SEAT AREA

Below is an example of how to create a defect report for a defect in a seat area.
In the example the defect is a PED connectivity / in-seat power - internet operation malfunction at
several seats on the main deck.
1. Push the CREATE DEFECT REPORT button on the HOME page.

The CREATE DEFECT REPORT page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 50/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380

UAE A380 06-200-40 P 51/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 52/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
5. Push the SEAT AREA button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page. The
SEAT AREA page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 53/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
6. Push the SELECTION MODE toggle button to select SEAT REGION.

7. Push the SEAT buttons on two opposite corners of a quad to select a region of seats.
The activated buttons indicate the selected seats. In addition the SELECTED SEAT(S) text box
displays the numbers of the selected seats.
8. Push a SEAT button in any other quad to select an additional single seat.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 54/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
SEAT AREA Page with Selections (Example)
9. Push the OK button to confirm the selected seats.

The SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page for SEAT AREA will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 55/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION - SEAT AREA Page (Example)
10.Push the IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT button. The SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page for
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 56/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION - IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT Page (Example)
11.Push the SEAT POWER SUPPLY button. The SELECT COMPONENT page for SEAT POWER
SUPPLY will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 57/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
12.Push the PED CONNECTIVITY / IN-SEAT POWER - INTERNET OPERATION button.

The SELECT DEFECT page will display on the screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 58/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
13.Push the MALFUNCTION button. The initial CREATE DEFECT REPORT page displays and all
selections are indicated in the corresponding text boxes.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 59/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
CREATE DEFECT REPORT Page with Data (Example)
15.Push the MEDIUM button, for example, then confirm the selection with the OK button.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 60/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO VIEW DEFECT REPORTS IN THE LOGBOOK

To view the defect reports in the logbook follow the steps described below:
1. Push the CABIN STATUS button on the HOME page. The CABIN STATUS page will display on the
screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 61/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
2. Push the CABIN STATUS button on the CABIN STATUS page. The DEFECT REPORT LISTING
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 62/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 63/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
HOW TO VIEW DEFECT REPORTS IN THE LOGBOOK

To view the defect reports in the logbook follow the steps described below:
1. Push the CABIN STATUS button on the HOME page. The CABIN STATUS page will display on the
screen.
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 64/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
2. Push the CABIN STATUS button on the CABIN STATUS page. The DEFECT REPORT LISTING
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 65/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Operation
A380
UAE A380 06-200-40 P 66/66

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN CONNECTIVITY SYSTEM - CABIN COMMUNICATION
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE CABIN CONNECTIVITY SYSTEM H12
The CABIN CONNECTIVITY system provides the following services:

- The INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service
- The MOBILE TELEPHONY service.
The INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service provides a connection to the World Wide Web for
passengers and connected cabin systems, e.g. TELEMEDICINE  . The passengers can access the
Internet wireless or, optionally, by wire.
The MOBILE TELEPHONY service provides to the passengers the possibility to use their mobile
telephone during the flight.
SYSTEM ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
The automatic activation/deactivation of the services of the cabin connectivity system occur in different
flight phases.
However, the passengers can use the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY and MOBILE TELEPHONY
service of their provider on ground before and after the flight.
Therefore the NO MOBILE signs turn OFF automatically in the following flight phases:
- Flight phase 1: Boarding
- Flight phases 10 and 11: Taxi after landing and disembarkation.
PASSENGER INTERNET SERVICES (INTERNET CONNECTIVITY)
By default, the passenger internet service (INTERNET CONNECTIVITY and WIRELESS ACCESS)
is active during the flight phase CRUISE.
MOBILE TELEPHONY SERVICES
The NO MOBILE signs in the cabin indicate the MOBILE TELEPHONY service availability.
Below the altitude of 3 000 m (approx. 10 000 ft) aircraft height over terrain the MOBILE L2
TELEPHONY service is inhibited automatically and the NO MOBILE signs in the cabin are ON. At
an altitude of 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft) aircraft height over terrain the NO MOBILE signs in the
cabin turn OFF automatically to indicate that the mobile telephony is available.
Note: When the aircraft descends and reaches an altitude below 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft)
aircraft height over terrain the NO MOBILE signs turn ON and active mobile phone calls will
automatically disconnect within 1 min.
UAE A380 06-210-10 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
OPERATION BY THE CABIN CREW L1
The cabin crew can control and monitor the cabin connectivity services and functions via a connectivity
user interface. The connectivity user interface (CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application) runs on
the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP). Refer to 06-210-20 Position of the Cabin Connectivity Application on
the FAP.
Note: The INTERNET CONNECTIVITY is part of the IFE system. In case of failures, the cabin crew
should also check the IFE Crew Terminal for detailed information.
Via the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application on the FAP the cabin crew can:
- Turn ON/OFF the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service and/or the WIRELESS CONNECTION
(WLAN) function
- Turn ON/OFF the MOBILE TELEPHONY service
- Activate/deactivate the QUIET MODE
- View the status information about the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service
- View the status information about the MOBILE TELEPHONY service
- Reset faulty services
- Reset the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system
- View the status of the
- Ground connection
- In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) connection
- Avionic data.
Note: The cabin crew must not turn OFF the WLAN connection if the TELEMEDICINE application is
installed and activated.
NO MOBILE SIGNS
When the passenger signs (NO MOBILE signs) are ON, this indicates that mobiles phones must be
switched to a non-transmitting mode (flight mode) or OFF. The passenger signs will automatically
turn OFF when reaching 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft) aircraft height over terrain and will
automatically turn ON again at an altitude below 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft) aircraft height over
terrain.
The passenger signs will be ON under the following conditions: L2
- The aircraft altitude is lower than 4 000 m ( app rox.13300 ft) aircraft height over terrain
- The aircraft is flying over a country without a license to operate a mobile telephony service.
- The MOBILE TELEPHONY service button is deactivated (gray).
- The MOBILE TELEPHONY service is faulty. There is an amber indication on the SERVICE
OVERVIEW page.
- The corresponding switch in the cockpit has been switched ON.
UAE A380 06-210-10 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
L1
Note: The passengers can use the Internet and telephony service of their provider on ground
before and after the flight.
QUIET MODE
The cabin crew can use the QUIET MODE to restrict the mobile phone functions to Short Message
Service (SMS) and to a restricted communication via packet oriented data services. Passengers will
not be able to make or receive calls on their mobile phones when the QUIET MODE is activated.
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE CABIN CONNECTIVITY SYSTEM

The cabin connectivity application provides the following services:

- The INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service
- The MOBILE TELEPHONY service.
The cabin connectivity service provides a connection to the World Wide Web for passengers and
connected cabin systems, e.g. TELEMEDICINE  . The passengers can access the Internet wireless
or, optionally, by wire.
The MOBILE TELEPHONY service provides to the passengers the possibility to use their mobile
telephone during the flight.
The cabin crew can control and monitor the cabin connectivity system via the CONNECTIVITY user
interface on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).Refer to 06-210-20 Position of the Cabin Connectivity
Application on the FAP.
Note: The cabin crew must not disable the WLAN connection if the TELEMEDICINE application is
installed and activated.
SYSTEM ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
The activation/deactivation of the applications of the cabin connectivity system occur in different flight
phases.
However, the passengers can use the Internet and telephony service of their provider on ground before
and after the flight.
UAE A380 06-210-10 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
PASSENGER INTERNET SERVICES (INTERNET CONNECTIVITY)

By default, the passenger internet service (INTERNET CONNECTIVITY and WIRELESS ACCESS)
is active during the flight phase CRUISE.
Note: The cabin crew must not disable the WIRELESS ACCESS if the TELEMEDICINE
application is installed and activated.
MOBILE TELEPHONY SERVICES
The NO MOBILE signs in the cabin indicate the MOBILE TELEPHONY SERVICE availability.
Below the altitude of 3 000 m (approx. 10 000 ft) above ground level the MOBILE TELEPHONY L2
service is inhibited automatically and the NO MOBILE signs in the cabin are ON. At an altitude of
4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft) above ground level the NO MOBILE signs in the cabin turn OFF
automatically to indicate that the mobile telephony is available.
Note: When the aircraft descends and reaches an altitude below 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft)
above ground level the NO MOBILE signs turn ON and active mobile phone calls will
automatically disconnect within 1 min.
OPERATION BY THE CABIN CREW L1
The cabin crew can control and monitor the cabin connectivity services and functions via a connectivity
user interface. The connectivity user interface (cabin connectivity application) runs on the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP).
The cabin crew can:
- Enable/disable the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY and/or the WIRELESS CONNECTION
- Enable/disable the MOBILE TELEPHONY service
- Enable/disable the QUIET MODE
- View the status information about the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY
- Reset faulty functions
- Reset the cabin connectivity system
- Ground connection
- In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) connection (if configured accordingly)
- Avionic data.
NO MOBILE SIGNS
When the passenger signs (NO MOBILE signs) are ON, this indicates that mobiles phones must be
switched to a non-transmitting mode (Flight Mode) or OFF. The passenger signs will automatically
deactivate when reaching 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft) above ground level and will automatically
turn ON again at an altitude below 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft) above ground level.
UAE A380 06-210-10 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
The passenger signs will be active under the following conditions: L2
- The aircraft altitude is lower than 4 000 m ( app rox.13300 ft) above ground level.
- The MOBILE TELEPHONY button is deactivated (gray).
- The MOBILE TELEPHONY function is faulty. There is an amber indication on the SERVICE
OVERVIEW page.
- The corresponding switch in the cockpit has been switched ON.
L1
Note: The passengers can use the Internet and telephony service of their provider on ground
before and after the flight.
QUIET MODE
The cabin crew can use the QUIET MODE to restrict the mobile phone functions to Short Message
Service (SMS) and to a restricted communication via packet oriented data services. Passengers will
not be able to make or receive calls on their mobile phones when the QUIET MODE is activated.
UAE A380 06-210-10 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
UAE A380 06-210-10 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE CABIN CONNECTIVITY APPLICATION ON THE FAP H13

H14
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can use the connectivity user interface to monitor and control the cabin connectivity
application. The connectivity user interface can be accessed via the APPLICATION MENU on the
Example of an Application Menu on the FAP
UAE A380 06-210-20 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-210-20 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
CABIN CONNECTIVITY APPLICATION - SERVICE OVERVIEW PAGE H15

H16
H17
Applicable to: MSN 0217-0218 H18
H19
When the cabin crew has selected the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application on the Flight H20
H21
Attendant Panel (FAP) the SERVICE OVERVIEW page is displayed. H22
The SERVICE OVERVIEW page has two tables and corresponding info boxes: H23
H24
H25
CONNECTIVITY Table H26
- View the status information about the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service H27
H28
- View the status information about the MOBILE TELEPHONY service H29
H30
- Turn ON/OFF the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY and/or the WIRELESS CONNECTION H31
- Turn ON/OFF the MOBILE TELEPHONY service
- Activate/deactivate the QUIET MODE
- Reset the faulty services of the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system
Note: The INTERNET CONNECTIVITY is part of the IFE system. If the INTERNET
CONNECTIVITY service status shows FAULTY, DISABLED, or Not Available, the cabin
crew should also check the IFE Crew Terminal for detailed information.
- Reset the entire cabin connectivity system.
EXTERNAL SYSTEMS Table
- Ground condition
- In Flight Entertainment (IFE) connection
- Avionic data.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 1/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Button/Indicator Info box Description

Connectivity: SERVICE STATUS
There is information If the SERVICE STATUS icon is green, and there is crew
in the info box. information in the corresponding info box. For example:
OK QUIET MODE is activated.
There is information If the SERVICE STATUS icon is yellow, and there is crew
in the info box. information in the corresponding info box, the
Faulty corresponding service is limited or not available at all.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 2/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380

There is information If the SERVICE STATUS icon is gray, the corresponding
in the info box. service is turned OFF by the crew or because of regulatory
Disabled restrictions (e.g. the flight phase).
The corresponding information is in the info box.
There is information If the SERVICE STATUS icon is gray, the service is not
in the info box. available at all. The cause may be, e.g., a faulty satellite
Not available connection or by restricted zones. The corresponding
information is in the info box.
Button/Indicator Description L12
Connectivity: ACTION
If the SERVICE button is green, the corresponding service is turned ON.
Pushing the SERVICE button turns ON/OFF the corresponding service for the
entire cabin and for the connected cabin systems.
When the SERVICE button is green, the corresponding service is ON.
If the SERVICE STATUS is OK, the corresponding service is available in the
entire cabin and for the connected cabin systems.
Pushing the SERVICE button when it is green, will turn OFF the corresponding
service.
If the SERVICE button is gray, the corresponding service is turned OFF. Pushing
the SERVICE button when it is gray, will enable the corresponding service for the
entire cabin and for the connected cabin systems. The corresponding service will
be available if the SERVICE STATUS is OK.
If the SERVICE button is inhibited, the corresponding service is not available.
If the SERVICE button is green and inhibited:
The SERVICE button is inhibited because the Portable Equipment and Wireless
(PEW) switch is activated by the cockpit crew.
If the cockpit crew deactivates the PEW switch in the cockpit the SERVICE
buttons get enabled.
If the SERVICE button is gray and inhibited:
The SERVICE button is inhibited because:
- The PEW switch is activated by the cockpit crew or
- The corresponding service is starting.
Deactivating the PEW switch in the cockpit will enable the corresponding
SERVICE button.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 3/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Button/Indicator Description
The WLAN button turns ON/OFF the WLAN function in the entire cabin.
If the WLAN button is green, all Cabin Wireless LAN Units (CWLUs) are operating
and WLAN is available in the entire cabin. Pushing the WLAN button when it is
green will disable the WLAN function for the entire cabin.
Note: The cabin crew must not disable the WLAN function if the
TELEMEDICINE application  is activated.
If the WLAN button is gray, the WLAN function is not available in the entire cabin.
Pushing the WLAN button when it is gray,, will enable the WLAN function for the
entire cabin, if it is available and the system is OK.
If the WLAN button is green and is inhibited, the WLAN access is limited in the
cabin.
The reason may be:
- All CWLUs faulty
- At least one CWLU is resetting
- The PEW switch is activated by the cockpit crew
- A flight phase is active, where no WLAN is allowed.
If the WLAN button gray and is inhibited, the WLAN function is not available in the
entire cabin.
The reason may be:
- At least one CWLU is starting or resetting
- There is a radio error
- The PEW switch is activated by the cockpit crew
- A flight phase is active, where no WLAN is allowed.
If the QUIET MODE button is green, the QUIET mode is activated and the mobile
telephone connection is OFF.
Note: However, it is still possible to send and receive text messages and to use
packet oriented data services of the mobile phone.
Pushing the QUIET MODE button when it is green deactivates the QUIET MODE.
If the QUIET MODE button is gray, the quiet mode is deactivated and the mobile
telephone service is ON.
Pushing the QUIET MODE button when it is gray activates the QUIET MODE.
Every service has a RESET button.

Pushing the RESET button will reset the corresponding service.
The RESET button is normally inhibited and will only be enabled for selection if
the status of a service is faulty.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 4/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Note: Use the RESET button(s) before using the RESET ALL button.
Only if a reset with the RESET button is not successful, use the RESET
ALL button.
Pushing the RESET ALL button will reset the entire system.
Note: The RESET ALL button does not solve the following problems:
- Satellite connection:
- The cabin crew must use the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE)
controls to check the satellite connection. If necessary, the cabin
crew can reset the satellite connection via the IFE POWER page.
Refer to 06-130-30 IFE POWER MAIN DECK Page.
- The flight crew must enable the satellite connection via the
corresponding cockpit controls.
- Seat connection problems: The cabin crew must use the IFE controls
to reset the seat(s).
CABIN CONNECTIVITY APPLICATION - SERVICE OVERVIEW PAGE

When the cabin crew has selected the CONNECTIVITY SYSTEM on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)
the SERVICE OVERVIEW page is displayed.
The SERVICE OVERVIEW page has two tables and corresponding info boxes:
CONNECTIVITY table:
- View the status information about the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY
- Enable/disable the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY and/or the WIRELESS CONNECTION
- Enable/disable the MOBILE TELEPHONY service
- Enable/disable the QUIET MODE
- Reset faulty functions
EXTERNAL SYSTEMS table:
- Ground condition
- In Flight Entertainment (IFE) connection (if configured accordingly)
- Avionic data.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 5/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Example of a SERVICE OVERVIEW Page

Connectivity: SERVICE STATUS
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 6/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380

The info box is If the SERVICE STATUS icon is displayed in green, and
empty. there is no crew information in the corresponding info box,
the corresponding service is available.
There is information If the SERVICE STATUS icon is displayed in green, and
in the info box. there is crew information in the corresponding info box,
OK there are limitations based on external interfaces or
switched OFF functions, e.g. IFE function not available, or
WLAN is switched OFF.
The corresponding information is in the info box.
There is information If the SERVICE STATUS icon is displayed in yellow, the
in the info box. system state there the service limited or not available at all.
Faulty The corresponding information is in the info box.
There is information If the SERVICE STATUS icon is displayed in gray, the
in the info box. corresponding service is not available.
Disabled The corresponding information is in the info box.
There is information If the SERVICE STATUS icon is displayed in gray, the
in the info box. service is not available at all. The cause may be, e.g. a
Not available faulty satellite connection or regulatory limitations e.g. flight
phases. The corresponding information is in the info box.
Connectivity: ACTION
If the SERVICE button is green, the corresponding service function is enabled.
Pushing the SERVICE button enables/disables the corresponding service for the
whole cabin and for the connected cabin systems.
When the SERVICE button is green, the corresponding service is enabled.
If the SERVICE STATUS is OK, the corresponding service is available in the
whole cabin and for the connected cabin systems.
Pushing the SERVICE button when it is green, will disable the corresponding
service.
If the SERVICE button is gray, the corresponding service function is disabled.
Pushing the SERVICE button when it is gray, will enable the corresponding
service for the whole cabin and for the connected cabin systems. The
corresponding service will be available if the SERVICE STATUS is OK.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 7/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Pushing the WLAN button enables/disables the WLAN function in the whole
cabin.
If the WLAN button is displayed in green, all Cabin Wireless LAN Units (CWLUs)
are operating and WLAN is available in the whole cabin. Pushing the WLAN
button when it is green will disable the WLAN function for the whole cabin.
Note: The cabin crew must not disable the WLAN function if the
TELEMEDICINE application  is activated.
If the WLAN button is displayed in gray, the WLAN function is not available in the
whole cabin.
Pushing the WLAN button when it is gray, will enable the WLAN function for the
whole cabin, if it is available and the system is OK.
If the QUIET MODE button is green, the QUIET mode is activated and the mobile
telephone connection is disabled.
Note: However, it is still possible to send and receive text messages and to use
packet oriented data services of the mobile phone.
Pushing the QUIET MODE button when it is green deactivates the QUIET MODE.
If the QUIET MODE button is gray, the quiet mode is deactivated and the mobile
telephone service is enabled.
Pushing the QUIET MODE button when it is gray activates the QUIET MODE.
Pushing the RESET button will reset the corresponding function:

- Internet Connectivity or
- Mobile Telephony.
Pushing the RESET ALL button will reset the entire system.
Note: The RESET ALL button does not solve the following problems:
- Satellite connection: The flight crew must enable it via the
corresponding cockpit controls.
- Seat connection problems: The cabin crew must use the In-Flight
Entertainment (IFE) controls to reset the seat(s).
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 8/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
CABIN CONNECTIVITY APPLICATION WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY PAGE H32
The cabin crew can access the WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY page by pushing the corresponding
DETAILS button on the SYSTEM MONITORING page.
On the WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY page the details for the cabin internet connection are displayed.
Cabin Connectivity Application WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY Page
The aircraft symbols display the availability of the Cabin Wireless
Aircraft Symbols
LAN Units (CWLU) per deck.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 9/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Green: All CWLU are operating, WLAN is switched ON.
Yellow: All CWLU are not operating. A failure has occurred.
Gray: No CWLU is operating:

- All CWLUs are switched OFF or
- The status is unknown.
CWLU There are four Cabin Wireless LAN Units (CWLU) in the cabin:
Two on each deck.
If a CWLU icon is displayed in green it is operating.
If a CWLU icon is displayed gray it is switched OFF or its status is

unknown.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 10/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
If a CWLU icon is displayed in yellow it is not operating.
Pushing the RESET button resets a CWLU.

If the cabin crew pushes the RESET button, a RESET indicator is
displayed in yellow next to the corresponding CWLU icon,
indicating that the reset is in progress.
WLAN ON The WLAN ON button enables/disables the WLAN function for
the corresponding CWLU. The WLAN ON button is a toggle
button. The different states are described below.
If the WLAN ON button is displayed in green, the corresponding
Cabin Wireless LAN Unit (CWLU) is operating. If both, the service
availability and the connectivity system are OK, WLAN via this
CWLU is available. Touching the WLAN ON button when it is
green will disable the CWLU.
If the WLAN ON button is gray, the corresponding CWLU is
disabled. Even if both, the service availability and the connectivity
system are OK, WLAN via this CWLU is not available.
Touching the WLAN ON button when it is gray, will enable the
CWLU.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 11/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
HOW TO TURN ON/OFF THE INTERNET CONNECTIVITY SERVICE H33
By default, all services of the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system are active when the SERVICE STATUS
icon for the corresponding service on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page is green. Refer to 06-210-30
Cabin Connectivity Application - SERVICE OVERVIEW Page.
HOW TO TURN ON THE INTERNET CONNECTIVITY SERVICE
By default, the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service activates and deactivates automatically. However,
the cabin crew can manually turn ON the service when it is available and if the system was manually
turned OFF.
The system is available after takeoff at 460 m (1 500 ft) above ground level and at approx. 250 m (800 L2
ft) in the descent.

In order to turn ON the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service follow the instructions below: L1
1. Access the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application via the corresponding button on the Flight
2. Push the SERVICE button for the internet connectivity service on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page.
The SERVICE button toggles to green, and the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service is ON.
3. To return to the CIDS application on the FAP, press the CIDS hardkey below the FAP screen.
HOW TO TURN OFF THE INTERNET CONNECTIVITY SERVICE
By default, the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service activates and deactivates automatically. However,
the cabin crew can manually turn OFF the service.
Should it be necessary to turn OFF the function, follow the instructions below:
2. Push the SERVICE button for the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service on the SERVICE
OVERVIEW page. The SERVICE button will toggle to gray, and the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY
service will turn OFF.
3. To return to the CIDS application on the FAP, press the CIDS hardkey below the FAP screen.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 12/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
HOW TO TURN ON THE WIRELESS LAN FUNCTION FOR THE WHOLE CABIN
By default the cabin connectivity application is active (ON). The system activates automatically in the
flight phase CRUISE, and deactivates when this flight phase ends.
However, the cabin crew can turn ON the system manually in the CRUISE phase if the automatic
activation did not work:
Access the Cabin Connectivity Application via the corresponding icon on the FAP and if required, enter
the password:
- Refer to 06-210-20 Position of the Cabin Connectivity Application on the FAP
- Refer to 06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application LOG IN ??? Reference not found ???.
Push the WLAN ON button on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page . It will toggle to green, and the WLAN
function will be available in the whole cabin.
HOW TO TURN ON THE WIRELESS LAN FUNCTION FOR THE ENTIRE CABIN
By default the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application is ON. The system activates automatically
in the flight phase CRUISE, and deactivates automatically when this flight phase ends.
However, the cabin crew can manually turn ON the system in the CRUISE phase if the system was
manually turned OFF:
In order to turn ON the Wireless LAN function for the entire Cabin:
1. Access the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application via the corresponding icon on the Flight H34

2. Push the WLAN button on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page. The button will toggle to green, and the
WLAN function will be available in the entire cabin.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 13/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
HOW TO TURN OFF THE WIRELESS LAN FUNCTION FOR THE WHOLE CABIN
Access the Cabin Connectivity Application via the corresponding icon on the FAP and if required, enter
the password:
- Refer to 06-210-20 Position of the Cabin Connectivity Application on the FAP
- Refer to 06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application LOG IN ??? Reference not found ???.
Push the WLAN ON button on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page. It will toggle to gray and the WLAN
function will be turned OFF in the whole cabin.
Note: Don't turn OFF the WLAN function in the whole cabin if the TELEMEDICINE application  is
activated.
HOW TO TURN OFF THE WIRELESS LAN FUNCTION FOR THE ENTIRE CABIN
By default the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application is ON. The system activates automatically H35
in the flight phase CRUISE, and deactivates automatically when this flight phase ends.
However, the cabin crew can manually turn OFF the system in the CRUISE phase:
In order to turn OFF the Wireless LAN function for the entire cabin:
1. Access the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application via the corresponding icon on the Flight
2. Push the WLAN button on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page. The button will toggle to gray and the
WLAN function will be turned OFF in the entire cabin.
Note: Do not turn OFF the WLAN function in the entire cabin if the TELEMEDICINE application 
is active.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 14/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
HOW TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE THE QUIET MODE H37
Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO ACTIVATE THE QUIET MODE

By default, the QUIET MODE is deactivated.
2. Push the QUIET MODE button on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page (Refer to 06-210-30 Cabin
Connectivity Application - SERVICE OVERVIEW Page). The button will toggle to green, and the
QUIET MODE will activate.
Note: In the QUIET MODE the passengers can neither make nor receive calls on their mobile
phones. However, it is still possible to send and receive text messages and to use packet
oriented data services of a mobile phone.
HOW TO DEACTIVATE THE QUIET MODE
If the QUIET MODE is active, but there is no reason for its activation anymore, the cabin crew can
deactivate the QUIET MODE.
To deactivate the QUIET MODE, proceed as described below:
1. Access the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application via the corresponding button on the FAP.
2. Push the QUIET MODE button on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page (Refer to 06-210-30 Cabin
Connectivity Application - SERVICE OVERVIEW Page). The button will toggle to gray, and the
QUIET MODE will deactivate.
H36
Note: The mobile phone function will be fully available again, when the QUIET MODE is
deactivated.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 15/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
HOW TO TURN ON/OFF THE MOBILE TELEPHONY SERVICE H39
Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO TURN ON THE MOBILE TELEPHONY SERVICE

By default, the MOBILE TELEPHONY service automatically activates in the flight phase CRUISE and
when the aircraft altitude is above 4 000 m (approx 13 300 ft) above ground level, and automatically
deactivates when this flight phase ends or the aircraft altitude is below 4 000 m (approx 13 300 ft)
above ground level.
However, the cabin crew can manually turn ON the system in the CRUISE phase, if the system was
manually turned OFF:
In order to manually turn ON the MOBILE TELEPHONY service, proceed as described below:
Attendant Panel FAP.
2. Push the SERVICE button for the MOBILE TELEPHONY service on the SERVICE OVERVIEW
page (Refer to 06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application - SERVICE OVERVIEW Page). The
button toggles to green, and the MOBILE TELEPHONY service is ON.
HOW TO TURN OFF THE MOBILE TELEPHONY SERVICE
By default, the MOBILE TELEPHONY service automatically activates in the flight phase CRUISE and if H38
the aircraft altitude is above 4 000 m (approx 13 300 ft) above ground level. It automatically
deactivates when one of the below applies:
- The flight phase CRUISE ends.
- The aircraft altitude is below 4 000 m (approx 13 300 ft) above ground level.
- Any electronic medical equipment is in use.
However, the cabin crew can manually turn OFF the MOBILE TELEPHONY service in the CRUISE
phase.
In order to manually turn OFF the MOBILE TELEPHONY service proceed as described below:
1. Access the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application via the corresponding button on the FAP.
2. Push the SERVICE button for the MOBILE TELEPHONY service on the SERVICE OVERVIEW
page (Refer to 06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application - SERVICE OVERVIEW Page). The
button toggles to gray, and the MOBILE TELEPHONY service is OFF.
UAE A380 06-210-30 P 16/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
HOW TO RESET A FAULTY CABIN CONNECTIVITY SERVICE H40

H41
H42
Applicable to: MSN 0217-0218 H43
H44
A reset of the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service or MOBILE TELEPHONY service is necessary if H45
H46
one of these services are displayed as faulty on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page. H47
H48
Note: The passenger internet traffic is routed to the IFE system. So, if the INTERNET H49
H50
CONNECTIVITY service has the status FAULTY, DISABLED, or NOT AVAILABLE and the H51
info box shows "Internet is not available due to missing satellite link. Please check the IFE H52
CMT", check the IFE Crew Terminal (CT) for detailed information.
In order to reset a faulty service follow the steps described below:
2. Push the RESET button for the faulty service.
3. If the reset was not successful, make an entry into the digital cabin logbook: Refer to 06-200-40
How to Create a Defect Report.
Note: It is also possible to use the RESET ALL button, if the reset for a service failed.Refer to
06-210-40 How to Reset all Cabin Connectivity Services.
HOW TO RESET A FAULTY CABIN CONNECTIVITY SERVICE

A reset of the Internet Connectivity or Mobile Telephony Service is necessary if one of these services
are displayed as faulty on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page.
In order to reset a faulty cabin connectivity service follow the steps described below:
1. Access the Cabin Connectivity Application via the corresponding button on the Flight Attendant
Panel (FAP).
2. Push the RESET button corresponding to the faulty service.
UAE A380 06-210-40 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
HOW TO RESET ALL CABIN CONNECTIVITY SERVICES H53
A reset of all CABIN CONNECTIVITY services is necessary if:

- All services are displayed as faulty on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page or
- A reset via the individual RESET buttons was not successful.
Note: Pushing the RESET ALL button will reset the entire system.
- The RESET ALL button disables the cabin connectivity functions for all passengers for a
few minutes.
- Make sure the TELEMEDICINE application is deactivated before the reset of the entire
system.
In order to reset faulty cabin connectivity services follow the steps described below:
Panel (FAP).
2. Push the RESET ALL button.
HOW TO RESET ALL CABIN CONNECTIVITY SERVICES

Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0216, 0219-0249
A reset of the Internet Connectivity or Mobile Telephony Service is necessary if one of these services
are displayed as faulty on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page.
In order to reset faulty cabin connectivity services follow the steps described below:
Panel (FAP).
2. Push the RESET ALL button.
UAE A380 06-210-40 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
HOW TO MAKE A CABIN CONNECTIVITY SYSTEM RESET

Applicable to: ALL
H54
Note: - A reset performed by the flight crew disables the cabin connectivity functions for all
passengers.
- Make sure the TELEMEDICINE application  is deactivated before asking the flight crew
for a CABIN CONNECTIVITY system reset.
1. Before asking the flight crew for a cabin connectivity system reset, make sure that all other recovery
possibilities have failed.
2. Contact the flight crew and ask them to perform a cabin connectivity system reset. The reset will
initiate a reset of the entire CABIN CONNECTIVITY system. This takes approximately 10 min.
UAE A380 06-210-40 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
UAE A380 06-210-40 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN VIDEO MONITORING SYSTEM (CVMS)
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE CVMS

Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Video Monitoring System (CVMS) is designed to help the flight crew to observe the cabin.
The CVMS allows the flight crew to monitor the cabin without going outside the cockpit (video stream L2
on the System Display (SD).

The CVMS cameras are installed throughout the cabin (Main Deck (MD) and the Upper Deck (UD). L1
Note: Not all areas of the cabin can be monitored via the cameras.
The cabin crew can view the video images on the FAPs. It is possible to select the views of the
individual cameras.
show.
concerned system.
The following table displays the CVMS camera views in relation to the cabin areas:
Camera Name Monitored Area

Cockpit
Cockpit Door Cockpit Stairs and Part of Entry Area 1 and Forward Stairs
Camera Main R1 Entry Area at door M1L
Camera Main L1 Entry Area at door M1R
Main Deck
Camera Cntr Dr1 Tourist Class Cabin Area between doors M1L/R and M2L/R (Zone 5)
Camera Dr2 G2M1 Tourist Class Cabin Area between doors M1L/R and M2L/R (Zone 5)
Camera Rhs Dr5 Entry Area at door M5R (Zone 8)
Camera Stairs Dr5 Aft Stairs Area (Zone 8)
Upper Deck
Camera FC Cabin Mini Suites Area between doors M1L/R and M2L/R (Zone 1)
Camera Upper R1 Entry area U1R (Zone 1)
Camera Upper L1 Entry area U1L (Zone 1)
Camera Fwd BC Business Class Cabin Area between Doors U1L/R and U2L/R (Zone 2)
UAE A380 06-220-10 P 1/2

CCOM 04-Jul-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
General
A380
Camera Name Monitored Area

Camera Aft BC Business Class Cabin Area between Doors U2L/R and U3L/R (Zone 3)
Camera Fwd Lounge Bar Area (Zone 3)
Camera Aft Lounge Bar Area and Entry Area between doors U3L and U3R (Zone 4)
Camera BC Stairs Aft Stairs Area (Zone 4)
UAE A380 06-220-10 P 2/2

CCOM 04-Jul-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
POSITION OF THE CVMS APPLICATION ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can observe the cabin via the Cabin Video Monitoring System (CVMS). The cabin crew
can access the CVMS application via the FAP by pushing the SELECT button on the CVMS control
pad.
Position of the CVMS Application on the FAP
UAE A380 06-220-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Function Access
A380
UAE A380 06-220-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CVMS APPLICATION START PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
When the cabin crew has selected the Cabin Video Monitoring System (CVMS) application on the
FAP, the CVMS START page is displayed.
Typical CVMS Application START Page
Button Description
Pushing the CREW button will open the video pages of the CVMS application.
Note: The video pages may be protected by a login. If that is the case, the CVMS
LOGIN page will be displayed upon pushing the CREW button.
Pushing the MAINT button will display the system BITE status and the set-up.
The maintenance pages are protected by a login.
Note: The maintenance pages are provided for the maintenance personnel and for not
the cabin crew.
UAE A380 06-220-40 P 1/6

CCOM 09-Jul-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CVMS APPLICATION LOGIN

Applicable to: ALL
When the CVMS pages are protected by a password, and the cabin crew pushes the CREW button on
the CVMS START page, the CVMS LOGIN page is displayed.
Typical CVMS Application LOGIN Page
Title Description
Key pad Pushing the buttons 1 to 9 of the key pad enters the login code. The code is
displayed in *.
CLEAR Pushing the CLEAR button will delete the entered code from the text box
ENTER Pushing the ENTER button will confirm the entered code to the system and
grant access to the CVMS pages.
BACK Pushing the BACK button will display the CVMS START page.
Text box The text box displays the entered code in *.
UAE A380 06-220-40 P 2/6

CCOM 09-Jul-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CVMS HOME PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
When a cabin crewmember has logged into the Cabin Video Monitoring System, the CVMS HOME
page is displayed.
Typical CVMS Home Page
Title Description
Video Window The video window shows the video images of the selected camera.
Aircraft Deck Symbol The aircraft deck symbol displays the camera configuration on the selected
deck. The cameras are displayed in blue, green and gray.
The green camera symbols indicate the currently displaying cameras.
Blue = The images of the corresponding camera are currently not
displayed.
Green = The images of the corresponding camera are currently
displayed.
Gray = The data connection to the corresponding camera is lost.
QUAD VIEW Button Pushing the QUAD VIEW button displays the QUAD VIEW CVMS page.
UAE A380 06-220-40 P 3/6

CCOM 09-Jul-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
Title Description
UPPER Button Pushing the UPPER button displays:
- Upper Deck aircraft symbol
- The active (selected) video images in the video window.
MAIN Button Pushing the MAIN button displays:
- Main Deck aircraft symbol
LOCK Button Pushing the LOCK button displays the LOGIN page.
HOME Button Pushing the HOME button displays the predefined home view in the video
window.
CAMERA NAME Button Pushing the CAMERA NAME button enables or disables the display of the
camera name in the upper left corner of the video window.
SEND FD Button Pushing the SEND FD button sends the current video images to the Flight
Deck.
UAE A380 06-220-40 P 4/6

CCOM 09-Jul-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
CVMS QUAD VIEW PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
When a cabin crewmember has selected the QUAD VIEW button on the CVMS HOME page the
QUAD VIEW page is displayed.
Typical CVMS QUAD VIEW Page
Title Description
Video Window The video window is divided into four panes. Each pane shows the video
images of the selected camera.
Aircraft Deck Symbol The aircraft deck symbol displays the camera configuration on the selected
deck. the cameras are displayed in blue, green and gray The green camera
symbols indicate the currently displaying cameras.
Blue = The images of the corresponding camera are currently not displayed.
Green = The images of the corresponding camera are currently displayed.
Gray = The data connection to the corresponding camera is lost.
UPPER Button Pushing the UPPER button displays:
- Upper Deck aircraft symbol
UAE A380 06-220-40 P 5/6

CCOM 09-Jul-15
CABIN SYSTEMS
Description
A380
Title Description
MAIN Button Pushing the MAIN button displays:
- Main Deck aircraft symbol
LOCK Button Pushing the LOCK button displays the LOGIN page.
HOME Button Pushing the HOME button displays the predefined home view in the video
window.
CAMERA NAME Button Pushing the CAMERA NAME button enables or disables the display of the
camera name in the video window.
SEND FD Button Pushing the SEND FD button sends the current video images to the System
Display (SD) in the cockpit.
UAE A380 06-220-40 P 6/6

CCOM 09-Jul-15
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
07-10 Description
Description........................................................................................................................................... 1
07-20 Location
Location ............................................................................................................................................... 1
07-30 Operational Sequence

Operational Sequence ......................................................................................................................... 1
07-40 Containers
Description........................................................................................................................................... 1
Manual Unlocking ................................................................................................................................ 2
Test Port .............................................................................................................................................. 3
07-50 Oxygen Masks

Oxygen Mask Description.................................................................................................................... 1
Oxygen Mask Operation ...................................................................................................................... 2
07-60 Oxygen mask manual shut-off

Oxygen mask manual shut-off ............................................................................................................. 1
07-70 Inadvertent oxygen mask deployement

Inadvertent oxygen mask deployement ............................................................................................... 1
UAE A380 07-TOC P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 07-TOC P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
A380
DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
Fixed Oxygen System For The Cabin
The fixed oxygen system of the cabin provides oxygen in the cabin (passengers and cabin crew), and
in the crew rest compartments:
- Automatically, in case of cabin depressurization, when the cabin altitude is above 13 800 ft.
- Manually, if the flight crew presses the MASK MAN ON pb.
The fixed oxygen system of the cabin has:
- High-pressure oxygen bottles
UAE A380 07-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
A380
Each high-pressure bottle is located behind the right-hand sidewall lining of the forward cargo L2
compartment.
- A pressure-reducer transmitter on each bottle L1
L2
This transmitter is connected to the high-pressure oxygen bottle, and supplies oxygen to the
regulators for distribution to the entire system.
- Two regulators with supply valves, that provide oxygen to all cabin occupants. L1
These valves provide cabin occupants with a continuous flow of oxygen, and regulate this oxygen L2
flow in accordance with the cabin altitude.

- Two supply lines, one for the main deck, and one for the upper deck L1
Each supply line has two shutoff valves that can isolate the supply line in the engine-burst area. L2
In case either supply line ruptures in the engine-burst area, both associated shutoff valves will
automatically isolate the affected section of the supply line. Oxygen is still supplied to the masks in
the affected section, via interconnected lines from the other deck.
- Masks L1
The masks are stowed in containers.

These containers are: Above the passenger seats, in each lavatory, in each galley, at each cabin
crew station, in both stairs, and in each crew rest compartment.
- An Oxygen System Control Unit (OSCU)
The OSCU monitors and controls the cabin oxygen system.
Note: The OSCU monitors and controls both cockpit and cabin oxygen system.
UAE A380 07-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
LOCATION H55
Cabin Oxygen Arrangement
UAE A380 07-20 P 1/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
Front Part Of Main Deck Oxygen Arrangement
UAE A380 07-20 P 2/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
Rear Part Of Main Deck Oxygen Arrangement
UAE A380 07-20 P 3/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
Front Part Of Upper Deck Oxygen Arrangement
UAE A380 07-20 P 4/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
Rear Part Of Upper Deck Oxygen Arrangement
UAE A380 07-20 P 5/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
LOCATION
Applicable to: MSN 0007
UAE A380 07-20 P 6/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 7/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 8/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 9/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 10/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
LOCATION
Applicable to: MSN 0009, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188
UAE A380 07-20 P 11/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 12/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 13/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 14/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 15/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
LOCATION
0225-0229, 0241-0244
UAE A380 07-20 P 16/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 17/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 18/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 19/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 20/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
LOCATION
UAE A380 07-20 P 21/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 22/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 23/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
UAE A380 07-20 P 24/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
Flight Crew Rest Compartments Oxygen Arrangement
UAE A380 07-20 P 25/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
LOCATION
A380
Cabin Crew Rest Compartment Oxygen Arrangement
UAE A380 07-20 P 26/26

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
OPERATIONAL SEQUENCE
A380
Applicable to: ALL
Operational Sequence
SYSTEM ACTIVATION
The cabin oxygen system automatically operates via the altitude pressure switch (located in the
avionics compartment) or via the Oxygen System Control Unit (OSCU) when the cabin altitude is
above 13800 feet.
To manually operate the system, the flight crewmember presses the MASK MAN ON pb
SYSTEM OPERATION
When the system is activated:
- The shut of valve of each oxygen regulator opens L2
- The oxygen flows into the supply lines (main deck and upper deck) L1
- Then, the oxygen containers open pneumatically.

When the oxygen masks are released:
- The Passenger Address system automatically broadcasts prerecorded instructions regarding their
use
UAE A380 07-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
A380
- Oxygen supply begins when the passenger pull the mask towards their seat.
The masks receive pure oxygen, under positive pressure, at a rate governed by the cabin altitude L2
pressure, and by a central flow regulating device.

The duration of oxygen supply depends on: L1
- The number of cylinders installed

- The number of masks in use
- The flight altitude profile down.
At a cabin pressure altitude of less than 10 000 feet, no oxygen is necessary.
If a passenger oxygen container door does not open, the cabin crew can open it using the Manual
Release Tool (MRT). The cabin crew inserts the pin-end of the MRT tool into the operating rod of the
container door (two holes for large container) in order to disengage the pneumatic door latch.Refer to
07-40 Manual Unlocking
Note: Even though the mask reservoir bag does not inflate, the oxygen flows into the mask at lower
altitudes between approximately 10 000 and 19 000 feet.
UAE A380 07-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
CONTAINERS
A380
DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
Oxygen masks are stowed in oxygen containers and are released after oxygen containers are opened.
Each container supplies 2 to 7 persons with oxygen.
Oxygen Masks Container
UAE A380 07-40 P 1/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
CONTAINERS
A380
MANUAL UNLOCKING
Applicable to: ALL
The unit door can be opened with the Manual release Tool (MRT). Insert the pin-end of the tool into the
operating rod of the pneumatic door latch, and push. The door unit opens.
Manual Unlocking
UAE A380 07-40 P 2/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
CONTAINERS
A380
TEST PORT
Applicable to: ALL
UNLOCKING SYSTEM TEST

Maintenance personnel performs periodical tests of the electrical oxygen containers opening.
The oxygen containers test port and lid must be in closed position.
CAUTION If the test port is opened, report to the Chief Purser.
Closed Position
UAE A380 07-40 P 3/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
CONTAINERS
A380
Test Position
UAE A380 07-40 P 4/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
OXYGEN MASKS
A380
OXYGEN MASK DESCRIPTION

Applicable to: ALL
Oxygen mask description
UAE A380 07-50 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
OXYGEN MASKS
A380
OXYGEN MASK OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
- The oxygen containers doors open

- Oxygen masks fall out of the containers and hang down
- The user pulls one mask to his/her face. When pulling the mask, he/she activates the oxygen flow.
In case oxygen is flowing (> 0.5 liters per minute), a green tube is visible in the housing of the flow
indicator
If there is no oxygen flowing (< 0.5 liters per minute), there is nothing visible inside the housing of the
flow indicator.
UAE A380 07-50 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
OXYGEN MASK MANUAL SHUT-OFF
A380

Applicable to: ALL
To stop the flow oxygen to individual oxygen masks, move the valve operating lever downward to the
closed position.
Valve operating lever
UAE A380 07-60 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
A380
UAE A380 07-60 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
INADVERTENT OXYGEN MASK DEPLOYEMENT
A380

Applicable to: ALL
If the oxygen masks have dropped inadvertently (for example: due to turbulence or hard landing), the
cabin crew should perform the following actions:
- Inform the cockpit crew immediately
- Do not attempt to stow the dropped oxygen mask
- Check if due to pulling at the masks, the release pin has been removed.
Valve operating lever with release pin removed
If the release pins are removed ,if possible, try to insert them again:
- To insert the release pin again, verify that the valve operating lever is the open position
UAE A380 07-70 P 1/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
A380
Insertion of release pin
UAE A380 07-70 P 2/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
A380
Valve operating lever with release pin removed
- Inadvertent mask deployment must be recorded in the cabin logbook.

Note: The fixed gaseous oxygen system will not be activated when the masks have deployed
inadvertently, even if the release pins have been pulled by lanyard.
UAE A380 07-70 P 3/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM
A380
UAE A380 07-70 P 4/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT (IFE)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
08-10 In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) System Description

IFE System General ............................................................................................................................ 1
IFE System Overview .......................................................................................................................... 2
08-20 IFE Control Centers

08-20-10 Overview
IFE Control Center Overview............................................................................................................... 1
IFE Control Center Location Overview ................................................................................................ 2
08-20-20 Crew Work Station (CWS)

Crew Work Station (CWS) Location .................................................................................................... 1
08-20-20-20 Description
Crew Work Station (CWS) Components.............................................................................................. 1
08-20-30 Remote Control Center (RCC)

Remote Control Center (RCC) Location(s) .......................................................................................... 1
Upper Deck (UD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Location.................................................................. 2
Main Deck (MD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Components Description ......................................... 1
Upper Deck (UD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Components Description........................................ 1
08-20-40 IFE Control Center Components

08-20-40-10 General
IFE Control Center Components Overview.......................................................................................... 1
08-20-40-20 IFE Control Terminals

08-20-40-20-10 General
General Information about the IFE Control Terminal(s)....................................................................... 1
Crew Terminal (CT) ............................................................................................................................. 2
Crew Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 3
08-20-40-20-20 Location
IFE Control Terminal Location ............................................................................................................. 1
UAE A380 08-TOC P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
08-20-40-20-30 Description
Screen Layout ......................................................................................................................................1
Touch Screen Features........................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-30 Keyboard
Keyboard..............................................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-40 Card Reader

Credit Card Reader (CCR)...................................................................................................................1
Smart Card Reader (SCR) ...................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-50 DVD Player

DVD Player...........................................................................................................................................1
How to Operate the DVD Player via its front panel ..............................................................................2
08-20-40-60 CD-Player
CD-Player.............................................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-70 DVD-ROM
DVD-ROM ............................................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-80 Video Cassette Player (VCP)

Video Cassette Player..........................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-90 IFE Telephone Handset

IFE Telephone Handset .......................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-100 Printer
Printer...................................................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-110 Fax
Fax .......................................................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-120 Floppy Disk Drive Unit (FDDU)

Floppy Disk Drive Unit (FDDU) ............................................................................................................1
08-20-40-140 IFE Control Center Outlets

USB Port ..............................................................................................................................................1
Power Outlet.........................................................................................................................................1
iPort......................................................................................................................................................3
UAE A380 08-TOC P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
08-20-40-200 IFE Control Center Switches

Control Center Switches Overview ...................................................................................................... 1
Crew Work Station (CWS) MAIN POWER Switch ............................................................................... 1
Remote Control Center MAIN POWER Switch.................................................................................... 2
PAX SYS Pushbutton-Switch (FAP) .................................................................................................... 3
PED Power Switch for IFE Control Center Power Outlet..................................................................... 5
PED Power Switch for Passenger PED Power.................................................................................... 6
Worklight Switch .................................................................................................................................. 6
Indicator Light ...................................................................................................................................... 7
08-20-50 IFE System Power Up/Shut Down

How to Power Up the IFE System ....................................................................................................... 1
How to Shut Down the IFE System...................................................................................................... 5
08-20-60 Smoke Detection for the IFE System

IFE Control Center Smoke Detection................................................................................................... 1
IFE Control Center Smoke Detection Indicator.................................................................................... 3
Indications on the FAP......................................................................................................................... 1

How to Recover a Frozen IFE Control Terminal .................................................................................. 1
How to Recover a Malfunctioning Credit Card Reader........................................................................ 2
08-30 Cabin Crew Functions

08-30-10 General
Cabin Crew Functions Overview ......................................................................................................... 1
08-30-20 Access to IFE Controls

08-30-20-20 Operation
How to Access the Entertainment Screens.......................................................................................... 1
08-30-30 Crew Services

How to Enable the IFE Services .......................................................................................................... 1
UAE A380 08-TOC P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
08-30-40 Seats
How to Reset Inoperative Seats (IFE Components) ............................................................................1
08-30-70 Video
08-30-70-10 General
General Information about the Video System ......................................................................................1
08-30-70-30 Video Announcements

VIDEO ANNOUNCEMENT Screen ......................................................................................................1
08-30-70-70 Landscape Camera

08-30-70-70-20 Operation
How to Turn ON/OFF the Power of the Landscape Camera................................................................1
08-30-90 PED Power

PED Power...........................................................................................................................................1
08-40 Passenger Functions

08-40-10 General
Passenger Functions Overview............................................................................................................1
08-40-20 Passenger Handset

Passenger Handset - All Classes.........................................................................................................1
08-40-30 Video
08-40-30-30 Video On Demand (VOD)
08-40-30-30-20 Operation
How to Start a Video on Demand Movie ..............................................................................................1
08-40-40 Audio
08-40-40-20 Broadcast Audio
Broadcast Audio...................................................................................................................................1
UAE A380 08-TOC P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
08-40-50 Telephone
08-40-50-10 In-Seat Telephone
Telephone Handset for All Classes...................................................................................................... 1
08-40-70 Connection Possibilities at the Seat

Internet Connection ............................................................................................................................. 1
Video Port ............................................................................................................................................ 2
USB Port.............................................................................................................................................. 3
08-40-80 Portable Electronic Device (PED)

PED Power Outlet................................................................................................................................ 1

How to Recover IFE with Black Screens in the Entire Cabin............................................................... 1
Seat PED Power Recovery.................................................................................................................. 2
UAE A380 08-TOC P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 08-TOC P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT (IFE) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A380
IFE SYSTEM GENERAL

Applicable to: ALL
The purpose of the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system is to provide passengers with in-flight
entertainment services.
IFE SYSTEM USERS
The IFE system users are :
- Cabin crewmembers who configure and maintain the operation of the system during flight
- Passengers who use the entertainment features of the system
- Maintenance personnel who configure, troubleshoot, and repair the system during maintenance
periods.
UAE A380 08-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT (IFE) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A380
IFE SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Applicable to: ALL
IFE System Overview
UAE A380 08-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
Overview
A380
IFE CONTROL CENTER OVERVIEW

Applicable to: ALL
IFE Control Center Overview
UAE A380 08-20-10 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
Overview
A380
IFE CONTROL CENTER LOCATION OVERVIEW

Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has a Crew Work Station (CWS) and two Remote Control Centers (RCC). The cabin crew
uses the control centers to monitor and control the IFE system.
IFE Control Center Location Overview
UAE A380 08-20-10 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
Crew Work Station (CWS)
A380 Location
CREW WORK STATION (CWS) LOCATION

Applicable to: ALL
The IFE control center is a part of the Crew Work Station (CWS).
The CWS is located aft of door M1L below the main deck forward stairs .
Crew Work Station Location
UAE A380 08-20-20-10 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Location
UAE A380 08-20-20-10 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Description
CREW WORK STATION (CWS) COMPONENTS

Applicable to: ALL
Crew Work Station (CWS) Components
On the left hand side wall of the CWS is:

- An IFE telephone handset: Refer to 08-20-40-90 IFE Telephone Handset
- A cabin interphone: Refer to 05-30-10 General Information about the Cabin Interphone
For comfort, there is a foldable chair installed.
UAE A380 08-20-20-20 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Description
UAE A380 08-20-20-20 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
Remote Control Center (RCC)
A380 Location
REMOTE CONTROL CENTER (RCC) LOCATION(S)

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can monitor the status of the IFE and control the IFE services from a Remote Control
Center (RCC).
The aircraft has two RCCs:
- One is on the forward Upper Deck (UD):
- One is on the aft Upper Deck (UD):
FORWARD UPPER DECK RCC
The forward Upper Deck RCC has a:
- Crew Terminal (CT)
- RCC MAIN pb-sw.
- Credit Card Reader (CCR)
- Telephone Handset
AFT UPPER DECK RCC
The aft Upper Deck RCC is provided with a:
- Crew Panel (CP)
UAE A380 08-20-30-10 P 1/4

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Location
UPPER DECK (UD) REMOTE CONTROL CENTER (RCC) LOCATION

Applicable to: ALL

- One is on the forward Upper Deck (UD) at door 1 RH at the back side of a lavatory.
- One is on the aft Upper Deck (UD) at door 3 RH on a lavatory wall.
UPPER DECK FORWARD REMOTE CONTROL CENTER LOCATION
Upper Deck Forward Remote Control Center Location
UAE A380 08-20-30-10 P 2/4

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Location
UPPER DECK AFT REMOTE CONTROL CENTER LOCATION

Upper Deck Aft Remote Control Center Location
UAE A380 08-20-30-10 P 3/4

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Location
UAE A380 08-20-30-10 P 4/4

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Description
MAIN DECK (MD) REMOTE CONTROL CENTER (RCC) COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION

Applicable to: ALL
The equipment is not installed or there is no information available yet.
UPPER DECK (UD) REMOTE CONTROL CENTER (RCC) COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION

Applicable to: ALL

- One is on the forward Upper Deck (UD) at door 1 RH at the back side of a lavatory.
- One is on the aft Upper Deck (UD) at door 3 RH on a lavatory wall.
UPPER DECK FORWARD REMOTE CONTROL CENTER COMPONENTS
Upper Deck Forward Remote Control Center Components
UAE A380 08-20-30-20 P 1/2

CCOM 13-Oct-15
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Description
UPPER DECK AFT REMOTE CONTROL CENTER COMPONENTS

Upper Deck Aft Remote Control Center Components
UAE A380 08-20-30-20 P 2/2

CCOM 13-Oct-15
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
IFE Control Center Components
A380 General
IFE CONTROL CENTER COMPONENTS OVERVIEW

Applicable to: ALL
IFE Control Center Components Overview
UAE A380 08-20-40-10 P 1/2

CCOM 08-Jan-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 General
UAE A380 08-20-40-10 P 2/2

CCOM 08-Jan-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 IFE Control Terminals
General
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE IFE CONTROL TERMINAL(S)

Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has three IFE Control Terminals for the cabin crew to interact with the IFE system:
- Two Crew Terminals (CT)
One CT is located in the Crew Work Station (CWS) on the Main Deck. The other CT is located in
the forward Remote Control Center (RCC) on the Upper Deck.
- One Crew Panel (CP).
The CP is located in the aft RCC on the Upper Deck.
UAE A380 08-20-40-20-10 P 1/4

CCOM 02-Oct-13
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
CREW TERMINAL (CT)

Applicable to: ALL
The Crew Terminal (CT) provides an In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) interface for cabin crew and
maintenance personnel. A connected keyboard or the touchscreen function enables the user to make
entries.
The CT screen on-screen menus provide:
- Video source assignment to the cabin zone
- Entertainment and Passenger Address (PA) assignment to the cabin zone
- Peripherals control, including preview of video and audio
- Audio and video input assignment control
- Assigning channels to Passenger Control Unit (PCU) channels on a per zone basis.
Crew Terminal (CT)
The following connectors are at the CT front panel:

- USB Ports: Refer to USB Connector
- Ethernet RJ45 port: For maintenance personnel only.
- Stereo output jack: For listening to audio or video media before it is broadcast to the cabin.
UAE A380 08-20-40-20-10 P 2/4

CCOM 02-Oct-13
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
CREW PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
The Crew Panel (CP) is slightly smaller than the Crew Terminal (CT) and provides also an IFE
interface for the cabin crew and maintenance personnel. A connected keyboard or the touchscreen
function enables the user to make entries.
The CP has the same on-screen menus as the CT:
- Video source assignment to the cabin zone
- Entertainment and PA assignment to the cabin zone
- Peripherals control, including preview of video and audio
- Audio and video input assignment control
- Assigning channels to Passenger Control Unit (PCU) channels on a per zone basis.
Crew Panel (CP)
The CP is provided with controls and connectors:

Controls
- Brightness buttons
- PAX SYS sw, if installed
- RCC MAIN sw, if installed
Connectors
- USB ports, if installed
- Stereo audio output jack: For listening to audio or video media before it is broadcast to the cabin.
UAE A380 08-20-40-20-10 P 3/4

CCOM 02-Oct-13
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
UAE A380 08-20-40-20-10 P 4/4

CCOM 02-Oct-13
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
Location
IFE CONTROL TERMINAL LOCATION

Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has a total of three IFE Control Terminals, two Crew Terminals (CT) and one Crew Panel
(CP). They are part of the IFE Control Centers (CWS and RCC) and are at eye level.
MAIN DECK
There is one CT in the CWS on the Main Deck (MD). The CWS is below the forward stairs at door M1
Refer to 08-20-20-10 Crew Work Station (CWS) Location.
UPPER DECK
There is one CT in the forward Upper Deck (UD) RCC. The UD forward RCC is at door U1R. A CP is
located at door U3R. Refer to 08-20-30-10 Upper Deck (UD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Location.
UAE A380 08-20-40-20-20 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
UAE A380 08-20-40-20-20 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
Description
SCREEN LAYOUT
Applicable to: ALL
TOUCH SCREEN FEATURES

Applicable to: ALL
The IFE Control Terminal has several different screens. Each screen has various elements to convey
information and to provide control of the system. Cabin crewmembers control the IFE system by
touching these elements on the screen.
The different types of elements on the screens are described in the following table:
Graphic Type Description

Box A box is a labeled part of the screen
dedicated to a specific function (e.g.
flight number indication).
Button A button is an on-screen control with

text on it. Selecting a button causes a
change or initiates a process. Activating
a button highlights its on-screen color.
Check Ticking a check box selects or
Box deselects the corresponding option or
setting.
Display A display on a screen is an area in
which information is provided by the
system. This information cannot be
changed (e.g. video preview).
UAE A380 08-20-40-20-30 P 1/4

CCOM 02-Oct-13
IFE CONTROL CENTERS

Drop-Do A drop-down list box allows to choose
wn List an option from a list, which drops down
Box immediately below a fixed field (box).
The drop-down list shows which items
can be chosen.
It is read-only.
Drop- A drop-down list combo box allows to
Down choose an option from a list, which
List drops down immediately below a fixed
Combo field (box). The drop-down list shows
Box which items can be chosen.
It also allows to make an entry which is
then added to the existing (drop-down)
list.
Icon An icon is an on-screen control with a
graphic symbol on it. Touching an icon
causes a change or initiates a process
(e.g. PLAY a video). Normally there are
different icons to select. Touching an
icon highlights its on-screen color.
Label A label identifies areas of the screen. A
label cannot be changed.
List A list provides a series of options that
can be scrolled through via scroll icons.
The selected option is highlighted.
Radio A radio button comes in a group that

Button allows only one selection. If a radio
button is currently selected, it will
deselect when another button is
touched.
UAE A380 08-20-40-20-30 P 2/4

CCOM 02-Oct-13
IFE CONTROL CENTERS

Scroll Scroll icons:
icons
- Open a drop down list
- Navigate within a list
- Select an item.
Tab A tab is a short flap that is labelled.

Several tabs project from the top of the
main screen to indicate the other
accessible screens.
Table A table normally contains IFE system

information that has a horizontal and
vertical correlation.
UAE A380 08-20-40-20-30 P 3/4

CCOM 02-Oct-13
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
UAE A380 08-20-40-20-30 P 4/4

CCOM 02-Oct-13
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Keyboard
KEYBOARD
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew uses the keyboard to enter data at the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) Control Terminal in
order to control the IFE system.
Example of a Keyboard
UAE A380 08-20-40-30 P 1/2

CCOM 09-Jul-15
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Keyboard
UAE A380 08-20-40-30 P 2/2

CCOM 09-Jul-15
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Card Reader
CREDIT CARD READER (CCR)

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew uses the Credit Card Reader (CCR) to logon to the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE)
system or to pay for air-to-ground telephone calls or for facsimiles.
The CCR decodes tracks of magnetic cards and sends the decoded information to the IFE Control L3
Terminal through an RS232 data link.

Example of a Credit Card Reader
L1
SMART CARD READER (SCR)

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew uses the Smart Card Reader (SCR) to read out the information of their IDs.
The Smart Card Reader decodes tracks of magnetic cards and sends the decoded information to the L3
IFE control interface through an RS232 data link.

Smart Card Reader
L1
UAE A380 08-20-40-40 P 1/2

CCOM 09-Jul-15
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Card Reader
UAE A380 08-20-40-40 P 2/2

CCOM 09-Jul-15
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 DVD Player
DVD PLAYER
Applicable to: ALL
The DVD player is part of the IFE system and is situated in an IFE control center. It is used to provide
music, video, or game entertainment for the passengers.
The DVD player is usually controlled via the IFE control interfaces. However, it can also be controlled
manually via its controls on the front panel.
DVD Player Front Panel
The function of the controls and indicators are listed below:

CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE DVD PLAYER
The DVD player has several indicators. Most of them are combined with a control (pushbutton).
- See Stand-Alone Indicators
- See Controls and Indicators.
STAND-ALONE INDICATORS
POWER indicator Indicates that the DVD player is powered.
The DVD player does not have a power switch. It is in ready mode
as soon as the aircraft is powered.
ERROR DISC indicator This indicator comes on, if:
• A disc that is not coded for region 8 is inserted in the DVD
player
• A disc with an unsupported format is inserted in the DVD
player
• A disc is inserted with the wrong side up.
UAE A380 08-20-40-50 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Apr-11
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 DVD Player

Control / Indicator Description
REVERSE SKIP pb / This pushbutton has an effect only when the player is in the play
REVERSE SKIP indicator or pause mode. Pushing the REVERSE SKIP pb in the pause
mode, puts back the playback to its start (start of the playback as
such or a the start of a playback chapter).
The REVERSE SKIP indicator comes ON for a moment when the
REVERSE SKIP pb is pushed.
FORWARD SKIP pb / This pushbutton has an effect only when the player is in the play
FORWARD SKIP indicator or pause mode. Pushing the FORWARD SKIP pb, sets the
playback to the next chapter.
The FORWARD SKIP indicator comes ON for a moment when the
FORWARD SKIP pb is pushed.
STOP pb / STOP indicator This pushbutton pauses or stops the playback. If pushed once,
the playback is paused, if pushed again the playback is stopped.
The STOP indicator is ON during the stop mode.
PLAY pb / PLAY indicator Pushing the PLAY pb starts a playback from the pause or stop
mode.
The PLAY indicator is ON during all play modes.
PAUSE pb / PAUSE indicator Pushing the PAUSE pb pauses a playback. To resume to the
playback, the PLAY pb must be pushed.
The PAUSE indicator is ON during the pause mode.
EJECT pb / DISC IN indicator Pushing the EJECT pb causes the DVD mechanism to eject the
disc.
The DISC IN indicator on the EJECT pb indicates whether there is
a disc in the DVD player or not.
HOW TO OPERATE THE DVD PLAYER VIA ITS FRONT PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
The Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player is usually controlled via the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE)
control interfaces. However, it can also be controlled manually via its controls on the front panel:
1. Insert a DVD.
2. Push the PLAY pb to start the playback.
3. Push the STOP pb to stop the playback.
4. Push the REVERSE SKIP pb or the FORWARD SKIP pb, to navigate through the sections and
chapters of the DVD,
UAE A380 08-20-40-50 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Apr-11
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 CD-Player
CD-PLAYER
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft is not equipped with a CD player.
UAE A380 08-20-40-60 P 1/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 CD-Player
UAE A380 08-20-40-60 P 2/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 DVD-ROM
DVD-ROM
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
On the DVD-ROM the IFE media is stored. Normally it is not necessary for the cabin crew to operate
the DVD-ROM.
UAE A380 08-20-40-70 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 DVD-ROM
UAE A380 08-20-40-70 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Video Cassette Player (VCP)
VIDEO CASSETTE PLAYER

Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft is not equipped with a Video Cassette Player (VCP)
UAE A380 08-20-40-80 P 1/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Video Cassette Player (VCP)
UAE A380 08-20-40-80 P 2/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 IFE Telephone Handset
IFE TELEPHONE HANDSET

Applicable to: ALL
The IFE telephone handset is part of the IFE system and is in an IFE control center. It is used to make
air-to-ground and IFE control center-to-seat calls.
IFE Telephone Handset
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE IFE TELEPHONE HANDSET

- Speaker
The voice of the caller is received via the speaker.
- LCD
The LCD displays menus, system status, numbers, etc. When the user turns the telephone ON, the
MAIN MENU is displayed. The MAIN MENU has the following options:
• MAKE CALL: Selecting MAIN CALL initiates an air-to-ground call.
• CALL SEAT: Selecting CALL SEAT initiates a seat-to-seat call.
• LANGUAGE: Selecting LANGUAGE changes the telephone menu language.
• INCOMING: Selecting INCOMING toggles the incoming seat-to-seat calls function ON/OFF. ON
is the default.
• FAX: Selecting FAX initiates a facsimile transmission.
UAE A380 08-20-40-90 P 1/2

CCOM 13-Jan-15
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 IFE Telephone Handset
- Cursor Key:
Using the cursor key enables the user to navigate on the LCD menu.
- Telephone OFF Key
Pressing the TELEPHONE OFF key disconnects the telephone from the network.
- Telephone ON Key
Pressing the TELEPHONE ON key connects the call.
- VOLUME ▴/▾ Keys
Pressing the volume ▴/▾ keys increases / decreases the telephone audio level.
- CHANNEL ▴/▾ Keys
Pressing the channel ▴/▾ keys increases / decreases the channel number (audio / video at a
passenger seat).
- Dial Keys
Telephone numbers or text can be entered via dial keys.
- Microphone
The microphone converts the passenger voice into electrical signals that are transmitted to the
telephone partner.
- Call Key
Pressing the CALL key calls a cabin crewmember. The key lights up to indicate that the call was
made. Pressing
- VIDEO / AUDIO Key
Pressing the VIDEO / AUDIO key toggles between the audio and video mode (at a passenger seat).
- Reading Light Key
Pressing the READING LIGHT key turns the reading light ON or OFF.
- Credit Card Slot
Swiping a credit card through the credit card slot reads out the credit card data for billing the
telephone call costs.
UAE A380 08-20-40-90 P 2/2

CCOM 13-Jan-15
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Printer
PRINTER
Applicable to: ALL
The printer is part of the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system and is in an IFE control center. It is used
to print data from the IFE control interface.
Printer Controls and Indicators
The function of the controls (pushbuttons) and indicators are listed below:
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE PRINTER
FAULT indicator The FAULT indicator comes ON in amber to
indicate a power-on-self-test fault or any other
equipment fault during operation.
PAPER ALARM indicator The PAPER ALARM indicator comes ON in amber
to indicate that the printer is out of paper.
ABORT pushbutton Pushing the ABORT pb cancels the current print
job. All following print jobs will not be cancelled.
UAE A380 08-20-40-100 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Apr-11
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Printer
SLEW pushbutton Pushing the SLEW pb advances the paper to the
next cue mark or continuously advances the paper
if the pushbutton is held.
TEST pushbutton Pushing the TEST pb performs a diagnostic test of
the printer and produces a test printout.
PRNTR pushbutton / PRNTR indicator Pushing the PRINTER pb turns ON or OFF the
printer. It is a toggle pushbutton.
The PRNTR indicator comes ON in green (three
green lines) when the printer is ON.
Pushing the PRNTR pb when the printer is ON,
resets the printer.
UAE A380 08-20-40-100 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Apr-11
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Fax
FAX
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft is not equipped with a fax.
UAE A380 08-20-40-110 P 1/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Fax
UAE A380 08-20-40-110 P 2/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Floppy Disk Drive Unit (FDDU)
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE UNIT (FDDU)

Applicable to: ALL
The equipment is not installed on the aircraft.
UAE A380 08-20-40-120 P 1/2

CCOM 04-Apr-12
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 Floppy Disk Drive Unit (FDDU)
UAE A380 08-20-40-120 P 2/2

CCOM 04-Apr-12
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 IFE Control Center Outlets
USB PORT
Applicable to: ALL
The USB port provides the possibility to connect peripheral components (e.g. a keyboard, a printer or a
smart card reader) to the IFE Control Terminal.
POWER OUTLET
Applicable to: ALL
The IFE control center has a power outlet for Portable Electronic Devices (PED). The power outlet is
controlled via the PED POWER sw that is also located in the IFE control center: Refer to 08-20-40-200
PED Power Switch for IFE Control Center Power Outlet
Note: The power outlet is for maintenance purposes only (e.g. to supply power to laptops for
uploading software), as indicated by the placard that is below the power outlet.
The power outlet supplies 110 V at 60 Hz.
The power outlet is compatible with North American and European standard connectors. L2
The power outlet has protection features that prevent electrical shocks that could occur, if the outlet is
not used correctly (e.g. inserting foreign objects into the outlet). It also has integrated sensors to
release power only when a plug is engaged.
UAE A380 08-20-40-140 P 1/4

CCOM 13-Oct-15
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
Example of a Power Outlet

L1
Each power outlet has an LED indicator that indicates the current power status:
Color of LED Indicator Power Status of the Power Outlet L12
Power is available. Electronic equipment will work when it is plugged in.

Green
Power is not available due to a failure. Electronic equipment will not
Red work until the failure is resolved.
Failure may be due to:
- Seat Power Module (SPM) bit failure
- GFI trip
- SPM over-temperature.
Refer to the corresponding Fault Recovery Procedures (FRP) to resolve
the problem.
Power is not available (OFF). There is no power supplied.
Black
- The power has been switched OFF at the FAP
- There is an over-current in the Seat Power Module (SPM).
UAE A380 08-20-40-140 P 2/4

CCOM 13-Oct-15
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
IPORT
Applicable to: ALL
The equipment is not installed.
UAE A380 08-20-40-140 P 3/4

CCOM 13-Oct-15
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
UAE A380 08-20-40-140 P 4/4

CCOM 13-Oct-15
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380 IFE Control Center Switches
CONTROL CENTER SWITCHES OVERVIEW

Applicable to: ALL
The IFE control centers have the following switches:

Main Deck Crew Work Station
- CWS MAIN POWER sw: Refer to 08-20-40-200 Crew Work Station (CWS) MAIN POWER Switch
- PED Power sw:Refer to 08-20-40-200 PED Power Switch for IFE Control Center Power Outlet
- Worklight sw:Refer to 08-20-40-200 Worklight Switch .
Upper Deck Remote Control Centers
- RCC MAIN POWER sw: Refer to 08-20-40-200 Crew Work Station (CWS) MAIN POWER Switch.
CREW WORK STATION (CWS) MAIN POWER SWITCH

Applicable to: ALL
The Crew Work Station (CWS) has a CWS MAIN POWER sw. By switching it (ON or OFF) power is
supplied or removed from the CWS.
CWS Main Power Switch
UAE A380 08-20-40-200 P 1/8

CCOM 13-Jul-16
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
REMOTE CONTROL CENTER MAIN POWER SWITCH

Applicable to: ALL
The Remote Control Center (RCC) has an RCC MAIN POWER sw.
The cabin crew can use the RCC MAIN POWER sw to supply power to the RCC, or to remove power
from the RCC.
Typical RCC MAIN POWER Switch
UAE A380 08-20-40-200 P 2/8

CCOM 13-Jul-16
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
PAX SYS PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH (FAP)

Applicable to: ALL
The PAX SYS pb-sw controls the power supply for the passenger PAX cabin systems, including the
In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system.
CAUTION The PAX SYS pb-sw is an emergency pushbutton-switch! A regular use of this
pushbutton-switch can result in damage of passenger system components.
DESCRIPTION
The PAX SYS pb-sw is a hardkey on any Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) in the cabin. Refer to 04-20-10
General Information on the Flight Attendant Panel.
Note: The PAX SYS pb-sw can also be in the IFE control center(s).
Power for the PAX cabin systems will only be available if all PAX SYS pb-sw are ON, including the
PAX SYS sw in the cockpit.
PAX SYS Hardkey on the FAP
The PAX SYS pb-sw removes the power from the cabin systems:
- IFE control center equipment
- Video/Audio equipment (in-seat displays, handsets)
- Passenger seat functions
- Outlets for Portable Electronic Devices (PED)
- IFE Center equipment (in the EEbay)
- Cabin Connectivity equipment, if installed
- Satellite television equipment, if installed
- Other PAX equipment.
Note: Depending on the customization of the aircraft, not all of the above listed systems may be
installed.
UAE A380 08-20-40-200 P 3/8

CCOM 13-Jul-16
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
For a reset, the cabin crew must push the PAX SYS pb-sw to remove power from the systems, and
push the PAX SYS pb-sw again after max. 5 min to supply power to the systems again. It takes approx.
10 min until all systems have rebooted and are running again.
OPERATION
The intended use of the PAX SYS pb-sw is to remove the power from the passenger (PAX) cabin
systems in an emergency (e.g. smoke).
However, and if in accordance with the airline policy, the cabin crew can use the PAX SYS pb-sw to
reset the PAX cabin systems via a power cycle.
Note: A reset via the PAX SYS pb-sw will affect all cabin systems (see list above). Check all other
possibilities for individual resets, i.e. via hardware switches or via software, before the use of
the PAX SYS pb-sw. Refer to the Fault Recovery Procedures for the cabin systems in this
manual.
For a reset (power cycle), the cabin crew must push the PAX SYS pb-sw to remove power from the
systems, and push the PAX SYS pb-sw again to supply power to the systems again.
CAUTION Wait at least 10 min after the power removal. Then push the PAX SYS pb-sw again, to
avoid computer corruption.
It takes approx. 10 min until all systems have rebooted and are running again.
UAE A380 08-20-40-200 P 4/8

CCOM 13-Jul-16
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
PED POWER SWITCH FOR IFE CONTROL CENTER POWER OUTLET

Applicable to: ALL
There is a guarded PED POWER sw in the IFE Control Center that controls the power supply for the
PED power outlet of the IFE Control Center on of the stowage next to it.
When the PED POWER sw is pressed in and lit (ON position) power is supplied to the PED power
outlets.
When the PED POWER sw is out and not lit (OFF position), power is removed from the PED power
outlets.
Note: PED power is switched OFF automatically, when the aircraft flaps are used e.g. for landing.
Example of a PED POWER Switch
UAE A380 08-20-40-200 P 5/8

CCOM 13-Jul-16
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
PED POWER SWITCH FOR PASSENGER PED POWER

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can switch ON or OFF the Portable Electronic Devices PED power in the entire cabin
via the PED POWER sw (hardkey) on any Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) in the cabin.
PED Power Switch for Passenger PED Power
When the PED POWER sw is pressed in and lit (ON position) power is supplied to the power outlet.
When the PED POWER sw is not pressed in and not lit (OFF position), power is removed from the
power outlet.
Note: PED power is switched OFF automatically, when the aircraft flaps are used e.g. for landing.
WORKLIGHT SWITCH
Applicable to: ALL
A worklight in the IFE Control Station provides light in the work table area. The WORKLIGHT sw is a
rocker switch and sets the worklight to BRIGHT, DIM or OFF.
Typical Work Light Switch
UAE A380 08-20-40-200 P 6/8

CCOM 13-Jul-16
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
INDICATOR LIGHT
Applicable to: ALL
The indicator light in the Crew Work Station (CWS) enables the cabin crew to monitor the status of the
power outlet unit in the stowage.
When the indicator light is OFF the stowage outlet unit is not in use.
When the indicator light is ON the stowage outlet unit is in use.
For information about the power outlet: Refer to 08-20-40-140 Power Outlet
For more information about the PED POWER switch: Refer to 08-20-40-200 PED Power Switch for IFE
Control Center Power Outlet
UAE A380 08-20-40-200 P 7/8

CCOM 13-Jul-16
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
UAE A380 08-20-40-200 P 8/8

CCOM 13-Jul-16
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
IFE System Power Up/Shut Down
A380
HOW TO POWER UP THE IFE SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
At the beginning of a flight the IFE system powers up automatically when power is supplied to the
aircraft. Once initial operating system and network operating system start-up sequences are complete,
the software applications start.
If the IFE system was shut down by the previous crew, the current crew must power up the IFE system
via the:
- PAX SYS pb-sw
- CWS MAIN PWR pb-sw
- RCC MAIN PWR pb-sw
- Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) IFE POWER page on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP).
In order to power up the IFE system follow the steps described below:
1. Check the status of the PAX SYS sw. Turn it ON if it is OFF.
2. Check the status of the CWS MAIN PWR sw. Turn it ON if it is OFF.
function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview). An ENTER ACCESS CODE control
appears.
UAE A380 08-20-50 P 1/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380
control pad. If the access code is correct, the IFE POWER - ALL page displays.
UAE A380 08-20-50 P 2/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380
5. Select MAIN DECK via the deck selector. (For information about the deck selector: Refer to
Operation of FAP). The IFE POWER MAIN DECK page displays.
UAE A380 08-20-50 P 3/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380
6. On the IFE POWER - MAIN DECK page, check the status of the following ON/OFF buttons:
- IFE CENTER control pad
- RCC (Remote Control Center) control pad
- CABIN WORKSTATION control pad.
If one of the IFE related ON/OFF buttons is OFF, push the corresponding button(s) to turn the
corresponding power ON. A gray button will turn to green (ON status).
The IFE system will take approximately 5 to 10 minutes to power up.
UAE A380 08-20-50 P 4/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380
HOW TO SHUT DOWN THE IFE SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
Before leaving the aircraft, the cabin crew can shut down the IFE system. This includes closing the
flight on the Crew Terminal (CT) and switching OFF the power of the IFE system via the IFE POWER
page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP). Follow the instructions below.
1. Close the flight on the CT via the CLOSE FLIGHT screen: Refer to How to Close a Flight.
function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview). An ENTER ACCESS CODE control
pad appears.
control pad. If the access code is correct, the IFE POWER - ALL page displays.
UAE A380 08-20-50 P 5/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380
4. Select MAIN DECK via the deck selector. (For information about the deck selector: Refer to
Operation of FAP). The IFE POWER - MAIN DECK page displays.
UAE A380 08-20-50 P 6/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380
5. On the IFE POWER - MAIN DECK page, select the ON/OFF button of the:
- IFE CENTER control pad
- CREW WORK STATION control pad
- RCC control pad.
The buttons will turn to gray instead of green (status OFF).
If desired, the cabin crew can switch OFF the power to the IFE System also via the provided
pushbutton-switches:
1. At the FAP, push the PAX-SYS pb-sw.
2. At the Crew Work Station, push the CWS MAIN PWR pb-sw.
3. At the RCCs, push the RCC MAIN PWR pb-sw.
The IFE System is now powered OFF via CIDS and via the provided switches.
UAE A380 08-20-50 P 7/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380
UAE A380 08-20-50 P 8/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
Smoke Detection for the IFE System
A380
IFE CONTROL CENTER SMOKE DETECTION

Applicable to: ALL
In case of smoke detection in an IFE control center (Crew Work Station  or well equipped Remote
Control Center  ), it will be shut off automatically.
However it is also possible to shut off the power of an IFE control center via the local power switch in
the IFE control center or via the CWS pb in the cockpit.
Power can only be restored to the IFE control center via the switch / pushbutton from which the power L2
was shut off.

In case of an automatic power shut off, the power to the IFE control center is restored automatically
when the fault is gone and the smoke detectors do not deliver any smoke data.
If the flight crew has shut off the power of the IFE control center or if there was an automatic shut off, L1
this will be indicated on the IFE POWER page on the FAP: The button of the corresponding IFE control
center will be gray (active but not activated).
Note: If the cabin crew uses the local power switch to shut off the IFE control center, there is no FAP
indication.
LOCAL POWER SWITCH IN THE IFE CONTROL CENTER
In case of smoke in the IFE control center, the local smoke detection indicator light comes ON. If there
is no automatic power shut off, the cabin crew must use the local power switch (in the CWS or the
RCC  ) to shut off the power of the IFE control center.
For information about the location of the IFE control center power switches:
- Refer to 08-20-20-20 Crew Work Station (CWS) Components 
- Refer to 08-20-30-20 Main Deck (MD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Components Description 
- Refer to 08-20-30-20 Upper Deck (UD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Components Description 
.
If it is not possible for the cabin crew to shut off the power of the IFE control center locally, the flight
crew can do this via the CWS pb on the overhead panel in the cockpit.
CWS PUSHBUTTON IN THE COCKPIT
If smoke is detected in an IFE control center, the CWS pb in the cockpit is illuminated and on the
ECAM the message "Smoke detected in the CWS" is indicated.
If there was no automatic power shut off or the cabin crew was not able to shut off the IFE control
center via the local switch, the flight crew must use the CWS pb to shut off the IFE control center.
The CWS pb is located on the overhead panel among the ENTERTAINMENT pushbuttons.
UAE A380 08-20-60 P 1/4

CCOM 04-Apr-13
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380
CWS Pushbutton on the Cockpit Overhead Panel
For information about the IFE POWER pages: Refer to 06-130-10 General Information about the IFE
and Seat Power Control Pages.
For more information about the smoke detection indicators of the IFE control center: Refer to 08-20-60
IFE Control Center Smoke Detection Indicator.
If smoke was detected, there will be several indications in the cabin and in the cockpit. For information
about the smoke detection system: Refer to 06-70-10 General Information About the Smoke Detection
(SD) System.
UAE A380 08-20-60 P 2/4

CCOM 04-Apr-13
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380
IFE CONTROL CENTER SMOKE DETECTION INDICATOR

Applicable to: ALL
The IFE Control Center has a smoke detection system with a smoke detection indicator.
If smoke is detected, the following aural and visual alerts are triggered in the cockpit and the cabin:
Location Smoke Alert

The smoke detection indicator of the IFE Control Center comes ON in amber.
On the Area Call Panels (ACPs), close to the Remote Control Center (RCC)
location, the amber indicator flashes.
A smoke chime sequence (3 times Lo II with 30 seconds delay between the
chimes) sounds in the cabin.
Note: The aural alert on all decks sounds for only a short time, whereas the
In the cabin local alert (visible and audible) will persist until manually reset by the
cabin crew.
On all Attendant Indication Panels (AIP) the smoke location is displayed and the
red indicator comes ON.
On the FAP, on the SMOKE DETECTION page the SMOKE DETECTED button
comes ON and the name and position of the related sub-compartment are
indicated on the related cabin symbol.
The MASTER WARN lights come ON.
The continuous repetitive chime sounds.
In the cockpit
On the ECAM a SMOKE message is displayed.
On the overhead panel the CWS pb comes ON. (If installed).
For information about the location of the smoke indication light:
- Refer to 08-20-20-20 Crew Work Station (CWS) Components (if installed)
- Refer to 08-20-30-20 Main Deck (MD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Components Description (if
installed)
- Refer to 08-20-30-20 Upper Deck (UD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Components Description (if
installed).
For more information about smoke indication in the cabin: Refer to 06-70-10 General Information
About the Smoke Detection (SD) System.
For information about how to shut off the power in the IFE Control Center in case of smoke detection:
Refer to 08-20-60 IFE Control Center Smoke Detection.
UAE A380 08-20-60 P 3/4

CCOM 04-Apr-13
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380
UAE A380 08-20-60 P 4/4

CCOM 04-Apr-13
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
Indications
A380
INDICATIONS ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
Depending on the customers CAM assignment the message IFE CENTER LOSS OF COOLING is
displayed on the FAP if the IFE center has lost the ventilation to cool its components. The message is
displayed on the FAP SYSTEM INFO page in the MISCELLANEOUS list box.
For more information about the MISCELLANEOUS list box: Refer to 06-90-30 SYSTEM INFO Page
The message informs the cabin crew that there is no cooling for the IFE center. This could lead to
overtemperature in the IFE center. In case of overtemperature the IFE center will switch off
automatically.
If the IFE center has switched off automatically the cabin crew should make an entry into the Digital
Cabin Logbook (DCL). For more information about the DCL: Refer to 06-200-20 Position of the Digital
Cabin Logbook on the FAP
UAE A380 08-20-70 P 1/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
Indications
A380
UAE A380 08-20-70 P 2/2

CCOM 04-Oct-08
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380
HOW TO RECOVER A FROZEN IFE CONTROL TERMINAL

Applicable to: ALL
If the IFE control center has a malfunction, a reset of the IFE control center is a way of quick recovery and
has limited impact on the passengers system.
How to recover the IFE control center if the screen of the IFE control terminal freezes or the IFE
control terminal shuts down.
YES NO
1. Is the IFE control terminal screen frozen or is the IFE control terminal off? Go to 2 END
2. At the IFE control center:
- Switch OFF the IFE control center MAIN POWER switch and wait for
three minutes.
- Switch ON the IFE control center MAIN POWER switch and wait for
10 minutes to ensure a complete boot up of the equipment.
Note: During the restarting process of the IFE control center, the
IFE control terminal screen will become blank. Touch it to
reactivate it.
Is the LOG IN or MAIN MENU screen displayed on the IFE control
terminal? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. To ensure that the IFE control terminal operates normally:
- Log in to the system.
- Check several menus from the menu bar.
Does the IFE control terminal operate normally? Go to 4 Go to 4
4. Make an entry into the cabin logbook about the IFE faults mentioning the:
- Faulty IFE component(s), if identified
UAE A380 08-20-80 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
IFE CONTROL CENTERS
A380
HOW TO RECOVER A MALFUNCTIONING CREDIT CARD READER

Applicable to: ALL
Malfunction of the Credit Card Reader (Reader Error)
YES NO
1. Does the credit card reader read the inserted credit card? Go to 2 END
2. Clean the credit card reader head:
- Pass the card reader cleaner card in the normal passing direction with
the felt side of the card facing towards the reader head.
Note: To clean the head, any of the four edges of the card may be
used. Each edge of the card withstands up to 100 cleaning
passes.
- Slide a credit card through the credit card reader and check for correct
function. Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Is the credit card reader function available again? END Go to 4
4. The credit card reader function is not available.
Enter the fault information into the cabin logbook. END END
UAE A380 08-20-80 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
CABIN CREW FUNCTIONS
General
A380
CABIN CREW FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew functions include all functions that are controlled and monitored by the cabin crew only.
Cabin Crew Functions Overview
UAE A380 08-30-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
General
A380
UAE A380 08-30-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Access to IFE Controls
A380 Operation
HOW TO ACCESS THE ENTERTAINMENT SCREENS

Applicable to: ALL
For information about the IFE Software for the Cabin Crew refer to the Panasonic Flight Attendant
Manual.
UAE A380 08-30-20-20 P 1/2

CCOM 09-Jul-15
Access to IFE Controls
A380 Operation
UAE A380 08-30-20-20 P 2/2

CCOM 09-Jul-15
Crew Services
A380 Operation
HOW TO ENABLE THE IFE SERVICES

Applicable to: ALL
Manual.
UAE A380 08-30-30-20 P 1/2

CCOM 13-Jan-15
Crew Services
A380 Operation
UAE A380 08-30-30-20 P 2/2

CCOM 13-Jan-15
Seats
A380 Operation
HOW TO RESET INOPERATIVE SEATS (IFE COMPONENTS)

Applicable to: ALL
Manual.
UAE A380 08-30-40-20 P 1/2

CCOM 13-Jan-15
Seats
A380 Operation
UAE A380 08-30-40-20 P 2/2

CCOM 13-Jan-15
Video
A380 General
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE VIDEO SYSTEM

0225-0229, 0241-0244
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE VIDEO SYSTEM

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Manual.
UAE A380 08-30-70-10 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
Video
A380 General
UAE A380 08-30-70-10 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
Video
A380 Video Announcements
Description
VIDEO ANNOUNCEMENT SCREEN

Applicable to: ALL
TBD
UAE A380 08-30-70-30-10 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Apr-16
Video
A380 Video Announcements
UAE A380 08-30-70-30-10 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Apr-16
Video
A380 Landscape Camera
Operation
HOW TO TURN ON/OFF THE POWER OF THE LANDSCAPE CAMERA

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can turn the power of the landscape camera OFF (and ON) via the IFE POWER
page.Refer to 06-130-50 How to Turn OFF/ON the Landscape Camera.
Note: The cabin crew can use the ON/OFF button on the IFE POWER page to reset the landscape
camera.
UAE A380 08-30-70-70-20 P 1/2

CCOM 13-Jul-16
Video
A380 Landscape Camera
UAE A380 08-30-70-70-20 P 2/2

CCOM 13-Jul-16
PED Power
A380 Description
PED POWER
Applicable to: ALL
In-seat power outlets are provided on board the aircraft to supply power to Personal Electronic Devices
(PED), for example laptops on board the aircraft. The power outlet supplies 110 V at 60 Hz.
The power outlet has protection features that prevent electrical shocks that could occur, if the outlet is
not used correctly (e.g. inserting foreign objects into the outlet). It also has integrated sensors to
release power only when a plug is engaged.
L1
Each power outlet has an LED indicator that indicates the current power status:
Power is available. Electronic equipment will work when it is plugged in.

Green
UAE A380 08-30-90-10 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Apr-11
PED Power
A380 Description
Color of LED Indicator Power Status of the Power Outlet

Power is not available due to a failure. Electronic equipment will not
Red work until the failure is resolved.
Failure may be due to:
- Seat Power Module (SPM) bit failure
- GFI trip
- SPM over-temperature.
Refer to the corresponding Fault Recovery Procedures (FRP) to resolve
the problem.
Black
- The power has been switched OFF at the FAP
- There is an over-current in the Seat Power Module (SPM).
UAE A380 08-30-90-10 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Apr-11
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
General
A380
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW

Applicable to: ALL
Passenger functions are available at each passenger seat. Passengers can control these functions
from their seat.
Passenger Functions Overview
UAE A380 08-40-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
General
A380
UAE A380 08-40-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Passenger Handset
A380
PASSENGER HANDSET - ALL CLASSES

Applicable to: ALL
PASSENGER HANDSET OVERVIEW

Each passenger seat has a handset to operate the entertainment system:
Each passenger seat has a handset to operate the entertainment system:
- Passenger entertainment (audio and video)
- Passenger service (attendant call and passenger light)
- Interactive service (games etc.)
- Telephone.
Passengers can use the keys on the passenger handset to navigate through the user interface that is
displayed on the in-seat monitor.
The passenger handset has the following functions:
- Passenger Control Unit (PCU): Refer to 08-40-20 Passenger Handset- Passenger Control Unit
Functions
- Communicator: Refer to 08-40-20 Passenger Handset - Communication Functions
- Telephone: Refer to 08-40-50-10-10 Telephone Handset for All Classes.
Passenger Handset Overview
UAE A380 08-40-20 P 1/6

CCOM 13-Oct-15
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Passenger Handset
A380
The passenger handset is stored in a cradle located in the passenger seat. When the passenger
handset is stored, the PCU / telephone side shows. The PCU / telephone side has the controls and
indicators for the passenger service and passenger entertainment as well as the telephone controls.
To use the passenger handset as a communicator, telephone or as a game controller, the passenger
can pull it out of the cradle and operate it hand-held.
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE PASSENGER HANDSET FUNCTIONS
The passenger handset has keys on both sides.
The keys operate the:
- Control Unit Functions See Passenger Handset - Control Unit Functions
- Communication functions: Refer to 08-40-20 Passenger Handset - Communication Functions
- Telephone function: Refer to 08-40-50-10-10 Telephone Handset for All Classes
PASSENGER HANDSET - CONTROL UNIT FUNCTIONS
Passenger Handset - Control Unit Functions
Title Description
ENTER Pressing the ENTER confirms selections on the LCD or the in-seat
display.
UAE A380 08-40-20 P 2/6

CCOM 13-Oct-15
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Passenger Handset
A380
Title Description
VOLUME ▴ ▾ Pressing the VOLUME ▴ ▾ key increases or decreases the volume of the
headset.
READING LIGHT ON/OFF Pressing the READING LIGHT ON/OFF turns the reading light ON.
Pressing the key a second time turns the reading light OFF.
Microphone The microphone converts the passenger voice into electrical signals that
are transmitted to the telephone partner.
Audio/Video Control The following audio/video controls are available on the handset:
- Pressing the ■◂ key rewinds the running audio/video
- Pressing the □ key stops the running audio/video
- Pressing the ▸■ key fast forwards the running audio/video
- Pressing the ▸■■ key plays or pause the selected or running
audio/video
- Pressing the ■◂◂ key skips to the beginning of the running
audio/video
- Pressing the ▸▸■ key skips to the end of the running audio/video.
ATTENDANT CALL Pressing the ATTENDANT CALL activates the call function. The cabin
crew is informed visually or aurally.
Pressing the ATTENDANT CALL a second time deactivates the call
function.
Mode key Pressing the mode key selects the corresponding mode and activates
the related control on the handset and the in-seat display.
CHANNEL ▴ ▾ Pressing the CHANNEL ▴ ▾ key scrolls the available channels. The LCD
indicates the selected channel.
Display (LCD) This display shows the channel number that is set by the CHANNEL ▴ ▾
key. The LCD is usually dark. Pushing any of the handset keys increases
the brightness of the display.
Speaker The bearer of the telephone can hear the caller via the speaker.
UAE A380 08-40-20 P 3/6

CCOM 13-Oct-15
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Passenger Handset
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE PASSENGER HANDSET COMMUNICATOR FUNCTIONS

- Passenger Handset - Control Unit Functions: Refer to 08-40-20 Passenger Handset- Passenger
Control Unit Functions
- Communication functions: See Passenger Handset- Communicator Functions
- Telephone function: Refer to 08-40-50-10-10 Telephone Handset for All Classes
PASSENGER HANDSET- COMMUNICATOR FUNCTIONS
Passenger Handset- Communicator Functions
Title Description
START The user can use the START for interactive games. The function of this key
depends on the selected game.
SELECT The user can use the SELECT for interactive games. The function of this key
depends on the selected game.
INTERNET Pressing the INTERNET ACCESS starts an internet browser on the in-seat
ACCESS display unit.
E-MAIL ACCESS Pressing the E-MAIL ACCESS starts an E-mail application on the in-seat display
unit.
UAE A380 08-40-20 P 4/6

CCOM 13-Oct-15
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Passenger Handset
A380
Title Description
Cursor Pressing the cursor key enables the user to navigate on the in-seat display unit
menu.
Shoot (left and right) The user can use SHOOT keys for interactive games. The function of these keys
depend on the selected game.
QWERTY keyboard The user can use the QWERTY keyboard to enter text or numbers.
1, 2, 3, 4 The user can use the 1, 2, 3, 4 keys for interactive games. The functions of these
keys depend on the selected game.
Credit Card Slot Swiping a credit card through the credit card slot reads out the credit card data for
billing the telephone call costs.
TELEPHONE OFF Pressing the TELEPHONE OFF disconnects the telephone from the network.
TELEPHONE ON Pressing the TELEPHONE ON connects the call.
UAE A380 08-40-20 P 5/6

CCOM 13-Oct-15
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Passenger Handset
A380
UAE A380 08-40-20 P 6/6

CCOM 13-Oct-15
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Video
A380 Video On Demand (VOD)
Operation
HOW TO START A VIDEO ON DEMAND MOVIE

Applicable to: ALL
UAE A380 08-40-30-30-20 P 1/2

CCOM 08-Jan-09
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Video
A380 Video On Demand (VOD)
UAE A380 08-40-30-30-20 P 2/2

CCOM 08-Jan-09
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Audio
A380 Broadcast Audio
Description
BROADCAST AUDIO
Applicable to: ALL
UAE A380 08-40-40-20-10 P 1/2

CCOM 08-Jan-09
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Audio
A380 Broadcast Audio
UAE A380 08-40-40-20-10 P 2/2

CCOM 08-Jan-09
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Telephone
A380 In-Seat Telephone
Description
TELEPHONE HANDSET FOR ALL CLASSES

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE PASSENGER HANDSET FUNCTIONS

- Passenger Handset - Control Unit Functions: Refer to 08-40-20 Passenger Handset- Passenger
Control Unit Functions
- Communication functions: Refer to 08-40-20 Passenger Handset - Communication Functions
- Telephone function: See Passenger Handset - Telephone Functions
PASSENGER HANDSET - TELEPHONE FUNCTIONS
Telephone Handset
Title Description
TELEPHONE OFF Pressing the TELEPHONE OFF disconnects the telephone from
the network.
UAE A380 08-40-50-10-10 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Telephone
A380 In-Seat Telephone
Title Description
ENTER key Pressing the ENTER key will confirm the menu options from the
LCD.
Microphone The microphone converts the passenger voice into electrical
signals that are transmitted to the telephone partner.
Dial Keys Telephone numbers or text can be entered via dial keys.
TELEPHONE ON Pressing the TELEPHONE ON connects the call.
LCD The LCD displays menus, system status, numbers, etc.
Speaker The voice of the caller is received via the speaker.
Credit Card Slot Swiping a credit card through the credit card slot reads out the
credit card data for billing the telephone call costs.
UAE A380 08-40-50-10-10 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Connection Possibilities at the Seat
A380 Description
INTERNET CONNECTION
Applicable to: ALL
For connecting to the internet via Ethernet each passenger seat has an RJ-45 port.
Depending on the type of seat and the class the port can be situated in the armrest or next to the
in-seat display. Typically the ethernet port is situated next to other ports that are provided for the
passenger.
Typical Ports at a Passenger Seat
UAE A380 08-40-70-10 P 1/4

CCOM 02-Apr-09
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380 Description
VIDEO PORT
Applicable to: ALL
The passenger seats are equipped with an auxiliary video jack. Passengers can connect an external
DVD player to watch their own video DVD at their seat.
in-seat display. Typically the video port is situated next to other ports that are provided for the
passenger.
UAE A380 08-40-70-10 P 2/4

CCOM 02-Apr-09
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380 Description
USB PORT
Applicable to: ALL
The passenger seats are equipped with a USB port. Passengers can connect an external device at
their seat.
in-seat display. Typically the USB port is situated next to other ports that are provided to the
passenger.
UAE A380 08-40-70-10 P 3/4

CCOM 02-Apr-09
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380 Description
UAE A380 08-40-70-10 P 4/4

CCOM 02-Apr-09
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
Portable Electronic Device (PED)
A380 Description
PED POWER OUTLET

Applicable to: ALL
The passenger seats have power outlets where the passengers can connect their Personal Electronic
Devices (PEDs).
An indicator light on the side of the aisle seat comes ON, when one or more passengers in the seat row
use their power outlet.
POWER OUTLET
The power outlet supplies 110 V at 60 Hz.

The power outlet has protective features that prevent electrical shocks in the event of misuse (e.g. the
insertion of a foreign object in the outlet). The power outlet has sensors to ensure the release of power
only when a plug is engaged.
Each power outlet has a Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator that indicates the current power status: L1
Green Power is available. Electronic equipment will work when connected.
UAE A380 08-40-80-10 P 1/4

CCOM 05-Apr-16
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380 Description
Color of LED Indicator Power Status of the Power Outlet

Power is not available, due to a failure. Electronic equipment will not
work until the resolution of the failure.
The failure may be due to:
- A seat Power Module (SPM) bit failure
Red
- A Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) trip
- An SPM over temperature.
Refer to the corresponding Function Recovery Procedures (FRPs) to
resolve the problem.
Black - The power is switched OFF at the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)
- There is an over-current in the SPM.
Note: The cabin crew can turn ON/OFF the passenger PED power supply via the PED POWER
hardkey on the FAP. Refer to 08-20-40-200 PED Power Switch for Passenger PED Power.
PED POWER IN USE INDICATOR FOR A SEAT OR SEAT ROW
The layout of the PED POWER IN USE indicator may change from one seat type to another. The PED
POWER IN USE indicator is on the aisle side of a seat or seat row.
The indicator comes ON when a passenger connects a PED to the power outlet.
UAE A380 08-40-80-10 P 2/4

CCOM 05-Apr-16
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380 Description
Example of a PED POWER IN USE Indicator for a Seat/Seat Row
Note: The seat may also have an emergency path marking element. Do not confuse this element
with the PED POWER IN USE indicator.
UAE A380 08-40-80-10 P 3/4

CCOM 05-Apr-16
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380 Description
UAE A380 08-40-80-10 P 4/4

CCOM 05-Apr-16
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380
HOW TO RECOVER IFE WITH BLACK SCREENS IN THE ENTIRE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
The screens are black on all the in-seat and wall-mounted display units of the In-Flight
Entertainment (IFE) system, throughout the cabin.
YES NO
1. Does the IFE control terminal screen still work? Go to 4 Go to 2
2. If the IFE control terminal screen does not work/is frozen:
Refer to 08-20-80 How to Recover a Frozen IFE Control Terminal.
Note: Apply the instructions to reset the frozen screen, then return to
this Function Recovery Procedure (FRP).
Is the IFE control terminal screen still frozen? Go to 11 Go to 3
3. Are the in-seat and the wall-mounted display units throughout the cabin
operational again? END Go to 4
4. On the IFE control terminal screen:
Check the FUNCTIONS page and/or the SYSTEM STATUS page.
Are there any error messages/indications on the FUNCTIONS page
and/or the SYSTEM STATUS page? Go to 5 Go to 6
5. On the FUNCTIONS page (IFE control terminal screen):
Reset the corresponding function.
Are the in-seat and the wall-mounted display units throughout the cabin
6. On the FAP:
Select the IFE POWER page.
Check the following:
- Are all columns green on the IFE POWER MAIN DECK and the IFE
POWER UPPER DECK page? Go to 9 Go to 7
7. If all columns on the IFE POWER pages are amber:
Switch ON the power of all columns and wait for 5 min.
Are all columns green on the IFE POWER MAIN DECK and the IFE
POWER UPPER DECK page? Go to 8 Go to 11
8. Are the in-seat and the wall-mounted display units throughout the cabin
UAE A380 08-40-90 P 1/8

CCOM 05-Apr-16
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380
YES NO
9. On the FAP:
1. Push the PAX SYS pb-sw to shut off the power of the entire IFE
system.
2. Wait for 5 min.
3. Push the PAX SYS pb-sw again to turn ON the power of the entire IFE
system.
Are all columns green on the IFE POWER MAIN DECK and the IFE
POWER UPPER DECK page? END Go to 10
10. If the in-seat and the wall-mounted display units are still black throughout
the cabin:
Refer to 04-40 CIDS Reset After Cabin System Failure(s) in Flight or on
Ground with Passengers on Board.
Note: Apply the instructions in the CIDS Reset FRP, then return to this
FRP.
Are the in-seat and the wall-mounted display units throughout the cabin
11. The IFE system is inoperative.
Inform the flight crew and enter the following information in the cabin
logbook:
- The details of the failure
SEAT PED POWER RECOVERY

Applicable to: ALL
SEAT PED POWER RECOVERY

If there is a seat power failure, the cabin crew must:
- Determine if the power failure affects the entire cabin: Refer to 08-40-90 How to Recover a PAX
Power Failure in the Entire Cabin
- Determine if the power failure affects a seat group or a single seat: Refer to 08-40-90 How to Find
Out whether It is a Seat or a Seat Group PED Power Failure
- Recover the seat group(s): Refer to 08-40-90 How to Recover PED Power for a Seat Group or
- Recover a single seat: Refer to 08-40-90 How to Recover PED Power for a Single Seat.
UAE A380 08-40-90 P 2/8

CCOM 05-Apr-16
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380
Note: Power for the cabin PAX systems will only be available if all PAX SYS pb-sw are ON, including
the PAX SYS sw in the cockpit.
How to Recover a PAX Power Failure in the Entire Cabin (In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) System and
Seat Power)
YES NO
1. If there is no power available to the IFE system and the seats throughout
the cabin but the aircraft has power:
Check the PAX SYS pb-sw on the nearest Flight Attendant Panel (FAP). Go to 2 Go to 2
2. Is the PAX SYS pb-sw in the ON position? Go to 4 Go to 3
3. If the PAX SYS pb-sw is in the OFF position:
Ask the other cabin crewmembers why the PAX SYS pb-sw is switched
OFF. If there is no reason or if the reason is no longer applicable:
Switch ON the PAX SYS pb-sw.
Are the seats and the IFE system supplied with power? END Go to 4
4. If the PAX SYS pb-sw is in the ON position on the nearest FAP and there
is still no power for the IFE system and the seats:
Contact the cabin crewmembers at the other FAP(s) and ask them to
make sure that the PAX SYS pb-sw at their FAP is in the ON position. Go to 5 Go to 5
5. Are all PAX SYS pb-sw in the ON position and is power available for the
IFE system and the seats in the whole cabin? END Go to 6
6. The power failure cannot be reset.
Inform the passengers.
Ask the Chief Purser to make an entry in the cabin logbook about the
failure, and to specify the countermeasures taken. END END
UAE A380 08-40-90 P 3/8

CCOM 05-Apr-16
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380
How to determine if a Portable Electronic Device (PED) Power Failure affects a Seat or a Seat
Group
YES NO
A passenger indicates a problem with the PED power outlet.
If it is not possible to operate a PED via a PED power outlet, determine if
the failure affects a single seat or a seat group:
1. Is the PED POWER pb-sw (hardkey) below the FAP screen in the ON
position? Go to 3 Go to 2
2. At the FAP:
Turn the PED POWER pb-sw OFF, then ON.
Is PED power available now? END Go to 3
3. At the FAP:
- Push the IFE POWER button on the function selector on the FAP
screen.
- If necessary, enter the login password for the IFE POWER pages.
Does one of the seat columns display in amber on the IFE POWER - ALL
page? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The PED power failure affects a seat group.
For information about how to recover PED power for a seat group: Refer
to 08-40-90 How to Recover PED Power for a Seat Group. END END
5. The PED power failure affects a single seat.
For information about how to recover PED power for a single seat: Refer
to 08-40-90 How to Recover PED Power for a Single Seat. END END
UAE A380 08-40-90 P 4/8

CCOM 05-Apr-16
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380
How to Recover Portable Electronic Device (PED) Power for a Single Seat
YES NO
1. At the seat:
Check the Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator of the PED power outlet.
Unplug the PED.
Is the LED green, when the PED is not plugged into the outlet? Go to 5 Go to 2
2. Is the LED red, when the PED is not plugged into the outlet? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. There is no power available for PED usage.
This is due to a failure. Go to 11 Go to 11
4. Is the LED OFF, when the PED is not plugged into the outlet? Go to 11 Go to 5
5. At the seat:
Plug the PED into the PED power outlet .
Does the PED work? END Go to 6
6. At the seat:
Check the indicator LED of the PED power outlet.
Is the LED green, when a PED is plugged into the outlet? Go to 7 Go to 9
UAE A380 08-40-90 P 5/8

CCOM 05-Apr-16
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380
YES NO
7. Power is available.
If the PED does not work, there must be a bad contact. Try a different
PED power outlet at another seat.
Does the PED work at the other PED power outlet? Go to 11 Go to 8
8. The PED is not working.
Inform the passenger. END END
9. Is the LED red or OFF, when a PED is plugged into the outlet? Go to 10 Go to 6
10. The PED requires more power than the PED power outlet can supply.
Do not connect this PED to the PED power outlet. END END
11. Make an entry into the cabin logbook about the PED failure. Make sure to
include:
- The affected seat
How to Recover PED Power for a Seat Group
YES NO
1. If the IFE POWER page is not already displayed at the FAP:
- Push the IFE POWER button on the function selector on the FAP
screen.
- If necessary, enter the login password for the IFE POWER pages.
- Select the deck on which the seat column is indicated in amber via the
deck selector.
Is there a message in the text field of the affected seat group indicating
LOW POWER? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. If LOW POWER is indicated, temporarily there is no power available for
PED usage. When there is sufficient power available again, PED power
will be reactivated automatically.
Inform the passengers. END END
3. Is the ON/OFF button gray and disabled? Go to 7 Go to 4
4. Check the Seat Group Switch (SGS).
Is the SGS of the affected seat group switched OFF? Go to 5 Go to 7
5. Ask the other crew members if it is OK to switch ON the SGS of the
affected seat group.
Is it OK to switch ON the SGS switch? Go to 6 Go to 7
UAE A380 08-40-90 P 6/8

CCOM 05-Apr-16
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380
YES NO
6. For switching the SGS follow the sequence below:
1. Ask the passengers of the seat group to of disconnect all PEDs from
the PED power outlets.
2. Switch ON the SGS.
3. Reconnect the PED in the seat row
Do all PED work again? END Go to 7
7. The power failure can not be reset.
Inform the passenger(s). If there are seats available in another seat
group, ask the passenger(s) to move.
Ask the Chief Purser to make an entry into the cabin logbook about the
PED failure mentioning the:
- Affected seats
UAE A380 08-40-90 P 7/8

CCOM 05-Apr-16
PASSENGER FUNCTIONS
A380
UAE A380 08-40-90 P 8/8

CCOM 05-Apr-16
DOORS AND SLIDES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
09-10 Passenger Doors

09-10-10 Overview
Door Location....................................................................................................................................... 1
Door Numbering................................................................................................................................... 2
Door Aspect ......................................................................................................................................... 2
Outside View of the Passenger Door................................................................................................... 1
Inside View of the Passenger Door...................................................................................................... 5
Components of the Passenger Door.................................................................................................... 9
09-10-30 Operation
Risk of Injury at the Passenger Door Frame........................................................................................ 1
Normal Operation of the Passenger Doors from the Inside ................................................................ 2
Normal Operation of the Passenger Doors from the Outside .............................................................. 4
Manual Operation of the Passenger Doors from the Inside................................................................. 8
Manual Operation of the Passenger Doors from the Outside.............................................................. 9
Emergency Operation of the Passenger Doors ................................................................................. 10

Controls and Indicators........................................................................................................................ 1

FULLY OPEN Indicator is not ON Although the Door is in the Fully Open Position ............................ 1
ECAM alert DOOR xxxx POS FAULT triggered in the cockpit ........................................................... 3
09-20 Slides and Sliderafts

Description of Slides and Sliderafts ..................................................................................................... 1
Slide and Slideraft Systems................................................................................................................. 3
Slide and Slideraft Components .......................................................................................................... 9
Door-mounted Slideraft System......................................................................................................... 12
Upper Deck Slideraft Description ...................................................................................................... 12
09-20-20 Operation
Slide and Slideraft Operation............................................................................................................... 1
Manual Inflation ................................................................................................................................... 3
Slide Extension .................................................................................................................................... 3
UAE A380 09-TOC P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
M3 Overwing Ramp/slides ...................................................................................................................5

Upper Deck Slide Deflated Use............................................................................................................7
09-20-30 Slideraft Use for Ditching

Main Deck Slideraft Passenger Boarding.............................................................................................1
Main Deck Slideraft Disconnection.......................................................................................................2
Upper Deck Slideraft Disconnection.....................................................................................................5
Upper Deck Slideraft Passenger Boarding...........................................................................................7
Upper Deck Slideraft Survival Kit Location...........................................................................................7
Raft Capacity......................................................................................................................................12
Canopy Installation.............................................................................................................................13
Survival Kit Contents..........................................................................................................................15
09-30 Aircraft Configuration in Crash Situations

09-30-10 General
General.................................................................................................................................................1
09-30-20 Aircraft Configuration

Aircraft Configurations..........................................................................................................................1
UAE A380 09-TOC P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Overview
A380
DOOR LOCATION
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has 8 pairs of doors (= 16 passenger doors, all classified as type “A” doors):
- 5 pairs of doors on the Main Deck (M1L/M1R to M5L/M5R)
Note: The passenger doors M3L/M3R are for emergency use only.
- 3 pairs of doors on the Upper Deck (U1L/U1R to U3L/U3R).
Passenger Doors - Location
Type “A” door dimensions: Width =1 262 mm and Height = 1 930 mm. L2
UAE A380 09-10-10 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Overview
A380
DOOR NUMBERING
Applicable to: ALL
Each door is identified with 3 characters:

1. The deck :“M” for Main Deck, “U” for Upper Deck
2. The number :The numbering starts from the forward and goes to the aft of the fuselage
3. The side : “L” for left hand side, “R” for right hand side, referring to the flight direction
EXAMPLES:
M1L: Main deck, first door on the left hand side.
U3R: Upper deck, third door on the right hand side.
DOOR ASPECT
All the passenger doors of the A380 have a common design.

However, the door aspect is different depending on the slide system location.
- The Main Deck doors M1, M2, M4, and M5 have a door mounted slide system.
- The Main Deck doors M3 have a belly fairing integrated slide system.
- All the Upper Deck doors have a fuselage integrated slide system.
UAE A380 09-10-10 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Overview
A380
Door Aspect Depending on the Slide System Location
UAE A380 09-10-10 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Overview
A380
DOOR ASPECT
All the passenger doors of the A380 have a common design.

However, the door aspect is different depending on the slide system location.
- The Main Deck doors M1, M2, M4, and M5 have a door mounted slide system.
- The Main Deck doors M3 have a belly fairing integrated slide system.
- All the Upper Deck doors have a fuselage integrated slide system.
Door Aspect Depending on the Slide System Location
UAE A380 09-10-10 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
OUTSIDE VIEW OF THE PASSENGER DOOR

Ident: 09-10-20 00004951.0001001 / 02-Nov-10
Impacted by: 00025371.0001001
Placards on the Passenger Door

1 DANGER, DO NOT OPEN DOOR IF RED WARNING LIGHT IS FLASHING (CABIN
PRESSURIZED!)
2 TO OPEN
– 1. PUSH FLAP TO GRASP HANDLE
– 2. LIFT HANDLE FULLY UP TO HORIZONTAL GREEN LINE
3 EXIT
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 1/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
Outside View of the Passenger Door
All passenger doors can be opened and closed from outside.

Refer to 09-10-30 Normal Opening from the Outside.
Refer to 09-10-30 Normal Closing from the Outside.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 2/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0028-0057, 0086-0090, 0101-0116, 0123, 0132-0135, 0141, 0147, 0153-0174, 0182-0249
Placards on the Passenger Door

1 DANGER, DO NOT OPEN DOOR IF RED WARNING LIGHT IS FLASHING (CABIN
PRESSURIZED!)
2 TO OPEN
– 1. PUSH FLAP TO GRASP HANDLE
– 2. LIFT HANDLE FULLY UP TO HORIZONTAL GREEN LINE
3 EXIT
Outside View of the Passenger Door
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 3/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
All passenger doors can be opened and closed from outside.

Refer to 09-10-30 Normal Opening from the Outside.
Refer to 09-10-30 Normal Closing from the Outside.
Temporary DU: 00025371.0001001
Impacted DU: 00004951
The aircraft doors can only be opened and closed manually but not electrically from the outside.
Due to a failure of the electrical controls on the outside of the aircraft, not commanded door motion has
occurred.
The consequences of this failure are:
- Not commanded motion (close or open direction) of the passenger door, when the door handle is
lifted up from either outside or inside.
- Door closing while the door is used for emergency evacuation. In this case, the affected door could
be potentially unusable for evacuation.
In consequence, the electrical controls (open and close) will be deactivated. However, it will still be
possible to open or close the door manually from the outside. There will be no change in operation from
the inside.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 4/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
INSIDE VIEW OF THE PASSENGER DOOR

All passenger doors are type “A” doors and are equipped with an escape slide.
Although the passenger doors may look different depending on the slide installation, they have the
same door components and the operation is the same for all doors.
Example of a Main Deck Passenger Door
1. DOOR CONTROL HANDLE: Refer to 09-10-20 Door Control Handle.

2. DOOR LOCKING INDICATION: Refer to 09-10-20 Door Locking Indication.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 5/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
3. Red CABIN PRESSURE VISUAL WARNING Indicator: Refer to 09-10-20 Observation Window with
Slide and Pressure Indicators.
4. DOOR AND SLIDE INDICATION PANEL (DSIP): Refer to 09-10-20 Door and Slide Indication
Panel (DSIP).
5. SLIDE ARMED INDICATOR: Refer to 09-10-20 Observation Window with Slide and Pressure
Indicators.
6. LENS in the OBSERVATION WINDOW: Refer to 09-10-20 Lens in the Observation Window.
7. OBSERVATION WINDOW: Refer to 09-10-20 Observation Window with Slide and Pressure
Indicators.
8. BUZZER (behind the door lining): Refer to 09-10-20 Buzzer.
9. Arming Lever PLASTIC COVER: Refer to 09-10-20 Arming Lever Plastic Cover.
10.SLIDE ARMING LEVER: Refer to 09-10-20 Slide Arming Lever with Safety Pin.
11.SAFETY PIN: Refer to 09-10-20 Slide Arming Lever with Safety Pin.
12.FRAME ASSIST HANDLES: Refer to 09-10-20 Frame Assist Handle.
13.DOOR ASSIST HANDLES: Refer to 09-10-20 Support Arm and Door Assist Handle.
14.SUPPORT ARM: Refer to 09-10-20 Support Arm and Door Assist Handle.
Note: As the passenger doors always open in flight direction, the support arm is on the right side of
all doors on the left hand side. For doors on the right hand side the support arm is on the left
side.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 6/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
All passenger doors are type “A” doors and are equipped with an escape slide.
Although the passenger doors may look different depending on the slide installation, they have the
same door components and the operation is the same for all doors.
Example of a Main Deck Passenger Door
1. DOOR CONTROL HANDLE: Refer to 09-10-20 Door Control Handle.

2. DOOR LOCKING INDICATION: Refer to 09-10-20 Door Locking Indication.
3. Red CABIN PRESSURE VISUAL WARNING Indicator: Refer to 09-10-20 Observation Window with
Slide and Pressure Indicators.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 7/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
4. DOOR AND SLIDE INDICATION PANEL (DSIP): Refer to 09-10-20 Door and Slide Indication
Panel (DSIP).
5. SLIDE ARMED INDICATOR: Refer to 09-10-20 Observation Window with Slide and Pressure
Indicators.
6. LENS in the OBSERVATION WINDOW: Refer to 09-10-20 Lens in the Observation Window.
7. OBSERVATION WINDOW: Refer to 09-10-20 Observation Window with Slide and Pressure
Indicators.
8. BUZZER (behind the door lining): Refer to 09-10-20 Buzzer.
9. Arming Lever PLASTIC COVER: Refer to 09-10-20 Arming Lever Plastic Cover.
10.SLIDE ARMING LEVER: Refer to 09-10-20 Slide Arming Lever with Safety Pin.
11.SAFETY PIN: Refer to 09-10-20 Slide Arming Lever with Safety Pin.
12.FRAME ASSIST HANDLES: Refer to 09-10-20 Frame Assist Handle.
13.DOOR ASSIST HANDLES: Refer to 09-10-20 Support Arm and Door Assist Handle.
14.SUPPORT ARM: Refer to 09-10-20 Support Arm and Door Assist Handle.
Note: As the passenger doors always open in flight direction, the support arm is on the right side of
all doors on the left hand side. For doors on the right hand side the support arm is on the left
side.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 8/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
COMPONENTS OF THE PASSENGER DOOR

DOOR AND SLIDE INDICATION PANEL (DSIP)

The Door and Slide Indication Panel (DSIP) is located on the door frame of a passenger door.
The DSIP is used to operate the door.
The DSIP has:
- Four indicators
- Two pushbuttons.
The pushbuttons are illuminated (white) when active and their surface is raised in order identify
them easily.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 9/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
Door and Slide Indication Panel (DSIP)
DOOR/SLIDE STATUS INDICATION

LOCKED Indicator L13
The LOCKED indicator comes ON green when the door is:

- Closed,
- latched and
- locked.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 10/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
UNLOCKED Indicator
The UNLOCKED indicator comes ON red when the DOOR
CONTROL HANDLE was lifted.
FULLY OPEN Indicator

The FULLY OPEN indicator comes ON white when the door is
in the fully open position and the GUST LOCK has engaged.
Note: The OPEN pb will deactivate, when the door is in the
fully open position.
If the cabin crew pushes the CLOSE pb the FULLY
OPEN indicator will go OFF.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 11/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
SLIDE NOT READY Indicator

If the aircraft is on ground and electrical power is available the
SLIDE NOT READY indicator flashes red (for 120 s) when:
- The electrical activation of the slide failed, or
- The aircraft is in tail tip condition (nose up attitude, above 2.5
± 0.5 degrees), but the slide extension at the doors
M1L/M1R was not activated automatically.
Note: Only the slides at the doors M1L / M1R are
equipped with slide extensions to ensure that the
slides reach the ground.
WARNING If the SLIDE NOT READY indicator flashes

red, do not use the corresponding passenger
door for an aircraft evacuation. An improper
slide or slideraft outside the passenger door
could cause severe injury or even death to
persons leaving the aircraft.
Note: If the slide inflation bottle pressure is low, the SLIDE

NOT READY indicator flashes red (without time limit) to
inform the line maintenance crew. This indication starts
35 min after the aircraft has touched the ground to
avoid any confusion to the cabin crew.
DOOR OPERATING PUSHBUTTONS

OPEN Pushbutton
The cabin crew uses the OPEN pb to open the passenger door.
The OPEN pb comes ON white (active) when the door was fully
lifted via the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.
To fully open the door, press and hold the OPEN pb until the
FULLY OPEN indicator comes ON and the OPEN pb
deactivates.
Releasing the OPEN pb at any time will stop the door movement.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 12/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
CLOSE Pushbutton
The cabin crew uses the CLOSE pb to close the passenger door.
The CLOSE pb comes ON white (active) as soon as the
OPEN pb is pushed. It stays ON until the door is back in front of
the door frame.
To close the door, press and hold the CLOSE pb until the door
stops automatically in front of the door frame.
Releasing the CLOSE pb at any time will stop the door
movement.
DOOR AND SLIDE INDICATION PANEL (DSIP)

The Door and Slide Indication Panel (DSIP) is located on the door frame of a passenger door.
The cabin crew uses the DSIP to operate the door.
The DSIP has:
- Four indicators
- Two pushbuttons.
The pushbuttons are ON (white) when active and their surface appears raised in order identify them
easily as pushbuttons.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 13/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
Door and Slide Indication Panel (DSIP)
DOOR/SLIDE STATUS INDICATION

LOCKED Indicator L13
The LOCKED indicator comes ON green when the door is:

- Closed,
- Latched and
- Locked.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 14/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
UNLOCKED Indicator
The UNLOCKED indicator comes ON red when the DOOR
CONTROL HANDLE was lifted.
FULLY OPEN Indicator

The FULLY OPEN indicator comes ON white when the door is
in the fully open position and the GUST LOCK has engaged.
Note: The OPEN pb will deactivate, when the door is in the
fully open position.
If the cabin crew pushes the CLOSE pb the FULLY
OPEN indicator will go OFF.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 15/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
SLIDE NOT READY Indicator

The SLIDE NOT READY indicator has different functions and
indications:
- In emergency door operation of door M1L/M1R (flashing with
an aural alert) : Emergency Door Operation
- After normal landing (steady ON). : In Normal Operation.
Note: The indication in normal operation is not relevant for
the cabin crew.
In Emergency Door Operation
If the aircraft is on ground and the cabin crew opens the door
M1L/M1R in slide armed mode (emergency door operation), the
SLIDE NOT READY indicator flashes red (for 120 s) when:
The slide extension at door M1L/M1R is needed, and it did not
inflate automatically (in tail tip condition only).
Note: The slides at the doors M1L/M1R have slide extensions
to ensure that the slides reach the ground.
WARNING If the SLIDE NOT READY indicator flashes

red, do not use the corresponding passenger
door for an aircraft evacuation. An improper
slide or slideraft outside the passenger door
could cause severe injury or even death to
persons leaving the aircraft.
In Normal Operation
If the slide inflation bottle pressure is low, the SLIDE NOT
READY indicator comes ON in red (without time limit) to inform
the line maintenance crew.
Note: The indication comes ON 35 min after the aircraft has
touched the ground to avoid any confusion to the cabin
crew.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 16/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
DOOR OPERATING PUSHBUTTONS

OPEN Pushbutton
The cabin crew uses the OPEN pb to open the passenger door.
The OPEN pb comes ON white (active) when the door was fully
lifted via the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.
To fully open the door, press and hold the OPEN pb until the
FULLY OPEN indicator comes ON and the OPEN pb
deactivates.
Releasing the OPEN pb at any time will stop the door movement.
CLOSE Pushbutton
The cabin crew uses the CLOSE pb to close the passenger door.
The CLOSE pb comes ON white (active) as soon as the
OPEN pb is pushed. It stays ON until the door is back in front of
the door frame.
To close the door, press and hold the CLOSE pb until the door
stops automatically in front of the door frame.
Releasing the CLOSE pb at any time will stop the door
movement.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 17/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
OBSERVATION WINDOW WITH SLIDE AND PRESSURE INDICATORS

The cabin crew can use the OBSERVATION WINDOW to check the outside conditions before opening
the door. The OBSERVATION WINDOW has a special LENS (Fresnel) to enable crewmembers to
have a better view of the conditions outside the aircraft.
OBSERVATION WINDOW (ALL DOORS - EXCEPT M3)
The SLIDE ARMED indicator and the red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning are in the door lining,
under the OBSERVATION WINDOW.
The indicators are visible from the inside and the outside of the aircraft.
Example of an OBSERVATION WINDOW (not Door M3)
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 18/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
OBSERVATION WINDOW AT DOOR M3

The SLIDE ARMED indicator is in the door lining under the OBSERVATION WINDOW and the red
CABIN PRESSURE visual warning is in the door lining above the OBSERVATION WINDOW.
Example of an Observation Window at Door M3
SLIDE STATUS INDICATOR

The SLIDE ARMED indicator is in the door lining under the OBSERVATION WINDOW.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 19/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
The white SLIDE ARMED indicator light comes ON steady

when the door is in armed position and the DOOR
CONTROL HANDLE is moved up (for more than 29 °).
The SLIDE ARMED indicator is OFF when the SLIDE

ARMING LEVER is in the Disarmed position.
CABIN PRESSURE VISUAL WARNING (ALL DOORS - EXCEPT DOOR M3)

The red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning, in the door lining under the OBSERVATION
WINDOW, indicates the differential pressure between cabin (high) and outside condition (low):
FLASHING RED: The CABIN PRESSURE visual warning

flashes red when:
- The aircraft systems have the status AIRCRAFT ON
GROUND.
- The related slide is disarmed.
- The differential cabin pressure is above 2.5 mbar.
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE

DOOR IF THE CABIN PRESSURE
VISUAL WARNING FLASHES RED.
There is a risk that the cabin door will
open violently due to the cabin not
being fully depressurized.
The red CABIN PRESSURE visual
warning is the first indication of residual
cabin pressure.
If the cabin crew fails to notice the
visual warning, and starts to lift the door
control handle, a second aural warning
will come ON.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 20/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
OFF: The CABIN PRESSURE visual warning is OFF when

the differential cabin pressure is normal (less than
2.5 mbar).
CABIN PRESSURE VISUAL WARNING AT DOOR M3

The red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning, in the door lining above the OBSERVATION

flashes red when:
GROUND.

open violently due to the cabin not being
fully depressurized.
cabin pressure.
If the cabin crew fails to notice the visual
warning, and starts to lift the door
will come ON.

2.5 mbar).
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 21/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
OBSERVATION WINDOW WITH SLIDE AND PRESSURE INDICATORS

The cabin crew can use the OBSERVATION WINDOW to check the outside conditions before opening
the door. The OBSERVATION WINDOW has a special LENS (Fresnel) to enable crewmembers to
have a better view of the conditions outside the aircraft.
OBSERVATION WINDOW (ALL DOORS - EXCEPT M3)
The SLIDE ARMED indicator and the red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning are in the door lining,
under the OBSERVATION WINDOW.
Example of an OBSERVATION WINDOW (not Door M3)
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 22/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
OBSERVATION WINDOW AT DOOR M3

The SLIDE ARMED indicator is in the door lining under the OBSERVATION WINDOW and the red
CABIN PRESSURE visual warning is in the door lining above the OBSERVATION WINDOW.
Example of an Observation Window at Door M3
SLIDE STATUS INDICATOR

The SLIDE ARMED indicator is in the door lining under the OBSERVATION WINDOW.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 23/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
The white SLIDE ARMED indicator light comes ON steady

when the door is in armed position and the DOOR
CONTROL HANDLE is moved up (for more than 29 °).
The SLIDE ARMED indicator is OFF when the SLIDE

ARMING LEVER is in the Disarmed position.
CABIN PRESSURE VISUAL WARNING (ALL DOORS - EXCEPT DOOR M3)

The red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning, in the door lining under the OBSERVATION

flashes red when:
GROUND.

open violently due to the cabin not
being fully depressurized.
cabin pressure.
If the cabin crew fails to notice the
visual warning, and starts to lift the door
will come ON.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 24/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380

2.5 mbar).
CABIN PRESSURE VISUAL WARNING AT DOOR M3

The red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning, in the door lining above the OBSERVATION

flashes red when:
GROUND.

open violently due to the cabin not being
fully depressurized.
cabin pressure.
If the cabin crew fails to notice the visual
warning, and starts to lift the door
will come ON.

2.5 mbar).
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 25/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
Applicable to: ALL
BUZZER
There are two different buzzers at each door:
- One is part of the DSIP
- The other one is installed in the door itself.
Both are not visible, they are covered by the door lining.
Note: Depending on customer option, one or both buzzer(s) can be deactivated.
BUZZER IN THE PASSENGER DOOR
The BUZZER is in the upper area of the door (behind the door lining) and next to the SLIDE
ARMING LEVER.
The buzzer sounds if:
- There is differential cabin pressure.
- The CABIN PRESSURE visual warning indicator in the OBSERVATION WINDOW flashes red.
- The DOOR CONTROL HANDLE was lifted for more than 3°.
BUZZER IN THE DSIP
The BUZZER inside the DSIP sounds if:
- The Slide Arming Lever is in the Armed position and the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE was lifted
for more than 29°.
Note: Not available for US customers.
- The SLIDE NOT READY indicator on the DSIP flashes red.
Note: Optionally, the BUZZER sounds for 2 s at the beginning of each door movement if the
crewmember has pressed either the DSIP OPEN pb or the DSIP CLOSE pb.
PLASTIC COVER
A transparent PLASTIC COVER protects the SLIDE ARMING LEVER against inadvertent movement.
The cover is normally in the closed position during all flight phases. Access to the lever is not directly
possible (the SAFETY PIN is not installed and the SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the Armed position).
To get access to the SLIDE ARMING LEVER, manually move the cover (the cabin crew can install the
SAFETY PIN after setting the SLIDE ARMING LEVER to the Disarmed position). When the cabin crew
has installed the SAFETY PIN, the PLASTIC COVER stays in the open position.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 26/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
SLIDE ARMING LEVER

The SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the upper right corner of the door.
SLIDE ARMING LEVER (disarmed and secured)
The cabin crew uses the SLIDE ARMING LEVER to arm or disarm the slide.
HOW TO ARM THE SLIDE
1. Remove the SAFETY PIN.
2. Move he SLIDE ARMING LEVER into the forward position (lever points towards Armed ▸ on the
placard).
3. Lower the PLASTIC COVER.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 27/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
Note: The forward position is associated with the aircraft flight direction.
Note: The slide arming lever must be moved fully forward.
HOW TO DISARM THE SLIDE
1. Lift the PLASTIC COVER.
2. Move the SLIDE ARMING LEVER into the aft position (lever points towards ◂ Disarmed on the
placard) .
3. Install the SAFETY PIN.
Note: The slide arming lever must be moved fully aft.
SAFETY PIN
The SAFETY PIN secures the SLIDE ARMING LEVER only in the ◂ Disarmed position. When the
lever points to the Armed ▸ position, it covers the socket of the SAFETY PIN and an installation of the
SAFETY PIN is not possible.
When the SAFETY PIN is not needed, it should be kept in a safe place.
Note: It is proposed to stow the SAFETY PIN inside a wall-mounted Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS)
next to the corresponding door:
1. Open the flap at the bottom of the CAS (between seat pan and aircraft floor).
2. On the inner side of the flap there are two pockets. The SAFETY PIN should be stowed
inside the outboard pocket (the inboard pocket is normally used to stow the manual release
(O2-) tool).
3. Let the flag of the SAFETY PIN hang out of the pocket, so that it is stowed loose inside the
pocket.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 28/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
SLIDE ARMING LEVER

The SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the upper right corner of the door.
SLIDE ARMING LEVER (Disarmed and Secured)
The cabin crew uses the SLIDE ARMING LEVER to arm or disarm the slide.
HOW TO ARM THE SLIDE
1. Remove the SAFETY PIN.
2. Move he SLIDE ARMING LEVER into the forward position (lever points towards Armed ▸ on the
placard).
3. Lower the PLASTIC COVER.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 29/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
Note: The slide arming lever must be moved fully forward.
HOW TO DISARM THE SLIDE
1. Lift the PLASTIC COVER.
2. Move the SLIDE ARMING LEVER into the aft position (lever points towards ◂ Disarmed on the
placard) .
3. Install the SAFETY PIN.
Note: The slide arming lever must be moved fully aft.
SAFETY PIN
The SAFETY PIN secures the SLIDE ARMING LEVER only in the ◂ Disarmed position. When the
lever points to the Armed ▸ position, it covers the socket of the SAFETY PIN and an installation of the
SAFETY PIN is not possible.
When the SAFETY PIN is not needed, it should be kept in a safe place.
Note: Usually the SAFETY PIN is stowed inside a wall-mounted Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS) next to
the corresponding door:
1. Open the compartment door at the lower part of the CAS.
2. On the inner side of the compartment door, there are at least two pockets installed. Facing
the CAS, stow the SAFETY PIN inside a pocket except the left hand pocket dedicated to
the MRT (Manual Release (O2-) Tool) only.
3. Let the flag of the SAFETY PIN hang out of the pocket, so that it is stowed loose inside the
pocket.
4. Close the compartment door of the CAS.
Applicable to: ALL
SUPPORT ARM AND DOOR ASSIST HANDLE

The SUPPORT ARM joins the passenger door with the aircraft structure (door frame).
DOOR ASSIST HANDLES support the crewmembers while they move the door manually.
FRAME ASSIST HANDLE
Two FRAME ASSIST HANDLES are mounted on the door frame of a passenger door, one on each
side of the door frame. The crewmembers can hold on to the FRAME ASSIST HANDLES during door
opening or door closing procedures for additional support.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 30/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
MANUAL SLIDE INFLATION PUSHBUTTON

The Manual slide Inflation pb (MIP pb) is a spring loaded pushbutton, which is always in the upper part
of the RH passenger door frame.
The MIP pb is transparent in normal mode. In emergency mode, it becomes red as soon the MIP
function is available.
If the automatic slide inflation is not initiated, press the MIP pb when it comes ON in red.
Note: - For the Operation on the Main Deck:
When the door opens for an angle of more than approx. 70°, the MIP pbs come ON in red
and the slides deployment sequence starts.
- For the Operation on the Upper Deck:
The MIP pb comes ON in red when the door is released from the closed position by lifting
the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE and when the slides deployment sequence starts.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 31/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
Manual Slide Inflation Pushbutton
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 32/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
MANUAL SLIDE INFLATION PUSHBUTTON

The Manual slide Inflation pb (MIP pb) is a spring loaded pushbutton, which is always in the upper part
of the RH passenger door frame.
The MIP pb is transparent in normal mode. In emergency mode, it becomes red as soon the MIP
function is available.
If the automatic slide inflation is not initiated, press the MIP pb when it comes ON in red.
Note: - For the Operation on the Main Deck:
When the door opens for an angle of more than approx. 70°, the MIP pbs come ON in red
and the slides deployment sequence starts.
- For the Operation on the Upper Deck:
The MIP pb comes ON in red when the door is released from the closed position by lifting
the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE and when the slides deployment sequence starts.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 33/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
Manual Slide Inflation Pushbutton
Applicable to: ALL
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE

Each passenger door has two DOOR CONTROL HANDLES, one on the inside and one on the outside
of the aircraft.
The cabin crew use the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE to:
- Initiate the opening of the passenger doors.
- Complete the closing procedure of the passenger doors.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 34/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
FLIGHT LOCK
A FLIGHT LOCK is an actuator similar to a hook, installed in each passenger door behind the door
lining. A FLIGHT LOCK secures the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE in the lower (locked) position.
The FLIGHT LOCK ensures that the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is locked during the flight phases
CLIMB and DESCENT (beginning at a speed of 65 kt up to an altitude of 24 000 ft).
If there is no electrical power available or a fault is detected, the FLIGHT LOCK is always in the
unlocked position. If the FLIGHT LOCK is in the unlocked position, a message on the ECAM reminds
the flight crew to advise the cabin crew to observe the faulty door.
To access the related crew procedure Refer to 14-90 Flight Lock Actuator Fault ??? Reference not
found ???.
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 35/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
DOOR LOCKING INDICATION

Each passenger door has two DOOR LOCKING INDICATIONS that indicate the current door status.
Door Status via the Door Locking Indications
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 36/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
DOOR STATUS: LOCKED

Both DOOR LOCKING INDICATIONS show the
information LOCKED in white capital letters on a
green background, when the door is:
- Closed
- Latched
- Locked.
The DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is in the lowest
position.
DOOR STATUS: UNLOCKED

Both DOOR LOCKING INDICATIONS show the
UNLOCKED indication in white capital letters on a
red background, when the DOOR CONTROL
HANDLE is moved out of the lowest position.
GUST LOCK
The GUST LOCK secures the passenger door in its fully open position.
During the normal closing procedure, initiated with the CLOSE pb, the GUST LOCK is disengaged
automatically.
Only when electrical power is not available, the GUST LOCK must be disengaged manually by lifting
the GUST LOCK lever before the door can be moved to the closed position.
The GUST LOCK is always in the forward door frame, either above or below the SUPPORT ARM (see
following table).
Door M1L/R M2L/R M3L/R M4L/R M5L/R U1L/R U2L/R U3L/R

Above SUPPORT ARM X X X X
Below SUPPORT ARM X X X X
The position of the GUST LOCK is indicated on the illustrations:
- See GUST LOCK at Doors U1, U2 and U3
- See GUST LOCK at Door M1
- See GUST LOCK at Doors M2, M3, M4, M5
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 37/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
GUST LOCK AT DOORS U1, U2 AND U3

GUST LOCK at Doors U1, U2 and U3
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 38/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
GUST LOCK AT DOOR M1

GUST LOCK at Door M1
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 39/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
GUST LOCK AT DOORS M2, M3, M4, M5

GUST LOCK at Door M2, M3, M4, M5
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 40/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
GUST LOCK
The GUST LOCK secures the passenger door in its fully open position.
During the normal closing procedure, initiated with the CLOSE pb, the GUST LOCK is disengaged
automatically.
Only when electrical power is not available, the GUST LOCK must be disengaged manually by lifting
the GUST LOCK lever before the door can be moved to the closed position.
The GUST LOCK is always in the forward door frame, either above or below the SUPPORT ARM (see
following table).
Door M1L/R M2L/R M3L/R M4L/R M5L/R U1L/R U2L/R U3L/R

Above SUPPORT ARM X X X X
Below SUPPORT ARM X X X X
The position of the GUST LOCK is indicated on the illustrations:
- See GUST LOCK at Doors U1, U2 and U3
- See GUST LOCK at Door M1
- See GUST LOCK at Doors M2, M3, M4, M5
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 41/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
GUST LOCK AT DOORS U1, U2 AND U3

GUST LOCK at Doors U1, U2 and U3
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 42/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
GUST LOCK AT DOOR M1

GUST LOCK at Door M1
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 43/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
GUST LOCK AT DOORS M2, M3, M4, M5

GUST LOCK at Door M2, M3, M4, M5
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 44/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
LENS IN THE OBSERVATION WINDOW

The cabin crew can check the external area adjacent to the passenger door before they open it via the
OBSERVATION WINDOW in the passenger door.
To increase the visible area outside the aircraft, a Fresnel LENS is integrated into the lower half of the
window set.
LENS in the Passenger Door
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 45/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Description
A380
LENS IN THE OBSERVATION WINDOW

The cabin crew can check the external area adjacent to the passenger door before they open it via the
OBSERVATION WINDOW in the passenger door.
To increase the visible area outside the aircraft, a Fresnel LENS is integrated into the lower half of the
window set.
LENS in the Passenger Door
UAE A380 09-10-20 P 46/46

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Operation
A380
RISK OF INJURY AT THE PASSENGER DOOR FRAME

Temporary DU: 00021389.0001001
Applicable to: ALL
At the passenger doors there are protruding door frame fittings.
WARNING Make sure that passengers, especially children, do not touch or get in contact with the
protruding door frame fitting during boarding and disembarkment. There is a risk of
injury at the sharp edge of the protruding door frame fitting.
Protruding Door Frame Fitting
UAE A380 09-10-30 P 1/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Operation
A380
NORMAL OPERATION OF THE PASSENGER DOORS FROM THE INSIDE

Applicable to: ALL
NORMAL OPENING FROM THE INSIDE

1. Grasp and hold one of the FRAME ASSIST HANDLES.
2. Ensure that the slide is disarmed.
Note: The slide is disarmed, when:
- The SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the Disarmed position, and
- The SLIDE ARMED indicator, in the OBSERVATION WINDOW, is OFF.
3. Ensure that the SAFETY PIN is installed correctly.
4. Look through the OBSERVATION WINDOW and make sure that outside conditions are safe.
5. Check that the red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning, in the OBSERVATION WINDOW is OFF.
If the red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning flashes:
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR !
Report immediately to the flight crew.
WARNING The red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning is the first indication of residual cabin
pressure.
If the cabin crew fails to notice the visual warning and starts to lift the DOOR
CONTROL HANDLE, an aural warning will come ON. In this case, fully lower the
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE to the closed position.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR, there is a risk that the passenger door
will open violently due to the cabin not being fully depressurized.
6. Fully lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE (the door lifts and moves outwards of the door frame).
7. On the DSIP:
- The LOCKED indicator goes OFF.
- The UNLOCKED indicator comes ON.
- The OPEN pb becomes active.
8. The DOOR LOCKING INDICATIONS change from the LOCKED to the UNLOCKED indication.
9. On the DSIP, press and hold the OPEN pb:
- The door opens in forward direction.
- Releasing the OPEN pb interrupts the opening movement.
- When the fully open position is reached, the UNLOCKED indicator goes OFF and the FULLY
OPEN indicator comes ON.
10.Check on the DSIP that the FULLY OPEN indicator is displayed. In this case, the GUST LOCK is
engaged.
UAE A380 09-10-30 P 2/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Operation
A380
NORMAL CLOSING FROM THE INSIDE

2. On the DSIP, press and hold the CLOSE pb:
- The GUST LOCK disengages automatically and the door movement starts in aft direction.
- Releasing the CLOSE pb interrupts the closing.
- The door stops when facing the door frame.
3. On the DSIP:
- the FULLY OPEN indicator goes OFF, and
- the UNLOCKED indicator comes ON.
4. The DOOR LOCKING INDICATIONS still indicate that the door is UNLOCKED.
5. When the door is facing the door frame, grasp one of the DOOR ASSIST HANDLES and pull the
door inwards into the door frame.
6. Fully lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.
7. On the DSIP:
- The UNLOCKED indicator goes OFF
- The LOCKED indicator comes ON.
8. The DOOR LOCKING INDICATIONS change from the UNLOCKED to the LOCKED indication.
Note: In this position the door is mechanically closed, latched and locked.
UAE A380 09-10-30 P 3/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Operation
A380
NORMAL OPERATION OF THE PASSENGER DOORS FROM THE OUTSIDE

Ident: 09-10-30 00004958.0001001 / 02-Nov-10
Impacted by: 00025369.0001001
NORMAL OPENING FROM THE OUTSIDE

L12
Note: A placard sticking on the door next to the outside DOOR CONTROL HANDLE gives opening
instructions in a short form.
Door status before opening: The passenger door is closed, latched and locked.
1. Look through the OBSERVATION WINDOW and make sure that the red CABIN PRESSURE visual
warning in the OBSERVATION WINDOW is OFF.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR!
pressure.
2. Push against the flap and grasp the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.
3. Fully lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE to the horizontal green line.
Note: The slide is automatically disarmed, when the door is opened from the outside.
4. The OPEN pb and the CLOSE pb become active.
5. Press and hold the OPEN pb:
- The door opens at first in the outboard direction, then the door moves in the forward direction.
- Releasing the OPEN pb interrupts the opening.
- The door locks in its fully open position (GUST LOCK engaged).
6. Lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE into its recess.
UAE A380 09-10-30 P 4/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Operation
A380

L12
Note: A placard sticking on the door next to the outside DOOR CONTROL HANDLE gives opening
instructions in a short form.
Door status before opening: The passenger door is closed, latched and locked.
1. Look through the OBSERVATION WINDOW and make sure that the red CABIN PRESSURE visual
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR!
pressure.
4. The OPEN pb and the CLOSE pb become active.
5. Press and hold the OPEN pb:
- The door opens at first in the outboard direction, then the door moves in the forward direction.
- Releasing the OPEN pb interrupts the opening.
- The door locks in its fully open position (GUST LOCK engaged).
UAE A380 09-10-30 P 5/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Operation
A380
Temporary DU: 00025369.0001001

The aircraft doors can only be opened manually but not electrically from the outside.
occurred.
possible to open the door manually from the outside. There will be no change in operation from the
inside.
Ident: 09-10-30 00004960.0001001 / 02-Nov-10
Impacted by: 00025370.0001001
NORMAL CLOSING FROM THE OUTSIDE

3. Press and hold the CLOSE pb on the outside of the door.
- The door always closes in the aft direction.
- The door stops automatically when facing the door frame.
4. Push the door into the door frame.
5. Lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE fully into its recess.
Note: The door is mechanically closed, latched and locked, when the DOOR CONTROL
HANDLE is flush with the door surface.
UAE A380 09-10-30 P 6/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Operation
A380

3. Press and hold the CLOSE pb on the outside of the door.
- The door always closes in the aft direction.
- The door stops automatically when facing the door frame.
4. Push the door into the door frame.
5. Lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE fully into its recess.
Note: The door is mechanically closed, latched and locked, when the DOOR CONTROL
HANDLE is flush with the door surface.
Temporary DU: 00025370.0001001
The aircraft doors can only be closed manually but not electrically from the outside.
occurred.
possible to close the door manually from the outside. There will be no change in operation from the
inside.
UAE A380 09-10-30 P 7/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Operation
A380
MANUAL OPERATION OF THE PASSENGER DOORS FROM THE INSIDE

Applicable to: ALL
MANUAL OPENING FROM THE INSIDE

2. Ensure that the SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the Disarmed position.
3. Ensure that the SAFETY PIN is installed correctly.
4. Look through the OBSERVATION WINDOW and make sure that the outside conditions are clear.
5. Check that the red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning in the OBSERVATION WINDOW is OFF.
Report immediately to the flight crew.
pressure.
6. Fully lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.

7. Grasp the DOOR ASSIST HANDLE and push the door outwards of the door frame.
8. Manually move the door into the forward direction until the fully open position is reached.
9. Make sure that the GUST LOCK has engaged before starting the disembarkation.
MANUAL CLOSING FROM THE INSIDE
2. Manually disengage the GUST LOCK .
3. Grasp the DOOR ASSIST HANDLE.
4. Move the door manually into the aft direction and stop the movement when facing the door frame.
5. Grasp one of the DOOR ASSIST HANDLES and pull the door inwards into the door frame.
6. Fully lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.
7. The DOOR LOCKING INDICATIONS change from the UNLOCKED to the LOCKED indication.
Note: In this position the door is mechanically closed, latched and locked.
UAE A380 09-10-30 P 8/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Operation
A380
MANUAL OPERATION OF THE PASSENGER DOORS FROM THE OUTSIDE

Applicable to: ALL
MANUAL OPENING FROM THE OUTSIDE

1. Look through the Observation Window and make sure that the red CABIN PRESSURE visual
If the red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning is flashing:
pressure.
4. Pull the door outboard, then move it in forward direction until the fully open position is reached and
the GUST LOCK is engaged.
Note: Do not use the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE to move the door.
MANUAL CLOSING FROM THE OUTSIDE
1. Manually disengage the GUST LOCK .
Note: Do not use the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE to move the door.
4. Move the door manually in aft direction and stop the door movement when facing the door frame.
5. Push the door towards the door frame.
6. Fully lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE into its recess.
Note: The door is mechanically closed, latched and locked when the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is
flush with the door surface.
UAE A380 09-10-30 P 9/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Operation
A380
EMERGENCY OPERATION OF THE PASSENGER DOORS

Applicable to: ALL
EMERGENCY DOOR OPENING

2. Ensure that the SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the Armed position.
3. Look through the OBSERVATION WINDOW and make sure that the outside conditions are safe.
Note: Use both the OBSERVATION WINDOW and the LENS.
4. If the outside conditions are safe, rapidly and fully lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE:
WARNING Do not attempt to hold the door closed when the automatic door opening has been
initiated.
1. The door lifts and moves outward of the door frame.

2. The door immediately and automatically starts to swivel open in the forward direction.
Note: As the doors are equipped with an electrical damping function, in the case of door
power assist failure, it is not necessary to use additional force to push the door open.
3. The MIP pb comes ON red (the door open angle is more than approx. 70°) and the slide
deployment sequence starts.
WARNING When the door is in the “ARMED” mode, the red CABIN PRESSURE visual and
aural warnings will not trigger to indicate the cabin differential pressure!
Check for the following indications in case of cabin differential pressure:
- Resistance in the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE when lifted to the open position,
using normal force, and/or
- A hissing noise around the immediate area.
If there seems to be differential pressure and circumstances permit, lower the DOOR
CONTROL HANDLE to the closed position. Immediately notify the flight crew .
5. Check that the slide is deployed and inflated.

Depending on the location of the door, check different indications:
- For M3L and M3R: Check that the BARBER POLE is fully inflated.
- For M1L and M1R: In the case of ditching, the slide extension will not deploy automatically.
- For M1L and M1R: In case of tail tip condition (nose up attitude, above 2.5 ± 0.5 degrees), the
slide extension deploys automatically: The SLIDE NOT READY indicator on the DSIP is OFF .
If the slide extension fails, the SLIDE NOT READY indicator flashes and the related slide should
be not used (too short).
6. Adopt a protective position.
UAE A380 09-10-30 P 10/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Operation
A380
WARNING For your safety, remain in the assist space and continue to firmly grasp the FRAME
ASSIST HANDLE.
If the slide is not inflated correctly:

Press the red MIP, in the upper part of the door frame.
Note: The MIP pb comes ON in red to indicate 'ready for use'.
There is a PUSH TO INFLATE placard next to the MIP pb, written in reflective letters and
contrasting colors.
7. Check that the related slide is correctly deployed and inflated.
UAE A380 09-10-30 P 11/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
Operation
A380
UAE A380 09-10-30 P 12/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
A380

Applicable to: ALL
For operating or monitoring the passenger doors, the cabin crew has several controls and indicators.
The indicators at the passenger doors are most important when the door is operated, i.e. opened or
closed. See Controls and Indicators at the Passenger Door.
For more information about the operation of the passenger doors:
- Refer to 09-10-30 Normal Opening from the Inside
- Refer to 09-10-30 Normal Closing from the Inside.
In addition to the indicators at the passenger doors, the cabin crew can monitor the status of all of the
passenger doors via the DOORS / SLIDES page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).
For more information about the DOORS / SLIDES page on the FAP :Refer to 06-40-10 General
Information about the DOORS / SLIDES Page.
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS AT THE PASSENGER DOOR
Depending on the status of the passenger door the status of the indicators change too.
Control/Indica Door Opening Door Open Door Closing Door Closed Door Closed
tor Process Process and Armed
SLIDE Disarmed Disarmed Disarmed Disarmed Armed
ARMING
LEVER
SLIDE ARMED Off Off Off Off On
Indicator
SAFETY PIN Installed Installed Installed Installed Not installed
DOOR Lift Fully lifted Lower Fully lowered Fully lowered
CONTROL
HANDLE
DSIP LOCKED Off Off Off On On
Indicator
DSIP On Off On Off Off
UNLOCKED
Indicator
DSIP OPEN pb Active Off Active Off Off
DSIP Active Active Active Off Off
CLOSE pb
DSIP FULLY Off On Off Off Off
OPEN Indicator
UAE A380 09-10-40 P 1/4

CCOM 08-Apr-15
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
A380
Control/Indica Door Opening Door Open Door Closing Door Closed Door Closed
tor Process Process and Armed
DOOR Unlocked Unlocked Unlocked Locked Locked
LOCKING
INDICATIONS
SAFETY STRAP OF THE CABIN DOOR

Inside of each cabin door frame there is a safety strap. The cabin crew must install the safety strap
whenever a cabin door is open with no stairs or no gateway in position. The safety strap is striped in
black and yellow to indicate an open cabin door.
WARNING Do not leave an open cabin door unattended. A safety strap will NOT prevent
passengers or crewmembers from falling out!
UAE A380 09-10-40 P 2/4

CCOM 08-Apr-15
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
A380
Installation of the Safety Strap
Note: The safety strap rolls up automatically during removal procedure. The cabin crew must ensure
that the safety strap is fully retracted into its recess before closing the door.
UAE A380 09-10-40 P 3/4

CCOM 08-Apr-15
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
A380
UAE A380 09-10-40 P 4/4

CCOM 08-Apr-15
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
A380
FULLY OPEN INDICATOR IS NOT ON ALTHOUGH THE DOOR IS IN THE FULLY OPEN POSITION H56
Applicable to: ALL
The FULLY OPEN indicator is not ON although the door is in the fully open position.
YES NO
1. Does the passenger door seem to be fully open and is the FULLY OPEN
indicator on the DSIP OFF? Go to 2 END
2. Are both, the OPEN pb and the CLOSE pb on the DSIP active
(illuminated white)? Go to 3 END
3. The door is fully open but the indication is not correct:
CAUTION Danger of damaging the passenger door.

Do not push the OPEN pb!
In order to re-initialize the indicators of the door position, follow the steps
described below:
1. Push the CLOSE pb on the DSIP to fully close the door again.
2. When the door is facing the door frame, grasp one of the DOOR
ASSIST HANDLES and pull the door inwards, into the door frame.
3. Fully lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE .
The DOOR LOCKING INDICATIONS change from UNLOCKED to
LOCKED.
The indications on the DSIP change as follows:
- The UNLOCKED indicator goes OFF
- The LOCKED indicator comes ON.
4. To open the door: Fully lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE (the door
lifts and moves outwards of the door frame).
The DOOR LOCKING INDICATIONS change from LOCKED to
UNLOCKED.
The indications on the DSIP change as follows:
- The LOCKED indicator goes OFF
- The UNLOCKED indicator comes ON
- The OPEN pb becomes active.
5. Push and hold the OPEN pb on the DSIP:
- The door opens in forward direction.
- When the final door opening position is reached, the UNLOCKED
indicator goes OFF and the FULLY OPEN indicator comes ON. Go to 4 Go to 4
UAE A380 09-10-50 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
A380
YES NO
4. Is the FULLY OPEN indicator ON and the OPEN pb deactivated? END Go to 5
5. Repeat closing and then reopening the door. : Step 3 - Close and Open
Procedure.
If the indications do not change, close the door again (closed, latched
and locked position), and use another door.
Note: If the door is open and the GUST LOCK engaged, the door may
be used for boarding and disembarking.
However, inform the other crewmembers about the door status,
so nobody pushes the OPEN pb on the DSIP!
CAUTION Danger of injury!

Before using the door for boarding or disembarking,
ensure that the gust lock is engaged! END END
UAE A380 09-10-50 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
A380
ECAM ALERT DOOR XXXX POS FAULT TRIGGERED IN THE COCKPIT H57
Applicable to: ALL
The flight crew advises the cabin crew that an ECAM alert DOOR xxxx POS DET FAULT has been
triggered.
YES NO
1. Can the door be re-opened? Go to 2 Go to 4
2. The cabin crew must:
Check that the related slide is disarmed.
Note: If the slide is armed, the cabin crew must disarm the slide. Go to 3 Go to 3
3. 1- Fully lift the door control handle (on the DSIP, the UNLOCKED
indicator comes ON red) and wait for at least 30 seconds then,
2- Fully lower the door control handle (on the DSIP, the LOCKED
indicator comes ON green) and wait for at least 30 seconds .
When the procedure is completed, inform the flight crew
Is the ECAM alert still present? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The cabin crew should:
wait for further instructions from the flight crew . END END
5. The defect is cleared,
the cabin crew wait for further instructions from the flight crew for the
continuation of the flight. END END
UAE A380 09-10-50 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
PASSENGER DOORS
A380
UAE A380 09-10-50 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDES AND SLIDERAFTS
Description
A380
DESCRIPTION OF SLIDES AND SLIDERAFTS

Applicable to: ALL
The emergency evacuation system is designed to enable passengers, in the case of an emergency, to
evacuate the aircraft quickly.
The A380 is equipped with a total of 16 evacuation devices.
In the case of ditching, 14 of the 16 evacuation devices can be used as a raft:
- 8 sliderafts on the Main Deck at Doors M1, M2, M4 and M5
- 6 sliderafts on the Upper Deck at Doors U1, U2 and U3
There are three types of evacuation devices installed on the A380:
- Door-mounted sliderafts at doors M1, M2, M4 and M5
- Fuselage-mounted sliderafts at doors U1, U2 and U3
- Belly fairing mounted overwing ramp/slide at doors M3.
Note: The ramp/slides at doors M3L and M3R are not equipped with raft capability.
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 1/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380
Slide Arrangement
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 2/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380
SLIDE AND SLIDERAFT SYSTEMS

FUSELAGE MOUNTED SLIDERAFT SYSTEM

All the UD doors are equipped with fuselage mounted sliderafts which are located in separate
compartments below each door.
These slideraft compartments are outside the pressurized hull and are only accessible from the outside
of the aircraft.
Fuselage Mounted Slideraft System
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 3/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380
BELLY FAIRING INTEGRATED SLIDE SYSTEM

The M3 doors are overwing emergency exits. For each of these exits, the evacuation means consist of
an inflatable ramp and a slide portion that are integrated into the belly fairing and provide a rigid
connection to the aircraft.
Belly Fairing Integrated Slide System
DOOR-MOUNTED SLIDERAFT SYSTEM

The A380 main deck doors M1, M2, M4 and M5 are equipped with a door mounted slide system. The
slideraft pack is housed in a decorative cover on each of the M1, M2, M4 and M5 doors.
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 4/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380
Door Mounted Slideraft System
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 5/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380
SLIDE AND SLIDERAFT SYSTEMS

FUSELAGE MOUNTED SLIDERAFT SYSTEM

All the UD doors are equipped with fuselage mounted sliderafts which are located in separate
compartments below each door.
These slideraft compartments are outside the pressurized hull and are only accessible from the outside
of the aircraft.
Fuselage Mounted Slideraft System
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 6/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380
BELLY FAIRING INTEGRATED SLIDE SYSTEM

The M3 doors are overwing emergency exits. For each of these exits, the evacuation means consist of
an inflatable ramp and a slide portion that are integrated into the belly fairing and provide a rigid
connection to the aircraft.
Belly Fairing Integrated Slide System

The A380 main deck doors M1, M2, M4 and M5 are equipped with a door mounted slide system. The
slideraft pack is housed in a decorative cover on each of the M1, M2, M4 and M5 doors.
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 7/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380
Door Mounted Slideraft System
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 8/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380
SLIDE AND SLIDERAFT COMPONENTS

Applicable to: ALL
SLIDE AND SLIDERAFT COMPONENTS

- The Girt
Each slide and slideraft is attached to the aircraft by means of the girt, this is the fabric component of a
slide or slideraft, which attaches the slide or slideraft to the aircraft or to the girt bar. The girt allows the
sliderafts to be detached from the aircraft during an evacuation on water.
- Head End
The head end of the slideraft is the part of the slideraft that is attached to the aircraft nearest the
door.
- Toe End
The toe end of the slide or slideraft is the part of the slide or slideraft that makes contact with the
ground.
- Head End (M3 overwing ramp/slide)
The head end of the overwing ramp/slide is the area nearest the aircraft door where the evacuees first
enter the ramp/slide.
- Slide, Slideraft Lighting System
An automatic lighting system is installed on each slide and slideraft to light the sliding surface during
the night or in poor lighting conditions. Additional lighting is installed on the underside of M4 and M5 to
provide light to the M3 escape path.
- Deceleration Strips
Deceleration strips are located at the end of each slide. These strips decrease the speed of
evacuees, before reaching the ground to reduce the risk of injury.
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 9/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380
M1 Slide Overview
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 10/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380
M1 Head End
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 11/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380

Applicable to: ALL

The A380 main deck doors M1, M2, M4 and M5 are equipped with a door-mounted slideraft system.
The sliderafts located at doors M1, M2, M4 and M5 have two functions.
They can be used as:
- An escape slide for use during on ground evacuation
- A raft in the event of a ditching.
In the event inoperative main deck door at M1, M2, M4 or M5 the slideraft pack can be detached,
transported to the opposite door and deployed.
UPPER DECK SLIDERAFT DESCRIPTION

Applicable to: ALL
The sliderafts provided for the UD are located at U1, U2 and U3.
In the case of ditching each UD slideraft has a rated capacity of 65 persons. The overload capacity is
85 persons.
The UD sliderafts are not portable.
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 12/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380
Upper Deck Slideraft
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 13/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Description
A380
UAE A380 09-20-10 P 14/14

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
Operation
A380
SLIDE AND SLIDERAFT OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
SLIDE AND SLIDERAFT OPERATION

All the A380 slides are sliderafts except M3, which is a slide only.
There are differences between some of the slides:
- The UD slides are longer and have a small balcony
- M3 slides are ramp/slides
- M1 is equipped both with a slideraft and a slide extension.
All slides are dual-lane slides with the capacity to evacuate 2 passengers at a time, one on each lane.
UAE A380 09-20-20 P 1/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
DOORS AND SLIDES
Operation
A380
Door Mounted Slide
SLIDE DEPLOYMENT
The deployment and inflation of the slide are automatically initiated when the door is opened in the
ARMED mode.
During the deployment sequence, the slide is kept folded until the pressure is sufficient to separate the
restraint device (in order to make sure that the deployment occurs in a controlled sequence). The
restraint devices have a fuse pin which breaks when the pressure is sufficient.
As the door opens, the slide drops off the packboard. It drops down below the doorsill.
The speed lacing releases and the slide inflates.
The A380 slide inflation system consists of aspirators, hoses and a tribrid inflator: L2
- A gas generator (with propellant).

UAE A380 09-20-20 P 2/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
DOORS AND SLIDES
Operation
A380
- A coolant reservoir.
- And a control valve.
The gas generator contains the propellant charge which initially burns to create the hot gases that are
injected into the coolant reservoir.
The cooled gas is transferred to the control valve and sent to the inflation nose and finally to the
aspirators and the evacuation device.
MANUAL INFLATION
Applicable to: ALL
The Manual Inflation pb (MIP) is a spring loaded pushbutton, which is located in the upper right side of
the door frame.
If the slide, slideraft does not inflate automatically, press the MIP pb when it becomes red..
SLIDE EXTENSION
Applicable to: ALL
M1 SLIDE EXTENSION
An extendable slide is necessary at doors M1 to cover the various range of sill heights that may be
produced by different aircraft attitudes in a crash situation.
The extendable portion of the M1 slide is connected at the toe end. When the M1 slide extension is not
in use it is restrained by upper and lower flaps, which are speed laced together.
The slide extension is automatically activated when a predefined aircraft attitude exists. In the event of
a tail tip (Nose up attitude, above 2.5 ± 0.5 degrees), the slide extension will be deployed automatically
in order to ensure that the slide reaches the ground.
In the case of a change in the aircraft attitude or the slide extension does not deploy, the cabin
crewmember will be warned by:
- The visual SLIDE NOT READY on the DSIP
- A buzzer that will sound for 120 seconds.
In the case of ditching the M1 slide extension will not be deployed.
Note: The slide extensions at doors M1 do not have raft capability.
UAE A380 09-20-20 P 3/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
DOORS AND SLIDES
Operation
A380
M1 Slide Extension
UAE A380 09-20-20 P 4/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
DOORS AND SLIDES
Operation
A380
M3 OVERWING RAMP/SLIDES
Applicable to: ALL
M3 OVERWING RAMP/SLIDES
The A380 overwing exits at M3 are equipped with a ramp/slide. One at M3 left and one at M3 right.
The ramp/slide deploys automatically when the door is opened in the ARMED mode.
The ramp/slide inflates on the wing facing aft.
A barber pole is located on top of the ramp to indicate that the ramp/ slide is ready to use.
Note: During an on ground evacuation the cabin crew must instruct passengers to run on the ramp ,
follow the directional arrows and to jump into the slides 2 by 2 using both lanes.
Note: In the case of ditching, when the ditching pb-sw is pressed to the "ON" position by the flight
crew ,the M3L/M3R slides deployment is inhibited.
UAE A380 09-20-20 P 5/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
DOORS AND SLIDES
Operation
A380
M3 Ramp/Slide
UAE A380 09-20-20 P 6/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
DOORS AND SLIDES
Operation
A380
UPPER DECK SLIDE DEFLATED USE

Applicable to: ALL
The upper deck slide may be used as a safe means of evacuating the aircraft with both of the inflation
tubes deflated.
The words FOR DEFLATED SLIDE USE are written on the door sill tubing.
Note: The instructions on the door sill tubing are only visible when the slide is deflated.
The cabin crewmember must lie flat on the floor to read the instructions.
These instructions will enable cabin crew and passengers to use the upper deck slide when it is fully
deflated.
UPPER DECK SLIDE DEFLATED USE
Note: The cabin crew must ask for assistance of people on the ground to:
- Hold on tightly to the toe end of the slide, while pulling the slide outwards.
1. Lie flat on the floor. Reach out of the door. Place your hand under the upper part of the slide
compartment where the pouch is located.
Note: The pouch is located approximately in the middle of the door sill.
2. Open the pouch and remove the strap.
3. Once the strap is removed from the pouch, pass the strap through one of the frame assist handles
located on either side of the door. Pull on the strap to ensure that it is secured.
4. Firmly grasp the strap with both hands, this will provide support when stepping on to the deflated
slide.
5. Descend from the aircraft door backward, then place your feet into the deflated slide. Stand and
turn to face the slide surface.
6. Holding onto the strap with both hands, descend the slide, walk the first few steps, then slide until
you reach the ground.
UAE A380 09-20-20 P 7/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
DOORS AND SLIDES
Operation
A380
Upper Deck Slide Deflated Use
UAE A380 09-20-20 P 8/8

CCOM 02-Jul-14
DOORS AND SLIDES
Slideraft Use for Ditching
A380
MAIN DECK SLIDERAFT PASSENGER BOARDING

Applicable to: ALL
MAIN DECK PASSENGER BOARDING

The main deck sliderafts can be boarded to their rated and overload capacity directly from the doors of
the main deck.
Cabin crew be aware that the angles of the slides will vary according to the door location. Therefore,
cabin crew may need to adapt boarding instructions and commands to passengers according to the
angle of the sliderafts
M1 and M2 Sliderafts— Passenger Boarding
In the case of ditching the M1 and M2 doorsills are more than 2 m above the water level.
The cabin crewmembers directing passengers into the M1 and M2 sliderafts will need to give specific
instructions to passengers.
- To board passengers into the M1 and M2 sliderafts, passengers will need to slide slowly down the
slideraft
Note: Cabin crew should adapt their commands to passenger's boarding the sliderafts, for
example the command “Sit and Slide” can be used at doors M1 and M2.
- When the M1 and M2 sliderafts are boarded to their rated capacity, disconnect the slideraft.
- When the slideraft is released from the aircraft, instruct passengers to move up the slideraft.
The passengers should be evenly distributed on the slideraft.
M4 and M5 Sliderafts — Passenger Boarding
In the case of ditching the M4 and M5 sliderafts are close to the water line and will be level or at a
slightly upward angle from the cabin door.
The cabin crewmembers directing passengers into the M4 and M5 sliderafts will need to give specific
- To board passengers into the M4 and M5 sliderafts, passengers will need run out or walk onto the
sliderafts.
Note: Cabin crew should adapt their commands to passenger's boarding the sliderafts, for
example the commands “Run, Run” can be used at doors M4 and M5.
- When the M4 and M5 sliderafts are boarded to their rated capacity, disconnect the slideraft.
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 1/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
MAIN DECK SLIDERAFT DISCONNECTION

Applicable to: ALL
MAIN DECK SLIDERAFT DISCONNECTION

When the main deck sliderafts are boarded to their capacity the slideraft must be disconnected from
the aircraft. To disconnect the slideraft;
1. Lift the flap
2. Pull the textile tab marked PULL TO RELEASE
Under the flap, there is a textile tab with PULL TO RELEASE written in red. When the tab is pulled,
the speed lacing is released and the slideraft is detached from the girt.
The slideraft is still attached to the aircraft by the mooring line.
3. Cut the mooring line, to separate the slideraft from the aircraft.
A safety knife is located in a pouch in the upper inflation chamber on the right hand side (when
inside the slideraft).
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 2/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
Main Deck Slideraft Disconnection
The electrical connector is located within a small velcro tunnel on the girt. The electrical connector will
automatically break-away as the slideraft separates from the aircraft.
Note: The electrical connector is identical at all the main deck doors.
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 3/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
Electrical Connector
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 4/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
UPPER DECK SLIDERAFT DISCONNECTION

Applicable to: ALL
The Upper Deck slideraft release handle is located on the upper tube of the slideraft. To disconnect the
slide raft from the aircraft.
- Open the flap
- Remove the release handle from the pouch
- Pull the release handle
The action of pulling the handle will release the slideraft from the girts and the inflation hose system.
Note: The pulling force needed to pull the slideraft release handle to detach the upper deck
slideraft from the aircraft is 40 kg. Therefore, the cabin crewmember may need to request
assistance from the raft occupants .
The slide light harness will disconnect when the slideraft has dropped.
The slideraft is still connected to the aircraft by the mooring line.
To separate the slideraft from the aircraft:
- Cut the mooring line using the knife which is in the pouch located at the doorsill end of the slideraft.
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 5/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
Upper Deck Slideraft Disconnection
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 6/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
UPPER DECK SLIDERAFT PASSENGER BOARDING

Applicable to: ALL
UPPER DECK SLIDERAFT PASSENGER BOARDING

The upper deck sliderafts can be boarded to their rated capacity directly from the upper deck doors.
The cabin crewmembers directing passengers into the upper deck slide rafts will need to give specific
- To board passengers into the upper deck sliderafts, passengers will need to slide slowly down the
slideraft .
- Once the upper deck slideraft has reached it's rated capacity, the slideraft disconnect handle must
be pulled.
- When the slideraft is released from the aircraft, instruct passengers to move up the slideraft.
The passengers should be evenly distributed on the slideraft.
UPPER DECK SLIDERAFT SURVIVAL KIT LOCATION

The survival kit is located in the Upper Deck door lining. The survival is protected by a quick release
cover, which can removed easily in the case of a ditching.
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 7/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
Upper Deck Survival Kit Location
SURVIVAL KIT ATTACHMENT

To attach the survival kit to the slide raft;
- Attach the survival kit lanyard snap hook to the marked eye on the slideraft.
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 8/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
Survival Kit Attachment
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 9/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
UPPER DECK SLIDERAFT SURVIVAL KIT LOCATION

The survival kit is located in the Upper Deck door lining. The survival is protected by a quick release
cover, which can removed easily in the case of a ditching.
Upper Deck Survival Kit Location
SURVIVAL KIT ATTACHMENT

To attach the survival kit to the slide raft;
- Attach the survival kit lanyard snap hook to the marked eye on the slideraft.
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 10/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
Survival Kit Attachment
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 11/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
RAFT CAPACITY
Applicable to: ALL
RAFT CAPACITY
Mode MD (8 rafts) UD (6 rafts) Total amount
Normal Mode 508 passengers 390 passengers 898 passengers
Overload Mode 523 passengers with 336 passengers with 3 859 passengers
largest raft lost rafts lost
Note: Capacity of rafts has been rated with an average weight of 77 kg per person.
RAFT CAPACITY PER SLIDE RAFT
Door M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 U1 U2 U3
Capacity
Rated 60 70 N/A 62 62 65 65 65
Overload 72 87 N/A 72 74 85 85 85
TSO
rating
Overload 112 112 112
TC rating
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 12/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
CANOPY INSTALLATION
Applicable to: ALL
The canopy is stowed in a pouch that is directly above the slideraft. A canopy is a wind resistant plastic
sheet, used to protect a slideraft in the case of poor weather conditions such as wind and rain. Its bright
orange color makes it very visible, and easy to find.
Canopy
HOW TO INSTALL THE CANOPY

Remove the canopy from its pouch.
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 13/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
1. Match head end on canopy to slide.

2. Align the black numbers that are on the top of the canopy facing to corresponding the red numbers
that are on the slideraft.
3. Slide the black button that is next to each black number on the canopy, through loops on the
slideraft in order to attach the top of the canopy to the slideraft.
4. Inflate the center support tubes by blowing into the mouthpiece.
5. Open the slideraft panels, in order to provide ventilation for passengers and enable the air to
circulate.
Note: The main deck canopy has three center support tubes. The upper deck canopy has four
center support tubes.
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 14/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
SURVIVAL KIT CONTENTS

Applicable to: ALL
The survival kit contains the necessary survival equipment to survive for an extended period of time.
The survival kit contains the following items:
1. One survival manual
2. One Signalling mirror (heliograph).
The signalling mirror is used to attract attention, and may be seen for many kilometers even on a
hazy day.
To use the signalling mirror:
- Slowly bring the mirror to eye level and look through the sighting hole. A bright spot will be seen
(this is the aim indicator).
- Hold the mirror close to the eye and turn until the aim indicator is on target.
- Reflect the sunlight from the mirror on to the target and continuously sweep the horizon.
3. One dye marker sea
The dye marker sea provides a luminescent color around the slideraft, so that the slideraft may be
identified from a distance.
To use the sea dye marker:
- Unseal the packet of sea dye marker.
- Deploy the sea dye marker into the water, from the upwind end of the slideraft (this will be the
doorsill end of the slideraft).
4. A whistle that will function after immersion in water.
The whistle is part of the signalling equipment to attract attention.
5. Two lithium battery flashlights
6. One water bailer
The water bailer is used to remove excess water from the slideraft.
7. One sponge, dehydrated
The sponge is used to remove water from the slideraft. The slideraft must be kept as dry as
possible.
8. One packed water purification tablets (contents 50 tablets)
These are used to purify salt water into drinking water.
9. Three water storage bags
10.Two flares, hand held signal, aerial
11.First Aid Kit
The First Aid Kit contains medial equipment for minor injuries.
- 14 Antibiotic Ointment
- 2 Canteen of water (contents 1 pint)
- 12 Bandage sterile compress (packet 2 x 2)
- 2 Bandage sterile compress (packet 4 x 4)
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 15/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
- 3 Triangular slings
- 32 adhesive strip bandages
12.Two clamp repair kit
The patch kit with instructions for use is provided, to repair tears in the inflation chambers.
13.One raft management guide
UAE A380 09-20-30 P 16/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DOORS AND SLIDES
AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION IN CRASH SITUATIONS
General
A380
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The following diagrams illustrate the threshold heights that corresponding to the required landing gear
positions for recovery situations.
UAE A380 09-30-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
DOORS AND SLIDES
General
A380
UAE A380 09-30-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
DOORS AND SLIDES
Aircraft Configuration
A380
AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATIONS
Applicable to: ALL
Aircraft Configurations
UAE A380 09-30-20 P 1/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
THRESHOLD HEIGHT ALL L/G DOWN

Upper Deck Main Deck
L R L R
7.86 m 7.86 m 5.11 m 5.11 m
Door 1
25.79 ft 25.79 ft 16.76 ft 16.76 ft
7.86 m 7.86 m 5.11 m 5.11 m
Door 2
25.79 ft 25.79 ft 16.76 ft 16.76 ft
7.86 m 7.86 m 5.11 m 5.11 m
Door 3
25.79 ft 25.79 ft 16.76 ft 16.76 ft
5.11 m 5.11 m
Door 4 Not Applicable Not Applicable
16.76 ft 16.76 ft
5.11 m 5.11 m
16.76 ft 16.76 ft
INCLINE OF
0° 0° 0° 0°
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
ROTATION AROUND
0° 0° 0° 0°
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
THRESHOLD HEIGHT MAIN L/G UP and NOSE L/G DOWN

L R L R
6.88 m 6.88 m 4.95 m 4.95 m
Door 1
22.57 ft 22.57 ft 16.24 ft 16.24 ft
5.73 m 5.73 m 4.39 m 4.39 m
Door 2
18.80 ft 18.80 ft 14.40 ft 14.40 ft
5.20 m 5.20 m 3.44 m 3.44 m
Door 3
17.06 ft 17.06 ft 11.29 ft 11.29 ft
2.72 m 2.72 m
8.92 ft 8.92 ft
2.19 m 2.19 m
7.18 ft 7.18 ft
INCLINE OF
3.4 ° 3.4 ° 3.4 ° 3.4 °
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
ROTATION AROUND
0° 0° 0° 0°
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
UAE A380 09-30-20 P 2/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
THRESHOLD HEIGHT MAIN L/G DOWN and NOSE L/G UP

L R L R
6.63 m 6.63 m 2.49 m 2.49 m
Door 1
21.75 ft 21.75 ft 8.17 ft 8.17 ft
8.41 m 8.41 m 3.47 m 3.47 m
Door 2
27.59 ft 27.59 ft 11.38 ft 11.38 ft
9.24 m 9.24 m 4.97 m 4.97 m
Door 3
30.31 ft 30.31 ft 16.30 ft 16.30 ft
6.08 m 6.08 m
19.95 ft 19.95 ft
6.90 m 6.90 m
22.64 ft 22.64 ft
INCLINE OF
5.3 ° 5.3 ° 5.3 ° 5.3 °
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
ROTATION AROUND
0° 0° 0° 0°
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
THRESHOLD HEIGHT ALL L/G UP

L R L R
6.83 m 6.83 m 4.74 m 4.74 m
Door 1
22.41 ft 22.41 ft 15.55 ft 15.55 ft
5.88 m 5.88 m 4.29 m 4.29 m
Door 2
19.29 ft 19.29 ft 14.07 ft 14.07 ft
5.45 m 5.45 m 3.50 m 3.50 m
Door 3
17.88 ft 17.88 ft 11.48 ft 11.48 ft
2.91 m 2.91 m
9.55 ft 9.55 ft
2.48 m 2.48 m
8.14 ft 8.14 ft
INCLINE OF
0° 0° 0° 0°
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
ROTATION AROUND
0° 0° 0° 0°
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
UAE A380 09-30-20 P 3/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
DOORS AND SLIDES
A380
THRESHOLD HEIGHT ONE WING L/G UP and Other L/G DOWN

L R L R
8.12 m 7.62 m 5.89 m 5.44 m
Door 1
26.64 ft 25.00 ft 19.32 ft 17.85 ft
7.34 m 6.84 m 5.56 m 5.05 m
Door 2
24.08 ft 22.44 ft 18.24 ft 16.57 ft
6.99 m 6.48 m 4.92 m 4.38 m
Door 3
22.93 ft 21.26 ft 16.14 ft 14.37 ft
4.42 m 3.92 m
14.50 ft 12.86 ft
4.03 m 3.59 m
13.22 ft 11.78 ft
INCLINE OF
2.31 ° 2.31 ° 2.31 ° 2.31 °
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
ROTATION AROUND
4.26 ° 4.26 ° 4.26 ° 4.26 °
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
THRESHOLD HEIGHT ONE BODY L/G UP and Other L/G DOWN

L R L R
6.52 m 6.43 m 2.53 m 2.46 m
Door 1
21.39 ft 21.10 ft 8.30 ft 8.07 ft
8.10 m 8.01 m 3.41 m 3.33 m
Door 2
26.57 ft 26.28 ft 11.19 ft 10.92 ft
8.82 m 8.74 m 4.74 m 4.64 m
Door 3
28.94 ft 28.67 ft 15.55 ft 15.22 ft
5.72 m 5.63 m
18.77 ft 18.47 ft
6.44 m 6.36 m
21.13 ft 20.87 ft
INCLINE OF
4.68 ° 4.68 ° 4.68 ° 4.68 °
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
ROTATION AROUND
0.74 ° 0.74 ° 0.74 ° 0.74 °
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
UAE A380 09-30-20 P 4/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
EVACUATION (EVAC) AND ALERT (ECAS) SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
10-10 Emergency Evacuation (EVAC) Signaling System

10-10-10 General
Emergency Evacuation (EVAC) Signaling .......................................................................................... 1
10-10-20 Location
Location of the EVAC Control Panel in the Cockpit ............................................................................. 1
Location of the EVAC Signaling Controls in the Cabin ........................................................................ 1
Description of the EVAC Signaling Controls in the Cockpit ................................................................. 1
Description of the EVAC Signaling Controls in the Cabin.................................................................... 2
Description of the Aural and Visual Alerts in the Cabin ....................................................................... 5
10-10-40 Operation
How to Activate the EVAC Signaling from the Cabin........................................................................... 1
How to Request an EVAC Signaling from the Cabin ........................................................................... 2
How to Activate the EVAC Signaling from the Cockpit ........................................................................ 3
How to Cancel an EVAC Command from the Cabin............................................................................ 5
How to Reset the Aural and Visual Alerts in the Cabin via the Control Panels.................................... 6
UAE A380 10-TOC P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 10-TOC P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EVACUATION (EVAC) SIGNALING SYSTEM
General
A380
EMERGENCY EVACUATION (EVAC) SIGNALING

Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) controls the evacuation signaling in all cabin areas
and in the cockpit with its Emergency Evacuation Signaling (EVAC) system in case of an impending
emergency evacuation of the aircraft.
The aural and visual signals of the EVAC system indicate to the crew and the passengers that the
evacuation process must be started at once.
EVAC SIGNAL ACTIVATION
The Emergency Evacuation Signaling (EVAC) can be activated from the:
- Overhead control panel in the cockpit (EVAC panel)
- An FAP in the cabin if authorized by the flight crew.
EVAC SIGNAL ACTIVATION PRIORITY
The priority, who can activate the EVAC signal, is controlled via a switch on the cockpit overhead
control panel (CAPT & PURS sw). The switch has two positions for EVAC authorization:
- Captain & Purser (CAPT & PURS position)
- Captain (CAPT position).
If the cabin crew is not authorized to initiate the evacuation signals (CAPT position) they can still
request evacuation. The request is displayed on the pilot's switch panel to be confirmed or reset.
EVAC SIGNAL INDICATION
The EVAC activation can be indicated on the following indication panels / control panels in the cabin:
- AIP
- AAP
- FAP
- Mini FAP.
In addition, the passengers and the crew are alerted by the aural warning distributed via the:
- Cabin attendant loudspeakers
- Passenger compartment loudspeakers.
The cockpit has the following indicators:
- EVAC COMMAND indicator on the EVAC panel
- EVAC horn in the cockpit.
UAE A380 10-10-10 P 1/2

CCOM 08-Oct-14
General
A380
EVAC RESET
The aural and visual EVAC signals can be reset from the control panels in the cabin (EVAC RESET
hardkey / pushbutton). The Cabin Assignment Module (CAM) defines which control panel can reset the
EVAC signaling in which zone, area or deck.
EVAC CANCELLATION
The EVAC condition can be cancelled from:
- the cockpit (COMMAND pb)
- the EVAC CMD on the FAP or the AAP (as an option).
Note: The cabin crew may cancel the EVAC command (e.g. after performing a preflight check)
from the related FAP or AAP (as an option) EVAC CMD pb from which the evacuation was
initiated.
The flight crew can always cancel an EVAC condition from the cockpit.
UAE A380 10-10-10 P 2/2

CCOM 08-Oct-14
Location
A380
LOCATION OF THE EVAC CONTROL PANEL IN THE COCKPIT

Applicable to: ALL
For information about the location of the EVAC control panel in the cockpit: Refer to 02-110-20
Communications
LOCATION OF THE EVAC SIGNALING CONTROLS IN THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
The evacuation signaling can be activated, reset and cancelled from the control panels in the cabin.
There are two kinds of EVAC control hardkeys / pushbuttons:
- EVAC COMMAND
- EVAC RESET.
EVAC COMMAND hardkeys are typically located on the FAP: Refer to 04-20-10 Location of the
MP-FAP(s)
EVAC RESET hardkeys / pushbuttons can be located on the:
- FAP: For information about the location of the FAP: Refer to 04-20-10 Location of the MP-FAP(s)
- Mini FAP: For information about the location of the mini FAP: Refer to 04-20-10 Location of
Mini-FAPs
- AAP: For information about the location of the AAP: Refer to 04-20-10 Location of AAPs
UAE A380 10-10-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Location
A380
UAE A380 10-10-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Description
A380
DESCRIPTION OF THE EVAC SIGNALING CONTROLS IN THE COCKPIT

Applicable to: ALL
EVAC Panel
Pushbutton / Switch Description

COMMAND pb By pushing the COMMAND pb the flight crew can:
- Activate an evacuation signaling
- Confirm an evacuation signaling requested by the
cabin crew
- Cancel the evacuation signaling.
HORN OFF pb The flight crew uses the HORN OFF pb to turn OFF the
aural alert in the cockpit.
The flight crew can determine who can activate an

evacuation via the CAPT & PURS sw.
The CAPT & PURS sw has two positions:
- CAPT position: Evacuation can be activated by the
flight crew (captain) only.
CAPT & PURS sw
- CAPT & PURS position: Evacuation can be
activated by the flight crew (captain) or the cabin
crew (e.g. the purser).
UAE A380 10-10-30 P 1/6

CCOM 09-Jan-13
Description
A380
DESCRIPTION OF THE EVAC SIGNALING CONTROLS IN THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
EVAC CONTROLS ON THE FAP

EVAC Controls on a Typical FAP
Hardkey Description
The cabin crew can use the EVAC COMMAND hardkey on the FAPs
to:
- Activate an evacuation signaling if authorized by the flight crew
EVAC (CAPT & PURS sw on the EVAC panel in the cockpit)
COMMAND - Request an evacuation signaling if not authorized by the flight
crew to activate an evacuation signaling (CAPT & PURS sw on
the EVAC panel in the cockpit)
- Cancel the evacuation signaling from the FAP from which the
evacuation was activated.
The cabin crew can use the EVAC RESET hardkey to turn off the
EVAC RESET evacuation aural alert in the cabin as well as the EVAC indication on
the AIPs.
For more information about the cockpit controls: Refer to 02-110-30-23 EVAC Panel
EVAC CONTROL ON THE MINI FAP
Note: Mini FAPs with an EVAC RESET hardkey are optional.
UAE A380 10-10-30 P 2/6

CCOM 09-Jan-13
Description
A380
EVAC Control on a Typical Mini FAP
Hardkey Description
The cabin crew can use the EVAC RESET hardkey to turn off the
EVAC RESET evacuation aural alert in the cabin as well as the EVAC indication on
the AIPs.
EVAC CONTROL ON THE ADDITIONAL ATTENDANT PANEL (AAP)

Note: AAPs with an EVAC RESET pb are optional.
UAE A380 10-10-30 P 3/6

CCOM 09-Jan-13
Description
A380
EVAC Control on a Typical Additional Attendant Panel (AAP)
Pushbutton Description
The cabin crew can use the EVAC RESET pb to turn off
EVAC RESET pb the evacuation aural alert in the cabin as well as the
EVAC indication on the AIPs.
UAE A380 10-10-30 P 4/6

CCOM 09-Jan-13
Description
A380
DESCRIPTION OF THE AURAL AND VISUAL ALERTS IN THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
If the EVAC command was activated the cabin crew and the passengers are alerted by aural and
visual signals in the cabin.
AURAL EVAC SIGNAL
The EVAC signal is distributed throughout the whole cabin via the cabin loudspeakers.
VISUAL EVAC SIGNAL
The visual EVAC signals are indicated on:
- Mini FAP
- Additional Attendant Panel (AAP) (optional)
- Additional Indication Panel (AIP).
FAP / MINI FAP
On all FAPs and mini FAPs the EVAC RESET hardkey flashes red.
AAP
Optionally there is an EVAC RESET on AAPs which flashes red.
AIP
On the AIP the red indicator flashes and typically the message EMERGENCY ALERT is displayed.
UAE A380 10-10-30 P 5/6

CCOM 09-Jan-13
Description
A380
UAE A380 10-10-30 P 6/6

CCOM 09-Jan-13
Operation
A380
HOW TO ACTIVATE THE EVAC SIGNALING FROM THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
Depending on the position of the CAPT & PURS sw in the cockpit, there are three possibilities how an
evacuation signaling can be activated on the aircraft:
- Activation from the cabin: See EVAC Signaling Activated by the Cabin Crew
- Request from the cabin and confirmation by the cockpit: Refer to 10-10-40 How to Request an
EVAC Signaling from the Cabin
- Activation from the cockpit: Refer to 10-10-40 How to Activate the EVAC Signaling from the Cockpit
EVAC SIGNALING ACTIVATED BY THE CABIN CREW
When the CAPT & PURS sw on the EVAC panel in the cockpit is in CAPT & PURS position the cabin
crew can activate an EVAC signaling.
In an emergency requiring an evacuation:
Push the EVAC CMD hardkey on a FAP in the cabin to activate the
EVAC signaling.
The EVAC CMD hardkey illuminates in green (only on the FAP from
which the evacuation signaling was activated).
The EVAC RESET hardkey flashes in red on the FAPs / mini FAPs.
(Optionally, an EVAC RESET pb flashes on the AAPs.)
Note: If the CAPT & PURS sw in the cockpit is in the CAPT
position the flight crew must confirm the request for the
evacuation signaling before the EVAC RESET hardkey
flashes red. Refer to 10-10-40 How to Request an EVAC
Signaling from the Cabin
UAE A380 10-10-40 P 1/6

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Operation
A380
For more information about the evacuation indicators in the cabin: Refer to 10-10-10 Emergency
Evacuation (EVAC) Signaling
HOW TO REQUEST AN EVAC SIGNALING FROM THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
- Activation from the cabin: Refer to 10-10-40 How to Activate the EVAC Signaling from the Cabin
- See Request from the cabin and confirmation by the cockpit
- Activation from the cockpit: Refer to 10-10-40 How to Activate the EVAC Signaling from the Cockpit
EVAC SIGNALING INITIATED BY THE CABIN CREW AND CONFIRMED BY THE FLIGHT CREW
When the CAPT & PURS sw on the EVAC panel in the cockpit is in the CAPT position the cabin crew
can only request an EVAC signaling. The flight crew must confirm the request in order to activate an
EVAC signaling.
In an emergency requiring an evacuation:
Push the EVAC CMD hardkey on a FAP in the cabin.
The pushed EVAC CMD hardkey illuminates in green (only on the FAP
from which the evacuation was activated)
UAE A380 10-10-40 P 2/6

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Operation
A380
On the EVAC panel in the cockpit:

The EVAC light on the COMMAND pb illuminates red.
If the flight crew confirms the request by pushing the COMMAND pb the
ON light on the COMMAND pb illuminates.
When the flight crew has confirmed the evacuation the EVAC RESET
hardkey on the control panels in the cabin (FAP, mini FAP) flashes in red.
(Optionally, an EVAC RESET pb flashes on the AAPs.)
HOW TO ACTIVATE THE EVAC SIGNALING FROM THE COCKPIT

Applicable to: ALL
- Activation from the cabin: Refer to 10-10-40 How to Activate the EVAC Signaling from the Cabin
- Request from the cabin and confirmation by the cockpit: Refer to 10-10-40 How to Request an
EVAC Signaling from the Cabin
- Activation from the cockpit: See EVAC Signaling Activated by the Flight Crew
EVAC SIGNALING ACTIVATED BY THE FLIGHT CREW
EVAC Panel
If the flight crew decides to activate an evacuation signaling:
UAE A380 10-10-40 P 3/6

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Operation
A380
A flight crewmember pushes the COMMAND pb.
On the EVAC panel in the cockpit:

The EVAC light on the COMMAND pb illuminates red.
The ON light on the COMMAND pb illuminates white.
On the FAPs in the cabin:

The EVAC CMD hardkey remains amber.
On the FAPs / mini FAPs in the cabin:

The EVAC RESET hardkey flashes in red.
Optionally, an EVAC RESET pb flashes on AAPs
UAE A380 10-10-40 P 4/6

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Operation
A380
HOW TO CANCEL AN EVAC COMMAND FROM THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
It is only possible to cancel an EVAC command from the cabin if it was activated from the cabin.
Note: The flight crew can cancel an EVAC command at any time from the cockpit.
To cancel an EVAC command from the cabin the cabin crew must push the EVAC CMD hardkey on
the FAP, from which the EVAC signaling was activated, a second time.
Push the green illuminated EVAC CMD hardkey on the FAP

from which the EVAC signaling was activated to cancel the
evacuation command.
The EVAC CMD hardkey illuminates in amber.
The EVAC RESET hardkey stops flashing in red.
UAE A380 10-10-40 P 5/6

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Operation
A380
HOW TO RESET THE AURAL AND VISUAL ALERTS IN THE CABIN VIA THE CONTROL PANELS
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can reset the aural and visual alerts in the cabin via the EVAC RESET hardkey on
FAPs / mini FAPs or via the EVAC RESET pb on AAPs, depending on the data from the Cabin
Assignment Module (CAM).
Note: The EVAC/RESET hardkey light will remain flashing red until the cabin crew cancels the EVAC
command from the initial FAP or the flight crew cancels it from the cockpit controls.
EVAC RESET FROM A FAP
Push the flashing EVAC RESET hardkey on any FAP / mini

FAP or the EVAC RESET pb on an AAP to turn off the
evacuation aural alert in the cabin as well as the EVAC
indication on the AIPs and ACPs.
UAE A380 10-10-40 P 6/6

CCOM 03-Apr-08
EMERGENCY AND MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
11-10 Emergency Equipment

11-10-10 General
General Information about Emergency Equipment.............................................................................. 1
11-10-20 Location
Zone Overview..................................................................................................................................... 1
List of Symbols..................................................................................................................................... 2
Emergency Equipment in the Cockpit.................................................................................................. 4
Emergency Equipment in the Upper Deck........................................................................................... 9
Emergency Equipment in the Main Deck........................................................................................... 18
Emergency Equipment in the Lower Deck......................................................................................... 28

Life Vests and Flotation Devices.......................................................................................................... 1
Portable Fire Extinguisher.................................................................................................................. 18
Additional Emergency Equipment...................................................................................................... 19
Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)............................................................................................... 27
11-20 Protective Breathing Equipment

11-20-10 General
General ................................................................................................................................................ 1
Description........................................................................................................................................... 1
11-20-30 Operation
Operation ............................................................................................................................................. 1
11-40 Medical Equipment

11-40-10 General
General Information ............................................................................................................................. 1
11-40-20 Location of Medical Outlets

Location of Medical Outlets ................................................................................................................. 1
11-40-30 Description & Operation

Medical Outlets .................................................................................................................................... 1
UAE A380 11-TOC P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
11-50 Portable Oxygen

Description ...........................................................................................................................................1
11-50-20 Operation
Operation..............................................................................................................................................1
UAE A380 11-TOC P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

Applicable to: ALL
This chapter provides descriptive and operational information on the emergency equipment.
The location of emergency equipment on board the aircraft is indicated by placards.
UAE A380 11-10-10 P 1/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
General
A380
UAE A380 11-10-10 P 2/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
ZONE OVERVIEW
Applicable to: ALL
The following illustrates the aircraft zones 1 to 10, their corresponding locations on the various aircraft
decks.
Zone Overview
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 1/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
LIST OF SYMBOLS
Applicable to: ALL
Fire Extinguisher (Halon)
Fire Extinguisher (Water)
Megaphone
Crash Axe
First Aid Kit
Automated External Defibrillator (AED)
Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)
Flashlight
Additional JAR-Ops Survival Kit
Crew Life Vest (Orange)
Adult Life Vest / Passenger Life Vest (Yellow)
Spare Adult Life Vest / Spare Passenger Life Vest (Yellow)
Infant Life Vest
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 2/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
Emergency Demonstration Kit
Oxygen Cylinder and Mask
Manual Release Tool
Extension Seat Belt
FAA Survival Kit
Emergency Medical Kit
Fire Gloves
Baby Survival Cot
Crow Bar
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 3/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT IN THE COCKPIT H58
The following illustration the emergency equipment that is in the cockpit and their corresponding
locations.
Refer to List of Symbols
Location of the Flashlights
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 4/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
Location of the Fire Extinguisher
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 5/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT IN THE COCKPIT

The following illustrate the emergency equipment that is in the cockpit and their corresponding
locations.
Refer to List of Symbols
Location of the Flashlight
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 6/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
Location of the Fire Extinguisher and Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE)
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 7/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
Location of the Crash Axe
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 8/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT IN THE UPPER DECK
The following illustration shows zone 1 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 1
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 9/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 10/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 11/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 12/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
Emergency Equipment Zone 2 H60
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 13/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 14/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 15/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 16/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 17/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT IN THE MAIN DECK

0225-0229, 0241-0244
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 18/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Emergency Equipment Zone 5 H61
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 19/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 20/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 21/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 22/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 23/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 24/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 25/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0249
The following illustration shows zone 8 of the aircraft and the emergency equipment in this zone.
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 26/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 27/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT IN THE LOWER DECK
The following illustration show zone 9 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
Emergency equipment is not installed in this zone.

Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165-0174, 0186-0188,
0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0217-0224, 0226-0249
Emergency equipment is not installed in this zone.
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 28/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
0210-0216, 0225
Information about the location of emergency equipment is not available now.
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 29/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Location
A380
UAE A380 11-10-20 P 30/30

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
LIFE VESTS AND FLOTATION DEVICES

Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LIFE VESTS

Life vests and personal flotation devices are provided for every passenger and crew member on board
the aircraft.
The life vest is packed into a sealed container pouch. This pouch is designed for easy opening using
two finger hole tabs aligned with a V-notch cut at the large end of the pouch.
The life vests are colored orange/pink for the crew and yellow for the passenger.
There are several kinds of flotation equipment:
- Crew life vest
- Passenger life vest
- Infant life vest
- Baby survival cot
- Baby survival raft
LOCATION OF CREW AND PASSENGER LIFE VESTS
LOCATION OF CREW LIFE VESTS
The life vests are stowed at each flight and cabin crew seat.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 1/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
Location of Life Vest Crew
LOCATION OF PASSENGER LIFE VESTS

The aircraft has life vests for all passengers, stowed under each passenger seat.
Note: For the location of passenger life vests in special seats or compartments (e.g. business
class seats) refer to the related seat or compartment description.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 2/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
Example for Location of Life Vest Passenger
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 3/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
LOCATION OF THE PASSENGER LIFE VEST IN THE MINISUITE SEAT

Life Vest Storage in the Minisuite Seat
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 4/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
LOCATION OF THE PASSENGER LIFE VEST IN THE BUSINESS CLASS SEAT

Life Vest Storage in Business Class Seat
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 5/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
DESCRIPTION OF LIFE VESTS

The life vests consists of:
- A dual chamber attached to a harness. The harness secures the life vest to the wearer
- Two carbon dioxide cylinders attached to the manual inflator systems
- Two oral tube inflation systems
- A light system assembly and a battery attached to the harness
- A whistle for the crew life vest and an optional whistle for passenger and infant life vests.
Main Parts of Life Vest
Note: Crew and passenger life vests have the same function and parts, but differ in color
(orange/pink for crew and yellow for passenger life vests).
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 6/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
MAIN PARTS OF LIFE VESTS L2
Oral Inflation System

The oral inflation system has a tube connected to the buoyancy cell. The end of the tube has a
valve.
Use the oral inflation system to add or remove pressure as necessary.
Manual Inflation System
The manual inflation system is a carbon dioxide cylinder attached to an inflator mechanism.
When the wearer activates the manual inflation system, the cylinder releases compressed carbon
dioxide gas which fills the chamber(s).
Light System Assembly
The light system assembly is a light and a battery attached to a harness.
The light system assembly automatically activates when the battery is immersed in water.
Harness Assembly
The harness assembly is a harness and a buckle. The harness assembly secures the life vest to the
wearer.
HOW TO DON A LIFE VEST L1
For detailed instructions on how to don a life vest: Refer to How to Don a Life Vest.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 7/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
DESCRIPTION OF LIFE VESTS

The life vests consists of:
- A chamber attached to a harness securing the life vest to the wearer
- A carbon dioxide cylinder attached to an inflator system
- An oral tube inflation system
- A whistle for the crew life vest and a optional whistle for passenger and infant life vest.
Main Parts of Life Vest
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 8/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
Note: Crew and passenger life vests have the same function and parts, but differ in color
(orange/pink for crew and yellow for passenger life vests).
MAIN PARTS OF LIFE VESTS L2
1. Oral Inflation System:

The oral inflation system has a tube connected to the buoyancy cell. The end of the tube is fitted
with a valve.
The oral inflation system is used to add or remove pressure as necessary.
2. Manual Inflation System:
The manual inflation system consists of a carbon dioxide cylinder attached to an inflator
mechanism.
When the wearer activates the manual inflation system, the compressed carbon dioxide gas is
released and fills the chamber(s).
3. Light System Assembly:
The light system assembly consists of a light and a battery attached to the harness.
The light system assembly is automatically activated when the battery is immersed in water.
4. Harness Assembly:
The harness assembly consists of a harness and a buckle. The harness assembly secures the life
vest to the wearer.
DONNING INSTRUCTIONS L1
For detailed donning instructions Refer to How to don a Life Vest.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 9/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
Applicable to: ALL
DONNING INSTRUCTION FOR LIFE VEST

Remove the life vest from its pouch and unroll the life
vest.
Place the life vest over the head and pull it down around
the neck.
Wrap the harness around the waist and pull them to the
front.
Secure the life vest by the harness.

To adjust the harness pull on the loose end.
Pull the red tag to inflate the life vest outside of the
aircraft.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 10/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
Use the oral inflator system if more or less pressure in

the life vest is necessary:
- Blow into the tube to inflate
- Press the valve to deflate the life vest.
CAUTION Oral inflation prior to gas inflation

may burst the life vest.
GENERAL
The life vest for infant is a flotation device provided for infants weigh up to 16 kg(35 lb).
The infant life vest is manually activated self-inflated.
DESCRIPTION
The infant life vests consists of:
- A dual chamber attached to a harness securing the life vest to the wearer
- Two carbon dioxide cylinders attached to the manual inflation systems
- Two oral tube inflation systems
- A tether line.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 11/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
Main Parts of Infant Life Vest
MAIN PARTS OF INFANT LIFE VESTS L2
1. Oral Inflation Systems:

Each oral inflation system has a tube connected to the buoyancy cell. The end of the tube is fitted
with a valve.
The oral inflation system is used to add or remove pressure as necessary.
2. Manual Inflation Systems:
Each manual inflation system consists of a carbon dioxide cylinder attached to an inflator
mechanism.
When the manual inflation system is activated, the compressed carbon dioxide gas is released and
fills the chamber.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 12/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
3. Light System Assembly:

The light system assembly consists of a light and a battery attached to the harness.
The light system assembly is automatically activated when the battery is immersed in water.
4. Harness Assembly:
The harness assembly consists of a harness and a buckle. The harness assembly secures the life
vest to the wearer.
OPERATION L1
1. Remove the infant life vest from its pouch and unroll it.
2. Place the infant life vest over the head of the infant and pull it down around the neck.
3. Place one infant's leg over waistbelt harness loop and pull snug but not tight.
4. Run the waistbelt harness around back of the infants's waist and back to the front.
5. Close the buckle below the life vest.
6. Adjust the waistbelt by pulling the loose end.
7. Pull the red inflator tags to inflate the infant life vest.
8. Oral inflation:
CAUTION ORAL INFLATION PRIOR TO GAS INFLATION WILL CAUSE EXCESSIVE
PRESSURE WHICH MAY BURST THE LIFE VEST.
Use the oral inflation system if more or less pressure in the life vest is necessary:
- Blow into the tube to inflate
- Press the valve to deflate the life vest.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 13/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
GENERAL
The life vest for infant is a flotation device provided for infants weigh up to 16 kg(35 lb).
The infant life vest is manually activated self-inflated.
Main Parts of Life Vest Infant
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 14/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The baby survival cot is a flotation device provided for babies that are:
- Aged from 0 to 18 months
- Weigh up to 16 kg(35 lb)
- Measure up to 0.84 m(33 in) in length.
DESCRIPTION OF THE BABY SURVIVAL COT
Main Parts of the Baby Survival Cot
- The baby survival cot has two air apertures at the stern (head end) and is supplied with PVC
windows, one at each end and one at each side, so the baby can be monitored.
- Webbing straps are attached to the cot to form a three point lifting strap. The strap is used to carry
the cot, either by hand or over the shoulder.
- The tether is 3 min length and is used to lower the cot into the water or can be attached around the
waist of the parent.
- A whistle is attached to the baby survival cot.
- A water operated battery and a lamp is attached to the cot to help location in darkness. The water
operated battery is left to hang under the water line.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 15/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
Inflation System
The inflation system consists of

1. Manual Inflation System:
The manual inflation system consists of a carbon dioxide cylinder attached to an inflator
mechanism. The manual inflation system is activated by pulling the red tag, the compressed carbon
dioxide gas is released and fills the chamber.
2. Oral Inflation System:
The oral inflation system has
- a tube connected to the buoyancy and arch assembly and
- a tube to inflate the floor, to give the baby extra protection from the elements.
OPERATION
1. Remove the baby survival cot from its pouch and unroll it.
2. Pull the red tag to inflate the baby survival cot.
3. Place the baby in the cot , on the babies side, with the head at the air aperture (head end). Place
the baby in the waistcoat, then close the waistcoat. Carefully tighten the adjustable strap.
4. Close the cover of the restrainer with the sliding fastener.
5. Use the strop to carry the cot by hand or over the shoulder.
6. Carry the cot to the exit and use the tether line to lower the cot into the water.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 16/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
Note: The tether line can be tied around the waist of an adult as a life line.
Lowering by the Tether Line
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 17/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

Applicable to: ALL
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER GENERAL

The aircraft is equipped with the following type of fire extinguisher:
1. Portable Fire Extinguisher Halon
2. Portable Fire Extinguisher Water
DESCRIPTION OF THE PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER HALON
The portable fire extinguishers are used to extinguish fires and is filled with halon agent.
Halon agent will used for the fire classes B and C. Refer to Classes of Fire.
Description of Portable Fire Extinguisher Halon
OPERATION
WARNING It is recommended to use the Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) when fighting a
fire. Smoke from the fire and gas from the fire extinguisher may cause irritation of the
eyes and respiratory organs.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 18/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
1. Remove the portable fire extinguisher from the bracket.

2. Remove the pull out pin.
Note: This will release the lever.
3. Point the nozzle of the tube at the base of the fire.
Note: The optimum distance for effective fire fighting is between 1.2 m (4 ft ) and 1.8 m (6 ft ) with
the fire extinguisher held approximately 30 degrees from vertical.
4. To start the flow of extinguisher agent, squeeze the lever.
a. Never point the full stream into burning liquids. Start at the base and always fight the front of the
fire and follow the flames.
b. When fighting fire on burning solids, apply the extinguisher agent in sharp bursts.
5. Use the extinguisher nozzle in a sweeping motion from side to side.
6. To stop the flow of extinguisher agent, release the lever.
ADDITIONAL EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

Applicable to: ALL
FIRST AID KIT

The aircraft is equipped with first aid kits. A list of the content is in each first aid kit.
Typical First Aid Kit
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 19/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
GENERAL
The aircraft is equipped with handheld flashlights stored in a bracket. The flashlights are located at all
cabin crew and flight crew stations.
Flashlight
DESCRIPTION OF THE FLASHLIGHT AND THE BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM

FLASHLIGHT
The flashlight has white Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) for the spot.
To activate the flashlight remove it from the retention bracket.
BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM
The retention bracket contains a battery monitoring system to test the condition of the battery pack.
TEST OF THE BATTERY PACK
Push the Push-to-Test pb while the flashlight is inserted in the retention bracket:
- a green LED indicates a normal battery level
- a red flashing LED indicates a battery replacement.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 20/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
GENERAL
The aircraft is equipped with handheld flashlights stored in a bracket. The flashlights are located at all
cabin crew and flight crew stations.
Flashlight
DESCRIPTION
A LED confirms that the flashlight is ready for use.
The flashlight is activated when the flashlight is removed from the bracket.
The light operating time is 4 hours.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION L2
The flashlight is powered by dry batteries. The flashlight-system cannot be recharged.

The flashlight case is water-resistant and designed to float beam-up if dropped into water.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 21/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
Applicable to: ALL
OPERATION OF THE FLASHLIGHT

1. Removing the flashlight out of its bracket:
a. Hold the body of the flashlight.
b. Pull it from the retaining clip of the bracket.
2. The flashlight is activated when the flashlight is removed from the bracket.
3. Inserting the flashlight in its bracket:
a. Hold the flashlight.
b. Push the body of the flashlight into the bracket.
4. The flashlight is deactivated when the flashlight is moved into the bracket.
How to Release the Flashlight from its Stowed Position
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 22/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
FIRE FIGHTING GLOVES

Fire Fighting Gloves are on board the aircraft to provide a crew member with protection against heat
and fire.
Fire Fighting Gloves
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 23/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
CRASH AXE
The aircraft is equipped with crash axes. These crash axes are used to:
- cut through light structures
- remove panels
- get access to hidden areas for fire fighting.
Their handles are insulated in order to protect against electric shocks.
Crash Axe
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 24/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
GENERAL
The purpose of the megaphone for the cabin crew is to give instructions to the passengers e. g. in case
of Passenger Address PA system failures.
Refer to How to use a Megaphone.
Megaphone
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION L2
The on-board megaphones are powered by 6 alkaline batteries (AA-size) each.

A siren, incorporated into the megaphone, is automatically activated by unplugging the alarm pin.
Note: A lanyard with an alarm pin is supplied with the megaphone for use as an anti-theft alarm
(optional).
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 25/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
HOW TO USE THE MEGAPHONE

1. Hold the megaphone to the mouth.
Note: Do not place the hand around the mouthpiece.
2. Direct the megaphone towards the passengers.
WARNING DO NOT OPERATE THE MEGAPHONE CLOSE TO SOMEONE'S EARS.
AMPLIFIED SOUND OR HOWLING CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE INNER EAR.
3. Press the squeezing handle and speak slowly in a loud and clear voice.
ESCAPE ROPE
The escape rope is located in the cockpit.
Information about the escape rope is available in the following section:
Refer to Escape Rope.
DEMONSTRATION KIT
The aircraft is equipped with a demonstration kit which contains the following:
- demo life vest
- demo oxygen mask
- demo seat belt
- safety card.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 26/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
Demonstration Kit
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)

Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)

The Emergency Locator Transmitters (ELT) are used for transmitting distress signals and for providing
location information.
There are two types of Emergency Locator Transmitters (ELT):
- Portable Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)
- Fixed Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 27/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
DESCRIPTION OF THE PORTABLE EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)

The portable ELT is used to transmit distress signals on the following three frequencies at the same
time:
1. 121.5 MHz frequency for civil distress
2. 243 MHz frequency for military distress
3. 406.025 MHz frequency COSPAS-Sarsat.
Main Parts of the Portable Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)
MAIN PARTS OF THE PORTABLE EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)

The portable ELT includes:
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 28/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
1. The Light Emitting Diode (LED) goes ON to confirm that the ELT is transmitting a distress signal.
2. The ARMED/ON/OFF sw: The switch is in the ARMED position. The crew uses this switch to turn
the ELT manually ON.
3. The antenna enable the successful transmission of the distress signal.
4. The TEST sw will be used for a self test by the maintenance crew. L2
OPERATION L1
1. Activate the beacon by switching the ARMED/ON/OFF sw to the ON position. In the ARMED
position the beacon will be activated automatically by water contact.
2. The red LED goes ON a steady state and an aural indication confirm that the ELT is transmitting a
distress signal.
3. Pull out the antenna.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 29/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
DESCRIPTION OF THE FIXED EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)

The fixed ELT is used to transmit a distress signal on the following three frequencies:
1. 121.5 MHz frequency for civil distress L2
2. 243 MHz frequency for military distress.

3. 406.025 MHz frequency COSPAS-Sarsat.
The fixed ELT is a fully self-contained transmitter, that is automatically activated by a G-switch. The L1
ELT is not intended to be removed from the aircraft in case of emergency.

The ELT system consist of the following main parts:
1. A transmitter unit is located behind the upper deck ceiling in the aft cabin.
2. An ELT Panel is located in the cockpit.
Refer to ELT Panel
3. An antenna is located on the upper part of the fuselage.
Main Parts of the Fixed Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)System
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 30/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
TRANSMITTER UNIT
Transmitter Unit
1. External antenna connection

2. Light Emitting Diode (LED)
3. Connection to the ELT Panel in the cockpit
4. ARMED/OFF/ON sw
5. Back up antenna connection
OPERATION
The ELT system operates in automatic or manual mode:
1. Automatic mode:
The ARMED/OFF/ON sw is in the Armed position. In this configuration the unit can detect an
activation signal from either the integrated G-switch or the ELT Panel. When the ELT receives an
activation signal, the transmitter unit switches to transit mode and begins to transmit the
121.5 MHz, 243 MHz and 406 MHz signals.
2. Manual mode:
a. Manual activation from the ELT Panel
Set the toggle switch on the ELT Panel to the ON position.
Note: The toggle switch of the ELT must be set to the Armed position.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 31/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A380
b. Manual activation from the ELT

Set the toggle switch on the ELT to the ON position.
Note: The position of the toggle switch on the ELT Panel has no impact.
UAE A380 11-10-30 P 32/32

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PROTECTIVE BREATHING EQUIPMENT
General
A380
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The Protective Breathing Equipment PBE supplies oxygen to the crew in the case of fire, smoke and
toxic gases.
The PBE:
- Protects the user's eyes and respiratory system
- Enables the cabin crewmember to move around the cabin
For the location of the PBE's:Refer to 11-10-10 General Information about Emergency Equipment
UAE A380 11-20-10 P 1/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
General
A380
UAE A380 11-20-10 P 2/2

CCOM 01-Jul-08
Description
A380
DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
PBE container
The tamper indicator (if installed) visible on the container, must be intact before use, as indicated in the
preflight checklist.
The Protective Breathing Equipment PBE works with a closed breathing circuit.
The oronasal mask enables expired air will to be regenerated, enriched with oxygen and inhaled again.
UAE A380 11-20-20 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
Description
A380
PBE
Preflight checklist:Refer to 12-20-20 Emergency Equipment Preflight Inspection
UAE A380 11-20-20 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
Operation
A380
OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO DON THE PBE

Operation
1. Open the container, by removing the lid. Take the sealed bag out, and remove the PBE from the
sealed bag.
2. Don the PBE hood by sliding both hands (with palm facing each other) inside the neck seal
opening. Adjust the PBE hood on the head, with the nose and the mouth close to the oronasal
mask.
UAE A380 11-20-30 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Operation
A380
3. Pull the adjustment straps forward to actuate the regeneration system. A rushing noise of oxygen
entering the hood will be heard for a short period and the PBE hood will start to inflate. The hood is
now operating for a minimum of 15 min.
4. Pull the adjustment straps back to secure the oronasal mask high on the nose for a tight seal.
WARNING - Push long hair through the neck seal into the hood to avoid leakages. Hair that
protrudes through the neck seal could ignite if brought into direct contact with flame.
- Do not place any plait-like hairstyles and necklaces in the sealing area. They must
be positioned above the neck seal inside the hood. The neck seal must not be
damaged when putting on the mask. Be especially careful with glasses, sharp edged
necklaces and earrings.
5. Adjust the neck seal position.

Note: If you wear glasses, put the eyeglass on the top of the mask cone through the hood
material.
6. Check that there is no clothing or hair trapped in the seal. Adjust hood material hanging below the
neck seal to protect the neck and shoulders.
WARNING Do not smoke or become exposed to fire or flame after removing the PBE, because hair
may be saturated with oxygen.
END OF THE OPERATION

When the PBE is no longer usable, there will be a rapid buildup of heat and moisture, and the hood of
the PBE will collapse tightly around the head at the end of a full inhalation.
AFTER USE
Place the hood in a dry, fire protected place and away from any source of heat, sunlight or corrosive
fluid.
UAE A380 11-20-30 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
General
A380
GENERAL INFORMATION
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The aircraft may be equipped with supplemental medical equipment for emergencies:
The supplemental medical equipment may consist of:
- Defibrillator
- Medical kits
- Medical outlets.
UAE A380 11-40-10 P 1/2

CCOM 04-Jan-12
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
General
A380
UAE A380 11-40-10 P 2/2

CCOM 04-Jan-12
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
Location of Medical Outlets
A380
LOCATION OF MEDICAL OUTLETS H66
LOCATION OF MEDICAL OUTLETS

The location of the medical equipment is divide in zones.
Refer to Zone Overview
The following illustration shows the location of the medical outlet in the upper deck zone 2.
Medical Outlet Upper Deck Zone 2
UAE A380 11-40-20 P 1/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
A380
The following illustration shows the location of the medical outlet in the main deck zone 5.
UAE A380 11-40-20 P 2/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
A380
Medical Outlet Main Deck Zone 5
UAE A380 11-40-20 P 3/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
A380


The location of the medical equipment is divide in zones.
Refer to Zone Overview
UAE A380 11-40-20 P 4/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
A380
UAE A380 11-40-20 P 5/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
A380
UAE A380 11-40-20 P 6/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
A380
UAE A380 11-40-20 P 7/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
A380
UAE A380 11-40-20 P 8/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
Description & Operation
A380
MEDICAL OUTLETS
Applicable to: ALL
MEDICAL OUTLET DESCRIPTION

The medical outlet panels are integrated in doorframes and wall panels.
Refer to Location of Medical Equipment
The medical outlet panel includes receptacles that supply medical equipment with electrical power.
Each medical outlet panel has one medical receptacle: 115 V AC / 60 Hz.
MEDICAL OUTLET COVER
Medical Outlet Access
1. Medical outlet panel

2. Protection cover
3. Spring loaded quick-release fastener
HOW TO OPEN THE MEDICAL OUTLET COVER
A. Press down firmly the spring loaded quick-release fastener with a thin rugged stick (e.g. a pen).
B. The fastener will lower into the protection cover.
C. After releasing, the fastener will pop out of the cover.
UAE A380 11-40-30 P 1/4

CCOM 13-Jan-15
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
A380
Turn the fastener until it sticks out fully.

Pull the cover to the open position.
MEDICAL OUTLET OPERATION
CAUTION Only authorized persons, who are familiar with the operation of the medical equipment,
may use this device.
Medical Outlet
1. Receptacle 115 V AC / 60 Hz
2. ON/OFF pb / indicator
3. Fuse 10 A
4. Protection cover
HOW TO OPERATE THE 115 V AC OUTLET
1. Connect a 115 V AC medical equipment to the related receptacle.
2. Push the ON/OFF pb.
3. Switch ON the medical equipment at the device, if necessary .
Power rates:
UAE A380 11-40-30 P 2/4

CCOM 13-Jan-15
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
A380
115 V AC / 1 000 VA
60 Hz
HOW TO TAKE THE MEDICAL OUTLET OUT OF OPERATION
1. Switch OFF the medical equipment.
2. Push the ON/OFF pb. The indicator goes OFF.
3. Disconnect the medical equipment from the related receptacle.
4. Close the cover of the medical outlet panel.
5. Push in the spring loaded quick-release fastener until it engages with a snap. The fastener must be
flush with the cover.
UAE A380 11-40-30 P 3/4

CCOM 13-Jan-15
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
A380
UAE A380 11-40-30 P 4/4

CCOM 13-Jan-15
PORTABLE OXYGEN
Description
A380
DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
The portable oxygen bottle with a mask attached provides oxygen can supply first aid oxygen to
passengers or cabin crewmembers. The portable oxygen bottle can also supply oxygen during cabin
depressurization [(flow must be set to4 l/min (liters per minute)].
The portable oxygen bottle is able to supply oxygen at a flow rate of 2 l/min or 4 l/min. The flow rate
is indicated in the window above the gauge.
The ON-OFF control knob enables the user to open the oxygen valve and to select the desired flow
rate
When the portable oxygen bottle is full, it is able to supply oxygen for approximately 120 minutes at
2 l/min and 60 minutes at 4 l/min. It must be attached to a mask when placed aboard an aircraft in a
ready to use condition.
The oxygen source is a high-pressure bottle, with a capacity of 310 l(11 ft³). In Normal condition of L2
Temperature, Pressure and Dry (NTPD) in the bottle is 127.6 bar(1 850 PSI) .
UAE A380 11-50-10 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PORTABLE OXYGEN
Description
A380
L1
The portable oxygen bottles are installed in brackets with quick-release clamps. For more information
about locations refer to Cabin Emergency Equipment Layouts:
Refer to 11-10-10 Main Deck Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview Refer to 11-10-10 Upper Deck
Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview Refer to 11-10-10 Crew Rest Area Emergency Equipment
Overview
UAE A380 11-50-10 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PORTABLE OXYGEN
Operation
A380
OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew should use the portable oxygen bottle as follows:
1. Remove the portable oxygen bottle from its ready-to-use location.
2. Remove the mask from the stowage bag, ensure that the mask is attached to the oxygen outlet, and
put the mask on the user's face, covering the user's nose and mouth.
3. Turn the ON-OFF control knob counter clockwise to the 2 l/min (liters per minute) or 4 l/min position
to start the flow of oxygen. Ensure that the number is centered in the window above the gauge for
oxygen to flow correctly. Check the flow indicator of the mask to ensure that oxygen is flowing.
Note: Cabin crew must monitor the gauge when the oxygen is in use.
UAE A380 11-50-20 P 1/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PORTABLE OXYGEN
Operation
A380
Display window
4. When using the portable oxygen unit, oxygen does not flow until the "2" is centered in the window
and the ON-OFF control knob is in the 2 l/min detent position. When adjusting oxygen flow from
2 l/min to 4 l/min the oxygen does not flow until the "4" is centered in the window above the
gauge and the ON-OFF control knob is in the 4 l/min detent position.
UAE A380 11-50-20 P 2/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PORTABLE OXYGEN
Operation
A380
Adjusting the Flow
WARNING When dispensing oxygen, the ON-OFF control knob must be adjusted to either the 2
l/min or 4 l/min detent and the number "2" or the number "4" is centered in the
window above the gauge. Attempted use with the ON-OFF control knob to any other
position can cause the flow of oxygen to stop completely, which may cause personal
injury or death of the user.
5. While the portable oxygen bottle unit is in use, periodically check the visual flow indicator on the
mask to ensure that there is oxygen flowing to the mask.
UAE A380 11-50-20 P 3/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PORTABLE OXYGEN
Operation
A380
6. Do not turn the ON-OFF control knob past the stop at the 4 l/min setting. Do not use hand or fist to
turn the control knob for ON-OF. If you try to turn the ON-OFF control knob past the detent at the
"4" position, oxygen flow from the portable oxygen unit stop. Forcing the ON-OFF control knob past
the "4" position damages the portable oxygen unit. Damaged portable oxygen unit must be serviced
by an authorized service center.
ON/OFF Flow Valve
7. When the user no longer requires oxygen from the portable oxygen bottle, turn the ON-OFF control
knob clockwise until a red band appears in the window. The flow of oxygen stops.
8. Put the mask back in the stowage bag and return the portable oxygen bottle to its stored position.
UAE A380 11-50-20 P 4/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PORTABLE OXYGEN
Operation
A380
Note: When moving or transporting the portable oxygen bottle, be sure to keep a firm grasp on
the portable oxygen bottle and do not allow it to drop.
Portable Oxygen Devices
WARNING Prevent pressurized oxygen from coming in contact with oil, grease, flammable
solvents, contaminated tools, or other combustible material, because this may cause a
fire or explosion, and result in serious personal injury or death.
UAE A380 11-50-20 P 5/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PORTABLE OXYGEN
Operation
A380
UAE A380 11-50-20 P 6/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
12-10 Introduction
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1
12-20 Cabin Emergency Equipment

12-20-10 Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview
Main Deck Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview ............................................................................ 1
Upper Deck Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview .......................................................................... 3
Crew Rest Areas Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview.................................................................. 4
12-20-20 Emergency Equipment Preflight Inspection

Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1
Emergency Equipment Preflight Inspection......................................................................................... 2
12-20-30 Crewmembers' Stations Preflight Checklists

Main Deck Stations Emergency Equipment Preflight Checklists ........................................................ 1
Upper Deck Stations Emergency Equipment Preflight Checklists ..................................................... 10
Crew Rest Areas Emergency Equipment Preflight Checklists........................................................... 14
12-30 Galley Equipment

12-30-00 Introduction
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1
12-30-10 Galley Electrical Panel Preflight Check

Galley Electrical Panel......................................................................................................................... 1
12-30-20 Coffeemakers Preflight Check

SELL Coffeemaker Preflight Check ..................................................................................................... 1
12-30-30 Espresso Makers Preflight Check

IACOBUCCI Espresso Maker Preflight Check..................................................................................... 1
12-30-60 Ovens Preflight Check

BRITISH AEROSPACE Steam Oven Preflight Check......................................................................... 1
JAMCO Microwave Oven Preflight Checklist....................................................................................... 3
SELL Warming Oven Preflight Check.................................................................................................. 4
12-30-70 Freezer / Chillers Preflight Check

REFRIGERATING UNIT/Wine Chiller Preflight Check ........................................................................ 1
UAE A380 12-TOC P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
12-30-80 Trash Compactors Preflight Check

IACOBUCCI Trash Compactor Preflight Check ...................................................................................1
Monogram Trash Compactor Preflight Check ......................................................................................2
12-30-90 Trolley Lift Preflight Check

Trolley Lift Preflight Check ...................................................................................................................1
12-30-100 Trolleys Preflight Check

Trolley Preflight Check .........................................................................................................................1
12-30-120 Upper Deck Aft Galley Barrier Preflight Check

Upper Deck Aft Staircase Barrier Preflight Check................................................................................1
12-30-130 Galley Cooling System/ Supplementary Cooling System Preflight Check

Galley Cooling System / Supplementary Cooling System Preflight Check ..........................................1
12-40 Cabin Systems

12-40-10 Cabin Communication Preflight Check
Introduction...........................................................................................................................................1
Cabin Interphone preflight checklist ....................................................................................................2
Passenger Address (PA) System Preflight Check ...............................................................................3
Passenger Call Test Preflight Check....................................................................................................4
12-40-20 Emergency Lighting System Preflight Checklist

Emergency Lighting System Introduction.............................................................................................1
Emergency Lighting System Preflight Check .......................................................................................3
12-40-40 FAP Cabin Systems Status Preflight Check

Introduction...........................................................................................................................................1
FAP water/waste Status Pages............................................................................................................2
FAP WATER AND WASTE PAGE - PREFLIGHT CHECK .................................................................4
FAP Doors and Slides page .................................................................................................................5
Cabin connectivity preflight check ........................................................................................................6
12-40-50 Inflight Entertainment System (IFE) Preflight Check

Introduction...........................................................................................................................................1
Inflight Entertainment System (IFE) Preflight Check ............................................................................2
UAE A380 12-TOC P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
12-50 Cabin Equipment

12-50-10 Cabin Crew Seat Preflight Check
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1
CABIN Crew Seat Preflight Check ...................................................................................................... 2
12-50-40 Lavatory Preflight Check

Lavatory Preflight Check...................................................................................................................... 1
UAE A380 12-TOC P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 12-TOC P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
INTRODUCTION
A380
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
Preflight checklists are performed in accordance with Operator policies, procedures and local
Aviation Authority requirements.
The preflight checklist are usually performed before the departure of flights from originating stations
and transit stops when a crew change has taken place.
The preflight checklists have been developed to ensure that specific cabin items and systems are fully
operational.
These checklists can be divided into two categories: Safety related items, and commercial items.
The preflight checklists for should include the following items:
• Loose cabin emergency equipment
• Crew seats
• Passenger Address (PA) system
• Cabin interphone system.
It is important that these first items may be checked correctly, and that they are fully operational. Some
of these items, if inoperative, may impact the Master Minimum Equipment List (MMEL), and possibly
affect flight operations.
• In-flight Entertainment (IFE) system
• Galleys
• Lavatories
• Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) functions and Mini FAP
• First and business class seat operation.
A full check of the cabin systems, that provide passenger services and comfort, will benefit Operators,
customers and crewmembers alike.
The preflight checklists have to be completed in a limited amount of time (maximum of 30 min ).
Therefore, it is strongly recommended that the Chief Purser delegate preflight tasks for the preflight
checklists in advance, to maximize time and resources.
Note: In the event of irregular flight operations where the amount of time between cabin crew
boarding and passenger boarding has been significantly reduced. It is the responsibility of the
Chief Purser to prioritize the items of the preflight checklists in order of importance. All safety
related preflight checklist items mandated by operator policies, procedures and local aviation
authority must take priority over all other items.
UAE A380 12-10 P 1/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
INTRODUCTION
A380
UAE A380 12-10 P 2/2

CCOM 16-Jul-10
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview
A380
MAIN DECK EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT CABIN OVERVIEW H67
The following illustration shows zone 5 to zone 8.

For a detailed view of emergency equipment refer to the corresponding zone.
Main Deck Overview
MAIN DECK EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT CABIN OVERVIEW


Main Deck Overview
UAE A380 12-20-10 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
MAIN DECK EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT CABIN OVERVIEW

Main Deck Overview
UAE A380 12-20-10 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
UPPER DECK EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT CABIN OVERVIEW H68

Upper Deck Overview
UPPER DECK EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT CABIN OVERVIEW


Upper Deck Overview
UAE A380 12-20-10 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
UPPER DECK EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT CABIN OVERVIEW

Upper Deck Overview
CREW REST AREAS EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT CABIN OVERVIEW H69
For an overview of the emergency equipment in the crew rest areas Refer to 11-10-20 Zone 9
Lower Deck Zone 9.
UAE A380 12-20-10 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
CREW REST AREAS EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT CABIN OVERVIEW

Flight Crew Rest Compartment Overview
Cabin Crew Rest Compartment Overview
UAE A380 12-20-10 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
UAE A380 12-20-10 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
Emergency Equipment Preflight Inspection
A380
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
A wide range of emergency equipment is installed on board the aircraft, to provide crewmembers with
the tools to deal effectively with emergency or medical situations that can occur during a flight. The
preflight inspection takes place before the departure of each originating flight or transit stop, when
there is a cabin crew change. Each crewmember is responsible for the preflight inspection, and the
completion of the cabin emergency equipment checklists for all cabin emergency equipment assigned
to their work station.
The cabin emergency equipment preflight inspection is an integral part of the cabin emergency
equipment preflight checklist, and ensures that each piece of equipment is fully operational, before the
departure of each flight. During the equipment inspection, crewmembers are required to check:
• Gauges
• Security seals
• Expiration dates
• Status indicators
The cabin emergency equipment preflight checklists specifies the equipment location, and the quantity
of each piece of equipment for that location.
CAUTION Any discrepancies discovered during the preflight inspection must be reported to the
Chief Purser. The Chief Purser should report the discrepancies to the flight crew and
the maintenance personnel.
UAE A380 12-20-20 P 1/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT PREFLIGHT INSPECTION

BABY SURVIVAL COT

1. Check that the location and quantity are correct
CRASH AXE
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
Note: There are no placards to indicate the location of
the crash axe.
CREW LIFE VEST (ORANGE)

DEMONSTRATION KIT
2. Ensure that each demonstration kit pouch contains
the following:
• Demonstration seat belt (1)
• Demonstration life vest (1)
• Demonstration oxygen mask (1)
3. Check of each piece of equipment to ensure that it is
in good condition and ready for use.
UAE A380 12-20-20 P 2/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER

2. Visually check that the ELT switch is on ARMED
position.
EXTENSION SEAT BELT

FIRE FIGHTING GLOVES

FLASHLIGHT
2. Ensure that the LED flash interval on the flashlight is
between 3 sand 6 s.
3. Check that the flashlight is properly stowed into its
retention bracket.
Note: if the flash interval is longer, between 6 s to 10 s,
this indicates that the flashlight battery is low.
Notify the Chief Purser.
UAE A380 12-20-20 P 3/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
HALON FIRE EXTINGUISHER

2. Check that the indicator shows “FULL".
3. Check that the safety device is intact.
4. Ensure that the fire extinguisher has been correctly
restowed and secured.
INFANT LIFE VEST

MANUAL RELEASE TOOL

MEGAPHONE
2. Press the trigger located on the handhold. Listen for
an audible “popping" sound. This is the indication that
the megaphone is operative.
3. Ensure that the megaphone is correctly stowed and
secured.
UAE A380 12-20-20 P 4/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
OXYGEN CYLINDER AND MASK

2. Check the pressure gauge to ensure the indicator
needle is at FULL (180 0–2 000 PSI) .
3. The mask must be attached to the portable oxygen
bottle when placed aboard an aircraft in a ready to
use condition.
4. Ensure that the oxygen cylinder and mask have been
correctly restowed and secured.
PORTABLE BREATHING EQUIPMENT
2. Check the integrity of the vacuum bag through the
transparent cover of the stowage box:I
- If a tamper seal is employed verify the integrity of
the tamper seal and observe the presence of the
vacuum bag.
- If no tamper seal is employed check the presence
and the good condition of the vacuum bag.
3. Ensure that the PBE has been correctly restowed and
secured.
SPARE ADULT LIFE VEST (YELLOW)
UAE A380 12-20-20 P 5/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
CABIN EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT PREFLIGHT INSPECTION

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
AUTOMATED EXTERNAL DEFIBRILLATOR

2. Check that the service icon on the storage box
window reads a flashing black egg timer.
Note: The following indications can appear on the
service icon:
– Flashing red “X” indicates that the AED
battery is low or that self-test was not
successful.
– Steady red “X” indicates that the AED
battery needs to be replaced immediately or
an error occurred during self-test.
– A flashing black egg timer indicates that
self-test is completed successfully.
3. Ensure that the AED is correctly stowed and secured.
BABY SURVIVAL COT
CRASH AXE
Note: There are no placards to indicate the location of
the crash axe.
UAE A380 12-20-20 P 6/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
CREW LIFE VEST (ORANGE)

DEMONSTRATION KIT
2. Ensure that each demonstration kit pouch contains
the following:
• Demonstration seat belt (1)
• Demonstration life vest (1)
• Demonstration oxygen mask (1)
3. Check of each piece of equipment to ensure that it is
in good condition and ready for use.
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
2. Visually check that the ELT switch is on ARMED
position.
EMERGENCY MEDICAL KIT

2. Ensure that the emergency medical kit has been
UAE A380 12-20-20 P 7/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
EXTENSION SEAT BELT

FACE SHIELD
FIRST AID KIT

2. Ensure that the first aid kit is correctly stowed and
secured.
FIRST AID POUCH

UAE A380 12-20-20 P 8/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
FLASHLIGHT
2. Ensure that the LED flash interval on the flashlight is
between 3 sand 6 s.
3. Check that the flashlight is properly stowed into its
retention bracket.
Note: if the flash interval is longer, between 6 s to 10 s,
this indicates that the flashlight battery is low.
Notify the Chief Purser.
HALON FIRE EXTINGUISHER
needle is at FULL.
3. Check that the safety device is intact.
4. Ensure that the fire extinguisher has been correctly
restowed and secured.
INFANT LIFE VEST

MANUAL RELEASE TOOL

UAE A380 12-20-20 P 9/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
MEGAPHONE
2. Press the trigger located on the handhold. Listen for
an audible “popping" sound. This is the indication that
the megaphone is operative.
3. Ensure that the megaphone is correctly stowed and
secured.
OXYGEN CYLINDER AND MASK

needle is at FULL (1 850 PSI) .
3. The mask must be attached to the portable oxygen
bottle when placed aboard an aircraft in a ready to
use condition.
4. Ensure that the oxygen cylinder and mask have been
2. Check the integrity of the vacuum bag through the
transparent cover of the stowage box:
- If a tamper seal is employed verify the integrity of
the tamper seal and observe the presence of the
vacuum bag.
- If no tamper seal is employed check the presence
and the good condition of the vacuum bag.
3. Ensure that the PBE has been correctly restowed and
secured.
PROTECTION GLOVES
UAE A380 12-20-20 P 10/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
RESUSCITATION MASK
SPARE ADULT LIFE VEST (YELLOW)

SUPPLEMENTARY RAFT ACCESSORIES KIT

UAE A380 12-20-20 P 11/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
UAE A380 12-20-20 P 12/12

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
Crewmembers' Stations Preflight Checklists
A380
MAIN DECK STATIONS EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT PREFLIGHT CHECKLISTS

M1L M1R Inboard

In/On CAS In/On CAS
 1 Crew life vest  1 Crew life vest
 1 Manual release tool  1 Flashlight
 1 PBE
In lavatory stowage near CAS
In outboard lavatory stowage  1 PBE
 1 Halon fire extinguisher
Note: The primary crewmember stationed at door
 1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
M1R outboard is responsible for checking
On door frame lining the M1R inboard seat when this
 1 Flashlight crewmember is not on board.
In inboard lavatory stowage near CAS
 1 Demo kit
 1 Megaphone
M1R Outboard
In/On CAS
 1 Crew life vest
 1 Manual release tool
 1 PBE
In lavatory stowage
 1 Demo kit
On door frame lining
 1 Flashlight
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 1/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
M2L Inboard M2R Inboard

In/On CAS In/On CAS
 1 Manual release tool  1 Manual release tool
 1 PBE  1 Flashlight
 1 Flashlight  1 PBE
 1 Fire fighting gloves
In/On doghouse FWD of CAS
In/On doghouse FWD of CAS  1 Halon fire extinguisher
 1 Halon fire extinguisher  2 Oxygen cylinders and masks
 2 Oxygen cylinders and masks
Note: The primary crewmember stationed at door M2R outboard is responsible for checking
M2L outboard is responsible for checking the M2R inboard seat when this
the M2L inboard seat when this crewmember is not on board.
crewmember is not on board.
M2L Outboard M2R Outboard
In/On CAS In/On CAS
 1 PBE  1 Flashlight
In stowage facing CAS In stowage facing CAS
 2 Demo kits  15 Extension seat belts
 10 Infant life vests
 5 Spare life vests
In/On CAS In/On CAS
 1 Flashlight  1 Manual release tool
 1 PBE  1 PBE
Note: The primary crewmember stationed at door Note: The primary crewmember stationed at door
M3L outboard is responsible for checking M3R outboard is responsible for checking
the M3L inboard seat when this the M3R inboard seat when this
crewmember is not on board. crewmember is not on board.
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 2/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380

In/On CAS In/On CAS
 1 Flashlight  1 Flashlight
 1 PBE  1 PBE
In lavatory stowage In/On doghouse
 1 Halon fire extinguisher  1 Demo kit
 1 Demo kit  1 Halon fire extinguisher
 2 Oxygen cylinders and masks  2 Oxygen cylinders and masks
In/On CAS In/On CAS
 1 Fire fighting gloves  1 Manual release tool
 1 PBE
Note: The primary crewmember stationed at door M4R outboard is responsible for checking
M4L outboard is responsible for checking the M4R inboard seat when this
the M4L inboard seat when this crewmember is not on board.
In/On CAS In/On CAS
 1 PBE  1 PBE
On panel FWD of CAS On panel FWD of CAS
 1 Halon fire extinguisher  1 Halon fire extinguisher
In box FWD of CAS In a box FWD of CAS
 1 Demo kit  1 Demo kit
 2 Oxygen cylinders and masks  2 Oxygen cylinders and masks
In/On inboard doghouse
 4 Baby survival cots
 1 Crash axe
 15 Extension safety belts
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 3/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
M5L M5R
In/On CAS In/On CAS
 1 PBE  1 Manual release tool
 1 PBE
On panel aft of CAS
 1 Flashlight In a box, under last row of seats
 1 Oxygen cylinder and mask  1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
In galley
 1 Megaphone
 1 ELT
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 4/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
MAIN DECK STATIONS EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT PREFLIGHT CHECKLISTS

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
M1L Outboard M1R

Under CAS Under CAS
 1 Manual release tool  1 PBE
 1 PBE  1 Manual release tool
On door frame lining In lavatory stowage
 1 Flashlight  1 Halon fire extinguisher
 1 Demonstration kit
In lavatory stowage
 1 Megaphone
 1 Oxygen cylinder and mask On lavatory wall LH from CAS
 1 Demonstration kit  1 Flashlight
 1 Supplementary raft accessories kit
In stowage into forward lavatory
 1 First Aid Kit
 1 Resuscitation mask
 1 Face shield
M1L outboard is responsible for checking
the M1L inboard seat when this
M1L Inboard
Above CAS
 1 Flashlight
Under CAS
In lavatory stowage
 1 PBE
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 5/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380

Above CAS Above CAS
Under CAS Under CAS
 1 PBE  1 PBE
In doghouse
 2 Oxygen cylinders and masks In doghouse
In partition above doghouse
 1 Halon fire extinguisher In partition above doghouse
In stowage facing CAS
 1 Firs Aid Kit In stowage facing CAS
 2 Demonstration kits  10 Infant life vests
 1 Supplementary raft accessories kit  5 Adult life vests
 1 First aid pouch  10 Infant extension seat belt
 4 Baby survival cots  1 Supplementary raft accessories kit
 1 Face shield
Note: The primary crewmember stationed at door the M2R inboard seat when this
M2L outboard is responsible for checking crewmember is not on board.
Above CAS Above CAS
Under CAS Under CAS
 1 PBE  1 PBE
 1 Pair of protection gloves
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 6/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
M3L Outboard M3R

Above CAS Above CAS
Under CAS Under CAS
 1 PBE  1 PBE
In stowage In doghouse
 1 Fire extinguisher  1 Demonstration kit
 5 Adult life vests  1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
On partition above doghouse
 1 Face shield In doghouse forward to lavatory
 1 First aid kit
M3L outboard is responsible for checking
 2 baby survival cots
M3L Inboard
Above CAS
 1 Flashlight
Under CAS
 1 PBE
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 7/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380

On partition On partition
Under CAS Under CAS
 1 PBE  1 PBE
On panel behind CAS
 1 Face shield
Into partition  1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
Into partition
Note: The primary crewmember stationed at door  1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
M4L outboard is responsible for checking  1 Supplementary raft accessories kit
In doghouse forward of galley
 1 Crash axe
 1 First aid kit
 5 Adult life vests
the M4R inboard seat when this
On partition Above CAS
Under CAS Under CAS
 1 PBE  1 PBE
On panel behind CAS
- 1 halon fire extinguisher
- 1 Supplementary raft accessories kit
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 8/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
M5L M5R
Under CAS Under CAS
 1 PBE  1 PBE
On panel behind CAS On panel behind CAS
 1 halon fire extinguisher  1 halon fire extinguisher
 1 flashlight  1 flashlight
 1 Oxygen cylinder and mask  1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
Into OHSC Into OHSC
 5 Therapeutic oxygen units  5 Therapeutic oxygen units
In stowage inside galley Installed at trolley fit housing
 1 Megaphone  1 Supplementary raft accessories kit
 1 First aid kit
 1 Emergency medical kit
 1 AED
 1 ELT
 1 First aid pouch
 1 Supplementary emergency medical kit
 1 Face shield
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 9/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
UPPER DECK STATIONS EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT PREFLIGHT CHECKLISTS

FWD Center
In/On CAS
 1 Flashlight
 1 PBE
In stowage
U1L U1R
In/On CAS facing aft In/On CAS facing aft
 1 PBE  1 PBE
 1 Fire fighting gloves
In/On CAS facing FWD
In/On CAS facing FWD  1 Crew life vest
 1 Crew life vest  1 PBE
 1 PBE
On door frame lining FWD of door U1R
On door frame lining FWD of door U1L  1 Flashlight
 1 Flashlight
On door frame lining aft of door U1R
On door frame lining aft of door U1L  1 Flashlight
 1 Flashlight
In stowage near CAS facing FWD
In stowage near CAS facing FWD  2 Baby survival cots
 2 Demo kits  2 Demo kits
 1 ELT  10 Extension safety belts
 1 Megaphone  8 Infant life vests
 2 Oxygen cylinders and masks  4 Spare life vests
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 10/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
U2L U2R
In/On CAS In/On CAS
 1 PBE  1 PBE
In stowage aft of door U2L In stowage aft of door U2R
 2 Demo kits  2 Baby survival cots
 1 Halon fire extinguisher  10 Extension safety belts
 1 Oxygen cylinder and mask  2 Demo kits
U3L U3R
In/On CAS In/On CAS
 1 Fire fighting gloves  1 Manual release tool
 1 Manual release tool  1 PBE
 1 PBE
On door frame lining
On door frame lining  1 Flashlight
 1 Flashlight
Inside sofa
Inside/Behind sofa  1 Halon fire extinguisher
 1 Halon fire extinguisher  1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
 1 Megaphone
In galley
 1 Crash axe
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 11/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
UPPER DECK STATIONS EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT PREFLIGHT CHECKLISTS

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
There are eight (8) crew stations on the upper deck of the A380, seven (7) of which are mandatory.
U1L AFT U1R AFT

In CAS In CAS
 1 PBE  1 PBE
Above CAS
Above CAS  1 Flashlight
 1 Flashlight
U1L FWD U1R FWD
In CAS In CAS
 1 PBE  1 PBE
On door frame lining On door frame lining
In stowage In stowage
 1 Megaphone  8 Infant life vests
 1 First aid kit  4 Adult life vests
 1 ELT  2 demonstration kits
 2 demonstration kits  2 Oxygen cylinders and masks
 2 Oxygen cylinders and masks  10 Extension seat belts
 1 Supplementary raft accessories kit  1 Supplementary raft accessories kit
 1 Face shield
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 12/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
U2L U2R
In CAS In CAS
 1 PBE  1 PBE
On side frame of CAS On side frame of CAS
In stowage of business class In stowage of business class
 2 Demonstration kits  1 First aid kit
 1 Oxygen cylinder and mask  8 Infant life vests
 2 Baby survival cots  4 Adult life vests
 1 Resuscitation mask  2 demonstration kits
 1 Face shield  1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
 10 Extension seat belts
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 13/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
U3L U3R
In CAS In CAS
 1 PBE  1 PBE
In door frame lining
 1 Flashlight
 1 Face shield
Into side bin behind sofa
In door frame lining
 1 Flashlight
Inside sofa
Into side bin behind sofa
 1 Megaphone
 1 First aid kit
Inside sofa
In galley
 1 Crash axe
 4 Adult life vests
 2 baby survival cots
CREW REST AREAS EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT PREFLIGHT CHECKLISTS H70
Before the departure of each flight, one crewmember must be assigned to inspect each of the crew rest
areas. This check should include the preflight inspection of all emergency equipment, to verify the
location, quantity and serviceability of all emergency equipment in the crew rest areas.
Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment

 2 Halon fire extinguishers
 3 Flashlights
 2 PBEs
 2 Manual release tools
 1 Crash axe
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 14/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
CREW REST AREAS EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT PREFLIGHT CHECKLISTS

Before the departure of each flight, one crewmember must be assigned to inspect each of the crew rest
areas. This check should include the preflight inspection of all emergency equipment, to verify the
location, quantity and serviceability of all emergency equipment in the crew rest areas.

 1 Flashlight
 1 PBE
Cabin Crew Rest Compartment
 1 Crash axe
 1 Flashlight
 1 PBE
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 15/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A380
UAE A380 12-20-30 P 16/16

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Introduction
A380
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
Preparing a galley for a long flight can be divided into three main tasks:
1. The preflight check, that ensures all the galley equipment is fully operational
2. The preflight check, that ensures that the correct number of meals, and sufficient catering supplies
have been boarded for the flight
3. The preparation of the galley itself, and the preparation of pre– departure services.
A thorough galley preflight check and galley preparation are required to ensure the quality of in-flight
services.
This section concentrates on checking the various types of equipment located in the aircraft galleys,
and how to check that it is fully operational before departure. Inoperative equipment can adversely
affect the quality of the in-flight service.
The galley preflight check is completed by the cabin crewmember designated to work in the galley for
the duration of the flight. After the galley cabin crewmember has completed all assigned safety-related
preflight checks, they will then proceed to their galley and complete the galley preflight checks.
CAUTION Any defective or inoperative items, including tripped circuit breakers, fail and fault lights
that come on must be immediately reported to the Chief Purser. The Chief Purser must
then inform the flight crew and the maintenance personnel.
UAE A380 12-30-00 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Introduction
A380
UAE A380 12-30-00 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Galley Electrical Panel Preflight Check
A380
GALLEY ELECTRICAL PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
Galley Electrical Panel General Overview
WARNING Never reset a tripped circuit breaker
CAUTION Any defective or inoperative items, including tripped circuit breakers, fail and fault lights
that come on must be immediately reported to the Chief Purser. The Chief Purser must
then inform the flight crew and maintenance personnel.
UAE A380 12-30-10 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Oct-10
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Galley Electrical Panel Preflight Check
A380
STEP 1.
- Check that all circuit breakers are closed (there should be no tripped circuit breaker).
STEP 2.
- Check the galley electrical panel to verify that the red fault light indicators of the galley cooling
system are off.
STEP 3.
- Set the galley cooling selector to the correct position. This position will depend on the items
contained in the trolleys that are attached to the cooling system.
- The selector has optional two settings: BEVERAGE ONLY or MEALS AND BEVERAGES. Select
the appropriate setting.
UAE A380 12-30-10 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Oct-10
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Coffeemakers Preflight Check
A380
SELL COFFEEMAKER PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
Coffee Maker General Overview
STEP 1.
- Press the POWER ON pb to turn on the coffeemaker.
The cooffeemaker heater tanks will the start to heat.
STEP 2.
- Press the LOW WATER and LAMP TEST pb. All the lamps must come on.
UAE A380 12-30-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Coffeemakers Preflight Check
A380
- Release the LOW WATER and LAMP TEST pb

Note: If the LOW WATER lamp remains on after the push button has been released, wait for the
water tank to fill. That may occur when the aircraft is being serviced.
The LOW WATER lamp will turn off automatically when the water tank is full.
STEP 3.
Check that hot water is available from the water tank.
- Place a cup under the faucet.
- Pull or push the faucet handle, this will draw the water from the tank.
- Release the faucet handle to turn off the water.
Note: For a detailed description, refer to 03-90-40 coffee maker
UAE A380 12-30-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Espresso Makers Preflight Check
A380
IACOBUCCI ESPRESSO MAKER PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
Espresso Maker General Overview
STEP 1.
- Press the ON/OFF pb to start the espresso maker. The ON/OFF indicator light will come on.
When the espresso maker is warm, the yellow READY LED indicator will come on.
UAE A380 12-30-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Espresso Makers Preflight Check
A380
STEP 2.
- Place the coffee cup under the coffee pod holders and press the SMALL CUP pb or the LARGE
CUP pb to check that the espresso maker operates correctly.
- Empty the coffee cup then place it under the steam outlet.
- Press the STEAM pb to ensure that the steam function operates correctly. Press the STEAM pb
again to stop the process.
Note: For a detailed description, Refer to 03- 90 - 40 Espresso Maker
UAE A380 12-30-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Oct-12
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Ovens Preflight Check
A380
BRITISH AEROSPACE STEAM OVEN PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
Steam Oven General Overview
STEP 1.
- Make sure the door is correctly locked. The door knob must be in the LOCK position.
- Press the ON/OFF pb on the oven control module to switch the oven on.
The oven will perform a self-test. After the self-test is finished, the display shows the stand-by screen.
UAE A380 12-30-60 P 1/6

CCOM 03-Oct-12
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A380
STEP 2.
- Press the + pb or - pb to select one of the standard programs.
- Press the SELECT pb to select a program.
- Press the START/PAUSE pb to start the program.
The START/PAUSE light will illuminate and the selected program will start.
- Check on the display that the program is started, then press the CLEAR/STOP pb to stop the
running program.
The oven will return to the stand-by mode.
- Check the display shows the stand-by screen.
Note: For a detailed description, Refer to 03 - 90 - 40 Steam Oven
UAE A380 12-30-60 P 2/6

CCOM 03-Oct-12
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A380
JAMCO MICROWAVE OVEN PREFLIGHT CHECKLIST

Applicable to: ALL
Oven Control Module Overview
WARNING Do not operate the oven if it is empty. Do not place metallic items inside the oven.
STEP 1.
- Open the door, check the oven for cleanliness and that there are no objects inside.
- Press the ON/OFF pb to turn the oven on
- Check that “.0” appears on the display.
STEP 2.
- Place something in the oven (for example a bread roll).
- Press the 1 pb
- Press the START pb to initiate the heating process.
After the heating process has completed a chime will sound and the oven will stop heating.
- Open the door, check that the inner light and fan work.
Note: for a detailed description, Refer to JAMCO Microwave Oven Description and Operation
UAE A380 12-30-60 P 3/6

CCOM 03-Oct-12
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A380
SELL WARMING OVEN PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
Warming Oven Overview
STEP 1.
- Inspect the interior of the warming oven for cleanliness
- Check the interior of the warming oven to ensure that are no objects inside
- Close the door of the warming oven. Ensure that the door latch is fixed and that the secondary door
latch is in the locked position.
STEP 2.
- Press the ON pb to turn on the oven.
The warming oven takes approximately 15 minto heat up. After 15 minthe warming oven switches to
the HOLD mode. The HOLD mode indicator light will come on.
- Open the door of the warming oven to check that it is heated correctly.
CAUTION The warming oven will be hot. Always use an oven glove to check the oven for heat.
Never put your bare hand into a hot oven.
UAE A380 12-30-60 P 4/6

CCOM 03-Oct-12
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A380
Note: For a detailed description, Refer to SELL Warming Oven Description and Operation
UAE A380 12-30-60 P 5/6

CCOM 03-Oct-12
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A380
UAE A380 12-30-60 P 6/6

CCOM 03-Oct-12
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Freezer / Chillers Preflight Check
A380
REFRIGERATING UNIT/WINE CHILLER PREFLIGHT CHECK H71
Freezer Control Module Overview
STEP 1.
- Press the ON/OFF pb to turn on the chiller. LEDs must flash in sequence and then in the opposite
sequence.
- Check that the display shows “INITIALIZING”.
Note: If the chiller does not start correctly check the associated LED on the circuit breaker panel in
the galley. Then notify the Chief Purser.
STEP 2.
The previous function selected (Freezer/Refrigerator/Wine Chiller) will appear on the display.
- Press the ON/OFF pb to start this function, or press the MODE pb to select another mode.
- Then press the ON/OFF pb to start the new function.
The selected function will then appear on the display, and the green ON LED indicator will come on.
UAE A380 12-30-70 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Freezer / Chillers Preflight Check
A380
Note: If “UNIT FAILED” appears on the display and the FAIL LED indicator comes on notify the Chief
Purser.
Note: If the internal temperature of the Chiller remains above the programmed temperature for a long
period of time, the target and current temperatures will appear on the display. In addition the
TEMP WARNING LED indicator will come on in yellow. Ensure the door is fully closed then
notify the Chief Purser.
Note: If the latch of the door is not in the locked position during the cooling process “DOOR NOT
LOCKED” will appear on the display. Secure the latch to the locked position.
Note: for a detailed description, Refer to BRITISH AEROSPACE Freezer Description and Operation
UAE A380 12-30-70 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Trash Compactors Preflight Check
A380
IACOBUCCI TRASH COMPACTOR PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
Trash Compactor Control Module Overview
STEP 1.
- Check the trash compactor for any damage.
- Ensure that all the door latches, door handles and restraint latches operate correctly.
STEP 2.
- Press the ON pb. The ON LED indicator will come on.
CAUTION If the trash compactor shuts down automatically, the red FAIL LED indicator will come
on and the trash compactor is not available. In this case shut off the trash compactor
immediately and notify the Chief Purser.
- Check the display for the message INSERT BOX.

- Open the front door, ensuring that the middle door is closed, and insert the box into the drawer.
- Close and latch the front door.
- Ensure the trash compactor is securely stowed.
UAE A380 12-30-80 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A380
Note: Check that the two short flaps are attached to the relevant vertical sides of the box to avoid
jamming during compaction.
Note: If the door is not fully closed the “ CHECK MIDDLE DOOR” or” CHECK FRONT DOOR”
messages will appear on the display.
The ”READY TO COMPACT” message will then appear on the display.
MONOGRAM TRASH COMPACTOR PREFLIGHT CHECK

Trash Compactor General Overview
UAE A380 12-30-80 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A380
STEP 1.
- Check the overall condition of the trash compactor for any damage.
- Ensure that all the door latches, door handles and restraint latches operate correctly.
STEP 2.
- Open the main door, ensure that the middle door is locked ( tap the middle door with your foot)
- Install the trash box correctly, and ensure that the box grips are wrapped around the trash box.
- Close and latch the trash compactor main door.
STEP 3.
- Press the POWER ON pb, the message display will come on, this will indicate that the trash
compactor is ready to use.
- Ensure the trash compactor is securely stowed.
Note: For a detailed description, see chapter "Cabin Layout", section "Galleys", "Trash Compactor",
paragraph "Description".
UAE A380 12-30-80 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A380
UAE A380 12-30-80 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Trolley Lift Preflight Check
A380
TROLLEY LIFT PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
Trolley Lift General Overview
STEP 1.
- Using the interphone call the upper deck to coordinate the trolley lift preflight check with a cabin
crewmember working on the upper deck.
STEP 2.
- The cabin crewmember working on the main deck will control the trolley lift using the operating
panel pushbuttons to test the following functions:
UAE A380 12-30-90 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Trolley Lift Preflight Check
A380
- Press the UP pb , to send the trolley lift to the upper deck

- Press the DOWN pb , when the trolley lift is approximately half way down
- Press the STOP pb , to stop the trolley lift. Check the control panel to ensure that the red STOP
indication light is on
- Press the STOP pb again and the trolley will move downwards to the main deck
- Using the interphone, confirm with the upper deck crewmember, that the trolley lift check is
complete
Note: During the mechanical operation of the trolley lift, the galley cabin crewmember and the upper
deck crewmember must monitor the trolley lift operation panels on both decks for fault and
failure messages.
UAE A380 12-30-90 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Trolleys Preflight Check
A380
TROLLEY PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
Full Size Trolley General Overview
STEP 1.
- Check the general condition of all trolleys for cleanliness, dents, sharp edges, evidence of wear (for
example loose trim).
STEP 2.
Check the operation of the following:
- Trolley movement: The trolley should move freely. Test the cart movement, and check for the ease
of movement on and off the mushroom catch.
- Doors open and close correctly.
- Ensure that the door hold magnet, holds the trolley door fully open.
- Chilled air is freely circulating to all the trolleys attached to the galley cooling system.
- Correct braking action, verify that the trolley does not move when the brake is on.
- Latches Lock correctly.
STEP 3.
- Close and lock the trolley doors.
UAE A380 12-30-100 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Trolleys Preflight Check
A380
- Return the trolley to it's correct stowage location.

- Secure the trolley on the mushroom catch.
- Secure the trolley using the retainer latches.
- Check the trolley is secure, by pulling the trolley toward you. The trolley must not move from the
stowage.
CAUTION All trolleys must be secured correctly when not in use, also during taxi, takeoff,
turbulences and landing.
UAE A380 12-30-100 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Upper Deck Aft Galley Barrier Preflight Check
A380
UPPER DECK AFT STAIRCASE BARRIER PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
Upper Deck Aft Staircase Barrier Overview
The upper deck aft staircase barrier is composed of a double black and yellow strap that prevents
trolleys from falling on to the stairs.
CAUTION The barrier must be installed at all times when the trolleys are in use.
STEP 1.
- Ensure that the straps are correctly stowed in the retracted position.
UAE A380 12-30-120 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Upper Deck Aft Galley Barrier Preflight Check
A380
STEP 2.
Install the barrier and check the overall condition of the barrier components.
- Unroll both straps by pulling the bar
- Attach the buckles to the hooks on the opposite wall.
- Check the overall condition of the straps, ensure that the straps are not frayed or damaged
- Return the barrier to the stowed retracted position
- Check that both straps unroll and retract normally.
UAE A380 12-30-120 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Galley Cooling System/ Supplementary Cooling System Preflight
A380 Check
GALLEY COOLING SYSTEM / SUPPLEMENTARY COOLING SYSTEM PREFLIGHT CHECK

To perform the Galley Cooling System / Supplementary Cooling System preflight check, two user
interfaces may be checked.
A - IN THE GALLEY: GALLEY COOLING SYSTEM PANEL
Galley Cooling System Panel Overview
- Check the galley electrical panel to ensure that there are no fault indications on the galley cooling
panel. The ACU ON indicator light must be on. If the ACU FAULT light indicator is on, make an
entry to the aircraft logbook. For a detailed description of the galley electrical panel preflight check,
Refer to Galley Electrical Panel Preflight Check
UAE A380 12-30-130 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
Galley Cooling System/ Supplementary Cooling System Preflight
A380 Check
- Check the temperature on the FAP.

Note: After switching ON the Supplement Cooling System, it will take approximately 20 minutes
until the system is ready and the ACUs will provide cooled air.
Note: Frequently opening the doors of the trolleys or leaving the doors open for a long period can
disrupt the galley cooling system and may generate fault indications.
B - ON THE FLIGHT ATTENDANT PANEL (FAP): GALLEY COOLING PAGE
FAP Galley Cooling Page Overview
- On the FAP Cooling page, check that the system status is "active". Selecting the required deck,
verify that the cooling units temperatures are compliant with the temperature selected. In case of a
cooling system failure error messages will appear on the FAP. In this case, make an entry to the
aircraft logbook. For a detailed description of the ACU error messages on FAP page, Refer to FAP
pages - Error Messages
UAE A380 12-30-130 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
Cabin Communication Preflight Check
A380
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin communication systems on board the aircraft are vital to the safe operation of a flight.
The operational check of the cabin interphone system and the Passenger Address (PA) system is
performed by using the handsets located at each cabin crew station.
GETTING STARTED
The Chief Purser will initiate the cabin interphone and PA system preflight check by making the
following announcement:
“Cabin crew at stations for cabin interphone and PA check”.
All cabin crewmembers should go to their respective stations and standby for the initial cabin
interphone preflight check announcement.
To ensure that the cabin interphone and the PA system operate correctly from every station, every
cabin crewmember should check in. To do this, pass the checks from left to right to ensure that the
cabin interphone and PA system is operative at all stations.
For example, the Chief Purser will start the check at M1L, by announcing:
“Cabin interphone check door M1L”. The next cabin crewmember to check in will be M1R, who will
announce: “Cabin interphone check or PA check door M1R”.
Note: Cabin crewmembers must listen carefully to the check in announcements in order to follow the
sequence and be prepared for their prompt. Cabin crewmembers must clearly state their
respective crew station.
The checks will be performed in the following order:
M1L→M1R
M2L→M2R
M3L→M3R
M4L→M4R
M5L→M5R
U3L→U3R
U2L→U2R
U1L→U1R
USL→USR(*)
The Upper Stairs cabin crewmember will be the last cabin crewmember to check in for both the cabin
interphone (cabin to cabin preflight check), and the PA preflight check.
* If this cabin crewmember is onboard.
UAE A380 12-40-10 P 1/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
CABIN INTERPHONE PREFLIGHT CHECKLIST

Applicable to: ALL
CABIN INTERPHONE PREFLIGHT CHECKLIST — CABIN TO CABIN

Chief Purser Cabin Crewmembers
Step 1. Step 1.
- Inform the cabin crew when the cabin - After the Chief Purser's announcement, go to
interphone PA preflight check is about to start. assigned stations.
- Press the PTT pb on the handset and make the
following announcement: "The interphone and
PA system preflight check will begin shortly,
cabin crew please go to your stations."
Step 2. Step 2
- Press the CONF pb on the handset. This will
When the call chimes are heard:
call all of the cabin crew stations.
- Check that the Area Call Panel (ACP) and
Attendant Information Panel (AIP) are
displaying the correct signals.
- Pick up the handset and wait to check in.
Step 3. Step 3.
- Request that all crew stations check in in - Confirm the interphone check by stating your
sequence. The Chief Purser will check in first crew station. For example:"Interphone check
by announcing:“Interphone check M1L.” M1R"
Note: Reset the handset when the check
has been performed.
Step 4. Step 4.
- Ensure that all crewmembers check in. - Remain at stations to complete the PA check.
Note: The last crewmember to check in will be
the Upper Stairs cabin crewmember.
The cabin interphone check is now complete.
UAE A380 12-40-10 P 2/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
When the cabin interphone preflight check has been completed, all cabin crewmembers must remain
at their stations and be prepared for the PA system preflight check.
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM PREFLIGHT CHECK
Step 1. Step 1.
- Check that the Area Call Panel (ACP) and
To start the PA check:
Attendant Information Panel (AIP) are
- Press the PTT pb on the handset
displaying the correct signals.
- Announce: “PA Check M1L”
- Press the PTT pb on the handset.
- Check in by clearly announcing the crew
station over the PA. For example: “PA Check
M3R”
Step 2. Step 2.
- Reset Handset. - Reset the handset.
Note: If crewmembers do not reset or stow the
handset correctly after each
announcement, the PA will be blocked.
Other crewmembers will not be able to
use the PA system.
UAE A380 12-40-10 P 3/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
PASSENGER CALL TEST PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
The random passenger call tests should be performed in each zone of every cabin to ensure that the
passenger call system operates correctly.
This should be completed by two cabin crew, one on each side of the cabin, one on the left hand side
and one on the right hand side. These two cabin crewmembers will randomly check the passenger call
system.
STEP 1.
- Press the CABIN CREW CALL pb on the passenger service unit (PSU). There will be a single Hi
chime over the loudspeakers in the immediate area.
STEP 2.
- Check that:
• The cabin crew call light on the PSU comes on
• The blue light on the corresponding Area Call Panel (ACP) comes on
• The corresponding Attendant Indication Panel (AIP) will display a message identifying the
location of the cabin crew call.
STEP 3.
- Ensure that all the CABIN CREW CALL pb have been reset.
Note: The cabin crew calls can be reset using CALL RESET function on the FAP.
UAE A380 12-40-10 P 4/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
Emergency Lighting System Preflight Checklist
A380
EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

Applicable to: ALL
The function of the emergency lighting system is to provide sufficient light in the cabin and outside the
aircraft to ensure that:
- Safe and rapid evacuation of the aircraft, in darkness, and in a smoke filled cabin is possible
- Light is available in the cabin when no aircraft power supply is available.
The emergency lighting can be controlled manually by:
- Setting the EMER EXIT LT sw on the cockpit overhead panel to ON
- Pressing the EMER ON pb on the FAP
The emergency lighting can also be controlled automatically, when the EMER EXIT LT sw on the
cockpit overhead is in the ARM position. This will enable the emergency lighting system to come on
automatically when normal or essential power is lost.
When there is no power available to the aircraft, the emergency lighting system is powered by an
independent battery from the aircraft's Emergency Power Supply Unit's (EPSU). This will provide
sufficient power to operate the emergency lighting system for 10 min.
In the cabin, these lights come on:
- The ceiling emergency lights
- The EXIT signs:
• EXIT locators in the aisles
• EXIT markers above the passengers doors
• Additional EXIT signs.
- Floor Path Marking System (FPMS) lights which can include photoluminescent lighting instead of
LEDs and also:
• Seat Mounted Floodlights, to provide lighting in the main aisles (if installed)
• Wall Mounted Floodlights, to provide lighting in areas in front of monuments
• Edge Mounted Floodlights, to provide lighting in the cross aisles and, in front of monuments (if
installed)
• Exit identifiers that provide lighting in the door area.
- The emergency spotlights
Note: The center LED of a spotlight is part of the general illumination. The four outer LEDs of the
emergency light system come on during this test.
- The emergency light LEDs in the Understep LED Light (ULLIS)
UAE A380 12-40-20 P 1/6

CCOM 08-Apr-15
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Note: Most of the LEDs in LED light strips of the Understep LED Lights (ULLIS) are part of the
general illumination. With this test, only the small number of the emergency light LEDs with
regular distances between the LEDs come on.
- All other emergency lights.
The exit signs, the auxiliary lights and all other emergency lights come on in
- The lavatories
- The flight crew rest compartment(s) (if installed)
- The lower deck facility stairhouse(s) (if installed)
- The lower deck faciilities (if installed)
- The cabin crew rest compartment(s) on the main and upper deck (if installed)
- All other crew and passenger compartments (if installed).
The exit marking and exit location signs come on automatically when:
• The landing gear is extended.
• The no smoking signs are switched ON.
• There is a loss of cabin pressure.
Inoperative emergency lighting may have an impact on the MMEL (ATA Chapter 33–51–00), and,
therefore may have operational restrictions and consequences.
UAE A380 12-40-20 P 2/6

CCOM 08-Apr-15
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
The preflight check of the emergency lighting system may be carried out independently on each deck.
However, the preflight check must be coordinated between the main deck and the upper deck.
Chief Purser Upper Deck Purser Cabin Crew

Step 1. Step 1. Step 1.
- Call the Upper Deck - Confirm to the Chief - The cabin crewmembers who have been
Purser to coordinate the Purser that the upper designated to perform the emergency light
emergency lighting deck cabin is ready to preflight check should take there positions in
system preflight check. perform the emergency the cabin.
light preflight check.
Step 2.
- Announces to all cabins:
"Emergency Lighting
System Preflight Check"
Step 3. Step 2.
- Press theEMER pb on - Walk through the cabin and check that the
the FAP, the emergency Emergency lighting is operative.
lights will come on. For the emergency lighting list Refer to
- On the FAP subpanel, 12-40-20 Emergency Lighting System
press the LIGHTS MAIN Introduction
ON/OFF pb
CAUTION Any inoperative LED or
floodlights must be noted
and given to the Chief
Purser or Upper Deck
Purser.
UAE A380 12-40-20 P 3/6

CCOM 08-Apr-15
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380

Step 2. Step 4.
When the upper deck cabin When the check is complete:
crew have confirmed that - The upper deck cabin crew will report that
the check is complete. the check is complete to the Upper Deck
- Using the interphone Purser.
call the Chief Purser to - The main deck cabin crew will report that the
confirm that the check is check is complete to the Chief Purser.
complete and the
system is fully
operational.
CAUTION Any
light
malfunct
ions
detecte
d by the
cabin
crew
should
be given
to the
Chief
Purser.
UAE A380 12-40-20 P 4/6

CCOM 08-Apr-15
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380

Step 4.
- Acknowledge
emergency lighting
system checks complete
from main deck and
upper deck cabin crew.
CAUTION Any light

malfunct
ions that
have
been
reported
by the
cabin
crew
during
the
check,
must be
reported
to the
flight
crew
and
mainten
ance.
UAE A380 12-40-20 P 5/6

CCOM 08-Apr-15
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
UAE A380 12-40-20 P 6/6

CCOM 08-Apr-15
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
FAP Cabin Systems Status Preflight Check
A380
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
Before the departure of each flight the Chief Purser and the Upper Deck Purser must check that all the
FAP's and all the Mini-FAP's screens are operative.
This is done by navigating through the principle pages:
• Cabin Status page
• Doors/Slides page
• Waste Water page
• Lights page
• Temperature page
• Smoke page
Thus, they must check the status of the different cabin systems using the Forward Attendant Panel
(FAP) and Mini-FAP.
If the FAP's and/or Mini-FAP screen are frozen, they must ask the flight crew to perform a CIDS reset
as per FCOM procedure.
UAE A380 12-40-40 P 1/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
FAP WATER/WASTE STATUS PAGES

Applicable to: ALL
Water/Waste Page All Decks
UAE A380 12-40-40 P 2/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
Water/Waste Main Deck Page
UAE A380 12-40-40 P 3/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
FAP WATER AND WASTE PAGE - PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
Before the departure of each flight the Chief Purser must check the Flight Attendant panel (FAP) to
verify the status of the water and waste tanks. This is to ensure that:
• Sufficient water is available for each flight
• Sufficient space is available in the waste tanks, to accept the amount of waste from the lavatories
and galleys.
• The water system supplies potable water from the potable water tanks to the galleys, lavatories,
water heaters as well as any other additional equipment that requires water.
• The waste system moves the waste from the toilets and galleys to the holding tanks.
• The quantity indicating system displays the quantity of potable water and waste in the tanks. These
indications are displayed on the water and waste page on the FAP.
STEP 1.
- Select the Waste/Water hard key from the main menu. This will display the Water and Waste ALL
Page, that describes the arrangement of the lavatories for each deck.
STEP 2.
- Select the deck you want to consult by touching the deck on the touch screen. This screen will
display the water/waste status for the deck you have selected, for example the main deck.
STEP 3.
- On the upper left side of the page, the two waste tanks are displayed (one for the right side, and
one for the left side of the aircraft). The contents of the tanks are indicated in gray, and are
displayed as a percentage.
- Check that the waste tank is empty.
STEP 4.
The water quantity is clearly indicated on the FAP. The water content is indicated in blue. As the water
content is preselected, there will be a green arrow on the left hand side to indicate the percentage of
water required for the flight.
- Check that the contents indicated in blue are at the same level as the green arrow. This indicates
that the correct amount has been boarded.
Note: Any discrepancies or malfunctions (blue cards) must be reported to the flight crew and
maintenance personnel as soon as possible.
The water and waste quantities must be confirmed to the flight crew as correct before
departure.
UAE A380 12-40-40 P 4/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
FAP DOORS AND SLIDES PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The door and slide status should be checked on the FAP preflight check. This check should be
completed by the Chief Purser at the FAP at M1L.
STEP 1.
- Select the CABIN STATUS icon on the FAP, touch the CABIN STATUS icon.
- Select the DOORS/SLIDES icon.
STEP 2.
The FAP DOORS/SLIDES page must reflect the current door status, for example, if M1L and M2L are
open, the FAP will reflect this by showing a red rectangle outside the aircraft symbol.
- Check that the door and slide status is correct . The CAUT light must not be on.
Note: When the CAUT light is flashing with a message to enter the Doors/Slides page. Go to the
Doors/Slides pages to determine the origin of the caution message. Notify the flight crew and
maintenance immediately.
If the caution message is due to low slide bottle pressure on one of the doors
SLIDE NOT READY indicator on the DSIP of the related door will come on .
DOORS/SLIDES PAGE SYMBOLS AND INDICATORS
SYMBOL INDICATOR
Door open Red rectangle outside the aircraft symbol
Door closed with slide DISARMED Amber rectangle inside the aircraft symbol. SLIDE
DISARMED is written in amber text next to the
related door.
Door closed with slide ARMED Green rectangle inside the aircraft symbol. SLIDE
ARMED is written in amber text next to the related
door.
Slide Pressure The SLIDE PRESSURE is written in amber text
next to the related door.
UAE A380 12-40-40 P 5/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
CABIN CONNECTIVITY PREFLIGHT CHECK

STEP 1.
On the FAP application menu, select the connectivity key
STEP 2.
On the service overview page, the cabin crew must check that:
In the "Action" column

- the "Service" indication are displayed (green indication)
- The "WLAN " key is activated (green indication)
- If required, the "Quiet Mode " key is deactivated (grey indication).
Note: In case of system malfunction (i.e. In the "System State" column, the "faulty" indication is
displayed associated with an amber icon) Refer to 06-210-40 How to Reset all Cabin
Connectivity Services
On ground, in the "Service Status" column, the "DISABLED" indication is displayed associated
with a grey icon.
UAE A380 12-40-40 P 6/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380

STEP 1.
STEP 2.
- In the "On/Off" column, the "ON" indication are displayed (green indication)
- In the "System State" column, the "OK" indication are displayed (green icon)
- In the "Action" column:
- The "WLAN ON" key is activated (green indication)
- The "PAX sign on" key is activated (green indication)
- If required, the "Quiet Mode ON" key is deactivated (grey indication).
Note: In case of system malfunction (i.e. In the "System State" column, the "faulty" indication is
displayed associated with an amber icon) Refer to 06-210-40 How to Reset a Faulty Cabin
Connectivity Service
On ground, in the "Service Availability" column, the "NA" indication is displayed associated
with a grey icon.
UAE A380 12-40-40 P 7/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380

STEP 1.
STEP 2.
- The "ON" key (green indication) in the "On/Off" column is activated
- The "OK" indication (green indication) in the "SYSTEM STATE" column is displayed
- The "WLAN ON " key (green indication) in the "ACTION" column is activated.
Note: On ground, in the "service availability" column , the indicator is always on the NA status (Grey
indication).
● If the "ON" key is grey:
The cabin crew must press the "ON" key to enable the internet connectivity.
The "ON" key will become green.
● If the indicator, in the "SYSTEM STATE" column, is faulty (Amber indication) :
please Refer to 06-210-40 How to Reset a Faulty Cabin Connectivity Service
Note: If the reset is not successful (function is still faulty), the cabin crew should request the flight
crew to perform a complete reset of the system.
● If the "WLAN ON" key is grey:
The cabin crew must press the "WLAN ON" key to enable the WLAN function.
The "WLAN ON" key will become green.
UAE A380 12-40-40 P 8/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
Inflight Entertainment System (IFE) Preflight Check
A380
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
The aim of the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system checklist is to ensure that all functions of the
system are fully operational before the departure of each flight. As the duration of the A380 flights may
be in excess of 15 h, the most important commercial facility for passenger comfort and enjoyment is
the IFE. The IFE system has many functions, such as:
• In-seat audio and video
• In-seat audio and video control
• Passenger Announcement (PA) system
• Passenger service system
• Passenger flight information system (moving map)
• In-seat power
• On board telephones.
The Cabin Management System (CMS) controls the IFE system. The IFE operator will interact with the
system using the interactive Cabin Management Terminal (iCMT). The iCMT screens are located in the
cabin workstation, and in each of the Remote Control Centers (RCC) on board the aircraft.
The IFE preflight check is accomplished by using a “Sweep Focused Checklist”. For the “Sweep
Focused Checklist cabin crewmembers are designated to a zone of the aircraft, to check the various
IFE functions in all seat rows in all cabins.
GETTING STARTED
To complete the IFE preflight check in the allocated time, it is highly recommended that, during the
preflight briefing, the Chief Purser assigns cabin crewmembers to check each zone.
The IFE preflight check takes place immediately after the safety–related preflight checklist. The Chief
Purser, who will be the IFE operator, should make a PA announcement to notify the cabin
crewmembers that the IFE checklist is about to begin. Each cabin crewmember should be equipped
with a set of headphones, and go to their respective zones.
As soon as the cabin crewmembers are in place and ready to begin the preflight check, the Chief
Purser should announce each type of function check required over the PA system.
UAE A380 12-40-50 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
INFLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (IFE) PREFLIGHT CHECK

0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249

Check preparation
- Turn on the PAX SYS sw on the FAP above the
Crew Terminal.
- Turn on the Cabin Work Station Main Power
Switch.
The WELCOME screen appears on the CT.
- Check the System Status page to ensure that the
system power is fully available.
Note: Do not cycle power or touch the screen until
the CT is finished booting up.
Note: If the system is password protected, the
Chief Purser will need to enter the correct
password to display the entertainment
screen.
- Make a PA announcement to the cabin - Take a set of headphones. The headphones are
crewmembers to inform them to take their necessary to perform the seat audio outlets
positions in their respective zones. check.
- Go to respective zones.
Note: It is recommended to start from the aft of
each zone and work forward because this
provides a better overview of the screens.
Step 1.
- Select the safety demonstrations from the
VIDEO PA option in the main menu screen.
Select the announcement and the zones, then
select PLAY on the touch screen.
Step 1.
- Announce: “Safety Demo Check”.
- Sweep zone to check:
Note: The other entertainment services cannot be • Passenger screen display
activated while the Safety Demo is on. A • Cabin speakers
message will appear on the screen to • Overhead monitors
remind the IFE operator. - Confirm zone check complete.
UAE A380 12-40-50 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380

Step 2. Step 2.
- Select the Boarding Music option from the menu. - Sweep zone to check that:
This will broadcast the music on the cabin PA • Cabin speakers are operational
speakers. • Audio level is comfortable
- Announce: “Boarding Music Check”. - Confirm zone check complete.
Step 3. Step 3.
- Select the ENTERTAINMENT option from the - Sweep zone to check that:
menu, and then select START • On-demand movies are available to all seats
ENTERTAINMENT. • Interactive games are available to all seats
- Announce: ”ENTERTAINMENT Check”. • Audio is available to all seats
- Confirm zone check complete.
Note: Plug headphone into the seat audio outlets
to verify sound.
Step 4.
- Announce: “IFE Preflight check completed”.
UAE A380 12-40-50 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A380
UAE A380 12-40-50 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
Cabin Crew Seat Preflight Check
A380
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
Cabin crew seats are provided for the cabin crewmembers at each door. The location and distribution
of cabin crew seats is based on:
• Regulations
• Aircraft type
• Operators requirements
Cabin crew seats are required to be fully operational before the departure of each flight, and therefore
require a preflight check.
The cabin crew seat preflight check includes:
• A general visual inspection of the cabin crew seat condition and structure.
• Automatic seat pan return (the seat pan will fold up when not in use), to ensure that exit paths are
not obstructed in the event of an emergency.
• Restraint system: All cabin crew seats are equipped with a combined safety belt, and retractable
shoulder harness with a single action release rotary buckle (turning the buckle will release the
restraint system).
CAUTION Any cabin crew seat malfunction must be immediately reported to the Chief Purser so
that corrective action can be taken before the flight departure
UAE A380 12-50-10 P 1/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
A380
CABIN CREW SEAT PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
Seat Unit Overview
The cabin crew seats preflight check should include an inspection of the following components to
ensure that the seats are fully operational:
SEAT UNIT
- Visually check the overall condition of the cabin crew seat:
• Condition of restraint system seat belt attachments. For example: Missing, frayed, damaged.
• Rotary buckle.
• Seat structure. For example: Sharp edges, loose headrests or seat cushions.
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
- Pull the shoulder harness out gently from the crew seat. The shoulder harness must move smoothly
from the housing.
- Pull down sharply on the shoulder harness, this action must cause the shoulder harness to lock.
- Attach the restraint system:
Insert the lap strap and shoulder harness attachments into the opening located on sides of the
rotary buckle: A “clicking” noise will confirm that they are correctly inserted, and locked.
UAE A380 12-50-10 P 2/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
A380
- Adjust the restraint system:

Adjust the lap straps by pulling on the loose ends of the straps on each side. This is to ensure that
the lap straps are correctly placed to restrain the lower torso.
- Release the restraint system:
Turn the lever in either direction until all the shoulder harness and, lap strap attachments are
ejected from the buckle.
CAUTION This part of the preflight check must be completed while the cabin crewmember is
seated. This will enable the cabin crewmember to adjust the restraint system to their
own requirements and prepare their crew seat for takeoff.
AUTOMATIC SEAT PAN RETURN

- Pull the seat pan down until the cabin crew seat is fully extended.
- Release the seat pan, by removing any weight. This will enable the seat pan to return to the folded
position.
Note: If the crewmember has completed the restraint system preflight check whilst seated in the
crew seat, the seat should automatically fold up as soon as the occupant leaves the seat.
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT STOWAGE BOX
- Check that the emergency equipment stowage opens and closes correctly.
- Check that the latches lock correctly.
UAE A380 12-50-10 P 3/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
A380
UAE A380 12-50-10 P 4/4

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
Lavatory Preflight Check
A380
LAVATORY PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
Lavatory General Overview
The preflight check of the aircraft lavatories consists of a safety–related check and an operational
equipment check of the following equipments.
Note: Any equipment that does not function correctly must be reported to the Chief Purser. The Chief
Purser must inform the flight crew and the maintenance personnel.
UAE A380 12-50-40 P 1/4

CCOM 02-Apr-10
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
A380
AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER

The automatic fire extinguisher is installed above the waste container.
- To access the automatic fire extinguisher, open the door of the waste container.
- Check the pressure gauge on the automatic fire extinguisher. The indicator needle must be in the
green band. This indicates that the automatic fire extinguisher is operational.
WASTE CHUTE FLAP AND WASTE CONTAINER
The preflight check of the waste chute flap and the waste container is to ensure fire containment.
- Check the operation of the waste chute flap The waste chute flap has a self closing mechanism.
Using your hand open the waste chute flap, the waste chute flap must close automatically as soon
as it has been released. The waste chute flap must be level with the washtable surface.
- Check that the waste container access door, fittings, seals and latches correctly.
- Close the waste container access door.
WATER FAUCET
- Check the water faucet for hot and cold running water
- Check that the water drains correctly from the sink.
TOILET FLUSH
The toilet flush check is to ensure that the toilet flush motor works correctly.
- Ensure that the toilet cover is closed
- Press the toilet flush pb
- Check that:
• The toilet flushes correctly
• There is no excessive or unusual noise.
LAVATORY LIGHTING
The lavatory lighting and door locking operation are combined into one check as they work in parallel.
Note: When the lavatory is closed and unlocked, the lavatory lighting is on standby with a 50% level
of brightness. The mirror light and the washtable light will not be on.
- Slide the latch to the left to the lock symbol. When the door is locked, the lavatory lighting
automatically comes on with 100% brightness. Check that the washtable and mirror lights are on.
- Slide the latch to the right to unlock the door. When the door is locked, the lighting intensity will be
reduced to 50%.
UAE A380 12-50-40 P 2/4

CCOM 02-Apr-10
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
A380
LAVATORY DOOR OPERATION

Cabin crew will need to check the unlocking and locking of the lavatory door, in the event of an
emergency.
- Lift up the coverplate marked LAVATORY. Slide the locking pin to the left until the flag displays
VACANT.
- Open the lavatory door.
LAVATORY PASSENGER CALL BUTTON
- Press the Cabin Crew Call pb located on the Lavatory Service Unit (LSU).
- Check that the:
• Cabin crew call pb light comes on.
• A single HI chime is heard through the passenger and cabin crew loudspeakers in the related
zone.
• The light mounted on the outside of the related lavatory wall comes on.
• The amber indicator light on the Area Call Panel (ACP) for the related zone comes on.
• Reset the lavatory passenger call button.
LAVATORY SMOKE DETECTORS
The Cabin Crew should visually check for any signs of tampering with the lavatory smoke detectors .
If foreign objects (such a tissue paper or plastic bags), or signs of tampering are found , the Cabin
Crew should inform the Chief Purser.
UAE A380 12-50-40 P 3/4

CCOM 02-Apr-10
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
A380
UAE A380 12-50-40 P 4/4

CCOM 02-Apr-10
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOP)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
13-10 Introduction
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1
13-20 Abbreviations
Abbreviations ....................................................................................................................................... 1
13-25 General Guidance

13-25-10 Effective Briefings for Cabin Operations
Effective Briefings for Cabin Operations.............................................................................................. 1
13-25-20 Crew Communication

Crew Communication .......................................................................................................................... 1
13-30 Phases Of Flight

FLIGHT PHASES................................................................................................................................. 1
Sterile Cockpit...................................................................................................................................... 2
13-40 Direct View Seats

UD - Cabin Crew Direct View Seats .................................................................................................... 1
MD - Cabin Crew Direct View Seats.................................................................................................... 3
13-50 Preflight Briefing

Preflight Briefing .................................................................................................................................. 1
13-60 Passenger Door Operation

Normal Passenger Door Operation From The Inside .......................................................................... 1
Normal Passenger Door Operation From The Outside........................................................................ 2
Normal Passenger Door Operation From The Outside........................................................................ 4
Manual Passenger Door Operation From The Inside .......................................................................... 4
Manual Passenger Door Operation from The Outside......................................................................... 5
13-70 Cabin Crew Duties

Cabin Crew Safety -Related Duties Pre-Passenger Boarding............................................................. 1
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties during Boarding............................................................................ 1
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties before Pushback .......................................................................... 3
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties during Taxi Before Takeoff........................................................... 4
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties during Takeoff and Initial Climb.................................................... 6
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties during Final Climb ........................................................................ 6
UAE A380 13-TOC P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties during Cruise ................................................................................7

Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties during Top of Descent ..................................................................8
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties during Approach ...........................................................................9
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties during Final Approach and Landing............................................11
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties during Taxi after Landing............................................................11
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties during Disembarkation................................................................12
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties after Passenger Disembarkation ................................................12
13-80 Operational Recommendations for the Use of Stairs

Operational Recommendation for the Use of Stairs.............................................................................1
Boarding...............................................................................................................................................2
Taxi before Takeoff ..............................................................................................................................2
Takeoff and Initial Climb.......................................................................................................................3
Climb ....................................................................................................................................................3
Cruise...................................................................................................................................................4
Initial Descent.......................................................................................................................................5
Final Approach and Landing ................................................................................................................5
Taxi after Landing.................................................................................................................................5
Disembarkation ....................................................................................................................................6
Recommendations For Use of Forward Stairs .....................................................................................7
Recommendations For Use of Rear Stairs...........................................................................................8
13-90 Door Arming Procedure

Door Arming Procedure........................................................................................................................1
13-100 Door Disarming Procedure

Door Disarming Procedure...................................................................................................................1
13-110 Cabin Ready Notification

Cabin Ready notification ......................................................................................................................1
13-120 Access To Cockpit

Cockpit Door Opening From the Cabin ................................................................................................1
Cockpit Door Opening From the Cockpit..............................................................................................2
13-130 Cockpit Sliding Window Operation

Cockpit Sliding Window Operation .......................................................................................................1
UAE A380 13-TOC P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
13-140 Passenger Safety Briefing

Passenger Safety Briefing ................................................................................................................... 1
13-150 Crew Rest Compartments Normal Operation

Crew Rest Compartments - Normal Operation.................................................................................... 1
13-160 Refueling /Defueling with Passengers Onboard

Refueling/Defueling with Passengers Onboard ................................................................................... 1
13-170 Onboard Mobile Telephony System (OMTS)

Operational recommendation for the use of the Onboard Mobile Telephony System (OMTS) ............ 1
Onboard Mobile Telephony System normal operation......................................................................... 2
13-180 Dangerous Goods

Dangerous Goods ............................................................................................................................... 1
UAE A380 13-TOC P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 13-TOC P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
INTRODUCTION
A380
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Crew Operating Manual (CCOM) Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) are those
recommended by Airbus.
Should an operator wish to incorporate their own customized procedure, the operator can do so by
using dedicated tools.
The SOPs are the normal cabin crew operating procedures for standard aircraft operations. The SOPs
are continuously updated and revised. Revisions take into account the feedback received from all
operators, in addition to the results of continuous monitoring of the aircraft's in-service life.
The CCOM procedures that are marked "Airworthiness Related" provide procedures and
limitations that are mandatory, in order to meet cabin safety airworthiness requirements.
The Airworthiness Related Procedures are indicated by "Airworthiness Related" on the
affected procedure page header. An entire procedure may be airworthiness related, or only part
of a procedure may be airworthiness related.
In the case that only on a certain part of a procedure is airworthiness related, this is indicated
by (AR) written in green beside the impacted part of the procedure.
UAE A380 13-10 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
INTRODUCTION
A380
UAE A380 13-10 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
ABBREVIATIONS
A380
ABBREVIATIONS
Applicable to: ALL
ABBREVIATIONS
DESIGNATION ABBREVIATION
Captain CAPT
Chief Purser CHIEF PURS
Upper Deck Purser U PURS
Cabin Crewmember CC
All Cabin Crewmember ALL CC
Upper Stairs Cabin Crewmember US CC
Cabin Crewmember responsible for an exit PRIM CC
FWD Facing Cabin Crewmember FWD CC
AFT Facing Cabin Crewmember AFT CC
Inboard INBD
Outboard OUTBD
Able Bodied Passenger ABP
Forward FWD
Middle MID
AFT AFT
UAE A380 13-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ABBREVIATIONS
A380
UAE A380 13-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
GENERAL GUIDANCE
Effective Briefings for Cabin Operations
A380
EFFECTIVE BRIEFINGS FOR CABIN OPERATIONS

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
A safe flight starts with good planning, and good planning for a flight starts with briefings. Briefings are
a very important part of any flight preparation.
Different briefings take place before the flight:
The Purser to cabin crew preflight briefing The flight crew to cabin crew preflight briefing
The passenger preflight safety briefing

Note: The passenger preflight safety briefing is addressed in the Planned Ground Evacuation Flight
Operations Briefing Notes
There may also be other briefings during the flight for example during unusual, abnormal or emergency
situations.
The aim of briefings is to establish a clear plan of action, communicate and exchange information and
ensure there is a common understanding between all crewmembers .
The aim of this effective briefings is to enable the cabin crew to:
1. Plan and prepare briefings
2. Perform successful briefings
3. Improve communication and coordination onboard the aircraft
Note: The word ‘Purser’ refers to Senior Cabin Crewmember.
BACKGROUND INFORMATION
Briefings are identified as being a crucial ingredient to effective crew resource management to:
- Ensure open communication between the flight crew, the cabin crew and the passengers
- Promote teamwork
- Ensure that task sharing and the workload is evenly distributed
- Set the expectations and standards for the flight.
The lack of some of these elements has been cited in many accident and incident reports as a
contributing factor, for example:
- A lack of communication and coordination between the flight crew and the cabin crew
- Misunderstandings due to ineffective communication
- Errors, due to heavy workload
- Errors, due to intentional/unintentional deviation from procedures.
UAE A380 13-25-10 P 1/6

CCOM 13-Jan-15
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A380
An effective briefing is a valuable tool for cabin crew and flight crew to help manage errors and achieve
a successful outcome.
OBJECTIVES OF CREW BRIEFINGS
The briefing should provide a clear picture of the flight and build a common understanding amongst the
crew of the expectations of the flight.
A successful briefing should be short, interesting and detailed, and should include teamwork,
communication, coordination, planning and anticipating possible events:
Many cabin crew and flight crew are faced with the challenge of
constantly working with different colleagues, often with
colleagues that they have never met or worked with before.
However, they are expected to work in very close proximity for
long periods of time. In this case, it is important to quickly
establish teamwork and synergy.
Good team performance depends on synergy, which means
working together. Synergy is a vital ingredient to effective
teamwork.
The conditions for synergy are:
- A shared goal
TEAM BUILDING AND TEAMWORK - A clear crew structure
- Clear task allocation
- Team spirit
- Good Leadership.
The structure of the cabin crew ensures that each cabin crew
member has a specific role and specific duties related to that
role. The application of good Crew Resource Management
(CRM) within a crew creates the right balance for the crew to
work as an effective team.
For a team to be successful, they must be able to talk to each
other, share information, listen to each other and be assertive,
when necessary.
A good briefing must encourage open, interactive
ENCOURAGE OPEN communication between all crewmembers, emphasizing the
COMMUNICATION importance of questions, input from crewmembers, and
exchanging information.
UAE A380 13-25-10 P 2/6

CCOM 13-Jan-15
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A380
The briefing establishes the chain of command and identifies

the leadership. The Purser organizes the workload and duties of
the cabin crew, and ensures that each cabin crewmember
CREW COORDINATION AND
understands their responsibilities.
WORKLOAD DISTRIBUTION
The workload must be evenly distributed amongst the
crewmembers to avoid individuals from work overload, which
may distract attention from critical tasks, and lead to errors.
Cabin crew activities should be planned, based on the flight
time, the expected flight conditions, the Standard Operating
PLANNING AND TIME
Procedures of the Operator, and the service requirements.
MANAGEMENT
Cabin crew should be encouraged to prioritize tasks during
periods of heavy workload, and according to flight conditions.
Briefings are the ideal moment for cabin crew and flight crew to
discuss the importance of safety duties and responsibilities, to
ensure crew communication, coordination and crew awareness
during unplanned events. Highlight the need for the cabin crew
UNPLANNED EVENTS to:
- Respond promptly and efficiently to any unusual, abnormal
or emergency situation
- Communicate with flight crew and Purser.
WHEN TO PERFORM THE CABIN CREW BRIEFING

Cabin crew preflight briefings and flight crew to cabin crew preflight briefings should be performed
before each duty period. In most countries, cabin crew briefings are mandatory and are required by
the national aviation authority regulations.
Sufficient time should be spent on the briefing to ensure that all crewmembers are familiar with their
operating position and duties. The time will vary depending on the number of crew, size of aircraft,
area of operation, etc.
When possible, the preflight briefings should be held in a designated briefing room. If this is not
possible, the briefing may be performed onboard the aircraft, before passenger boarding begins.
BRIEFING TECHNIQUES
The briefing is addressed to all cabin crewmembers, and is performed by the Purser (senior cabin
crewmember). The expectations, tone and the standards for the flight are set during this briefing.
The Purser must keep in mind the main objectives of the briefing, as well as important information
specific to the flight.
A good tip to conduct an effective briefing is to use the A, B, C rule:
A for Appropriate:
UAE A380 13-25-10 P 3/6

CCOM 13-Jan-15
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A380
The briefing should be relevant and appropriate to the flight. It should highlight the specific details of
the flight. A briefing should be prepared for each individual flight otherwise it may become routine and
repetitive.
The Purser should:
- Plan and prepare the briefing
- Select the relevant information before the briefing.
B for Brief:
A briefing should be as the word suggests, “brief”. The Purser should keep the briefing short to ensure
that the attention of all cabin crew is focused on the most important points.
C for Clear and Concise:
The briefing must be understood by all cabin crew. It should be interactive, and encourage cabin crew
to share information and ask questions. The Purser should adopt good communication methods to
encourage feedback.
SETTING THE TONE FOR EFFECTIVE TEAMWORK
The briefing is the starting point for a high performance team. The Purser must create an environment
where open, interactive communication is encouraged. The Purser can use some practical
communication skills to create such an environment, using positive language and appropriate body
language. For example, the use of the word “we” encourages all cabin crew to participate and
contribute to the flight.
The purser should:
• Use professional and friendly language
• Listen with patience and not interrupt others
• Ask the cabin crew if they have any questions or comments
• Encourage the cabin crew to exchange information and ideas at all times
• Ensure all cabin crew are involved in the briefing
• Answer questions directly
• Use eye contact, as appropriate.
THE PURSER TO CABIN CREW PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
As previously mentioned the briefing should focus on the most important points relevant to the flight.
The cabin crew briefing should cover the following points:
• Introductions: The preflight briefing must always start with professional, respectful introductions, It
is important that the Purser invites the cabin crew to introduce themselves, particularly as they may
not already know each other.
• Flight details: For example, the flight number, destination(s), departure time, estimated time of
arrival, aircraft registration.
UAE A380 13-25-10 P 4/6

CCOM 13-Jan-15
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A380
• Special flight information: For example, passenger loads, special requirements for passengers,
any identified maintenance issues that may affect the flight.
• Workload distribution, task sharing and responsibilities: Clearly define the duties and
responsibilities for each member of the cabin crew, to ensure that they are all aware of their own,
and each others, role. The Purser should take into account the rank and operating experience of
the cabin crew when distributing the tasks. The Purser should ask safety related questions to
ensure that each cabin crew understands their position on board the aircraft.
• Crew Communication and Coordination: Encourage the cabin crew to immediately report and
communicate any unusual, abnormal or emergency situation to the Captain and the Purser. The
Purser should then ensure that each crew member has a clear picture of the situation.
• Review of the operating procedures: To ensure that the cabin crew understand the importance of
performing their duties in accordance with the Operator’s Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)
and emergency procedures. When the procedures are understood and adhered to, they provide a
common ground and understanding for the entire crew, and ensure crew coordination at all times.
• Questions: It is important to provide the cabin crew with the opportunity to ask questions, in order
to clarify that the entire cabin crew has understood the items discussed during the briefing. Many
Operators have cabin crew based in different locations throughout the world. The Purser should
take into account such cultural aspects and remember that not all crewmembers may have the
same understanding.
Note: Cabin crew must be encouraged to report to the Purser, or the flight crew, anything that they
feel may compromise the safety of the flight.
THE FLIGHT CREW TO CABIN CREW PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
Although the work of the flight crew and cabin crew is very different in nature, the flight crew and the
cabin crew work as one crew, with a common goal, the safe completion of the flight.
The sharing of information from the cockpit to the cabin, and from the cabin to the cockpit is essential
to the safety of the flight.
The most important Standard Operating Procedure an Operator can adopt to ensure flight crew and
cabin crew communication and coordination is a flight crew to cabin crew preflight briefing. The
flight crew to cabin crew briefing should encourage open two-way communication, teamwork and
coordination.
The pre-flight briefing should include the following topics:
• Introductions: The flight crew to cabin crew preflight briefing must always start with professional,
respectful introductions,
• The en-route weather: To determine if areas of turbulence are anticipated during the flight and to
manage and secure the cabin in a timely manner.
• The estimated flight time: The flight time may be shorter or longer than expected. This information
will help the Purser with time management to organize cabin activities.
UAE A380 13-25-10 P 5/6

CCOM 13-Jan-15
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A380
• Unusual Situations: For example, armed escorts traveling onboard.

• Cockpit entry procedures: Use of interphone and Cockpit Door Surveillance System (CDSS).
Dimming the lights before entry.
• Sterile cockpit rule: The sterile cockpit procedures should be discussed, for example the signals
and procedures to be applied when the sterile cockpit rule is in effect. During this briefing, the
Purser and Captain should establish the circumstances in which it is acceptable to call the flight
crew when the sterile cockpit rule is in effect.
• Emergency and communication procedures: Use of call/alert system and interphone.
• Anything that the flight crew or the cabin crew need to discuss related to the flight: Any
training taking place in the cockpit. The number of Persons with Reduced Mobility (PRMs) expected
on board and where they will be seated.
SUMMARY OF KEY POINTS
• Operators should allocate a specific period of time and area to ensure that a detailed cabin crew
preflight briefing is performed.
• Operators should include a flight crew to cabin crew preflight briefing as part of their Standard
Operating Procedures (SOPs).
• An effective briefing should be short, interesting and detailed. The briefing should include teamwork,
communication, and coordination, planning and anticipating possible problems.
• Operators should ensure that Pursers receive appropriate training, and have the necessary skills to
perform their tasks, including leadership and briefing skills.
• Operators should ensure that all cabin crew receive Crew Resource Management (CRM) training.
Cabin crew and flight crew should be encouraged to use CRM as part of their work practice, to
enhance team performance, and more importantly, reduce the risk of errors.
UAE A380 13-25-10 P 6/6

CCOM 13-Jan-15
GENERAL GUIDANCE
Crew Communication
A380
CREW COMMUNICATION
Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Effective communication between cabin crew and flight crew is essential. It is a key element in setting
the tone for the management of the flight. Communication enables cabin crew to contribute to the
decision-making process and to enhance situational awareness in normal and abnormal situations.
Communication is essential for the safe operation of the aircraft as many accident analyses have
indicated that communicating information between the cabin and the cockpit is vital to flight safety.
STATISTICAL DATA - BACKGROUND INFORMATION
STATISTICAL DATA
A survey of pilot safety representatives and cabin crew stated that:
• 37 % of the Cabin Crew
• 60 % of the pilots
Thought that communication between flight and cabin crew was adequate.
CREW RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (CRM)
CRM can be defined as the effective use of all available resources (e.g. all crew, aircraft systems
and supporting facilities), to achieve safe and efficient operations (EU-OPS and ICAO)
Initially, CRM was for flight crew only. Today, it is a mandatory part of all cabin crew training in
EASA and FAA operating regions and many countries throughout the world.
It helps crew to be:
• Objective
• Effective
CRM reviews topics such as:
• Situational awareness
• Effective communication
• Planning and decision-making
• Stress awareness
• Human factors
COMPANY CULTURE
The company should encourage good communication between the flight crew and the cabin crew
and provide all employees with:
• The marketing policy (e.g. service-orientation)
UAE A380 13-25-20 P 1/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
GENERAL GUIDANCE
Crew Communication
A380
• The operator safety policy (e.g. Procedures)

The company also has responsibility in promoting:
• The feeling of cooperation and mutual respect and understanding
• Effective communication between flight and cabin crew
• Joint pre-flight briefings for flight and cabin crew to review operational procedures
• Joint debriefings for safety-related occurrences
• Update of Standard Operating Procedures
CREW COMMUNICATION / COORDINATION
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) are a set of written instructions that document a routine or
a repetitive activity during the normal course of their duty. They detail the work processes that are
conducted.
SOPs are a form of communication that is provided by the operators to crew. When the procedures
are understood and adhered to, they provide a common ground and understanding between the
entire crew.
Many operators have crew of different cultures and nationalities who are sometimes based in
various parts of the world. The common language of SOPs enables all crew to work together and
communicate.
SOPs are structured in a specific format and should be followed in a concise, step-by-step manner.
They are designed to ensure that cabin crew go through the correct process when performing
actions such as operating doors and arming/disarming slides.
Emergency procedures are essential when unusual events occur (e.g. oven smoke, etc). Crew can
coordinate following the written procedures and be reactive and effective.
COMMUNICATION WITH ALL GROUND
Communication with maintenance personnel is important when a technical malfunction occurs. All
technical incidents must be reported to them as maintenance personnel ensure the good working
condition of an aircraft.
When catering personnel are onboard the aircraft, cabin crew should be present in the galley area
to monitor catering operations. It enables the cabin crew to ensure that all equipment is in good
working order and clean (e.g. trolleys/brakes, ovens, handles and latches). This gives the cabin
crew the opportunity to have the equipment replaced if possible.
The boarding of the aircraft is a very coordinated task between the flight crew, cabin crew and
boarding staff. In order to avoid confusion and the boarding of the passengers before the cabin
preparation is complete, cabin crew should communicate with the boarding staff.
UAE A380 13-25-20 P 2/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
GENERAL GUIDANCE
Crew Communication
A380
REPORTING
Reporting is another means of communication that enables the cabin crew to inform the flight crew,
safety management or maintenance crew when an unusual event occurs. It is a good way to reduce
or eliminate the risk of incidents/accidents or deviations to procedures.
The cabin crew should function as an extension of the flight crew, to ensure safety in the cabin and
should never hesitate to report to the flight crew when they think that the safety of the cabin is
threatened.
They should raise their situational awareness during operations such as:
DE/ANTI-ICING OPERATIONS:
- A very light coating of snow or ice on the wings can lead a dramatic outcome.
FUELING/DEFUELING:
- Threat of fuel leaks, fire
Passengers can also be a great source of information, and may sometimes be the first to bring
information to cabin crew regarding:
• The cabin (noise, fumes, smoke, fire, loose objects…)
• Other passengers behavior
• Aircraft condition (window seals, wings, fuselage…)
Any event or incident should also be reported if it is believed that:
• The safety of the operation can be improved
• SOPs are not efficient enough
• Some events/incidents should be reviewed during training in order to reduce their
occurrences.
The report of an event/incident can be delivered in different ways:
AURAL:
- The content of the report must be concise, as precise as possible with a clear terminology to
report problems and the actions taken (e.g. oven fire)
WRITTEN:
- The reporting process in the logbook should be as simple as possible and well documented,
including details as to what, where and when (e.g. oxygen used during the flight and needs
to be replaced)
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS AFFECTING CREW COMMUNICATION
Several factors can deteriorate communication between crew:
UAE A380 13-25-20 P 3/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
GENERAL GUIDANCE
Crew Communication
A380
DIFFICULTIES IN THE • Distortion of information due to background noise, excessive

TRANSMISSION OF feedback (and volume) on the Passenger Announcement and
COMMUNICATION interphone.
• Sterile Cockpit rule when the flight crew should only be disturbed
Standard Operating
for safety related issues.
Procedures (SOPs)
Poor communication due to the reinforced cockpit door policy.
FATIGUE • Long flight times, early check-in, late checkout.
STRESS • Company pressure, high workload.
• Crew flying together may be from different nationalities and the
company language may not be their mother tongue. Cultural
CULTURAL DIFFERENCES
differences are not just limited to different countries of origin, but
education, upbringing and values.
• Some operators do not encourage communication between flight
COMPANY CULTURE
and cabin crew.
• One of the parties “assumes” that the other party knows or is
aware of a situation, and there is no communication at all.
ASSUMPTIONS
The sender of a message may assume that the person receiving the
message understands the content and context.
PERCEPTION • Bad or poor perception of each other’s duties.
• A lack of confidence in the abilities of the other members of the
LACK OF CONFIDENCE
crew.
UAE A380 13-25-20 P 4/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
PHASES OF FLIGHT
A380
FLIGHT PHASES
Applicable to: ALL
FLIGHT PHASES
The following flight phases are applicable to cabin operations:
Flight Phases
1. Boarding: Begins when the first passenger enters the aircraft, and ends when all the aircraft doors
have been closed.
2. Pushback: Begins when the jetway is removed, and ends when the aircraft is pushed back.
3. Taxi before Takeoff : Begins with the pushback from the gate, and ends when the aircraft begins
the takeoff roll.
4. Takeoff and Initial Climb: Begins when the takeoff roll starts, (all people onboard are seated with
their seat belts fastened) and ends when the cabin crew are allowed to leave their seats.
5. Final Climb: Begins when the cabin crew leave their seats, and ends when seat belt signs are
switched off, after climb.
6. Cruise: Begins when the seat belt signs are switched off and ends when the seat belt signs are
switched on before descent.
7. Top of Descent: Begins when the aircraft starts to descend, and ends before the approach.
8. Approach: Begins at 10 000 ft (approximately 10 minutes before touchdown), and ends with the
cabin ready signal to the flight crew.
UAE A380 13-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PHASES OF FLIGHT
A380
9. Final Approach and Landing: Begins when the cabin crew are required to take their seats and to
end when the aircraft leaves the active runway.
10.Taxi after Landing: Begins when the aircraft leaves the active runway, and ends when the seat
belts signs are switched off after the final parking position is reached and the aircraft is at a
complete stop.
11.Disembarkation: Begins when the jetway is positioned, and ends when the last passenger has left
the aircraft
12.After Passenger Disembarkation: Begins when all passengers have disembarked, and ends
either at the next boarding, or when the cabin crew leaves the aircraft.
Note: The critical phases of flight are 3, 4, 9 and 10: Taxi before Takeoff, Takeoff and Initial climb,
Final Approach and Landing, Taxi after Landing.
STERILE COCKPIT
Applicable to: ALL
CABIN CREW TO FLIGHT CREW COMMUNICATION DURING CRITICAL PHASES OF FLIGHT

The critical phases of flight, refers to all ground operations involving taxi, takeoff, and landing and all
flight operations when the aircraft is below 10 000 ft.
The aim of the sterile cockpit policy is to enable the flight crew focus on their duties without being
distracted by non-flight related matters.
During the critical phases of flight, the sterile cockpit policy is applied.
Therefore, calls from the cabin crew or entry into the cockpit are restricted to;
Safety and security related matters.
The following are some examples of safety-related situations:
- Fire or smoke in the cabin
- Abnormal noises or vibrations
- Observation of fuel or other fluid leaks
Note: In normal operations, the Chief Purser communicates with the flight crew on behalf of the
cabin crew. In the case of an abnormal or emergency situation being discovered, the first cabin
crewmember to discover a safety-related situation must report it the flight crew immediately.
UAE A380 13-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
DIRECT VIEW SEATS
A380
UD - CABIN CREW DIRECT VIEW SEATS

Note: All CAS marked in RED must be occupied during take off and landing.
TABLE OF CAS TO BE OCCUPIED IN THE UD
All cabin attendant seats (CAS) to be occupied during take-off and landing are indicated by the exact
position (e.g. inboard, if there are two CAS installed side by side) in the row called "CAS". The viewing
direction is given in this row additionally (e.g. facing "aft"). The "AREA" row describes where these
CAS are located, which is normally a door area. The cabin attendants of each area are responsible to
observe the related "ZONE" of the cabin layout.
ZONE 1 2 3
AREA U1L U1R U1L U1R U2L U2R U3L U3R
CAS forward forward aft aft aft aft forward forward
Note: All CAS to be occupied by the cabin crew are marked with a placard: "SEAT MUST BE
OCCUPIED DURING TAKE OFF AND LANDING".
RATING OF DIRECT VIEW SEATS PER ZONE IN THE UD L2
ZONE 1 2 3 Total (UD)

Visible Seats [%] 70/72=97,2% 62/88=70,5% 14/18=77,7% 146/178=82%
The required rating of the direct visibility per zone must exceed 50%, and must be greater than 80% on
each deck.
UAE A380 13-40 P 1/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DIRECT VIEW SEATS
A380
Example: In ZONE 1 only 70 of the 72 installed passenger seats (97,2%) are visible from the CAS at
U1L / U1R Fwd position. In total 146 of the 178 installed passenger seats of the UD are visible (rating =
82%).
UD - CABIN CREW DIRECT VIEW SEATS

UD - Direct View Seats
TABLE OF CAS TO BE OCCUPIED IN THE UD

All cabin attendant seats (CAS) to be occupied during take-off and landing are indicated by the exact
ZONE 1 2 3
AREA U1L U1R U1L U1R U2L U2R U3L U3R
CAS forward forward aft aft aft aft forward forward
RATING OF DIRECT VIEW SEATS PER ZONE IN THE UD L2
ZONE 1 2 3 Total (UD)

Visible Seats [%] 14 / 14 = 100 % 44 / 58 = 75 % 14 / 18 = 77 % 72 / 90 = 80 %
UAE A380 13-40 P 2/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DIRECT VIEW SEATS
A380
each deck.
Example: In ZONE 1 all of the 14 installed passenger seats (100%) are visible from the CAS at U1L /
U1R Fwd position, whereas only 44 of the 58 passenger seats (75%) are visible in ZONE 2 from the
CAS at U1L / U1R Aft position. In total 72 of the 90 installed passenger seats of the UD are visible
(rating = 80%).
MD - CABIN CREW DIRECT VIEW SEATS

MD - Direct View Seats
TABLE OF CAS TO BE OCCUPIED IN THE MD
All Cabin Attendant Seats (CAS) to be occupied during take-off and landing are indicated by the exact
ZONE 5 6 7 8
AREA M1L M1R M2L M2R M3L M4L M4R
CAS aft aft aft inboard aft inboard aft aft aft
outboard outboard outboard
UAE A380 13-40 P 3/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DIRECT VIEW SEATS
A380
RATING OF DIRECT VIEW SEATS PER ZONE IN THE MD L2
ZONE 5 6 7 8 Total (MD)

Visible Seats
88/88=100% 72/132=54,5% 124/124=100% 82/82=100% 366/426=85,9%
[%]
each deck.
Example: In ZONE 5 all of the 88 installed passenger seats (100%) are visible from the CAS at M1L /
M1R Aft position, whereas only 72 of the 132 passenger seats (54,5%) are visible in ZONE 6 from the
CAS at M2L / M2R Aft inboard position. In total 366 of the 426 installed passenger seats of the MD are
visible (rating = 85,9%). The number might exceed a higher number than the total seats. This
theoretical number is caused by the fact, that some seats can be seen from two different ZONES.

UAE A380 13-40 P 4/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DIRECT VIEW SEATS
A380
ZONE 5 6 7 8
AREA M1L M1R M2L M2R M3L M4L M4R
CAS aft aft aft inboard aft inboard aft aft aft
outboard outboard outboard

Visible Seats
88/88=100% 91/143=63,6% 124/124=100% 82/82=100% 385/437=88,1%
[%]
each deck.
M1R Aft position, whereas only 91 of the 143 passenger seats (63,6%) are visible in ZONE 6 from the
CAS at M2L / M2R Aft position. In total 385 of the 437 installed passenger seats of the MD are visible
(rating = 88,1%). The number might exceed a higher number than the total seats. This theoretical
number is caused by the fact, that some seats can be seen from two different ZONES.
UAE A380 13-40 P 5/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DIRECT VIEW SEATS
A380


ZONE 5 6 7 8
AREA M1L M1R M2L M2R M3L M3R M4L M4R
CAS aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft
inboard inboard inboard outboard outboard
RATING OF DIRECT VIEW SEATS PER ZONE IN THE MD

Visible Seats 124/124 =
88/88 = 100% 72/135 = 53% 82/82 = 100% 366/429 = 85%
[%] 100%
each deck.
UAE A380 13-40 P 6/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DIRECT VIEW SEATS
A380
M1R Aft position, whereas only 72 of the 135 passenger seats (53%) are visible in ZONE 6 from the
CAS at M2L / M2R Aft inboard position. In total 366 of the 429 installed passenger seats of the MD are
visible (rating = 85%). The number might exceed a higher number than the total seats. This theoretical


ZONE 5 6 7 8
AREA M1L M1C M1R M2L M2R M3L M3 M4L M4R
R
CAS aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft
inboard inboard outboard outboard
UAE A380 13-40 P 7/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DIRECT VIEW SEATS
A380

86/88 = 97% 72/135 = 53% 80/80 = 100% 362/427 = 85%
[%] 100%
each deck.
(rating = 85%). The number might exceed a higher number than the total seats. This theoretical


ZONE 5 6 7 8
AREA M1L M1C M1R M2L M2R M3L M3R M4L M4R M5L M5R
UAE A380 13-40 P 8/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DIRECT VIEW SEATS
A380
ZONE 5 6 7 8
CAS aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft
inboar inboar outboa outboa outboa outboa
d d rd rd rd rd

70/76 = 92 % 72/135 = 53% 64/64 = 100% 330/399 = 83 %
[%] 100%
each deck.
(rating = 83%). The number might exceed a higher number than the total seats. This theoretical
UAE A380 13-40 P 9/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DIRECT VIEW SEATS
A380
UAE A380 13-40 P 10/10

CCOM 10-Apr-17
PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
A380
PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
Applicable to: ALL
PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
The Preflight Briefing is the starting Block for a high-performance crew. The aim of the briefing is to
organize the crew activities, to ensure that the workload is evenly distributed amongst the crew.
WHO - The Chief Purser conducts the Pre-Flight Briefing

- The entire cabin crew attends the Pre-Flight Briefing
WHY - To highlight:
• Safety and security standards
• Cabin crew performance expectations
• The chain of command
- To encourage:
• A high level of safety
• Communication / Crew Resource Management (CRM)
• Teamwork
• Crew Coordination
WHAT the Pre-Flight - Cabin crewmember introduction and welcome

Briefing must include - An introduction to the flight crew, if possible. (If it is not possible to meet the
flight crew during the cabin crew briefing, the Pursers must brief with the flight
crew on board the aircraft)
- Flight information (aircraft type, aircraft status, flight number, flight
destination, flight duration)
- The allocation of cabin crewmember briefing areas and responsibilities. The
Chief Purser should take into consideration the rank and operating
experience of the cabin crewmembers.
- The allocation of cabin crewmember commercial tasks (galleys, I...)
- Identification of the Pursers that are responsible for each deck
- Cabin crew cooperation aspects:
• Discipline, responsibilities, chain of command and reporting
• Importance of crew coordination and communication
- An in-flight safety review includes:
Exit-row seating requirements / identifying Able-Bodied Passengers
(ABP)
• The need for constant situational awareness
• The importance of silent review
• Sterile cockpit rules and guidelines
• A reminder to report unusual occurrences
UAE A380 13-50 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
A380
WHERE - In a designated briefing room, or

- On board the aircraft
WHEN - At the beginning of each duty period

- At a time that is specifically reserved for this purpose
HOW it must be - The Pursers must prepare the safety briefing in advance, the briefing should
done be relevant, and appropriate to the flight.
- The Pursers must welcome the crew
- All cabin crewmembers should be able to see and hear the Pursers
- The Pursers should speak clearly
- It is important that every cabin crewmember knows their allocated work
position, and their safety responsibilities.
- The briefing should be understood by all the cabin crewmembers.
- Give the cabin crewmembers the opportunity to ask question
- The Pursers must respect time constraints
UAE A380 13-50 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION
A380
NORMAL PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION FROM THE INSIDE

Applicable to: ALL
NORMAL OPENING FROM THE INSIDE

FRAME ASSIST HANDLE...................................................................................................GRASP
DOOR DISARMED..............................................................................................................CHECK
SAFETY PIN INSTALLED ...................................................................................................CHECK
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS .....................................................................................................CHECK
RED CABIN PRESSURE VISUAL WARNING ............................................................CHECK OFF
● If the red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning is flashing:
DOOR................................................................................................................ DO NOT OPEN
TO THE FLIGHT CREW.............................................................................................. REPORT
pressure.
If the cabin crew fails to notice the visual warning, and starts to lift the door
control handle, a second aural warning will come on. In this case, fully lower the
door control handle to the closed position.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR, there is a risk that the cabin door will
open violently due to the cabin not being fully depressurized.
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.........................................................................................LIFT FULLY

DSIP OPEN pb .................................................................................................PRESS AND HOLD
DSIP FULLY OPEN...................................................................................................... CHECK ON
NORMAL CLOSING FROM THE INSIDE
DSIP CLOSE pb ...............................................................................................PRESS AND HOLD
● When the door is facing the door frame
DOOR ASSIST HANDLE ........................................................................GRASP AND PULL IN
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE .............................................................................LOWER FULLY
DOOR.............................................................................................................CHECK LOCKED
The door is locked when the DSIP LOCKEDcomes on, and the door mechanical flags indicate
LOCKED .
UAE A380 13-60 P 1/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
NORMAL PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION FROM THE OUTSIDE

Ident: 13-60 00010637.0001001 / 31-Jan-07
Impacted by: 00025368.0001001

RED CABIN PRESSURE VISUAL WARNING............................................................ CHECK OFF
DOOR ................................................................................................................DO NOT OPEN
pressure.
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE .................................................................. GRASP AND LIFT FULLY

The slide is automatically disarmed, when the doors are opened from the outside.
OUTSIDE OPEN pb ......................................................................................... PRESS AND HOLD
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE ...............................................................LOWER INTO ITS RECESS
FLAP ................................................................................................................................. PUSH IN
OUTSIDE CLOSE pb ....................................................................................... PRESS AND HOLD
DOOR .......................................................................................................................... PUSH IN
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE ............................................. LOWER FULLY INTO ITS RECESS
DOOR ............................................................................................................ CHECK LOCKED
The door is locked when the door control handle is flush with the door surface.
UAE A380 13-60 P 2/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380


DOOR................................................................................................................ DO NOT OPEN
pressure.
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE...................................................................GRASP AND LIFT FULLY

OUTSIDE OPEN pb..........................................................................................PRESS AND HOLD
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE............................................................... LOWER INTO ITS RECESS
FLAP..................................................................................................................................PUSH IN
OUTSIDE CLOSE pb........................................................................................PRESS AND HOLD
DOOR...........................................................................................................................PUSH IN
UAE A380 13-60 P 3/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380

Temporary DU: 00025368.0001001

The outside OPEN pb is deactivated.
The outside CLOSE pb is deactivated.
MANUAL PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION FROM THE INSIDE

Applicable to: ALL
MANUAL OPENING FROM THE INSIDE

FRAME ASSIST HANDLE .................................................................................................. GRASP
DOOR DISARMED ............................................................................................................. CHECK
SAFETY PIN INSTALLED................................................................................................... CHECK
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS..................................................................................................... CHECK
RED CABIN PRESSURE VISUAL WARNING............................................................ CHECK OFF
DOOR ................................................................................................................DO NOT OPEN
TO THE FLIGHT CREW ..............................................................................................REPORT
pressure.
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE ........................................................................................ LIFT FULLY

DOOR ASSIST HANDLE .................................................................................................... GRASP
DOOR ............................................................................... PUSH OUTWARDS AND FORWARDS
GUST LOCK LEVER........................................................................................ CHECK ENGAGED
DOOR LOCKED IN FULLY OPEN POSITION ................................................................... CHECK
UAE A380 13-60 P 4/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
MANUAL CLOSING FROM THE INSIDE

GUST LOCK lever ...................................................................................................... DISENGAGE
DOOR ASSIST HANDLE..............................................................................GRASP AND PULL IN
DOOR............................................................................................................................MOVE AFT
DOOR ASSIST HANDLE ........................................................................GRASP AND PULL IN
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE .............................................................................LOWER FULLY
The door is locked, when the door mechanical flags indicate LOCKED.
MANUAL PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION FROM THE OUTSIDE

Applicable to: ALL
MANUAL OPENING FROM THE OUTSIDE

DOOR................................................................................................................ DO NOT OPEN
TO THE FLIGHT CREW.............................................................................................. REPORT
pressure.
FLAP..................................................................................................................................PUSH IN
DOOR.............................................................................................................................PULL OUT
DOOR.................................................................................................................PUSH FORWARD
Do not use the door control handle to move the door.
GUST LOCK lever ............................................................................................CHECK ENGAGED
UAE A380 13-60 P 5/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE .................................................. LOWER FULLY INTO ITS RECESS

MANUAL CLOSING FROM THE OUTSIDE
GUST LOCK lever...................................................................................................... DISENGAGE
FLAP ................................................................................................................................. PUSH IN
DOOR ...............................................................................PUSH TOWARDS THE DOOR FRAME
Do not use the door control handle to move the door.
DOOR .......................................................................................................................... PUSH IN
DOOR .................................................................................... CHECK CLOSED AND LOCKED
UAE A380 13-60 P 6/6

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
CABIN CREW SAFETY -RELATED DUTIES PRE-PASSENGER BOARDING

Applicable to: ALL
PRE-PASSENGER BOARDING
CHIEF PURSER PURSERS CABIN CREWMEMBERS
- Pre-flight check of emergency equipment.
- Perform security checks, if required.
- Report to Captain: Emergency - Report to Chief Purser: - Report to Pursers: Emergency
equipment discrepancies Emergency equipment equipment discrepancies
found during the pre-flight discrepancies found during the found during the pre-flight
checks. pre-flight checks. checks.
End of Pre- Passenger Boarding
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING BOARDING

Applicable to: ALL
BOARDING
- Go to assigned boarding station
UAE A380 13-70 P 1/12

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
BOARDING
- Brief passengers - Assist unaccompanied
minors, handicapped persons,
families.
- Monitor the amount of
baggage and ensure correct
stowage (overhead bins,
under seats)
- Check that exit and paths are
clear of obstructions
- Check that aisles and
cross-aisles are clear of
obstructions
- Distribute extension and/or
baby seat belts, if necessary
- Manage the passenger flow
(cabin and stairs)
- Ensure that passengers
comply with "No Smoking"
regulations, as applicable.
- Ensure that passenger
seating complies with seating
regulations, as applicable.
- Check that Able-Bodied
Passengers (ABPs) that are
seated at exits.
- Report to Captain: Any - Report to Chief Purser: Any - Report to Pursers: Any
unusual or abnormal situations unusual or abnormal situations unusual or abnormal
situations
End of BOARDING
UAE A380 13-70 P 2/12

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES BEFORE PUSHBACK

Applicable to: ALL
BEFORE PUSHBACK
- Go to assigned door
- Perform the Door Arming Procedure, and cross check the opposite door
- Acknowledge that door checks - Report to Chief Purser: Confirm that doors are armed and
have been received crosschecked
- Check FAP door page
Check that:
- Passengers are seated with
seat belts fastened
- Stowage of passengers and
crew baggage complies with
regulations
- Lavatories are vacant and
secured
- Social areas are vacant and
secured
- Crew rest areas are vacant
doors are locked
- Galleys are secured, all
catering items are correctly
stowed and latched
- Passengers do not use the
forward and rear stairs
- Exits and escape paths are
- Cabin curtains are open and
secured
- Report to Captain: Confirm - Report to Chief Purser: - Report to Pursers: Confirm
passengers count Confirm passengers count passengers count
UAE A380 13-70 P 3/12

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAXI BEFORE TAKEOFF

Applicable to: ALL
TAXI BEFORE TAKEOFF

- Go to assigned stations
- Request cabin crewmembers - Take "Passenger Safety Briefing" position
to take their "Passenger
Safety Briefing" position
- Make the "Passenger Safety - Perform the "Passenger Safety Briefing"
Briefing" announcement Note: For aircraft equipped with pictograms on exit marking signs
and on exit location signs, the cabin crew in charge of the
safety briefing should highlight these pictograms to the
passengers.
UAE A380 13-70 P 4/12

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
TAXI BEFORE TAKEOFF

Check that:
- Passengers are seated with
their seat belts fastened
regulations
- All pre-departure service
items are removed
- Tray tables are in upright and
locked position and cup
holders are stowed
- Seat backs are in upright
position , armrests and
footrests are correctly stowed
secured
secured
- Crew rest areas are vacant,
crew rest doors are closed
and locked
- Galleys are secured, and all
stowed
- TV monitors and in-flight
entertainment equipment are
stowed
- Passengers comply with
Portable Electronic Devices
(PED) restrictions
- Any equipment items required
are stowed as required
- Exit and escape paths are
- Aisles and cross-aisles are
- Ensure that passengers do
- Ensure that passengers and cabin crewmembers do not use the
not use the forward and rear
stairs
UAE A380 13-70 P 5/12

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
TAXI BEFORE TAKEOFF

- Report to Captain "Cabin - Report to Chief purser "Cabin - Report to Purser "Cabin ready
ready for takeoff". Press the ready for takeoff" for takeoff"
CABIN READY pb on the Take designated crew seat and Take designated crew seat
FAP, if installed. secure harness for takeoff. and secure harness for takeoff
- Adjust the cabin lighting
- Take crew seat and secure
harness for takeoff
- Perform the Silent review
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAKEOFF AND INITIAL CLIMB

Applicable to: ALL
TAKEOFF AND INITIAL CLIMB

- Remain seated until instructed to leave seat
Note: However, in accordance with airline policies and procedures, it may be acceptable for cabin
crew to leave their seats for safety related event.
- Ensure that passengers and cabin crewmembers do not use the forward and rear stairs
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING FINAL CLIMB

Applicable to: ALL
FINAL CLIMB
- Adjust cabin lighting - Check lavatories
- Close cabin curtains
- Report to Chief Purser - Report to Pursers
UAE A380 13-70 P 6/12

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING CRUISE

Applicable to: ALL
CRUISE
- Chief Purser may decide, in - Regularly update the Chief - Frequently monitor lavatories,
the absence of instructions Purser galleys and cabin including
from the flight crew, to - Check regularly theFAP stairs, lifts, social areas (at
discontinue non-safety related least every 15 minutes)
tasks during turbulence - Check that the fire detection
- Check regularly FAP systems have not been
disabled or tampered with
- Regularly report to Purser
- Ensure passenger and crew
compliance with all lighted
signs, placards and
crewmembers instructions
- Ensure that passengers use
only permitted electronic
devices
- Maintain communication with - Maintain communication with - Maintain communication with
Flight Crew, Pursers and cabin Chief Purser Pursers
crewmembers - Enter cabin maintenance items - Inform purser of cabin
- Enter cabin maintenance items or any emergency equipment maintenance items or use of
and any emergency equipment use into the cabin logbook. any emergency equipment that
use into the cabin logbook. should be entered in the cabin
logbook
- Organize crew rest : Hand over - Take over the responsibilities
of responsibility to Purser. of the Chief Purser, while the
Complete the "Handover Chief Purser is on his/her crew
sheet" rest break.
Report to flight crew: Any
unusual or abnormal situations
- Report to Flight crew: Any - Report to Chief Purser: Any - Report to Pursers: Any
unusual or abnormal situations unusual or abnormal situations unusual or abnormal situations
UAE A380 13-70 P 7/12

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TOP OF DESCENT

Applicable to: ALL
TOP OF DESCENT
- Make preliminary - Open cabin curtains
announcement to start Check that:
securing the cabin - Passengers are seated, with
seat belt fastened
regulations
secured
- Crew rests areas are vacant.
Crew rest doors are closed
and locked
catering items correctly stowed
- Any equipment items to are
stowed as required
- PED equipment is shut off
- Passengers do not use forward
and rear stairs
- Complete and close the cabin - Report to Chief Purser: Any - Report to Pursers: Any cabin
Logbook. cabin maintenance items and maintenance items and use of
Note: All the reported items use of any emergency any emergency equipment.
should be validated in equipment.
the logbook at the top
of descent. However,
additional items can
be added at any time
before the closure of
the flight.
UAE A380 13-70 P 8/12

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
TOP OF DESCENT
- Ask for any special ground
assistance
- Request all updated arrival
information
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING APPROACH

Applicable to: ALL
APPROACH
CHIEF PURSER PURSER CABIN CREWMEMBERS
UAE A380 13-70 P 9/12

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
APPROACH
When the Fasten Seat Belt signs - Ensure cabin crew secure the When the Fasten Seat Belt signs
come on: cabin for landing. come on, ensure that:
- Perform the Cabin Preparation - Passengers are seated, with
for Landing announcement. seat belts fastened
- Stowage of passenger and
crew complies with
regulations
- Ensure passenger and crew
compliance with all lighted
signs, placards and
crewmember instructions
- Tray tables are in the upright
and locked position, cup
holders are stowed
- Seat backs are in the upright
position, armrests and
foot-rests are correctly
stowed.
secured
secured
- Crew rests areas are
unoccupied. Crew rest doors
are locked and closed
stowed
- TV monitors and In-Flight
Entertainment (IFE)
equipment are stowed
- Passengers comply with
Portable Electronic Devices
(PED) restrictions
- Any equipment, items are
stowed, as required
- Passengers
Continued ondothe
not next
use page
UAE A380 13-70 P 10/12
CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
APPROACH
- Report to the Flight crew - Report to Chief Purser "Cabin - Report to Purser "Cabin
"Cabin ready for landing". ready for landing" ready for landing"
Press the CABIN READY FAP Take designated crew seat and Take designated crew seat
pushbutton, if installed secure harness for landing. and secure harness for
landing.
- Adjust the cabin lighting
- Take designated crew seat and
secure harness for landing.
- Perform silent review
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING FINAL APPROACH AND LANDING

Applicable to: ALL
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING FINAL APPROACH AND LANDING
FINAL APPROACH AND LANDING

- Remain seated until instructed by the Flight crew to leave their seats
- Perform the Silent review
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAXI AFTER LANDING

Applicable to: ALL
CAUTION The cabin crew must remain seated (except to perform a safety related duty) until:
- The aircraft arrives on to the stand
TAXI AFTER LANDING

- Remain seated at designated crew station
- Ensure that passengers do not use the forward or rear stairs
- Perform the Door Disarming procedure and cross check with the opposite door
- Acknowledge doors checks Report to Chief Purser: Confirm Report to Purser: Confirm that
when received that doors are disarmed and doors are disarmed and crossed
crossed checked. checked.
- Check the FAP to verify all
doors are disarmed.
UAE A380 13-70 P 11/12

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING DISEMBARKATION

Applicable to: ALL
DISEMBARKATION
- Go to disembarking station
- Control the access to stairs
- Manage the flow of
passengers (cabin and stairs)
- Ensure that passengers
comply with "NO SMOKING"
regulations, as applicable
- Disembarkation of disabled
passengers.
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES AFTER PASSENGER DISEMBARKATION

Applicable to: ALL
AFTER PASSENGER DISEMBARKATION

- Perform cabin security check
(cabin, galleys, lavatories)
- Report to Captain: Any - Report to Chief Purser: Any - Report to Purser: Any unusual
unusual or abnormal unusual or abnormal or abnormal situations.
situations. situations.
UAE A380 13-70 P 12/12

CCOM 06-Oct-16
OPERATIONAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE USE OF
STAIRS
A380
OPERATIONAL RECOMMENDATION FOR THE USE OF STAIRS

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this section is provide operators with recommendations and guidance material for the
use of the A380 cabin stairs between the main deck and the upper. These recommendations provide
guidance for the use of the cabin stairs in normal and abnormal operations.
Note: Deviations from these recommendations may arise from individual airline policy and therefore
must be addressed by the operator to their National Aviation Regulatory Authority.
In the following sections the use of the forward and rear stairs are treated according to the phase of
flight.
UAE A380 13-80 P 1/8

CCOM 02-Apr-09
STAIRS
A380
BOARDING
Applicable to: ALL
This phase of flight begins when the first passenger enters the aircraft and ends when the aircraft
doors have been closed.
Use of the Forward Stairs
In the case that the aircraft boarding takes place using the main deck only, passengers seated on the
upper deck should use the forward stairs to reach their seats.
To avoid queuing on or in front of the stairs it is recommended that operators use procedures, such as:
- Boarding by zone or seat row (boarding the rear of the cabin first)
- Cabin crew to manage the flow of passengers on and around the stairs
The cabin crewmembers should use the forward stairs during this phase only to assist, guide and
support passengers to climb the stairs. If a passenger requires further help (once they are on the
stairs), the passenger should be directed to another cabin crewmember at the top of the stairs. This is
to:
- Keep cabin crewmember movement to a minimum during the boarding process
- Avoid cross flows on the stairs, which may increase the boarding time
- Avoid a reduction of the number cabin crewmembers on each deck.
When both decks are used for boarding the use of the stairs may be restricted.
To ensure an efficient boarding process, the operator should establish procedures to ensure that:
- All passengers seated on the main deck use the main deck jetway(s)
- All passengers seated on the upper deck, use the upper deck jetway(s)
Use of the Rear Stairs
The rear stairs may be used for passenger boarding.
TAXI BEFORE TAKEOFF

Applicable to: ALL
This phase begins when the aircraft is pushed back from the gate and ends when the aircraft begins
the takeoff roll.
- Passengers must not use the forward or rear stairs during this phase
- Cabin crewmembers should not use the forward or rear stairs during this phase except to perform
safety related duties.
UAE A380 13-80 P 2/8

CCOM 02-Apr-09
STAIRS
A380
TAKEOFF AND INITIAL CLIMB

Applicable to: ALL
This phase begins when the aircraft begins the takeoff roll (all people on board are seated with their
seat belts fastened) and ends when the cabin crewmembers are allowed to leave their seats.
- Cabin crewmembers must not use the forward or rear stairs during this phase
CLIMB
Applicable to: ALL
This phase of flight begins when the cabin crewmembers are allowed to leave their seats and ends
when the seat belt signs are switched off.
- The forward stairs and the rear stairs must not be used by passengers
- The forward stairs and the rear stairs may be used by cabin crewmembers, unless prohibited by the
flight crew.
Note: The cabin crewmembers may be allowed to leave their crew seats before the Fasten Seat Belt
signs are switched off for passengers, for example, to prepare for the in-flight service. Both the
aisles and the stairs, provide an adequate level of safety and the cabin crewmembers may be
allowed to use the stairs during this phase of flight.
The final decision on this issue and the exact time when the cabin crew is allowed to leave
their seats, is subject to the operator's policy in accordance with the National Aviation
Regulatory Authority.
UAE A380 13-80 P 3/8

CCOM 02-Apr-09
STAIRS
A380
CRUISE
Applicable to: ALL
CRUISE
This phase begins when the Fasten Seat Belt signs are switched off and ends when the Fasten Seat
Belt signs are switched on before descent.
Cabin crewmembers should monitor the stairs to ensure that passengers are not sitting or staying on
the stairs.
CAUTION At any one time the number of passengers on the stairs must not exceed the number of
oxygen masks available.
Note: The forward and rear stairs must not be used for transporting meals, drinks etc.. from one deck
to another during the flight. For this purpose the trolley lifts, which are standard equipment
onboard the A380, must be used.
Use of the Forward Stairs
- Passengers and cabin crewmember's may use the forward stairs during this phase
Note: The forward stairs must not be used for transporting meals, drinks etc.. from one deck to
another during the flight. For this purpose the trolley lifts, which are standard equipment
onboard the A380, must be used.
Cabin crewmembers should monitor the stairs to ensure that passengers are not sitting or staying on
the stairs.
Use of the Rear Stairs
- Passengers and cabin crewmembers may use the rear stairs during this phase.
Note: The rear stairs is located in the direct vicinity of the rear upper galley. Passengers will have to
walk through the galley when using the rear stairs. It is common practice that passenger use of
the galley areas is not prohibited, however, it should not be encouraged.
USE OF THE FORWARD AND REAR STAIRS DURING TURBULENCE
When an encounter with turbulence is expected, the Fasten Seat Belt signs will be switched on, a PA
announcement will be made requesting all passengers to return to their seats immediately and to
fasten their seat belts.
Note: Passengers and cabin crew may only use the stairs to return to their allocated seats,
depending on the severity of the turbulence.
UAE A380 13-80 P 4/8

CCOM 02-Apr-09
STAIRS
A380
INITIAL DESCENT
Applicable to: ALL
This phase begins when the Fasten Seat Belt signs are switched on before descent and ends when the
cabin crewmember's are required to take their seats.
- Both stairs must not be used by passengers during initial descent
- Both stairs may be used by cabin crewmembers
Note: The cabin crewmembers will take their seats when required. This may be after the Fasten Seat
belt signs are switched on for passengers. Both the aisles and the stairs provide an adequate
level of safety, the cabin crewmembers may use the stairs during this phase.
The final decision on this issue and the exact time when the cabin crewmembers are required
to take their seats, is subject to the operator's policy in accordance with the operators National
Aviation Regulatory Authorities.
FINAL APPROACH AND LANDING

Applicable to: ALL
This phase begins when the cabin crewmembers are required to take their seats and ends when the
aircraft leaves the active runway.
- Cabin crewmembers should not use the forward or rear stairs
TAXI AFTER LANDING

Applicable to: ALL
This phase begins when the aircraft leaves the active runway and ends when the Fasten seat belts
signs are switched off after the final parking position is reached.
- Cabin crewmembers should not use the forward and rear stairs during this phase.
- Passengers must not use the forward or rear stairs during this phase.
CAUTION Cabin crew must ensure that all passengers remain seated with their seat belts securely
fastened until:
- The aircraft has reached the final parking position and the Fasten Seat Belt signs are
switched off.
UAE A380 13-80 P 5/8

CCOM 02-Apr-09
STAIRS
A380
DISEMBARKATION
Applicable to: ALL
This phase begins when the when the Fasten Seat Belt signs are switched off after the final parking
position is reached and ends when the last passenger has left the aircraft.
USE OF THE FORWARD STAIRS
- If the jetway(s) are used only on the main deck, the forward stairs should be used by the upper deck
passengers to reach the exit(s).
The cabin crewmembers located in the vicinity of the stairs on the upper deck and on main deck, must
manage the flow of passengers to prevent crowding on , or at the end of the stairs.
- If both decks are used for disembarkation the forward stairs should be restricted
- Cabin crewmembers may use the forward stairs during this phase
USE OF THE REAR STAIRS
- Passengers can use the rear stairs for disembarkation
- Cabin crewmembers may use the rear stairs during this phase.
UAE A380 13-80 P 6/8

CCOM 02-Apr-09
STAIRS
A380
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR USE OF FORWARD STAIRS

Applicable to: ALL
FLIGHT PHASE CREW PASSENGERS

Boarding Yes Yes
Push back No(1) No
Taxi before takeoff No(1) No
Takeoff and initial climb No No
Final climb Yes No
Cruise Yes Yes
Top of descent Yes No
Approach Yes No
Final approach and landing No No
Taxi after landing No(1) No
Disembarkation Yes Yes
After passenger disembarkation Yes N/A
EVACUATIONS CREW PASSENGERS

On ground evacuation If Required If Required
Water evacuation If Required If Required
(1) Except for safety related duties.
UAE A380 13-80 P 7/8

CCOM 02-Apr-09
STAIRS
A380
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR USE OF REAR STAIRS

Applicable to: ALL
FLIGHT PHASE CREW PASSENGERS

Boarding Yes Yes
Push back No*(1) No
Taxi before takeoff No*(1) No
Takeoff and initial climb No No
Final climb No No
Cruise Yes Yes
Top of descent Yes No
Approach Yes No
Final approach and landing No No
Taxi after landing No(1) No
Disembarkation Yes Yes
After passenger disembarkation Yes N/A
EVACUATIONS CREW PASSENGERS

On ground evacuation If Required If Required
Water evacuation If Required If Required
(1) Except for safety related duties.
UAE A380 13-80 P 8/8

CCOM 02-Apr-09
A380

Applicable to: ALL
Chief Purser
“CABIN CREW AT DOORS, ARM SLIDES AND CROSS CHECK ......................................... ORDER
Cabin crew responsible for door
DOOR CLOSED, LATCHED AND LOCKED ............................................................................CHECK
Cabin Crew
GREEN MECHANICAL FLAGS ARE CORRECTLY DISPLAYED ...........................................CHECK
DSIP LOCKED INDICATORS IS ON........................................................................................CHECK
SLIDE ARMING LEVER PLASTIC COVER...................................................................................LIFT
SAFETY PIN..........................................................................................................................REMOVE
SLIDE ARMING LEVER ...............................MOVE FULLY FORWARD TO THE ARMED POSITION
SLIDE ARMING LEVER PLASTIC COVER............................................................................. LOWER
SAFETY PIN.............................................................................................................................. STOW
SLIDE ARMING LEVER ......................................................................CHECK IN ARMED POSITION
CROSS CHECK DOORS ................................................................................................... CONDUCT
To crosscheck that the slides are armed, the cabin crewmember must walk over to the opposite door
and visually check that the slide arming lever is in the armed position.
"SLIDES ARMED AND CROSSCHECKED".................. REPORT TO PURSER OR CHIEF PURSER
Chief Purser and Purser
DOORS / SLIDES FAP PAGE ................................................................................................ SELECT
Chief Purser and Purser
ALL DOORS CLOSED AND ALL SLIDES ARMED..................................................................CHECK
UAE A380 13-90 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Oct-13
A380
UAE A380 13-90 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Oct-13
DOOR DISARMING PROCEDURE
A380

Applicable to: ALL
CHIEF PURS
CABIN CREW AT DOORS, DISARM DOORS AND CROSS CHECK .................................... ORDER
PRIM CC
SAFETY PIN...........................................................................................REMOVE FROM STOWAGE
SLIDE ARMING LEVER PLASTIC COVER...................................................................................LIFT
SLIDE ARMING LEVER .................................... MOVE FULLY AFT TO THE DISARMED POSITION
SAFETY PIN...........................................................................................................................INSTALL
SLIDE ARMING LEVER ................................................................ CHECK IN DISARMED POSITION
CROSSCHECK DOOR....................................................................................................... CONDUCT
To crosscheck that the doors are disarmed, the cabin crewmember must walk over to the opposite
door and visually check that the slide arming lever is in the disarmed position.
DOORS DISARMED AND CROSSCHECKED.............. REPORT TO PURSER OR CHIEF PURSER
CHIEF PURS
DOORS / SLIDES FAP PAGE ................................................................................................ SELECT
CHIEF PURS
ALL DOORS CLOSED AND ALL SLIDES DISARMED............................................................CHECK
UAE A380 13-100 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Oct-13
A380
UAE A380 13-100 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Oct-13
CABIN READY NOTIFICATION
A380

Applicable to: ALL
All Cabin Crewmembers

CABIN READY FOR TAKEOFF/LANDING ........................................CONFIRM TO CHIEF PURSER
Press the Area Ready pb on each zone FAP , if installed.
All Cabin Crewmembers
DESIGNATED CREW SEAT .................................................................................................OCCUPY
HARNESS............................................................................................................................... FASTEN
Chief Purser
CABIN READY............................................................................................... NOTIFY FLIGHT CREW
● CABIN READY function (if installed) :
Chief Purser
CABIN READY PAGE ....................................................................................................... SELECT
Chief Purser
CABIN READY pb ............................................................................................................... PRESS
Chief Purser
DESIGNATED CREW SEAT .................................................................................................OCCUPY
Chief Purser
HARNESS............................................................................................................................... FASTEN
UAE A380 13-110 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
A380
UAE A380 13-110 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ACCESS TO COCKPIT
A380
COCKPIT DOOR OPENING FROM THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
CC
ACCESS CODE.................................................................................................. ENTER ON KEYPAD
CC
COCKPIT DOOR .................................. STAND IN FRONT OF THE DOOR FACING THE COCKPIT
● If entry is authorized by the flight crew
- The flight crew unlocks the door via the DOOR LOCK switch.
- The keypad's green light comes on steady, and indicates that door is unlocked.
CC
DOOR ........................................................................................................................ PUSH TO OPEN
● If entry is unauthorized by the flight crew
- The cockpit door remains locked , and cannot be opened.
- The keypad 's red light comes on steady
- The keypad is inhibited for a predetermined time.
Note: The locking time-period of 5t o20 minis predetermined by the operator. .
● If there is no reaction from the flight crew
CC
ACCESS CODE ...................................................................................... RE-ENTER ON KEYPAD
Repeat the above procedure.
● If there is no reaction from the flight crew, after the second request
CC
FLIGHT CREW........................................................................................CALL VIA INTERPHONE
Establish contact with the flight crew and request access to the cockpit.
● If the flight crew does not answer the cabin crew interphone call:
CC
THE FOLLOWING EMERGENCY PROCEDURE................................................................APPLY
CC
EMERGENCY ENTRY CODE................................................................... ENTER, AND PRESS #
A buzzer will sound continuously in the cockpit and the keypad's green light flashes. After a
preselected time between 15 and 120 s, the keypad's green light comes on steady, and the cabin
crew can then push the door open.
UAE A380 13-120 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ACCESS TO COCKPIT
A380
CC
DOOR ...................................................................................................................PUSH TO OPEN
COCKPIT DOOR OPENING FROM THE COCKPIT

Applicable to: ALL
1st method
CC
CKPT DOOR SWITCH...........................................................................................................UNLOCK
Unlock switch position must be maintained to unlock the door.
The green LED comes on, on the keypad.
CC
COCKPIT DOOR..........................................................................................................................PULL
The door can only be opened by pulling it during switch activation.
2nd method
CC
DEAD BOLT ................................................................................................................................TURN
CC
COCKPIT DOOR..........................................................................................................................PULL
UAE A380 13-120 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
COCKPIT SLIDING WINDOW OPERATION
A380

Applicable to: ALL
OPENING
UNLOCK pb......................................................................................................PRESS AND HOLD
As soon as the UNLOCK pb is pressed, a red unlock indicator appears to show that the window is
unlocked.
CONTROL HANDLE.................................................................................................. ROTATE AFT
This will release the window from its fixed structure.
CONTROL HANDLE....................................................................................... PULL BACKWARDS
This will move the window panel backwards.
At the end of travel, the window is locked in the open position.
CLOSING
UNLOCK pb......................................................................................................PRESS AND HOLD
CONTROL HANDLE..................................................................................................... PUSH FWD
The control handle must be pushed until the window panel is in front of its fixed frame.
CONTROL HANDLE.................................................................................................ROTATE FWD
This will move the window panel into its frame.
The window is closed and locked, when the red indicator on the control handle is no longer visible.
UAE A380 13-130 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
A380
UAE A380 13-130 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFING
A380

Applicable to: ALL
The safety briefing will prepare passengers for an emergency by providing them with information
regarding the location and operation of emergency equipment that they may have to operate in the
case of en emergency.
Passengers who are well briefed are better prepared for an emergency.
HOW - A verbal announcement made by the Chief Purser and a demonstration

performed by the cabin crewmembers or,
- By an audio visual presentation
WHAT the The Passenger Safety Briefing should include the following:
Passenger Safety
- Smoking regulations
Briefing must
- Back of the seat to be in the upright position and the tray table stowed
include
- Location of the emergency exits
- Location and the use of floor proximity escape path markings
- Stowage of hand baggage
- Restrictions on the use of portable electronic devices
- The location and contents of the safety briefing card
Passengers must receive a demonstration of the following:
- The use of safety belts and/or safety harnesses, including how to fasten and
unfasten the seat belts and/or safety harnesses
- The location and use of oxygen equipment. Passengers must also be briefed to
extinguish all smoking materials when oxygen is used.
- The location and use of life vests, if required.
Individual safety briefings
An individual safety briefing must be provided to a passenger who is unable to
receive information contained in the standard safety briefing. These passengers
may be;
- Visually impaired
- Hearing impaired
WHERE When the cabin crewmembers perform a demonstration, they should stand in their
assigned brief and secure areas, in the cabin.
When an audio visual presentation is provided cabin crewmembers should stand in
their assigned brief and secure area in the cabin and point to the exits..
UAE A380 13-140 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
A380
WHEN After takeoff

Passengers are reminded of the following:
- The use of seat belts including the safety benefits of keeping seat belts fastened
irrespective of the Fasten Seat Belt sign status.
In-flight
Due to turbulence passengers must be instructed to return to their seats and
fasten their seat belts.
In an emergency in-flight, passengers are instructed in the emergency action that
is appropriate to the circumstances.
Before landing
- Use of seat belts and/or safety harnesses
- Back of the seat to be in the upright position and tray table stowed
- Restrictions on the use of portable electronic devices
- Restow and secure hand baggage in the correct locations.
After landing
- To remain seated with seat belts securely fastened until the aircraft has come to a
complete stop and the Fasten Seat Belt signs have been switched off.
HOW it must be Passenger briefings and safety demonstrations are the same for both decks, and
done must be performed in a standardized manner:
- The speaker must clearly enunciate passenger briefings, and should pause
between sentences
- Cabin crewmembers must simultaneously perform the safety demonstration, and
their gestures should reflect the speaker's step-by-step instructions in real time.
To clearly point out areas or safety items within the aircraft: The cabin
crewmember should ensure that their fingers (on both hands) are together, and
point towards the indicated area.
UAE A380 13-140 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
CREW REST COMPARTMENTS NORMAL OPERATION
A380
CREW REST COMPARTMENTS - NORMAL OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
LDCRC/MDCRC/UDCRC/FCRC
A preflight inspection of the crew rest compartment emergency equipment must be completed.
A security check of the crew rest compartments should be completed before each flight departure.
WARNING 1. During the flight, the occupancy of the crew rest compartments are limited to the
total number of bunks and / or seats that are installed in the compartment
2. The occupancy of the crew rest compartments may only be used by operating
crewmembers who are trained in the use of emergency equipment, emergency
procedures and the systems of the crew rest compartments
3. Smoking is prohibited in the crew rest compartments
4. The crew rest compartment is limited to the stowage of the crewmembers
personal baggage only. The stowage of cargo or passenger baggage is
prohibited.
- During taxi, takeoff, final approach landing, the crew rest compartments must be:
- Unoccupied
- Doors closed and locked.
- During the flight, when the crew rest compartments are occupied, the occupants must ensure
that their seat belts are fastened while seated or lying down.
LOWER DECK CREW REST COMPARTMENT (LDCRC)
The stairwell hatch must remain open, and secured with the hatch retainers, at all times when the
LDCRC is occupied.
To isolate the LDCRC from cabin noise, the stairwell door should be closed, but the stairwell hatch
must remain open and secured.
In case of smoke or fire in the LDCRC or in the cargo compartments, the stairwell hatch must be
closed, in order to isolate these compartments.
CAUTION The LDCRC stairwell hatch may only be closed when the LDCRC is
unoccupied/evacuated.
A post-flight security inspection of the crew rest compartments must be performed before the cabin
crew disembark from the aircraft.
UAE A380 13-150 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
CREW REST COMPARTMENTS NORMAL OPERATION
A380
UAE A380 13-150 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
REFUELING /DEFUELING WITH PASSENGERS ONBOARD
A380
REFUELING/DEFUELING WITH PASSENGERS ONBOARD

Applicable to: ALL
CAUTION The ground area beneath the exits intended for emergency evacuation and slide
deployment must be kept clear. Operators will need to designate such exits, taking into
account their ground servicing and catering operations.
The flight crew must notify the cabin crew before beginning to refuel/defuel.
CABIN PREPARATION BEFORE REFUELING/DEFUELING
The cabin crew must coordinate actions with the flight crew to ensure that:
Captain
FASTEN SEAT BELT SIGNS................................................................................................... OFF
NO SMOKING SIGNS ................................................................................................................ON
Chief Purser
CABIN LIGHTING.......................................................................................................................ON
The cabin lighting must be on to enable identification of the emergency exits.
The cabin crew must check the following:
Cabin crewmembers
CABIN CURTAINS ..................................................................................... OPEN AND SECURED
EXITS ...................................................................................... CLEAR OF ANY OBSTRUCTIONS
AISLES AND CROSS-AISLES................................................ CLEAR OF ANY OBSTRUCTIONS
PASSENGER BRIEFING BEFORE REFUELLING/DEFUELLING
Chief Purser
PASSENGER BRIEFING .............................................................................................. PERFORM
Cabin crewmembers
PASSENGER COMPLIANCE..............................................................................................CHECK
DOOR AND EXIT PREPARATION DURING REFUELING/DEFUELING
Cabin crewmembers
AT DOORS........................................................................................................................ REMAIN
At least one cabin crew member must be stationed at each door, and must be prepared for an
emergency , if required.
UAE A380 13-160 P 1/2

CCOM 06-Oct-16
REFUELING /DEFUELING WITH PASSENGERS ONBOARD
A380
UAE A380 13-160 P 2/2

CCOM 06-Oct-16
ONBOARD MOBILE TELEPHONY SYSTEM (OMTS)
A380
OPERATIONAL RECOMMENDATION FOR THE USE OF THE ONBOARD MOBILE

TELEPHONY SYSTEM (OMTS)
The purpose of this section is to provide operators with recommendations and guidance material for
the use of the Onboard Mobile Telephony System (OMTS). These recommendations provide guidance
for the use of the Onboard Mobile Telephony System in normal and abnormal operations.
These recommendations are applicable provided the OMTS function is installed and activated.
PASSENGER BRIEFINGS
The use of the OMTS onboard the aircraft must be clearly explained to passengers in order to
maintain aircraft safety by ensuring passenger compliance with lighted signs, placards, and
crewmember instructions.
Passenger announcements should be made prior to and during passenger boarding to ensure that
passengers are aware and reminded of the restrictions that apply to the use of mobile phones, and
other transmitting devices onboard the aircraft.
PRE-DEPARTURE BRIEFING
It is recommended that the following information is included in the pre-departure passenger briefing:
- Instruct passengers to pay attention to the lighted "No Mobiles" cabin signs, and placards, which
will indicate when the system may or may not be used.
- Clearly brief the passengers on the "No Mobiles" lighted signs, clearly emphasizing that all
mobile telephones must be switched off when the "No Mobiles" lighted signs come on and the
associated chime sounds.
- Inform passengers that in the case of an emergency the service will be disabled.
- Inform passengers that only mobile phones are allowed to be used when the onboard service is
available. All other phones or communication devices for instance satellite telephones must
remain switched off during the entire flight.
Note: It is strongly recommended that in order not to distract passengers from the cabin safety
briefing, that the mobile phone briefing is performed separately. (This should describe the
operator’s policies and procedures).
CABIN CREW AWARENESS
- The cabin crew should monitor passenger use of mobile phones during all phases of flight and,
when necessary, ensure passenger compliance.
- The cabin crew should be alert to passenger misuse of mobile phones.
- Increase flight crew and cabin crew communication and co-ordination to manage interference or
other safety related problems related to the use of mobile phones.
UAE A380 13-170 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
- The cabin crew should be aware of the correct procedures to disable the Onboard Mobile
Telephony System service, if required.
Refer to 06-210-30 How to Turn ON/OFF the Mobile Telephony Service
ONBOARD MOBILE TELEPHONY SYSTEM NORMAL OPERATION

This procedure is applicable provided the OMTS function is installed and activated.
NORMAL OPERATION
When the altitude has reached 13 124 ft (4 000 m), the OMTS is automatically enabled.
On the FAP, SERVICE OVERVIEW page of the CABIN CONNECTIVITY application:
MOBILE TEL. CONNECTION.......................................................................................CHECK ON
The service status availability indicator should be green and, the Service key should be ON and
green .
When the OMTS is available, the NO MOBILE cabin signs go off (and optionally an associated
chime sounds).
Note: During night flights, the voice calls can be switched off by pressing the Quiet Mode key on
the FAP page. In this case, calls will be limited to E-mail and SMS only.
UAE A380 13-170 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
ONBOARD MOBILE TELEPHONY SYSTEM NORMAL OPERATION

This procedure is applicable provided the OMTS function is installed and activated.
NORMAL OPERATION
When the altitude has reached 13 124 ft (4 000 m), the OMTS is automatically enabled.
MOBILE TEL. CONNECTION ...................................................................................... CHECK ON
The service availability indicator should be green and, the ON/OFF key should be ON and green .
When the OMTS is available, the NO MOBILE cabin signs go off (and optionally an associated
chime sounds).
Note: During night flights, the voice calls can be switched off by pressing the Quiet Mode ON key
on the FAP page. In this case, calls will be limited to E-mail and SMS only.
● If the use of mobiles phones must be interrupted during the flight:
PAX Sign ON key ..................................................................................................................ON
When the PAX Sign ON key is selected, a single chime will sound (If installed).
CABIN CREW .................................................................................... INFORM PASSENGERS
The cabin crew must make an announcement requesting passengers to turn off their mobile
phones.
UAE A380 13-170 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
UAE A380 13-170 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
DANGEROUS GOODS
A380
DANGEROUS GOODS
Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Many everyday items and substances can be dangerous when transported by air.
Due to the variations in temperature and pressure during a flight, some of these items may leak or
break, generating toxic fumes or possibly starting a fire.
Employee’s who may come into contact with dangerous goods need to be aware of the nature of such
goods, their potential for causing incidents and accidents and how they should be dealt with.
DEFINITION
The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) defines dangerous goods as;
“Articles or substances which are capable of posing a risk to health, safety, property or the environment
and which are shown in the list of dangerous goods in the technical instructions or which are classified
according to those instructions.”
DANGEROUS GOODS REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS RECOMMENDATIONS
The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) and the International Air Travel Association (IATA)
provide guidance material for Operators who wish to develop their dangerous goods training programs.
The ICAO and IATA guidance material is updated annually and provides Operators with an excellent
source of information on dangerous goods.
EASA, the FAA and many Aviation authorities require that Operators provide dangerous goods training
for cabin crew during initial and recurrent training.
This training should include :
1. The risks involved in carrying dangerous goods by air.
2. How to deal with a dangerous goods incident onboard the aircraft.
DANGEROUS GOODS CLASSIFICATION
Dangerous goods are classified into hazard classes. Each hazard class is divided into several sections
and specific labels are applied to each one of these classes and/or sections.
A system of diamond-shaped placards and labels are used to identify dangerous goods. Different
colors and symbols, such as a flame for flammables or skull and crossbones for poisons, identify the
dangers associated with the product.
Note: These symbols are as Known at the time of the publication and are subject to revision.
Operators should refer to the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations.
Class 1 : Explosives
UAE A380 13-180 P 1/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
DANGEROUS GOODS
A380
Explosive substances, explosive articles, and pyrotechnic devices, for

example, ammunition, and fireworks
Class 2: Gases
Class 2.1 Flammable Gas: Gases, which ignite on contact with an ignition
source, such as acetylene and hydrogen
Class 2.2 Non-Flammable Gases: Gases, wich are neither flammable nor
poisonous.
Class 2.3 Poisonous Gases : Gases liable to cause death or serious injury
to humans if inhaled for example hydrogen cyanide
Class 3: Flammable liquids

Examples are petrol, alcohol, and perfume.
Class 4: Flammable Solids
UAE A380 13-180 P 2/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
DANGEROUS GOODS
A380
Class 4.1 Flammable solids Examples are matches, flammable
Class 4.2: Spontaneous Combustibles Substances liable to spontaneous

combustion
Class 4.3: Dangerous When Wet Solid substances that emit a flammable
gas when wet or react with water when wet, such as sodium and potassium.
Class 5 : Oxidizing Agents and Organic peroxides

Class 5.1 Oxidizing Agent oxidizing agents, which are not organic such as
ammonium nitrate and chemical oxygen generators.
Class 5.2 Organic Peroxides Are thermally unstable substances that may
undergo heat generating, self-accelerating decomposition. These substances
are sensitive to impact or friction, or may create a dangerous reaction when in
contact with other substances. These substances may be explosive and burn
rapidly. Some examples are, fertilizers and pool chemicals.
Class 6: Toxic (poisonous) and infectious substances
UAE A380 13-180 P 3/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
DANGEROUS GOODS
A380
Class 6.1 Toxic substances Those substances that are liable to cause
death or injury if swallowed, inhaled or absorbed through the skin. Examples
are pesticides, poisons and mercury.
Class 6.2 Infectious substances Those known to contain, or reasonably

expected to contain, pathogens, such as Bacteria, Viruses and medical waste
(used needles).
Class 7: Radioactive materials

Radioactive substances - I-White
Class 8: Corrosives
Corrosive substances can dissolve organic tissue or severely corrode certain
metals for example, hydrochloric acid or sulfuric acid contained in batteries.
Class 9: Miscellaneous
Hazardous substances such as dry ice and magnets.
UAE A380 13-180 P 4/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
DANGEROUS GOODS
A380
DANGEROUS GOODS ACCEPTED IN THE CABIN

Passengers and cabin crew are permitted to carry a limited amount of classified dangerous goods for
personal use in their carry-on baggage, such as:
• Toiletry articles: e.g. perfume, nail polish and nail polish remover
• Small lithium and lithium-ion batteries, such as those found in portable electronic devices
• Alcoholic beverages, with an alcohol content of less than 70%
• Dry ice .
Note: The types of items that are authorized onboard the aircraft may vary in each country,
depending on the local aviation authority and security regulations.
Other classificated dangerous goods that are permitted in the cabin include required emergency
equipment, in airworthiness regulations, such as :
• Oxygen
• Fire extinguishers
• CO2 gas cylinders to inflate the life vests.
PROHIBITED DANGEROUS GOODS
The discovery of the following items in the cabin must be considered as a dangerous goods incident as
the items below are strictly prohibited for transport in the cabin:
Explosives Fireworks, Fares, Toy gun caps

Compressed gases Filled or partly filled aqualung cylinders (including
camping gas cylinders)
Flammable liquids and solids Lighter fuel, Non-Safety matches, Paints, Thinner,
Fire lighters
Oxidizers Some bleaching powders
Organic peroxides Some types of solid hydrogen peroxide
Poisons Arsenic, Cyanide and weed-killer
Irritating materials Tear gas devices
Infectious substances Live virus materials
Radioactive materials Medical or research samples which contain
radioactive sources
Corrosives Acids, alkalis, wet cell type car batteries and
caustic soda
Magnetized materials Instruments containing magnets.
UAE A380 13-180 P 5/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
DANGEROUS GOODS
A380
DANGEROUS GOODS HANDLING

Operator’s should provide dangerous goods response kits onboard the aircraft to enable the cabin
crew to deal with a dangerous goods incident. A dangerous goods response kit usually contains the
following minimum equipment:
• Large, heavy quality polyethylene bags
• Bag ties to seal the bags correctly after use
• Long rubber gloves.
If a dangerous goods response kit is not provided onboard the aircraft, the cabin crew must improvise
using the equipment that is available. There are many pieces of equipment in the cabin that the cabin
crew may use in this case, such as:
• Oven gloves/fire gloves that can be covered with plastic bags to protect the hands
• Large and small polyethylene bags, e.g. waste bin bags, duty free bags or airsickness bags
• Absorbent materials, e.g. paper towels, newspapers or headrest covers
• Catering boxes
• Towels
• Blankets.
DISCOVERY OF DANGEROUS GOODS IN THE CABIN
The first alert to a dangerous goods spillage or leak may be from a passenger who notices an unusual
odor or fumes or who simply identifies an item that is leaking from cabin baggage. when a dangerous
good is discovered in the cabin, crew must notify the flight crew immediately.
The cabin crew should ask the passenger concerned to identify the item. The passenger may be able
to provide the cabin crew with some guidance on the hazard involved. The cabin crew should try to
collect as much information as possible, e.g. check for:
• A dangerous goods label
• Numbers on the packaging
• Written information on the packaging
• Odors
• Fumes
• Smoke
• An effect on passengers.
In the case of a spill of known or suspected dangerous goods in powder form:
• Leave everything undisturbed
• Do not use a fire extinguisher or water
• Cover the area with polyethylene, plastic bags and blanket
• Isolate the area until after landing.
UAE A380 13-180 P 6/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
DANGEROUS GOODS
A380
CREW COMMUNICATION AND COORDINATION

The cabin should provide the flight crew with an accurate description of the item, and the effects in the
cabin, in order to help the fight crew to apply the appropriate procedure. It is essential that the cabin
crew and flight crew coordinate their actions and that they keep each other fully informed of their
actions and intentions.
PROTECTION
The cabin crew should put on gloves before they touch leaking, suspicious packages or items in order
to protect their hands. If rubber gloves are not provided, fire-resistant gloves or oven gloves covered by
polyethylene bags are a suitable alternative.
The cabin crew should also use Portable Breathing Equipment (PBE) to protect themselves from
fumes or smoke.
If there are fumes or smoke, the cabin crew should take prompt action and move passengers away
from the affected area, provide wet towels or cloths to passengers, and instruct passengers to breathe
through them.
If the item or substance is emitting fumes or smoke, or if there is a fire, the cabin crew must apply the
procedures Refer to 14-20 Basic Cabin Fire Fighting Procedure
Water should not be used on a spillage or when fumes are present as it may spread the spillage
or increase the fumes. Consideration should also be given to the possible presence of
electrical components when using water extinguishers.
DANGEROUS GOODS REMOVAL
The dangerous good and the associated contaminated materials should be removed from the cabin.
The dangerous good should be placed in a dangerous goods bag or a polyethylene bag, with the
broken part or opening facing upwards. Put all materials that become contaminated when removing the
dangerous good in the same bag.
Close the bag and expel excess air, twist the open end of the bag, and seal it by tying a knot or using a
bag tie.
Note: The cabin crew must not make the bag airtight. It must be tight enough to be secure, but not so
tight that pressure equalization cannot take place.
Take off the gloves, and avoid skin contact with any contaminants. Put the gloves in the second bag.
Place the first bag into the second dangerous goods bag using the same procedure.
All contaminated materials, such as seat covers and sections of carpet should be treated in the same
manner as a dangerous good.
STOWING DANGEROUS GOODS ITEMS
After the cabin crew clean up the dangerous goods spill, they must ensure that the polyethylene bags
containing the dangerous goods are safely stowed and secured.
UAE A380 13-180 P 7/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
DANGEROUS GOODS
A380
If a catering box is available, the cabin crew can use it to store the bags containing the dangerous
goods.
Dangerous goods should be stored in a location that is as far away from the cockpit and passengers as
possible. The cabin crew may use an aft galley or aft lavatory, if possible. However, boxes or plastic
bag(s) must not be stored against the pressure bulkhead or fuselage wall.
If the cabin crew uses a lavatory to store dangerous goods, boxes should be put on the floor, bag(s)
should be stowed in an empty waste container, and the lavatory door should be locked from the
outside. Using the lavatory to store the dangerous goods will prevent fumes from entering the cabin.
Note: In a pressurized aircraft, if a lavatory is used, any fumes will be vented away from passengers.
When moving a box that contains dangerous goods, the cabin crew must ensure that the opening
remains upward. When moving a bag, the cabin crew must ensure that the receptacle containing the
dangerous goods remains upright.
Regardless of the location of the catering box or bag, the cabin crew must secure them firmly to
prevent them from moving.
REPORTING A DANGEROUS GOODS INCIDENT
The cabin crew and flight crew should coordinate to complete an Air Safety Report following a
dangerous goods incident. In many countries this report is mandatory. This report should include:
- The date of the incident or accident, or the discovery of undeclared or incorrectly declared
dangerous goods
- The flight number and flight date
- A description of the goods and the location found in the cabin
- The type of packaging, and the packaging specification marking on it
- Passenger details, e.g. seat number, name, address
- Crew actions
- Any other relevant information.
The cabin crew must enter the details of the incident in the aircraft maintenance logbook, so that the
maintenance personnel can replace the dangerous goods kit (if installed) and repair any damage to the
cabin caused by the incident.
On Arrival
After landing, notify the ground personnel of all the known facts about the Dangerous Goods item and
where it is stowed.
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN AN IN-FLIGHT DANGEROUS GOODS
INCIDENT
When dangerous goods are discovered in the cabin, this may be an indication of other problems, such
as:
UAE A380 13-180 P 8/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
DANGEROUS GOODS
A380
A lack of security screening on ground

A lack of dangerous goods awareness training for passenger handling staff and security staff
Not adhering to the Operator’s policy regarding the transportation of dangerous goods in the cabin
A lack of visible information provided to passengers regarding dangerous goods that may be carried
onboard, e.g. at check-in desks or on the tickets.
PREVENTION STRATEGIES
Dangerous goods are regularly and routinely carried on passenger and all cargo aircraft and present
little hazard in transport provided they are correctly identified, packaged and handled. But, Dangerous
Goods can be potentially harmful to passengers and crew if they release smoke or fumes in the cabin
or develop into an on-board fire.
Therefore, both the operator and the cabin crew should take the following preventive actions:
• Display notices for passengers at check-in areas, ticket sales desks, etc.
• Ensure that the regulations regarding the transportation of dangerous goods are strictly adhered to
by ground personnel, passengers and the cabin crew and flight crew
• Provide detailed and precise procedures for dangerous goods handling and emergencies to all
employees who may come into contact with dangerous goods.
UAE A380 13-180 P 9/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
DANGEROUS GOODS
A380
UAE A380 13-180 P 10/10

CCOM 13-Jan-15
ABNORMAL / EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
14-10 Introduction
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1
14-20 Smoke and Fire Procedures

Guidelines for In-flight Smoke and Fire Management ......................................................................... 1
Classes of Fire..................................................................................................................................... 3
Awareness to Smoke and Fires in Hidden Areas ................................................................................ 6
Area Specific Fires............................................................................................................................... 8
█ Definition and Description of Fire fighting Roles █....................................................................... 10
█ Basic Cabin Fire Fighting Procedure █ ......................................................................................... 12
█ Cabin Smoke/Fire Procedure Hidden Area or Unknown Source █............................................... 13
█ Lavatory Smoke/Fire Procedure █ ................................................................................................ 14
█ PAX Seat Smoke/FIRE █.............................................................................................................. 16
█ Cabin Work Station (CWS)/REMOTE CONTROL CENTER (RCC) Smoke Procedure █ ............ 17
█ Galley Smoke/Fire Procedure █.................................................................................................... 18
█ Oven Smoke / Fire Procedure █ ................................................................................................... 19
█ OVERHEAD BIN Smoke/Fire Procedure █................................................................................... 20
█ LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE █.......................................................................................................... 22
█ STORAGE PROCEDURE AFTER A LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE █............................................... 23
█ Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment Smoke/Fire Procedure █ .................................................. 24
█ Cabin Crew Rest Compartment Smoke/Fire Procedure █............................................................ 26
█ Flight Crew Rest Compartment Smoke/Fire Procedure █ ........................................................... 28
█ Forward Smoke Curtain Operation █ ............................................................................................ 30
█ Aft Smoke Curtain Operation █..................................................................................................... 32
14-30 Emergency Communications

█ Emergency Calls █.......................................................................................................................... 1
Planned Emergency Landing............................................................................................................... 1
Unplanned Emergency Landing .......................................................................................................... 4
14-40 Emergency Cabin Evacuation

Evacuation Guidelines ......................................................................................................................... 1
Duties For Evacuation.......................................................................................................................... 8
█ Emergency passenger door operation █....................................................................................... 10
█ On Ground Evacuation █ .............................................................................................................. 12
█ Cabin Preparation For Planned On Ground Evacuation █............................................................ 14
█ Cabin Preparation for Ditching █................................................................................................... 16
█ Main Deck Planned Ditching █...................................................................................................... 19
UAE A380 14-TOC P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
█ Upper Deck Planned Ditching █ ....................................................................................................21

█ Unplanned Ditching █...................................................................................................................24
14-50 Emergency Cockpit Evacuation

█ Cockpit Evacuation Through Window █ ..........................................................................................1
█ Cockpit Evacuation Through Cockpit Door █ ..................................................................................1
14-60 Depressurization
ABNORMAL CABIN ALTITUDE...........................................................................................................1
Depressurization Warnings ..................................................................................................................2
█ Cabin Depressurization █................................................................................................................3
█ Crew rest compartment depressurization █ ....................................................................................4
14-70 Crew Rest Compartment Procedures

█ Main Deck Crew Rest Compartment Emergency EvacuationMDCRC █ ........................................1
█ Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment EvacuationLDCRC █...........................................................2
█ Evacuation of an Incapacitated Person from The LDCRC via the Main Exit Hatch █ .....................3
█ Evacuation of an Incapacitated Person from the LDCRC - Using the Emergency Exit
Hatch █ ............................................................................................................................................6
█ Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment Air Conditioning Low Flow █ ...............................................7
14-80 Turbulence Management and Procedures

Turbulence Management .....................................................................................................................1
Cabin Crew Procedures ......................................................................................................................2
Anticipated Turbulence Procedures .....................................................................................................4
Unanticipated Turbulence Procedures .................................................................................................5
Post Turbulence Duties........................................................................................................................5
14-90 Additional Abnormal / Emergency Procedures

Upper Avionic Door Not Closed ...........................................................................................................1
Potable Water System Leak ................................................................................................................2
█ Transportation Of An Incapacitated Person FROM One Deck To Another █..................................3
█ Flight Crewmember Incapacitation █...............................................................................................4
█ Bomb On Board █ ...........................................................................................................................5
Rejected Takeoff ..................................................................................................................................9
Slideraft Transportation Doors M1 and M2 ........................................................................................10
Slideraft Transportation Door M4 ......................................................................................................11
Slideraft Transportation Door M5 .......................................................................................................12
█ Single Blade Lavatory Door Emergency Operation █....................................................................13
UAE A380 14-TOC P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
14-100 Safety Operational Awareness

14-100-10 Evacuation Awareness
Planned Ground Evacuation................................................................................................................ 1
Unplanned Ground Evacuation............................................................................................................ 9
14-100-20 Turbulence Threat Awareness

Turbulence Threat Awareness............................................................................................................. 1
14-100-30 Cabin Depressurization Awareness

Cabin depressurization Awareness .................................................................................................... 1
14-100-40 Cabin Smoke Awareness

Cabin Smoke Awareness .................................................................................................................... 1
14-100-50 Managing In Flight Fires

Managing In-Flight Fires ..................................................................................................................... 1
14-100-60 Ditching
Planned Ditching - Unplanned Ditching ............................................................................................... 1
UAE A380 14-TOC P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 14-TOC P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
INTRODUCTION
A380
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Crew Operating Manual (CCOM) Abnormal/Emergency procedures are those
recommended by Airbus.
Should an operator wish to incorporate their own customized procedure, the operator can do so by
using dedicated tools.
Abnormal/Emergency procedures are synchronized with the Flight Crew Operating Manual (FCOM)
Not-Sensed Procedures and/or Quick Reference Handbook (QRH), requiring flight and cabin crew to
communicate and cooperate.
Abnormal/Emergency procedures, specific to the cabin crew, concern smoke/fire fighting,
depressurization, etc.
The Abnormal/Emergency procedures are continuously updated and revised. Revisions take into
account the feedback received from all operators, in addition to the results of continuous monitoring of
the aircraft's in-service life.
The CCOM procedures that are marked "Airworthiness Related" provide procedures and
limitations that are mandatory, in order to meet cabin safety airworthiness requirements.
The Airworthiness Related Procedures are indicated by "Airworthiness Related" on the
affected procedure page header. An entire procedure may be airworthiness related, or only part
of a procedure may be airworthiness related.
In the case that only on a certain part of a procedure is airworthiness related, this is indicated
by (AR) written in green beside the impacted part of the procedure.
UAE A380 14-10 P 1/2

CCOM 08-Jan-09
INTRODUCTION
A380
UAE A380 14-10 P 2/2

CCOM 08-Jan-09
SMOKE AND FIRE PROCEDURES
A380
GUIDELINES FOR IN-FLIGHT SMOKE AND FIRE MANAGEMENT

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew is responsible for effectively dealing with in-flight emergencies that involve smoke and
fire. The following factors are important to enable cabin crew to correctly manage a smoke or fire event
in-flight.
FIGHT THE FIRE
The cabin crew must be aware of the importance of taking immediate and aggressive action to
determine the source of the smoke/fire.
The cabin crew must take action to:
- Rapidly evaluate the situation
- Determine the source of the smoke/fire
- Access the fire, if necessary
- Fight the fire, using firefighting equipment, and/or any other appropriate item that is rapidly available
(e.g. non-alcoholic beverages, including carbonated drinks, coffee, tea, juice)
- Smother the fire by using wet pillows, or wet blankets, in order to stop the fire from igniting again.
COMMUNICATE AND COORDINATE
The cabin crew must be aware of the importance for the need for on effective crew communication and
coordination. When smoke/fire is detected, the cabin crew must immediately inform:
- The flight crew
- The Chief Purser
- The cabin crewmembers that are on other decks.
FIRE PREVENTION
The cabin crew must be vigilant and pay attention to any unusual odors, noises, unusual system
behavior that may be an indication of a possible fire.
- Lavatories, including the associated smoke detector and wastebin fire extinguisher
- Galleys, ensuring that no flammable materials, such as paper napkins, and towels are not left near
or in heated galley equipment. The cabin crew monitor the galley electrical panels for fault
indications and tripped circuit breakers.
- The cabin must regularly monitored for fire hazards.
UAE A380 14-20 P 1/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit breakers are designed to provide protection from overheating, due to an abnormal electrical
load on a piece of equipment. The circuit breaker will trip automatically when a predetermined electrical
load is detected. When the circuit breaker trips this will result in the total or partial deactivation of the
affected electrical installation.
Circuit breakers that relate to cabin items, such as lights, entertainment systems, etc..., may be used to
isolate equipment in the event of smoke and fire, in accordance with the operator's policy.
WARNING Do not reset a tripped circuit breaker, because this may cause more damage to the
equipment, may affect other electrical equipment, may cause an overheat and/or
smoke.
Cabin reports of tripped circuit breakers should be reported to the flight crew immediately, and entered
in the maintenance logbook.
LITHIUM BATTERIES FIRES
Lithium batteries are commonly used to power aircraft cabin equipment (Defibrillators, Passenger
inflatable seat belts, flashlights, Electronic Flight Bag (EFB) ...etc) and consumer equipment (PEDs).
These batteries can be either lithium batteries (disposable) or lithium-ion batteries (rechargeable).
Both types are capable of ignition and subsequent explosion due to overheating. The resulting fire can
flare repeatedly as each cell ruptures and releases its contents.
Based on testing by the Fire Safety Branch of the FAA, the following procedures are recommended for
fighting a fire of a lithium type battery-powered PED regardless if the battery is disposable or
rechargeable:
- Relocate passenger away from the device, use halon, halon replacement or water fire extinguisher
to prevent the spread of the fire to adjacent battery cells and materials
- Pour water , or other non-alcoholic liquid , from any available source over the cells immediately
after extinguishing the fire.
Note: Only water or other non-alcoholic liquid can provide sufficient cooling to prevent re-ignition
and/or spreading of the fire to adjacent batteries. Significant cooling is needed to prevent
the spread of fire to additional cells in a battery pack.
UAE A380 14-20 P 2/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
WARNING - Do not attempt to pick up and move a smoking or burning device

- Do not cover the device or use ice to cool down the device. Ice or other materials
insulate the device increasing the likelihood that additional battery cells will ignite.
- Do not use fire resistant burn bags to isolate burning lithium type batteries.
Transferring a burning appliance into a burn bag may be extremely hazardous.
- Mass stowage of tablets used as IFE or cabin crewmember tablets must be
prohibited in close compartments such as OHSC, galleys standard units etc... unless
the compartment is designed for this particular use.
CLASSES OF FIRE
Applicable to: ALL
Class A Fires Class A fires involve the following types of material:
- Wood
- Cloth
- Paper
- Rubber
- Plastic
Fires from these materials require the cooling effects of

quantities of water. Use a water extinguisher or liquids
containing a large quantity of water, (e.g. tea, coffee, juice).
WARNING Do not use liquids that have alcohol.
UAE A380 14-20 P 3/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Class B Fires Class B fires involve flammable liquids, for example:
- Oils
- Grease
- Aircraft fuel
- Hydraulic fluid
- Tar
- Oil -based paints

- Lacquers
- Flammable gases
Fires from these materials require an extinguishing agent

that have a blanketing effect.
WARNING Do not use a water extinguisher for

class B fires. Use a halon
extinguisher.
Class C Fires Class C fires involve electrical equipment, for example:
- Coffeemakers,
- Ovens
- Wiring
- Circuit breakers
WARNING Do not use a water extinguisher on

electrical fires, because this may
cause electric shock and damage
other electrical circuits. Use a halon
extinguisher.
A halon extinguisher would be required.
UAE A380 14-20 P 4/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Class D Fires Class D fires involve combustible metals, for example;
- Magnesium
- Titanium
- Zirconium
- Sodium
WARNING Do not use a halon extinguisher or

water for a class D fire.
Special dry powder extinguishers are used on these types

of fire, because of the possible chemical reaction between
the extinguishing agent and the burning metal.
Note: For Lithium batteries fires :Refer to 14-20 Guidelines for In-flight Smoke and Fire Management
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS APPLICABLE TO EACH THE CLASS OF FIRE
The cabin crew should select the appropriate fire extinguisher according to the type of fire, class A, B,
C or D:
1. Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher - For class B or C fires
2. Water Extinguisher - For class A fires
3. Dry Chemical Extinguishers - For class A, B, or C fires
4. Extinguisher with Halogenated Hydrocarbons, designated as Halon Extinguishers or BCF
Extinguishers (BCF = Bromochlorodiflouromethane) - For class A, B, or C fires
WARNING When a halon extinguisher is used on a class A fire, the affected area must be
dampened with water afterward to prevent the fire from re-ignition.
5. Specialized Dry Powder Extinguishers - For class D fires
UAE A380 14-20 P 5/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
AWARENESS TO SMOKE AND FIRES IN HIDDEN AREAS

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew must be aware of the potential sources of smoke onboard the aircraft, and must
familiarize themselves with these areas, in order for crewmembers to determine the source of the
smoke, and take immediate action. Hidden areas include:
- Crown area: This area is above the ceiling panels. This overhead area includes wiring bundles,
control surface cables, the passenger emergency oxygen system, parts of the air conditioning
system, and parts of the aircraft In-Flight Entertainment System (IFE).
- Dado panels: These are the vents that are at the foot of the sidewall panels, on each side of the
cabin. Most aircraft air conditioning systems supply conditioned air from the cabin ceiling. This
conditioned air then flows from the top of the cabin to the bottom, it then exits via the return grills,
and finally leaves the aircraft via the outflow valves.
- Triangle area: This area is below the floor outboard of the cargo area. this area hosts hydraulic lines,
electrical components and wiring bundles.
UAE A380 14-20 P 6/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Awareness to smoke in hidden areas
UAE A380 14-20 P 7/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
AREA SPECIFIC FIRES

Applicable to: ALL
Firefighting methods are different depending on the location and the source of the fire.
However, there are some general guidelines that the cabin crew should be observe.
FIRES IN HIDDEN AREAS
Smoke emissions from sidewall panels and ceiling panels may indicate a hidden fire. In some cases
smoke may appear some distance from the source.
When the cabin crew suspects a fire in a hidden area, for example, behind a panel, they should try to
locate a "hot spot". A "hot spot" is an abnormally warm area. A "hot spot" is usually a good indicator as
to where the source of the fire is.
Note: To find the "hot spot", the cabin crew should move the back of their hand along the panels to
find the hottest area.
This is because, the skin on the back of the hand is thinner and, is more sensitive to
temperature changes than the palm.
It may be necessary to remove or lever panels to insert the nozzle of the fire extinguisher. Use a crash
axe that has an insulated handle to lever panels.
CAUTION Be very careful when removing, or levering panels, because some of these areas may
contain essential wiring or aircraft systems.
FIRES IN ENCLOSED AREAS

When a fire occurs in an enclosed area such as, a lavatory, an overhead bin, a closet or a crew rest
area, before opening the door, always check the door panel for heat.
Note: The cabin crew should check for heat using the back of the hand.
If the cabin crew suspects a fire in an enclosed area, they must:
- Open the door or the overhead bin slightly (just enough to pass the nozzle of the fire extinguisher)
If the fire is visible, the cabin crew must:
- Discharge the fire extinguisher at the base of the fire in a sweeping motion.
If the source of the fire has not been located do not randomly discharge the fire extinguisher into an
enclosed area.
The cabin crew must actively search the entire area to locate the source of the fire.
UAE A380 14-20 P 8/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
GALLEY SMOKE/FIRE
GALLEY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
The source of smoke/fire in the galley areas is usually due to the malfunction of electrical
equipment, such as, coffee makers, water boilers, ovens etc..
When the source of the smoke/fire has been identified as coming from a piece of electrical
equipment, the cabin crew must:
- Switch off the power
- Pull the associated circuit breaker, that is located on the galley electrical panel
OVEN FIRES
In the case of an oven fire, the cabin crew must:
- Keep the oven door closed, to deprive the fire of oxygen. In many cases the fire will extinguish by
itself.
- Switch off the power to the oven
- Pull the associated circuit breaker, on the galley electrical panel
If the situation worsens, the cabin crew must:
- Don a PBE and fire gloves for protection
- Open the oven door slightly, just enough to insert the nozzle of the fire extinguisher
- Insert the nozzle of the fire extinguisher, and discharge the fire extinguisher
- Close the oven door
- Repeat the procedure as necessary
UAE A380 14-20 P 9/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
DEFINITION AND DESCRIPTION OF FIRE FIGHTING ROLES

Applicable to: ALL
Firefighting procedures require a team of at least three cabin crewmembers, because a team effort is
the most effective way fight a fire. The firefighting roles are defined as follows:
• The Firefighter
• The Communicator
• The Assistant Firefighter
The three roles are complimentary because tasks are performed simultaneously, in order to optimize
the firefighting effort.
• The Firefighter: The first cabin crewmember to find the fire becomes the Firefighter. This cabin
crewmember must:
- Alert other cabin crewmembers
- Obtain the nearest fire extinguisher (consider the use of a PBE)
- Immediately locate the source of the fire
- Fight the fire
• The Communicator: The second cabin crewmember to arrive on the scene becomes the
communicator, this cabin crewmember must:
- Inform the flight crew of the fire, give the following information:
 Location of the fire
 Source of the fire
 Severity/Density of the fire (color of the smoke/odor, and how it is effecting people)
 Firefighting progress
 Number of extinguishers used
 Time that the firefighting action began
- Maintain the communication link between the cabin and the flight crew, via an interphone that is
near the fire fighting scene.
- Provide the flight crew with an accurate description of the firefighting effort, and of the situation
in the cabin
• The Assistant Firefighter: The third cabin crewmember to arrive on the scene, becomes
The Assistant Firefighter, and must:
- Provide extra firefighting equipment
- Support and coordinate the firefighting effort
- Remove flammable material from the area
- Must be prepared to replace the Firefighter, and exchange roles with the Firefighter, if required.
UAE A380 14-20 P 10/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
• Support cabin crewmembers: These cabin crewmembers are not directly involved in the
firefighting effort, will be required to provide assistance (e.g. to relocate passengers, administer
first-aid, calm and reassure passengers).
After any fire or smoke occurrence, one crewmember should be assigned to monitor the affected
area for the remainder of the flight, and should regularly report to the Chief Purser.
UAE A380 14-20 P 11/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
BASIC CABIN FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE

Applicable to: ALL
The Firefighter, the Communicator and the Assistant Firefighter perform their roles and actions
SIMULTANEOUSLY.
FIREFIGHTER
OTHER CREWMEMBERS .................................................................................................. ALERT
FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................... OBTAIN
Take the nearest appropriate fire extinguisher. Consider the use of a PBE.
SOURCE OF THE FIRE ................................................................................................... LOCATE
FIRE EXTINGUISHER ................................................................ DISCHARGE AT BASE OF FIRE
FIREFIGHTING EFFORT ...............................................................................................MAINTAIN
● When the fire is out:
AFFECTED AREA ...................................................................................................... DAMPEN
The affected area should be dampened to prevent the fire from re-ignition.
WARNING Do not dampen electrical equipment.
COMMUNICATOR
FLIGHT CREW ..........................................................NOTIFY IMMEDIATELY VIA INTERPHONE
Use the interphone, to prevent smoke from contaminating the cockpit. Give the following
information:
- Location of the fire
- Source of the fire
- Severity/Density (color of smoke/odor, and how it is affecting people)
- Firefighting progress
- Number of extinguishers used
- Time firefighting action began.
COMMUNICATION WITH FLIGHT CREW .....................................................................MAINTAIN
INSTRUCTIONS FROM FLIGHT CREW............. COMMUNICATE TO CABIN CREWMEMBERS
ASSISTANT FIREFIGHTER
FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT .........................................................................................PROVIDE
FIREFIGHTING.............................................................................SUPPORT AND COORDINATE
UAE A380 14-20 P 12/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
● If necessary:
REPLACE FIREFIGHTER......................................................................................... PREPARE
PBE .................................................................................................................................... DON
SUPPORT CREWMEMBERS
PASSENGERS AND PORTABLE OXYGEN............................. MOVE FROM IMMEDIATE AREA
FIREFIGHTING EFFORT .........................................................................ASSIST AND SUPPORT
PASSENGERS......................................................................................... CALM AND REASSURE
● When the fire is out
DEDICATED CREWMEMBER............... MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT
The affected area must be monitored for the remainder of the flight. Regular reports must be
made to the Chief Purser.
CABIN SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE HIDDEN AREA OR UNKNOWN SOURCE

Applicable to: ALL
Smoke that comes from sidewall panels, ceiling panels and vents may indicate a hidden fire. In some
cases, smoke may appear far from the real source
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE.....................................................................................APPLY
SOURCE OF SMOKE.............................................................................................................LOCATE
REASON FOR SMOKE ..................................................................INVESTIGATE AND DETERMINE
Note: To determine the source of a potential fire, crewmembers should check for "hot spots" on
panels. Move the back of the hand along the panels to find unusually hot areas.
● WHEN "HOT SPOT" IS LOCATED
AREA........................................................................................................... ACCESS WITH CARE
CAUTION When gaining access behind panels, be aware of the presence of wiring bundles.
Make a careful incision in the panel to insert extinguisher nozzle, or lever the panel
to gain access.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER................................................................................................DISCHARGE
DEDICATED CREWMEMBER .................... MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT
The affected area must be monitored for the remainder of the flight. Regular reports must be
made to the Chief Purser.
UAE A380 14-20 P 13/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
LAVATORY SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE

Applicable to: ALL
Smoke/fires in the lavatories may be due to:

- Electrical malfunctions (for example, the water heater or toilet vacuum)
- Burning materials caused by a carelessly discarded cigarette in the wastebin
- Passengers smoking in the lavatory.
FLIGHT CREW
SMOKE LAVATORY SMOKE .......................................................................CREW AWARENESS
Maintain contact with the cabin crew to follow up on the status of the fire.
CABIN CREW PROCEDURE

On the FAP, and/or related Mini FAP, the SMOKE warning indication comes on, with an
associated triple low chime, repeated every 30 seconds.
SMOKE pb (ON THE FAP or Mini-FAP IN YOUR ZONE) ...................................................RESET
To silence the chime in all cabin zones, and reset all visual warnings on the ACPs, the AIPs.,
Note: The amber Smoke indicator of the affected lavatory, the Smoke pb on the FAP and the
indication on the FAP Smoke page remain ON until all smoke has dissipated.
AFFECTED LAVATORY ................................................................................................... LOCATE
On all AIPs, the affected lavatory is clearly indicated and a red indicator comes on flashing (or
steady according to CAM assignment).
The amber light, on the respective ACPs (according to CAM assignment), and the outside
Smoke/Pax call indicator of the affected lavatory flashes.
Affected lavatory is also shown on the FAP Smoke page.
WARNING Do not open the lavatory door. First, check the door for heat. Move the back of the
hand along the panel of the lavatory door, to determine temperature and presence
of fire.
LAVATORY DOOR .......................................................................................... CHECK FOR HEAT

● If the door lavatory panel is cool
LAVATORY DOOR............................................................... OPEN SLOWLY WITH CAUTION
SOURCE OF SMOKE/FIRE ........................................................................................ LOCATE
UAE A380 14-20 P 14/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Check the lavatory wastebin fire extinguisher, and search all the lavatory stowage areas for
the presence of smoke/fire.
● If smoke or fire is visible:

BASIC FIREFIGHTING PROCEDURE ...........................................................................APPLY
FIRE EXTINGUISHER ...........................................................DISCHARGE AT BASE OF FIRE
● If the door panel is hot:

Note: If the door is hot, the fire is at a critical stage. Have extra fire fighting equipment
available and ready to use.
PBE .................................................................................................................................... DON
FIREFIGHTER ................................................................................................ PROTECT SELF
Stay low and crouch down, using the door panel as protection against smoke and heat.
(*)LAVATORY DOOR.....................................................................................OPEN SLIGHTLY
Just enough to pass the nozzle of the extinguisher
(*)FIRE EXTINGUISHER....................................................................................... DISCHARGE
(*)LAVATORY DOOR..................................................................................................... CLOSE
FIREFIGHTING ............................................................................... REPEAT AS NECESSARY
(*)Repeat last four steps of the procedure, as necessary.
● If situation is cleared
AFFECTED LAVATORY ........................ MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT
To ensure that the lavatory remains clear of smoke.
END OF PROC
UAE A380 14-20 P 15/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
PAX SEAT SMOKE/FIRE

Applicable to: ALL
The type of smoke/fire from a passenger seat/seat area will determine the class of fire that must be
dealt with.
The source of smoke/fire may come from the IFE screen, the ISPSS outlets, the seat boxes located
under the passenger seats or a PED being trapped within the seat.
......................................................................................................................................................................
● If smoke/fire is detected in the seat /seat area:
CABIN CREW/COCKPIT CREW COMMUNICATION ................................................. ESTABLISH
The cabin crew must update the cockpit crew on the progress of the event.
SOURCE OF THE SMOKE/FIRE ..................................................................................... LOCATE
● If the source of the smoke/fire is coming from electrical equipment of the seat:
PAX SYS sw ........................................................................................................................OFF
The PAX SYS sw is located in the cockpit, on the CWS, the RCC and optionally on the FAP.
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE.................................................. APPLY IF REQUIRED
Refer to 14-20 Basic Cabin Fire Fighting Procedure
● If the smoke/fire is coming from a PED:

PAX SYS sw ........................................................................................................................OFF
The PAX SYS switch must be switched off if the seat has electrical equipment.
LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE PROCEDURE....................................................................... APPLY
Refer to 14-20 LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE
UAE A380 14-20 P 16/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
CABIN WORK STATION (CWS)/REMOTE CONTROL CENTER (RCC) SMOKE

PROCEDURE
Applicable to: ALL
FLIGHT CREW
SMOKE MAIN (UPPER) XX CWS SMOKE.................................................. CREW AWARENESS
Maintain contact with the cabin crew.
Note: XX indicates the location of the affected Cabin Work Station (CWS) (e.g. 1L).
CABIN CREW PROCEDURE

On the FAP, or related AAP, the CWS (RCC) SMOKE warning indication comes on, with an
associated triple chime, repeated every 30 seconds (optionally 10 seconds).
CABIN CREW...............................................INFORM AND COORDINATE WITH FLIGHT CREW
CWS (RCC) MAIN POWER pb-sw........................................................................................... OFF
The CWS (RCC) MAIN POWER pb-sw is located on the Cabin Work Station (on the Remote
Control Center).
BASIC FIREFIGHTING PROCEDURE.........................................................APPLY IF REQUIRED
SMOKE pb (ON THE FAP or AAP IN YOUR ZONE) .......................................................... RESET
To silence the chime in all cabin, and reset all visual warnings on the ACPs, the AIPs of the
respective zones.
CAUTION Do not use water based extinguishers
Note: Only the FAP Smoke page, and the Smoke light on the respective FAP/AAP panel remain
on until all smoke has dissipated.
● If situation is cleared.
AFFECTED CWS(RCC)......................... MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT
To ensure that the CWS (RCC) remains clear of smoke.
UAE A380 14-20 P 17/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
GALLEY SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE

Applicable to: ALL
Galley smoke/fire occurrences can be caused by electrical equipment malfunction for example,
coffee makers, ovens, water boilers etc..
● If the source of the smoke/fire is identified from a piece of electrical equipment:
ELECTRICAL POWER .............................................................................................................OFF
APPLICABLE CIRCUIT BREAKER ........................................................................................PULL
Circuit breakers are located on the galley's centralized electrical panel. Pulling the applicable
circuit breaker should stop the smoke/fire.
● If the source of the smoke/fire cannot be identified:

GALLEY SHUTOFF
MAIN GALLEY POWER pb.......................................................................................................OFF
ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS......................................................................................................PULL
● If the smoke/fire continues:
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE ............................................................................... APPLY
UAE A380 14-20 P 18/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
OVEN SMOKE / FIRE PROCEDURE

Applicable to: ALL
Oven smoke/fires occurrences may be caused by the oven contents, such as, food or grease
deposits. Electrical malfunctions may be another source.
OVEN DOOR...............................................................................................................KEEP CLOSED
Note: By keeping the oven door closed, the fire will usually extinguish itself.
OVEN POWER .............................................................................................................................. OFF
CIRCUIT BREAKER .................................................................................................................... PULL
The applicable oven circuit breaker is located on the galley's centralized electrical panel.
● IF SMOKE OR FIRE IS STILL PRESENT:
PBE AND FIRE GLOVES........................................................................................................ DON
OVEN DOOR.......................................................................................................OPEN SLIGHTLY
Note: Open the oven door slightly, just enough to insert the nozzle of the fire extinguisher into
the oven.
(*) FIRE EXTINGUISHER...........................................................................................DISCHARGE
(*) OVEN DOOR.................................................................................................................. CLOSE
(*) FIREFIGHTING................................................................................ REPEAT AS NECESSARY
(*) Repeat last three steps of the procedure, as necessary.
UAE A380 14-20 P 19/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
OVERHEAD BIN SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE

Applicable to: ALL
Smoke/fire in overhead bins may be caused by the contents (i.e. electronic device, spare lithium
battery) or electrical malfunction in the Passenger Service Unit (PSU).
The firefighter, the assistant firefighter, the communicator and the support crewmembers must
conduct their tasks simultaneously.
● When smoke is coming from an overhead bin:
FIREFIGHTER AND ASSISTANT FIREFIGHTER
PBE ..........................................................................................................................................DON
FIREFIGHTER
FIRE EXTINGUISHER ........................................................................................................... TAKE
Note: Consider the use of fire gloves.
ASSISTANT FIREFIGHTER
WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID................................................................................ TAKE
Note: Water or non-alcoholic liquid is required if the fire involves lithium battery.
SUPPORT CREWMEMBERS
PASSENGERS ............................................................................................................ RELOCATE
COMMUNICATOR
FLIGHT CREW ..........................................................NOTIFY IMMEDIATELY VIA INTERPHONE
FIREFIGHTER
OVERHEAD BIN .............................................................................................. CHECK FOR HEAT
Using the back of the hand, feel the overhead bin to determine the temperature and presence of
fire.
(*)OVERHEAD BIN ............................................................................................. OPEN SLIGHTLY
Enough to pass the nozzle of the fire extinguisher.
CAUTION Opening the overhead bin more than necessary can cause contamination of the
cabin with smoke, and can result in smoke inhalation.
(*)FIRE EXTINGUISHER ........................................................................................... DISCHARGE

Note: The fire extinguisher must be discharged into the overhead bin, away from the seat, to
prevent debris from contaminating the cabin.
(*)OVERHEAD BIN ........................................................................................ CLOSE AND LATCH
UAE A380 14-20 P 20/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
FIREFIGHTING ....................................................................................REPEAT AS NECESSARY

(*)Repeat last three steps of the procedure, as necessary.
● When the flames are suppressed:

FIREFIGHTER
OVERHEAD BIN.......................................................................... CHECK THE SOURCE OF FIRE
Note: The assistant firefighter must support the firefighter in the case of re-ignition by using fire
extinguisher.
● If source of smoke/fire is coming from a visible PED and/or Spare batteries:
FIREFIGHTER
ON PED OR SPARE LITHIUM BATTERIES..............................................................................
.........................................................................POUR WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID
The PED or Spare lithium batteries must be cooled down by pouring water or non-alcoholic
liquids.
● If the source of smoke/fire is coming from an identified item:

FIREFIGHTER
IDENTIFIED ITEM.................................................................................................... TAKE OUT
ON IDENTIFIED ITEM......................................POUR WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID
The identified item must be cooled down by pouring water or non-alcoholic liquids.
● If the source of smoke/fire is coming from a non-identified item:

FIREFIGHTER
OVERHEAD BIN .................................................................................EMPTY WITH CAUTION
Note: Empty the overhead bin until the source of smoke/fire is identified.
ON IDENTIFIED ITEM......................................POUR WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID
The identified item must be cooled down by pouring water or non-alcoholic liquids.
STORAGE PROCEDURE AFTER A LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE..........................................APPLY
END OF PROC
UAE A380 14-20 P 21/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380

Applicable to: ALL
The roles of the firefighter, assistant firefighter and communicator must be distributed according to
the basic firefighting procedure.
In the case of PED, IFE based tablet or spare lithium battery fire in the cabin or when notified by the
flight crew:
POWER SOURCE ................................................................................................................ REMOVE
When possible, the cabin crew must unplug the device (eg: PED, IFE based tablet etc..) or switch off
the power source.
● If there are flames:
FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................... TAKE
Consider the use of a PBE and fire gloves.
HALON EXTINGUISHER........................................................................................... DISCHARGE
Halon extinguisher must be discharged to suppress the flames prior to cool down the PED or the
Spare lithium battery.
● When the flames are suppressed or If there are no flames:

ON PED or spare lithium battery........................... POUR WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID
The PED or Spare lithium batteries must be cooled down by pouring water or non-alcoholic
Liquids
WARNING Liquids may turn into steam when applied to a hot battery.
● When the device has cooled:

STORAGE PROCEDURE AFTER A LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE ......................................... APPLY
WARNING - Do not attempt to pick up and move a smoking or burning device

- Do not cover the device or use ice to cool down the device. Ice or other materials
insulate the device increasing the likelihood that additional battery cells will ignite.
- Do not use fire resistant burn bags to isolate burning lithium type batteries.
Transferring a burning appliance into a burn bag may be extremely hazardous.
END OF PROC
UAE A380 14-20 P 22/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
STORAGE PROCEDURE AFTER A LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE

Applicable to: ALL
● When the PED or the spare battery can be safely moved:

FIRE GLOVES....................................................................................................................PUT ON
RECEPTACLE........................................................................................................................TAKE
Consider the use of any suitable empty receptacle (e.g. standard unit or lavatory waste bin ...)
RECEPTACLE................................................FILL WITH WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID
PED OR SPARE BATTERY ............................................................................................IMMERSE
Total immersion of the PED or the spare battery will prevent fire re-ignition.
RECEPTACLE............................................................. STORE INTO THE NEAREST LAVATORY
LAVATORY ............................................................................................... SET AS INOPERATIVE
AFFECTED LAVATORY................................................................................................. MONITOR
The affected lavatory must be regularly monitored for the remainder of the flight to ensure that the
device remains immersed.
END OF PROC
UAE A380 14-20 P 23/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
LOWER DECK CREW REST COMPARTMENT SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE

SMOKE WARNING PRINCIPLE

● When smoke is detected in the LDCRC.
In the LDCRC:
- Loudspeaker: A single low chime will sound repeatedly for 30 s. Following the single low
chime, a repetitive triple chime (smoke alarm) will sound every 30 s (optionally 10 s)
- Low Flow Buzzer: when the air conditioning isolation valve closes, the low airflow buzzer will
sound for 30 s.
- Attendant Indication Panel (AIP): The smoke location message comes on, and the red
indicator light flashes (or comes on steady according to CAM assignment).
- LEAVE LDCRC: Signs will come on
- LDCRC lighting: Will come on to 100 % intensity.
In the staircase housing, on the FES indication panel:
- The SMOKE indication comes on steady red.
- The CLOSE HATCHES indication comes on steady red if the main hatch or the emergency
hatch is opened.
In the cabin:
- Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) and Mini-FAP (MFAP) the hard key SMOKE RESET button
comes on.
The FAP smoke page will appear automatically indicating the affected area.
- A triple chime will be repeated every 30 s (optionally 10 s).
- On the respective Area Call Panel (ACP) the amber lights will flash.
- On the AIPs the smoke location message comes on, and the red indicator light flashes (or
comes on steady according to CAM assignment).
- The amber smoke indicator next to the LDCRC door flashes.
CAPT
ECAM ALERT SMOKE AFT (FWD) LWR CAB REST SMOKE....................CREW AWARENESS
CC
SMOKE RESET pb ON THE FAP OR THE RESPECTIVE AAP ......................PRESS TO RESET
This will :
- Silence the chimes in the cabin
- Reset the visual warnings on the respective ACPs and AIPs
UAE A380 14-20 P 24/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Note: The amber smoke indicator, the SMOKE RESET pb and the SMOKE RESET hard key
on the FAP smoke page remains ON until the smoke has dissipated.
CC
LDCRC .................................................... CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF SMOKE AND FIRE
Search all the bunks, closets, stowage compartments and lavatory (if installed).
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE ..........................................................................APPLY
Use a portable fire extinguisher.
● If unable to extinguish the fire using the portable fire extinguisher:

CABIN CREW ................................................................................... EVACUATE THE LDCRC
EXIT HATCH AND EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH ........................................CLOSE AND LOCK
FES SWITCH ........................................................................SET TO DISCHARGE POSITION
Break the seal, and lift the plastic cover to access the FES switch.
Note: In the staircase housing, on the FES indication panel, the DO NOT OPEN HATCHES
sign comes on steady red.
WARNING The main exit hatch and the emergency hatch must remain closed until arrival.
LDCRC ....................................................... MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT.
UAE A380 14-20 P 25/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
CABIN CREW REST COMPARTMENT SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE


● When smoke is detected in the CCRC.
In the CCRC:
chime, a repetitive triple chime will sound every 30 s.
- Attendant Indication Panel (AIP): The smoke location message comes on and the red
indicator comes on flashing (or comes on steady according to CAM assignment).
- CCRC lighting: Will come on to 100 %intensity
In the cabin.
- On the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) and Additional Attendant Panel (AAP):
The SMOKE RESET button comes on.
The FAP smoke page will show the affected area.
- A triple chime will be repeated every 30 s(optionally every 10 s).
- In the AIPs the smoke location message comes on, and the red indicator comes on
flashing (or comes on steady according to CAM assignment).
FLIGHT CREW
RELATED SMOKE ECAM ALERT................................................................CREW AWARENESS
Maintain contact with the cabin crew and follow up on the status in the CCRC
CABIN CREW
CCRC.......................................................SEARCH FOR PRESENCE OF SMOKE AND OF FIRE
Search all bunks, closets, and stowage compartments.
● If no smoke or fire is present in the CCRC:
SMOKE RESET pb ON THE FAP OR THE RESPECTIVE AAP.................PRESS TO RESET
This will :
- Reset the visual warnings on the respective ACPs and AIPs.
Note: The amber smoke indicator , the smoke reset pb on the FAP smoke page remain ON
until the smoke has dissipated.
UAE A380 14-20 P 26/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380

Use a portable fire extinguisher. Consider the use of a PBE.
CCRC .......................................................... MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT
UAE A380 14-20 P 27/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE

Applicable to: ALL

● When smoke is detected in the FCRC.
In the FCRC:
chime, a repetitive triple chime will sound every 30 s.
- Attendant Indication Panel (AIP): The smoke location message comes on and the red
indicator comes on flashing (or comes on steady according to CAM assignment).
- FCRC lighting: Will come on to 100 %intensity
In the cabin.
- On the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) and Additional Attendant Panel (AAP):
The SMOKE RESET button comes on.
The FAP smoke page will show the affected area.
- A triple chime will be repeated every 30 s(optionally every 10 s).
- In the AIPs the smoke location message comes on, and the red indicator comes on
flashing (or comes on steady according to CAM assignment).
FLIGHT CREW
ECAM ALERT SMOKE FLT REST SMOKE .................................................CREW AWARENESS
Maintain contact with the cabin crew and follow up on the status in the FCRC
CABIN CREW
FCRC .......................................................SEARCH FOR PRESENCE OF SMOKE AND OF FIRE
Search all bunks, closets, and stowage compartments.
● If no smoke or fire is present in the FCRC:
SMOKE RESET pb ON THE FAP OR THE RESPECTIVE AAP.................PRESS TO RESET
This will :
- Reset the visual warnings on the respective ACPs and AIPs.
Note: The amber smoke indicator , the smoke reset pb on the FAP smoke page remain ON
until the smoke has dissipated.
UAE A380 14-20 P 28/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380

Use a portable fire extinguisher. Consider the use of a PBE.
FCRC........................................................... MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT
UAE A380 14-20 P 29/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
FORWARD SMOKE CURTAIN OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
The smoke curtain is used only when the cabin crew determine that excessive smoke/fire from the
main deck will inhibit passenger evacuation from the upper deck.
Forward Smoke Curtain Operation
The forward smoke curtain is located in the ceiling above the forward staircase.
WARNING For ground use only.
UAE A380 14-20 P 30/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
The forward stairs smoke curtain lever is located behind a panel. This panel is located on the right
hand side bulkhead (when facing the flight direction). To operate the forward smoke curtain:
- Push the flap open to access the smoke curtain lever
- Push the lever down until the smoke curtain is fully deployed
- Hook the smoke curtain ties onto the receptacles which located on each corner of the staircase.
This will secure the smoke curtain.
This completes the forward smoke curtain operation.
UAE A380 14-20 P 31/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
AFT SMOKE CURTAIN OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
The smoke curtain is used only when the cabin crew determine that excessive smoke/fire from the
main deck will inhibit passenger evacuation from the upper deck.
Aft Smoke Curtain Operation
The aft smoke curtain is located in the stair frame of the aft staircase.
WARNING For ground use only.
UAE A380 14-20 P 32/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
The aft stairs smoke curtain recessed grip is located on the right hand side of the aft stair frame
(when facing aft).
To operate the aft smoke curtain:
- Pull the recessed grip to open the smoke curtain cover
- Pull the loops to remove the curtain from the stowage
- Move the curtain along the track until the curtain is fully deployed around the top of the aft
staircase
- Engage the press studs, to secure the smoke curtain to the stair frame.
Note: The three press studs are located in the upper, central and lower part of the curtain and
their counterpart are located on the sidewall.
This completes the aft smoke curtain operation.
UAE A380 14-20 P 33/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
UAE A380 14-20 P 34/34

CCOM 10-Apr-17
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS
A380
EMERGENCY CALLS
Applicable to: ALL
In the event if an abnormal or an emergency situation in the cabin, any cabin crewmember may make
this call.
EMERGENCY CALL TO FLIGHT CREW

Cabin Crew Flight Crew
In the event if an abnormal or an emergency situation in - The flight crew must reply
the cabin:
- Press the EMER key

Note: The EMER key must be pressed and held
for at least 1 second.
- Wait for the flight crew to reply
PLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING

Applicable to: ALL
EMERGENCY ALERT
CAPTAIN CHIEF PURSER CABIN CREW
- Using the PA announce "Chief - Go immediately to the cockpit to be - Stop all activities; secure any
Purser to Cockpit, please!" briefed by the captain. equipment that is being used.
- Go to designated crew station and
standby the interphone ready for
Chief Purser's briefing
UAE A380 14-30 P 1/4

CCOM 02-Oct-13
A380
Brief the Chief Purser . Ask the captain for the following
information:
- Nature of the emergency and

intentions
- Time available to prepare the cabin
(synchronize watches)
- Signal to brace
- Signal to remain seated (if no
evacuation is required. On ground
emergency only)
- Special instructions (for example,
exits that may be unusable)
- Acknowledge the captains briefing
- Ask the captain who will make the

initial announcement and when
Note: The captain should, if time - Brief the cabin crew using the PRIO - Acknowledge Chief Purser's briefing
permits, allow the Chief CONF Call function on the
Purser time to brief the cabin interphone handset.
crew
UAE A380 14-30 P 2/4

CCOM 02-Oct-13
A380
PASSENGER PREPARATION
FLIGHT CREW CHIEF PURSER
- Turn on the NO SMOKING/FASTEN SEAT BELT signs If the captain's duties permit, the captain will make the initial
- If duties permit, make a PAannouncement to the announcement.
passengers of the nature of the emergency. If this is not possible for the captain to make the
Note: For psychological reasons, the flight crew announcement, the Chief Purser will make the initial
should make the initial announcement to the announcement to the passengers stating:
passengers.
- The nature of the emergency and the captains intentions
- The need to prepare the cabin
- Follow the instructions of cabin crew members.
Make the Emergency Announcement containing the
following:
- Brace positions
- Locations of exits
- Loose items
- ABPs
- Safety card review
- Flotation devices (Ditching Onlt

Note: The Chief Purser must monitor the time during the
cabin preparation announcements. Allow time for
task to be accomplished, when the allocated time
is up, inform the cabin crew by announcing.
"Cabin crew return to demonstration positions"
"Finish preparations"
BRACE FOR IMPACT
FLIGHT CREW CABIN CREW
- Announce using the PA system "BRACE FOR IMPACT" - Shout "BRACE, BRACE , BRACE" until aircraft comes to
Note: The flight crew will make the "Brace for impact" complete stop.
command approximately 1 minute before
landing.
INITIATING THE EVACUATION
FLIGHT CREW CABIN CREW
- Using the PA system announce "EVACUATE, Shout evacuation commands.
EVACUATE"
- "EVACUATE, EVACUATE" " SEAT BELTS OFF"
- Press the EVAC CMD pb to sound the evacuation horn.
- "LEAVE EVERYTHING"
- " GET OUT"
UAE A380 14-30 P 3/4

CCOM 02-Oct-13
A380
● If there is no communication from the flight crew and, a catastrophic situation exists in the
cabin, the cabin crew should initiate the evacuation
CHIEF PURSER/CABIN CREWMEMBER
To initiate an evacuation use whatever means are available.
- Use the PA system, megaphone or shout the evacuation commands "EVACUATE, EVACUATE" "SEAT BELTS
OFF"
- Press the EVAC CMD pb on the FAP

Note: The evacuation horn will sound in the cabin only if the switch in the cockpit is set to CAPT/PURS
EVACUATION NOT REQUIRED
In the case of a planned emergency landing, when the passengers have been prepared to anticipate
evacuating the aircraft. If no evacuation is required after the aircraft has landed it will be necessary for
the flight crew to inform the cabin crew and passengers as soon as possible in order to prevent an
unnecessary evacuation from being initiated.
FLIGHT CREW CHIEF PURSER
When an evacuation is not required the flight crew must The Chief Purser should reinforce this message using the
make an immediate announcement. PA to announce to passengers that an evacuation of the
aircraft is not necessary, and ask passengers to remain in
- Using the PA system announce "REMAIN SEATED"
their seats.
UNPLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING

Applicable to: ALL
In the case of an abnormal or emergency situation during the takeoff or landing such as;
- Imminent impact or,
- Aircraft damage
The command to brace for impact should be given as a minimum warning to passengers.
The brace command can be initiated by the flight crew or the cabin crew.
BRACE COMMANDS - UNPLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING
Flight crew Cabin Crew
If the flight crew are aware of imminent impact. If the cabin crew are aware of imminent impact, or on the
command of the flight crew:
- Using PA announce
"BRACE FOR IMPACT' - Cabin crew must adopt their brace position and shout "
HEADS DOWN, STAY DOWN"
- Repeat the brace commands until the aircraft has come

to a complete stop.
UAE A380 14-30 P 4/4

CCOM 02-Oct-13
A380
EVACUATION GUIDELINES
Applicable to: ALL
There are many factors that contribute to the successful evacuation of an aircraft:
- The procedural knowledge of the cabin crew: This includes training, experience and behavior
- The aircraft configuration, the layout of the cabin
- The environment inside and outside the aircraft (e.g., the presence of smoke, fire, the cabin lighting,
and outside conditions)
- The behavior of the passengers, their age, level of fitness and motivation
During an emergency, it is essential for the cabin crew to be able to apply their knowledge of
procedures, and rapidly adapt to the situation.
In the case of a life threatening situation onboard the aircraft, it is essential that the aircraft is
evacuated quickly and efficiently to increase the occupants chances of survival.
Cabin Configuration
The cabin configuration can have an impact on the efficiency of the evacuation.
To enhance the situational awareness skills of the cabin crew, they should be familiar with the cabin
layout, and the areas where congestion may occur, due to:
- The passenger seating density
- The location of galleys, lavatories, bars etc..
- Restricted visibility
- Passengers arriving from different directions to the exits.
Some exits, for example the forward and aft exits, may be under utilized because the majority of
passengers are seated in the mid section of the aircraft and will be drawn towards their nearest exits.
It may be necessary for the cabin crew to redirect passengers to other usable exits to avoid
congestion, and to maximize the use of all the usable exits, in order to evacuate the aircraft as rapidly
as possible.
To achieve this the cabin crew must be aware of what is happening in the cabin.
UAE A380 14-40 P 1/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
One of the key elements to a efficient evacuation is effective crowd control and cabin management by
the cabin crew. The actions and commands of the cabin crew will influence the performance of the
passengers during the evacuation.
1. The objectives for the cabin crewmembers are:
- To quickly establish the passenger flow at each usable exit
- To evacuate the aircraft as quickly as possible.
2. The cabin crew must use positive verbal commands and physical gestures, in order to efficiently
direct passengers towards the exits and assist them down the slides.
Note: Cabin crew must also be prepared to use some physical force, if necessary, to evacuate
some passengers from the aircraft.
The commands used by the cabin crew should be:
- Assertive
- Positive
- Short
- Loud
- Clear
Note: The cabin crew must be assertive and be in complete control of the evacuation.
3. Situational awareness will play a large part in the evacuation process. The cabin crew must be able
to assess not only what is happening at their exit, but also what is happening inside the cabin.
The cabin crewmembers must be able to:
- Assess the flow of passengers from the exits and be aware to changes in the passenger flow rate.
- Be aware of the status of the other exits, especially when redirecting the passengers
- To adapt their actions and commands when the cabin is congested or an exit is dried up, in order
to keep the evacuation flowing and maximize the use of all exits.
UAE A380 14-40 P 2/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
ASSESSING THE OUTSIDE CONDITIONS:

Before opening the door the cabin crew must assess the outside conditions. Use the fresnel lens to
check that the slide deployment area is clear of:
- Smoke
- Fire
- Obstacles and,
- Debris.
CABIN CREW ACTIONS AT USABLE EXITS:
Once the exit has been opened, the cabin crew must visually check that the slide is fully deployed and
inflated.
Note: In dark of night conditions, the cabin crewmember should visually check that the slide
deployment area is clear of fire, obstacles or debris, to ensure that the area is safe before
starting to evacuate passengers.
The cabin crewmember must stand clear of the exit in the frame assist space, and hold on to the frame
assist handle.
The cabin crew must monitor the evacuation, and maintain an even flow of passengers from each exit,
the cabin crew should use commands, such as:
- “Jump 2 by 2”
- “2 by 2”
- “Run and jump”
- “Hurry”
Some passengers may try to sit on the door sill before going down the slide. This must be avoided, as
it will delay the flow of passengers from the exit.
The cabin crew must be aware of what is happening inside the cabin, and outside the aircraft. The
cabin crew must:
- Keep shouting their commands to bring passengers to the exits
- Be aware of any developments that would render the exit unusable, for example:
- Slide damage
- Fire in the area
- External hazard.
UAE A380 14-40 P 3/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
CABIN CREW ACTIONS AT UNUSABLE EXITS:

An exit may be unusable at the beginning of an evacuation or may become unusable during the
evacuation.
1. An exit may be unusable at the beginning of the evacuation, for one of the following reasons:
- The exit is jammed, and will not open
- Slide does not deploy correctly or the slide is damaged
- There are external hazards.
The cabin crewmember who is responsible for the unusable exit must inform the passengers that the
exit is blocked, and redirect the passengers to the nearest usable exit.
Note: The cabin crewmember must guard the exit to prevent the exit from being used.
When redirecting passengers, the cabin crewmember should listen for the other crewmembers
giving the command to "Come this way" or "Jump" for confirmation that another exit is usable.
Redirect passengers to the nearest usable exit with the appropriate positive commands and
gestures, such as:
- “Go ahead, go straight”
- “Go that way” with the appropriate gesture
- “Go across”
- “Quick, quick”
- “Hurry up, hurry up”
2. An exit becomes unusable during the evacuation:
The cabin crew must be aware of the environment inside and outside the cabin. If the situation
changes during the evacuation, for example:
- The slide becomes damaged
- A fire develops in the area
- There are other external hazards.
Then the cabin crewmember at the unusable exit must perform the following actions:
- Stop the evacuation
- Block the exit and redirect passengers to the nearest usable exit
- Guard the exit.
PRE-CABIN CREW EVACUATION:
When the flow of passengers to the exit begins to slow down, the cabin crew should check the cabin
and call remaining all remaining passengers to the exits.
When the flow of passengers has stopped, the cabin crew should check their assigned area for any
remaining passengers.
UAE A380 14-40 P 4/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
When the cabin crewmember's assigned area is empty, or it is no longer safe to remain onboard the
aircraft, the cabin crewmember should evacuate through the first usable exit.
If an evacuation occurs away from an airfield, the cabin crew should take their assigned emergency
equipment from the aircraft, if the situation permits.
M3 L/R CABIN CREWMEMBERS:
The M3 exits are equipped with ramp/slides.
To check that the ramp/slide is correctly inflated the cabin crewmember must:
- Check that the barber pole is fully inflated, and, visible.
- The M3 cabin crewmembers should use commands, such as:
- “Run and jump"
- "Keep moving"
- “2 by 2”
- Monitor the activity on the ramp/slide from the assist space.
Note: The cabin crew at the M3 exits must continuously monitor the ramp during the evacuation.
The cabin crew must ensure that passengers do not gather on the ramp. It is important to
keep the passengers moving from the ramp and down the slide.
- The cabin crew responsible for the M3 exits should be aware that in order to maintain a
continuous flow of passengers from these exits, crewmembers must establish a sequence to keep
passengers moving through the exits, off the ramp and down the slides.
UPPER DECK FORWARD STAIRS CABIN CREWMEMBER
The U1 doors are the primary exit routes for passengers seated in the forward section of the Upper
Deck.
The cabin crewmember seated at the upper deck forward stairs must direct passengers to the U1
doors.
The primary exit routes for the upper deck are the upper deck doors. Cabin crew should use
good judgement, when deciding to evacuate the upper deck using the stairs.
UAE A380 14-40 P 5/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
The cabin crew will be responsible for a large number of passengers until they are assisted by the
rescue and emergency services personnel.
When the cabin crew have evacuated the aircraft they must manage the passengers on the ground,
by:
- Assisting passengers away from the slides
- Directing passengers upwind and away from the aircraft
- Keeping passengers away from, fuel , fire and vehicles
- Assembling the passengers and keeping them together
- Enforcing no smoking and prohibiting the use of mobile phones
- Assisting passengers and giving first aid, when necessary
- Making a passenger headcount, if possible.
- Note: Cabin crewmembers seated near a megaphone should consider taking it from the aircraft to
assist with crowd management post evacuation.
UAE A380 14-40 P 6/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
Ground Evacuation Routes -Overview
UAE A380 14-40 P 7/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
DUTIES FOR EVACUATION
Applicable to: ALL
The minimum required cabin crewmembers for the A380-800 is 18, two of which should be the
following senior cabin crewmembers:
- 1 Chief Purser, responsible for the entire cabin, and,
- 1 Purser, responsible for the upper deck.
CABIN CREW ASSIGNED CREW SEAT EVACUATION EVACUATION AREA OF

DESIGNATION ASSIGNED DOOR RESPONSIBILITY
UPPER DECK — Minimum required Cabin Crewmembers — 7
1 CC(1) DOOR U1L U1L FWD / MID
1 CC DOOR U1R U1R FWD / MID
1 CC DOOR U2L U2L MID
1 CC DOOR U2R U2R MID
1 CC DOOR U3L U3L AFT / AFT STAIRS
1 CC DOOR U3R U3R AFT/ AFT STAIRS
1 CC UPPER DECK STAIRS UDS Manage passenger flow on the UD
forward cabin area. Direct passengers
to the UD doors.
MAIN DECK — Minimum required Cabin Crewmembers — 11
1 CC(2) DOOR M1L M1L FWD
1 CC DOOR M1R M1R FWD
1 CC DOOR M2L M2L FWD/MID
1 CC DOOR M2R M2R FWD/MID
1 CC DOOR M3L M3L MID
1 CC DOOR M3R M3R MID
1 CC DOOR M4L M4L MID/AFT
1 CC DOOR M4R M4L MID/AFT
1 CC DOOR M5L M5L AFT / AFT STAIRS
1 CC DOOR M5R M5R AFT / AFT STAIRS
1 CC FWD STAIRS MDS Manage the passenger flow on the
forward stairs and forward door cross
aisle area.
(1) U1L is the recommended seat assignment for the Purser responsible for the upper deck.
(2) M1L is the recommended seat assignment for the Chief Purser.
UAE A380 14-40 P 8/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
● If it is possible to reach the passenger cabin

CAPT - The Captain is the last person to leave the cockpit:
He/she proceeds to the cabin and helps with passenger evacuation, as necessary.
- On the ground, he/she takes command of operations until rescue units arrive.
F/O - The First Officer, proceeds to the cabin, and helps with passenger evacuation if necessary.
- On ground, helps passengers , and directs them away from the aircraft.
Note: The cockpit crew must check that the cabin is fully evacuated before leaving the aircraft.
● If it is not possible to reach the passenger cabin
The cockpit crew should evacuate the aircraft via the cockpit windows, by using the escape ropes.
On ground, each crewmember must help passengers, and direct them away from the aircraft.
UAE A380 14-40 P 9/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
EMERGENCY PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
FRAME ASSIST HANDLE ....................................................................................................... GRASP

SLIDE ARMED ......................................................................................................................... CHECK
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS................................................................................................CHECK SAFE
Use both the door window and the fresnel lens to ensure that slide deployment area is clear of:
- Fire
- Smoke
- Obstacles
● If outside conditions are safe
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE ........................................RAPIDLY LIFT FULLY UP AND RELEASE
WARNING When the door is in “ARMED” mode, the residual CABIN PRESSURE visual and
aural warnings will not trigger in order to indicate the cabin differential pressure.
Indications of cabin differential pressure may be:
- Resistance in the door control handle when it is being lifted to the open position,
using normal force, and/or
- A hissing noise around the immediate area.
If circumstances permit, fully lower the door control handle to the closed position.
Notify the flight crew immediately.
● If the door power assist fails the door will not open automatically:
DOOR ...................................................................................................................PUSH TO OPEN
GUST LOCK .................................................................................................... CHECK ENGAGED
SLIDE DEPLOYED AND INFLATED .................................................................... VISUAL CHECK
- (AR) For M3L and M3R: Check that the barber pole is fully inflated (The barber pole is fully
inflated when the slide is correctly inflated)
- (AR) For M1L and M1R: In the case of nose up attitude: a slide extension function is provided
and is confirmed, because the DSIP SLIDE NOT READY indicator does NOT come on.
● If the slide does not inflate:
(AR) MIP .........................................................................................................................PRESS
UAE A380 14-40 P 10/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
Note: The Cabin Crew must only press the MIP if the slide is not inflated but is fully
deployed.
SLIDE DEPLOYED AND INFLATED..............................................................................CHECK
UAE A380 14-40 P 11/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
ON GROUND EVACUATION
Applicable to: ALL
Note: The order to evacuate is usually given by the flight crew, however, in clearly catastrophic
circumstances any cabin crewmember may initiate an evacuation.
EVACUATION ORDER ...................................................................................................... RECEIVED
ALL CC
“EVACUATE, EVACUATE, SEAT BELTS OFF” ...................................................................... SHOUT
ALL CC
“LEAVE EVERYTHING, HIGH HEELS OFF” ........................................................................... SHOUT
PRIM CC
FRAME ASSIST HANDLE ....................................................................................................... GRASP
PRIM CC
PRIM CC
Check through fresnel lens in the observation window to ensure that the slide deployment are is clear
of:
- Fire
- Smoke
- Obstacles
● If outside conditions are unsafe:
PASSENGERS TO NEAREST USABLE EXIT ............................................................. REDIRECT
EXIT ....................................................................................................................................GUARD
● If outside conditions are safe:

UDS CC
PASSENGERS TO THE AFT ............................................................................................ DIRECT
PRIM CC
FRAME ASSIST HANDLE .................................................................................................. GRASP
PRIM CC
DOOR ....................................................................................................................................OPEN
● If the door power assist fails the door will not open automatically;
DOOR ......................................................................................... PUSH TO OPEN MANUALLY
Note: Manual opening will require a physical effort.
UAE A380 14-40 P 12/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
GUST LOCK................................................................................................CHECK ENGAGED

PRIM CC
SLIDE DEPLOYED AND INFLATED..................................................................... VISUAL CHECK
Also ensure that the slide deployment area is clear of all obstructions.
● (AR) If the slide does not inflate automatically:
Note: The Cabin crew must only press the MIP if the slide is not inflated but is fully deployed.
(AR) MIP ........................................................................................................................ PRESS
PRIM CC
ASSIST SPACE................................................................................................................OCCUPY
PRIM CC
PASSENGER EVACUATION.........................................................................................EXPEDITE
PRIM CC
“COME THIS WAY, TWO BY TWO, HURRY, RUN AND JUMP”........................................SHOUT
PRIM CC
ASSIGNED AREA ............................................................................CHECK FULLY EVACUATED
(AR) Cabin crew responsible for stairs visually check that stairs are empty.
ALL CC
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................TAKE
Time permitting, each cabin crewmember takes their designated safety and survival equipment
before leaving the aircraft.
ALL CC
CABIN CREW...............................................................................................................EVACUATE
ALL CC
PASSENGERS AWAY FROM THE AIRCRAFT.................................................................DIRECT
ALL CC
ON GROUND ............................................................... CONDUCT POST EVACUATION DUTIES
END OF PROC
UAE A380 14-40 P 13/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
CABIN PREPARATION FOR PLANNED ON GROUND EVACUATION

Applicable to: ALL
CAPT
CAPTAIN........................................................................................................ BRIEF CHIEF PURSER
1. Nature of the emergency and intentions
2. Time available to prepare the cabin
Note: Synchronize watches, to assist with time management
3. The signal to brace
4. Signal to remain seated (if, an evacuation is not required)
5. Special instructions
CHIEF PURS
CAPTAIN'S BRIEFING............................................................................................. ACKNOWLEDGE
CHIEF PURS
ALL CABIN CREWMEMBERS................................................................................................... BRIEF
ALL CC
DEMONSTRATION POSITIONS ................................................................................................ TAKE
CHIEF PURS
EMERGENCY ANNOUNCEMENT ......................................................................... PERFORM BY PA
The Chief Purser will brief passengers using the PA.
Note: When reading the announcement, the Chief Purser should pause at key points in order to
allow the cabin crewmembers time to demonstrate, and check passenger compliance.
The emergency announcement contains the following information:
- Brace positions
- The location of exits
- Removal of sharp objects
- Review of the safety information card
- Passenger assistance, able bodied passengers.
ALL CC
DEMONSTRATION.............................................................................................................PERFORM
- Demonstrate the information to the passengers as it is being read
- Demonstrate the brace positions
- Use the safety information card to illustrate the information
ALL CC
CABIN ....................................................................................................................................SECURE
UAE A380 14-40 P 14/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
The cabin secure must also include the following items;

- Removal of all service equipment ( cups, pillows, headsets etc..) from the cabin
- Secure all galleys (trolleys and containers stowed and latched)
- Switch off galley power
- Lock all lavatory doors
ALL CC
PASSENGERS ........................................................................................................................ ASSIST
- Move and reseat passengers as required.
- Brief ABPs (Able Bodied Passengers)
- Brief passengers assisting unaccompanied minors, elderly and disabled passengers
PRIM CC
SLIDE IN ARMED POSITION...................................................................................................CHECK
Ensure that the area around the exits are free from all obstructions.
ALL CC
CABIN.......................................................................................................................CHECK SECURE
ALL CC
CABIN SECURE COMPLETED............................................ INFORM PURSER OR CHIEF PURSER
ALL CC
DESIGNATED CREW SEAT ............................................................ TAKE AND SECURE HARNESS
CHIEF PURS
CABIN READY........................................................................................................INFORM CAPTAIN
CHIEF PURS
ALL CC
SILENT REVIEW ................................................................................................................ PERFORM
Review evacuation commands, actions, and responsibilities.
ALL CC
BRACE POSITION .....................................................................ADOPT ON CAPTAIN'S COMMAND
UAE A380 14-40 P 15/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
CABIN PREPARATION FOR DITCHING

Applicable to: ALL
CAPT
CAPTAIN........................................................................................................ BRIEF CHIEF PURSER
1. Nature of the emergency and intentions
2. Time available to prepare the cabin
Note: Synchronize watches, to assist with time management
3. The signal to brace
4. Special instructions
CHIEF PURS
CAPTAINS BRIEFING ............................................................................................. ACKNOWLEDGE
CHIEF PURS
ALL CABIN CREWMEMBERS................................................................................................... BRIEF
ALL CC
DEMONSTRATION POSITIONS ................................................................................................ TAKE
Cabin crewmembers must take their own lifevests. The cabin crewmembers will don their lifevests
during the demonstration.
CHIEF PURS
EMERGENCY ANNOUNCEMENT ......................................................................... PERFORM BY PA
The Chief Purser will brief passengers using the PA.
Note: When reading the announcement, the Chief Purser should pause at key points in order to
allow the cabin crewmembers time to demonstrate, and check passenger compliance.
The emergency announcement contains the following information:
- Lifevests (location and use)
- Brace positions
- The location of exits
- Removal of sharp objects
- Review of the safety information card
- Passenger assistance, able bodied passengers, and assistance in fitting infant lifevests
ALL CC
DEMONSTRATION.............................................................................................................PERFORM
- Demonstrate the information to the passengers as it is being read
- Demonstrate the brace positions
- Use the safety information card to illustrate the information
UAE A380 14-40 P 16/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
ALL CC
The cabin secure must also include the following items;
- Remove all service equipment ( cups, pillows, headsets etc..) from the cabin
- Secure all galleys (trolleys and containers stowed and latched)
- Switch off galley power
- Lock all lavatory doors
ALL CC
PASSENGERS ........................................................................................................................ ASSIST
- Move and reseat passengers as required.
- Brief ABPs (Able Bodied Passengers)
- Brief passengers assisting unaccompanied minors, elderly and disabled passengers
PRIM CC
SLIDE IN ARMED POSITION...................................................................................................CHECK
Ensure that the area around the exits are free from all obstructions.
M3 PRIM CC
M3 EXIT .......................................................................................................................DISARM SLIDE
UPPER DECK PRIM CC
ABLE BODIED PASSENGERS (ABPs) SEATED AT EXIT........................................................BRIEF
The Able Bodied Passengers (ABP)s seated at the exit will assist the cabin crewmember during the
evacuation. The cabin crewmember will instruct the ABPs to:
- Hold the passengers back from the exit until the cabin crewmember has attached the survival kit to
the slideraft.
ALL CC
ALL CC
CABIN SECURE COMPLETED............................................ INFORM PURSER OR CHIEF PURSER
ALL CC
CHIEF PURS
CABIN READY........................................................................................................INFORM CAPTAIN
CHIEF PURS
ALL CC
SILENT REVIEW ................................................................................................................ PERFORM
Review evacuation commands, actions, and responsibilities.
UAE A380 14-40 P 17/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
ALL CC
BRACE POSITION..................................................................... ADOPT ON CAPTAIN'S COMMAND
UAE A380 14-40 P 18/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
MAIN DECK PLANNED DITCHING

Applicable to: ALL
ALL CC
“OPEN SEAT BELTS, SHOES OFF”........................................................................................SHOUT
PRIM CC
SLIDE ARMED..........................................................................................................................CHECK
M3 PRIM CC
M3 DOOR ............................................................................................................................... DISARM
PRIM CC
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS ............................................................................................... CHECK SAFE
● If outside are conditions unsafe:
PRIM CC
PASSENGERS TO THE NEAREST USABLE EXIT......................................................REDIRECT
EXIT.................................................................................................................................... GUARD
PRIM CC
DOOR FRAME ASSIST HANDLE..................................................................................GRASP
PRIM CC
DOOR............................................................................................................................... OPEN
● If door power assist fails:

PRIM CC
DOOR............................................................................................ PUSH AND OPEN MANUALLY
PRIM CC
GUST LOCK.....................................................................................................CHECK ENGAGED
PRIM CC
SLIDERAFT DEPLOYED AND INFLATED...............................................................................CHECK
● If the slideraft does not inflate:
PRIM CC
MIP ........................................................................................................................................ PUSH
PRIM CC
ASSIST SPACE.....................................................................................................................OCCUPY
PRIM CC
PASSENGER EVACUATION ..............................................................................................EXPEDITE
UAE A380 14-40 P 19/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
PRIM CC
ASSERTIVE COMMANDS....................................................................................................... SHOUT
“Come this way”, “Leave Everything”, “Two by Two”.
Note: Instruct passengers to “Inflate lifevests” when passengers are leaving the aircraft.
PRIM CC
NUMBER OF PASSENGERS BOARDING THE SLIDERAFT .............................................MONITOR
Ensure that the slideraft is not overloaded.
PRIM CC
ASSIGNED AREA ................................................................................. CHECK FULLY EVACUATED
The cabin crew responsible for the stairs must ensure that the stairs are empty.
ALL CC
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT....................................................................................................... TAKE
ALL CC
LIFEVEST .............................................................................................................................. INFLATE
ALL CC
SLIDERAFT.............................................................................................................................. BOARD
PRIM CC
SLIDERAFT................................................................................................................... DISCONNECT
1. Lift the flap
2. Pull the red tab to release the pin
PRIM CC
MOORING LINE............................................................................................................................ CUT
Use the knife located on the slideraft to cut the mooring line.
UAE A380 14-40 P 20/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
UPPER DECK PLANNED DITCHING

Applicable to: ALL
● When the aircraft has come to a complete stop:

ALL CC
"EVACUATE, EVACUATE“ SEAT BELTS, OFF” ................................................................SHOUT
PRIM CC
SLIDE ARMED ....................................................................................................................CHECK
PRIM CC
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS .......................................................................................... CHECK SAFE
PRIM CC
PASSENGERS TO THE NEAREST EXIT................................................................REDIRECT
EXIT .............................................................................................................................. GUARD
WARNING Remove the survival kit BEFORE opening the door. The survival kit cannot be
retrieved once the aircraft door is open.

PRIM CC
SURVIVAL KIT DOOR COVER ..................................................................................REMOVE
To remove the cover; open the velcro straps.
PRIM CC
SURVIVAL KIT ......................................................................................................... RETRIEVE
PRIM CC
SURVIVAL KIT DOOR COVER ................................................................................ REPLACE
Replace the door cover with the quick fixation pin and clip.
PRIM CC
DOOR FRAME ASSIST HANDLE..................................................................................GRASP
PRIM CC
DOOR............................................................................................................................... OPEN

PRIM CC
DOOR..........................................................................................PUSH TO OPEN MANUALLY
GUST LOCK................................................................................................CHECK ENGAGED
UAE A380 14-40 P 21/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
PRIM CC
SLIDERAFT DEPLOYED AND INFLATED........................................................... VISUAL CHECK
MIP....................................................................................................................................PUSH
PRIM CC
“STAND BACK, STAND BACK”.......................................................................................... SHOUT
Passengers should be held back during the survival kit attachment to protect the person attaching
the survival kit to the slideraft.
PRIM CC
SURVIVAL KIT LANYARD SNAP HOOK ......................................................................... ATTACH
Attach the survival kit lanyard snap hook to the ring on the slideraft.
PRIM CC
SURVIVAL KIT........................................................................................... THROW OVERBOARD
PRIM CC
ASSIST SPACE ............................................................................................................... OCCUPY
PRIM CC
PASSENGER EVACUATION ........................................................................................ EXPEDITE
PRIM CC
“COME THIS WAY, TWO BY TWO, HURRY, .................................................................... SHOUT
PRIM CC
NUMBER OF PASSENGERS BOARDING THE SLIDERAFT........................................MONITOR
PRIM CC
ASSIGNED AREA............................................................................ CHECK FULLY EVACUATED
PRIM CC
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................. TAKE
ALL CC
LIFEVEST ......................................................................................................................... INFLATE
ALL CC
SLIDERAFT ........................................................................................................................ BOARD
PRIM CC
SLIDERAFT ............................................................................................................. DISCONNECT
1. Lift the flap located on the side tube.
2. Pull the disconnect handle.
UAE A380 14-40 P 22/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
Note: Assistance may be needed to pull the disconnect handle

PRIM CC
MOORING LINE .......................................................................................................................CUT
END OF PROC
UAE A380 14-40 P 23/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
UNPLANNED DITCHING
Applicable to: ALL
ALL CC
“ OPEN SEAT BELTS, LIFEVESTS ON” ................................................................................. SHOUT
ALL CC
M3 PRIM CC
(AR) M3 DOOR .......................................................................................................................DISARM
PRIM CC
PRIM CC
PASSENGERS TO THE NEAREST EXIT .................................................................... REDIRECT
EXIT ....................................................................................................................................GUARD

PRIM CC
DOOR FRAME ASSIST HANDLE ...................................................................................... GRASP
PRIM CC
DOOR ....................................................................................................................................OPEN
PRIM CC
DOOR ......................................................................................... PUSH TO OPEN MANUALLY
PRIM CC
GUST LOCK ............................................................................................... CHECK ENGAGED
PRIM CC
SLIDERAFT DEPLOYED AND INFLATED........................................................... VISUAL CHECK
PRIM CC
(AR) MIP ...........................................................................................................................PUSH
PRIM CC
ASSIST SPACE ............................................................................................................... OCCUPY
PRIM CC
PASSENGER EVACUATION ........................................................................................ EXPEDITE
UAE A380 14-40 P 24/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
PRIM CC
“COME THIS WAY, TWO BY TWO, HURRY, .....................................................................SHOUT
PRIM CC
NUMBER OF PASSENGERS BOARDING THE SLIDERAFT ....................................... MONITOR
PRIM CC
ASSIGNED AREA ............................................................................CHECK FULLY EVACUATED
(AR) The cabin crew responsible for stairs must visually check that stairs are empty.
PRIM CC
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................TAKE
ALL CC
LIFEVEST..........................................................................................................................INFLATE
ALL CC
SLIDERAFT........................................................................................................................ BOARD
PRIM CC
SLIDERAFT..............................................................................................................DISCONNECT
1. Disconnect the electrical connector (main deck doors)
2. Lift the flap
3. Pull the disconnect handle
PRIM CC
MOORING LINE .......................................................................................................................CUT
END OF PROC
UAE A380 14-40 P 25/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
UAE A380 14-40 P 26/26

CCOM 13-Jan-15
EMERGENCY COCKPIT EVACUATION
A380
COCKPIT EVACUATION THROUGH WINDOW

Applicable to: ALL
OPENING THE SLIDING WINDOW

HANDLE .......................................................................................PUSH DOWN AND PULL BACK
Pulling the handle backwards, opens the sliding window.
COCKPIT EVACUATION WITH ESCAPE ROPE

ESCAPE ROPE STOWAGE.................................................................................................. OPEN
The escape rope stowage is located above the sliding window, on either side of the overhead
panel.
ESCAPE ROPE.................................................................................................................UNROLL
Unroll the escape rope until the red flag appears, and throw it through the window.
SEAT ............................................................................................................................... STEP ON
ESCAPE ROPE.................................................................WITH BOTH HANDS, FIRMLY GRASP
ALONG THE ROPE...................................................................................................SLIDE DOWN
COCKPIT EVACUATION THROUGH COCKPIT DOOR

Applicable to: ALL
HANDLE COVER....................................................................................................................ROTATE
PANEL RELEASE HANDLE .................................................. PUSH AND TURN IN ANY DIRECTION
Note: When the escape panel is unlocked, the locking indicator becomes red.
ESCAPE PANEL............................................................................................KICK TOWARDS CABIN
THROUGH ESCAPE PANEL ............................................................................................EVACUATE
ON HANDS AND KNEES ........................................................................... MOVE TOWARDS CABIN
UAE A380 14-50 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Apr-09
EMERGENCY COCKPIT EVACUATION
A380
UAE A380 14-50 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Apr-09
DEPRESSURIZATION
A380
ABNORMAL CABIN ALTITUDE

Applicable to: ALL
Immediately after the Flight Crew informs the Cabin Crew of possible abnormal cabin pressure the
Cabin Crew must apply the following abnormal cabin altitude procedure :
CABIN CREW.........................................................................................................STOP ACTIVITIES
CABIN CREW........................ TAKE DESIGNATED CABIN CREW SEAT AND SECURE HARNESS
CABIN TO COCKPIT COMMUNICATION........................................................................... MAINTAIN
● If cabin depressurization occurs :
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION .............................................................................................APPLY
Note: The Cabin Crew must apply the CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION procedure upon any
indication of CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION (ref. to chapter 14-60 Abnormal/Emergency
procedures).
UAE A380 14-60 P 1/4

CCOM 06-Oct-16
DEPRESSURIZATION
A380
DEPRESSURIZATION WARNINGS
Applicable to: ALL
A loss of pressurization can be slow - in the case of a small air leak - while a rapid or explosive
depressurization occurs suddenly within a few seconds.
In the case of excessive cabin pressure/depressurization indications in the cabin will successively
alert the cabin crew of a pressurization malfunction.
CABIN INDICATIONS
When the cabin altitude reaches > 9 550 ft the following will happen:
- The EXIT signs will come on
- The cabin lighting comes on 100 % ( or CAM assigned value)
- The FASTEN SEAT BELT and NO SMOKING signs come on
Note: In the case of depressurization, the lavatory RETURN TO SEAT signs do not come on,
and the lavatory occupied sign comes on red.
- A pre-recorded announcement is broadcast advising passengers to return to their seats and
fasten their seatbelts (If installed).
● If the flight crew does not communicate with the cabin crew:
CABIN/COCKPIT COMMUNICATION.................................................................... ESTABLISH
When the cabin altitude reaches 13 800 ft the following will happen:
- The oxygen masks will drop down
- The PA volume increases
- The emergency depressurization messages will be broadcast (If installed).
UAE A380 14-60 P 2/4

CCOM 06-Oct-16
DEPRESSURIZATION
A380
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION
Applicable to: ALL
● If oxygen masks drop:

NEAREST OXYGEN MASK .................................................................................................... DON
NEAREST SEAT ........................................................................................................... SIT DOWN
SEAT BELT ....................................................................................................................... FASTEN
WARNING Do not remove your oxygen mask until it is safe to do so. Removing your oxygen
during a depressurization may lead to total incapacitation caused by hypoxia.
● If no seat is available:
FIXED OBJECT....................................................................................GRASP AND HOLD ON
When no seat is available, the cabin crew should wedge themselves between passengers and
hold on.
● If the flight crew does not communicate with the cabin crew:
CABIN/COCKPIT COMMUNICATION..........................................................................ESTABLISH
The cabin crew should, as soon as possible, inform the flight crew of the situation by the
appropriate means, and confirm that the flight crew wear their oxygen masks.
● If no reply from the cockpit:
CABIN CREW .................................................................. EQUIP YOURSELF WITH OXYGEN
CABIN CREW ............................................................................................... ENTER COCKPIT
CABIN CREW ............................................ PROVIDE ASSISTANCE TO THE FLIGHT CREW
● If the flight crew communicates with the cabin crew:

"DON OXYGEN MASKS - FASTEN SEAT BELTS" ............................ INSTRUCT PASSENGERS
From your location, speak through your mask, or use gestures to demonstrate the donning of
masks.
CHIEF PURS
ANNOUNCEMENT........................................................................................ MAKE, IF POSSIBLE
Although the bag does not inflate, oxygen is flowing to the mask.
Note: In the case of a cabin depressurization, the lavatory "return to seat" signs do not come
on. For passengers located in the lavatories, 2 masks will immediately drop down from
the lavatory ceiling. Passengers should apply the mask over their nose and mouth.
● When notified by the flight crew (PA) that a safe flight level has been reached:
CABIN CREW.................................................................... TRANSFER TO PORTABLE OXYGEN
UAE A380 14-60 P 3/4

CCOM 06-Oct-16
DEPRESSURIZATION
A380
Note: To prevent crew incapacitation due to hypoxia, the cabin crew must transfer to portable
oxygen, and consider their post decompression oxygen needs. When deciding to remove
oxygen masks, the cabin crew must use good judgement, and must be aware of any
signs of hypoxia.
FLIGHT CREW ................................................................................................................... CHECK
The cabin crewmember nearest to the cockpit should check on the flight crew in case assistance
is needed.
PASSENGERS AND CABIN............................................................................................... CHECK
The cabin crew should check for passenger injuries and damage to the cabin.
FIRST AID AND OXYGEN............................................................................ GIVE AS REQUIRED
CABIN STATUS ................................................................................ REPORT TO FLIGHT CREW
Report the nature of injuries, and the cabin damage to the flight crew.
CREW REST COMPARTMENT DEPRESSURIZATION

Applicable to: ALL
● If a depressurization occurs:
- A continuous high chime sounds through the Crew Rest Compartment loudspeakers during five
minutes.
- The oxygen masks drop down automatically from the oxygen container, when the cabin altitude
reaches 13 800 ft
The crew rest occupants must proceed as follows:
OXYGEN MASKS ....................................................................................................................DON
SEAT BELT........................................................................................................................FASTEN
CREW REST OCCUPANTS ..................................................................................... STAY INSIDE
● When the flight crew notifies (via PA) that a safe flight level has been reached:
CABIN CREW .........................................................................................RETURN TO THE CABIN
CABIN CREW ....................................................................TRANSFER TO PORTABLE OXYGEN
Note: To prevent crew incapacitation due to hypoxia, the cabin crew must transfer to portable
oxygen, and consider their post decompression oxygen needs. When deciding to remove
oxygen masks, the cabin crew must use good judgement, and must be alert to any signs
of hypoxia.
UAE A380 14-60 P 4/4

CCOM 06-Oct-16
CREW REST COMPARTMENT PROCEDURES
A380
MAIN DECK CREW REST COMPARTMENT EMERGENCY EVACUATION

MDCRC
The primary access to the MDCRC is the MDCRC door located in the main deck compartment.
The Emergency exit is located forward of the MDCRC, on the lower left side.
● If an emergency evacuation of the MDCRC is required and, the primary access of the
MDCRC is blocked:
EMERGENCY EXIT HANDLES............................................................................................. TURN
The handles must be operated in direction of the arrows.
EMERGENCY EXIT PANEL................................................................................................... PULL
EMERGENCY EXIT......................................................................................................EVACUATE
USING HANDS AND KNEES................................................................................... ENTER FCRC
FCRC MAIN ACCESS DOOR ......................................................................................EVACUATE
UAE A380 14-70 P 1/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
LOWER DECK CREW REST COMPARTMENT EVACUATION

LDCRC
● If the main hatch or the staircase door is blocked.

To evacuate the LDCRC, the cabin crew must use the emergency exit hatch. This emergency exit
hatch is in the forward right aisle of the main deck , behind the LDCRC stairhouse .
Emergency exit hatch opening from inside the LDCRC
PANEL COVERING THE EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH........................................ PULL TO REMOVE
EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH HANDLE .................................................TURN HANDLE CLOCKWISE
This will open the hatch.
EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH..........................................................PUSH UPWARD AND OUTWARD
CABIN CREW ......................................................................................................... EXIT THE LDCRC
To exit the LDCRC step on the support, use the upper bunk lying surface, and pull yourself into the
cabin.
Emergency exit hatch opening from the cabin.
CARPET COVERING THE HATCH ...................................................................................... REMOVE
EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH HANDLE ............................ LIFT AND TURN COUNTER CLOCKWISE
This will unlock the hatch.
EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH............................................... LIFT AND PULL TOWARDS THE CABIN
UAE A380 14-70 P 2/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
EVACUATION OF AN INCAPACITATED PERSON FROM THE LDCRC VIA THE

MAIN EXIT HATCH
If a cabin crewmember (CC) becomes incapacitated in the Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment
(LDCRC), any available cabin crewmember should:
- Inform the Captain
- Broadcast a Passenger Address (PA) announcement to request the medical assistance of a
doctor, nurse, or other medically trained persons.
The LDCRC should not be occupied during takeoff and landing. However, the captain may adopt a
different procedure and decide to let the incapacitated cabin crewmember stay in the LDCRC, if the
landing is not critical.
WARNING In the case of a life-threatening situation, such as smoke or fire, the incapacitated
cabin crewmember must be immediately evacuated from the LDCRC. If it necessary
to evacuate the LDCRC, the any cabin crewmember must obtain help from two cabin
crewmembers, in order to enable access to the Main Deck (MD).
Note: Two cabin crewmembers should be sufficient to safely lift an incapacitated cabin
crewmember up the ladder.
UAE A380 14-70 P 3/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
The evacuation of an incapacitated cabin crewmember from the LDCRC requires that two cabin
crewmembers be on the main deck (outside the hatch) and that two cabin crewmembers be in the
LDCRC to carry the incapacitated cabin crewmember.
CC 1 and 2
- INCAPACITATED CC ............................................................................................................ CARRY
1. CC 1 must carefully:
- Put their left arm under the left armpit of the incapacitated CC
- Hold up the chin of the incapacitated CC
- Put their right arm under the right armpit of the incapacitated CC
- Hold the arms of the incapacitated CC in the crossed position.
UAE A380 14-70 P 4/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Note: These actions help support the head and neck of the incapacitated CC .
2. CC 2 must put their left arm under the knees of the incapacitated CC , in order to support the legs
of the incapacitated CC .
3. CC 1 and 2 must slowly go up in a synchronized manner while carefully holding on to the
incapacitated CC .
4. CC 1 must put their back against the ladder. CC 2 must firmly hold the handrail with their right
hand.
CC 3 and 4
- AT THE ENTRANCE OF THE LDCRC.................................................................................. ASSIST
• CC 3 must wait at the entrance of the LDCRC and keep the door in the open position.
• CC 4 must help ensure access by removing obstacles from the evacuation path, and must provide
general support by ensuring that there is sufficient lighting in the cabin.
UAE A380 14-70 P 5/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
EVACUATION OF AN INCAPACITATED PERSON FROM THE LDCRC - USING THE

EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH
If a cabin crewmember becomes incapacitated in the Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment
(LDCRC), the available cabin crewmember should:
- Inform the Captain,
- Make a Passenger Address (PA) to request the medical assistance of a doctor, nurse, or other
trained persons.
The LDCRC should not be occupied during takeoff and landing. However, the captain may adopt a
different procedure and decide to let the incapacitated cabin crewmember stay in the LDCRC, if the
landing is not critical.
WARNING In the case of a life- threatening situation, such as smoke or fire, the incapacitated
cabin crewmember must be evacuated immediately. In such cases, the other cabin
crewmember must request that two cabin crewmembers help to clear the access to
the Main Deck MD
EVACUATION THROUGH THE EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH

Cabin Crewmember in the LDCRC
Open the emergency exit hatch which is located above the rear right hand bunk (when facing the
flight direction).
PANEL COVERING THE EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH .................................. PULL TO REMOVE
EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH HANDLE ............................................TURN HANDLE CLOCKWISE
This will open the hatch.
EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH.....................................................PUSH UPWARD AND OUTWARD
Cabin crewmembers in the LDCRC
Carry the incapacitated cabin crewmember to the bunk where the emergency exit hatch is
located.
Lift the incapacitated cabin crewmember and place the incapacitated cabin crewmember on the
bunk below the hatch.
Note: Ensure that the incapacitated cabin crewmember's head and neck are also supported.
Cabin crewmembers on the main deck
Coordinate with the cabin crewmembers in the LDCRC and wait until they are ready to lift the
incapacitated cabin crewmember.
UAE A380 14-70 P 6/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
Cabin crewmembers in the LDCRC

Inform the cabin crewmembers on the main deck when to lift the incapacitated cabin crewmember
out of the LDCRC.
Lift the incapacitated cabin crewmember as far into the hatch as possible, supporting the upper
body and lifting the crewmember up into the hatch by the legs.
Cabin crewmembers on the main deck
Reach into the emergency hatch and lift the incapacitated cabin crewmember out of the hatch and
into the cabin.
LOWER DECK CREW REST COMPARTMENT AIR CONDITIONING LOW FLOW

● If the air flow into the LDCRC is too low:

- A continuous chime sounds through the loudspeakers for 30 s
It is not possible to reset this chime L2
- The LEAVE COMPARTMENT sign comes on in red on the PSU of each bunk and on the L1
information columns in the compartment.

- The general LDCRC lighting is switched to 100 % (or the CAM assigned value)
The crew rest occupants must proceed as follows:
OCCUPANTS .......................................................................EXIT CREW REST COMPARTMENT
CREW REST COMPARTMENT EMPTY.............................................................................CHECK
EXIT AND EMERGENCY EXIT HATCHES...................................................................... CLOSED
FLIGHT CREW.................................................................................................................. INFORM
UAE A380 14-70 P 7/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
A380
UAE A380 14-70 P 8/8

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT AND PROCEDURES
A380
TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT
Applicable to: ALL
The following levels of turbulence can be encountered during a flight:

- Light turbulence
- Moderate turbulence
- Severe turbulence
The cabin crew should always use these terms when communicating turbulent conditions to the flight
crew or other cabin crewmembers.
The following table provides the definition and the cabin conditions associated with each of the three
levels of turbulence.
Light Turbulence Moderate Turbulence Severe Turbulence

Light turbulence momentarily Moderate turbulence, causes Severe turbulence causes large
causes slight, rapid, and rhythmic rapid bumps or jolts. abrupt changes in the aircraft
bumpiness without noticeable altitude and attitude.
changes in the aircraft altitude or
attitude.
Cabin Conditions Cabin Conditions Cabin Conditions
• Liquids are shaking but are not • Liquids splashing out of cups • Items falling or lifting off the floor
splashing out of cups • Trolleys difficult to manoeuvre • Loose items are tossed about the
• Trolleys can be maneuvered with • Difficult to walk in the cabin cabin
little difficulty • Difficult to stand without holding • Impossible to walk
• Passengers may feel a slight on to something • Passengers are forced violently
strain against their seat belts. • Passengers feel definite strain against their seat belts
against their seat belts.
CABIN GUIDELINES
It is important that the cabin crew perform frequent cabin checks and correctly manage the galleys to
ensure safety and reduce the probability of injuries. Therefore, the cabin crew should:
- Check the cabin frequently and ensure that the cabin is kept tidy
- Minimize the amount of service equipment left on galley and bar (when installed) surfaces. When
items must remain available they should be placed inside draws that are easily accessible
- Ensure that galleys are correctly secured and latched after each service/use.
- Ensure that trolleys and equipment should be correctly stowed after use.
UAE A380 14-80 P 1/6

CCOM 08-Jan-10
A380
CABIN CREW PROCEDURES

Applicable to: ALL
SECURING THE CABIN AND PASSENGER COMPLIANCE

The table below provides the cabin crew procedures in the case of turbulence.

- Visually check that all - When the cabin crew are - The cabin crew must not
passengers are seated with returning to their crew seats, attempt to visually check
their seat belts fastened and check that all passengers are passenger compliance
hand baggage is stowed seated with their seat belts
- If trolleys are in the cabin, set
securely fastened and hand
- Infants must be removed from the brakes on all trolleys that
baggage is stowed
bassinets and secured with are in use in the current
- Infants must be removed
an infant seat belt (if location
from bassinets and
applicable) on the guardians
secured with an infant - Place jugs/pots of hot
lap, or secured in an
seat belt (if applicable) on beverages on the floor
approved car seat.
the guardians lap, or
secured in an approved - The cabin crew must
- Prohibit the use of the forward
car seat. immediately sit down. Take
and rear stairs, except to
- Prohibit the use of the the nearest seat (including
allow passengers return to
forward and rear stairs. passenger seat ) and fasten
their seats.
- Give the "cabin secure" to seatbelt/harness.
- Give the "cabin secure" to the the Chief Purser WARNING Cabin
Chief Purser - Chief Purser informs the crew must
flight crew that the cabin is not risk
- Chief Purser informs the flight
secure. personal
crew that the cabin is secure.
injury by
continuing
service
during
turbulent
conditions
. The
personal
safety of
the cabin
crew is the
priority
UAE A380 14-80 P 2/6

CCOM 08-Jan-10
A380
GALLEY AREAS
- Ensure that trolleys and - Ensure that trolleys and - Set the brakes on all trolleys
galley equipment that is not in galley equipment that is not in that are in use in their current
use are correctly stowed and use are correctly stowed and location
secured secured
- Place jugs/pots of hot
- If the turbulence is expected beverages on the floor
for a long duration, stow and
- The cabin crew must
secure galley items
immediately sit down. Fasten
- Cabin crewmembers working seat belt/harness.
in the galley areas must take WARNING Cabin
their seats when the galley is crew must
secured. not risk
personal
injury by
continuing
service
during
turbulent
conditions
. The
personal
safety of
the cabin
crew is the
priority.
UAE A380 14-80 P 3/6

CCOM 08-Jan-10
A380
ANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES

Applicable to: ALL
When turbulence is anticipated the cabin crew will have a certain amount of time before the turbulence
is encountered to secure the cabin and themselves.
Flight Crew Preflight Chief Purser Preflight Cabin Crew Preflight

- Include as part of the pre-flight - Inform all the cabin crew of any - Acknowledge information from
briefing with Chief Purser, turbulence information Chief Purser or Purser.
expected areas of turbulence received from the flight crew
during the flight. during the pre-flight briefing.
Flight Crew In-flight Chief Purser In-flight Cabin Crew In-flight
- When turbulence is expected - When the service is interrupted - Once the cabin crew are
during the flight, the flight crew as a precautionary measure, a advised of anticipated
must advise the cabin crew PA announcement should be turbulence, the cabin crew
how much time is available to made to the passengers should prioritize their duties
secure the cabin, the level and explaining WHY the service is based on the time available
expected duration of the interrupted before the turbulence
turbulence encounter. - Ensure that all passengers and encounter.
- The captain or first officer will cabin crew are secured - Stow and secure large items
make a PA announcement to - Inform the flight crew that all first, such as, trolleys
the passengers instructing passengers and cabin crew - Remove bottles from the cabin
them to return to their seats are secured. and galley surfaces. Throw
and fasten their seatbelts. away any hot liquids
- Secure the cabin, ensure that
the lavatories are unoccupied
- Secure the galleys
- The cabin crew should then
secure themselves.
- Inform Chief Purser or Purser
that passengers and cabin
crew are secured.
UAE A380 14-80 P 4/6

CCOM 08-Jan-10
A380
UNANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES

Applicable to: ALL
Flight Crew Chief Purser Cabin Crew

- Switch on the Fasten Seatbelt - The Chief Purser must - The cabin crew must
signs and make a PA to Immediately sit down. Take the immediately sit down. Take the
passengers and cabin crew to nearest seat (including nearest seat (including
"Fasten Seatbelts passenger seat) and fasten passenger seat ) and fasten
Immediately" seatbelt and harness. seatbelt/harness.
WARNING Cabin crew
must not
risk
personal
injury by
continuing
service
during
turbulent
conditions.
The
personal
safety of
the cabin
crew is the
priority
POST TURBULENCE DUTIES

Applicable to: ALL
Flight Crew Chief Purser Cabin Crew

- Advise cabin crew when it is - Resume duties - Check for passenger injuries,
safe to resume duties. give first aid if necessary
- Report any passenger injuries
and/or cabin damage to the - Calm and reassure
flight crew passengers
- Check for cabin damage
- Report to Chief Purser or
purser any passenger injuries
and/or cabin damage
UAE A380 14-80 P 5/6

CCOM 08-Jan-10
A380
UAE A380 14-80 P 6/6

CCOM 08-Jan-10
A380
UPPER AVIONIC DOOR NOT CLOSED

Applicable to: ALL
● If the upper avionic door is detected as not closed:

On the FAPs :
- The door page automatically appears
- On the door page, the upper avionics door symbol becomes red
- On the door page, the CHECK UPPER AVIONICS DOOR pad comes on
- A triple chime sounds in the cabin every 30s.
......................................................................................................................................................................
In the event the upper avionics door is detected as not closed, the cabin crew should proceed as
follow :
RESET CHIME Key............................................................................................................. PRESS
The RESET CHIME key is located on the CHECK AVIONICS DOOR pad displayed on the FAPs
door page .
CABIN/COCKPIT COMMUNICATION..........................................................................ESTABLISH
UPPER AVIONIC DOOR...............................................................................CHECK AND CLOSE
CONFIRM CHECK Key ....................................................................................................... PRESS
The CONFIRM CHECK key is located on the CHECK AVIONICS DOOR pad displayed on the
FAPs door page .
UAE A380 14-90 P 1/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM LEAK

Applicable to: ALL
● IF THERE IS A POTABLE WATER LEAK :

● COMING FROM A GALLEY:
FRP GALLEY LEAK........................................................................................................ APPLY
Refer to 03-90-50-110 Deactivate a Galley (Leakage)
● COMING FROM A LAVATORY:

FRP LAVATORY LEAK .................................................................................................. APPLY
Refer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a Lavatory (Leakage)
● COMING FROM AN UNKNOWN SOURCE:

WATER / WASTE FAP PAGE ......................................................................................SELECT
CORRESPONDING DECK...........................................................................................SELECT
WATER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN BUTTON...................................................................SELECT
As an option, it is possible to switch off the right or the left side in addition to the complete
deck.
On the pop up blue card:
"YES" BUTTON ............................................................................................................SELECT
The cabin crew will select the YES button on the pop up blue card to confirm the water supply
shutdown.
UAE A380 14-90 P 2/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
TRANSPORTATION OF AN INCAPACITATED PERSON FROM ONE DECK TO

ANOTHER
Applicable to: ALL
There are various types of incapacitation. Depending on the type, on the circumstances, and only
after obtaining appropriate medical recommendations, it may be possible to move an incapacitated
person from one deck to another (i.e. from the main deck to the upper deck, or from the upper deck to
the main deck).
The number of people that may be required to move and carry an incapacitated person from one
deck to another will depend on a number of variables (i.e. the size, weight, and general medical
condition of the incapacitated person, the physical strength of the assistants, etc.). However, three to
four people should be sufficient to lift and carry an incapacitated person.
If medical recommendation to move an incapacitated person is obtained, cabin crewmembers should
request help to clear access to the relocation area (i;e. by removing obstacles from the expected path
and stairs, by opening cabin dividers, etc) or cabin crewmembers should request general support (i.e.
to ensure appropriate and sufficient lighting, etc).
CC
PURSERS............................................................................................................................... INFORM
CC
HELP....................................................................................................................................REQUEST
CC
RELOCATION AREA........................................................ DETERMINE AND ESTIMATE DISTANCE
CC
OBSTACLES .........................................................................................................................REMOVE
“LIFT POSITION” ......................................................................................................................ADOPT
SIGNAL TO START LIFTING .......................................................................................................GIVE
INCAPACITATED PERSON ....................................................................................LIFT CAREFULLY
INCAPACITATED PERSON ................. CAREFULLY CARRY AND MOVE TO RELOCATION AREA
UAE A380 14-90 P 3/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
FLIGHT CREWMEMBER INCAPACITATION
Applicable to: ALL
● If a flight crewmember becomes incapacitated:

The remaining flight crewmember will as soon as practicable call for help from cabin
crewmembers.
The simplest and most effective way to summon help is via the PA system:
“CABIN CREWMEMBER TO COCKPIT”
The nearest cabin crewmember, must immediately proceed to the cockpit. The cabin
crewmember must carry out the following actions:
CC
FLIGHT CREW SHOULDER HARNESS ................................. TIGHTEN AND MANUALLY LOCK
FLIGHT CREW SEAT ..................................................................... PUSH THE SEAT FULLY AFT
FLIGHT CREW SEAT BACK ........................................................................................... RECLINE
● If the incapacitated flight crewmember is unconscious or has difficulty breathing:

OXYGEN.......................................................................................... ADMINISTER IMMEDIATELY
INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE PILOT FLYING ..................................................................FOLLOW
CAUTION It takes two people to move an unconscious body from a flight crew seat, in order
to prevent damage or interference to the cockpit controls.
● If it is not possible to move the incapacitated flight crewmember:

CABIN CREWMEMBER IN THE COCKPIT.......................................................................REMAIN
One cabin crewmember should remain in the cockpit to take care of, and observe the
incapacitated flight crewmember.
MEDICAL ASSISTANCE..................................................................................................... REQUEST

Make a PA announcement to request assistance from any medically qualified passenger onboard.
COMPANY QUALIFIED PILOT....................................................................REQUEST ASSISTANCE
Request the assistance of a type qualified company pilot onboard to replace the incapacitated flight
crewmember.
UAE A380 14-90 P 4/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
BOMB ON BOARD
Applicable to: ALL
BOMB ON BOARD PROCEDURE

When a suspect device is found in the cabin:
WARNING Do not cut or disconnect any wires Do not attempt to gain entry to internal
components of a closed or sealed suspect device. Any attempt may result in an
explosion. Booby-trapped closed devices have been used on aircraft in the past.
WARNING Alternative Least Risk Bomb Locations LRBL must not be used without consulting
with an aviation explosives security specialist. Never take a suspect device to the
cockpit.
CAUTION (AR) The Least Risk Bomb Location LRBL for the A380 is located at the center of
the M5R cabin door.
EOD PERSONNEL ON BOARD..........................................................................................CHECK

Announce : "Is there any EOD personnel on board ?". By using the initials, only persons familiar
with EOD (Explosive Ordnance Disposal) will be made aware of the problem.
BOMB ..............................................................................................................................................
.......... DO NOT OPEN, DO NOT CUT WIRES, SECURE AGAINST SLIPPING, AVOID SHOCKS
Secure in the attitude found and do not lift before having checked for an anti-lift ignition device.
PASSENGERS.................................................................................... LEAD AWAY FROM BOMB
Move passengers at least 4 seat rows away the bomb location. On full flights, it may be necessary
to double up passengers to achieve standoff from the suspect device.
Passengers near the bomb should protect their heads with pillows, blankets.
All passengers must remain seated with seat belts on and, if possible, head below the top of the
head rest. Seat backs and tray tables must be in their full upright position.
L2
Service items may need to be collected in order to secure tray tables.
Distance from an explosion is one of the best protective measures for passenger safety. Placing
seat backs and tray tables in their full , upright positions will provide additional protection.
CREW REST AREAS...................................................................................................EVACUATE L1
For aircraft equipped with crew rest areas (Main Deck and Lower Deck).
PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICES....................................................................... SWITCH OFF
The cabin crews must command passengers to switch off all portable electronic devices.
BOMB ........................................................................................... CHECK NO ANTI-LIFT DEVICE
UAE A380 14-90 P 5/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
To check for an anti-lift switch or lever, slide a string or stiff card (such as the emergency
information card) under the bomb, without disturbing the bomb.
If the string or card cannot be slipped under the bomb, it may indicate that an anti-lift switch or
lever is present and that the bomb cannot be moved.
If a card is used and can be slid under the bomb, leave it under the bomb and move together with
the bomb.
If it is not possible to move the bomb, then it should be covered with a single thin sheet of plastic
(e.g. trash bag), then with wetted materials, and other blast attenuation materials such as seat
cushions and soft baggage. Move personnel as far away from the bomb location as possible.
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT........................................................................REMOVE AND STOW
Emergency equipment (PBE, fire extinguisher, ...) located close to the LRBL must be removed
and stowed in alternate location.
GALLEY/IFE POWER ...............................................................................................................OFF
All galley and IFE equipment located close to the LRBL must be switched off.
● If the bomb can be moved
(AR) M5R CABIN DOOR ..............................................................................................DISARM
LEAST RISK BOMB LOCATION (LRBL)...................................................................PREPARE
Build up a platform of baggage out to the aisle, from the floor up to the mid - height of the door
at the LRBL. Wetted material for example, blankets or clothes, should make up the last 10
inches ( 25 cm) of this platform.
Place a single, thin sheet of plastic for example, a trash bag, on top of the wetted materials.
CAUTION Do not omit the plastic sheets, as the suspect device could get wet and possibly
short circuit electronic components causing inadvertent device activation.
BOMB INDICATION LINE..........................................................................................POSITION

Note: A bomb indicator line is a 6 to 8 foot (1.8 to 2.4 m ) line (e.g. neckties, headset cords,
or belts tied together) preferably of contrasting color, that helps the responding bomb
squad find the precise location of the suspect device within the LRBL stack once
constructed.
Position the bomb indication line from the location of the suspect device within the LRBL stack.
This will enable crewmembers to avoid any unnecessary passenger exposure, and enable the
responding bomb squad to find the bomb with minimal time and disturbance.
WARNING Do not physically tie or otherwise attach the bomb location indicator line to the
bomb.
UAE A380 14-90 P 6/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
BOMB...............................................................................................................MOVE TO LRBL
Move it in the position found to the prepared LRBL base with the card in place beneath it.
Stabilize it on top of the plastic sheet above the 10 inches (25 cm) of wetted materials and
center it against the inside surface of the door.
Position the bomb in the attitude found, as close to the center of the LRBL door.
WARNING If the bomb is located on the upper deck, DO NOT transport the bomb to the
main deck using the trolley lift.
CAUTION Ensure that when the suspect device, when placed in the stack against the
door, is above the slide pack but NOT against the door handle, and if possible,
avoid placement in the viewport..
LEAST RISK BOMB LOCATION............................................................................ COMPLETE

Place an additional sheet of thin plastic over the bomb.
CAUTION Do not omit the plastic sheets, as the suspect device could get wet and possibly
short circuit electronic components causing inadvertent device activation.
Saturate soft blast -attenuating materials for example, blankets or clothes, with water or any
other nonflammable liquid and carefully pack at least 10 inches (25 cm) of wetted material
around and on top of the bomb.
Arrange luggage and blast attenuating materials in a manner that prevents excessive weight
from being applied directly in the bomb, and fill the entire the entire remaining area above the
bomb with soft blast-attenuating materials, for example, seat cushions up to the cabin ceiling
and out to the aisle.
LRBL ........................................................................................................................... SECURE
Secure the LRBL stack in place using seat belts, headset cords, ties, or other appropriate
materials.
UAE A380 14-90 P 7/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
LRBL Stack
PASSENGERS .................................................................................................. MOVE/ADVISE

Move passengers at least 4 seat rows away from the least risk bomb location (RH aft cabin
door). On full flights, it may be necessary to double up passengers to achieve standoff from
the suspect device.
Passengers near the bomb should protect their heads with pillows, blankets.
All passengers must remain seated with sea belts on and, if possible, head below the top of
the head rest. Seat backs and tray tables must be in their full upright position.
CABIN CREW......................................................... NOTIFY FLIGHT CREW LRBL SECURED
Note: Consider disarming the door directly across from the LRBLto enable the response
team to open this door from the outside, if needed during their procedures.
EVACUATION/DISEMBARKATION ..........................................................................EXECUTE
UAE A380 14-90 P 8/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
REJECTED TAKEOFF
Applicable to: ALL
In the event of a rejected takeoff, the cabin crew should proceed as follows:
CABIN CREW...........................................................REMAIN SEATED WITH HARNESS SECURED
The cabin crew must remain seated in their crew seats, until the aircraft comes to a complete stop.
COCKPIT CREW INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................WAIT FOR AND FOLLOW
● If the cabin crew suspects or notices the development of an emergency situation (based
on passenger reactions, smoke, noises, odors, aircraft attitude,...)
CABIN CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................ASSESS
When the aircraft comes to a complete stop, and if necessary, the cabin crew can leave crew
seats to further assess any conditions and/or passenger reactions.
● If the cabin crew determines that there is an emergency situation

COCKPIT CREW.......................................................................................IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY
The cabin crew must immediately notify the cockpit crew of the cabin conditions, and of the nature
of the emergency.
COCKPIT CREW INSTRUCTIONS.................................................................................. FOLLOW
UAE A380 14-90 P 9/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
SLIDERAFT TRANSPORTATION DOORS M1 AND M2

Applicable to: ALL
After ditching, in the case that one of the main deck doors at M1, M2, M4, or M5 is inoperative, the
sliderafts can be carried to the opposite door and launched as a raft.
Release and reattachment instructions are visible when the decorative cover has been removed. The
quick release girt bars installed on main deck doors, M1, M2, M4, and M5 will facilitate the portability
features.
Note: The slideraft portability instructions are written on each slide pack. Follow the steps of the
procedure according to the slide location.
SLIDERAFT TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE DOORS M1 AND M2
1. Remove the decorative cover
2. Remove the hinge flap safety pin from the stowage pouch
3. Insert the hinge flap safety pin fully into the release mechanism
4. Disengage the upper packboard latch
5. Rotate the pack inboard and lift the pack free from the door
6. Disconnect the electrical connector
7. Disarm the door
8. Pull portability pins
9. Transport the slide to the opposite door position
Note: Once the slide pack is placed at the opposite door, proceed with the remainder of the
procedure.
10.Push the girt bar hooks down and remove the girt bar
11.Put the girt bar into the floor fittings
12.Pull the hinge flap safety pin out
13.Pull the hinge flap release cable
14.Lift the packboard from the slide
15.Verify the harness is inboard and clear of entanglements
16.Connect the harness to the portability connector
17.Turn the slide into the water
CAUTION Before deploying the transported main deck sliderafts, ensure that the upper deck
sliderafts are detached from the aircraft,
18.Push the MIP on the right side of the door frame

19.Remove the packboard from the exit
UAE A380 14-90 P 10/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
SLIDERAFT TRANSPORTATION DOOR M4

Applicable to: ALL

7. Disarm the door
procedure.
14.Lift the packboard from the slide
18.Lift the girt flap and pull the ditching handle

19.Push the MIP on the right side of the doorframe
20.Remove the packboard from the exit
Note: Due to the angle of the slideraft, only one lane will be available to board passengers. It will
be necessary to board passengers one at a time
UAE A380 14-90 P 11/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
SLIDERAFT TRANSPORTATION DOOR M5

Applicable to: ALL

7. Disarm the door
procedure.
14.Lift the packboard partially from the slide
17.Put the packboard on the slide

19.Press the MIP on the right side of the doorframe
UAE A380 14-90 P 12/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
SINGLE BLADE LAVATORY DOOR EMERGENCY OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
In case of an emergency, the single-blade lavatory door may be unlocked from the cabin.
LAVATORY SIGN COVER ............................................................................................................LIFT
The spring-loaded lavatory sign cover is located above the door's VACANT/OCCUPIED indicator
KNOB.................................................................................................................. SLIDE TO THE SIDE
Sliding the knob to the side will unlock the lavatory door, and the indicator will show: “VACANT”.
LAVATORY DOOR........................................................................................................... PULL OPEN
● If the lavatory door still does not open:
UPPER AND LOWER OUTSIDE LATCHES OF THE DOOR .......................................... UNLOCK
LAVATORY DOOR...................................................................................................... PULL OPEN
WARNING After releasing the lavatory door:

Hold on to the lavatory door to prevent injury .
In case of an emergency, the bi-folding lavatory door may be unlocked from the cabin.
LAVATORY SIGN COVER ............................................................................................................LIFT
The spring-loaded lavatory sign cover is located above the door's VACANT/OCCUPIED indicator
KNOB.................................................................................................................. SLIDE TO THE SIDE
Sliding the knob to the side will unlock the lavatory door, and the indicator will show: “VACANT”.
LAVATORY DOOR.......................................................................................................... PUSH OPEN
● If the lavatory door still does not open:
Upper and lower latches of the lavatory door ................................................................... UNLOCK
LAVATORY DOOR...................................................................................................... PULL OPEN
WARNING After releasing the lavatory door:

Hold on to the lavatory door to prevent injury.
UAE A380 14-90 P 13/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
A380
UAE A380 14-90 P 14/14

CCOM 06-Oct-16
SAFETY OPERATIONAL AWARENESS
Evacuation Awareness
A380
PLANNED GROUND EVACUATION

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
A planned ground evacuation can be defined as an evacuation that enables the cabin crew to review
procedures, and to inform and prepare passengers for an emergency landing. The cabin crew provide
passengers with brace instructions, guidance on exit usage, and information on how and when exits
should be operated. Effective communication between the crewmembers and the passengers is
necessary for a timely, effective and orderly response.
EMERGENCY CHECKLIST
Emergency checklists are useful tools that enable cabin crew to prepare the cabin for a planned
emergency. They contain all the steps required to prepare the cabin for an emergency and list the
steps to be completed in order of priority.
Many Operators have developed checklists in the form of laminated cards that are distributed to each
cabin crew, or are stowed near the cabin crew stations and are readily accessible to the cabin crew.
Emergency checklists are designed to provide support to cabin crew in a planned emergency, and to
help them complete all the necessary steps without forgetting anything. Emergency checklists should
be short and consistent.
EMERGENCY CHECKLIST CONTENTS
THE BRACE POSITION
The brace position is essential when preparing passengers for an emergency landing. Reviewing
the brace position during the emergency passenger briefing will help to ensure that passengers are
in the correct brace position for landing.
The brace position has a dual function: First of all, it reduces body movement, as passengers must
lean or bend over their legs. Secondly, it protects passengers from hitting their head on a hard
surface.
This position must be adapted if the seat is:
- Facing a seat back or a bulkhead
- Forward facing or aft-facing with a safety belt and a shoulder harness (crewmember seats only).
It must also be adapted if passengers are obese, pregnant or traveling with infants.
Passenger Brace Positions
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 1/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
Normal Seating Position
Against a bulkhead
Greater distance between seats
Adults with infant
No bulkhead or seat in front
Pregnant lady
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 2/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
Cabin Crew Brace Positions

Forward facing seat
Aft facing seat
It must be emphasized to passengers that they should expect more than one impact.
Passengers must remain in the brace position until the aircraft comes until a complete stop.
Once the brace position has been explained, the next step is to inform the passengers when to
assume the brace position, for example:
“When you hear the cabin crew shouting “Brace , Brace”, this will be your signal to take the brace
position, you must remain in this position until the aircraft has come to a complete stop”.
EMERGENCY EXIT LOCATION
The cabin crew must indicate the location of all the emergency exits and the floor path lighting to
the passengers.
LOOSE ITEMS
All loose items must be secured as they may be projected into the cabin during landing causing
injury or impeding access to exits.
Items to be stowed and secured include:
- Carry-on baggage
- Handbags
- Laptops
- Briefcases.
All of these items must be placed in an overhead bin, closet or under a seat.
High-heeled shoes and sharp objects must also be removed, as they may cause damage to the
slide during an evacuation. In addition, these objects must not be stowed in seat pockets, since
they may injure passengers when they take the brace position.
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 3/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
Seat pockets should only be used to stow small objects, such as pens and eyeglasses. Cabin crew
should also remove items such as pens, badges and wing pins from their uniforms.
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR A PLANNED GROUND EVACUATION
PLANNED GROUND EVACUATION BRIEFING
In any type of unusual, abnormal or emergency situation, crew communication and co-ordination
play a vital role. It is important that information is shared amongst the entire crew. Successful
evacuations are dependent on effective communication among the flight crew, the cabin crew and
the passengers.
It is important for Operators to establish procedures in order to ensure that adequate guidance is
provided to both flight crew and cabin crew on how to conduct abnormal and emergency briefings.
For example, if the flight crew need to inform the cabin crew of an emergency, there may be a
specific signal to alert the cabin, such as:
• A series of chimes
• A specific PA: i.e. “Purser to cockpit”.
These specific actions alert the other crewmembers that there is an emergency situation. When the
cabin crew hear the signal, this indicates that an emergency situation exists, and that they must
start to secure equipment. Cabin crew should be ready, at their stations, to be briefed by the Purser
via the interphone.
THE FLIGHT CREW TO PURSER BRIEFING
The flight crew should brief the Purser in a clear, precise and concise manner.
The briefing should provide the Purser with the following information:
- Nature of emergency (landing or ditching)
- Time available to prepare the cabin (the cabin and flight crew should synchronize watches to
assist with time management)
- What the brace signal will be
- Signal to remain seated (if no evacuation is required)
- Special instructions/other information
- Who will inform the passengers and when (flight crew or Purser).
THE PURSER TO CABIN CREW BRIEFING
The Purser must take note of the time in order to manage the time available for the emergency
briefing. A certain amount of time is allocated to each task on the checklist. The Purser will need to
closely monitor the time in order to accomplish as many tasks on the checklists, as time permits.
The extent of the cabin preparation will depend on the time available. The steps of the cabin
preparation should be completed in the order of their importance.
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 4/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
The Purser will relay the information provided by the flight crew to all of the cabin crew and
then instruct them to:
- Take their emergency checklists
- Take their emergency briefing position
- Be prepared for the emergency announcement and demonstration.
THE CABIN CREW TO PASSENGER BRIEFING
For psychological reasons, it is advised that the flight crew make the initial announcement.
However, due to the high workload in the cockpit during an emergency, the Purser may be required
to make the announcement.
The Purser must inform the passengers about:
- The nature of the emergency
- The need to prepare the cabin
- The need for passengers to follow the cabin crew instructions.
Before the emergency demonstration begins, the cabin crew must ensure that:
- The cabin dividers are open
- The lighting is on full bright
- The entertainment system is switched off
The cabin crew should be ready to demonstrate the emergency briefing in their assigned area.
In order to conduct an effective briefing, the cabin crew must not distract the passenger’s attention
from the briefing.
Some helpful tips include
- Remain in the assigned area
- Ensure all passengers can see the demonstration
- Do not talk during the announcement
- Coordinate the demonstration with the announcement.
When reading the announcement, the Purser should speak slowly and clearly, and remember to
pause at key points. This will enable cabin crewmembers to perform the demonstration, and verify
passenger compliance.
THE SIGNAL TO EVACUATE
The flight crew will initiate the evacuation by using the PA to make an appropriate announcement,
such as: “Evacuate, Evacuate”, and then pressing the EVAC COMMAND pushbutton.
Note: Preparing the cabin for an emergency does not always result in an evacuation. If the flight
crew decide that no evacuation is required, they may announce: “Passengers and crew
remain seated”.
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 5/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
Cabin crew must be assertive in order to ensure that passengers remain seated, and that
they follow all instructions.
THE CABIN EVACUATION PROCESS
The evacuation must begin immediately upon receiving the evacuation signal.
Positive, assertive action from the cabin crew will directly impact the rate and flow of passenger
movement to the exits and down the slides. The commands used by the cabin crew are an essential
part of the evacuation process.
Commands should be:
- Assertive
- Short
- Loud
- Clear
- Well-placed
- Positive.
The following are of some of the commands that are used during the evacuation of:
- ‘ Seatbelts off '
- ‘Leave everything’
- ‘Come this way’
- ‘Hurry, hurry’
- ‘Jump and slide’
- ‘Two by Ttwo’ (dual lane slide).
During the evacuation, the cabin crew must:
- Monitor the flow of the evacuation. Be aware of congestion in the cabin, and at the bottom of the
slide
- Be alert to situations developing during the evacuation, for example slide damage or a fire that
would make it impossible to use the exit
- Be prepared to re-direct passengers to other exits if necessary.
POST-EVACUATION
The majority of emergency evacuations happen at, or near, an airport. While the crewmembers are
evacuating the aircraft, the Airport Emergency Plan (AEP) is implemented. This plan consists of
deploying emergency services such as Airport Rescue Fire Fighting, ambulances and police to the
scene.
The crewmembers are responsible for the passengers until they are relieved by the rescue
services.
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 6/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
They must carry out the following actions to ensure passenger safety:
- Assist passengers away from the slides
- Direct the passengers away from fuel, fire and vehicles
- Assist in marshalling passengers to a safe area upwind, away from the aircraft
- Keep passengers together and complete a headcount
- Treat injured passengers, and give first aid, if necessary
- Enforce a NO SMOKING policy.
Crewmembers should also receive training and survival information according to regions,
such as:
- Desert areas
- Tropical areas
- Polar regions
- Mountainous areas.
FACTORS AFFECTING ADHERENCE TO THE OPERATIONAL STANDARDS
Analysis of in-service events reveals that the operational standards can be ineffective or
non-applicable due to the following reasons:
Incorrect application of the procedure:
• An inappropriate person is seated at an overwing exit.
Lack of training and familiarity with procedures:
• Cabin Crew lack sufficient assertiveness when ordering passengers to exit the aircraft
• Cabin crew do not use the manual inflation handle when the slide does not automatically inflate.
Lack of procedures:
• The Operator provides inadequate procedures and guidelines for planned emergencies
• The Operator does not give specific briefings to passengers seated at overwing exits.
Ineffective cabin crew communication with the passengers:
• Passengers do not adopt the brace position or the correct brace position when the cabin crew shout
the commands.
Ineffective cabin crew communication with the flight crew:
• The flight crew do not inform the Purser how much the time is available to prepare the cabin.
Therefore, the cabin crew are not aware of the time constraints and unable to prioritize the checklist
tasks
• The flight crew decide not to perform the evacuation. However, the cabin crew do not hear the order
to ‘remain seated’, and shout the evacuation commands
• The brace signal given by the flight crew, is too early, is not heard or comes too late. Therefore,
cabin crew and passengers are sitting upright upon impact.
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 7/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
It is impossible to prevent an unexpected event such as a ground evacuation. However, if an
evacuation is required, it is possible to take preventive steps that will help in achieving an efficient
evacuation:
• Effective communication and coordination between the flight and cabin crew is crucial when an
emergency event occurs
• Training should ensure that crewmembers are proficient in the use of emergency evacuation
procedures, commands and crowd control. Cabin crew should be trained on the location, function and
operation of each piece of emergency equipment onboard the aircraft
• Cabin crew should verify that the passengers seated at exit rows will be able to assist the cabin crew,
in the case of an emergency.
Individual briefings provided to passengers seated at exit rows have two benefits:
• Firstly, it provides passengers with the opportunity to ask the cabin crew questions
• Secondly, it enables the cabin crew to ensure that the passengers seated at the exit rows
understand the language in which the cabin crew will give their commands and are capable of
opening the exit in the case of an emergency
Attract passengers’ attention during the safety demonstration by making eye contact with as many
passengers as possible
Draw passengers’ attention to the safety card, and emphasize that a review of the safety card is
important, because it contains additional safety information.
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 8/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
UNPLANNED GROUND EVACUATION

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
The primary responsibility of the cabin crew during an evacuation is to direct passengers to evacuate
the aircraft using all of the available exits. The aim of an evacuation is to ensure that passengers and
crewmembers leave the aircraft as rapidly and as safely as possible.
Many factors contribute to the successful evacuation of the aircraft:
• The procedural knowledge of the cabin crew: This includes training, experience and behavior
• The environment inside and outside the aircraft (e.g., the presence of smoke, fire, the cabin lighting
and outside conditions)
• The passengers’ behavior, age, level of fitness and motivation
• The aircraft configuration and the layout of the cabin.
During an emergency, it is essential for the cabin crew to be able to apply their knowledge of
procedures and rapidly adapt to the situation.
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR AN UNPLANNED GROUND EVACUATION
THE SILENT REVIEW
The use of the Silent Review, Or the 30 s review , is excellent tool that the cabin crew can use to
prepare for the unexpected. The Silent Review helps the cabin crew focus their attention duties and
responsibilities and on safety.
The cabin crew should perform the Silent Review during the takeoff and landing phases of flight.
This review helps the cabin crew prepare themselves and enables them to react rapidly.
The Silent Review should contain all of the elements needed to review evacuation duties and
responsibilities. It may include, but is not limited to,
the following subjects:
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 9/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
• Brace for impact

• Commands
• Number of passengers in assigned area
including any special needs passengers
• Identifying Able Bodied Passengers (ABPs)
• How much of the cabin can be seen from
assigned station and assist space
• Initiating evacuation, if necessary (i.e. Identify
THE SILENT REVIEW
under what circumstances the cabin crew will
initiate an evacuation: catastrophic situation
involving the passengers, aircraft or crew)
• Operating exits
• Assessing outside conditions
• Self-protection
• Locating the manual inflation handle for the
slide/slideraft
The following is an example of a Silent Review that uses the first word of each subject to form a
word that is easy to remember. This example is “OLDABC”:
• Operation of exits
• Location of equipment
• Drill ( Brace for impact )
• Able-Bodied Passengers and persons wilth reduced mobility
• Brace Position
• Commands.
WHEN CAN THE CABIN CREW INITIATE AN EVACUATION?
When waiting for takeoff and landing, the cabin crew should be alert to any indication of a possible
emergency. Such indications may include fire, smoke, scraping metal, unusual noises, the force of
impact or an unusual aircraft attitude.
Many evacuations are unplanned, and occur without warning. In most cases, the decision to evacuate
is made by the flight crew.
Information received from the cabin crew played an important role in the flight crew’s decision to
evacuate.
In some cases, it may be necessary for the cabin crew to initiate an evacuation, when there is a
catastrophic situation, such as:
• Uncontrollable fire
• Dense smoke
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 10/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
• Severe structural damage

• Emergency landing on water
• No communication from the flight crew.
When the cabin crew decide to initiate an evacuation, they must evaluate the level of danger and the
consequences that a delay in decision-making may have. Smoke or fire that is out of control requires a
rapid decision, because of the danger it presents to the occupants of the aircraft, its ability to
incapacitate rapidly, impair judgment and restrict vision, therefore making the evacuation a process
difficult. In these cases, delaying the evacuation reduces the chances of survival.
If the cabin crew consider that an evacuation is necessary, they must attempt to contact the flight crew
in order to inform them of the situation.
An evacuation requires cabin crew coordination. Therefore, all cabin crew must be informed that a
life-threatening situation exists. There are many ways to inform cabin crewmembers, such as via:
• An evacuation alarm
• A Public Address
• An interphone
• A megaphone.
FACTORS INFLUENCING SUCCESSFUL AIRCRAFT EVACUATION
ASSERTIVE CABIN CREW
Assertive cabin crew are positive in their commands and behavior. They use short, clear
commands that will have an immediate impact on the rapidity of the cabin evacuation. Their body
language will clearly indicate to the passengers the actions to follow even if the passengers don’t
understand the language being spoken. The cabin crew must be assertive in their use of
commands, and, if necessary, be prepared to use some physical force to evacuate passengers
from the aircraft.
Commands should be:
- Assertive
- Short
- Loud
- Clear
- Well-paced
Body language is extremely important: The gestures of the cabin crew and tone of their voice must
reflect what they want to achieve, because passengers may not always understand the language
that the cabin crew are using.
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 11/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
BRACE COMMANDS
The brace command is the first and most important instruction that cabin crew must provide to
passengers in an unplanned emergency. The purpose of instructing passengers to take the brace
position is to reduce injuries during impact, in order to increase the chances of survival.
The brace position has two functions: Firstly, it reduces the extent of body movement, due to the
fact that passengers must lean or bend over their legs. Secondly, it protects passengers from hitting
their head on a hard surface.
When the cabin crew use the brace commands it is important that all of the passengers seated in
the cabin can hear and understand the commands. If the commands are not synchronized
(particularly on smaller aircraft, when the cabin crew are seated close together), the commands
may not be audible, and therefore may not be understood by the passengers. This can lead to
confusion among the passengers.
EXAMPLE Brace commands are: ‘Heads down’, ‘Stay down’, or ‘Heads down, feet back’.
ASSESSING OUTSIDE CONDITIONS

Before opening an exit, the cabin crew must check that the outside conditions are safe, and that the
slide deployment area is clear of:
• Fire
• Smoke
• Obstacles
• Debris.
The cabin crew should open the exit, only if it safe to do so.
The cabin crew must hold on to the frame assist handle.
The cabin crew can use commands such as ‘Stand back, stand back’ to hold passengers back
from the exit, during the exit opening and slide deployment sequence.
The cabin crew must visually check that the slide is deployed and fully inflated. When the cabin
crew confirm that the exit is usable, they can start the evacuation.
The cabin crew should only use the command ‘Come this way’ when a cabin crewmember
has confirmed that the exit is usable.
ABLE-BODIED PASSENGER (ABP) COMMANDS
The cabin crew should be trained to identify Able-Bodied Passengers (ABPs), in order to assist the
cabin crew with safety-related tasks during an evacuation. The cabin crew can easily identify ABPs
during the passenger boarding process.
ABPs can assist and protect the cabin crew during the door opening and slide inflation sequence,
by keeping passengers back from the exit, until the slide has inflated and conditions are safe.
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 12/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
USE OF THE ASSIST SPACE

Each aircraft has a dedicated assist space located on either side of the door. If possible use the
assist space facing the majority of the passengers. The cabin crew must firmly grasp the frame
assist handle and position themselves correctly in the assist space. This will:
- Prevent the cabin crewmember from being pushed out of the exit
- Prevent the cabin crewmember from interfering with evacuating passengers.
CROWD CONTROL COMMANDS
The cabin crew must have absolute control of the situation and provide assertive commands and
instructions to passengers. There are documented cases of evacuations during which the
passengers did not behave appropriately, and did not comply with the instructions provided by the
cabin crew.
It is important to note that during evacuations, especially when there is a possible life-threatening
situation, passengers may react in many different ways, such as by:
- Panicking (screaming, crying, hysteria)
- Freezing up (not able to react)
- Not being aware that danger exists
- Pushing
- Exiting with carry-on baggage.
CARRY-ON BAGGAGE
Many studies and investigation reports document the fact that in some cases, it was necessary for
the cabin crew to argue with passengers because passengers attempted to take their baggage with
them during emergencies (in one case, the evacuating passenger tried to exit with his guitar).
Cabin crew should instruct passengers to leave their baggage at the beginning of the evacuation,
otherwise carry-on baggage brought to the exits can cause a blockage and congestion at the exit
and in the aisles and reduce the efficiency of the evacuation.
EXAMPLE Possible commands are ‘Open seatbelts, leave everything’ , ‘Open seatbelts, no
baggage’
The cabin crew can also include this information in the passenger pre-flight safety briefing in order
to reinforce the message, i.e.: ‘If an emergency evacuation is necessary, leave all your
belongings behind’.
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 13/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
EXIT FLOW MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

It is essential that passengers evacuate the aircraft immediately. The cabin crew must monitor the
evacuation, and maintain an even flow of passengers from each exit to avoid congestion at the end
of the slides. The cabin crew must continually monitor the slide to ensure that it remains safe for
use.
During the evacuation, the cabin crew should ensure that they use appropriate types of commands.
For example, in a nose gear collapse, the forward doors and slides may be close to the ground.
Therefore, it may not be appropriate to command passengers to ‘jump and slide’. In the case of a
nose gear collapse the cabin crew should communicate with the flight crew for instructions on
evacuating.
The cabin crew should consider the type of commands they will use, according to:
- The type of exit: For example, an overwing ramp/slide
- Single-lane or dual-lane slide
- The attitude of the slide, after slide inflation
- Passengers’ behavior.
To ensure the flow of passenger evacuation, the cabin crew can use commands, such as:
- ‘Jump, slide and run away’
- 'Run and slide'
- 'Run, run' (This may be appropriate if the slide is very close to the ground)
- 'Two by two'(dual-lane slides)
- 'Keep moving”
- 'Hurry, hurry'
- 'Stand, Jump' or 'Stay on your feet' (This can be used for passengers who insist on sitting on
the door sill).
It may be necessary to use a certain amount of physical force in order to encourage some
passengers to leave the aircraft. There is an absolute need for cabin crew to assert their authority in
order to avoid delays in getting passengers down the slide and away from danger. It is important to
advise passengers to leave the area of the slide when they have evacuated in order to avoid
congestion and injury at the foot of the slide.
UNUSABLE EXITS
An exit may not be usable at the beginning of the evacuation or may become unusable during the
evacuation.
An exit may be unusable at the beginning of the evacuation, for one of the following
reasons:
- The exit is jammed, and will not open
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 14/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
- The slide does not deploy correctly, or the slide is damaged

- There are external hazards, such as fire, smoke, obstacles or debris.
The cabin crew responsible for the unusable exit must inform the passengers that the exit is
blocked, and redirect passengers to the nearest usable exit.
The cabin crewmember must guard the exit to prevent the exit from being used. If the exit
was initially jammed, the cabin crew could try the exit again to see if it will open.
When redirecting passengers, the cabin crew must know in which direction to send the passengers.
The cabin crew should listen for the nearest cabin crew giving passengers the command to ‘come
this way’ or ‘jump’, for confirmation that another exit is usable.
The cabin crew at the unusable exit must use positive commands and gestures to redirect
passengers to the nearest usable exit, with commands such as:
• 'Exit blocked'
• 'Go across'
• 'Go forward'
• 'Go back'
The cabin crew should encourage passengers to move rapidly and to hurry.
- The slide becomes damaged
- A fire develops in the area
- There are other external hazards.
Then the cabin crewmember at the unusable exit must perform the following actions:
- Stop the evacuation
- Block the exit and redirect passengers to the nearest usable exit
- Guard the exit.
DRIED-UP EXITS
A dried-up exit is a usable exit that passengers are no longer using to evacuate the aircraft. During
an evacuation, it is important to maximize the use of all of the usable exits, in order to reduce the
evacuation time. When an exit is no longer being used, and if the circumstances permit, the cabin
crewmembers at these exits must make every effort to attract passengers to these exits.
The reasons for a dried-up exit could be:
- The exit is at the rear of the aircraft and passengers tend to go for the door through which they
entered
- The exit may be in an area where there are few passengers, i.e. first class
The cabin crew at the dried-up exit must use positive commands and gestures to encourage the
passengers to their exit. It may be necessary to go into the cabin to attract the passengers.
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 15/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
Use commands such as:

- 'Come this way’'
- 'Hurry, hurry'
CABIN CONFIGURATION
The cabin configuration can have an impact on the rate and flow of the evacuation: e.g. the physical
layout of the cabin, the passenger seating density, the access to the exits, the width of the cross aisles
and the location of the monuments, etc. The cabin configuration also plays a major role when
identifying the areas/exits with the highest/least passenger seating density.
To enhance the situational awareness skills of the cabin crew, they should be familiar with the cabin
layout, and the areas where congestion may occur, due to:
• Passenger seating density
• The location of galleys, lavatories, cupboards, etc
• Restricted visibility
• Passengers arriving from different directions.
It may be necessary for the cabin crew to redirect passengers to other usable exits to avoid
congestion, and to maximize the use of all the usable exits, in order to evacuate the aircraft as rapidly
as possible. To achieve this, the cabin crew must be aware of what is happening in the cabin during the
evacuation.
EXIT BYPASS
If an exit becomes too congested, the cabin crew can re-direct passengers to another less
congested usable exit. This is referred to as exit bypass. The cabin crew can use exit bypass to
maintain an even flow of passengers to all of the usable exits and to maximize their use.
PRE-EVACUATION OF THE CABIN CREW
When the flow of passengers to the exit begins to slow down, the cabin crew should check the
cabin and call all remaining passengers to the exits.
When the flow of passengers has stopped, the cabin crew should check their assigned area for any
remaining passengers.
When the cabin crewmember’s assigned area is empty, or it is no longer safe to remain onboard the
aircraft, the cabin crew should evacuate through the first usable exit.
The nearest cabin crew should check the cockpit.
If an evacuation occurs away from an airfield, the cabin crew should take emergency equipment
from the aircraft, if the situation permits.
Whether evacuating off airport or at an airfield, it is extremely useful for cabin crew to have
a megaphone to manage passengers on the ground after the evacuation.
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 16/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
POST-EVACUATION RESPONSIBILITIES
When the cabin crew are outside the aircraft, they are responsible for the passengers until they are
relieved by the emergency services or by the authorities.
The cabin crew should perform the following actions to ensure passenger safety:
- Direct passengers upwind and away from the aircraft
- Assemble passengers and keep them together
- Direct passengers away from fuel, fire and vehicles
- Assist passengers and provide first aid, if necessary
- Enforce a NO SMOKING policy
- Make a passenger headcount, if possible.
PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFINGS
Safety briefings should focus the passengers’ attention on safety, and make passengers aware that it
is in their interest to pay attention.
When introducing a safety briefing, the cabin crew can increase passenger awareness by using
phrases such as ‘For your safety’ or ‘As your safety is important to us’.
The cabin crew should emphasize the importance of:
• Listening to or watching the safety briefing
• Being aware of the location and use of safety equipment: i.e. safety cards, exits and seatbelts
When cabin crew are required to perform a safety demonstration, they must speak slowly and clearly
on the PA and pause at key points during the announcement to give the cabin crew sufficient time to
demonstrate.
The cabin crew should be animated and try to make eye contact with as many passengers as possible
in order to attract the passengers attention to the safety briefing. This also applies to the cabin crew
when they provide audiovisual safety presentations. When using an audiovisual presentation, the
cabin crew should take their positions in the cabin and point to the exits.
FACTORS AFFECTING OPERATIONAL STANDARDS
Analysis of in-service events reveal that operational standards may not be effective or applicable in the
following situations:
A procedure is not applied correctly:
- Cabin crew are not at their designated exit during takeoff and landing or leave the exit unattended
Cabin crew training is not sufficient:
- The cabin crew do not have the skills to efficiently evacuate an aircraft
- The cabin crew lack training in crew communication and coordination skills
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 17/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
Operational procedures are not sufficient:

- The Operator does not permit the cabin crew to initiate an evacuation
- The Operator does not provide guidelines to the cabin crew that explain
- The Operator does not include the Silent Review in the standard operating procedures
The communication with passengers is not effective:
- The cabin crew do not provide assertive commands
- The cabin crew commands are negative or complicated
It is impossible to prevent a necessary unplanned evacuation. However, if an unplanned evacuation is
required, it is possible to take preventive steps that will help in achieving an efficient evacuation
The cabin crew should :
- Be regularly trained and demonstrate proficiency in the use of emergency procedures and
equipment
- Ensure that the communication and coordination between the flight and cabin crew is effective
when an emergency event occurs
- Attract passengers attention to safety briefings
- Remember the importance of assertive commands and gestures during an evacuation
- Be aware of their surroundings and implement an appropriate evacuation technique depending on
the exit, the number of passengers in their assigned area and the situation.
UAE A380 14-100-10 P 18/18

CCOM 13-Jan-15
Turbulence Threat Awareness
A380
TURBULENCE THREAT AWARENESS

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Turbulence is the leading cause of injury to passengers and cabin crew in non-fatal accidents.
Initiatives can be taken to reduce turbulence-related injuries, with little or no financial cost to the
operator.
The aim of this Operational Awareness is to:
Increase cabin crew awareness of the hazards of turbulence
Provide strategies to enable the cabin crew to effectively manage the cabin during turbulence
Help cabin crew to ensure safety in the cabin and reduce turbulence-related injuries.
Injuries to cabin crew during turbulence occur much more frequently than turbulence-related injuries to
passengers, because cabin crew are constantly working in the cabin.
IATA, Safety Trend Evaluation, Analysis and Data Exchange System (STEADES) performed a study of
turbulence-related injuries to cabin crew.
Analysis revealed that from January 1st 2004 to December 31st 2004 there were 232 reported cases of
turbulence-related injuries to cabin crew and that:
- 64 % of the injuries were due to cabin crew not being secured during turbulence
- 44 % of the injuries occurred in the galley
- 9 % of these incidents resulted in serious injury to cabin crew.
In the majority of these cases, cabin crew were lifted off the floor, or lost their balance, resulting in foot,
ankle and back/spinal injuries. Other cabin crew injuries were due to loose items in the cabin, such as
trolleys.
TURBULENCE DEFINITIONS
The levels of turbulence are defined and described as follows:
LIGHT TURBULENCE:
Light turbulence momentarily causes slight, erratic changes in the aircraft altitude or attitude:
• Passengers may feel a slight strain against seat belts
• Liquids are shaking but are not splashing out of cups
• Trolleys can be maneuvered with little difficulty.
MODERATE TURBULENCE:
Moderate turbulence, causes rapid bumps or jolts:
• Passengers feel definite strain against seat belts
UAE A380 14-100-20 P 1/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380
• Liquids splash out of cups

• Trolleys are difficult to maneuver − It is difficult to walk or stand in the cabin.
SEVERE TURBULENCE:
Severe turbulence causes large abrupt changes in the aircraft altitude and attitude:
• Passengers are forced violently against their seatbelts
• Items fall or lift off the floor
• Loose items are tossed about the cabin
• It is impossible to walk.
TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT
Refer to 14-80 Turbulence Management
Two-way communication between the cabin crew and the flight crew is necessary in order to
manage turbulence and prevent turbulence-related injuries. There are Standard Operating
Procedures (SOPs) that can be implemented to enable the flight crew and the cabin crew to
improve communication and effectively manage the aircraft and the cabin during turbulence.
For example, use common terminology when communicating the severity of turbulence:
• Light Turbulence
• Moderate Turbulence
• Severe Turbulence
Using common terminology ensures that the flight crew and the cabin crew share a common
understanding of the level of turbulence expected. This enables the cabin crew to perform the
appropriate actions and duties, to effectively manage the cabin during turbulence.
Note: On large aircraft, it is possible that the forward section of the aircraft will experience less
turbulence than the aft section of the aircraft. Therefore, the flight crew may not be aware of
the level of turbulence experienced in the aft section of the cabin.
It is important that the cabin crew inform the flight crew of turbulent conditions in the cabin
during the flight.
ANTICIPATED TURBULENCE
Refer to 14-80 Anticipated Turbulence Procedures
SUDDEN TURBULENCE
Refer to 14-80 Unanticipated Turbulence Procedures
UAE A380 14-100-20 P 2/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380
POST TURBULENCE
Refer to 14-80 Post Turbulence Duties
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN A TURBULENCE ENCOUNTER
Analysis of in-service events has revealed that the operational standards are not always effective or
applied.
For example:
- The cabin crew do not follow the flight crew instructions to be seated during turbulence
- The cabin crew do not have sufficient training to understand the hazards associated with turbulence
- Communication between the flight crew and the cabin crew is not effective: The cabin crew and the
flight crew do not use the same terminology, resulting in information that is not accurate which may
lead to errors in communication
- Ineffective communication with passengers: The cabin crew do not stress to passengers the
importance of complying with the seat belt sign during turbulence.
TURBULENCE-RELATED INJURIES - PREVENTION STRATEGIES
Operators can apply the following prevention strategies in order to help reduce the risk of
turbulence-related injuries:
• Develop Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs), that include:
- Communication between the flight crew, the cabin crew and passengers
- Specific procedures for anticipated and sudden turbulence encounters
- The duties of the cabin crew before, during and after a turbulence encounter.
• Emphasize the importance of the flight crew and cabin crew preflight briefing, that should include
the following subjects:
- Anticipated areas of turbulence during the flight
- The importance of keeping the flight crew informed of the conditions in the cabin.
• Use standard terminology (Light, Moderate, Severe) when referring to the level of a turbulence
encounter to ensure that all cabin crew and flight crew understand the meaning and the required
actions
• Encourage the use of seat belts. During the after takeoff passenger announcement, the cabin crew
should advise passengers to use their seat belts during the flight, and request that passengers
keep their seat belts fastened at all times when seated.
• Provide effective training for cabin crew on how to increase their personal safety and passenger
safety during turbulence
• Increase cabin crew awareness regarding the use and location of handrails throughout the cabin, or
equipment that cabin crew could use to hold on to in the event of turbulence
• Train cabin crew to effectively use the PA system and other types of communication with
passengers during turbulence to ensure safety.
UAE A380 14-100-20 P 3/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380
UAE A380 14-100-20 P 4/4

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Cabin Depressurization Awareness
A380
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION AWARENESS

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Aircraft have cabin air systems that control pressurization, airflow, air filtration and temperature. The
purpose of these systems is to provide a safe and comfortable cabin environment and to protect all
cabin occupants from the physiological risks associated with depressurization at high altitudes.
In the case of a depressurization, there is a risk that not enough oxygen will be supplied to the body.
This condition, hypoxia (lack of oxygen), is the greatest threat to both crewmembers and passengers.
The objectives of this guidance are therefore to:
- Review the different types of depressurization
- Enhance cabin and flight crew awareness of the importance of rapidly taking appropriate action to
successfully manage depressurization.
TYPES OF DEPRESSURIZATION
The risk of a pressurized cabin is the potential for cabin depressurization. This can occur due to a
pressurization system malfunction or damage to the aircraft that results in a break in the aircraft
structure or the loss of a window. This causes cabin air to escape outside the aircraft.
The loss of pressurization can be slow - in case of a small air leak - while a Rapid or Explosive
depressurization occurs suddenly, usually within a few seconds.
The consequences of depressurization and its impact on cabin occupants depends on a number of
factors including:
• The size of the cabin:
• The damage to the aircraft structure: The larger the opening, the faster the depressurization time
• The pressure differential: The greater the pressure differential between the cabin pressure and
the external environmental pressure, the more forceful the depressurization.
When cabin pressure decreases, the cabin occupants are no longer protected from the dangers of high
altitudes and there is an increased risk of hypoxia, depressurization, illness and hypothermia. It is,
therefore, important that cabin crew recognize the different types of depressurization and react
effectively to overcome the difficulties associated with a loss in cabin pressure.
RAPID OR EXPLOSIVE DEPRESSURIZATION
Rapid/Explosive depressurization results in a sudden loss in cabin pressure and can be
recognized by the following signs:
- A loud bang, thump or clap that is the result of the sudden contact between the internal and
external masses of air
- Cloud of fog or misting in the cabin that is due to the drop in temperature and the change of
humidity
UAE A380 14-100-30 P 1/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380
- Rush of air, as the air exits the cabin

- A decrease in temperature, as the cabin temperature equalizes with the outside air temperature
- The release of the cabin oxygen masks, when the cabin altitude reaches 14 000 feet.
If a break in the aircraft structure is the cause of the depressurization:
- Unsecured items in the immediate area are ejected from the aircraft
- Debris may fly around the cabin
- Loose items may become projectiles
- Dust particles may limit visibility.
In the case of rapid/explosive depressurization, there may be a lot of confusion due to the high
noise level and fog that makes it difficult to communicate in the cabin.
SLOW OR INSIDIOUS DEPRESSURIZATION
Slow/Insidious depressurization involves a very gradual decrease in cabin pressure. Slow
depressurization may be the result of a faulty door seal, a malfunction in the pressurization
system or a cracked window.
Slow depressurization may not always be obvious. The cabin crew may not notice the changes in
the cabin, until the oxygen masks drop down from the Passenger Service Units (PSUs). Therefore,
the cabin crew must be aware of signs that could indicate a slow depressurization.
One of the first physiological indications of a slow depressurization may be ear discomfort or
‘popping’, joint pain or stomach pain due to gas expansion.
The insidious nature of Hypoxia causes a subtle decrease in individual performance, followed by
incapacitation. Therefore the symptoms may not be identified until it is too late.
HYPOXIA
As mentioned, the greatest danger during depressurization is hypoxia. The effects of hypoxia cannot
be over emphasized. It is important for the cabin crew to realize that even mild hypoxia, though not
fatal, can have fatal results. This is because hypoxia can significantly reduce the ability of the cabin
crew to perform, and consequently lead to errors that may be fatal. It is therefore important that cabin
crew continuously observe and monitor each other and the passengers for signs and symptoms of
hypoxia.
The most common type of aviation hypoxia is "hypoxic hypoxia", that occurs due to low partial pressure
of oxygen in the arterial blood. If oxygen is not used immediately in hypoxia cases, it is possible
that occupants become incapacitated and lose consciousness in a very short time.
PHYSIOLOGICAL AND PSYCHOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF HYPOXIA
It is important that cabin crew can recognize the symptoms of hypoxia in themselves and in others.
During a depressurization some passengers may show signs of hypoxia and may not even attempt
to put their masks on.
UAE A380 14-100-30 P 2/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380
It is necessary to remember that each person may not react in the same way and that the
symptoms of hypoxia may manifest themselves differently in each individual.
- Stomach pain due to gas expansion

- Tingling sensation in the hands and feet
- Cyanosis (blue discoloration of the lips and fingernails)
- Increased rate of breathing
- Headache
INITIAL SIGNS OF HYPOXIA - Nausea
INCLUDE - Light-headedness
- Dizziness
- Sweating
- Irritability
- Euphoria
- Ear discomfort
- Impaired vision
- Impaired judgment
- Impaired motor skills (not able to coordinate body
THESE SYMPTOMS BECOME
movements)
MORE PRONOUNCED AS THE
- Drowsiness
LACK OF OXYGEN INCREASES
- Slurred speech
- Memory loss
- Difficulty to concentrate.
Hypoxia can cause a false sense of well-being. It is possible for a person to be hypoxic and not be
aware of their condition. Therefore, it is important that the cabin crew recognize the signs of
hypoxia and provide oxygen as soon as possible in order to prevent a loss of
consciousness.
The affected passenger or cabin crew will usually recover a few minutes after receiving oxygen.
However, they may not be aware of having lost consciousness.
TIME OF USEFUL CONSCIOUSNESS
The TUC refers to the time available to individuals to perform their tasks after they have been
deprived of oxygen, but are still aware of their environment and capable of controlling their actions.
It is important for the cabin crew to realize that the time of useful consciousness is different for each
individual, and depends on the:
- Altitude
- Duration at Altitude
- Temperature
- Physical Exertion
UAE A380 14-100-30 P 3/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380
- Emotional State
- Amount of activity.
The cabin crew must remember that in cases of continued physical activity, the time of useful
consciousness (Table 1) is significantly reduced.
The Time of Useful Consciousness
It is important to emphasize that this table is only a guideline, and provides average values that can
increase or decrease, depending on the skills needed to accomplish a task, on the individual’s
health, and on the amount of activity. For example, the time of useful consciousness for cabin crew
involved in moderate activity is significantly less compared to a passenger that is sitting quietly
The following are some other factors that can contribute to reducing the time of useful
consciousness:
- Fatigue: A person who is physically or mentally fatigued will have an increased risk of hypoxia
- Physical effort: During physical activity, there is an increased need for oxygen, an increased
risk of hypoxia and, as a result, a decrease in the amount of useful consciousness time
- Alcohol: Alcohol can significantly affect behavior and can increase the risk of hypoxia in
addition to aggravating some of the behavioral changes resulting from hypoxia.
UAE A380 14-100-30 P 4/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION
IMMEDIATE ACTIONS
In the case of depressurization the immediate use of oxygen is critical.
Therefore, the first actions to be performed by the cabin crew are:
• Immediately don the nearest oxygen mask
• Sit down fasten seat belt, or grasp a fixed object
• If the Flight Crew did not communicate with the cabin crew , the cabin crew should as
soon as possible, by the most appropriate means, contact the flight crew and confirm
that the flight crew are wearing their oxygen masks
Refer to 14-60 Cabin Depressurization
If the cabin crew cannot sit down or grasp a fixed object, they should wedge themselves between
passengers and ask passengers for assistance. For example, in one cabin depressurization event,
a cabin crew was saved from ejection out of the aircraft because a passenger was holding on to the
cabin crew's ankle.
The priority of the cabin crew is to consider their personal safety.
POST DEPRESSURIZATION
When advised by the flight crew that a safe altitude has been reached, the cabin crew should transfer
to the portable oxygen cylinders and consider their post depressurization oxygen needs.
When deciding to remove their oxygen masks, cabin crew must use good judgment and be alert to any
signs of hypoxia.
After cabin Depressurization, the cabin crew should:
- Check on the flight crew, and be prepared to assist in the case of pilot incapacitation
- Check passengers for any injuries
- Check the cabin for any damage
- Provide first-aid and oxygen, as necessary
- Report the cabin status to the flight crew.
OXYGEN SYSTEMS
When the cabin altitude reaches 14 000 ft , the oxygen masks stored above the passenger seats, in
the lavatories, galleys, and crew stations will deploy automatically. The oxygen mask system can also
be deployed manually by the flight crew.
A minimum of two oxygen masks are stowed in each Passenger Service Unit (PSU). Each mask has a
lanyard attached to a pull pin. Pulling one mask will remove the pin and activate the flow of oxygen to
all the masks in the unit
The type of oxygen is available on the aircraft:
UAE A380 14-100-30 P 5/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380
GASEOUS OXYGEN SYSTEM

The oxygen is provided by gaseous cylinders stowed in the cargo compartment. The activation of
the gaseous system depends on cabin altitude.
This system does not generate a burning odor, because no heat is generated.
FACTORS AFFECTING COMPLIANCE WITH OPERATIONAL STANDARDS
The analysis of in-service events has revealed that operating standards may not be effective or
applicable in the following situations:
- The cabin crew do not recognize the indications of a slow depressurization, and continue to perform
their tasks in the cabin as usual
- The cabin crew do not have sufficient information or training
- There is a lack of cabin crew procedures, applicable to a loss cabin pressure, oxygen mask
deployment and altitude of the aircraft. Sometimes the procedures do not sufficiently emphasize the
importance of immediately donning the nearest oxygen mask
- The cabin crew do not apply the procedures correctly. For example, oxygen masks are removed too
soon during depressurization causing incapacitation
UAE A380 14-100-30 P 6/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Cabin Smoke Awareness
A380
CABIN SMOKE AWARENESS

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
It is important that cabin crew are aware of indications of smoke, respond to them appropriately and
report them to the flight crew. All crewmembers must take any report of smoke in the cabin seriously.
They must immediately identify the source of smoke and take the appropriate action in order to
significantly minimize the risk of fire onboard the aircraft.
It is wise to treat a smoke occurrence as potential fire, until it has been proven otherwise.
The cabin crews must remember that the development of an odor, or smoke, takes some time before it
can be detected.
However only communicate ‘Smoke’ if that is what has been seen – do not mention ‘Fire’ if no flames
are visible.
Additional information on how to deal with in-flight fire events is provided in :
- Refer to 14-100-50 Managing In-Flight Fires
- Refer to 14-20 Awareness to Smoke and Fires in Hidden Areas
Analysis of in-service events involving smoke in the cabin has shown:
• Cases where the cabin crew detected the source of smoke easily
• Cases where the cabin crew detected the source of smoke with difficulty.
In most cases, the cabin crew reported that the source of smoke was easily identified.
The following are the areas where the cabin crewmembers can easily detect the source of
smoke:
• Galley equipment (ovens, coffeemakers) represented the most common source of smoke
• Cabin equipment (i.e. a seat screen or seat control malfunction)
• Lavatories.
The following are the areas where the cabin crewmembers can easily detect the source of
smoke:
• Galley equipment (ovens, coffeemakers) represented the most common source of smoke
• Cabin equipment (i.e. a seat screen or seat control malfunction)
• Lavatories.
Smoke coming from the above areas may be attributed to:
• The Auxiliary Power Unit (APU)
• Cabin recirculation fans
• Cargo compartments
• Crew Rest Compartments
UAE A380 14-100-40 P 1/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380
• Electrical wiring
• Engine Air Bleed.(e.g Bird ingestion, ....)
Sometimes human error is a contributing factor to some smoke occurrences, such as:
• Putting a flammable item in an oven (e.g. plastic wrapping left on food during the cooking cycle, …)
• Leaving an empty coffeemaker on a hot plate
• Placing a flammable item close to a source of heat (e.g. plastic cups next to a hot oven)
• Forgetting to complete a pre-flight check of the ovens for cleanliness (i.e. papers or food grease left
in the oven)
• Smoking in the lavatories.
If it is not possible for the cabin crew to immediately detect the source of smoke, the following
consequences may occur:
• Fire
• Emergency evacuation
• Hospitalization of cabin crew and/or passengers due to smoke inhalation
• Flight delays, In-flight turn back, diversions.
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR A SMOKE OCCURRENCE

When cabin crew identify and locate smoke, they must apply the appropriate procedures in order to
stop the smoke and prevent a fire.
Smoke can from different areas of the aircraft.
These areas can be identified as either “EASY” or “DIFFICULT” sources of smoke.
THE “EASY” SOURCES OF SMOKE
The cabin crew must take the following action:
- Shut off the electrical power by pulling the corresponding circuit breaker and shutting off the
power, if applicable.
- Inform the flight crew immediately.
- Closely monitor the situation.
- Prepare a fire extinguisher, Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) and fire gloves in case the
situation deteriorates.
THE “DIFFICULT” SOURCES OF SMOKE

The cabin crew may have limited or no access to areas such as sidewall and ceiling panels or air
conditioning, and may have no way of visually monitoring them.
If smoke comes from any of these areas, the cabin crew must take the following action:
- Inform the flight crew.
- Closely monitor the situation.
UAE A380 14-100-40 P 2/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380
- Search for hot spots using the back of the hand.

- Prepare a fire extinguisher, Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) and fire gloves in case the
situation deteriorates.
PROTECTION FROM SMOKE
Smoke can impair judgment and affect performance. When inhaled, even in small quantities, it can
be fatal depending on an individual’s level of tolerance.
Materials that are used in the cabin release toxic fumes when smoldering, such as:
- Carbon monoxide (CO)
- Hydrogen cyanide
- Hydrogen chloride and Acrolein.
The cabin crew must take the following action, in order to protect everyone on board from
the negative effects and consequences of smoke inhalation:
• Do not open the cockpit door, unless it is necessary. Take necessary action to prevent smoke
and fumes from contaminating the cockpit.
• Move passengers away from the smoke source area. If this is not possible, encourage the
passengers to bend forward and remain at a low level where the air is clearer.
• Use wet towels, a wet cloth, or a head rest cover to reduce some of the effects of smoke
inhalation. Instruct passengers to hold the wet towel/cloth over their nose and mouth and
breathe through it.
In addition, the cabin crew should use Protective Breathing Equipment (PBEs) to protect
themselves.
USE OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit breakers perform a dual function in aircraft electrical systems. Their primary function is to
provide protection from overheating. This can occur if there is an overload or a fault on a piece of
electrical equipment which may result in the total or partial deactivation of the electrical system.
The secondary function is to facilitate the isolation of specific circuits that do not have an individual
ON/OFF switch.
The likely reason for a circuit breaker to trip (release) is due to a fault in the electrical load, or in the
associated wiring. A circuit breaker will open, when a predetermined current is detected.
The cabin crew should pull the circuit breaker related to equipment if they see smoke coming from
this equipment.
Pulling a circuit breaker will cut off the power source to an electrical item. A circuit breaker that is
pulled or has tripped automatically, must never be re-engaged by the cabin crew.
If a circuit breaker trips, this may indicate a problem. In addition, this problem may be located in an
area that is not visible.
UAE A380 14-100-40 P 3/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380
Re-engaging a tripped circuit breaker may cause more electrical damage and increase the risk of
damage to other equipment.
The cabin crewmembers must never use circuit breakers as ON/OFF switches for
equipment.
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN THE DETECTION OF SMOKE
When smoke is detected in the cabin, the cabin crew must immediately try to identify the source.
Some areas are equipped with smoke detection devices which will alert both the flight crew and the
cabin crew when smoke is detected.
SMOKE DETECTORS
There is a smoke detector in all lavatories. If smoke enters into the measuring chamber of a smoke
detector, a visual and aural warning is transmitted to the cabin and cockpit.
VISUAL INDICATIONS IN THE CABIN
Visual indicators appear on the following systems in order to notify to the cabin crew that smoke is
detected:
- All Attendant Indication Panels (AIP)
- The applicable Area Call Panel (ACP)
- The associated lavatory wall light
- The Forward Attendant Panel (FAP).
- The Additional Attendant Panel (AAP)
AURAL INDICATIONS IN THE CABIN
The following aural indicators will simultaneously trigger, with the visual indicators:
- A repetitive chime from all the cabin loudspeakers
- A repetitive chime from all attendant station loudspeakers.
HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN THE DETECTION OF SMOKE (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS)
The cabin crew must also use their senses (Hearing, Touch, Smell, Vision) to detect smoke.
Sometimes, the cabin crew may not see any smoke, but may recognize such indications as:
- An abnormal noise in the cabin
- An abnormally warm surface
- An unusual odor.
Cabin crew and passengers may hear abnormal (snapping, crackling)

Sense Hearing noises and should report them.
These noises could be caused by electrical arcing of wiring.
UAE A380 14-100-40 P 4/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380
When trying to find the source of smoke, the cabin crew should use the
Sense of Touch back of their hands to check the temperature and/or heat of the various
panels and/or doors.
The different panels (Attendant Indication Panels, Area Call Panel…)
Sense of Vision located throughout the cabin will help the cabin crew to detect the presence
of smoke in the aircraft.
Sense of Smell The following abnormal odors may indicate the presence of smoke
Descriptions of
odors Primary cause (Most Reported listed First )
Electrical Equipment/IFE
Acrid Chemical
Engine Oil Leak
Electrical Equipment
Burning Galley Equipment
Bird Ingestion
Contaminated Bleed Cuts
Chemical
APU Ingestion
Smoke hood
Chlorine
Blocked Door Area Drain
Electrical Electrical Equipment
Dirty Socks APU or Engine Oil Leaks
Foul Lavatories
Fuel APU FCU/Fuel Line
Oil Engine or APU oil Leak
Skydrol Engine Hydraulic
Wiring
Sulphur Avionics Filter Water Contamination
Light Bulb
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS AFFECTING OPERATIONAL STANDARDS

The analysis of in-service events shows that operational standards may not be effective or may not be
applicable due to the following:
Ineffective detection of smoke:
- Odors or smoke may take some time to develop before it can be detected
- Recirculation of smoke through air conditioning.
Inadequate procedures:
- The procedures do not include all the factors involved in smoke detection
UAE A380 14-100-40 P 5/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
A380

- Cabin crew reset a tripped circuit breaker without informing the flight crew about the incident
Lack of training:
- The cabin crew are not proficient enough to accurately perform their respective duties in the event
of smoke
- The cabin crew are not proactive or hesitant to apply the required procedure
- The cabin crew do not know what procedure should be applied (e.g. The crewmember opens the
door of an oven that is emitting smoke, …).
Lack of Operator policy:
- The Operator does not have a policy regarding the use of circuit breakers.
Ineffective communication with flight crew:
- The cabin crew do not accurately communicate with the flight crew and inform them of a fire without
having seen flames. It may cause the flight crew to decide to perform an unnecessary emergency
landing
- Important information from the cabin crew and passengers may not always be taken into account by
the flight crew (odors, noises…).
It is important to remember that the source of smoke may quickly develop into an on-board fire if left
undetected. Therefore, both the operator and the cabin crew should take the following preventative
actions:
- Perform a complete pre-flight check including ovens and galleys to ensure that they are clean
(papers or any flammable items left in it)
- Frequently monitor the cabin, galleys (ovens) and lavatories (waste bins)
- The cabin crew should have good knowledge of the cabin configuration and of all smoke
procedures.
- Operators should provide training and documentation about all smoke-related procedures
- Operators should ensure that cabin crew are medically fit for the flight (e.g. cabin crew do not have
a cold that may affect their ability to detect the odor of smoke
- Finally, operators should have a policy about tripped circuit breakers which prevents cabin crew
from resetting tripped circuit breakers in any circumstance. The policy should also encourage cabin
crew to immediately report tripped circuit breakers to the flight crew. Tripped circuit breakers
indicate the existence of an abnormal electrical situation, and the possible existence of smoke
and/or fire.
UAE A380 14-100-40 P 6/6

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Managing In Flight Fires
A380
MANAGING IN-FLIGHT FIRES

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
An in-flight fire is probably the most serious in-flight emergency and must be brought under control as
soon as possible. Considering the crucial role that time plays in this type of emergency, it is imperative
that no time is lost when attempting to extinguish the fire.
STATISTICAL DATA – BACKGROUND INFORMATION
A study conducted by the Transportation Safety Board of Canada revealed that the average elapsed
time between the discovery of an in-flight fire and the actual landing of the aircraft is 17 minutes.
Any fire, no matter how small, may rapidly become out of control, if not dealt with quickly.
The first priority will always be TO PUT IT OUT.
BASIC FIRE CHEMISTRY
To enable cabin crew to effectively fight an in-flight fire, it is important for cabin crew to have a basic
knowledge of fire chemistry. This will help cabin crew to understand the importance of selecting the
correct fire extinguisher in a given fire situation.
The key to fire prevention is keeping fuel and ignition sources separate.
Combustion consists of three elements: Oxygen, heat and Fuel
Together, these elements create a chemical chain reaction and result in a fire.
The goal of firefighting is to eliminate at least one element from the fire, in order to extinguish it.
The Fire Triangle
UAE A380 14-100-50 P 1/6

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
FIRE CLASSIFICATION
Fires are classified into four types: those in solids, those in flammable liquids, those in electrical
equipment, and those in flammable metals. These are called, respectively, class A, B, C, and D
fires.
Refer to 14-20 Classes of Fire
Class A and C fires are the most commonly encountered fires onboard aircraft. It is important for the
cabin crew to select an appropriate fire extinguisher, according to the class of fire.
FIREFIGHTER EQUIPMENT
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Hand-held fire extinguishers discharge an extinguishing agent for 8 to 25 seconds, depending on
their type and capacity. Due to this short period, it is essential to select and use the appropriate fire
extinguisher immediately.
There are different types of fire extinguishers:
- Halon : is the generic name for the group of '' bromochlorodifluoromethane '' (BCF)
extinguishers that can be used for class A, B, and C fires
- Carbon dioxide (CO2) for class B and C fires
- Dry powder (DP) for class D fires
- Dry chemicals for class A, B, and C fires
- Water solution (H2O) for class A fires.
HOW TO USE A FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Note: This can also be easily remembered by using the word P A S S
- Pull the pin or turn the handle as appropriate. For some water extinguishers, the handle must be
turned in a clockwise direction, in order to pierce the carbon dioxide cartridge and to pressurize
the extinguisher
- Aim the fire extinguisher at the base of the fire. The best firefighting results are achieved by
attacking the base of the fire at the closest edge of the fire, and progressing toward the back. If
possible test the fire extinguisher before aiming it at the fire
- Squeeze the top handle or lever
- Sweep the fire extinguisher nozzle from side to side in a sweeping motion
Do not direct the initial extinguishing agent discharge at close range onto burning material. The high
speed of the stream of extinguishing agent may cause the extinguishing agent to splash and/or
scatter burning material. Stay at least five to eight feet away from the fire
Hand-held fire extinguishers should always be used in an upright position.
UAE A380 14-100-50 P 2/6

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
Note: There are only a limited number of fire extinguishers onboard the aircraft. Ensure
that an extinguisher has been fully discharged before using another.
Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) is designed to protect the cabin crew from smoke, toxic
fumes and gases. The cabin crew can still communicate amongst themselves, and with the flight
crew via the interphone.
CRASH AXE
A crash axe can be used to lever panels, to enable cabin crew to insert the nozzle of the fire
extinguisher behind a panel. The crash axe may also be used for moving burning material for
example, burnt wiring. The crash axe has an insulated handle and is resistant to high voltages. Only
use the hook end of the crash axe and use small tapping motions to make a hole in an area that is
difficult to access. The hook end can then be used to make the hole bigger as required.
FIRE GLOVES
Fire gloves are fire retardant. These gloves give protection to hands and arms against heat.
USE OF NON STANDARD EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Cabin crew need to be resourceful when fighting an in-flight fire. Be prepared to improvise by using
other equipment such as pots of coffee/tea, to fight a visible fire for example, a waste bin fire.
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR AN IN-FLIGHT FIRE
In the event of an in-flight fire, communication between the cabin crew and flight crew is essential. If
a fire is discovered in the cabin, the cabin crew must inform the flight crew immediately.
The firefighting effort requires coordination between the cabin crew. The duties are divided into
three main roles, the Firefighter, the Communicator and the Assistant Firefighter. All other cabin
crew play a supporting role.
After any fire or smoke occurrence, one cabin crewmember should be responsible for monitoring
the affected area for the remainder of the flight, and for regularly reporting to the Purser. Then the
Purser will report to the flight crew.
Refer to 14-20 Definition and Description of Fire fighting Roles
AWARENESS TO SMOKE AND FIRE HIDDEN
Refer to 14-20 Awareness to Smoke and Fires in Hidden Areas
AREA SPECIFIC FIRES
Refer to 14-20 Area Specific Fires
UAE A380 14-100-50 P 3/6

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
OVEN FIRES
Refer to 14-20 Oven Smoke / Fire Procedure Oven fires are a common occurrence onboard the
aircraft. Many oven fires are preventable.
Some of the contributing factors to oven fires have been items left in the oven such as paper towels,
etc.
When an oven fire occurs, the oven door should be kept closed. It is hazardous to open an oven
door when a fire is present, because this will introduce oxygen and may cause a flash fire.
WASTE BIN FIRE
If there is a fire in the waste bin, the fire extinguisher operates automatically. When a predetermined
temperature has been reached, the fusible plug at the end of the discharge tube melts, and enables
the extinguishing agent to flow into the waste bin.
Cabin crew should ensure that a preflight check of the pressure gauge is conducted, to ensure that
the waste bin fire extinguisher is functional.
Regular checks of the lavatories should be conducted in-flight as part of the cabin crew duties.
Refer to 14-20 Guidelines for In-flight Smoke and Fire Management
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN IN-FLIGHT FIRES MANAGEMENT
HUMAN FACTORS (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS)
Cabin crew should always be alert to any sight, odor or sound that may indicate the
presence of fire, including:
- Fumes or unusual odors
- Electrical malfunctions, for example, tripped circuit breakers
- Noises, such as popping, snapping or crackling that may indicate electrical arcing
- Hot spots on sidewalls, floors, and panels.
Another possible of sign of a fire onboard may be passengers or cabin crewmembers
suddenly developing:
- Eye irritation
- Sore throats
- Headaches.
This may indicate that fumes are present, before smoke or fire is visible. The cabin crew must
immediately investigate any reports from passengers that may indicate fire, in order to locate and
extinguish the fire in its early stages.
UAE A380 14-100-50 P 4/6

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
FACTORS AFFECTING OPERATIONAL STANDARDS

Analysis of in-service events has demonstrated that operational standards can be ineffective or not
applicable in the following situations
Ineffective detection of fire:
• Passenger tampers with lavatory smoke detector and drops cigarette end in the waste bin.
• A crewmember opens the lavatory doors without checking it for heat with the back of their hand,
and a flash fire occurs.
Lack of training:
- The cabin crew do not immediately react to the fire
- A cabin crewmember notices the fire, but loses time in locating the nearest fire extinguisher in
the cabin
- The cabin crew do not have adequate firefighting skills
- Cabin crew do not coordinate their firefighting efforts.
Lack of Operator procedures and policy:
- The Operator does not have adequate procedures and policies for cabin crew to effectively deal
with onboard fires.
Ineffective communication with the flight crew:
- The communicator underestimates the severity of the fire to the flight crew, the flight crew think
it’s a smoke incident.
Fire prevention should be practiced by cabin crew as part of their daily duties. Cabin crew should
maintain continuous vigilance and be alert to any indication of a fire.
Some of the fire prevention duties of the cabin crew can include:
1. Frequently monitoring of the lavatories during the flight
2. Performing a complete pre-flight check of the ovens and galleys to ensure that they are clean and
serviceable
3. Ensuring that all passengers and crew comply with the NO SMOKING policy.
UAE A380 14-100-50 P 5/6

CCOM 13-Jan-15
A380
UAE A380 14-100-50 P 6/6

CCOM 13-Jan-15
Ditching
A380
PLANNED DITCHING - UNPLANNED DITCHING

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Planned ditching in commercial aviation is a rare occurrence. During a planned ditching, the cabin
crew may have prior notice, and therefore, sufficient time to prepare the cabin, or to advise passengers
to put on their life vests.
The flight and cabin crew coordination will have a high impact on the outcome of the evacuation in
case of a planned ditching.
On the other hand there is no or little time for the cabin crew to prepare the passengers when an
unplanned ditching occurs. In the event of an unplanned ditching the attitude of the flight and cabin
crewmembers and their immediate actions are key factors for the success of the evacuation and
survival of passengers.
STATISTICAL DATA – BACKGROUND INFORMATION
PLANNED DITCHING
A report of the CAAP said that the statistical chances of surviving a ditching were high as it was
estimated from UK and USA data that 88 % of controlled ditching result in few injuries to flight crew
or passengers.
UNPLANNED DITCHING
Many inadvertent landings on water (referred to as an Unplanned Ditching) have been documented.
During an unplanned ditching, there is no time for the cabin crew to advise the passengers to don
life vests or adopt the brace position.
An NTSB study of Air Carrier water contact accidents indicates that these accidents are usually
unplanned, with no time to prepare. Most accidents occur during the takeoff and landing phases of
flight, and usually within proximity of the airport. Many water contact accidents occur during the
hours of darkness.
There is usually a lot of damage to the aircraft. In some cases, the cabin has flooded quickly, and
the aircraft has sunk within minutes.
PLANNED DITCHING BRIEFING
THE FLIGHT CREW/CABIN CREW BRIEFING
The Flight crew will deliver the following information to the Purser:
• Nature of the emergency (ditching)
• Time available (check watch)
• Special instructions
• Brace signal.
UAE A380 14-100-60 P 1/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Ditching
A380
In the event of a planned ditching the flight crew will not give the instruction to remain seated to the
Purser. As the aircraft may sink rapidly after impact everyone will have to evacuate immediately.
THE PURSER/CABIN CREW BRIEFING
The Purser will note the time in order to prepare the cabin according to the time available before the
aircraft ditching.
The Purser will transmit the information given by the flight crew and will instruct the
crewmember to:
• Take their position
• Be prepared for the emergency announcement and demonstration.
THE CABIN CREW/PASSENGER BRIEFING
The situation should be announced to passengers. The flight crew should make the announcement
but in case of workload in the cockpit it may be delegated to the Purser.
The Purser informs passengers about:
• The nature of the emergency
• The coming preparation of the cabin
• The attention and respect of passengers to cabin crewmembers instructions.
When the instructions and demonstrations are performed some conditions should be
respected:
• The cabin dividers should be open
• The cabin lighting should be turned to bright
• The entertainment system switched off.
The cabin crew should be ready to demonstrate the Emergency Briefing in their assigned area. The
crewmembers must have their own life vest before starting the briefing.
In order to deliver an effective briefing, the crewmembers should respect some conditions:
• Stay in the assigned area
• Ensure all passengers can see the demonstration
• Do not talk during the announcements
• Coordinate the demonstration with the announcement.
When reading the announcement, the Purser should speak slowly, distinctly and pause at key
points in order to give cabin crewmembers time to don their life vests, demonstrate, and check
passenger compliance.
UAE A380 14-100-60 P 2/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Ditching
A380
THE EMERGENCY CHECKLIST

The Life Vest
Crewmembers should simultaneously don their life vest and demonstrate to the
passengers, as follows:
• Remove the life vest from the pouch
• Unfold the life vest and hold it up for the passengers to see
• Don the life vest
• Secure straps
• Identify light (if applicable)
• Identify whistle (if applicable)
If an adult life vest is to be used for a child, adapt it accordingly. If available, distribute and
explain to passengers how to use other flotation equipment, such as baby survival cots.
When demonstrating the life vest use, the purser must insist that passengers must inflate their
life vests only when they are outside of the aircraft.
The reasons for not inflating a life vest until outside the airplane are that the life vest punctures
more easily, it makes movement more difficult and it can affect the efficiency of the brace
position.
The Brace Position
It is a protective position that passengers must adopt before the impact of the aircraft on ground
or water. It is one of the most important items in preparing for an emergency.
This position has a dual function. Firstly, it reduces the extent of body flailing, as passengers
must lean or bend over their legs. Secondly, it protects the head from hitting a surface.
Note: example of brace positions can be found in Refer to 14-100-10 Planned Ground
Evacuation
Emergency Exit
Cabin crew will point out the location of the nearest emergency exits and the floor proximity exit
path lighting.
Overwing exit
The cabin crew should demonstrate how to evacuate an overwing exit. As the overwing exits do
not have flotation aids, the cabin crew should indicate the location of the nearest slide/raft to
passengers that are seated at overwing exits.
Loose Items
Some items can become projectiles in the cabin during landing if they are not stowed:
UAE A380 14-100-60 P 3/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Ditching
A380
• Carry on baggage
• Shoes without laces or heeled shoes
• Handbags
• Laptops
• Briefcases.
Able Bodied Passengers (ABP)
The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) defines able-bodied passengers as
“passengers selected by crewmembers to assist in managing emergency situations if
and as required”.
The selection of Able Bodied Passengers may be based on their ability to understand
instructions, their physical ability, and their ability to stay calm.
They can be chosen from people such as:
• Deadheading crewmembers
• Military personnel
• Police
• Fire personnel
• Medical personnel
• People who respond to instruction.
The ABP should be reseated at exits. The reseating action should not separate families, as the
ABP will be more concerned about their family than about the aircraft evacuation.
The crewmembers should select three ABPs for each exit and they should be briefed as
follows:
• To replace the cabin crewmember in case the crewmember becomes incapacitated
• How to assess conditions outside the aircraft, for example, identify exit usable/unusable
(determined by water level)
• How to open the exit
• How to protect oneself from going overboard, and to remain in the assist space
• To manually inflate the slide /slideraft
• Commands to be used during evacuation,
• How to board the slide/ slideraft and distribute passengers evenly
• How to disconnect the slide/slideraft
• How to cut the mooring line to release the slide/slideraft from the aircraft.
If additional rafts are carried on board, the ABPs should be briefed on how to:
• Take the raft to the exit
• Use the mooring line to attach the raft to a fixed part of the aircraft, for example, a passenger
seat
UAE A380 14-100-60 P 4/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Ditching
A380
• Launch the slide/slideraft (the raft must be thrown outside the aircraft)
• Manually-inflate the slide/slideraft, in case it does not inflate.
• Board the slide/slideraft and distribute passengers evenly.
The role of the ABPs is also to help people that require assistance including:
Disabled, Elderly, Unaccompanied minors, People traveling alone with more than one child.
Securing the Cabin
When the passenger briefing has been completed, the final cabin secure is required, as
follows:
• Seat belts fastened
• Seat backs in the up-right position
• Tray tables closed and latched
• Armrests down
• Carry on baggage stowed and secure
• Overhead bins closed and latched
• Aisles clear of all obstructions
• Service items cleared
• Cabin dividers open.
The lavatories should be vacated and locked and the galley equipment should be
secured as follows:
• Close and lock all containers
• Ensure that carts are correctly stowed and secured
• Switch off all galley power and pull all galley circuit breakers.
When all the checklist items are complete, the Purser will notify the flight crew and ask for an
update of the situation, and the amount of time remaining.
The emergency lights should be switched on and the cabin lights switched off.
Cabin crewmembers should take their seats, adjust the harness, begin a silent review and be
prepared to brace when the command comes from the flight crew (approximately 1 minute
before ditching).
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR A PLANNED DITCHING
Refer to 14-40 Main Deck Planned Ditching
Refer to 14-40 Upper Deck Planned Ditching
POST DITCHING
During the survival and until rescued, passengers and crewmembers must keep their life vests on.
The crew will organize the survival in the raft as follows:
UAE A380 14-100-60 P 5/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Ditching
A380
- Erect the canopy to prevent wind-chill hypothermia from affecting wet bodies and to assist
rescue services to locate the sliderafts
- Administer first aid to injured passengers
- Ensure that the weight is evenly distributed to avoid the raft from capsizing
- Keep the raft clean and dry to prevent illness and infection
- Use the survival kit equipment to indicate location
THE RESCUE
When an aircraft or a ship has been sighted, all the signaling equipment available should be used to
attract attention. Occupants must stop signaling as the craft approaches.
The crewmembers and passengers must follow the instructions of the rescue personnel, and
remain in the raft until instructed.
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR AN UNPLANNED DITCHING
Refer to 14-40 Unplanned Ditching
In any unprepared emergency the reaction of the cabin crew will depend largely on their situational
awareness skill and their ability to identify an abnormal situation and react accordingly.
THE SILENT REVIEW
During Take-Off and landing phases near water or during a flight when life vest demonstration is
required, the use of the Silent Review will highlight the situational awareness of the cabin crew in
the case of an unexpected event.
They will review for example the following situations:
- The commands to be used
- The cabin environment
- How to initiate evacuation
- Operation of exits
- How to access outside conditions
- What equipment to take
- How to manage passengers in the water
- How to manage passengers in the raft.
THE IMPACT PHASE
The unplanned ditching is more likely to occur near airports built close to water than at sea or in
extended surfaces of water. So during the takeoff and landing phases the crewmembers will realize
rapidly if the situation is deteriorating and will shout the commands for the “Brace” position:
“Heads down”, “Hold your ankles”, “Stay down”.
UAE A380 14-100-60 P 6/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Ditching
A380
This position will reduce the amount of injury to the passengers and give them a chance of being
able to evacuate the aircraft. The commands should be given until the aircraft has come to a
complete stop.
THE EVACUATION PHASE
The cabin crew will assess outside conditions:
- If the aircraft is floating or sinking
- If the water level is present at exits
There can be 2 different situations and the cabin crew will have to react accordingly:
The cabin crew will shout the commands for the life vests:
− “Life vests under your seats”
− “Tear open the pouch”
− “Place over your heads”
SITUATION I − “Fasten straps tight around waist”
− “Inflate when leaving the aircraft”
• They will direct passengers to the usable exits or redirect them if the exits
become unusable
• Passengers will board the slideraft.
The following actions will be taken if the aircraft is sinking rapidly:
• The crewmembers will direct passengers out the nearest opening, exit
• Instruct passengers to support themselves, by holding anything that will
SITUATION II
keep them afloat (seat cushions for example)
• Find as much flotation equipment (live vests) as time permits and
distribute it to passengers • Leave the aircraft.
FACTORS AFFECTING THE OPERATIONAL STANDARDS

Analysis of events reveal that the operational standards can be ineffective or non applicable in the
following situations:
• Incorrect application of the procedure:
− The cabin crew disarm the slide before opening the door as they believe that the slide would float
upward and block the exit due to the closeness of the water
• Lack of training:
− The cabin crew have difficulty to put a capsized raft in the right position
• Inadequate airline policy:
− The aircraft is equipped with seat cushions as flotation aids instead of live vests, but the passenger
briefing cards describe the use of life vest and there is a placard on each seat stating ‘life vest under
your seat’
• The cabin crew do not know what procedure to apply to a particular situation:
UAE A380 14-100-60 P 7/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Ditching
A380
− The exit door is under the level of water

• Ineffective communication with flight crew:
− The flight crew notify the purser to prepare the cabin for ditching. The purser does not understand
that it will be the only warning and assumes the flight crew will give further instructions before the
aircraft hits the water.
It is impossible to prevent an unexpected event such as an unplanned ditching.
However the following prevention strategies should be developed for a planned ditching:
- The preflight safety demonstration will review the appropriate amendments (the use of life vest
and flotation-seat cushions) to the normal safety demonstration.
- The passengers will know the appropriate Brace Position and when and how to operate the
overwing exits in case of an emergency event by means of the safety instruction card
- Cabin crew should be regularly trained to on the procedures in the case of planned and
unplanned ditching
- Good communication between flight and cabin crew will enable the crewmembers to perform
an effective cabin preparation if an emergency event occurs
- Detailed documented procedures should be provided to cabin crew by the airline
SUMMARY OF KEY POINTS
- Airlines should encourage the cabin crew to use the Silent Review policy as a useful tool. It enables
the cabin crew to be prepared for an unexpected event
- In the event of an unplanned ditching the reactions of the crewmembers are important as they will
have a direct effect on the chances of survival
- Airlines should plan regular training courses and exercises for the cabin crew emphasizing the
ditching procedures and the use of the ditching equipment.
- Airlines should issue documented procedures for the briefing between the flight and cabin crew
according to time availability
- Airlines should make sure they provide the right documentation according to their aircraft
equipment
- Airlines should include in their procedures and training the recommendations issued by aviation
authorities
- Airlines should collect incidents that occur during operational flights to be analyzed in order to
improve the different procedures and training of their cabin crew.
UAE A380 14-100-60 P 8/8

CCOM 05-Jul-13
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
15-03 Recovery of Cabin Layout Equipment

15-03-70 Recovery of Trolley Lift Functions
Trolley Lift Recovery ............................................................................................................................ 1
15-03-80 Recovery of Stowages

Stowage Recovery............................................................................................................................... 1
15-03-90 Recovery of Galley Equipment

Recovery of the Sink Function............................................................................................................. 1
15-03-100 Recovery/Deactivation of Lavatory Functions

Recovery of the Washroom Functions................................................................................................. 1
Deactivation of Lavatory Functions...................................................................................................... 1
Recovery of other Lavatory Functions ................................................................................................. 1
Emergency Opening of Lavatory Doors............................................................................................... 1
15-04 Recovery of CIDS Functions

Recovery of CIDS Functions................................................................................................................ 1
15-06 Recovery of Cabin Systems

15-06-60 Recovery of Water / Waste Functions
Lavatory Failure Indications................................................................................................................. 1
15-08 Recovery of IFE Functions

15-08-20 Recovery of IFE Control Center
Recovery of IFE Control Center........................................................................................................... 1
UAE A380 15-TOC P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 15-TOC P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
RECOVERY OF CABIN LAYOUT EQUIPMENT
Recovery of Trolley Lift Functions
A380
TROLLEY LIFT RECOVERY

Applicable to: ALL
To access the trolley lift recovery refer to one of these Function Recovery Procedures:.
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - OPERATIVE Indicator Is OFF
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "OVERLOAD"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "STOP"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "FAULT"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "TRAILING" or "JAMMING"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "LOW TEMPERATURE" or
"OVERTEMPERATURE" or "VOLTAGE DROP"
To access the trolley lift error messages Refer to Trolley Lift Error Messages.
UAE A380 15-03-70 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Recovery of Trolley Lift Functions
A380
UAE A380 15-03-70 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
Recovery of Stowages
A380
STOWAGE RECOVERY
Applicable to: ALL
To access the unlocking of the overhead stowages please Refer to 03-80-30-10 Unlocking an
Overhead Bin.
UAE A380 15-03-80 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Recovery of Stowages
A380
UAE A380 15-03-80 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Recovery of Galley Equipment
A380
RECOVERY OF THE SINK FUNCTION

Applicable to: ALL
For unblocking the galley sink please Refer to 03-90-50-100 Galley Sink Unblocking.
UAE A380 15-03-90 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Apr-09
Recovery of Galley Equipment
A380
UAE A380 15-03-90 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Apr-09
Recovery/Deactivation of Lavatory Functions
A380
RECOVERY OF THE WASHROOM FUNCTIONS

Applicable to: ALL
To access the water faucet recovery please Refer to 03-100-50-10 Water Faucet Recovery or to stop
the water faucet pouring please Refer to 03-100-50-10 Water Faucet Pouring.
DEACTIVATION OF LAVATORY FUNCTIONS

Applicable to: ALL
For the deactivation of a lavatory:

- in case of a leakage pleaseRefer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a Lavatory (Leakage)
- in case of overflowing or blockage please Refer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a Lavatory
(Overflowing and/or Clogging)
- in case of noise please Refer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a Lavatory (Noise)
RECOVERY OF OTHER LAVATORY FUNCTIONS

Applicable to: ALL
To access the washbasin unblocking please Refer to 03-100-50-10 Washbasin unblocking.
EMERGENCY OPENING OF LAVATORY DOORS

Applicable to: ALL
For the emergency opening of the:

- single blade door please Refer to 03-100-50-40 Opening a Single Lavatory Door from the outside
when Locked
- bi-folding door please Refer to 03-100-50-40 Opening a Bi-Folding Lavatory Door when Locked
For removing the bi-folding door please Refer to 03-100-50-40 Removing a Bi-Folding Lavatory Door
UAE A380 15-03-100 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
Recovery/Deactivation of Lavatory Functions
A380
UAE A380 15-03-100 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
RECOVERY OF CIDS FUNCTIONS
A380

Applicable to: ALL
RECOVERY OF CIDS FUNCTIONS (RESET)

To access the CIDS reset procedure please Refer to 04-40 CIDS Reset After Cabin System Failure(s)
in Flight or on Ground with Passengers on Board.
RECOVERY OF A FROZEN FAP
To access the recovery procedure of a frozen FAP please Refer to 04-40 Recovering a Frozen FAP.
UAE A380 15-04 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
A380
UAE A380 15-04 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
RECOVERY OF CABIN SYSTEMS
Recovery of Water / Waste Functions
A380
LAVATORY FAILURE INDICATIONS

Applicable to: ALL
To enter the lavatory failure indications on the FAP please Refer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a
Lavatory (Waste Tank full)
UAE A380 15-06-60 P 1/2

CCOM 09-Jul-15
RECOVERY OF CABIN SYSTEMS
Recovery of Water / Waste Functions
A380
UAE A380 15-06-60 P 2/2

CCOM 09-Jul-15
RECOVERY OF IFE FUNCTIONS
Recovery of IFE Control Center
A380
RECOVERY OF IFE CONTROL CENTER

Applicable to: ALL
To access the IFE control center reset procedure please Refer to 08-20-80 How to Recover a Frozen
IFE Control Terminal.
UAE A380 15-08-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
RECOVERY OF IFE FUNCTIONS
Recovery of IFE Control Center
A380
UAE A380 15-08-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ANNOUNCEMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
16-10 Boarding
Boarding .............................................................................................................................................. 1
16-20 Door Closure to Takeoff

Door Closure and Slide Arming ........................................................................................................... 1
Safety Demonstration .......................................................................................................................... 1
Light Dimming (if required)................................................................................................................... 2
16-30 In-Flight to "Top of Descent"

Safety After Takeoff ............................................................................................................................. 1
Top of Descent..................................................................................................................................... 1
16-40 Approach
Approach Announcement .................................................................................................................... 1
Light Dimming For Approach (If required)............................................................................................ 1
16-50 After Landing

Arrival................................................................................................................................................... 1
Door Opening And Slide disArming ..................................................................................................... 1
16-60 Special Announcements

Aircraft De-Icing ................................................................................................................................... 1
Aircraft Disinfection.............................................................................................................................. 1
Fueling-Refueling ................................................................................................................................ 1
Turbulences ......................................................................................................................................... 2
UAE A380 16-TOC P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
ANNOUNCEMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 16-TOC P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
ANNOUNCEMENTS
BOARDING
A380
BOARDING
Applicable to: ALL
The boarding announcements can be made as appropriate (as one announcement or separately).
WELCOME ONBOARD AND CARRY-ON LUGGAGE
Good morning /afternoon /evening, (Pause)
Ladies and Gentlemen and welcome you onboard our Airbus A380 flight to...
In the interest of safety, please ensure that all your personal carry-on baggage is securely stored in
the overhead compartments or beneath the seat in front of you.
All aisles and exits must remain clear of any obstruction.
Should you need any assistance, please, do not hesitate to contact a cabin crewmember.
ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CELLULAR PHONES
Ladies and Gentlemen,
Cellular phones have to be switched off after the aircraft doors have been closed.
We would like to remind you that the use of any TVs, radios, or transmitting devices is not permitted
onboard at any time.
UAE A380 16-10 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ANNOUNCEMENTS
BOARDING
A380
UAE A380 16-10 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ANNOUNCEMENTS
DOOR CLOSURE TO TAKEOFF
A380
DOOR CLOSURE AND SLIDE ARMING

Applicable to: ALL
FOR PASSENGERS
Ladies and Gentlemen, (Pause)
Please turn off all cellular phones at this time.
Cellular phones must not be turned on until the aircraft has arrived at its destination, and the aircraft
doors have been opened.
We would like to remind you that the use of TVs, radios, or any transmitting devices are not
permitted onboard at anytime.
FOR CABIN CREW
Cabin crew at doors, please. (Pause).
Arm slides for departure and crosscheck, please. (Pause).
Thank you.
SAFETY DEMONSTRATION
Applicable to: ALL

In just a few moments, your cabin crewmembers will demonstrate the safety features of this Airbus
A380 aircraft.
We would like to request your attention as we present these safety procedures.
If you have any questions, please ask a cabin crewmember at the end of this demonstration.
Note: (During this introduction, each cabin crewmember must get their demo kit and go to his/her
briefing area).
Please take the safety instructions card out of the seat pocket to enable you to follow the safety
procedures.
If you are seated at an exit row, you may be required to assist the cabin crew in an emergency.
If you are unable or do not want to assist the crew, please advise the cabin crew at the end of the
announcements.
UAE A380 16-20 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ANNOUNCEMENTS
DOOR CLOSURE TO TAKEOFF
A380
Exits are located on both sides of the cabin, each exit is clearly marked with a EXIT sign.
The cabin crew will now point out the exits nearest your seats,
(The cabin crew should point out the nearest exits )
In some cases your nearest exits may be behind you,
(The cabin crew should point to exits at the rear of the cabin)
Please look around, and locate the exits nearest your seats.
Exit path lighting will guide you to the exits.
(The cabin crew should point out the location of the exit lighting)
If an evacuation is required, follow the instructions of the cabin crew.
Leave all you belongings behind and go to your nearest exit.
When you reach the ground, run away from the aircraft.
Please, fasten and release your seat belt as shown.

When seated, please keep your seat belts fastened at all times.
If you need to leave your seat during the flight, we remind you to fasten your seat belt when you return
to your seat.
If needed, oxygen masks will drop in front of you from the overhead panel.
Place the mask over your nose and mouth, and adjust the mask over your face, if necessary, by
tightening the straps.
Even if the bag does not inflate, oxygen is flowing into the mask.
For safety reasons, please secure your own mask before helping others.
In preparation for takeoff, please ensure that:

- Your seat back is in fully upright position
- The table in front of you is folded back correctly
- Your seat belt is securely fastened
- All armrests, headrests, footrests, video screens are in stored position.
In the event of an emergency evacuation, you must leave ALL PERSONAL BELONGINGS BEHIND.
Note: Emphasize the entire sentence “ALL PERSONAL BELONGINGS BEHIND”
LIGHT DIMMING (IF REQUIRED)

Applicable to: ALL
For all takeoff and landings during the hours of darkness, we will dim the cabin lights.
Should you wish to continue reading, please use the individual reading lights at your seat.
UAE A380 16-20 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ANNOUNCEMENTS
IN-FLIGHT TO "TOP OF DESCENT"
A380
SAFETY AFTER TAKEOFF

Applicable to: ALL

You may move around the cabin after the “seat belt” sign has been turned off. For your own safety, we
recommend that, when seated, you keep your seat belt fastened.
We remind you that smoking in the lavatories or tampering with the smoke detectors is strictly
forbidden.
Please, use caution when opening the overhead bins to prevent injury from items that may have
moved during the flight.
TOP OF DESCENT
Applicable to: ALL

We are now beginning our descent into....airport.
Please, return to your seat, and ensure that your carry-on baggage is correctly stored in the overhead
bins or under the seat in front of you.
All aisles, and exits must be clear of baggage.
UAE A380 16-30 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ANNOUNCEMENTS
IN-FLIGHT TO "TOP OF DESCENT"
A380
UAE A380 16-30 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ANNOUNCEMENTS
APPROACH
A380
APPROACH ANNOUNCEMENT
Applicable to: ALL

We will soon be arriving at ..... airport.
The captain has now turned on the “fastened seat belt” signs.
Please, return to your seat, and fastened your seat belts.
Please, ensure that:
- Your seat is in the fully upright position
- The table in front of you is folded back correctly
- Your seat belt is securely fastened
- All armrests, headrests, footrests, video screens are in stored position
- All portable electronic devices are turned off
- Cellular phones remain off, until we are parked at the gate and the aircraft doors have been
opened.
We would like to remind you that, in the event of an emergency, you must leave ALL PERSONAL
BELONGINGS ON THE AIRCRAFT.
Note: Emphasize the entire sentence “ALL PERSONAL BELONGINGS ON THE AIRCRAFT”
LIGHT DIMMING FOR APPROACH (IF REQUIRED)

Applicable to: ALL
For all takeoff and landings during the hours of darkness, we will dim the cabin lights.
Should you wish to continue reading, please use the individual reading lights at your seat.
UAE A380 16-40 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ANNOUNCEMENTS
APPROACH
A380
UAE A380 16-40 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ANNOUNCEMENTS
AFTER LANDING
A380
ARRIVAL
Applicable to: ALL

Welcome to...., the local time is ...., and the outside temperature is ....
We will be taxiing for a few minutes. Please, remain seated with your seat belt fastened, until the
aircraft has come to a complete stop and the Captain has turned off the “seat belt” signs.
Please, use caution when opening the overhead bins because items may have moved during the flight.
we remind you that smoking is forbidden, until you are in a designated smoking area inside the airport
terminal.
On behalf of Captain .... and the entire crew, we hope you have enjoyed your flight with us today, and
we wish you a pleasant stay in ....
DOOR OPENING AND SLIDE DISARMING

Applicable to: ALL
FOR PASSENGERS
Please turn off all cellular phones at this time.
Cellular phones must not be turned on until the aircraft has arrived at its destination, and the aircraft
doors have been opened.
We would like to remind you that the use of TVs, radios, or any transmitting devices are not
permitted onboard at anytime.
FOR CABIN CREW
Cabin crew at doors, please. (Pause).
Cabin crew disarm slides for arrival and crosscheck, please. (Pause)
Thank you.
UAE A380 16-50 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ANNOUNCEMENTS
AFTER LANDING
A380
UAE A380 16-50 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ANNOUNCEMENTS
SPECIAL ANNOUNCEMENTS
A380
AIRCRAFT DE-ICING
Applicable to: ALL
Before we leave the parking stand, the aircraft has to be de-iced. You will hear the noise of the fluid
flowing over the fuselage and may smell a chemical odor, which is normal.
AIRCRAFT DISINFECTION
Applicable to: ALL
To comply with the Government regulations of .... (Country), the cabin will be sprayed with insecticide.
The insecticide that will be using complies with international health standards and is not dangerous to
your health.
Please, remain seated during this process.
FUELING-REFUELING
Applicable to: ALL

We are about to refuel.
While refueling is in progress, for safety reasons, please:
- Unfasten your seat belts
- Smoking is prohibited
- Use of cigarette lighters and matches is prohibited
Please, remain seated.
Thank you.
UAE A380 16-60 P 1/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
ANNOUNCEMENTS
SPECIAL ANNOUNCEMENTS
A380
TURBULENCES
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL TURBULENCE
Due to some turbulence, the Captain has turned on the “fastened seat belt” sign. Please, return to
your seat and fastened your seat belt.
Please, remain seated in your seat with your seat belt securely fastened until the “fastened seat belt
“ sign has been turned off.
TURBULENCE MODERATE / SEVERE / INTERRUPTION TO SERVICE
This announcement may be from the Chief Purser, the Purser or the Captain, if the level of
turbulence is judged to be unsafe for the cabin crew to continue serving.
FOR CABIN CREW
Cabin crew, please, take your seats.
FOR PASSENGERS
We are experiencing turbulence.
Please, return to your seat and fasten your seat belt.
For safety reasons, the service will be suspended until the turbulence has stopped and it is safe
for cabin crew to move around the cabin. The service will resume a soon as possible.
Thank you for your cooperation and understanding.
UAE A380 16-60 P 2/2

CCOM 03-Apr-08
SECURITY SENSITIVE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
17-02 Cockpit
17-02-70 Flight Crew Rest Compartment
Keypad Lock and Dead Bolt Override from the Cabin Side................................................................. 1
17-03 Cabin Layout

17-03-120 Crew Rest Areas
Keypad Lock and Dead Bolt Override from the Cabin Side................................................................. 1
UAE A380 17-TOC P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 17-TOC P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
COCKPIT
KEYPAD LOCK AND DEAD BOLT OVERRIDE FROM THE CABIN SIDE
In case of a keypad lock failure or an emergency, the cabin crew can override the keypad lock and the
dead bolt from the cabin side.
To hide the override mechanism from the view of unauthorized persons, it is covered.
Keypad Lock Panel
UAE A380 17-02-70-30 P 1/4

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
HOW TO REMOVE THE COVER

1. Get a sharp and thin tool. L12
The tool can be e.g. a hairpin or a pencil.

2. Using this tool, push the small locking pin upwards
(right arrow in the figure).
3. Slightly lift the cover.
Note: Be careful when lifting the cover, because it is
connected to the keypad lock panel by a thin
wire rope.
HOW TO OVERRIDE THE DEAD BOLT

1. Slide the dead bolt override knob to the left side.
3. Open the entrance door by pulling at the door unlock
lever.
HOW TO OVERRIDE THE KEYPAD LOCK

1. Insert a thin tool into the hole of the keypad lock L12
override knob.
The tool can be e.g. a pen.
2. Use the tool to slide the keypad lock override knob to
the left side. Hold it in this position.
4. Open the entrance door by pulling the door unlock
lever.
UAE A380 17-02-70-30 P 2/4

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
HOW TO RESTORE THE COVER

Note: Before restoring the cover make sure that the
position of the dead bolt matches to the color of
the dead bold indicator (e.g. released => green
or locked => red).
1. Insert the small nose on the top side of the cover into
the notch in the keypad lock panel (upper arrow in the
figure).
2. Lower the cover until it is entirely on the keypad lock
panel (lower arrow in the figure).
3. If necessary, shift the cover slightly upwards to fix it.
UAE A380 17-02-70-30 P 3/4

CCOM 05-Jan-17
COCKPIT
UAE A380 17-02-70-30 P 4/4

CCOM 05-Jan-17
CABIN LAYOUT
Crew Rest Areas
KEYPAD LOCK AND DEAD BOLT OVERRIDE FROM THE CABIN SIDE
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
In case of a keypad lock failure or an emergency, the cabin crew can override the keypad lock and the
dead bolt from the cabin side.
To hide the override mechanism from the view of unauthorized persons, it is covered.
Keypad Lock Panel
UAE A380 17-03-120-30 P 1/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
Crew Rest Areas
HOW TO REMOVE THE COVER

1. Get a sharp and thin tool. L12
The tool can be e.g. a hairpin or a pencil.

2. Using this tool, push the small locking pin upwards
(right arrow in the figure).
3. Slightly lift the cover.
Note: Be careful when lifting the cover, because it is
connected to the keypad lock panel by a thin
wire rope.
HOW TO OVERRIDE THE DEAD BOLT

1. Slide the dead bolt override knob to the right side.
2. Turn the door unlock lever counter-clockwise.
lever.
HOW TO OVERRIDE THE KEYPAD LOCK

1. Insert a thin tool into the hole of the keypad lock L12
override knob.
The tool can be e.g. a pen.
2. Use the tool to slide the keypad lock override knob to
the right side. Hold it in this position.
3. Turn the door unlock lever counter-clockwise.
lever.
UAE A380 17-03-120-30 P 2/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
Crew Rest Areas
HOW TO RESTORE THE COVER

Note: Before restoring the cover make sure that the
position of the dead bolt matches to the color of
the dead bold indicator (e.g. released => green
or locked => red).
1. Insert the small nose on the top side of the cover into
the notch in the keypad lock panel (upper arrow in the
figure).
2. Lower the cover until it is entirely on the keypad lock
panel (lower arrow in the figure).
3. If necessary, shift the cover slightly upwards to fix it.
UAE A380 17-03-120-30 P 3/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CABIN LAYOUT
Crew Rest Areas
UAE A380 17-03-120-30 P 4/4

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CCB CABIN CREW BULLETIN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
18-10 Introduction
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1
18-CCB2 Main Deck Slide Arming Difficullties

Main Deck Slide Arming Difficulties ..................................................................................................... 1
18-CCB7 Operational Limitations of the Steam Ovens Installed in the UD

Galleys.
Operational Limitations of the BE Aerospace Steam Ovens Installed in the Upper Deck
Galleys ............................................................................................................................................. 1
18-CCB11 TROLLEY OPERATION IN UPPER DECK AFT GALLEY STAIRS

AREA AND FORWARD OR AFT STAIRS AREAS
TROLLEY OPERATION IN UPPER DECK AFT GALLEY STAIRS AREA AND FORWARD
OR AFT STAIRS AREAS................................................................................................................. 1
18-CCB12 Erroneous indication on the FAP DOORS/SLIDES Pages

Erroneous indication on the FAP DOORS/SLIDES Pages .................................................................. 1
UAE A380 18-TOC P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A380
UAE A380 18-TOC P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
INTRODUCTION
A380
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
DEFINITION
A Cabin Crew Bulletin (CCB) is issued to rapidly inform operators of any deviations from initial design
objectives that have a significant impact on cabin operations. A CCB provides the operators with
technical information and temporary operational procedures that address these deviations.
TYPES OF CCB
CCBs can either be red or white, depending on their level of priority.
Red CCBs : Are issued to indicate that non-compliance with the recommended
procedures may have a significant impact on the safe operation of the
cabin.
White CCBs : Are issued to indicate that non-compliance with the recommended
procedures may have a significant impact on the operation of the cabin.
Airbus strongly recommends that all Operators rapidly apply the CCB corrective actions as soon as
they become available, particularly for red CCBs.
The information in the CCB is recommended by Airbus, but may not be approved by Airworthiness
Authorities. If the procedures contained in the CCB differs from the procedures in the AFM, the
approved AFM remains the reference.
CCB CONTENT AND MANAGEMENT
A CCB:
- Is a part of the Cabin Crew Operating Manual (CCOM)
- Is temporary and usually focuses on one operational subject only
- Remains applicable until the appropriate corrective actions are completed
- Is filed in numerical order.
The content of each CCB includes:
- The reason for issue
- Technical explanations of the deviation from the initial design objectives
- The CCB operational procedure(s) to be applied
- The corrective actions that cancel the CCB, if available when the CCB is issued.
DISTRIBUTION H72
Airbus provides all affected operators with CCBs . It is operators responsibility to ensure the
distribution of the CCBs to all their applicable cabin crews..
UAE A380 18-10 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
INTRODUCTION
A380
UAE A380 18-10 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CCB2 – MAIN DECK SLIDE ARMING DIFFICULLTIES
A380
MAIN DECK SLIDE ARMING DIFFICULTIES
CCB2 Issue 1.0

MAIN DECK SLIDE ARMING DIFFICULTIES - APPROVAL
Applicable to: ALL
APPROVAL REFERENCE
APPROVED BY: Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
Approval date: 10-Sep-2007
Approval reference: none
Approved by: -Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
This CCB covers a significant operational issue. Non-compliance with this CCB may have a significant
impact on the operations of the cabin.
Therefore Operators must distribute this CCB, or the information contained in this CCB, to all cabin
crews without delay.
It is strongly recommended that all Operators accelerate the incorporation of all corrective Service
Bulletins as soon as they are available.
Reason for issue: This CCB is issued to provide A380 cabin crews with operational
recommendations applicable to the door arming procedure.
Applicable to: A380-800 aircraft
Cancelled by: This item should be corrected in the near future via an improved girt bar
for the slide (future MOD 69998).
Note: The interchangeability code, given in the Illustrated Part Catalog (IPC), indicates the conditions for interchangeability of
equipment. After installation of corrective modification(s)/SB(s), if an Operator reinstalls any equipment affected by this CCB,
it is the Operator's responsibility to ensure that the recommendations given in this CCB are applied again for the applicable
aircraft.
Cabin Crew Bulletins are issued by Airbus as the need arises to rapidly inform operators of any
deviations from initial design objectives that have a significant operational impact related to cabin.
They are distributed to all CCOM holders.
UAE A380 18-CCB2 P 1/2

CCOM 08-Jan-09
CCB2 – MAIN DECK SLIDE ARMING DIFFICULLTIES
A380
Information in this bulletin is recommended by Airbus but may not be approved by Airworthiness
Authorities. If the procedures contained in this CCB differ from the procedures in the AFM, the AFM
remains the reference.
EXPLANATION
On main deck doors that have door-mounted slides, an amber SLIDE DISARMED indication may be
triggered on the FAP, even if the related door-arming lever is in the armed position. In this case, the
Chief Purser must call the cabin crew that is responsible for the affected door via the interphone, in
order to request that the cabin crew disarm, and then re-arm the door. It is possible to apply this
procedure on ground or during flight, when the SLIDE DISARMED comes on in amber.
PROCEDURE
CHIEF PURS
CABIN CREW AT AFFECTED DOOR, DISARMED AND RE-ARM DOOR .......................ORDER
The Chief Purser calls the cabin crew located at the affected door via the interphone.
CC responsible for the affected door
SLIDE ARMING LEVER PLASTIC COVER............................................................................. LIFT
SLIDE ARMING LEVER............................................................ MOVE TO DISARMED POSITION
SLIDE ARMING LEVER....................................................MOVE FIRMLY TO ARMED POSITION
SLIDE DISARMED AND RE-ARMED ............................................. REPORT TO CHIEF PURSER
CHIEF PURS
DOORS/SLIDES FAP PAGE .............................................................................................SELECT
AFFECTED DOOR CLOSED AND ARMED ....................................................................... CHECK
Note: It is recommended that the Chief Purser monitor the main deck door / slides FAP page
during the flight, and before landing.
UAE A380 18-CCB2 P 2/2

CCOM 08-Jan-09
CCB7 – OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS OF THE STEAM OVENS
INSTALLED IN THE UD GALLEYS.
A380
OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS OF THE BE AEROSPACE STEAM OVENS INSTALLED IN THE

UPPER DECK GALLEYS
CCB7 Issue 1.0

OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS OF THE BE AEROSPACE STEAM OVENS INSTALLED IN THE UPPER
DECK GALLEYS ON UAE A380-800-APPRO
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174,
0186-0188, 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
APPROVAL REFERENCE
Approval date: 25-Jul-2007
Approval reference: Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
Reason for issue: This CCB is issued to provide UAE A380 cabin crews with the
operational limitations and, recommendations for the use of the BE
Aerospace steam ovens installed in the Upper Deck (UD) galleys.
Applicable to: UAE01 A380-800 aircrafts fitted with BE Aerospace steams ovens (P/N
4329002-00-6823) in the upper deck galleys.
Cancelled by: This item will be corrected by improved air ventilation in the oven
compartment and, by an improvement in the oven design.
aircraft.
UAE A380 18-CCB7 P 1/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CCB7 – OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS OF THE STEAM OVENS
INSTALLED IN THE UD GALLEYS.
A380
EXPLANATION:
The steam ovens installed in the upper deck (UD) galleys have an operational limitation between two
cooking cycles.
An interval of a minimum time of 75 min(1 h15 min) is required between two cooking cycles,
irrespective of the duration or temperature of the selected cooking cycle.
● When a cooking cycle is completed:
- Select the FAN function on the Oven Control Module (OCM) menu
- Press the START/PAUSE pb-sw on the Oven Control Module (OCM)
This will launch a pre-defined 30 min FAN cycle
- Half open the oven door by attaching the mechanical arms to the hook
The door must remain in this position during the fan cycles
- Perform the fan cycle three (3) times
If needed, the third fan cycle can be stopped after 15 min by pressing the START/PAUSE pb-sw
When the third fan cycle is completed, a cooking cycle can be performed.
UAE A380 18-CCB7 P 2/2

CCOM 10-Apr-17
CCB11 – TROLLEY OPERATION IN UPPER DECK AFT GALLEY
STAIRS AREA AND FORWARD OR AFT STAIRS AREAS
A380
TROLLEY OPERATION IN UPPER DECK AFT GALLEY STAIRS AREA AND FORWARD OR AFT
STAIRS AREAS
CCB11 Issue 2.0

TROLLEY OPERATION IN UPPER DECK AFT GALLEY STAIRS AREA AND FORWARD OR AFT
STAIRS AREAS
Applicable to: ALL
APPROVAL REFERENCE
APPROVED BY:
Approval date: 29-Jul-2010
Approval reference: -
Reason for issue: Reason for issue :

This CCB is issued to provide A380 Cabin Crew with the precautions to
be taken when a trolley is moved out of its compartment and left
unattended in the upper deck area close to the cabin forward or aft stairs.
Applicable to: A380-800 aircraft fitted with standard aft staircase strap-system or
optional staircase rigid barrier(Mod DD).
Cancelled by: This item should be corrected in the near future via a permanent advice
regarding trolley or trolley lift operation on Upper Deck aft galley stairs
area and forward or aft stairs areas still to be defined by Airbus
aircraft.
UAE A380 18-CCB11 P 1/2

CCOM 02-Oct-10
CCB11 – TROLLEY OPERATION IN UPPER DECK AFT GALLEY
STAIRS AREA AND FORWARD OR AFT STAIRS AREAS
A380
EXPLANATION
Several cases occurred where, in flight, a trolley that was left unattended and unsecured rolled
towards and fell down the rear stairs.
PROCEDURE
The Cabin Crew must ensure that the trolley brake is engaged whenever the trolley is stopped
(refer to CCOM -chapter 03-90-30-20-Trolley Operation).
Additionally, in case the aircraft is fitted with a staircase strap system or rigid barrier, the Cabin
Crew must ensure that the concerned device is properly extended and secured by the foreseen
means before any trolley or trolley lift operation (refer to CCOM-chapter 03-60-40-How to install
the Staircase Barrier).
UAE A380 18-CCB11 P 2/2

CCOM 02-Oct-10
ERRONEOUS INDICATION ON THE FAP DOORS/SLIDES
PAGES
A380
ERRONEOUS INDICATION ON THE FAP DOORS/SLIDES PAGES
CCB12 Issue 2.0

ERRONEOUS FAP DOOR INDICATION
Applicable to: ALL
APPROVAL REFERENCE
APPROVED BY:
Approval date: 03-Jun-2013
Approval reference: Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
Approved by: Dominique Deschamps-Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
Reason for issue: Reason for issue :

This CCB is issued to provide A380 Cabin Crew with the precautions to
be taken when the FAP door page does not reflect the current
DOOR/SLIDE status and the correct indication.
Applicable to: A380-800 aircraft fitted with CIDS software from version 5.0.3.
Cancelled by: This item should be corrected via a future version of CIDS software.
aircraft.
UAE A380 18-CCB12 P 1/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13
ERRONEOUS INDICATION ON THE FAP DOORS/SLIDES
PAGES
A380
EXPLANATION
In some cases, the DOORS/SLIDES page of the FAP may not correctly reflect the most recent
status of the doors and slides.
Therefore, the FAP may erroneously display the door/slide indication symbols:
- Red (doors unlocked), even if the doors are correctly closed and locked.
- Amber (doors locked and slide disarmed), even if the doors are locked and the slides are
armed.
However, the ECAM indication is always correct.
PROCEDURE
● If the Chief Purser suspects a discrepancy between the real status of the DOORS and
SLIDES and the information on the FAP DOORS/SLIDES page, the chief purser must
inform the flight crew to ensure correct coordination of any required actions.
CHIEF PURSER .............................................................COORDINATE WITH FLIGHT CREW
Note: The flight crew can reset the CIDS to display the correct information on the FAP
DOORS/SLIDES page.
UAE A380 18-CCB12 P 2/2

CCOM 05-Jul-13

Uae A3l Ccom

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Uae A3l Ccom

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A380

CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL

REFERENCE: UAE A380 CCOM ISSUE DATE: 10-Apr-17

PLP Preliminary Pages

001 Approbation - Airworthiness Related Procedures

UAE A380 PLP-TOC P 1/8

02-30 Cockpit Seats

04 Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS)

UAE A380 PLP-TOC P 2/8

05 Cabin Communication Systems

07 Cabin Oxygen System

UAE A380 PLP-TOC P 3/8

08 In-Flight Entertainment (IFE)

09 Doors and Slides

10 Evacuation (EVAC) and Alert (ECAS) Systems

11 Emergency and Medical Equipment

UAE A380 PLP-TOC P 4/8

12-20 Cabin Emergency Equipment

13 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)

14 Abnormal / Emergency Procedures

UAE A380 PLP-TOC P 5/8

15 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP)

17 Security Sensitive Information

18 CCB Cabin Crew Bulletin

UAE A380 PLP-TOC P 6/8

18-CCB11 TROLLEY OPERATION IN UPPER DECK AFT GALLEY STAIRS AREA

UAE A380 PLP-TOC P 7/8

Intentionally left blank

UAE A380 PLP-TOC P 8/8

Section Title Ref Reason

UAE A380 PLP-SOH P 1/4

Section Title Ref Reason

UAE A380 PLP-SOH P 2/4

Section Title Ref Reason

UAE A380 PLP-SOH P 3/4

Intentionally left blank

UAE A380 PLP-SOH P 4/4

Issue Date: 10-Apr-17

No transmittal letter comment

UAE A380 PLP-TL P 1/2

Intentionally left blank

UAE A380 PLP-TL P 2/2

Localization Section Title Rev. Date

UAE A380 PLP-LESS P 1/12

Localization Section Title Rev. Date

UAE A380 PLP-LESS P 2/12

Localization Section Title Rev. Date

UAE A380 PLP-LESS P 3/12

Localization Section Title Rev. Date

UAE A380 PLP-LESS P 4/12

Localization Section Title Rev. Date

UAE A380 PLP-LESS P 5/12

Localization Section Title Rev. Date

UAE A380 PLP-LESS P 6/12

Localization Section Title Rev. Date

UAE A380 PLP-LESS P 7/12

Localization Section Title Rev. Date

UAE A380 PLP-LESS P 8/12

Localization Section Title Rev. Date

UAE A380 PLP-LESS P 9/12

Localization Section Title Rev. Date

UAE A380 PLP-LESS P 10/12

Localization Section Title Rev. Date